The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutFamily First Community Center Bid Set Project Manual Family First Community Center 16200 116th Avenue SE Renton, Washington OWNER: City of Renton 1055 S. Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 ARCHITECT: Baylis Architects, Inc. 10801 Main St., Suite 110 Bellevue, WA 98004 (425) 454-0566 October 20, 2021 16-0996 BID SET PROJECT MANUAL City Project Contract Number: CAG 21-180 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 1 DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids 00 11 14 Synopsis of Bidding Information 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 42 10 Bid Submittal Checklist 00 52 00 Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (Sample) 00 52 00 Standard Form of Agreement - A101-2017 (7-26-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 72 00 General Conditions AIA Document A201 – 2017 00 80 00 Forms Form A - Bid Form Form B – Proposal Bid Bond Form C – List of Subcontractors, Part One (Submissions of HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical Subcontractors) Form D – List of Subcontractors, Part Two (Submission of Structural Steel and Rebar Subcontractors) Form E - Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation Form F – Qualifications of Project Key Personnel Form G – Contract Bond Form DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 01 11 50 Delegated Design and Deferred Submittals 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures 01 21 00 Allowances 01 23 00 Alternates 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 35 15 LEED Certification Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 43 39 Mockups 01 45 54 Building Envelope Air Barrier Testing 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 21 Indoor Air Quality Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 60 01 Substitution Request Form 01 73 00 Execution 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS NOT USED DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 13 Concrete Floor and Architectural CIP Finishing 03 35 36 Polished Concrete Finishing 03 54 00 Cast Underlayment Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 2 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 05 13 Shop - Applied Coatings for Metal 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 18 00 Glued-Laminated Construction 06 20 20 Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 13 00 Sheet Waterproofing 07 14 00 Fluid Applied Waterproofing 07 19 00 Water Repellents 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 26 16 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier 07 27 27 Self-Adhered Sheet Air and Water Barriers 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 07 54 16 Ethylene Interpolymer (KEE) Roofing 07 54 19 Polyvinyl-Chloride Roofing 07 55 63 Vegetated Roof Covering 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 90 05 Joint Sealers 07 92 13 Exterior Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 15 73 Interior Sliding Doors 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 08 52 01 Fiberglass-Framed Storefronts, Entries and Windows 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 83 00 Mirrors 08 91 00 Louvers DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 05 10 Flooring Moisture Measurement and Mitigation 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 31 00 Tiling 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 64 00 Wood Flooring 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 83 11 Acoustical Components Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 3 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 96 53 Elastomeric Coating DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 10 26 00 Wall and Corner Protection 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 00 Lockers 10 80 13 Miscellaneous Specialties DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 01 14 Fall Arrest & Fall Restraint System 11 31 00 Appliances 11 66 23 Gymnasium Equipment 11 70 00 Healthcare Equipment DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 20 00 Window Treatments 12 36 00 Countertops DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 Fire Suppression General Conditions 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 16 Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing General Conditions 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing 22 11 00 Facility Water Distribution 22 11 16 PEX Domestic Water Piping 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage 22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage 22 23 00 Natural Gas Systems 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 60 00 Medical Gas Equipment 22 69 00 Medical Gas Piping System Certification Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 4 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 HVAC General Conditions 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 72 00 Energy Recovery Units 23 74 00 Outdoor Air Handling Units 23 81 26 Split-System Air Conditioners & Heat Pumps 23 81 43 Air-Cooled Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pumps DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Electrical General Conditions 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Electrical Systems Studies 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 24 13 Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 13 Electricity Metering 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses and Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 51 19 Interior and Exterior Lighting DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 Low Voltage General Conditions DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 46 00 Fire Alarm General Conditions DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 20 00 Earth Moving 31 25 00 Temporary Erosion Control Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 5 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 32 30 00 Site Improvements 32 80 00 Irrigation 32 90 00 Planting DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 10 00 Water Distribution System 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewer System 33 40 00 Storm Drainage System APPENDICES APPENDIX A Construction Mitigation APPENDIX B Interior HVAC Noise Control Report APPENDIX C Healthpoint Cutsheets APPENDIX D Exhibit A and Exhibit B APPENDIX E Geotechnical Report APPENDIX F School District Requirements APPENDIX G RSD Student Calendar 2021-2022 END OF SECTION BID SET OCTOBER 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13 - Page 1 of 1 SECTION 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS The City of Renton invites interested and qualified contractors to submit sealed bids for the following project: PROJECT TITLE: FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER OPTIONAL PRE-BID CONFERENCE: 2:00 PM on November 2, 2021 via ZOOM (Attendance at the pre-bid conference is highly encouraged but is not mandatory) Pre-Bid Conference Zoom Information: – Click or use this link to join the FFCC Pre-Bid Zoom Conference: https://us02web.zoom.us/j/89767995437?pwd=dFUxMFROSXM5cUVENGJMUjlFbXJ5UT09 – Using the Zoom app: Meeting ID: 897 6799 5437; Passcode: 006898 – Via telephone by dialing: 253-215-8782, followed by 89767995437# BID SUBMITTAL (TIME/DATE/LOCATION): Bid are to be submitted prior to: 2:00 PM on December 8, 2021. Bids must be hand delivered to: Office of the City Clerk Renton City Hall Lobby 1055 Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 PUBLIC BID OPENING: Approximately 3:00 PM on December 8, 2021 via ZOOM Public Bid Opening Zoom Information: – Click or use this link to join the Public Bid Opening Zoom Meeting: https://us02web.zoom.us/j/89767995437?pwd=dFUxMFROSXM5cUVENGJMUjlFbXJ5UT09 – Using the Zoom app: Meeting ID: 870 3272 0934; Passcode: 806074 – Via telephone by dialing: 253-215-8782, followed by 87032720934#...... 0# … 806074# Plans and specifications may be viewed at Builder’s Exchange of Washington. Free-of-charge access to project bid documents (plans, specifications, addenda, and Bidders List) is provided to Prime Bidders, Subcontractors, and Vendors (collectively, “Bidders”) by going to www.bxwa.com and clicking on "Posted Projects", "Public Works", and "City of Renton". This online plan room provides Bidders with fully usable online documents with the ability to: download, view, print, order full/partial plan sets from numerous reprographic sources, and a free online digitizer/take-off tool. It is recommended that Bidders “Register” in order to receive automatic e-mail notification of future addenda and to place themselves on the “Self- Registered Bidders List". Bidders that do not register will not be automatically notified of addenda and will need to periodically check the on-line plan room for addenda issued on this project. If you need assistance with access or registration, please contact Builders Exchange of Washington at (425) 258-1303. Published: Daily Journal of Commerce: POB 11050, Seattle, WA 98111. Phone: 206.622.8272. Website: plancenter.com BID SET OCTOBER 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13 - Page 1 of 2 Contact Information: Please direct questions regarding this project to: Meredith Everist Principal, Baylis Architects Email: everistm@baylisarchitects.com Questions must be submitted via email and must be received no later than 3:00PM on November 23, 2021. Additional Project Information: The City’s fair practices/non-discrimination policies and the State of Washington prevailing wage rates are applicable for this public works project located in King County. Bidders are responsible to verify and use the most recent prevailing wage rates. The “Effective Date” for this project is the Bid Submittal due date above. The applicable prevailing wage rates may be found on the Department of Labor & Industries website located at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/wagelookup/prvWagelookup.aspx. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive informalities. THE CITY OF RENTON Jason Seth City Clerk END OF SECTION BID SET OCTOBER 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER SECTION 00 11 14 SYNOPSIS OF BIDDING INFORMATION SECTION 00 11 14 SYNOPSIS OF BIDDING INFORMATION A. PROJECT: Family First Community Center 16200 116th Ave SE Renton, WA 98057 B. OWNER: City of Renton 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 C. OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE:Russ Woodruff Capital Projects Coordinator City of Renton – Public Works 1055 South Grady Way, 5th Floor Renton, WA 98057 Phone: (206) 556-5026 Email: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov D. ARCHITECT: Meredith Everist, Principal Baylis Architects 10801 Main Street, #110 Bellevue, WA 98004 Phone: (425) 454-0566 Email: everistm@baylisarchitects.com E.OPTIONAL PRE-BID CONFERENCE:2:00 PM on November 2, 2021 via Zoom Pre-Bid Conference Zoom Information: – Click or use this link to join the FFCC Pre-Bid Zoom Conference: https://us02web.zoom.us/j/89767995437?pwd=dFUxMFROSXM5cUVENGJMUjlFbXJ5UT09 – Using the Zoom app: Meeting ID: 897 6799 5437; Passcode: 006898 – Via telephone by dialing: 253-215-8782, followed by 89767995437# F. BIDS DUE:2:00 PM on December 8, 2021 Bids must be Hand Delivered to: Renton City Hall Lobby – City Clerk 1055 S Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 BID SET OCTOBER 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER SECTION 00 11 14 SYNOPSIS OF BIDDING INFORMATION G. PUBLIC BID OPENING:Approximately 3:00 PM on December 8, 2021 via Zoom Public Bid Opening Zoom Information: – Click or use this link to join the Public Bid Opening Zoom Meeting: https://us02web.zoom.us/j/89767995437?pwd=dFUxMFROSXM5cUVENGJMUjlFbXJ5UT09 – Using the Zoom app: Meeting ID: 870 3272 0934; Passcode: 806074 – Via telephone by dialing: 253-215-8782, followed by 87032720934#...... 0# … 806074# H. NOTICE TO PROCEED: Approximately January 25, 2022 I. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION:Substantial Completion of the Work is expected within 365 days from the date of the Notice To Proceed. Final Completion is expected within 30 days of Substantial Completion. J. LEED: Project is seeking LEED V4 Silver Certification K. PERFORMANCE & PAYMENT BOND:100% of contract amount including WSST. L. WAGES: Pay applicable Washington State Prevailing Wage rates. The “Effective Date” for this Project is the Bids Due date listed above. END OF SECTION BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS General - All terms, conditions,requirements and definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.01 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS A.Any prospective Bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the solicitation, drawings, specifications, etc., must submit a request in writing via email to the Architect/Engineer (A/E) no later than November 23, 2021 by 3:00 PM. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of a contract will not be binding. Any information given a prospective Bidder concerning a solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective Bidders by addendum to the solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids or if the lack of it would be prejudicial to other prospective Bidders. B.In accordance with the legislative findings and policies set forth in Chapter 39.19 RCW the City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by MWBE firms certified by the Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (OMWBE). Participation may be either on a direct basis in response to this invitation or as a subcontractor to a Bidder. However, unless required by federal statutes, regulations, grants, or contract terms referenced in the Contract Documents, no preference will be included in the evaluation of bids, no minimum level of MWBE participation shall be required as a condition for receiving an award, and bids will not be rejected or considered nonresponsive on that basis. Any affirmative action requirements set forth in federal regulations or statutes included or referenced in the Contract Documents will apply. C.The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by Veteran-owned businesses (defined in RCW 43.60.010), list located at http://www.dva.wa.gov/program/certified-veteran-and-servicemember-owned-businesses, and Small, Mini and Micro businesses (defined in RCW 39.26.010) which have registered in WEBS, list located at https://fortress.wa.gov/ga/webs/ 1.02 PREPARATION OF BIDS – CONSTRUCTION Bids must be: (1) submitted on the Bid Form, or copies of form, furnished by the Owner or the Owner’s agent, and (2) signed in ink. The person signing a Bid must initial each change appearing on any Bid Form. If the Bid is made by a corporation, it shall be signed by the corporation’s authorized designee. The address of the Bidder shall be typed or printed in ink on the Bid Form in the space provided. A.All blanks on the Bid Form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must be initialed by an authorized representative of the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no conditions or stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify its Bid in any other manner. B.Where so indicated by the Bid Form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures; in case of discrepancy between the two, and notwithstanding any language to the contrary in the Bid Form, the amount written in figures shall govern, but words may be used to help resolve any ambiguity in the figure. Portions of the Bid Form may require the addition of components to a total or the identification of component amounts within a total. In case of discrepancy between component amounts listed and their sum(s), the total amount listed shall govern, unless explicitly instructed otherwise on the Bid Form. C.The Bid Form requires Bidders to submit Bid prices for one or more items on various BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 bases, including: a lump sum base bid and lump sum bids for three (3) alternates. D.The solicitation includes alternate Bid items. All requested Alternates must be bid. The Owner reserves the right, but is not obligated, to reject any Bid on which all requested Alternates are not bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required for an Alternate, enter “No Change.” If there is no entry, it will be presumed that the Bidder has made no offer to accomplish this Alternate. E.If the solicitation includes unit prices, they should be Bid. Unit prices will be added to the Base Bid using the quantities specified on the Bid Form for each category solely to determine the lowest Bidder. Quantities are not predictions of amounts anticipated. The Owner reserves the right, but is not obligated to, reject any Bid on which all requested unit prices are not Bid. The Owner may but is not obligated to accept a unit price if it accepts the Base Bid. 1.03 BID GUARANTEE A.Each Bid shall be accompanied by a Bid Security payable to the Owner in the form required in the Bidding Documents, equal to five percent (5%) of the Base Bid amount. The Bid Security constitutes a pledge that the Bidder will enter into the Contract with the Owner in the form provided, in a timely manner, and on the terms stated in its Bid and will furnish in a timely manner the payment and performance bonds, certificates of insurance, Contractor’s Construction Schedule, and all other documents required in the Contract Documents. Should the Bidder fail or refuse to enter into the Contract or fail to furnish such documents, the amount of the Bid Security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. By submitting its Bid, each Bidder agrees that any forfeiture of the Bid Security is a reasonable prediction at the time of Bid submittal of future damages to the Owner. Failure of the Bidder to provide the Bid Security when required shall render the bid non- responsive. B.Acceptable forms of bid guarantee are: A Bid bond (included) or postal money order, or certified check or cashier’s check made payable to the City of Renton Treasurer. The Attorney-in-Fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall be licensed to do business in the State of Washington and shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of his or her Power of Attorney. The Owner will have the right to retain the Bid Security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until the earliest of either (a) the Contract has been executed, and payment and performance bonds have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected. C.The Bidder will allow sixty (60) days from Bid opening date for acceptance of its Bid by the Owner. The Bidder will return to the Owner a signed Contract, insurance certificate and bond or bond waiver within ten (10) days after receipt of the Contract. If the apparent successful Bidder fails to sign all contractual documents and provide the bond and insurance as required or fails to return the documents within ten (10) days after receipt of the Contract, the Owner may terminate the award of the Contract. D.In the event a Bidder discovers an error in its Bid following the Bid Opening, the Bidder may request to withdraw its Bid under the following conditions: 1.Written notification of the claimed error and request to withdraw the Bid is received by the Owner within twenty-four (24) hours following Bid Opening; or 2.The Bidder provides written, detailed documentation of the claimed error to the BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 satisfaction of the Owner within seventy-two (72) hours following the Bid Opening. The Owner will approve or disapprove the request for withdrawal of the Bid in writing. If the Bidder’s request for withdrawal of its Bid is approved, the Bidder will be released from further obligation to the Owner without penalty. If it is disapproved, the Owner may retain the Bidder’s Bid Security. 1.04 ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE BID ITEMS/ALLOWANCES A.The low Bidder, for purposes of award, shall be the responsive Bidder offering the low aggregate amount for the Base Bid item, plus additive Bid alternates and allowances selected by the Owner, and within funds available for the Project. The Bidder agrees to hold all Bid alternate and allowance prices for sixty (60) days from date of Bid Opening. 1.05 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda to this solicitation by identifying the addenda numbers in the space provided for this purpose on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in the Bid being declared non-responsive. 1.06 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK The Bidder acknowledges that it has taken steps necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the Work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can affect the Work or its cost, including but not limited to; (1) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2) the availability of labor, water, electric power, and road; (3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; (4) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the Work. The Bidder also acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including exploratory work done by the Owner, as well as from the drawings and specifications made a part of this Contract. Any failure of the Bidder fully to acquaint itself with any applicable condition or matter shall not in any way relieve the Bidder from the responsibility for performing the Work in accordance with, and for the Contract Sum and within the Contract Time provided for in, the proposed Contract Documents. 1.07 BID AMOUNTS A.The Bid prices shown for each item (Base Bid, each alternate and allowances) on the Bid Form shall include all labor, material, equipment, overhead and compensation to complete all of the Work for that item. B.The actual cost of building and civil construction permits and the public utility hookup fees will be paid directly to the respective agency by the Owner. Fees for these specific items should not be included by the Bidder in the Bid amount. C.The Bidder agrees to hold the Base Bid and alternate prices for sixty (60) days from date of Bid Opening. 1.08 TAXES The Bid amounts shall include in the sum stated all taxes imposed by law, EXCEPT WASHINGTON STATE AND LOCAL SALES TAX. The Owner will pay WSST with its progress payments. The Contractor shall pay the WSST to the Department of Revenue and BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 4 shall furnish proof of payment to the Owner if requested. [NOTE: Contractor must provide its bond for the Contract amount plus the WSST.] 1.09 SUBMISSION OF BIDS A.Bids must be submitted on or before the time specified in the Advertisement for Bids. B.Potential Listing of Subcontractors: 1. In accordance with RCW 39.30.060, if the Project is expected to cost $1,000,000 or more, the Bidder shall complete and submit a Subcontractor list to the Owner by time of Bid Submission in the same manner specified for receipt of Bids. In these circumstances, the Bidder must name the Subcontractor or Subcontractors with whom the Bidder, if awarded the Contract, will subcontract directly (i.e., not lower-tier Subcontractors) for performance of the Work of: (a) HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) Work, (b) Plumbing as described in Chapter 18.106 RCW, (c) Electrical as described in Chapter 19.28 RCW, (d) Structural steel installation; (e) Rebar installation; and (f) Any other categories of Work listed on the Subcontractor listing form and/or Bid Form that are in addition to the categories of Work listed for compliance with RCW 39.30.060. 2.The listing of HVAC, plumbing, and electrical subcontractors shall occur within one (1) hour of Bid Submission. The listing of structural steel installation and rebar installation subcontractors shall occur within forty-eight (48) hours of Bid Submission. The listing of any other categories of Work listed on the Subcontractor listing form(s) and/or Bid Form, if any, shall occur as indicated on such forms or as otherwise described in the Bidding Documents. 3.If the Bidder intends to self-perform any of these categories of Work, it must name itself for each such category 4.The Bidder shall not list more than one (1) entity for a particular category of Work identified, unless a Subcontractor varies with an Alternate Bid, in which case the Bidder shall identify the Subcontractor to be used for the Alternate and the affected portion of the Work and otherwise make its Bid clear as to which Subcontractor shall be utilized depending upon the selection of alternates. 5.In accordance with RCW 39.30.060, failure of a Bidder to submit as part of the Bid the names of such proposed HVAC, plumbing, electrical, structural steel installation, and rebar installation Subcontractors or to name itself to perform such Work or the naming of two or more Subcontractors to perform the same Work shall render the Bid non- responsive and, therefore, void. 6.The Bidder, if Awarded the Contract, will subcontract with the listed Subcontractors for performance of the portions of the Work designated on the Bid Form, subject to the provisions of the Contract and RCW 39.30.060. The Bidder shall not substitute a listed Subcontractor in furtherance of bid shopping or bid peddling. 7.All listed Subcontractors may be required to provide evidence of their qualifications prior to the award, or at any time during the performance of the Contract. This evidence shall demonstrate that the Subcontractor meets or exceeds all requirements for experience, qualifications, manufacturer’s certifications, or any other requirements specified in any of the technical sections of the Contract Documents for which the Subcontractor proposes BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 to perform Work. 8.If a listed Subcontractor fails to provide adequate evidence of its bondability, qualification, or other requirements of the Contract or Bidding Documents (including without limitation a finding of Subcontractor non-Responsibility), the Owner may require the Bidder to replace the Subcontractor with a Subcontractor acceptable to the Owner at no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. C.The Bid Form shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the office specified in the Advertisement for Bids. The envelope shall have printed on the outside: 1.The Project number and name; 2.The name and address of the Bidder; and 3.Identification as “SEALED BID ENCLOSED”. D.Prior to the Bid Opening, the Owner’s representative will designate the official bid clock. Any part of the Bid Form, or in the rare situation of a bid modification, not received prior to the times specified, per the designated bid clock, will not be considered and the Bid will be returned to the Bidder unopened. E.The Bidder assumes full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. F.A bid may be withdrawn in person by a Bidder’s authorized representative before the opening of the bids. Bidder(s) representative will be required to show ID and sign on bid summary sheet before it will be released. G.People with disabilities who wish to request special accommodation, (e.g., sign language interpreters, braille, etc.) need to contact the Owner ten (10) working days prior to the scheduled bid opening. 1.10 BID RESULTS After the Bid Opening, Bidders may obtain bid results from the Owner. 1.11 LOW RESPONSIBLE BIDDER A.Mandatory Responsibility Criteria: Before award of a public works contract, the lowest responsive Bidder must meet the following mandatory responsibility criteria under RCW 39.04.350 (1) to be considered a responsible Bidder and qualified to be awarded a public works project. The lowest responsible Bidder shall: 1.at the time of bid submittal, have a certificate of registration in compliance with Chapter 18.27 RCW; 2.have a current state unified business identifier number; 3.if applicable, have industrial insurance coverage for the Bidder's employees working in Washington as required in Title 51 RCW; an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW; and a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW; 4.not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 (unregistered or unlicensed contractors) or RCW 39.12.065(3) (prevailing wage violations); BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 6 5.if bidding on a public works project subject to the apprenticeship utilization requirements in RCW 39.04.320, not have been found out of compliance by the Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council for working apprentices out of ratio, without appropriate supervision, or outside their approved work processes as outlined in their standards of apprenticeship under Chapter 49.04 RCW for the one- (1-) year period immediately preceding the Advertisement for Bids; 6.have received training on public works and prevailing wage requirements under Chapters 39.04 and 39.12 RCW, or be exempt from such training requirements if the Bidder has completed three (3) or more public works projects and has had a valid business license in Washington for three (3) or more years prior to Bid Submission; and 7.Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. Further, under revised RCW 39.04.350, if the Bidder has a history of receiving monetary penalties for not achieving the apprentice utilization requirements pursuant to RCW 39.04.320, or is habitual in utilizing the “good faith effort” exception process to the statue, the Bidder must submit an apprenticeship utilization plan within ten (10) days immediately following the Owner’s Notice to Proceed. Before award of a public works contract, a Bidder shall submit to the Owner a signed statement in accordance with RCW 9A.72.085 verifying under penalty of perjury that the Bidder is in compliance with the responsible bidder criteria requirements. An Owner may award a Contract in reasonable reliance upon such a sworn statement. B.Supplemental Responsibility Criteria: In addition to the mandatory responsible bidder criteria, the Owner has adopted relevant supplemental criteria (see 00 80 00 Form E and Form F) for determining Bidder responsibility which the Bidder must meet (RCW 39.04.350 (3)). The apparent low Bidder shall comply with the following: 1.At least seven (7) days prior to the Bid Submittal deadline, a potential Bidder may request that the Owner modify the supplemental responsibility criteria. The Owner will evaluate the information submitted by the potential Bidder and respond before the Bid Submittal deadline. If the evaluation results in a change of the criteria, the Owner will issue an addendum to the Bidding Documents identifying the new criteria. 2.Within two (2) business days of notice from the Owner of its apparent low Bid, the apparent low Bidder must supply the requested supplemental responsibility criteria (00 80 00 Form E and Form F) to the Owner. Withholding information or failure to submit all the information requested within the time provided may render the Bid non-responsive. 3.If the Owner determines that the apparent low Bidder is not responsible, the Owner will notify the Bidder of its preliminary determination in writing. 4.Within three (3) days after receipt of the preliminary determination, the Bidder may withdraw its bid or request a hearing where the Bidder may appeal the preliminary determination and present additional information to the Owner. 5.The Owner will schedule a hearing within three (3) working days of receipt of the Bidder’s request. 6.The Owner will issue a Final Determination after reviewing information presented at the hearing. BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 7 7.If the Owner determines a Bidder to be not responsible, the Owner will provide, in writing, the reasons for the determination. If the Final Determination affirms that the Bidder is not responsible, the Owner will not execute a Contract with any other Bidder until two (2) business days after the Bidder determined to be not responsible has received the Final Determination. 8.The Owner’s Final Determination is specific to this Project, and will have no effect on other or future projects. 1.12 CONTRACT AWARD A.The Owner intends (but is not bound) to award a Contract to the lowest responsive Bid, provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will evaluate the responsiveness and responsibility of Bids. The Owner has the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in its judgment, is in its own best interests. 1.A Bid will be considered responsive if it meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents 2.A Bidder will be considered responsible if it meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents, including but not limited to: meeting the mandatory responsibility criteria and supplemental responsibility criteria established for the Project. END OF SECTION BID SET OCTOBER 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 42 10 BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST 00 42 10 SECTION 00 42 10 BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST FORMS BELOW MUST BE TIMELY SUBMITTED FOR A BID TO BE CONSIDERED RESPONSIVE: 1. FORM A - BID FORM – 5 Pages 2. FORM B - PROPOSAL BID BOND 3. FORM C - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS, PART ONE (SUBMISSION OF HVAC, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS) 4. FORM D – LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS, PART TWO (SUBMISSION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REBAR SUBCONTRACTORS) 5. FORM E – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION 6. FORM F – QUALIFICATIONS OF PROJECT KEY PERSONNEL 7. FORM G – CONTRACT BOND FORM Confirm Items Below Are Complete At Time of Bid Submission: 1. Have you included costs for Base Bid, and each of the 3 Alternates and 1 Unit Cost as listed on the Bid Form? 2. Do written amounts in the Bid Form agree with amounts shown in figures? 3. Have you certified receipt of addenda? 4. Has the Bid Form been properly signed? 5. Have you completed the Deposit or Contract Bond Form? 6. Has a Bid Bond or certified check been enclosed with your Bid? 7. Is the amount of the Bid Bond at least 5% of the total amount of the Base Bid amount? 8. Are Forms A and B listed above included in a sealed and properly endorsed envelope? Form To Be Completed Within 1 hour of Bid Submission: 1. Form C – List of Subcontractors, Part One (Submission of HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors) Form To Be Completed Within 48 hours of Bid Submission: 1. Form D – List of Subcontractors, Part Two (Submission of Structural Steel and Rebar Subcontractors) BID SET OCTOBER 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 42 10 BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST 00 42 10 Forms To Be Completed By Apparent Low Bidder Within 2 Business Days of Notice by Owner of Apparent Low Bid: 1. Form E - Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation 2. Form F – Qualifications of Key Personnel END OF SECTION BID SET OCTOBER 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 52 00 AGREEMENT SECTION 00 52 00 AIA A101-2017 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR WHERE THE BASIS OF PAYMENT IS A STIPULATED SUM BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT SECTION 00 80 00 FORMS SECTION 00 80 00 FORMS Submit With Bid 1. Form A – Bid Form 2. Form B – Proposal Bid Bond Submit Within 1 hour of Bid Submission: 3. Form C – List of Subcontractors, Part One (Submission of HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors) Submit Within 48 hours of Bid Submission: 4. Form D – List of Subcontractors, Part Two (Submission of Structural Steel and Rebar Subcontractors) Submit Within 48 hours of Notice by Owner of Apparent Low Bid: 7. Form E – Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation 8. Form F – Qualifications of Key Personnel Submit With Executed Agreement (AIA 101) 9. Form G – 100% Contract Bond Form 10. Required Insurance Certificates END OF SECTION Submit Within 2 business days of Notice by Owner of Apparent Low Bid: BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT FORM A BID FORM Family First Community Center Bid Form Page 1 of 5 CITY OF RENTON HAND DELIVER TO: OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK RENTON CITY HALL – LOBBY 1055 GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057 for the FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 16200 116th Ave SE Renton, WA 98057 Bids Due: 2:00 PM December 8, 2021 Bidder’s Name: Address: Telephone: (MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED) Having carefully examined the Bidding Documents and Instructions to Bidders, the Project site and conditions affecting the Work, and all Addenda, the undersigned Bidder certifies that: (i) it has the personnel and means to complete the Work and (ii) it will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and management to perform all Work required by, and in strict accordance with, the above-named documents for the following sum(s) within the time fixed. All Bid amounts shall include overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, and any other expense required to complete the Work (excluding Washington State Sales Tax). The undersigned Bidder certifies that it is, at the time of submitting the Bid, and shall remain throughout the period of the Contract, licensed by the State of Washington to perform the type of work required under the Contract Documents. It further certifies that it is skilled and regularly engaged in the general class and type of work called for in the Contract Documents. A. BASE BID The Bidder agrees to complete the Work for this Project for the following lump sum Base Bid amount: ______________________________________________________________ DOLLARS (words) $_____________________________________________________________ (numerals) Do not include in the Base Bid amount Washington State Sales Tax that will be paid based on the B I D F O R M BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT FORM A BID FORM Family First Community Center Bid Form Page 2 of 5 Contract Sum. B. TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PROVISIONS The Base Bid amount includes any trench-excavation safety provisions required for compliance with Chapter 39.04 RCW and Chapter 49.17 RCW, as applicable, and the amount included in the Base Bid is: $_______________ C. ALTERNATES See the Description of Work and Drawing Sheet in the Bidding Documents for descriptions of Alternates. Alternates shall not be included in the Base Bid amount. Alternates selected by the Owner will be added to the Base Bid amount. · Alternate #1 – Green Roof: ADD Dollars (words) ($ ) (numerals) · Alternate #2 – Acoustic Panels: ADD Dollars (words) ($ ) (numerals) · Alternate #3 – Aluminum Windows: ADD Dollars (words) ($ ) (numerals) Do not include in the Alternate amounts Washington State Sales Tax that will be paid based on the Contract Sum if the Alternates are accepted. D. UNIT COST ALLOWANCE The Bidder proposes that the following Unit Cost shall be used to establish an Allowance that is included in the Base Bid and will govern additions and deduction to the Base Bid and Alternate Bids (if any are accepted): · Unit Cost Allowance Description – Export/import of any unsuitable soils from site per Cubic Yard (“CY”), as required by the Geotechnical Engineer beyond the Base Scope of Work. An Allowance shall be included in the Base Bid based upon the stated Unit Cost using an estimated 1,000 CY of unsuitable material and will be adjusted (up or down) based on actual quantities of unsuitable material identified by the Geotechnical Engineer per above. Unit Cost/CY $ Dollars (words) Unit Cost/CY ($_____________________________) (numerals) Estimated Unsuitable Material X 1,000 Cubic Yards Estimated Allowance = $ Allowance in Base Bid BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT FORM A BID FORM Family First Community Center Bid Form Page 3 of 5 Do not include in the Unit Cost amount or Allowance established within the Base Bid Washington State Sales Tax that will be paid based on the Contract Sum. E. SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING The Project is expected to cost $1,000,000 or more. As required by RCW 39.30.060, every Bidder must complete and provide the Subcontractor listing forms (Form D and Form E) in accordance with applicable requirements. F. RECEIPT OF ADDENDA Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. All requirements therein are included in the appropriate Bid amount. G. CONDITIONS OF PROPOSAL 1. Determination of Low Bidder: a. The City of Renton (alternatively referred to as “Owner” or “City”) reserves the right to award the Contract for the Project based on the Contractor’s Base Bid and any selected Alternates(s), in whatever manner is in the City’s best interest. 2. Overhead and Profit: a. All of the above Bid Prices shall include overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, and any other expense required to complete the Work (excluding Washington State Sales Tax). H. PERIOD OF BID VALIDITY/ACCEPTANCE OF BID The undersigned hereby agrees that this Bid shall be a valid and firm offering for the period of sixty (60) days from the Bid date. Within sixty (60) days from the Bid date, the City will act either to accept the Bid from the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, or to reject all Bids. The City reserves the right to request extensions of such Bid acceptance period. The acceptance of a Bid will be evidenced by a written Notice of Intent to Award Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is under consideration for acceptance, together with a request to furnish a bond (if required), evidence of required insurance to execute the Agreement set forth in the Contract Documents, and other designated documents. I. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT If the written Notice of Intent to Award Contract is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered via facsimile to the undersigned within the period of Bid validity noted above, or any time thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of such notification, BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT FORM A BID FORM Family First Community Center Bid Form Page 4 of 5 execute the revised AIA Document A101-2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum (“Agreement”) set forth in the Contract Documents. J. TIME FOR COMPLETION Substantial Completion - The undersigned hereby agrees to Substantially Complete all the Work under the Base Bid (and accepted Alternates) no later than 365 days following receipt of a notice to proceed. Final Completion – All the Work shall achieve Final Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents within 30 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion. K. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The undersigned agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $750.00 for each calendar day beyond the date upon which Substantial Completion of the entire Work is required to be complete until Substantial Completion is achieved, in accordance with the Contract Documents. L. BID SECURITY (As per the Bidding Documents) If applicable, Bid Security must be submitted with the Bid Form. [Remainder of page left intentionally blank.] BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT FORM A BID FORM Family First Community Center Bid Form Page 5 of 5 M. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The undersigned acknowledges that it has read, understands, and agrees to comply with all federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies during the performance of the Work. The undersigned Bidder hereby further certifies, under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington, that within the three-year period immediately preceding the Bid Submission date, the Bidder has not been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries, or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction, to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid: _____ NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below. Authorized Signatory: Title: Printed Name: Address: City: State: Zip Code: Date: Telephone: Fax: Washington Contractor's License No.: Federal Tax ID #: E-mail address: Washington State UBI No.: Expiration Date: End of Bid Form BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT FORM B PROPOSAL BID BOND FORM B Proposal Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, [Contractor] ________________________________ ____________________of [address] ____________________________________________ as Principal, and [Surety] __________________________________________________________________ a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of ____________________________________ , and authorized to do business in the State of Washington, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Renton in the sum of five (5) percent of the total amount of the Bid of said Principal for the Work hereinafter described, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, and successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this bond is such, that whereas the Principal herein is herewith submitting his/her or its sealed Bid for the following construction, to wit: ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ said Bid and proposal, by reference thereto, being made a part hereof. NOW, THEREFORE, if the said proposal Bid by said Principal be accepted, and the Contract be awarded to said Principal, and if said Principal shall duly make and enter into and execute said Contract and shall furnish performance bond as required by the City of Renton within a period of ten (10) days from and after said award, exclusive of the day of such award, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain and be in full force and effect. IN THE EVENT the Principal, following award, fails to execute an Agreement with the City of Renton in accordance with the terms of the Bidding Documents and furnish a performance bond with Surety or Sureties approved by the City of Renton within ten (10) days from and after said award, then Principal shall forfeit the Bid Bond/Bid Proposal Deposit or Surety shall immediately pay and forfeit to the City of Renton the amount of the Proposal Bid Bond, as set forth in RCW 35A.40.200 and RCW 35.23.352. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have caused these presents to be signed and sealed this ___________________________ day of ___________________________, ________. ________________________________ ________________________________ [Principal] [Surety] ________________________________ ________________________________ [Signature of authorized official] [Signature of authorized official] ________________________________ By: _____________________________ [Title] [Attorney-in-Fact] ________________________________ [Address] ________________________________ [Phone Number] BID BOND PAGE 1 OF 1 BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT FORM C LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS, PART ONE CITY OF RENTON EMAIL TO: RWOODRUFF@RENTONWA.GOV This list must be submitted within one (1) hour of the time and date specified for Bid Submission. Bidder’s Name: Project: Family First Community Center 16200 116th Ave SE Renton, WA 98057 CAG 20-042 SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING The Project is expected to cost $1,000,000 or more. Every Bidder must list the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC), Plumbing, and Electrical subcontractors as required per RCW 39.30.060. Subcontractor Name Work Category 1. HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning) 2. Plumbing 3. Electrical If different from the list above, the Subcontractors we propose to use if an Alternate Bid is accepted, is described below. (RCW 39.30.060 requires, in part, that the Bidder not list more than one Subcontractor for each category of Work identified, unless a Subcontractor will vary depending on which Alternate Bids are accepted, in which case the Bidder must indicate which Subcontractor will be used depending on which Alternate is accepted.) Describe any change to list if Alternates are accepted: ______________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS, PART ONE Submission of HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors - 2 - Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid: _____ NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below. Authorized Signature: Title: Printed Name: Address: City: State: Zip Code: Date: Telephone: Fax: Washington Contractor's License No.: Federal Tax ID #: E-mail address: Washington State UBI No.: Expiration Date: End of Form BID SET October 20, 2021 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT FORM D LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS, PART TWO CITY OF RENTON EMAIL TO: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov This list must be submitted within forty-eight (48) hours of the time and date specified for Bid Submission. Bidder’s Name: Project: Family First Community Center 16200 116th Ave SE Renton, WA 98057 CAG 20-042 SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING The Project is expected to cost $1,000,000 or more. Every Bidder must list the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC), Plumbing, and Electrical subcontractors as required per RCW 39.30.060. Subcontractor Name Work Category 1. Structural Steel Installer 2. Rebar Installer If different from the list above, the Subcontractors we propose to use if an Alternate Bid is accepted, is described below. (RCW 39.30.060 requires, in part, that the Bidder not list more than one Subcontractor for each category of Work identified, unless a Subcontractor will vary depending on which Alternate Bids are accepted, in which case the Bidder must indicate which Subcontractor will be used depending on which Alternate is accepted.) Describe any change to list if Alternates are accepted: ______________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS, PART TWO Submission of Structural Steel and Rebar Subcontractors - 2 - Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid: _____ NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below. Authorized Signature: Title: Printed Name: Address: City: State: Zip Code: Date: Telephone: Fax: Washington Contractor's License No.: Federal Tax ID #: E-mail address: Washington State UBI No.: Expiration Date: End of Form FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT Bid Set FORM E – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION October 20,2021 (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov 1 | P a g e Contractor Name: Date Incorporated: Mailing Address: State Incorporated: Business Phone: Owner/President’s Name: Contact Name and Title: Other or Former Organization Name(s) Contact Phone: Contact Email: Reason for Name Change(s): PERFORMANCE EXPERIENCE Has company been disqualified (debarred) from performing public work by State of Washington or federal government? Yes No Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending against company or its officers? Yes No If Yes, please describe: Judgments Has company ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? Yes No If Yes, please describe: Has company been obligated for liquidated damages within the past 5 years? Yes No If Yes, please describe: FINANCIAL INFORMATION 1. Average total annual value of construction work performed during the past 5 years: 2. Provide at least three trade references: Name/Contact Name/Contact Name/Contact 3.Provide surety company and agent name: Surety PROJECT EXPERIENCE – Projects of Similar Scope Requiring Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages within Past 5 Years (3 Required) PROJECT #1 (Prevailing Wages)Description Of Project:Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Location/Address: Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role: Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No Phone: Phone: FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT Bid Set FORM E – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION October 20,2021 (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov 2 | P a g e Email: Email: PROJECT #2 (Prevailing Wages)Description Of Project:Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Location/Address: Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role: Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: PROJECT #3 (Prevailing Wages)Description Of Project:Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Location/Address: Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT Bid Set FORM E – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION October 20,2021 (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov 3 | P a g e PROJECT EXPERIENCE – Projects in or adjacent to occupied school, hospital or similar Sensitive Facility completed within last 5 years? (3 Required) PROJECT #1 (Sensitive Facility)Description Of Project:Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Location/Address: Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC – Describe Role Owner Name: Architect Name: Project was in or adjacent to occupied school, hospital or similar sensitive facility? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: PROJECT #2 (Sensitive Facility)Description Of Project:Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Location/Address: Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC – Describe Role Owner Name: Architect Name: Project was in or adjacent to occupied school, hospital or similar sensitive facility? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT Bid Set FORM E – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION October 20,2021 (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov 4 | P a g e PROJECT #3 (Sensitive Facility)Description Of Project:Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Location/Address: Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC – Describe Role Owner Name: Architect Name: Project was in or adjacent to occupied school, hospital or similar sensitive facility? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: PROJECT EXPERIENCE – Projects Achieved LEED v4 Certification (2 Required) PROJECT #1 (LEED v4)Description Of Project:Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Location/Address: Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC – Describe Role Owner Name: Architect Name: Project successfully achieved LEED v4 Certification Yes No Phone: Phone: LEED v4 Level Certified Email: Email: FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PROJECT Bid Set FORM E – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION October 20,2021 (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov 5 | P a g e PROJECT #2 (LEED v4)Description Of Project:Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Project Name: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Location/Address: Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC – Describe Role Owner Name: Architect Name: Project successfully achieved LEED v4 Certification Yes No Phone: Phone: LEED v4 Level Certified Email: Email: Family First Community Center Project Bid Set Form F – Qualifications of Project Key Personnel OCTOBER 20, 2021 (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov PROJECT MANAGER Years’ ExperienceName: Current Position with Company: Total With Current Firm Firm Name and Location (City and State): Training/Education/Specialization: Years of Experience in the Proposed Role: RELEVANT PROJECT 1 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Project Owner: Year Completed Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 2 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Project Owner: Year Completed Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 3 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Project Owner: Year Completed Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm Name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: Family First Community Center Project Bid Set Form F – Qualifications of Project Key Personnel OCTOBER 20, 2021 (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) Email to: rwoodruff@rentonwa.gov SUPERINTENDENT Years’ ExperienceName: Current Position with Company: Total With Current Firm Firm Name and Location (City and State): Training/Education/Specialization: Years of Experience in the Proposed Role: RELEVANT PROJECT 1 of 3 Project Title: Project Owner: Year Completed Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 2 of 3 Project Title: Project Owner: Year Completed Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 3 of 3 Project Title: Project Owner: Year Completed Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm Name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: End of Form FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER FORM G - CONTRACT BOND CONTRACT BOND PAGE 1 OF 2 CONTRACT BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ as principal, and _____________________________________ corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ________________________ as a surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as surety are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Renton in the penal sum of $_______________________________ for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or person representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into pursuant to the statutes of the State of Washington, the Ordinance of the City of Renton. Dated at ______________, Washington, this ______________ day of ___________, 20___. Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obligation are such that: WHEREAS, under and pursuant to Contract No. __________ providing for construction of the FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER; the Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; NOW, THEREFORE, this Performance and Payment Bond shall be satisfied and released only upon the condition that Principal: Faithfully performs all provisions of the Contract and changes authorized by Owner in the manner and within the time specified as may be extended under the Contract; Pays all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, material persons, and all other persons or agents who supply labor, equipment, or materials to the Project; Indemnifies and holds Owner, its officers, and agents harmless from and against all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages, and costs for such payments for labor, equipment, and materials by satisfying all claims and demands incurred under the Contract, and FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER FORM G - CONTRACT BOND CONTRACT BOND PAGE 2 OF 2 reimbursing and paying Owner all expenses that Owner may incur in making good any default by Principal; and Indemnifies and holds Owner harmless from all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages and costs, including property damages and personal injuries, resulting from any defect appearing or developing in the material provided or workmanship performed under the Contract. Pays all taxes incurred on said contract under title 50 and 51 Revised Code of Washington (RCW) and all taxes imposed on the Principle under Title 82 RCW. The indemnities to Owner shall also inure to the benefit of the Architect and other design professionals retained by Owner in connection with the Project. No change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed under the Contract shall in any way affect Surety's obligation on the Performance Bond. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or the Work. This Contract Bond shall be governed and construed by the laws of the State of Washington, and venue shall be in King County, Washington. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this instrument in two (2) identical counterparts this _______ day of _________________, 20 ___. Principal Surety Signature Signature Title Title Name and address of local office of agent and/or Surety Company: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 10 00 October 20, 2021 SUMMARY Project #16-0996 01 10 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Project description. B . Contract description. C . Work by Owner. D . Owner occupancy. E . Contractor use of site and premises. F . Specification and drawing conventions. G . Architect's Digital Files. H . Uncertainties, Conflicts and Omissions. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A . Project Name: Family First Community Center. B . Owner Name: City of Renton, Community Services. C . Owner's Consultants: 1. Surveyor: Terrane. 2. Geotechnical - Soils Engineer: Riley Group. 3. Traffic Engineer: Transportation Engineers Northwest (TENW). D . Architect: Baylis Architects, Inc. E . Architect's Consultants: 1. Specifications: Applied Building Information, LLC. 2. Structural Engineer: Coughlin Porter Lundeen. 3. Civil Engineer: Coughlin Porter Lundeen. 4. Mechanical Engineer: Sider + Byers. 5. Electrical Engineer: Sider + Byers. 6. Plumbing Engineer: Sider + Byers. 7. Landscape Architect: Weisman Design Group, Inc. 8. Interior Designer: Object Space. 9. Building Envelope: JRS Engineering. 10. LEED Consultant: ArchEcology, LLC. 11. Interiors: Object Space. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 10 00 October 20, 2021 SUMMARY Project #16-0996 01 10 00 - 2 F . Project Description: Family First Community Center is a one-story building with surface parking and all associated services, utilities, and landscaping. The community center will be open to the general public and include services such as after school programs, a healthcare and dental clinic with labs and counseling services, childcare for facility users, a community garden and demonstration kitchen and fitness facilities including a gymnasium, dance studio, and exercise room. The building is wood frame construction and will be LEED Silver. G . Project Jurisdiction: City of Renton. H . Code: 2015 International Building Code. 1. Occupancy Category: A-3, B, E. 2. Building Type: V-B. 3. Fire Protection: Fully sprinklered. I . Design Loads: Loading requirements to be confirmed. Code minimums are: 1. Floor Live Loads: a. Reference Structural Drawings. 2. Roof Load: a. Reference Structural Drawings. b. Mechanical Equipment and Concrete pads as they occur. 3. Stair Live Load: Reference Structural Drawings. 4. Canopies Load: Reference Structural Drawings. 5. Guardrails Load: Reference Structural Drawings. 1.3 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A . Contract Type: 1. AIA Document A101-2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A . Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by Owner. B . Owner furnished products for Contractor installation (OFCI): 1. Contractor to receive, store, and install Owner furnished products. C . Contractor furnished products for Owner installation (CFOI): 1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY A . Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. 1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A . Access to Site: See Appendix A Construction Mitigation. B . Work restrictions: See Appendix A Construction Mitigation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 10 00 October 20, 2021 SUMMARY Project #16-0996 01 10 00 - 3 C . Noise: See Appendix A Construction Mitigation. D . Smoking: No smoking allowed on school property. 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A . Division 01 General Requirements and per AIA 201 apply to the work of all sections. B . Work required by the specifications are to be performed by Contractor unless indicated otherwise. 1.8 ARCHITECT'S DIGITAL FILES A . Use of Architect's Digital Files: Architect's CAD, BIM, or other digital data may or may not, at Architect's discretion, be made available for Contractor's use in connection with Project. Where digital data is made available: 1. Make requests for copies of digital data in written form, including list of data requested, its intended use, and an executed copy of Architect's Transfer of Electronic Files agreement (available from Architect). 2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. 1.9 UNCERTAINTIES, CONFLICTS AND OMISSIONS A . See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, Requests for Information, for resolution of apparent omissions, uncertainties, and conflicts. B . For pricing purposes, until discrepancies are resolved: 1. Conflicts: Assume the most costly of conflicting requirements. 2. Omissions and uncertainties: Assume a level of quality consistent with the general quality level of the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 11 50 October 20, 2021 DELEGATED DESIGN AND DEFERRED SUBMITTALS Project #16-0996 01 11 50 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Delegated design components and systems. B . Deferred submittal procedures 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . Drawing coversheet; list of Deferred Submittals. B . AIA A201 Article 3.10.2, and 3.12.10 - 3.12.10.2. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Applicant: Contractor applying for submittal approval by Architect, approved permit for Deferred Submittals, and coordinating Contractor Engineered Components with Project and with each other. Includes coordination of required submittals with Architect and the City of Renton Department of Construction and Inspections. B . Architect: Per AIA A201 Article 4. C . Contractor: Per AIA A201 Article 3. D . Contractor Design Engineer: Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the Project is located and engaged by Contractor, subcontractor or supplier to provide drawings, computations and specifications required by Building Official for designated Contractor Engineered specialty system, in accordance with criteria set forth in Contract Documents. E . Contractor Engineered Components are defined as complete systems provided for intended use. F . Seal: Certification that drawings, computations and specifications were designed and prepared under direct supervision of Architect or Engineer whose name appears thereon. G . Review Stamp: Certification that Architect has reviewed drawings, computations and specifications bearing seal of Contractor Design Engineer, verifying conformance with information given and design concept set forth in Drawings and Specifications. H . Approval Stamp: Certification that Building Official has reviewed submittal and finds it acceptable with respect to applicable code compliance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Show complete criteria, design assumptions, details, calculations, instructions for fabrications, assembly, installation and interface with other trades. B . Contractor Design Engineer's stamp with calculations for that portion of work. 1. Submittals without required calculations or Contractor Design Engineer's stamp and which have not been reviewed by Contractor will not be reviewed by Architect. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 11 50 October 20, 2021 DELEGATED DESIGN AND DEFERRED SUBMITTALS Project #16-0996 01 11 50 - 2 1.5 DELEGATED DESIGN COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMS A . Components of Work and designated Delegated Design. 1. Contractor is responsible to coordinate and assume complete responsibility for design, calculations, submittals, permits if required, fabrication, delivery and installation of Delegated Design Components and Systems. 2. If these Delegated Design systems are designated as a Deferred Submittal Contractor is responsible for submittal of documents to Authority Having Jurisdiction for review. Schedule Work so review will not adversely affect Project's construction schedule. 3. Architect's review of Delegated Design submittals is for general conformance with design intent as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Architect not responsible for coordination of Contractor Engineered Components with Contract Documents. Review does not lessen nor shift burden of responsibility from Contractor or assigned subcontractor/supplier to Owner or Architect. 4. Owner not responsible to pay for delays, additional products, hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due to failure to coordinate the Work with other trades or to provide Delegated Design and Deferred Submittal Components and their approval as required to meet project schedule. 5. Delegated Design Components: The following are Delegated Design Components and Systems: 1.6 DEFERRED SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A . Components listed below are designated as a Deferred Submittal within the Authority Having Jurisdiction building permit approval process. 1. See drawing coversheet for list of deferred submittals. B . Contractor shall serve as Applicant and submit for review and approval per Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements for all Deferred Submittals. C . Components shall be coordinated with adjacent systems. D . Authority Having Jurisdiction Submittals: 1. Contractor Engineered Summary Sheet listing Contractor's Delegated Design engineer including registered engineer's name, address and telephone number. 2. Three sets of design drawings and specifications clearly and legibly showing members, dimensions, connections, materials and indicating how component is attached to main structure. a. Prepare these documents stamped by Engineer licensed in the State in which the Project is located. b. Submit for Architect's signature indicating General Design Conformance. 3. Submit one set of calculations including criteria, design assumptions, substantiating computations and additional data sufficient to show correctness of drawings and compliance with structural revisions as indicated Structural Specialty Code. a. Prepare calculations stamped by Engineer who prepared calculations. b. Submit for Architect's signature indicating acceptance of design concepts, loading criteria and compatibility of designs. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 11 50 October 20, 2021 DELEGATED DESIGN AND DEFERRED SUBMITTALS Project #16-0996 01 11 50 - 3 E . Prior to start of work Deferred Submittals must be examined and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction and returned to Owner. F . Documents not completed prior to issuance of building permit, must be completed and submitted for approval prior to fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 20 00 October 20, 2021 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 20 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Schedule of values. B . Progress payments. C . Final payment. D . Change procedures. E . Change log. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 00 52 00 – Agreement: AIA A101-2017. B . 00 72 00 – General Conditions: AIA Document A201-2017. C . 01 23 00 - Alternates. D . 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Schedule of Values: As indicated in 00 72 00 – General Conditions: AIA Document A201- 2017. B . Initial Progress Payment: Submit the following with application for progress payment. 1. Submittal Schedule: As required in Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 2. Construction Schedule: As required in Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A . See provisions in 00 72 00 – General Conditions: AIA Document A201-2017. 1.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A . See provision in 00 52 00 – Agreement: AIA A101-2017. 1.6 FINAL PAYMENT A . Prepare Application for Final Payment per AIA A201.9.10 as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B . Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures and per AIA A201. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 20 00 October 20, 2021 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 20 00 - 2 1.7 CHANGE PROCEDURES A . See provisions in 00 72 00 – General Conditions: AIA Document A201-2017. 1.8 CHANGE LOG A . Generate and keep current a Change Log documenting all potential and approved contract changes including Architect Supplemental Instructions, RFI's, Unit Prices, Alternates, Construction Change Directives or Field Orders and Change Orders. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 21 00 October 20, 2021 ALLOWANCES Project #16-0996 01 21 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Cash allowances. B . Contingency allowance. C . Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 012000 - Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification procedures. 1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES A . Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts, less applicable taxes, all required taxes (except state and local sales taxes due on progress, retainage, and final payments) B . Architect Responsibilities: 1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of products, suppliers, and installers. 2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor. 3. Prepare Change Order. C . Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Architect in selection of products, suppliers, and installers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. D . Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order. 1. Notify Owner of intent to exceed an allowance amount prior to submitting Change Order. 1.4 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A . Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance. B . At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 21 00 October 20, 2021 ALLOWANCES Project #16-0996 01 21 00 - 2 1.5 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE No. Description Allowance 1 Import and export of unsuitable soils to support Division 31 Earthwork as required by Geotechnical Engineer for work beyond base scope of work. Up to 1,000 cubic yards, maximum. Provide unit cost. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 23 00 October 20, 2021 ALTERNATES Project #16-0996 01 23 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Description of alternates. B . Procedures for alternates. C . Acceptance of alternates. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Payment procedures for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each Alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work prior to execution of the agreement. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Schedule of expiration date for each alternate. 1.5 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A . Alternate Item 01: Green Roof. 1. As an Add Alternate, provide vegetated roof covering as indicated on Drawings and per Section 075563. B . Alternate Item 02: Acoustic panels. 1. As an Add Alternate, provide acoustical ceiling and wall panels at Staff Carrels, Meeting Room, MarkerSpace, and Gym as indicated on the Drawings. C . Alternate Item 03: Aluminum Windows. 1. Base bid shall include fiberglass window systems as indicated. 2. Include Marlin Aluminum Windows Series 1505 at all exterior windows indicated on Sheet A503 in lieu of fiberglass windows. 1.6 PROCEDURES FOR ALTERNATES A . Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the Alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of Alternate. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 23 00 October 20, 2021 ALTERNATES Project #16-0996 01 23 00 - 2 B . Alternates accepted after acceptance of Schedule of Value will be incorporated via Change Order in accordance with Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures. C . Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each Alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. D . Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. 1.7 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A . Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. B . Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate. C . Owner, Architect and Contractor to define schedule of alternate expiration dates. Alternates are considered void once the expiration dates have passed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Meetings. B . Requests for information (interpretation). C . Submittal procedures. D . Construction progress schedule. E . Photographic documentation. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 00 72 00 – General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment. B . 00 72 00 – General Conditions: Duties of the Construction Manager. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: For quality assurance submittals. D . Appendix F – School District Requirements: For additional information related to construction progress. E . Appendix G – RSD Student Calendar 2021-2022: For construction parking limits during the school year. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. B . Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Meeting Minutes. B . RFI Log. C . Submittal Log. D . Preliminary Progress Schedule. E . Construction Progress Schedule. F . Photographic Documentation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MEETINGS A . Preconstruction Meetings: 1. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. a. Preconstruction and Site Mobilization meetings may be held concurrently. 2. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect. c. Contractor. d. Contractor's Superintendent. e. Applicable Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors attend and participate in meetings. 3. Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. B . Site Mobilization Meetings: 1. Architect will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. 2. Attendance Required: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Architect. d. Contractor's Superintendent. 3. Applicable Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors attend and participate in meetings.Agenda: a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements and occupancy prior to completion. c. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. e. Survey and building layout. f. Security and housekeeping procedures. g. Schedules. h. Application for payment procedures. i. Procedures for testing. j. Procedures for maintaining record documents. k. Requirements for start-up of equipment. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 3 l. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 4. Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. C . Presubmittal Meetings: 1. Schedule a meeting at the project site prior to Contractor's beginning work on submittal(s) if required by the individual specification section. 2. Attendance Required: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Architect. d. Special consultants and contractors involved in production of submitted system. 3. Agenda: General guidelines a. Presentation of design Intent of the work of the section by Architect. b. Presentation of construction sequencing and site related issues by Contractor. c. Presentation of Contractor interpretation design intent and construction sequence/site issues. d. Contractor documentation and fabrication procedures and proposed shop drawing/submittal schedule. e. Architect and Owner expectations for the submittal, using the specification section as a basis, and encompassing schedule and expected revise and resubmit time frame if any. f. Other issues of concern by all parties. g. Contractor to record and distribute minutes within 2 days of meeting with copies to Architect, Owner, participants and those affected by decisions made. D . Preinstallation Meetings: 1. Schedule a meeting at the project site prior to Contractor's beginning installation work if required by the individual specification section. 2. Attendance Required: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Architect. d. Special consultants and contractors involved in production of installed system. 3. Agenda: General guidelines a. Confirmation of approved submittals and mockups. b. Manufacturer's written instructions. c. Warranty requirements. d. Compatibility of materials. e. Acceptability of substrates. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 4 f. Required performance results. g. Other issues of concern by all parties. h. Contractor to record and distribute minutes within 2 days of meeting with copies to Architect, Owner, participants and those affected by decisions made. E . Progress Meetings: 1. Schedule regular weekly on-site Project status meetings. 2. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. 3. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. 4. Agenda: a. Review minutes of previous meetings. b. Review of Work progress. 1) Review of progress drawings. c. Field observations, problems, and decisions. d. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. e. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. f. Maintenance of progress schedule. g. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. h. Planned progress during succeeding work period. i. Maintenance of quality and work standards. j. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. k. LEED Documentation Updates. l. Other business relating to Work. 5. Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.2 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (INTERPRETATION) A . Requests for Information (RFI) 1. Requests for Information, Interpretation, or Clarifications are to explain project conditions without generating a change proposal or modification to the contract. Include the following: a. Project name and number. b. Date. c. Date response required by. d. RFI number. e. Subject. f. Initiator of the question. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 5 g. Indication of costs, if known or anticipated. h. Indication of schedule impact, if known or anticipated. i. Location on site. j. Contract drawing reference. k. Contract specification section and paragraph reference. l. Descriptive text. m. Recommended solution(s) if available. n. Space for reply on same page as questions. 2. Submit to Architect electronically. 3. All responses must be in writing. If a response will impact the contract, the Contractor shall follow the contract modification procedures in Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures. B . Request for Information Procedures: 1. Transmit all RFIs electronically. RFIs form should be in an editable file format, such as editable PDF, Microsoft Word or Excel. Architect will respond in non-editable PDF format. 2. Submit RFIs that involve multiple disciplines to all consultants involved in addressing the issues raised in the RFI simultaneously. There will be no differentiation in approach to design and design/build consultants. 3. Consultants will be required to submit their responses to the Architect. 4. Architect will review and coordinate consultants' responses and will issue the combined response to Contractor with copies to Owner and relevant design team members. 5. Typical RFI response time: 5 working days. Consultants will have 4 working days for response to Architect to allow time for coordination. RFIs received after 12 PM will be logged as received the next day. 6. Indicate response due date in all RFIs. 7. If urgent matters arise, include the word "URGENT" in the title of email containing the RFI. 8. If multiple RFIs are submitted on the same day, indicate order of priority for response and which RFI responses can be submitted after the typical 5-day period. C . Generate and keep current an RFI Log including the following: 1. RFI number. 2. Subject. 3. Date Submitted. 4. Initiator of the question. 5. Date Returned. 3.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A . General: 1. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 6 2. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. 3. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. 4. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products specified, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 5. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address only if samples are provided. Otherwise, submittals to be provided in digital format. 6. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 7. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. 8. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. 9. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. 10. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. B . Schedule: 1. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.. 2. For each Action Submittal, allow 15 working days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. C . Submittal Log: 1. Submit preliminary submittal log including the following information with first application for payment in accordance with Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures. Provide in electronic format sortable by data values in each column. a. Submittal number. b. Submittal Title. c. Planned date of submission by Contractor. d. Planned return date by Architect. 2. Keep Submittal Log current with the following information and submit with each application for payment. Provide in electronic format sortable by data values in each column. a. Submittal number. b. Submittal Title. c. Planned date of submission by Contractor. d. Required return date by Architect. e. Actual date of submission by Contractor. f. Actual return date by Architect. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 7 D . Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Transmit all Submittals electronically, in PDF format. The Contractor's numbering system is acceptable, as long as it includes 6-digit section number and submittal number specific to each particular section. 3. Submittal distribution to design team, and distribution of submittal reviews to Contractor will follow the same procedure as the one outlined for RFIs. 4. Update Submittal Schedule monthly. 5. Typical Submittal Review Time: 15 working days. 6. Consultants and Owner will have 8 working days for response to Architect to allow time for coordination. If multiple submittals are sent on the same day, indicate order of priority for review and which submittals can be returned after the typical 15-day period. 7. All other parts of submittal review are similar to the procedures outlined for RFIs above. 8. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier - Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., ###-06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., ###- 06100.01.A). 9. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 10. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 8 q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. 11. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. 12. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. E . Submittals for Action: 1. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: a. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard data marked to indicate project specific systems, components, finishes and accessories. b. Shop Drawings: Project specific information drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or manufacturer's standard printed details. c. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's standard color and finish charts for selection of previously unselected finishes. d. Samples for Verification: Manufacturer's standard size of selected finish on actual material of installation. As an example: Submit metal finishes on metal samples rather than paper color charts. 2. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 3. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. F . Submittals for Information: 1. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: a. Delegated Design Submittals: Including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. b. Design data. c. Certificates: In accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. d. Test reports: In accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. e. Inspection reports: In accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. f. Manufacturer's instructions: Include special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and conditions requiring special attention. g. Manufacturer's field reports: In accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 2. Other types indicated. 3. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 9 G . Submittals for Project Closeout: 1. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: a. Project record documents: In accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures. b. Operation and maintenance data: In accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures. c. Warranties: In accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures. d. Bonds: In accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures. e. Other types as indicated. 2. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. H . Number of Copies of Submittals: 1. Documents: Provide one electronic copy in PDF format to Owner and Architect; an electronically marked- up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected. 2. Documents for Project Closeout: Submit two copies. 3. Samples: a. Submit three sets of samples for items reviewed by Architect alone. b. Submit four sets for items reviewed by Architect and Consultants. c. After review, produce duplicates. d. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. e. Submit labeled electronic picture of sample with each physical sample. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A . Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing of the property for construction: See plan sheet for denoted areas available for construction at each phase. 2. Construction Mitigation Plan: See Appendix F School District Requirements. 3. Construction Personnel Parking Limits During School Year: See Appendix G – RSD School Calendar 2021-2022. a. A new School Calendar for the 2022-2023 School Year will be issued in September 2022. 3.5 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION A . Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to submission of application for payment. B . Photography Type: Digital; electronic files. C . Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect. It is anticipated that the school year for 2022-2023 will begin September 1, 2022. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 30 00 October 20, 2021 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 30 00 - 10 D . In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events: 1. Completion of site clearing. 2. Excavations in progress. 3. Foundations in progress and upon completion. 4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion. 5. Enclosure of building, upon completion. 6. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos. E . Views: 1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until Date of Substantial Completion. 2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required. 3. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion. 4. Point of View Sketch: Provide PDF of sketch identifying point of view of each photograph. F . Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software. 1. Delivery Medium: Via email. 2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification. 3. Point of View Sketch: Include digital copy of point of view sketch with each electronic submittal; include point of view identification in each photo file name. 4. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . This Section includes general requirements and procedures for the contractor and subcontractor(s) for Project to obtain LEED® Certification based on USGBC’s “LEED v4 for New Construction & Major Renovations.” B . See Divisions 1 through 33 for LEED® requirements specific to the Work of each of those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A . LEED®: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. B . USGBC: United States Green Building Council C . GBCI: Green Building Certification Institute D . LEED Project Administrator: Designated by Owner to provide oversight of LEED related work. E . Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Life cycle assessment reports, third party verified, that reference various ISO Standards. 1. Industry-Wide (Generic) EPD: Provide products with third-party certification (Type III), including external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator. EPD must conform to ISO 14025, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930, and have at least a cradle-to-gate scope. 2. Product-Specific Type III EPD: A product with a third-party certification, including external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized by the program operator. EPD must conform to ISO 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930, and have at least a cradle-to-gate scope. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 2 F . Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR): Measures undertaken by the maker of a product to accept its own and sometimes other manufacturers products as postconsumer waste at the end of the products’ useful life. Also referred to as a closed-loop or take-back program. G . Post-Consumer Recycled Content: Percentage of waste material by weight available from consumer waste that has been used as a raw material (feedstock) in a building material. H . Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: Percentage of waste material by weight available from industrial use incorporated into a building material. I . Regional Materials: Materials sourced (extracted, harvested, manufactured, purchased) within 100 miles of the project site. J . Health Product Declarations (HPD): A standard format for reporting product content and associated health information for building products and materials. K . General Emissions Evaluation: Product is tested and compliant with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, v1.1-2010, for the emissions testing and requirements of products and materials. L . General Content Evaluation (wet-applied products): Product meets the VOC content limits outlined in one the applicable standards (Paints & Coatings: SCAQMD Rule 1113 (Adhesives & Sealants: SCAQMD Rule 1168. Free of solvents as defined in TRGS 610. M . FSC: Forest Stewardship Council N . Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, “FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.” Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. O . Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Products made of wood particles and/or plant material pressed and bonded with adhesive or resin such as particleboard, medium density fiberboard (MDF), plywood, wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates and door cores. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 3 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . LEED® Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met. Coordinate with Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures. 1. MR Prerequisite/MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management: Waste management plan complying with Section 01 7419– Construction Waste Management. 2. EQ Credit Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan complying with Section 01 8100 –Jobsite Indoor Air Quality. B . LEED® Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED® action plans. Coordinate with Section 01 2900 – Payment Procedures. C . LEED® Documentation Submittals. Conform to following as required for LEED documentation of Contractor-responsible LEED Credits. 1. General: Provide schedule of values by CSI division. Labor and equipment is to be listed separately from material cost. 2. WE Prerequisite/Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction: Provide product data for tank style toilets, urinals and showerheads indicating products are WaterSense labeled. Provide product data for flow fixtures (shower heads, lavatory faucets, and kitchen faucets) indicating flow rate in gallons per minute (gpm). Provide product data for flush fixtures (water closets and urinals) indicating gallons per flush (gpf). See Division 22 – Plumbing. 3. EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance: Provide product data for HVAC indicating equipment efficiency. Provide product data for Electrical fixtures indicating lighting wattage, daylight controls and occupancy sensors. See Division 23 – Mechanical and Division 26 - Electrical. 4. MR Prerequisite/Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management: Divert a minimum of 75% and 4 waste streams of construction and demolition waste from the landfill. Comply with Section 01 7419 – Construction Waste Management. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 4 5. MR Credit BPDO Environmental Product Declarations – Option 1: Provide documentation for products that have an Environmental Product Declaration (EPD). 6. MR Credit BPDO Sourcing of Raw Materials – Option 2: Provide cost (exclusive of labor and equipment) and product data on products that have any of the following leadership extraction practices: a. Extended producer responsibility (EPR) – product data and certification letter from product manufacturers, indicating participation in an extended producer responsibility program and statement of costs. b. Bio-Based Materials – product data and certification for bio-based materials, indicating that they comply with requirements. Include statement of costs. c. Certified Wood – provide product data and FSC chain of custody certificate from the product vendor for each certified wood product. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product. d. Material Reuse – receipts for salvaged and refurbished materials used for Project, indicating sources and costs. e. Recycled Content – product data and certification letter from product manufacturers indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement of costs. f. Regional – product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material (located within 100 miles of Project). Include statement indicating cost for each regional material (exclusive or labor and equipment). 7. MR Credit BPDO Material Ingredients – Option 1: provide documentation demonstrating material ingredient reporting for products that have any of the following documents or certificates: a. Health Product Declaration (HPD v1.0, v2.0 and v2.1) b. Cradle to Cradle Certification (v2 Basic and higher or v3 Bronze and higher) c. Declare Label d. Cradle to Cradle Material Health Certificate e. ANSI/BIFMA e3 Furniture Sustainability Standard Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 5 f. UL Product Lens Certification 8. EQ Credit Low Emitting Materials: Volume tracking sheet (for all wet-applied products) and product data, indicating VOC content and emissions testing documents showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials, for the following materials: a. Paints and Coatings b. Adhesives and Sealants c. Flooring d. Composite Wood e. Ceilings f. Wall Panels g. Insulation 9. EQ Credit Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan during construction. See Section 01 8100–Jobsite Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management. a. Provide product data for temporary filtration media and for filtration media used during occupancy. b. Include six photographs with date and timestamp at two different occasions during construction along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of the IAQ management measures. 10. EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment pre-occupancy. See Section 018100 – Jobsite Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management. a. Provide documentation from either: A building flushout at 100% outside air prior to occupancy, or conduct baseline IAQ testing consistent with EPA protocol. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSTAINABLE BUILDING PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A . Integrate sustainable building materials and methods into Work as required to meet or exceed USGBC LEED for New Construction (LEED-NC) v4 Certification. 1. Satisfy prerequisites and credits applicable to Work of this Contract. 2. Submit documentation that demonstrates this performance. 3. Participate as necessary to complete LEED certification application. 4. Conform to documentation requirements for LEED certification. B . Refer to Contract Documents for incorporated sustainable/environmental requirements provisions. C . Substitutions: Conform to provisions of Section 01 2500 – Product Options and Substitution Procedures. 2.2 BUILDING SUPPORT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION A . MR Credit BPDO Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Option 1. Provide at least 20 permanently installed products (sourced from at least 5 different manufacturers) which meet one of the disclosure criteria: 1. Product-Specific Declaration: Valued as one quarter (1/4) of a product. 2. Industry-Wide (Generic) EPD: Valued as one half (1/2) of a product. 3. Product-Specific Type III EPD: Valued as one whole product. B . MR Credit BPDO Sourcing of Raw Materials: Option 2. Provide products that meet at least one of the responsible extraction criteria below for at least 25% by cost, of the total value of permanently installed building products in the project: 1. Extended producer responsibility program. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 7 2. Bio-based materials. 3. Certified Wood. 4. Materials reuse. 5. Recycled content. 6. Regional (within 100 miles of the Project). C . MR Credit BPDO Material Ingredients: Option 1. Provide at least 20 products permanently installed products (sourced from at least 5 different manufacturers) that use any of the following programs to demonstrate the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000 ppm), which meet one of the following disclosure criteria: 1. Health Product Declaration (HPD v1.0, v2.1 and v2.1). 2. Cradle to Cradle Certification (v2 Basic and higher and v3 Bronze and higher). 3. Declare Label. 4. Cradle to Cradle Material Health Certificate. 5. ANSI/BIFMA e3 Furniture Sustainability Standard. 6. UL Product Lens Certification. 2.3 LOW EMITTING MATERIALS A . EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials, General Emissions Requirements: Products must demonstrate they have been tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDHP), Standard Method v1.2-2017 (Standard Method v1.1-2010 will also be acceptable), using the applicable exposure scenario. Manufacturer’s documentation demonstrating compliance must state the range of total VOCs (tVOC) after 14 days measured as specified in the CDPH Standard Method v1.1 as follows: 1. 0.5mg/m3 or less, Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 8 2. Between 0.5 and 5.0 mg/m3 or, 3. 0.50 mg/m3 or more. B . EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials, Paints and Coatings: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and coatings that comply with the limits for VOC content when calculated according to the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1113, effective June 3, 2011: Product Type: Allowable VOC Content (g/L): Bond Breakers 350 Clear Wood Finishes - Varnish 275 Varnish 275 Sanding Sealers 275 Lacquer 275 Concrete-Curing Compounds 100 Concrete Surface Retarder 50 Dry-Fog Coatings 50 Faux Finishing Coatings - Clear Topcoat 100 Faux Finishing Coatings - Decorative Coatings 350 Faux Finishing Coatings - Glazes 350 Faux Finishing Coatings - Japan 350 Faux Finishing Coatings - Trowel Applied Coatings 50 Fire-Proofing Coatings 150 Flats 50 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 9 Floor Coatings 50 Form Release Compound 100 Graphic Arts (Sign) Coatings 150 Industrial Maintenance (IM) Coatings 100 High Temperature IM Coatings 420 Non-Sacrificial Anti-Graffiti Coatings 100 Zinc-Rich IM Primers 100 Magnesite Cement Coatings 450 Mastic Coatings 100 Metallic Pigmented Coatings 150 Multi-Color Coatings 250 Nonflat Coatings 50 Pre-Treatment Wash Primers 420 Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters 100 Reactive Penetrating Sealers 350 Recycled Coatings 250 Rust Preventative Coatings 100 Stone Consolidant 450 Shellac Clear 730 Shellac Pigmented 550 Specialty Primers 100 Stains, Interior 250 Swimming Pool Coatings Repair 340 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 10 Other 340 Waterproofing Sealers 100 Waterproofing Concrete/Masonry Sealers 100 Wood Preservatives 350 C . EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials, Paints and Coatings: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, 90 percent of paints and coatings shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health Standard Method v1.1-2010. Acceptable certifications and labels include but are not limited to: 1. UL Greenguard Gold. 2. SCS Indoor Advantage Gold. 3. Berkeley Analytical ClearChem. 4. Intertek ETL Environmental VOC+. 5. Materials Analytical Services (MAS) Certified Green. D . EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials, Flooring: At least 90% of flooring by cost or by surface area shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health Standard Method v1.2-2017 (v1.1-2010 would also be acceptable). Acceptable certifications and labels include but are not limited to: 1. UL Greenguard Gold. 2. SCS Indoor Advantage Gold. 3. FloorScore. 4. Green Label Plus. 5. Intertek ETL Environmental VOC+. 6. Materials Analytical Services (MAS) Certified Green. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 11 E . EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials, Ceilings: At least 90% of ceilings by cost or by surface area shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health Standard Method v1.2-2017 (v1.1-2010 would also be acceptable).. This includes all ceiling panels, ceiling tile, surface ceiling structures such as gypsum or plaster, suspended systems (including canopies and clouds), and glazed skylights. Overhead structural elements are excluded. Acceptable certifications and labels include but are not limited to: 1. UL Greenguard Gold. 2. SCS Indoor Advantage Gold. 3. Intertek ETL Environmental VOC+. 4. Materials Analytical Services (MAS) Certified Green. F . EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials, Insulation: At least 75% of insulation by cost or by surface area shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health Standard Method v1.2-2017 (v1.1-2010 would also be acceptable). This includes all thermal and acoustic boards, batts, rolls, blankets, sound attenuation fire blankets, foamed-in place, loose-fill, blown, and sprayed insulation. Insulation for HVAC ducts and plumbing piping is excluded. Acceptable certifications and labels include but are not limited to: 1. UL Greenguard Gold. 2. SCS Indoor Advantage Gold. 3. Intertek ETL Environmental VOC+. 4. Materials Analytical Services (MAS) Certified Green. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LEED COMPLIANCE - GENERAL A . Coordinate with team to meet LEED Prerequisites and Credits as identified in Figure 1, at end of this Section, as required for achieve LEED Certification. B . Prior to beginning Work of this Contract, verify construction conditions as acceptable to achieve LEED Credit and Prerequisite requirements. 1. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to Owner’s LEED Project Administrator, Owner, and Architect. C . Correct non-conforming work failing to meet LEED requirements at Contractor’s expense. 1. Submit documentation as necessary to show conformance of corrected work. 2. Owner’s LEED Project Administrator and GBCI will be sole judge in determining conformance to LEED Credit requirements. 3.2 IAQ MANAGEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION A . Conform to Section 01 8110 - Construction Indoor Air Quality Management. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A . Comply with Section 01 7419, Construction Waste Management 3.4 COMMISSIONING A . Comply with and provide support for project commissioning requirements of Section 01 9113 – General Commissioning Requirements. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 35 15 October 20, 2021 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 35 15 - 13 3.5 PROHIBITION OF SMOKING A . EQ Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control – Prohibit smoking within the building during and after construction. See Section 01 3100 – Project Management and Coordination and Section 01 8100 – Jobsite Indoor Air Quality Management. Provide proof of permanent no smoking signage installed within 10 feet of all building entrances indicating no smoking policy. END OF SECTION LEED v4 for BD+C: New Construction Project Checklist Project Name Family First CC Project Manager Mugdha Mokashi Date 10/29/2019 Max Pts 46 12 9 45 Total 111 Y ??N Credit Phase Status Lead 1 IP1 Integrative Process D Done ArchE 1 3 2 11 Possible Points: 16 LT 1 LEED ND Location D NA 16 1 LT 2 Sensitive Land Protection D Done ArchE 1 2 LT 3 High Priority Site D NA 2 2 3 LT 4 Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses D Done ArchE 5 5 LT 5 Access to Quality Transportation D NA 5 1 LT 6 Bicycle Facilities D NA 1 1 LT 7 Reduced Parking Footprint D Attempting ArchE 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm carshare count due Baylis 1 LT 8 Green Vehicles D Attempting ArchE 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm no of EV ready spots due Baylis 5 1 4 Possible Points: 10 Y SSp 1 Const. Activity Pollution Prevention C Req CPL Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Provide plan and narratives as needed CD CPL Provide supporting implementation backup - inspection reports/photos Final GC Certified 40 to 49 points Silver 50 to 59 points Gold 60 to 79 points Platinum 80 to 110 Sustainable Sites Location and Transportation Do not exceed code parking AND achieve 20% reduction from ITE base ratios (if no points in LT4 and 5)or 40% reduction (if >1 point under LT 4 or 5). And Preferred parking for 5% of spaces. (V4.1) do not exceed code and achieve 30% reduction OR is dedicated parking for carshare option feasible (provide 1 carshare parking for every 100 occupants) At least 4 required for 300+ occupants. Project has 119 total parking spots. ITE requirement is 92 For v4.1 - 4 carshare spaces required with a 2-year agreement with carshare company Designate 5% of all parking spaces preferred for green vehicles AND install Level 2 EV charging for 2% of all parking.(V4.1) install 2% of spots with EV stations (3 spots) OR install 6% of spots to be EV ready Project has 119 total parking spots. Will require 8 spots to be EV ready. Currently showing 5 on Sheet E101 Implement TESC plan which conforms to the more stringent of 2012 USEPA construction general permit or local equivalent. Provide Plan, narratives on stringency and compliance, and GC declaration OR photos OR implementation narrative. Local practices mostly comply. 1 SS 1 Site Assessment D Attempting ArchE 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Provide SEPA Checklist due Baylis/CPL 1 1 SS 2 Site Dev.-Protect/Restore Habitat C Attempting Owner 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Decide if need to pursue later CD Owner 1 SS 3 D Attempting ArchE 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Finalize and document after CD set CD ArchE 3 SS 4 D NA 3 2 SS 5 D Attempting ArchE 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm roofing and paving submittals CD ArchE 1 SS 6 Light Pollution Reduction D Attempting SiderByers 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm whether Renton has night sky requirements due SiderByers Identify lighting zone and confirm fixture requirements needed to comply due SiderByers 4 2 5 Possible Points: 11 Y WEp 1 Outdoor Water Use Reduction D Req Weisman Req. Requirement Notes Project will pursue BUG rating method. Water Efficiency If greenfield, protect 40% from all activity AND restore 30% of previously disturbed site with native or adapted veg. Projects with 1.5 FAR may include green roof if plantings qualify, restore all disturbed soils to be vegetated (2 p). OR Provide $0.40 per sf of total site area to a qualified trust or conservation org (1 p). (V4.1) $0.20 per sf of total site area Project boundary is LEED boundary. Provide 30% or more of total site area - must be 25% vegetated (no turf), physically accessible, and encourage social or physical activity, gardening, habitat or visual interest. Projects with FAR 1.5 can include roof area if accessible for both pedestrian hardscape and vegetation. Using the property boundary, site area - 128,899 SF. Qualifying Open area is 62,245 SF which is 48% of site area. Of this Open Space, 24,997 SF is vegetation, amounting to 40% of open space Open Space Rainwater Management Heat Island Reduction Complete and document a site survey or assessment that includes: topography, hydrology, climate, vegetation, soils, human use and human health effects. (V4.1) no TR-55 Provide SEPA checklist or EIS and any early site reports. No irrigation after 2 yr. establishment or reduce irrigation by 30% for calculated baseline for peak watering month. Reduction must be due to species selection and irrigation system efficiency using EPAs WaterSense Budget Tool. Irrigation system reduction is required Option 1: Non roof and Roof surfaces meet criteria using weighted average calculation (2 p). OR Option 2: A minimum of 75% of parking under cover. Light colored roofing and concrete sidewalks with asphalt parking typically comply. Using BUG rating or calculation method - meet Uplight rating for the project's lighting zone AND backlight and glare ratings based on distance from boundary and mounting location. Next Steps Confirm irrigation is intended and design will comply due Weisman Y WEp 2 Indoor Water Use Reduction D Req ArchE Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm FTEs and visitors due Owner Specify appropriate fixtures: 1.0 gpf toilet, 0.125 urinal, 0.5 gpm public lav faucet, 1.5 gpm kitchen faucet Baylis Y WEp 3 Building-Level Water Metering D Req ArchE Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Provide draft letter if needed due ArchE 1 1 WE 1 Outdoor Water Use Reduction D Attempting Weisman 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm irrigation strategy due Weisman 2 1 3 WE 2 Indoor Water Use Reduction D Attempting ArchE 6 Requirement Notes Next Steps Provide fixture schedules due SiderByers Specify appropriate fixtures due Baylis 2 WE 3 Cooling Tower Water Use D N/A 2 1 WE 4 Water Metering D Attempting SiderByers 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Show submeter on plans due SiderByers 14 3 1 15 Possible Points: 33 Y EAp 1 Fundamental Commissioning and Verif.C Req Welsh Req. Install permanent water meters that serve at least 80% of use for two or more of the following subsystems - irrigation, indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings, domestic hot water, boiler, reclaimed water or other process water. Likely to submeter irrigation and domestic hot water.Confirm Owner commitment letter required Option 1: No irrigation beyond two-year establishment period. (2 p) OR Option 2: Reduce irrigation by at least 50% from the calculated baseline for the site's peak watering month. (1 p) See WEp1.Confirm if 50% reduction achieveable Achieve further water use reductions with high efficiency fixtures and fittings, and alternative water sources - 1 p for every 5% savings after mandatory 20% required. Specify appropriate fixtures - 1.28 gpf WC, 0.125 gpf UR, 0.5 gpm lav, 1.5 gpm kitchen. Currently at 30.2% Confirm FTE and visitors. To get 35%, 0.35 gpm lav and 1.25 gpm kitchen Energy and Atmosphere Reduce water consumption by 20% from baseline by installing fixtures (WaterSense labeled if eligible), and appliance and process equipment to required efficiency and process standards. FTEs - 10 for medical clinic and 10 assumed for community center. Average daily visitors anticipated 12 for medical clinic (based on area) and 287 for community center. Project can achieve 30.2% with 1.28 WC, 0.125 UR, 0.5 Lav and 1.5 kitchen Install permanent water meters that measure the total potable water use for the building and associated grounds.Commit to share with USGBC for 5-yr period Requirement Notes Next Steps Finalize OPR and BOD due Welsh Y EAp 2 Minimum Energy Performance C Req ArchE Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Energy model will be finalized with CD set CD ArchE Y EAp 3 Building-Level Energy Metering C Req ArchE Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Provide draft letter if required due ArchE Y EAp 4 Fundamental Refrigerant Management D Req ArchE Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Document when MEP plans finalized CD ArchE 5 1 EA 1 Enhanced Commissioning C Attempting Welsh 6 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm scope of Cx due Baylis 9 9 EA 2 Optimize Energy Performance D Attempting ArchE 18 Requirement Notes Next Steps Energy model will be finalized with CD set CD ArchE 1 EA 3 Advanced Energy Metering D Attempting SiderByers 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm compliant meters due SiderByers Energy model based on DD progress set, with C406.3 lighting package Points for levels of energy use reduction beyond required. Install advance energy metering which meets required characteristics for all whole building sources and any end use of 10% or more of total annual consumption. Confirm which submeters Do not use CFC's in HVAC & R equipment. Project will comply. Option 1, Path 1: Use a 3rd party Cx who in addition to Fundamental Commissioning will review submittals; develop a systems manual; verify training of personnel; perform post occupancy review at 8-10 months, develop an ongoing commissioning plan. (3 p) OR Option 1, Path 2: Monitoring-Based approach that combines achieving Option 1 with an M&V approach. (4pts) AND/OR Option 2: Complete an envelope commissioning process per NIBS Guidelines. (2 p) JRS Engineering for envelope testing. Welsh for commissioning. Confirm opting for Option 1 - Path 1 - Enhanced commissioning (3 pts) and Option 2 - Envelope commissioning (2 pts) Welsh is onboard. Require OPR and BOD Option 1 whole building energy simulation to demonstrate 5% reduction over ASHRAE 90.1 - 2010 via energy model. OR Option 2 Prescriptive Compliance by meeting ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide. OR Option 3 Prescriptive compliance using Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide. DD set received. Minimum 5% reduction achieved over ASHRAE 2010 Install base building energy meters or submeters that can be aggregated to provide base building-level data representing total building energy consumption. Commit to sharing data with USGBC at one month intervals for 5 years after typical occupancy begins. Owner to hire Commissioning Authority prior to the end of DD. Systems include HVAC&R, domestic hot water pumps and controls, electrical service and distribution, lighting and controls, renewable energy. Exterior enclosure to be included in OPR/BOD. Documentation includes facility operations and maintenance plan. Owner commitment letter required. 2 EA 4 Demand Response D N/A 2 1 2 EA 5 Renewable Energy Production C Attempting Baylis 3 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm panel size if PV included due Baylis 1 EA 6 Enhanced Refrigerant Management D N/A 1 2 EA 7 Green Power and Carbon Offsets C Attempting ArchE 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Revisit when energy model is complete CD ArchE 5 3 1 4 Possible Points: 13 Y MRp 1 Storage and Collection of Recyclables D Req Baylis Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm intended interior collection areas for batteries, mercury-containing lamps or electronic waste (choose 2) due Baylis Y MRp 2 C&D Waste Management Planning C Req GC Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Develop source separation strategy and contract with hauler due GC 1 2 2 MR 1 Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction C Attempting ArchE 5 Requirement Notes Next Steps Takeoffs will be needed for all permanently installed materials in the project due GC Confirm whether additional services is desired Owner 1 1 MR 2 BPDO - Environmental Product Decl.C Attempting Baylis/GC 2 Typical CWM plan complies, but 5 source separation strategies will be needed for points. Option 1: Historic building reuse OR Option 2: Renovation of abandoned or blighted building (6 p). OR Option 3: Reuse or salvage 25%/50%/75% building and materials from on or offsite site (2-5 p). OR Option 4: Whole building life cycle assessment showing 10% reduction over baseline of at least 3 of 6 impact categories (must include global warming) and none may increase more than 5%. (3 p). (V4.1) Option 4, Path 1- Conduct LCA (1 p), Path 2- Show 5% reduction (2 p) OR 10% reduction (3 p) in 3 of 6 impact categories 1 p for just doing the LCA. Wood structure should make it possible to get 10% reduction Purchase 50% (1 p) or 100% (2 p) of energy costs for a minimum of 5 years from Green-e certified renewable sources in the US. Points feasible if needed. Provide easily accessible area for collection and storage of recyclables - minimum of paper, cardboard, glass, plastics and metals. Provide safe collection area for two of the following - batteries, mercury-containing lamps or electronic waste. Straightforward to comply with trash/recycling enclosure & identified collection areas inside. Implement construction waste and demolition diversion plan that identifies at least five (5) materials and whether waste will be source separated or commingled. Use renewable energy - on site or community systems - points base on percent by Cost: 1% (1 p), 5% (2 p), 10% (3 p) Confirm if solar panels will be included. 4 kW Panel needed for 1% Materials and Resources Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm strategy due Baylis 1 1 MR 3 BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials C Attempting Baylis/GC 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm likelihood based on estimating GC 1 1 MR 4 BPDO - Material Ingredients C Attempting Baylis/GC 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm strategy due ArchE 2 MR 5 C&D Waste Management C Attempting GC 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Provide reporting monthly Cons GC 7 2 3 4 Indoor Environmental Quality Possible Points: 16 Y EQp 1 Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance D Req ArchE Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm airflow monitoring due SiderByers Provide plans showing outside air to each space due SiderByers Option 1: Divert 50% CD waste and 3 waste streams (1 p) OR 75% and 4 waste streams (2 p) OR Generate 2.5 lbs. of waste per sf of floor area or less. (2 p) Exemplary point for both options. Meet ventilation requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2010, including air flow monitoring stations. HVAC units larger than 1,000 CFM outside air must incorporate airflow monitoring. Option 1: Use 20 different permanently installed products from at least 5 different manufacturers that have publicly released sustainable reporting from their raw material suppliers. (1 p) OR Option 2: Use building materials for 25% by cost that combined meet one of 5 criteria - "Take back" programs, bio-based material, FSC, reused, or recycled. Double for local (100 mile radius) and no more than 30% structure (1 p). (V4.1) Use bldg materials for 20% by cost that combined meet one of 5 criteria - "Take back" programs, bio-based material, FSC, reused, or recycled. Double for local (100 mile radius) Option 1: Use 20 different permanently installed products from at least 5 different manufacturers that publish the chemical inventory to 0.1% of their products through direct disclosure or third party certification - health product declaration, Cradle to Cradle certification, or other approved program. (1 p) AND/OR Option 2: Use permanently installed materials with optimized ingredients for 25% by cost of building materials - GreenScreen, Cradle to Cradle, REACH, or other (1 p). AND/OR Option 3: Use permanently installed materials with 25% by cost able to provide supply chain documentation for worker safety and health. (1 p) Likely to comply with Option 1 with typical materials. Is there a spreadsheet indicating the CSI sections identified for products to meet this credit? Depends on how materials are sourced for pricing Source separation of at least 4 waste streams and 75% diversion required. Option 1: Use at least 20 different permanently installed products sourced from at least 5 different manufacturers that have Environmental Product Declarations (1 p). AND/OR Option 2: Use third party certified products that demonstrate impact reduction in min 3 of 6 environmental impacts - GWP, ODP, acidification, eutrophication, ground- level ozone, and non renewable energy use - for 50%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the project (1 p). Local materials count double. No more than 30% from structure/enclosure products. Is there a spreadsheet indicating the sections identified for products to meet this credit? Y EQp 2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control D Req ArchE Req. Requirement Notes Next Steps Provide plans indicating signage locations and verbiage due Baylis Provide no smoking policy Owner 2 EQ 1 Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies D Attempting ArchE 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm entryways will comply due Baylis Confirm MERV13 filtration and separate exhaust SiderByers Confirm increased ventilation or CO2 sensor SiderByers 2 1 EQ 2 Low-Emitting Materials C Attempting ArchE 3 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm categories to pursue due Baylis 1 EQ 3 Construction IAQ Management Plan C Attempting ArchE 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Provide date stamped photos of IAQ plan measures during construction due GC 1 1 EQ 4 Indoor Air Quality Assessment C Attempting SiderByers 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm desire to pursue due Owner 1 EQ 5 Thermal Comfort D Attempting SiderByers 1 (v4.1) 75% by volume or surface area for adhesives, paints, comp wood and wall panels (incl all finish wall treatments); 90% by cost or surface area for flooring and ceilings (incl all suspended structures and skylights); 75% by cost for insulation and furniture. 2pts for 3 cat; 3pts for 4 cat. Emission standard CDPH v1.2-2017, SCAQMD 2016 for paints, SCAQMD 2017 for adhesives. (v4.1) Option 1: Full flush out before occupancy of 14,000 cf OSA/gsf while maintaining 60 - 80 degree temp and 60% max humidity OR Partial flush of 3,500 cf OSA/gsf and then proceeding during occupancy at lower rate (1 p) AND/OR Option 2 , Path 1: Air testing of particulate matter and inorganic gases to meet target limits. (1 p) AND/OR Path 2: Air testing of VOCs (1 p). Potential target categories flooring, ceilings, insulation and paints/coatings to achieve 3 points Implement IAQ Management Plan, including keeping HVAC equipment and vent openings sealed, protecting absorptive materials from moisture, and implementing practices that protect air quality. Permanent signage must be installed at all entries. Option 1: Implement entryway systems (10' inside in direction of travel), MERV 13 filtration and separately exhaust chemical spaces. (1 p) OR Option 2: Exterior contamination prevention (evaluate ambient air quality at intakes), increased ventilation, monitor CO2, additional contaminant control or monitoring if applicable. (1 p) Projects can typically comply with Option 1 and Option 2 increased ventilation or CO2 sensors? No Smoking in building or within 25 feet of openings, or on site. Signage to be posted within 10' of all building entrances. Typical IAQ plan - ArchE can provide sample if desired. (v4.1) Option 2 Air Testing may be feasible Requirement Notes Next Steps Indicate individual thermal controls on plans due SiderByers 1 1 EQ 6 Interior Lighting D Attempting ArchE 2 Requirement Notes Next Steps Indicate dimmable fixtures and task lights on plans due SiderByers 3 EQ 7 Daylight D NA ArchE 3 1 EQ 8 Quality Views D Attempting ArchE 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Evaluate furniture plan for views due ArchE 1 EQ 9 Acoustic Performance D Attempting ArchE 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Evaluate feasibility due lead 6 Innovation Possible Points: 6 1 In 1.1 Pilot - Integrative Materials Analysis Attempting ArchE 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Await material selections in EPD/HPD categories due ArchE 1 In 1.2 Innovation - O&M Starter: Green Cleaning/IPM Attempting ArchE/Owner 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm pursuit due Owner 1 In 1.3 Innovation - Education Attempting Owner 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm pursuit due Owner (v4.1) For all occupied spaces, meet two of the following criteria: HVAC background noise; Sound transmission; or Reverberation time. Acoustic engineer likely needed. Meet all three for ID. Confirm if green cleaning and IPM in place. ArchEcology can provide these as Optional Service Confirm which 2 seem feasible Register for pilot credit to analyze three products for life cycle information. Easily achievable. Develop and implement green cleaning and integrated pest management plans per LEED requirements. Meet 2 of 3 requirements: case study, public tours or permanent signage. Direct line of site to outdoors for 75% of regularly occupied area AND meet 2 of 4 view quality factors - multiple lines of sight 90% apart; flora/fauna/sky/movement; unobstructed views within 3 times head height; view factor of 3 or greater per cited study. ArchE to analyze if feasible Confirm acoustic engineer on board Design HVAC and envelope to meet ASHRAE 55-2010 (or ISO 7730:2005 or CEN15251:2007) AND provide individual thermal controls to 50% of individual occupant spaces and ALL shared multi-occupant spaces. Controls to address air temp, radiant temp, air speed or humidity. Confirm whether thermal comfort controls is possible Option 1: For 90% of individual occupant spaces and all multi-occupant spaces, provide controls with at least 3 levels of lighting. (1 p) Confirm lighting controls 1 In 1.4 Innovation - LED Lighting Attempting SiderByers 1 1 In 1.5 Innovation - O&M Starter: Site Management & Facility Maintenance Plans 1 Requirement Notes Next Steps Confirm pursuit due Owner 1 In 2 LEED Accredited Professional D Attempting ArchE 1 1 1 2 2 Regional Priority threshold Possible Points: 5 1 RP1 Demand Response 1 2 1 RP2 Renewable Energy Production 2 3 1 RP3 BPDO -EPDs 1 2 1 RP4 BPDO- Sourcing 1 2 1 RP5 Rainwater management 3 3 1 RP6 Indoor Water Use 4 6 Develop and implement plans for site management and facility maintenance per LEED guidelines. Are there any such plans in place already? Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 40 00 October 20, 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 40 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Qualifications. B . Quality assurance submittals. C . References and standards. D . Mockups. E . Tolerances. F . Manufacturer's field Services. G . Defect assessment. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for submittal requirements of quality assurance submittals. B . 01 42 00 - References: for definitions, standards and abbreviations. C . 01 43 39 - Mockups: for assembly mockups. D . 01 45 54 - Building Envelope Air Barrier Testing: for whole building air barrier testing. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A . The following are minimum qualification requirements if not specified otherwise in individual specification sections. B . Qualified Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years experience. C . Qualified Designer: Professional engineer with 5 years of documented experience in design of this work and licensed in the location of the project. D . Qualified Fabricators: Company specializing in performing the work specified with minimum 5 years experience on projects of similar size and complexity. E . Qualified Installer: Company specializing in installation of the work specified with minimum 2 years of documented experience. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A . Quality assurance submittals are defined as informational submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 40 00 October 20, 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 40 00 - 2 B . Structural Submittals: 1. The following shop drawings / submittals shall be provided for review and approval by the structural engineer prior to fabrication or delivery. a. Concrete Mix Designs b. Reinforcing Steel Shop Drawings c. Structural Steel d. Misc. Steel e. Wood I-Joists f. Glulam and Structural Composite Lumber Beams g. Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility C . Special Inspections: 1. Special Inspection shall be provided by an independent testing laboratory per the requirements of IBC 2015 Chapter 17. 2. Soils - periodic 3. Concrete Construction - periodic 4. Steel Construction - periodic 5. Field Welding - continuous 6. Post installed concrete anchors - continuous 7. Wood Roof Diaphragm nailing - periodic D . Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information. E . Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 40 00 October 20, 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 40 00 - 3 2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. F . Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. G . Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. H . Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit report electronically within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. 2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 1.5 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A . For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. 1. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to require the more stringent of any duplicate standards. B . Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C . Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D . Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E . Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F . Neither the contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of the parties to the Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 40 00 October 20, 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 40 00 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING AND INSPECTION A . See individual specification sections and applicable codes for testing and inspection required. B . Testing and Inspection Agencies: 1. Owner will employ services of an independent testing agency to perform testing and inspection unless expressly indicated as Contractor employed independent testing and inspection agency. 2. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform testing and inspection expressly indicated as Contractor employed independent testing and inspection agency. 3. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Contractor Employed Agency Requirements: a. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, and ASTM C1093. b. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. c. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the location of the project. d. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program. C . Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. D . Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 40 00 October 20, 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 40 00 - 5 E . Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections in a manner to allow for efficient use of inspecting agency's time. Failed, delayed, or canceled inspections shall be paid for by the Contractor. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. F . Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. G . Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.2 MOCKUPS A . Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B . Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C . Accepted mockups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D . Where mockup has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mockup and clear area when directed to do so. 3.3 TOLERANCES A . Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B . Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C . Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 40 00 October 20, 2021 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 40 00 - 6 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A . When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B . Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. Observer subject to approval of Owner. C . Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.5 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A . Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B . If, in the opinion of Architect and Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect and Owner will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 42 00 October 20, 2021 REFERENCES Project #16-0996 01 42 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Definitions. B . Industry Standards. C . Abbreviations and Acronyms. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A . General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B . "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C . "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D . "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E . "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F . "Furnish": Supply and deliver to project site ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations G . "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H . "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I . "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A . Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B . Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 42 00 October 20, 2021 REFERENCES Project #16-0996 01 42 00 - 2 C . Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. D . Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A . Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 43 39 October 20, 2021 MOCKUPS Project #16-0996 01 43 39 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Visual assembly and Performance mockups. B . Testing of in place assemblies. C . Testing of temporary performance assembly mockups as Alternate scope. D . Retesting and corrective measures. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for general mockup, testing and inspection requirements. B . Division 03, 04, 05, 07 and 08 sections enclosing the building. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Presubmittal Meeting: 1. Meet two weeks or more prior to submittal of all wall assemblies to discuss design intent of the Architect, project specific challenges and options in the design of the wall systems. 2. Follow the agenda for a Preinstallation meeting and modify as necessary. a. Agenda will include: 1) Mockup construction. 2) Testing on facility. 3) Procedures for retesting and corrective measures. B . Preinstallation Meeting: Hold Preinstallation meeting a minimum of 1 week prior to beginning installation of mockup. 1. Beyond typical issues for installation discuss scheduling for on-site construction testing and recovery planning for failure of mockup to meet requirements. 2. Include process to modify or reconstruct mockups as required to achieve accepted results. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Shop Drawings: For exterior enclosure assembly mockups. Include plans, elevations, sections, and full-size details. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly seismic performance, expansion and contraction, and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of exterior enclosure assemblies, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage templates and details. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 43 39 October 20, 2021 MOCKUPS Project #16-0996 01 43 39 - 2 c. Interface with adjoining building construction. d. Reference to detail numbers indicated on the Contract Documents. e. Flashing and drainage. B . Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. C . Seismic Qualification Certificates: For exterior enclosure assemblies, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. D . Source quality-control reports. E . Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified per ASTM E699 for testing indicated. 1.6 VISUAL ASSEMBLY AND PERFORMANCE MOCKUPS A . Visual and Performance Mockups: Build visual mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. Visual and performance mockup indicated on drawings will also be used to verify constructibility of transitions between various exterior envelope assemblies and to set expectations for workmanship, as it relates to envelope detailing. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Locate visual and performance mockup in an area approved by Owner and Owner. The location shall allow for frequent access by construction workers, Owner, and Architect during envelope construction. 1.7 PERFORMANCE ASSEMBLY MOCKUPS A . Performance Mockups: 1. Performance mockups are constructed for testing of materials and fabrication and installation techniques and methods. a. Build in-place performance typical wall areas as indicated on Drawings and as described in schedule below b. Drawings of mockups will be included in the Construction Documents. 2. Perform testing on all field performance mockups according to requirements indicated. 3. Mockups must pass all tests prior to any additional construction of exterior enclosure assemblies. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if specifically allowed by the Contract Documents and undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 43 39 October 20, 2021 MOCKUPS Project #16-0996 01 43 39 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING OF ENVELOPE ASSEMBLIES ON THE BUILDING A . General 1. Contractor must build time into the construction schedule for mockup review, reconstruction, and approval. a. Repeat rejected mockups until approved. b. Where mockups are not accepted due to failure to meet requirements, modify or reconstruct mockups as required to achieve accepted results. c. Failure and rejection of mockups is not grounds for a delay claim. B . Enclosure Assembly Mockup: 1. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of exterior enclosure assemblies shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed assemblies with specified requirements. a. Test with an interior, fully supported chamber, to allow parties to view results. The remaining tests can be conducted with the use of smaller chambers fabricated from transparent sheet materials on a solid frame. 1) The chamber locations will be selected to encompass as many typical details as possible, such as swing and sliding doors, operable vent, in-slab / fire vent hoods, fixed light / spandrel / panel, window bypass and tie-ins to adjacent systems. 2) Construct a stand alone chamber located on the site as indicated or as directed by the Architect. 3) Test Chambers: a) Steel studs and plywood or gypsum board. Steel studs, top and bottom track, stud spacing and fastening shall be same as exterior walls (4 inch studs at 16 inches on center). Install gypsum on the exterior side of the test chamber. b) Seal or tape joints and to adjacent concrete slabs and columns. Seal the chamber to the exterior enclosure assembly beyond the edge of the test section. c) Access door 3’0 x 6’8” to allow entrance and exit into chamber. Door must be removable and sealable for air leakage. d) Provide water and electricity at the location of the chamber. Electricity both in and outside, water outside only. b. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing, but not more than 0.60 cfm/sq. ft. (2.25 L/s per sq. m), of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E783 at a minimum static-air- pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. c. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested per ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft. (575 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 43 39 October 20, 2021 MOCKUPS Project #16-0996 01 43 39 - 4 d. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect or failed during the ASTM E1105 test shall be tested per AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. e. “Water penetration shall be defined as the appearance of any water on the interior side of any part of the glazed wall assembly, including the interface locations with adjacent envelope systems, that is not contained and drained back to the exterior, or that can cause damage to adjacent materials or finishes. Water fully contained in drained flashings, gutters, and sills is not considered water penetration 2. Test Area Timing and Frequency. a. Test Area: Two bays wide, by one story of each exterior enclosure assembly(s), with transition assemblies. Budget for three locations total, with specific locations identified by Architect and Owner. 1) Test area will incorporate, at a minimum, one of the opaque wall assemblies, a portion of the curtain wall. 2) If not shown, perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect. b. Test Timing. 1) Perform Stand alone field or laboratory tests prior well ahead of actual construction to allow time for analysis of the results and documentation of the results. 2) Perform Field tests on the first completed portion of actual construction. This will most probably require “out of sequence” construction to complete the(se) portion(s) of the exterior envelope to allow for testing. a) No further construction of the exterior envelope may continue until a complete set of successful test results are achieved. 3. Test Area Timing and Frequency for water spray test. a. Test Area: A minimum area of 100 sf of each exterior enclosure assembly(s) incorporating as many edge and intermediary joints as possible. b. Timing: Randomly at the discretion of the architect with 48 hours notice. c. Frequency: 3 times over the course of construction. 3.2 RETESTING AND CORRECTIVE MEASURES A . Assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. If the assemblies fail to meet the requirements, the reason for failure shall be determined and repairs shall be made. The assembly(s) shall be retested and inspected at the Contractor’s cost, until it passes the requirements. The agreed upon repairs will form the typical installation detailing for the assemblies. 2. Incorporate corrective measures, resulting from test or inspection failures, into all finished work to provide specified system requirements. B . Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ASSEMBLY MOCKUPS A . Temporary Visual Assembly and Performance Mockup: 1. Assembly Mockup as indicated on drawings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 43 39 October 20, 2021 MOCKUPS Project #16-0996 01 43 39 - 5 B . In-place Performance Testing Mockups: Three locations on the building as described above. C . In-place Visual Mockups: 1. Mockups for interior finish materials as specified in the related sections. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 45 54 October 20, 2021 BUILDING ENVELOPE AIR BARRIER TESTING Project #16-0996 01 45 54 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Pressurized Air Barrier Testing. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: for components of air barrier. B . Division 03, 04, 05, 07 and 08 sections enclosing the building: for components of air barrier. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Air Barrier System: Combinations of air barrier assemblies that provides designated plane of reduced air flow between different environments of building enclosure system. B . Air Barrier Assembly: Air barrier materials and components that provide designated plane of reduced air flow between environments in portions of building enclosure system. C . Air Barrier Material: Primary element that provides designated plane of reduced air flow between different environments. D . Accessory Material: Transitional component of air barrier that provides continuity. E . Air Leakage Rate: Rate of air flow in liters per second (L/s), per unit area in square meters (m2), per unit of static pressure differential in Pascals (Pa). F . Air Permeance Rating: Quantitative measure of air diffusion through set surface area of material within a given time period under pressure differential between two sides of a material (in liters per second per square meter). G . Water Vapor Permeability: Coefficient of permeance to unit film thickness. Do not use except where film thickness is known and material is homogeneous. H . Water Vapor Permeance: Ratio of unit water vapor transmission ratio (WVTR) to vapor pressure between two parallel surfaces of a flat material of known thickness. I . Water Vapor Transmission Rate (WVTR): Steady water vapor flow in unit time through unit area of between specific parallel surfaces of a material, under specific conditions of temperature and humidity at each surface. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A . 51-11C WAC - Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. B . ASTM E1186 - Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems. C . ASTM E1827 - Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an Orifice Blower Door. D . ASTM E779 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 45 54 October 20, 2021 BUILDING ENVELOPE AIR BARRIER TESTING Project #16-0996 01 45 54 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Air Barrier Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Accepted by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction to perform testing and investigations of whole building air barrier. 2. ABAA affiliated, specializing in work of this Section. Able to show minimum 2 years experience testing to determine air leakage of air barrier assembly. Accepted by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3. Employing qualified personnel to perform testing and inspections required under work of this Section. a. Continuous Air Barrier Pressure Testing Personnel: Able to documented minimum 2 years of experience testing to ASTM E779. b. Infrared Thermographer: ANST Level I Certified to perform infrared diagnostic evaluation or documented minimum 2 years experience performing building infrared thermography equivalent in scope and quality as specified by this Section. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A . Testing Plan and Procedures: Submit testing plan and procedures. Include a complete set of report forms and sample documentation. 1. Indicate extent of testing area(s) if building is divided into sections. Preparation and testing sequence, temporary construction required including, details for contractor to use when preparing site and openings for testing, location and construction of partitions/separations. 2. Include procedures and coordination with other work in progress and a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations. B . Preliminary Report: Submit preliminary report showing a pass or fail test result, all data used in calculation of test using one of the following: infrared scanning thermal images, smoke tracer, air-flow measuring, generated sound and sound detection, tracer gas detection documenting air leakage and locations of leaks. 1. Include suggested remedies. C . Final Report: Submit a final report showing a pass or fail test result, all data used in calculation of test and infrared scanning thermal images, smoke tracer, air-flow measuring, generated sound and sound detection, or tracer gas detection documenting air leakage and locations of leaks. 1. Include suggested remedies. 1.7 PRESSURIZED AIR BARRIER TESTING A . Testing Agencies: 1. Morrison Hershfield. a. Website: https://morrisonhershfield.com. 2. Neudorfer Engineers, Inc. a. Website: http://www.neudorferengineers.com. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 45 54 October 20, 2021 BUILDING ENVELOPE AIR BARRIER TESTING Project #16-0996 01 45 54 - 3 3. Substitution Requests: Submit under provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 4. Testing Agency Requirements: a. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of agency's duties. b. Perform testing and investigations conforming to Section C402.5.1.2 of 51-11C WAC. c. Where exceeding 0.40 cfm/sq ft at 75 Pascals pressure differential, perform additional testing to determine air leakage pathways, including testing methods to ASTM E1186 and infrared imaging as needed. d. Complete report prior to occupancy in conformance with 2015 Washington State Energy Code (WSEC). B . Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate with testing and inspection agencies. 2. Provide access to work in order to expedite provisions of this Section. 3. Coordinate, sequence, and schedule construction activities to allow testing and inspections to proceed without interruption or conditions resulting in inconclusive results. a. Give minimum 10 days notice to allow time for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests by testing and inspection agencies 4. Fill plumbing traps with water (toilets, sinks, floor drains, waterless urinals must be primed). 5. Shut off the HVAC system - or leave in pilot mode (to avoid introducing air movement that is not included in the calculations). 6. Disable combustion equipment or leave in “pilot” position. 7. Seal all intentional openings in building envelope with air tight plastic film (such as carpet protection plastic): a. Make-up air intakes. b. Air intake louvers. c. Exhaust louvers. d. Plumbing exhausts. e. Pressure relief dampers or louvers. f. Dryer or exhaust vent dampers. g. Any other locations where air leakage can occur within the mechanical system during inactive periods. h. Any other intentional holes. 8. Close and lock exterior windows and doors. Close any vents within window frames. 9. Prop interior doors open in accordance to create a single uniform zone. 10. Where drop ceilings are installed in a location that constitutes a barrier to air flow between the testing equipment and the plane of air tightness of the space being tested, remove ceiling tiles at a rate of one per 500 sq. ft. to prevent movement of tiles during test and to ensure a uniform pressure within plenum space. Additional tiles can be removed to ensure a uniform pressure distribution in the plenum space. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 45 54 October 20, 2021 BUILDING ENVELOPE AIR BARRIER TESTING Project #16-0996 01 45 54 - 4 11. Install exterior electrical box caps (if applicable) 12. If building is to be tested in sections, provide temporary air sealing at testing boundaries at elevators and in stairwells at floor levels as discussed with MH and shown on provided building sections. 13. Maintain copies of inspections, testing, and laboratory reports at Project Site as Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . General: Prepare for and conduct testing in accordance with ASTM E779 and ASTM E1827 and Testing Plan submitted prior to construction. B . Verify that the permanent and temporary portions of the continuous air barrier system are ready for air leakage testing procedures. C . Verify temperature differential and wind conditions prior to testing in accordance with ASTM E779 before beginning. 3.2 PRELIMINARY TESTING A . Test the exterior envelope of the building for air infiltration prior to installation of interior finish and exterior glazing. 3.3 FINAL TESTING A . Follow preparation, testing, and reporting requirements of ASTM E779, ASTM E1827 and ASTM E1186, along with the approved Testing Plan submitted prior to construction. 3.4 DEFECT CORRECTION A . Repair or replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. 1. Review suggested remedies for defects with Architect. 2. Architect will provide direction and details to correct any deficiencies. 3. Retest the Work or portion of the Work. B . If, allowed by code and in the opinion of Architect and Owner, it is not practical to repair, or remove and replace the Work, Architect and Owner will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 50 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 50 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Project identification sign. B . Field offices. C . Temporary utilities. D . Temporary controls. E . Temporary enclosures. F . Security requirements. G . Vehicular access and parking. H . Waste removal facilities and services. I . Pollution prevention and control. J . Removal of temporary utilities, facilities and controls. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 57 00 - Temporary Erosion Control. B . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: for additional waste removal requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Temporary Controls Plan: 1. Project Identification Sign: Location and details of construction. 2. Temporary Utilities: Locations and details of capacities. 3. Temporary Controls: a. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. b. Dust Control Plan. c. Noise Control Plan. d. Pest and Rodent Control Plan. e. Pollution Control Plan. 4. Temporary Enclosures: Locations of barriers and enclosures and details of construction. 5. Security Requirements. 6. Vehicular Access and Parking: Location and requirements of use. 7. Waste Removal: Locations and details of construction. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 50 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 50 00 - 2 8. Removal Plan: Timing and process of removal. 1.4 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A . Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Construction Document Drawings. B . Erect on site at location established by Architect, Owner, and Contractor. C . No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. 1.5 FIELD OFFICES A . Office: Weather tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. B . Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 10 persons. C . Provide separate private office similarly equipped and furnished, for use of Owner. D . Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures. 1.6 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A . Provide all telecommunications, electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B . Provide and maintain required temporary sanitary facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization and maintain in clean and sanitary condition. C . New permanent facilities may not be used. 1.7 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A . Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B . Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C . Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. 4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 50 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 50 00 - 3 D . Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property with particular attention to adjacent school and residences. 1. Provide dustproof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors. 2. Provide dustproof barriers between construction areas. E . Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. Refer to Section 01 10 00 - Summary for noise restrictions. F . Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. G . Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. H . Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. I . Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.8 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A . Barriers: 1. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for School use of adjacent site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. 2. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. 3. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. B . Fencing: 1. Construction: Contractor's option. 2. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. Fencing along north line of construction limits shall include visibility screening. C . Exterior Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. D . Interior Enclosures: 1. Elevator equipment may not be exposed to any dust. Temporary enclosures in equipment rooms need to be coordinated with elevator maintenance company. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 50 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 50 00 - 4 2. Shaft walls must have enclosures that maintain fire separation and air pressurization ability for the shaft when opened. 3. Construction: Framing and gypsum board sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: a. STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90. b. Maximum flame spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.9 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS A . Provide locks, gates, and surveillance cameras to protect Work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B . Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A . Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B . Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C . Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D . Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. E . Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic. 1.11 WASTE REMOVAL FACILITIES AND SERVICES A . See Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements. B . Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. C . Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. D . If materials to be recycled or reused on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. E . Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A . Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B . Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C . Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D . Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 50 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 50 00 - 5 E . Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 57 21 October 20, 2021 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 57 21 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Construction procedures. B . Building flush-out. C . Air contaminant testing. D . Ventilation effectiveness testing. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. B . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B . Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. C . Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. D . Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction as a guide. 1. Include summary of compliance paths selected to meet requirements. 2. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building. 3. Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 4. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust. 5. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas. 6. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control. 7. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of ventilation, use of permanent HVAC systems, types of filters, and schedule for replacement of filters. 8. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures. 9. Describe coordination with commissioning procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 57 21 October 20, 2021 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 57 21 - 2 B . Indoor air quality procedures required to meet Owner requirements and LEED certification. C . Building flush-out is required method to meet Owner and LEED certification requirements. Air contaminant testing method alone to show compliance will not satisfy Owner requirements. D . Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors, moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times. E . Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report. F . Air Contaminant Test Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. 2. Locations and scheduling of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail. 4. Test instruments and apparatus. 5. Sampling methods. G . Air Contaminant Test Reports: Show: 1. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 2. Test values for each air sample; average the values of each set of 3. 3. HVAC operating conditions. 4. Certification of test equipment calibration. 5. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results. H . Ventilation Effectiveness Test Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. 2. Description of test spaces, including locations of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail; state whether tracer gas decay or step-up will be used. 4. Test instruments and apparatus; identify tracer gas to be used. 5. Sampling methods. I . Ventilation Effectiveness Test Reports: Show: 1. Include preliminary tests of instruments, apparatus, and test spaces. 2. Calculation of ventilation effectiveness, E. 3. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 4. Test values for each air sample. 5. HVAC operating conditions. 6. Other information specified in ASHRAE Std 129. 7. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results. J . Smoking Room Test and Inspection Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 57 21 October 20, 2021 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 57 21 - 3 2. Description of test spaces, including locations of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail. 4. Test instruments and apparatus; identify tracer gas to be used. 5. Sampling methods. K . Smoking Room Test and Inspection Reports: Show: 1. Include preliminary tests of instruments and apparatus. 2. Include inspection of membrane seals in test spaces. 3. HVAC operating conditions. 4. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 5. Test values for each air sample. 6. Other information specified in ASHRAE Std 129. 7. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A . Low-emitting products have been specified in appropriate sections. B . If air handlers must be used during construction, temporary filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999, must be used at each return air grille and replaced with MERV 13 filters prior to occupancy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LEED COMPLIANCE - GENERAL A . LEED: Refer to Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures for additional information relating to execution of the following LEED credits: IEQ Credit 3.1. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A . Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by absorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. B . Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C . If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building, shut down HVAC systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 57 21 October 20, 2021 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 57 21 - 4 D . When working in a portion of an occupied building, prevent movement of air from construction area to occupied area. E . HVAC equipment and ductwork may NOT be used for ventilation during construction: 1. Provide temporary ventilation equivalent to 1.5 air changes per hour, minimum. 2. Exhaust directly to outside. 3. Seal HVAC air inlets and outlets immediately after duct installation. F . Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. G . Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters, clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. H . Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. I . Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. 3.3 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT A . Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. B . Perform building flush-out before occupancy. C . Do not start flush-out until: 1. All construction is complete. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning is not necessary. 4. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. D . Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside air until a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied. 1. Obtain Owner's concurrence that construction is complete enough before beginning flush-out. 2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and interior relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 57 21 October 20, 2021 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 57 21 - 5 3. If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of the specified contaminants is conducted during flush-out, start flush-out over. 4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, supply a minimum of 25 percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy, and: a. Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy. b. Continue ventilation during all occupied periods. c. Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot or design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. E . Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing. 3.4 AIR CONTAMINANT TESTING A . Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. B . Perform air contaminant testing before starting construction, as base line for evaluation of post-construction testing. C . Perform air contaminant testing before occupancy. D . Do not start air contaminant testing until: 1. All construction is complete, including interior finishes. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. E . Indoor Air Samples: Collect from spaces representative of occupied areas: 1. Collect samples while operable windows and exterior doors are closed, HVAC system is running normally as if occupied, with design minimum outdoor air, but with the building unoccupied. 2. Collect samples from spaces in each contiguous floor area in each air handler zone, but not less than one sample per 25,000 square feet; take samples from areas having the least ventilation and those having the greatest presumed source strength. 3. Collect samples from height from 36 inches to 72 inches above floor. 4. Collect samples from same locations on 3 consecutive days during normal business hours; average the results of each set of 3 samples. 5. Exception: Areas with normal very high outside air ventilation rates, such as laboratories, do not need to be tested. 6. When retesting the same building areas, take samples from at least the same locations as in first test. F . Outdoor Air Samples: Collect samples at outside air intake of each air handler at the same time as indoor samples are taken. G . Analyze air samples and submit report. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 57 21 October 20, 2021 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS Project #16-0996 01 57 21 - 6 H . Air Contaminant Concentration Limits: 1. Formaldehyde: Not more than 27 parts per billion. 2. PM10 Particulates: Not more than 50 micrograms per cubic meter. 3. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PCH)* 6.5 micrograms per cubic meter 4. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOCs): Not more than 500 micrograms per cubic meter. 5. Chemicals Listed in CAL CDPH Standard Method Table 4-1, except formaldehyde: Allowable concentrations listed in Table 4-1. 6. Carbon Monoxide: Not more than 9 parts per million and not more than 2 parts per million higher than outdoor air. I . Air Contaminant Concentration Test Methods: 1. Formaldehyde: ASTM D5197, EPA 625 Method TO-11A, or EPA 600 Method IP-6. 2. Particulates: EPA 600 Method IP-10. 3. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): EPA 625 Method TO-1, TO-15, or TO-17; or EPA 600 Method IP-1. 4. Chemicals Listed in CAL CDPH Standard Method Table 4-1, except formaldehyde: ASTM D5197, or EPA 625 Method TO-1, TO-15, or TO-17. 5. Carbon Monoxide: EPA 600 Method IP-3, plus measure outdoor air; measure in ppm; report both indoor and outdoor measurements. J . If air samples show concentrations higher than those specified, ventilate with 100 percent outside air and retest at no cost to Owner, or conduct full building flush-out specified above. 3.5 VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS TESTING A . Perform ventilation effectiveness testing before occupancy. B . Do not begin ventilation effectiveness testing until: 1. HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing has been satisfactorily completed. 2. Building flush-out or air contaminant testing has been completed satisfactorily. 3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. C . Test each air handler zone in accordance with ASHRAE 129. D . If calculated air change effectiveness for a particular zone is less than 0.9 due to inadequate balancing of the system, adjust, and retest at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 60 00 October 20, 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 60 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Specified product options. B . Substitution procedures. C . Owner supplied products. D . Owner supplied and installed products. E . Maintenance materials. F . Transportation and handling. G . Storage and protection. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 60 01 - Substitution Request Form. B . AIA A201 Article 3.4.2. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. 3. This submittal may be combined with the Preliminary Submittal Log required in Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B . Substitution Procedures: 1. Basis of Cost: Indicates quality level required for budget pricing; products and manufacturers may not reflect the actual basis of design. 2. Basis of Design: Indicates the products and manufacturers reflected in the design documents. 3. Substitution Requests are not required to submit products from listed comparable manufacturers. Any redesign required by selecting a manufacture other than basis of design shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.4 NEW PRODUCTS A . Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. 1. Products exposed to construction damage during construction must be repaired or replaced to "as new" condition at the time of Substantial Completion. B . Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 60 00 October 20, 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 60 00 - 2 2. Composite wood or agrifiber products containing added urea-formaldehyde. 3. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. 4. Containing lead, cadmium, asbestos. C . Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced. 1.5 SPECIFIED PRODUCT OPTIONS A . Products specified by Reference Standards or by description only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B . Products Specified by Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing Sheet numbers and titles. Include reason for preference of comparable product; availability, usability, cost, experience, etc. C . Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. D . Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 1. Substitutions MAY or MAY NOT be approved by the Architect. 1.6 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A . Refer to A201 Section 3.4.2 for details and procedures for substitution of materials and products. B . C . 1. 1.7 OWNER SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A . See Section 01 10 00 - Summary for identification of Owner supplied products. B . Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 60 00 October 20, 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 60 00 - 3 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. C . Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install, and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after received. 1.8 OWNER SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED PRODUCTS A . See Section 01 10 00 - Summary for identification of Owner supplied and installed products. B . Coordinate, delivery, storage, execution and closeout with the Contractor and Owner in a pre-installation meeting. C . Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner's forces in providing access to and operating time at the site of the work. 2. The Contractor is not responsible for providing any staging or tools to the Owner's forces. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B . Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A . Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B . Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C . Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D . Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E . Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 60 00 October 20, 2021 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 60 00 - 4 F . Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A . Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B . Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C . Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D . Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E . Store rolled materials on end. F . For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. G . Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. H . Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. I . Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. J . Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. K . Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. L . Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 60 01 October 20, 2021 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Project #16-0996 01 60 01 - 1 TO: __________________________________________________________________________ PROJECT: _________________________________________________________________________ SPECIFIED ITEM: __________________________________________________________________ ______ ____ ________ _____________________________________ SECTION PAGE PARAGRAPH DESCRIPTION 1.1 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: A . Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. Undersigned will pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts are available locally or are readily obtainable for proposed substitution. 5. Undersigned further certifies the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. 6. Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, the terms and conditions for substitutions found in Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution. Submitted by: _______________________________ ________________________________________ Name (printed or type) Contractor (if after award of Contract) _______________________________ Signature For Use by Design Team _______________________________ Firm Name Approved Approved as Noted _______________________________ Not Approved Received Too Late Address ______________________________ By ________________________________________ City, State, Zip Date _______________________________________ _______________________________ Remarks ________________________________ Date ________________________________________ ______________________________ ________________________________________ Telephone Fax ________________________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________________ List of Attachments: END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 73 00 October 20, 2021 EXECUTION Project #16-0996 01 73 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Submittals. B . Coordination requirements. C . Layout. D . Examination requirements. E . Preparation requirements. F . Installation requirements. G . Alterations of existing conditions. H . Cutting and patching. I . Progress cleaning. J . Protection of installed work. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 10 00 - Summary: limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated materials. B . 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition: for information regarding cutting and patching of specific building components. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. B . Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Include in request: C . Surveyor's Qualification Statement. D . Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A . For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in location of the project. 1.5 COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS A . Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements , with provisions for accommodating items installed later. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 73 00 October 20, 2021 EXECUTION Project #16-0996 01 73 00 - 2 B . Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C . Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D . Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E . In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F . Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G . After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner 's activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS A . New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B . Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C . Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution as described in Section 016000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT A . Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. B . Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. C . On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. 3.2 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS A . Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B . Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 73 00 October 20, 2021 EXECUTION Project #16-0996 01 73 00 - 3 C . Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D . Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or mis-fabrication. E . Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. 3.3 PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS A . Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B . Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C . Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A . Execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B . Perform cutting and patching as necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. C . Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. D . Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E . Cut rigid materials using method recommended by manufacture of materials. F . Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G . Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H . At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with approved material to restore the fire rating of the assembly. I . Patching: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 73 00 October 20, 2021 EXECUTION Project #16-0996 01 73 00 - 4 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING A . Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B . Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C . Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D . Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A . Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. B . Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C . Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D . Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E . Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F . Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G . Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. H . Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 74 19 October 20, 2021 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Project #16-0996 01 74 19 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Landfill alternatives proposal. B . Waste management plan. C . Waste disposal reports. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 10 00 - Summary: for list of items to be salvaged from the existing building for relocation in project or for Owner. B . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements for project meeting, reports, submittal procedures and project documentation. C . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional documentation requirements. D . 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. E . 01 73 00 - Execution: for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B . Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C . Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. D . Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. E . Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F . Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G . Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H . Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating, and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I . Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 74 19 October 20, 2021 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Project #16-0996 01 74 19 - 2 J . Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K . Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L . Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M . Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N . Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O . Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P . Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Landfill Alternatives Proposal. B . Waste Management Plan. C . Waste Disposal Reports. D . LEED Requirements: To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and incineration facilities by recovering, reusing, and recycling materials. 1.5 LANDFILL ALTERNATIVES PROPOSAL A . Landfill Alternatives Proposal: Within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs sooner, submit a projection of trash/waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling, with net costs. Demonstrate the strategy for diverting at least 75% of construction generated waste from the landfill. Include demolition waste from sub-contractors. 1. Submit to Architect for Owner's review and approval. 2. If Owner wishes to implement any cost alternatives, the Contract Price will be adjusted in accordance with Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures. 3. Once Owner has determined which of the landfill alternatives addressed in the Proposal above are acceptable, prepare and submit Waste Management Plan; submit within 10 calendar days after notification by Architect. 4. Include an analysis of trash/waste to be generated and landfill options as specified for Waste Management Plan described below. 5. Describe as many alternatives to landfilling as possible: a. List each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled. b. List the proposed local market for each material. c. State the estimated net cost resulting from each alternative, after subtracting revenue from sale of recycled or salvaged materials and landfill tipping fees saved due to diversion of materials from the landfill. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 74 19 October 20, 2021 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Project #16-0996 01 74 19 - 3 6. Provide alternatives to landfilling for at least the following materials: a. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. b. Corrugated cardboard. c. Wood pallets. d. Clean dimensional wood. e. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps. f. Concrete. g. Bricks. h. Concrete masonry units. i. Asphalt paving. j. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A . Submit Waste Management Plan within 10 calendar days after receipt of Owner direction on Landfill Alternative Proposal, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs sooner. B . Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. a. List 5 material waste streams targeted for diversion b. List the local market for each material. c. State the estimated net cost, versus landfill disposal. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. 1.7 WASTE DISPOSAL REPORTS A . Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 74 19 October 20, 2021 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Project #16-0996 01 74 19 - 4 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to incinerators. c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards. c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 74 19 October 20, 2021 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Project #16-0996 01 74 19 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A . Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B . Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect. C . Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D . Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre-bid meeting. 2. Pre-construction meeting. 3. Regular job-site meetings. E . Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F . Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G . Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H . Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I . Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 77 00 October 20, 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 77 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Project record documents. B . Operation and maintenance data. C . Operation and maintenance manuals. D . Warranties and bonds. E . System startup. F . Demonstration and instruction. G . Adjusting. H . Final cleaning. I . Closeout procedures. J . Maintenance. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 00 72 00 – General Conditions: For Final Completion. B . Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. C . Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B . Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 77 00 October 20, 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 77 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A . Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B . Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C . Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D . Record information concurrent with construction progress. E . Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F . Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A . General: 1. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. 2. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete or strike out inapplicable information. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 77 00 October 20, 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 77 00 - 3 3. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 4. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. B . Materials and Finishes: 1. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 2. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. 3. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. 4. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 5. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed sheet and space for insertion of data. C . Equipment and Systems: 1. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: a. Description of unit or system, and component parts. b. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. c. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. d. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. 2. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3. Panel board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. 4. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. 5. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. 6. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. 7. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 8. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. 9. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 10. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 11. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 77 00 October 20, 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 77 00 - 4 12. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. 13. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 14. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 15. Include test and balancing reports. 16. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A . Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. B . Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. C . Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual in both digital and hardcopy format. D . Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. E . Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. F . Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Contractor, and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. G . Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes' Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. H . Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. I . Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or printed data. J . Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. K . Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows: 1. Project Directory. 2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category. a. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals. b. Field quality control data. c. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 77 00 October 20, 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 77 00 - 5 d. Design Data: To allow for addition of design data furnished by Architect or others, provide a tab labeled "Design Data" and provide a binder large enough to allow for insertion of at least 20 pages of typed text. 3.4 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A . Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B . Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C . Co-execute submittals when required. D . Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E . Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. 3.5 SYSTEM STARTUP A . Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B . Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C . Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. D . Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E . Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F . Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G . When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H . Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A . Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B . Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 77 00 October 20, 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 77 00 - 6 C . For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D . Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. E . Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F . Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.7 ADJUSTING A . Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.8 FINAL CLEANING A . Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B . Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C . Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D . Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E . Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F . Replace filters of operating equipment. G . Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. H . Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I . Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.9 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A . Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B . Accompany Architect on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C . Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 77 00 October 20, 2021 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Project #16-0996 01 77 00 - 7 D . Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. E . Owner will occupy all of the building as specified in Section 01 10 00 - Summary. F . Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G . Accompany Architect on preliminary final inspection. H . Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. I . Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. 3.10 MAINTENANCE A . Preventive Maintenance Schedule: 1. Prepare separate preventive maintenance schedule for all elements incorporated into the building. a. Provide steps and frequency to maintain the building. 2. Provide a draft schedule for review prior to final distribution. B . Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. C . Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. D . Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. E . Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. F . Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Description of Work 2. Payment Requirements and Commissioning Schedule of Values 3. Commissioning Coordination and Meetings 4. Scheduling Commissioning Activities 5. Submittals 6. Duties of Commissioning Authority 7. Duties of Contractor 8. Duties of Contractor’s Commissioning Coordinator 9. Back-Charging Provisions 10. Documentation Requirements 11. Start-up Requirements 12. Installation Verification Requirements 13. Functional Testing Requirements 14. Commissioning Issue Documentation and Correction 15. Performance Period 16. Project Closeout 17. Seasonal Testing 18. Near Warranty End Review B . Related Sections: 1. General Requirements to include the following sections, exact titles may vary. a. Sustainable Building Requirements b. Indoor Air Quality Management c. Project Management and Coordination d. Submittals e. Closeout Procedures f. Operation and maintenance Data g. Demonstration and training 2. The following sections specify the commissioning activities for this project: a. 22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing b. 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC c. 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 2 3. All sections related to the following commissioned systems may contain start-up, testing and/or commissioning related activities: a. DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 1) Domestic Hot Water & Circulator b. DIVISION 23 – HVAC 1) HVAC Systems 2) Building Automation and Control Systems 3) Testing, Adjusting and Balancing c. DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1) Lighting Control 2) Photovoltaic Systems 3) Power Monitoring System 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A . Work includes the completion of formal commissioning procedures on selected equipment and systems as outlined in the paragraph Related Sections above. Commissioning is defined as the process of verifying and documenting that the installation and performance of selected building systems meet the specified design criteria and therefore satisfies the design intent and the Owner’s operational needs. The Contractor shall be responsible for participation in the commissioning process as outlined herein, and in subsequent sectional references and attachments throughout the Contract Documents. Commissioning procedures will be designed and conducted under the direction of a Commissioning Authority (CxA) hired by the Owner. B . This section contains the general requirements for commissioning and a description of the commissioning process to be applied across all commissioned systems. 1.3 PAYMENT A . Equipment and systems shall not be accepted by the Owner, and final payment shall not be made by the Owner, until commissioning activities identified in the specifications are complete, commissioning issues are resolved to the Owner’s satisfaction and the performance period standards have been met. B . Payment is subject to satisfying the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provision Section 408.1.4 which requires that commissioning be completed “Prior to the final mechanical, plumbing and electrical inspections or obtaining a certificate of occupancy”. C . Payment is subject to the conditions of the Actual Damages clause of the General Conditions. 1.4 COMMISSIONING COORDINATION AND MEETINGS A . A representative for the Contractor, each commissioned system Contractor and the Contractor’s Commissioning Coordinator (CCC) shall attend scheduled commissioning meetings as required. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 3 1.5 SCHEDULE A . The Contractor is responsible for coordination and scheduling of commissioning activities into the master schedule. The schedule shall contain the following activities and detail as a minimum. 1. Contractor review and comment on preliminary commissioning plan documents 2. Start-up Plan Development 3. Start-up Activities by Equipment and Systems 4. Installation Verification Activities by Equipment and Systems 5. Functional Testing Activities by Equipment and Systems 6. Training 7. O&M 8. Seasonal Testing B . The CCC shall develop and maintain a 2-week look-ahead schedule of commissioning activities including, but not limited to: meetings, start-up, installation verification, Functional Performance Testing (FPT) and FPT demonstration. The schedule shall be updated and distributed weekly, or if any currently scheduled activities in the 2-week period change. C . The Owner and the CxA will allocate their time based on the 2-week look-ahead schedule. If the Owner or CxA is not available for the scheduled activity then the Contractor may proceed as scheduled. If a scheduled activity does not take place due to lack of Contractor participation or inaccurate scheduling, the Contractor is subject to back-charging as outlined herein. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A . Commissioning Documentation: Provide one copy of submittals in addition to those quantities specified elsewhere. Include the manufacturer’s recommended installation and start-up procedures with associated checklists for each unique piece of equipment under a separate tab titled “Installation/Start-up”. These procedures and forms shall be for the specific piece of equipment to be provided. B . The Contractor shall provide the CxA with copies of approved submittals, manufacturer’s recommended installation/start-up documents, proposed testing formats, training plans, as- built documentation, O&M Manuals and other commissioning related materials as requested by the CxA. The CxA will review and approve this material for commissioning related activities. C . The CCC is responsible for managing the submittal process with the CxA. A tracking document for selected submittals is included in the schedules at the end of the individual divisional commissioning specifications for systems to be commissioned. These schedules outline activities that will require specific submittal information by the Contractor. Assignment of Contractors responsible for commissioned systems and due dates will be determined at the initial commissioning coordination meeting. D . O&M manuals for each piece of commissioned equipment are to be submitted with the proposed installation, testing and start-up documents. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 4 E . The Contractor is responsible for providing the CxA with copies of the following information for inclusion in the Systems Manual. The CxA will review this material for compliance with Project Documents and will note and report issues for resolution by the responsible party. The CxA will compile the final Systems Manual based on the submitted documentation. 1. As-built documents 2. Description of systems, including capabilities and limitations 3. Operating procedures for all normal, abnormal, and emergency modes of operation 4. Sequence of operation as actually implemented, with control systems data including all set points, calibration data, etc. This includes but is not limited to the building automation system, packaged controls, programmable logic controllers and lighting controls. 5. Location of all control sensors and test ports. 6. Seasonal start-up and shutdown procedures. 7. Control schematics and computer graphics for all control systems including those noted in item 4. 8. Complete terminal interface procedures and capabilities for all control systems including those noted in item 4. 9. A list of recommended operational recordkeeping procedures including sample forms, trend logs, or others, and a rationale for each 10. Maintenance procedures for all building systems. 11. Maintenance information for systems and equipment provided under Division 07 - Thermal Moisture and Protection, and Division 08 – Openings. 1.7 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY A . The information provided herein regarding the Commissioning Authority’s (CxA) responsibilities is provided to the Contractor for information only and is not a part of the work scope. The CxA is hired under direct contract with the Owner. B . The CxA for this project shall be Welsh Commissioning Group (WCG), Inc. (253) 856-3322, FAX (253) 859-2072 and web www.wcxg.com. WCG is a Building Commissioning Certification Board (BCCB) Certified Commissioning Firm. WCG has on staff ANSI/ISO/IEC 17024:2012 Certified Commissioning Professionals who will lead the commissioning process. C . Responsibilities: The CxA responsibilities include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Approve selection of the CCC. 2. Participate in the initial on-site commissioning coordination meeting and subsequent commissioning meetings. 3. Conduct site observations and provide site observation reports. 4. Review and approve the start-up plan and commissioning schedule as developed by the CCC and the Contractor. 5. Develop the commissioning plan including start-up plan, installation verification checklists and functional test documents 6. Review and approve various Contractor completed documents including CCLs, start-up documents and data sheets as they are completed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 5 7. Witness, spot check or otherwise verify successful completion of selected functional testing by Contractor. 8. Review the TAB report. Witness or spot check a sample of the systems to verify conformance to design and the report. 9. Prepare and submit final commissioning report with recommendation for system acceptance to the Owner. Report is developed with material provided by CCC and Contractor. 1.8 CONTRACTOR A . Contractor Responsibilities 1. Support the commissioning process including integrating related commissioning activities into the construction process and schedule. 2. Assure the participation and cooperation of subcontractors as required to complete the commissioning process as outlined herein and the individual divisional commissioning specifications. 3. Assign a Commissioning Coordinator dedicated to the project. 4. Provide all submittal material as requested by the CxA and as required by the contract documents. 5. Attend commissioning meetings as scheduled. 6. Provide access to commissioned systems including ladders, lifts, scaffolding, access panels and other equipment as required. 7. Install and start-up equipment per the contract documents and start-up plan. 8. Conduct functional testing per the contract documents and commissioning plan 9. Provide required test instrumentation and equipment as needed to conduct functional testing per the commissioning plan. 10. Resolve issues as noted on the commissioning issues list and communicate resolution to the CxA. 11. Support seasonal testing as required. 12. Support the near-warranty-end review and correct any noted issues prior to warranty end. 1.9 CONTRACTOR’S COMMISSIONING COORDINATOR A . Contractor’s Commissioning Coordinator (CCC) Qualifications 1. The CCC shall be a regular employee of the Contractor assigned to the project. The CCC shall be responsible for coordination of Contractors responsible for commissioned system regardless of the Contractors they represent. 2. The CCC responsibilities shall not be shared by multiple parties, one individual shall be designated. 3. The individual designated as the CCC shall be available on site from the beginning of construction to final acceptance. 4. The individual designated as the CCC may have other construction or project related assignments, but only to the extent that they will be able to fulfil the CCC responsibilities outlined herein. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 6 5. The individual designated as the CCC shall be identified by the Contractor during the submittal process. 6. Submit the name, company, contact information (address, phone, cell phone, FAX and e-mail) and other project duties for the proposed CCC. B . Contractor’s Commissioning Coordinator Responsibilities 1. Overall management and coordination of the commissioning work performed by the Contractors responsible for commissioned systems including responsibilities identified as the CCC’s responsibility in each section on commissioned systems. 2. Coordinate Owner and CxA participation in scheduled commissioning activities. Notify Owner and CxA a minimum of 5 working days in advance of commissioning activities. 3. Collect, review and submit commissioning material and documentation to the CxA for approval prior to proceeding with commissioning activities including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review and comment on preliminary functional tests provided by CxA. Contractors responsible for the systems to be commissioned shall also review this information. b. Develop, manage and update commissioning schedule with commissioning activities c. Proposed Manufacturer’s installation and start-up documents d. Proposed cleaning, flushing, testing, disinfection forms e. Proposed Static tests and calibration forms f. Start-up plan g. Proposed functional performance test forms h. Completed Manufacturer’s installation and start-up documents i. Completed cleaning, flushing, pressure testing, disinfection forms j. Completed static tests and calibration forms k. Completed Contractor Checklists l. Completed functional performance test forms m. TAB agenda n. TAB preliminary and final report o. Signed off issues lists p. Proposed O&M Manuals q. Training plans and agenda r. Final O&M Manuals s. Contractor Closeout Checklists 4. Develop, manage and update commissioning schedule. Integrate commissioning activities into master schedule. Provide a 2-week look-ahead schedule of commissioning activities, updated weekly or as scheduled commissioning activities change during 2-week period. 5. Distribute issues lists to Contractors responsible for the commissioned systems. 6. Assemble, manage and update the start-up plan. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 7 7. Attend regularly scheduled construction and Owner’s meetings and review commissioning activities with Contractors responsible for the commissioned systems and design team. Include commissioning activity items in construction meeting minutes. 8. Participate in and lead commissioning meetings as necessary to coordinate contractor activities in the commissioning process. Meetings are generally to be scheduled once every two weeks during initial construction of commissioned systems, and weekly during start-up and functional test phases. The CxA shall lead commissioning meetings when on site and the CCC shall lead all other meetings. 9. Provide material for, participate in the development of, and review the final report. 10. Coordinate and participate in seasonal testing. 1.10 BACK-CHARGING A . The Contractor and CCC are responsible to schedule and coordinate installation, start-up and testing activities with the CxA as specified herein and in each section on commissioned systems. Scheduled installation, start-up or testing activities that are not executed because of lack of preparation or coordination by the Contractor that result in unnecessary trips by the CxA are subject to back-charges to the Contractor. B . Functional testing shall be performed on the systems that are fully complete as reported by the Contractor. Systems that are reprogrammed or have had a software upload that can be shown to invalidate completed functional testing shall be retested to demonstrate proper operation. Tests re-conducted by the Contractor shall be performed at no additional cost to the contract. Tests re-conducted by the CxA shall result in a back-charge to the Contractor. C . The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs associated with any additional efforts required to witness installation, start-ups, testing activities or for excessive back-checking as indicated above. These costs shall include salary, travel costs and per diem lodging costs (where applicable) for the Commissioning Authority. Rates to be used will be per the contract between the Owner and Commissioning Authority. PART 2 - – PRODUCTS 2.1 DOCUMENTATION A . Schedule-A (located at the end of each section on commissioned systems, XX-08-00) contains sample versions of the Contractor Checklists (CCL) to be used for the systems to be commissioned. B . Schedule-B (located at the end of each section on commissioned systems, XX-08-00) contains a Functional Performance Test Summary Table that outlines each functional test to be conducted for the systems to be commissioned. Part 4 of each section on commissioned systems contain sample versions of functional performance test procedures and data sheets. These do not represent all functional tests that will be required and are intended only to demonstrate the rigor of functional testing required. C . Paragraph 3.12 contains preliminary versions of the Contractor Closeout Checklists to be used for the systems to be commissioned. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 8 2.2 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION A . The CxA shall conduct an independent Installation Verification using checklists based on the Contractor Checklists provided in Schedule – A, located at the end of each section on commissioned systems. 2.3 STARTUP FORMS A . Any installation and start-up checklists that are provided by the manufacturer shall be used in the equipment start-up process. Non-manufacturer developed forms must be approved by the CxA prior to use. Start-up forms must be submitted to the CCC for inclusion in the Start- up plan at least one month prior to system start-up to allow for review and approval by the CxA. Documentation for static testing, cleaning, flushing, calibration and other activities required by project documents are considered start-up forms. Schedule – A (located at the end of each section on commissioned systems) outlines the required documents to be submitted by the Contractor. 2.4 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST FORMS A . The functional performance test procedures and data sheets shall be developed by the CxA as outlined in Schedule B (located at the end of each section on commissioned systems), with input from the CCC and Contractor as required. B . The Contractor has specific responsibilities for developing, performing and documenting functional test procedures as directed by the CxA. See Schedule – B for minimum testing and documentation requirements. C . In addition to the testing outlined in Schedule – B, wherever the Project Documents require testing, test reports, checklists, verifying operation, demonstrating proper operation or other similar language with respect to the systems to be commissioned, written testing procedures and documentation of tests will be required from the Contractor, whether specified or not in the commissioning sections. D . A tracking document for these submittals is included in Schedule - B which outlines which of these activities will require submittal information by the Contractor. Contractors responsible for the systems to be commissioned and due dates will be determined at the initial commissioning coordination meeting. 2.5 COMMISSIONING ISSUES LIST A . The CxA shall maintain the Commissioning Issues List. At any time an issue is discovered where the installation or performance of the commissioned system does not meet contract document requirements, an individual issue shall be generated. As issues are resolved and verified by additional inspections or tests, the issues list shall be updated. The issues list shall be a running history of the status of the issue. 2.6 TEST EQUIPMENT A . The Contractor shall provide all test equipment as required to prove performance during static and functional tests. B . The test equipment shall be provided in sufficient quantities to execute functional testing in an expedient fashion. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 9 C . The test equipment shall be of industrial quality and suitable for testing and calibration with accuracy within the tolerances necessary to demonstrate system performance. D . Equipment shall be certified to an accuracy of 10% of the smallest tolerance to be measured. For example, if a temperature gage is required to be +2 degrees F, the calibration device must have an accuracy of +0.2 degrees F. E . The test equipment shall have calibration certification per equipment manufacturer’s interval level or within one year if not specified. F . Where sensors for specific gases are used (e.g. carbon monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, refrigerant leak detectors, etc.) the Contractor shall provide appropriate test gases in order to validate calibration of sensors. Test gases shall be provided so as to validate sensor output for 0, 50 and 100 percent of the sensor range. PART 3 - – EXECUTION 3.1 DOCUMENTATION A . Checklists, start-up documentation, test forms and other commissioning related documentation required by contract shall be neatly and legibly completed and provided to the CxA via the CCC in a clear and easily readable condition. B . Required checklists, start-up documentation, test forms and other commissioning related documentation shall be provided to the CxA via the CCC in a timely fashion and according to the commissioning and construction schedule. C . In every case where the Contractor is unable to comply with an item as listed on the checklist or form, the Contractor shall immediately notify the CxA in writing as to the reasons for non-compliance. 3.2 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A . The Contractor shall provide access to all equipment and systems to be commissioned both during construction and after occupancy as necessary. The Contractor shall coordinate with other trades to assure that access to commissioned equipment is available to the CxA and other trades at the proper times and with sufficient duration. B . The Contractor shall provide all ladders, lifts, scaffolding, access doors, removal/installation of ceiling tiles and any other materials or activities as necessary to allow the CxA to easily access equipment and systems. C . During the commissioning process, the Contractor shall coordinate the installation of ceiling tiles and other finishes to allow all trades and the CxA to perform their work without having to remove or reinstall ceiling tiles or other finished work. Note that above-ceiling access is required to perform Installation Verification and Functional Performance Testing of systems. Ceiling tiles typically must be in place during Testing and Balancing activities. Since Testing and Balancing may occur between Installation Verification and Functional Performance Testing, some ceiling tiles may require multiple removal/reinstallation cycles. D . In the event that system commissioning is not fully completed after occupancy, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the owner for access to the equipment or system for testing, back-checking and other commissioning activities. This requirement shall include providing access to equipment as indicated above. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 10 3.3 MEETINGS AND SITE OBSERVATIONS A . Commissioning status meetings shall be scheduled to occur during the construction and closeout phase to monitor progress and to help facilitate the commissioning process. Contractor representatives for commissioned systems shall be required to attend these meetings. Meetings will generally be scheduled to occur with scheduled construction or management meetings. The CCC shall schedule, coordinate and lead the meetings including providing meeting minutes. These meetings can coincide with, or be a subset of, the normal subcontractor meetings. When the CxA is on site for commissioning duties or scheduled meetings, the CxA shall lead the commissioning meetings and prepare and distribute minutes. B . Commissioning shall be included in the general construction and Owner’s meetings. The CCC will attend these meetings and discuss commissioning related topics there. Commissioning information and issues shall be documented in the meeting minutes. C . The CxA may perform periodic site visits during construction to monitor commissioning activities. The purpose of these observations will be to evaluate compliance to contractual obligations such as cleanliness, capping ductwork, access to equipment, maintainability and so forth to identify concerns before they are repeated throughout the project. Any issues identified will be noted on a Site Observation Report. The Contractor shall review these reports and take action to resolve issues as needed and deemed appropriate in consultation with the Owner, CxA, and Design Team. D . After functional testing and during the issue correction period, the Contractor shall hold weekly on-site meetings (as a minimum) to coordinate and review outstanding commissioning issues. These meetings shall be coordinated and led by the general contractor’s CCC and attended by all sub-contractors responsible for commissioned systems. The meetings shall be required until all issues are resolved. 3.4 CONTROLS INTEGRATION MEETING – BUILDING AUTOMATION AND LIGHTING A . The controls integration meetings (CIM) shall be conducted after the building automation and lighting controls submittals are complete and the CxA has reviewed the submittals. The meetings are to be conducted prior to finalizing the functional test procedures and shall be attended by the CxA, the BAS control contractor, the VRF control contractor, the lighting controls contractor, the mechanical/electrical engineers and a representative of the Owner’s maintenance group at a minimum. The CIM shall include, but not be limited to, the following topics: 1. Sequence of Operations 2. Alarm Points List 3. Trend Points List 4. Displayed/Adjustable Point List 5. Graphical Interface 6. Integration with packaged equipment 7. Lighting control interface 8. Point-to-Point Checkout and Commissioning of Existing Equipment 9. Method of Conducting Cx Functional Testing Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 11 3.5 PRE-STARTUP ACTIVITIES A . The CxA shall develop a preliminary commissioning plan with input from the Contractors via the CCC. B . As soon as possible after the bid award, approval of submittals and development of the preliminary commissioning plan, the CxA shall conduct an initial commissioning coordination meeting with the CxA, CCC, Contractors, Owner’s Representative and the A/E Team. The CxA will explain the commissioning process in detail, and identify specific commissioning related responsibilities. The preliminary commissioning plan shall be provided to the Contractors at this time. The requirements for submittal material shall be reviewed along with a preliminary schedule of commissioning activities. C . The Contractor shall submit to the CxA via the CCC preliminary O&M manuals prior to developing the Start-up and Commissioning Plan by the CxA. D . The Contractor shall submit to the CCC the proposed start-up and Contractor required testing documentation for assembly into the Start-up and Commissioning Plan by the CxA. E . The CxA shall develop a Start-up Plan based on Contractor submittals and the start-up requirements of the contract documents. It details the procedures and forms for individual pieces of equipment and systems that have start-up and testing requirements. It shall be a three-ring binder indexed by system or equipment. The binder shall be populated with procedures and blank forms and used to file the completed forms as the procedures are completed by the Contractor. The Start-up Plan shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. List of commissioning team members. 2. Start-up document tracking forms. 3. Master list of equipment/systems for installation and start-up. 4. Start-up and static testing schedule. 5. Manufacturer and Project Document required installation, start-up and testing procedures 6. Blank copies of start-up and testing forms for each type of equipment/system. 7. Contractor checklists for each system. F . The CxA shall develop the final commissioning plan. The commissioning plan typically includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Project overview. 2. Commissioning Authority scope of work. 3. Contractor’s Commissioning Coordinator scope of work. 4. Roles and responsibilities of commissioning participants. 5. A schedule with sequential description of commissioning activities. 6. A complete list and description of equipment and systems to be commissioned. 7. The Start-up Plan 8. Installation verification data forms for systems and equipment to be commissioned. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 12 9. Functional performance test criteria, test forms and data forms for systems and equipment designated to be functionally tested including trending needed for the performance period. 10. System integration testing plan. 11. Sample commissioning issues list. 12. Project closeout activities G . The Contractor shall be responsible for the liability and safety of conducting tests. The CCC and Contractor shall review the Functional Performance Test (FPT) documents provided by the CxA prior to including them in the final commissioning plan. The Contractor is to review preliminary and final test procedures to verify that they: 1. Will not pose a risk of injury to any personnel. 2. Will not pose a risk of damage to equipment, structure or any physical element of the building. 3. Will not negate any equipment or system warranties. 4. Are executable with the personnel and equipment available to the Contractor. 3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND START-UP A . Installation and Start-up activities include procedures outlined by the contract documents and the equipment manufacturer including cleaning, static testing, calibration and other related activities. The CxA shall provide the Contractor with a start-up plan based on Contractor submitted procedures and checklists. B . The CxA may witness selected equipment start-up and testing performed during construction. The CCC shall keep the CxA informed of commissioning activities with regular status reports and updates to the commissioning plan, start-up plan and schedules C . The Contractor shall perform equipment start-up per the approved start-up plan and start-up forms. The Contractor shall correct issues as they are discovered. The Contractor shall complete the installation and start-up forms as the work is complete and place the fully completed installation and start-up forms in the start-up binder. D . Upon completing the start-up activities for a given system, the associated Contractor Checklists (CCL) shall be completed by the Contractor and placed in the appropriate tab section of the start-up binder. The completed and signed CCL is to be provided with the equipment manufacturer’s recommended start-up form for each piece of equipment or system. The completed CCL is the Contractor’s certification that they have completed all required installation and start-up activities and the system is ready for the installation verification audit by the CxA and subsequent functional performance testing. E . The start-up binder shall be maintained by the Contractor’s Commissioning Coordinator. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the start-up book in good order and to turn the completed document over to the CxA at the conclusion of start-up. If the start-up binder is lost or stolen, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to recreate the binder and its contents, including re-conducting start-up activities if necessary. F . Upon completion of all start-up activities including the required documentation, the Contractor shall submit the start-up binder to the CxA via the CCC for review and approval. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 13 3.7 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION (IV) A . The IV process shall begin when signed off CCLs and start-up documents are received from the Contractor. B . The CxA shall conduct an independent installation verification audit on selected systems to verify conformance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and project documents. The CxA shall use the completed CCL from the contractor to verify installation. Discrepancies discovered will be reported on the Commissioning Issues List by the CxA. A copy of the issues list will be transmitted to the Contractor via the CCC with a copy to the Owner and Design Team. C . The Contractor shall correct any issues discovered and note the action taken on the issues log and return it to the CxA via the CCC. D . The CxA shall back-check and verify that the issues are resolved prior to proceeding with FPT. 3.8 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS (FPT) A . FPT includes the documented testing of system parameters, under actual or simulated operating conditions. Final performance testing of systems will begin only after the Contractor certifies that systems are 100% complete and ready for functional testing, by providing completed and signed-off copies of the start-up plan and providing completed Contractor Checklists. B . Any testing procedures and forms which the Contractor is required to provide must be provided by the CCC to the CxA at least one month prior to start of installation of the equipment and as needed to complete the commissioning plan. C . Functional performance testing of commissioned systems shall begin after all critical issues discovered during the start-up and installation verification process have been corrected. The CxA and Contractor shall conduct functional performance tests on selected systems to verify functional performance criteria as outlined in Schedule - B (located at the end of the individual divisional commissioning specifications) and as required in the Project Documents and approved by the CxA in the Commissioning Plan. Discrepancies discovered will be reported on the Commissioning Issues List by the CxA. A copy of the issues list will be transmitted to the Contractor via the CCC. D . Functional tests that have excess failure rates or are aborted due to lack of Contractor participation or scheduling are subject to the back-charging provisions of the paragraph Back Charging. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 14 E . The Contractor shall make available to the CxA a method of interfacing with any commissioned control systems at the building site including but not limited to the building automation system, packaged control systems, programmable logic controllers and lighting control systems. This interface shall be made available regardless of whether or not a permanent local work station is specified elsewhere in the contract documents. The on-site interface shall be made available from the time of completion of start-up activities until trending is complete and all commissioned systems are accepted by the owner. The Contractor shall also make available to the CxA a method of remote access to the control system(s) beginning at the time of completion of start-up activities and extending for one year after system acceptance. Remote and local access shall include all software, licensing, software keys and anything else required to facilitate full access to the system(s). The local and remote interfaces shall include all contract required interfaces including, but not limited to, all graphics, trends and alarms. The CxA shall be given an account with full security access privileges to the system(s). 3.9 COMMISSIONING ISSUE DOCUMENTATION AND CORRECTION A . The commissioning issues list is generated and maintained by the CxA to include a description of the issue, date of posting, the current status of issues, assignment to the responsible party and the date of final resolution as confirmed by the CxA. Items listed may include issues where design, products, execution or performance does not appear to satisfy the Contract Documents and the design intent. The resolution of issues identified on this list may or may not be the responsibility of the Contractor. B . Once issues have been identified and assigned to a Contractor on the Commissioning Issues List, the Contractor shall be required to investigate and resolve these issues in a timely manner. After correcting issues noted on the Commissioning Issues List, the Contractor shall sign off on each issue and return the list to the CxA via the CCC for initiation of back-checking by the CxA. C . In the event that an issue has been assigned to the wrong Contractor or resolution of the issue requires multiple trades, Contractor with the initial assignment shall take the lead in working with the CCC and CxA to reassign the issue or coordinating the multiple trades to resolve the issue. D . The CxA shall back-check and verify that the commissioning issues are resolved and update the issues list. Excessive back-checking by the CxA due to issues reported as complete not actually being resolved are subject to the back-charging provisions of the paragraph Back Charging. E . After functional testing and during the issue correction period, the Contractor shall hold weekly on-site meetings (as a minimum) to coordinate and review outstanding commissioning issues. These meetings shall be coordinated and led by the general contractor’s CCC and attended by all sub-contractors responsible for commissioned systems. The meetings shall be required until all issues are resolved. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 15 3.10 PERFORMANCE PERIOD A . Performance Period: The performance period is a set length of time designated to demonstrate proper facility operation prior to acceptance. The performance period commences after successful completion of all functional testing. Parameters evaluated for heating and ventilation systems typically include zone temperature stability, optimum start/stop, warm-up period and other related functions. For lighting control the parameters include lighting levels, occupancy switching and daylight control. As part of this process the Contractor will be required to set up and provide trends of building automation system parameters per the direction of the CxA. The specific trending needed will be outlined in the commissioning plan, the Contractor should assume that all points in the building automation system will be trended. Lighting control parameters will be trended if system capabilities exist, otherwise the Contractor will provide stand-alone data loggers to demonstrate operation of systems. B . The CxA shall prepare a performance period test plan including measured variables and success criteria based on performance characteristics described in the Project Documents. The CxA will provide the Contractor with a list of trend log definitions or stand-alone data logger requirements based on the performance period test plan included in the Commissioning Plan. C . The Contractor will review the performance period test plan and set up the trend log definitions and stand-alone data loggers. Trend logs shall be set up for all inputs/outputs, both digital and analog, for all points in the system both physical and virtual. Trend interval shall be 5 minutes unless otherwise directed by the CxA. The minimum trend period shall be 14 days. Trend log point headings as displayed on system graphs and data tables shall be adequately descriptive for the point but no longer than 12 characters unless approved by the CxA. System default names are not acceptable. The heading titles shall contain no extraneous characters that are not needed to describe the point. The contractor shall provide the trends to the Commissioning Authority in electronic format, in MS Excel or a comma delimited file with related system parameters grouped together for easy comparison. If building automation system resident memory is limited or there are other issues with the trending requirements, the Contractor will work with the CxA to redefine the test plan. D . The performance period will commence within one week of the final functional tests and run for a minimum of 14 days. A similar performance period may be required for seasonal testing. If failures are encountered, the performance period shall be aborted. After corrections are made, the performance period shall be re-started at day one. 3.11 COMMISSIONED SYSTEM WARRANTY EXTENSION A . Within 30 days following the start of the warranty period, if a commissioned system or equipment that has not been accepted as complete by the CxA experiences a failure, the warranty will be reset to the original duration starting after the failure has been corrected. 3.12 SEASONAL TESTING A . Seasonal testing is required to demonstrate the system’s ability to meet design conditions associated with seasonal extremes, typically peak heating and peak cooling conditions. B . Seasonal testing may also be required when ambient conditions will not support the operation of specific equipment. C . Seasonal testing is required to demonstrate the performance for a fully occupied building or portion of the building as well as for systems that are occupancy sensitive. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 16 D . The Contractor shall provide labor and material for seasonal testing and make corrections to any Contractor related issues discovered. 3.13 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A . Post construction Contractor responsibilities include providing O&M manuals, warranties, spares and training that meet the requirements of the project documents. The CxA will provide a commissioning report. B . O&M Manual 1. The Contractor is responsible for providing the CxA with copies of the balancing reports, as-built drawings, O&M manuals relevant to the systems commissioned and the Contractor provided material required for the systems manual (if applicable). The CxA shall review this material for compliance with project documents and report issues for resolution by the responsible party. C . Warranties 1. The Contractor is responsible for providing the CxA with copies of the equipment warranties for each commissioned system. The CxA shall review this material for compliance with project documents and report issues for resolution by the responsible party. D . Spares 1. The Contractor is responsible for providing the CxA with copies of the spare parts transmittals. The CxA shall review this material for compliance with project documents and report issues for resolution by the responsible party. E . Training 1. Training on related systems and equipment operation and maintenance shall only be scheduled to commence after functional testing is satisfactorily completed, O&M manuals have been delivered and approved, the systems manual (if applicable) is complete and systems are verified to be 100% complete and functional. 2. Each Contractor is responsible to provide a topical outline of the subjects to be covered in the training session(s), the expected length of time for the training sessions, and a brief resume listing the qualifications of the proposed training presenters. 3. The CCC is responsible for developing the training plan with input from the Contractor and directing any videotaping efforts. The training plan is to be submitted to the Owner, Design Team and CxA for approval prior to conducting training. The CCC is responsible for coordinating training with the Owner and CxA and to verify execution of the training plan. 4. Training Plans: For all Owner instruction, the Contractor shall submit a system-specific training plan for review and approval by the Commissioning Authority and the Owner. The training plan shall contain the following as a minimum: a. Attendee sign-off sheet. b. Required training hours specified in the project documents. c. Detailed list of subject to be covered and durations. d. Qualifications of training provider. e. Training schedule including duration of each training session. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 01 91 13 October 20, 2021 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Project #16-0996 01 91 13 - 17 F . Upon completion of commissioning activities the CxA will prepare and submit to the owner the Final Commissioning Report detailing the commissioning plan and commissioning activities and recommending acceptance to the Owner. The CCC will support this effort by coordinating the Contractor provided documentation. 3.14 NEAR-WARRANTY-END REVIEW A . Approximately two months prior to the end of warranty on commissioned systems, the Contractor shall participate in a review of the commissioned systems with the owner, design team and the CxA to identify any operational and outstanding issues. For this review, the Contractor shall schedule the attendance of appropriate parties with project specific knowledge, including but not limited to the following: 1. General Contractor 2. Mechanical Contractor 3. Building Management System Contractor 4. Variable Refrigerant Flow System Startup and Controls Contractor(s) 5. Lighting Controls Contractor(s) B . The review shall consist of a meeting on site with the Contractor with follow up testing and verification by the Contractor. C . A list of issues will be developed by the owner and CxA. Once issues have been identified, the Contractor shall investigate, test and inspect systems as necessary to identify and resolve warranty issues in a timely manner. D . The Contractor shall ensure the cooperation of appropriate Contractors responsible for the commissioned systems in any follow-up meetings, testing, inspections and investigation regarding warranty issues and in resolving, prior to the end of the warranty, any warranty issues discovered. E . Issues identified in this review will remain warranty items until satisfactory completion, even if the warranty period expires during the review and correction period. END OF SECTION 01 91 13 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Certification Procedures" for additional LEED requirements. B . 03 30 03 - Underslab Vapor Retarder: For vapor retarder and accessories. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A . ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 (Reapproved 2015). B . ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016. C . ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2015. D . ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2017). E . ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2004. F . AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2016. G . ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017. H . ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement; 2017. I . ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2016. J . ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2016. K . ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 2013. L . ASTM C1064/C1064M - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic- Cement Concrete; 2017. M . ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation; 2017. N . ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2015. O . ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2015a. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 2 P . ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017. Q . ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2016. R . ASTM C172/C172M - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 2014a. S . ASTM C231/C231M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; Revision 17A, 2017. T . ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a (Reapproved 2016). U . ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. V . ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 2017. W . ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016, with Editorial Revision (2016). X . ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2017b. Y . ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2017. Z . ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2015. AA . ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2015. BB . ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2017a. CC . ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2016. DD . ASTM C989/C989M - Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars; 2017. EE . ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004, with Editorial Revision (2013). FF . ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2004a (Reapproved 2013). GG . ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2015. HH . ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 2014. II . ASTM E1155M - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers (Metric); 2014. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 3 JJ . ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011. KK . ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection; 2014a. LL . AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A . Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B . W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A . Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Concrete Subcontractor. d. Special concrete finish Subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of product. B . Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C . Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D . Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 4 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. E . Samples: For waterstops and vapor retarder. F . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency. B . Welding certificates. C . Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Semirigid joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials. D . Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. E . Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. 1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal. F . Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances. G . Field quality-control reports. H . Minutes of preinstallation conference. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 5 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B . Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C . Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. D . Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D1.4M. E . Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. for slab-on-grade and 100 sq. ft. for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A . Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. B . Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A . Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 6 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B . Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M), and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A . ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A . Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. 3. Overlaid Finish birch plywood. B . Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C . Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D . Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 7 E . Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. F . Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. G . Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. H . Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. I . Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A . Per Structural Drawings. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A . Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B . Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A780/A780M. C . Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A . Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B . Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 8 4. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, amorphous silica. C . Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D . Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. E . Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 7. Shrinkage reducing admixture: a. Product: Eclipse Floor 200 by Grace Concrete Products or Tetraguard AS20 by BASF. b. Dosage: For bidding purposes only, assume a minimum of 1 gallon of admixture per cubic yard of concrete. Final optimum dosage and mix design shall be determined by the concrete supplier/manufacturer based on testing prior to construction. c. Admixture volume shall replace equal volume water. d. Water-reducing admixtures: Use only near neutral setting polycarboxylate-based water-reducing admixtures that are compatible with shrinkage-reducing admixtures listed above. e. Site-mixing of admixtures not allowed. F . Color Pigment: ASTM C979/C979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water- reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Master Builder 2. WR Grace 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G . Water: ASTM C94/C94M. H . Shrinkage-Reducing Concrete: Concrete mixes for slabs indicated on structural drawings to be exposed shall be proportioned such that the slab drying shrinkage shall not exceed 0.035 at 90 days (laboratory conditions). Submit strength and shrinkage test data and mix design to the architect and structural engineer for review a minimum of two weeks prior to placing any concrete. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 9 1. Water-Cement Ratio: 0.40 maximum; maximum water content = 240#/CY. 2. Strength: Per General Structural Notes. 3. Aggregate: Gradation well proportioned and distributed with largest top size course aggregate of ¾-inch. 4. Admixtures: See approved admixtures in section above. 2.6 WATERSTOPS A . Bentonite Rope Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. Basis of Design Product: RX 101 and 102 by Cetco. 1. Dimensions: as recommended for wall depth; nontapered. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A . Sheet Vapor Retarder: In accordance with Section 03 30 03 - Underslab Vapor Retarder. 2.8 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A . In accordance with Section 03 35 13 - Concrete Floor and Architectural CIP Finishing. 2.9 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A . Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 2.10 CURING MATERIALS A . Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. See Structural General Notes for applications. B . Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C . Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D . Water: Potable. E . Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. See Structural General Notes for application. F . Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. See Structural General Notes for application. 2.11 RELATED MATERIALS A . Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 10 B . Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, [epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80] [aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95] according to ASTM D2240. C . Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D . Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881/C881M, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types I and II, nonload bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. E . Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. F . Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS A . Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109/C109M. B . Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109/C109M. 2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A . Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 11 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B . Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent (Limit to 15 percent for exposed concrete slabs and walls) 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. (Limit to 15 percent for exposed concrete slabs and walls) 3. Slag Cement: 25 percent. (Limit to 15 percent for exposed concrete slabs and walls) 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 25 percent. (Limit to 15 percent for exposed concrete slabs and walls) 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 25 percent 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 25 percent C . Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 D . Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50. E . Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A . Footings: Normal-weight concrete: See Structural General Notes for requirements B . Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete: See Structural General Notes for requirements. C . Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete: See Structural General Notes for requirements. D . Building Walls: Normal-weight concrete: See Structural General Notes for requirements. 2.15 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A . Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.16 CONCRETE MIXING A . Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M and ASTM C1116/C1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 12 B . Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A . Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B . Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M). C . Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. D . Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E . Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F . Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G . Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H . [Chamfer] [Do not chamfer] exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I . Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J . Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 13 K . Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L . Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A . Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A . General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B . Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C . When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION A . Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. 3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A . Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 14 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A . General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B . Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C . Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D1.4M, where indicated. D . Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E . Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.7 JOINTS A . General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B . Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. Provide joint layout on slabs as indicated on Structural and Architectural Plans, and Structural General Notes. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C . Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 15 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D . Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers, are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E . Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION A . Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. B . Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A . Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B . Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C . Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D . Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 16 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E . Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A . Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces [not exposed to public view] <Insert locations>. B . Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed- surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces [exposed to public view,] [to receive a rubbed finish,] [or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete] <Insert locations>. C . Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 17 adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float. D . Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A . General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B . Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull- floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces [indicated] [and] [to receive concrete floor toppings] [to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes] <Insert locations>. C . Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces [indicated] [to receive trowel finish] [and] [to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo] <Insert locations>. D . Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [exposed to view] [or] [to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system] <Insert locations>. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on- grade. 3. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.-long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed [1/4 inch] [3/16 inch] [1/8 inch]. E . Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method]. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. F . Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 18 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. G . Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive [aggregate] [aluminum granule] finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread [25 lb/100 sq. ft.] <Insert rate> of dampened slip-resistive [aggregate] [aluminum granules] over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface. 2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose slip-resistive [aggregate] [aluminum granules]. H . Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate of [100 lb/100 sq. ft.] <Insert rate> unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer. 2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second dry-shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of material, and embed by power floating. 3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after final finishing. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A . Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B . Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C . Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 19 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A . General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M) for hot-weather protection during curing. B . Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C . Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D . Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E . Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 20 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION A . Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven]days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. B . Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.15 JOINT FILLING A . Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least [one] [six] month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B . Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C . Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A . Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B . Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C . Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush- coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 21 color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D . Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E . Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F . Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B . Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 22 C . Inspections (See Structural General Notes for additional requirements): 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D . Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172/C172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 30 00 October 20, 2021 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Project #16-0996 03 30 00 - 23 9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. E . Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M) within 24 hours of finishing. 3.18 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A . Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE FLOOR AND ARCHITECTURAL CIP FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Architectural Concrete Walls. B . Surface treatment with stain and sealer. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Prepared concrete surfaces ready to receive finish, control joints, formed expansion joints, and construction joints and joint devices. F . 03 35 36 - Polished Concrete Finishing. G . 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures, and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. B . Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Provide data on sealer and other manufactured products, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations. B . Map and Test Data: Provide floor flatness and levelness measurements and test locations. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. D . Mockup areas on site as sample finishes of each type of finish scheduled. 1. Schedule Architect site visit to view sample areas. 2. Provide submittal form and photograph of sample area, shoot with low angle light Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE FLOOR AND ARCHITECTURAL CIP FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 13 - 2 E . Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. 1. Maintain one copy ACI Field Manual on project site. B . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. C . Designer Qualifications: Professional structural engineer with 5 years of documented experience in design of this work and licensed in the location of the project. D . Fabricators Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience on projects of similar size and complexity. E . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of 5 years of experience. 1.6 MOCKUP A . Architectural Concrete Mockup: 1. Visual mockups of exposed horizontal and vertical concrete required. 2. Construct mockup area under conditions similar to those that will exist during actual placement, _ feet long by _ feet wide, or at least 2 feet larger than any one form piece, with coatings applied. 3. Locate where directed. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A . Maintain light level equivalent to minimum 200 W light source, placed 8 feet above the floor surface, for each 425 sq ft of floor being finished. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Architectural concrete walls. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 CONCRETE FLOOR FLATNESS A . See Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE FLOOR AND ARCHITECTURAL CIP FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 13 - 3 2.4 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK A . Architectural Concrete Walls. 1. Reduce all tolerances to 1/2 of the permitted tolerance of ACI 117. 2. Formwork to be Class A per ACI 347R. 3. Finishes -Typical: Smooth Formed Finish. 4. Board formed where indicated on drawings. 5. Finish: Matte. B . Smooth Architectural Concrete: 1. High Density Overlaid panel or other approved nonabsorptive panel materials that will provide continuous, true, and smooth Architectural concrete surfaces. a. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. b. New or very clean - no scratches or indentations or other scars allowed. 2.5 COMPOUNDS - HARDENERS AND SEALERS A . Chemical Sealer-Hardener: 1. Concrete Floor Sealer/Finish: Liquid chemical hardener; siliconate type. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Curecrete Chemical, "Ashford Formula" (enhanced silicate, not siliconate). b. L & M Chemical, "Seal Hard." c. Euclid Chemical "Diamond Hard". d. Dayton Superior "Day-Chem Sure Hard J-17". B . Concrete Cleaner: 1. Liquid concentrate, biodegradable, heavy-duty cleaner-degreaser compound. 2.6 FORMWORK JOINING A . At Architectural Concrete join formwork sections smooth, per tolerances listed below and seal the joints at the inside. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 FLOOR FINISHING A . Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 302.1R, and ACI 117. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE FLOOR AND ARCHITECTURAL CIP FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 13 - 4 3.3 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A . Definition: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, flatness, tolerances, or specified requirements. B . Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Consultant and Contractor within 24 hours of test. C . Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Consultant. The cost of additional testing or replacement of concrete shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D . Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. 1. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Remeasure corrected areas by the same process. E . Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace concrete to be left exposed except upon express direction of Consultant for each individual area. F . Architectural Concrete may not be patched. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS PENETRATIONS A . Pipe and ducts not formed into the concrete by their placement or by the use of void forms must have any gap between the item and the concrete filled with non-shrink grout. If the penetration passes through an exterior wall exposed to drainage and/or weather, the exposed area must be waterproofed and sealed to insure against leakage. 3.5 FINISH DEFINITION A . Heavy Broom Finish: Applied with a stiff coarse broom perpendicular to the flow of traffic, resulting in a rough non-slip surface. 1. Location: Exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and sidewalks and as noted. B . Light Broom Finish: Applied with a stiff broom lightly applied to the concrete, providing a non-slip surface with a lighter texture than the heavy broom finish above. 1. Location: Slab surfaces to be covered with traffic coating, or thinset tile and interior exposed concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. C . Full Steel Trowel Finish: Tolerance for these floors as noted above. 1. Location: All other Concrete flatwork. Unless noted otherwise. D . Sealer Finish: 1. After finishing operations (trowel finish or broom finish) are complete, precast panels have been lifted into place and slabs are ready for final treatment, thoroughly clean surface to remove curing membrane and other residue and apply concrete floor sealer. 2. Location: At all interior, exposed slabs subject to pedestrian traffic, unless indicated otherwise. E . Polish: Universal grind depth. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE FLOOR AND ARCHITECTURAL CIP FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 13 - 5 3.6 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.7 SCHEDULE A . (CONC) Smooth Formed Finish at locations indicated. 1. Locations: a. Room: Fire & Water 112. b. Room: STOR 109. c. Room: STOR 111. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 36 October 20, 2021 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 36 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Polished concrete finish on new cast-in-place concrete work. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. E . 03 35 13 - Concrete Floor and Architectural CIP Finishing. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures, and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For installer. B . Samples: Submit two, 12 inch square samples, illustrating aggregate size, color and the extremes of color range. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer's Qualifications: 1. Certified Polished concrete installer. 2. Certified IPCI installer. B . Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 303R. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site. 1.6 MOCKUP A . Construct mockup comprised of one horizontal field sample panel, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, with full aggregate size range represented. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 36 October 20, 2021 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 36 - 2 1. Provide lighting equivalent to finished facility for polishing and examination. B . Locate where directed. C . Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B . Storage: 1. Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Keep materials from freezing. C . Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent contamination or damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Polished Concrete Floor: Dry or wet grinding and polishing with various size grit metal- bonded and resin-bonded diamonds and application of concrete densifier by an IPCI certified polished concrete installer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Wet Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF): Not less than 0.42 as tested in accordance with ANSI/NFSI B101.3 Wet DCOF of Common Hard-Surface Floor Materials. B . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Basis of Cost: Diamond - D Polished Concrete by Lundeen Simonson Inc. B . Substitution for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 CONCRETE MIX A . Concrete mix design is specified in Section 03 30 00. 2.5 EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION A . Floor Grinder: Type: Multi-orbital, planetary-action, opposing-rotational, diamond-headed floor grinder. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 36 October 20, 2021 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 36 - 3 B . Vacuum System: Ruwac / Ermator (or equivalent) model as determined by installer to perform required dust extraction during grinding and polishing of concrete floor. Diamond Tooling for Initial Grinding, and Preparing Floor for Polishing: 1. 60-grit metal-bonded diamonds (or equivalent). C . Diamond Tooling for Polishing Concrete: 1. 800-grit resin-bonded diamonds (or equivalent). 2.6 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Examine floor to receive polished concrete floor finish. B . Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. C . Verify the Following for Concrete Floors: 1. Floor Finish: a. Slabs and flatwork shall be placed and finished monolithically. b. Strike off and screed slabs to true, plane surfaces at required elevations. c. Thoroughly compact concrete with vibrators, floats, and tampers to force coarse aggregate below the surface. d. Power trowel with no hand finishing. e. Surface should not be burned or burnished due to excessive troweling. f. Imprints are not acceptable. 2. Floor and Joints: a. Free of debris and excessive dirt, dust, clay, and mud. b. Dry. 3. Concrete Curing: Minimum 8 days water cured or dissipating curing compound applied. 4. Concrete Adjacent to Floor Penetrations: Troweled flat and level with surrounding concrete. 5. Concrete Adjacent to Drains, clean-outs, etc: Finish level to the top of the structure. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Protection: Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from the following: 1. Minimal accumulation of dust from grinding and polishing. 2. Contact with overspray of concrete densifier. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 36 October 20, 2021 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 36 - 4 B . Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces in accordance with installer's instructions. C . Clean Surfaces: Remove dirt, dust, debris, oil, grease, curing agents, bond breakers, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants which could adversely affect installation of polished concrete floor system. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . Install polished concrete floor system in accordance with installer's instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings. B . Polished Concrete Floor System: 1. Preparation Step: a. Open-up concrete to accept concrete densifier by grinding with 60-grit metal- bonded diamonds. 2. Apply concrete densifier to deeply saturate floor. 3. Remove residue of concrete densifier dried on floor surface by grinding with 80-grit metal-bonded diamonds. 4. Floor Closure Polishing: a. Remove 80-grit metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 100-grit hybrid diamonds. b. Remove 100-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 200-grit hybrid diamonds. c. Remove 200-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 400-grit resin- bonded diamonds. d. Remove 400-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 800-grit resin- bonded diamonds. e. Apply protective sealer. f. High speed burnish protective sealer with diamond impregnated pad. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 TESTING A . Test each concrete surface in accordance with ANSI/NFSI B101.3 to confirm compliance with performance criteria. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Inspect completed polished concrete floor system with Owner, Contractor, Architect, and Installer. B . Review procedures with Architect to correct unacceptable areas of completed polished concrete floor system. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect completed polished concrete floor system from damage until Substantial Completion. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 35 36 October 20, 2021 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING Project #16-0996 03 35 36 - 5 1. Do not allow vehicle and pedestrian traffic on unprotected floor. 2. Do not allow construction materials, equipment, and tools on unprotected floor. B . Immediately remove mortar splatter, spilled liquids, oil, grease, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants which could adversely affect completed polished concrete floor system. C . Repair damaged areas of completed polished concrete floor system to satisfaction of Architect. 3.7 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 54 00 October 20, 2021 CAST UNDERLAYMENT Project #16-0996 03 54 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment: 1. Cementitious underlayment. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . Division 9 Flooring sections. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures, and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For installer. B . Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and product limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on surface preparation, environmental limitations, and installation instructions. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1. Installer shall be listed with the manufacturer as a having special skill in this work. 1.6 MOCKUP A . Provide a mockup for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Prepare mockup in location designated by Architect. 2. Area: 6 ft x 6 ft minimum. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 54 00 October 20, 2021 CAST UNDERLAYMENT Project #16-0996 03 54 00 - 2 3. Do not proceed with underlayment work until workmanship of mockup has been approved by Architect. B . Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B . Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure, freezing, and ambient temperature greater than 105 degrees F. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A . Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete. B . Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of underlayment. C . During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A . Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements. B . Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of underlayment materials in the required fire rated assembly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Where specified floor flatness tolerances are not achieved, or where defects unacceptable to the finish flooring installer are present, use the work of this section to remedy such work. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Cementitious Underlayment: 1. Ardex Engineered Cements Inc: www.ardex.com. a. Ardex V1200 self leveling underlayment. b. Ardex K55 Microtec high flow self leveling underlayment. c. Ardex Forti finish high strength, self drying finishing underlayment. 2. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company Pro-spec; Level Set 300: www.prospec.com. a. Levelset 300 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. b. Feather Edge, A Trowelable, Rapid Setting, Cement-Based Underlayment. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 54 00 October 20, 2021 CAST UNDERLAYMENT Project #16-0996 03 54 00 - 3 3. LATICRETE International, Inc.; LATICRETE SUPERCAP SC500 with LATICRETE SUPERCAP Primer Plus: www.laticrete.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . Aggregate: 1. Dry, well graded, washed silica aggregate, approximately 1/8 inch in size and acceptable to underlayment manufacturer. B . Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized metal lath complying with recommendations of underlayment manufacturer for specific project circumstances. C . Water: 1. Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials. D . Primer: 1. Manufacturer's recommended type. E . Joint and Crack Filler: 1. Cementitious type recommended by manufacturer. F . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.5 MIXING A . Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Add aggregate for areas where thickness will exceed 1/2 inch. Mix underlayment and water for at least two minutes before adding aggregate, and continue mixing to assure that aggregate has been thoroughly coated. C . Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum byproducts, or other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Concrete: Mechanically prepare steel troweled concrete to create a textured surface necessary to achieve the best bond; acceptable methods include bead blasting and scarifying. Do not use acid etching. B . Wood: Install metal lath for reinforcement of underlayment. C . Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 54 00 October 20, 2021 CAST UNDERLAYMENT Project #16-0996 03 54 00 - 4 D . Vacuum clean surfaces. E . Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F . Close floor openings. 3.3 APPLICATION A . Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Pump or pour material onto substrate. Do not retemper or add water. 1. Pump, move, and screed while the material is still highly flowable. 2. Be careful not to create cold joints. 3. Wear spiked shoes while working in the wet material to avoid leaving marks. C . For final thickness over 1-1/2 inches, place underlayment in layers. Allow initial layer to harden to the point where the material has lost its evaporative moisture. Immediately prime and begin application of the subsequent layer within 24 hours. D . Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour strip. 1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated 3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane free of humps or hollows. E . Place before partition installation. F . Where additional aggregate has been used in the mix, add a top layer of neat mix (without aggregate), if needed to level and smooth the surface. G . If a fine, feathered edge is desired, steel trowel the edge after initial set, but before it is completely hard. 3.4 CURING A . Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached. B . Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 03 54 00 October 20, 2021 CAST UNDERLAYMENT Project #16-0996 03 54 00 - 5 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . An independent testing agency will perform field inspection and testing, as specified in Section 01 40 00. B . Placed Material: Agency will inspect and test for conformance to specification requirements. 3.7 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.8 PROTECTION A . Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and cracking. B . Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces unless allowed in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 05 13 October 20, 2021 SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL Project #16-0996 05 05 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Heat-cured spray and powder coated fluoropolymer coating systems on metal substrates. B . Anodized aluminum coatings on metal substrates. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. E . 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. F . Division 23 for mechanical louvers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of coating product specified. B . Samples for Verification: For each color and substrate. C . Certificate for Applicator's Qualifications: Submit certification from the manufacturer stating that the applicator is an approved applicator of the material for work of this Section. D . Samples: Submit samples of each specified finish for verification. E . Coating Touch-Up Procedures: Submit coating manufacturer's recommended touch-up procedures and instructions. F . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. G . Certificate: Submit certification from the coating manufacturer stating that the resin used is fluorosurfactant free. H . Warranty Draft: Submit draft of warranty with required inclusions for review. Submit draft warranty with product data. I . Contract Closeout Submittal: Submit warranty at time of Project Closeout. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Applicator Qualifications: Coating manufacturer's approved applicator equipped and trained for application of coatings, and approved to provide warranty specified. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 05 13 October 20, 2021 SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL Project #16-0996 05 05 13 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A . Deliver, unload, and store coated items so that they remain free of damage and deformation. Package and protect items during shipping and handling. Protect stored items from water. Keep coated items out of contact with materials that may adversely affect the coating. B . Deliver, store and handle materials as required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.6 COORDINATION A . Coordinate substrates and shop-applied coating systems. Where items are indicated to match coatings selected for other items, adjust formulations as required to achieve match. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Fluoropolymer Coatings: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which coatings do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Heat-cured fluoropolymer coating systems on metal substrates including curtain walls, metal panels, louvers, and flashing and trim. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS A . Basis of Design: The design is based on products manufactured by PPG Industries, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering comparable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Akzo Coatings, Inc. 2. Valspar Corp. B . Fluoropolymer Coatings: Factory applied, multicoat, thermo-cured Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) coating, composed of a primer specially formulated for aluminum and fluorocarbon topcoats as follows: 1. PVDF Fluorosurfactant Free Resin Content: 70% unless indicated otherwise. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 05 13 October 20, 2021 SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL Project #16-0996 05 05 13 - 3 C . Fluoropolymer Aluminum Extrusion Coatings, AAMA 2605: Minimum 70 percent PVDF resin, by weight, in color coat . 1. Product: PPG Industries, Inc., Duranar. 2. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D3363: F, minimum. 3. Locations: Exposed aluminum extrusions, unless indicated otherwise. D . Fluoropolymer Aluminum Sheet Coil Coatings, AAMA 2605: 70 percent PVDF resin, by weight, in color coat . 1. Product: PPG Industries, Inc., Duranar. 2. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D3363: F minimum. 3. Salt Spray Resistance, ASTM B117: 1,000 hours minimum. 4. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D2247: 1,000 hours minimum. E . Fluoropolymer Steel Sheet Coil Coatings, AAMA 621: Minimum 70 percent PVDF resin, by weight, in color coat. 1. Product: PPG Industries, Inc., Duranar. 2. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D3363: F minimum. 3. Salt Spray Resistance, ASTM B117: 1,000 hours minimum. 4. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D2247: 1,000 hours minimum. F . Touch-Up Material: Fluoropolymer air-dried system which is recommended and approved by fluoropolymer finish coating manufacturer. 2.4 ANODIZED COATINGS A . (AN-#) Clear or Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.7 mil or thicker. B . (AN-#) Clear or Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class II, 0.4 mil or thicker. C . Alloys: All aluminum should be Aluminum Association alloys as recommended by manufacturers for the use intended and required to produce the specified finish. 1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, 5005-H14 Aluminum Alloy, 0.050 inch minimum thickness. D . Anodized Finishing: 1. All exposed surfaces should receive an architectural anodized finish in conformance with Aluminum Association Standard SSA-46 or AAMA 611 standard. a. Processing should be sulfuric acid or equivalent anodizing with electrolytic or immersion deposited inorganic pigmentation in the coating. 2. Exposed Surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes. 3. Extrusions shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide treatment and then sealed with an organic coating applied with an electrodeposition process. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 05 13 October 20, 2021 SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL Project #16-0996 05 05 13 - 4 4. The anodized coating shall comply with all of the requirements of AAMA 612--02: Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Combined Coatings of Anodic Oxide and Transparent Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum. Testing shall demonstrate the ability of the finish to resist damage from mortar, salt spray, and chemicals commonly found on construction sites, and to resist the loss of color and gloss. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.2 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS PREPARATION A . Pretreatment: Mechanically clean and chemically pretreat fabricated items in accordance with coating manufacturer's requirements and AAMA requirements for finish indicated. 3.3 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS APPLICATION A . Apply primer and finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's requirements for finish indicated. B . Thermally cure (bake) coating immediately following application. C . Process coil coating in one production lot to aid in eliminating color variations due to use of metallic coating. D . Surface Appearance: Cured coating must be visibly free from flowlines, streaks, blisters and other surface imperfections on exposed surfaces. 1. Surfaces shall have no signs of mill finish aluminum or galvanized material showing. 2. No "rack" or "gripper" marks caused by the finishing process on exposed aluminum surfaces will be permitted. 3.4 FLUOROPOLYMER COATINGS REPAIR AND TOUCH-UP A . Repair with coating manufacturer's recommended products or system. 3.5 WAX COATINGS INSTALLATION A . In accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 05 13 October 20, 2021 SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL Project #16-0996 05 05 13 - 5 3.6 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B . Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Certification Procedures" for additional LEED requirements. 2. 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 3. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: for surface-preparation and priming requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A . Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A .AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2016. B .AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2016. C .ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013. D .ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. E .ASTM A216/A216M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service; 2016. F . ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2014. G .ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric); 2014. H .ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. I .ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. J .ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. K .ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2015. L .ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric); 2007 (Reapproved 2013). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 2 M .ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel; 2015. N .ASTM A588/A588M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance; 2015. O .ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2017. P .ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot- Dip Galvanized Coatings; 2009 (Reapproved 2015). Q .ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011 (Reapproved 2015). R .ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2014a. S .ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments; 2013. T .ASTM E165/E165M - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry; 2012. U .ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2015. V .ASTM E94/E94M - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination Using Industrial Radiographic Film; 2017. W .ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2015. X . ASTM F1852 - Standard Specification for "Twist Off" Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2011. Y .ASTM F436/F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2016. Z .ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2013. AA .ASTM F959/F959M - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners, Inch and Metric Series; 2017. BB .AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata). CC .SSPC-PA 1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel; 2004. DD .SSPC-QP3 - Certification Standard for Shop Application of Complex Protective Coating Systems; 2010. EE .SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). FF .SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 3 1.4 COORDINATION A . Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B . Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A . Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of product. B . Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. C . Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds. D . Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, shop-painting applicators, and professional engineer B . Welding certificates. C . Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D . Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 4 E . Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. F . Survey of existing conditions. G . Source quality-control reports. H . Field quality-control and special inspection reports. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD 1. Non AISC-Certified Fabricators shall have five years minimum experience on similar projects of equal or larger complexity and scope. Qualifications shall be submitted two weeks prior to bid. B . Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. 1. Non AISC-Certified Installers shall have five years minimum experience on similar projects of equal or larger complexity or scope. Qualifications shall be submitted two weeks prior to bid. C . Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or to SSPC-QP3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." D . Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. E . Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1.AISC 303. 2.AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3.AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts." Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 5 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B . Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS 1. Refer to general structural notes for material requirements. B . Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened 3. Finish: Plain 4. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1035. C . Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1035. D . Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1030. E . Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1018. 2.2 PRIMER A . Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Color: Gray. B . Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M. 2.3 GROUT A . Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 6 B . Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.4 FABRICATION A . Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B . Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C . Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D . Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E . Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." F . Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. G . Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A . High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Pretensioned B . Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 7 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A . Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. 7. Interior Structure not indicated as painted. B . Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1.SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2.SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C . Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D . Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2.7 FIELD PAINTING A . Damage of shop paint or exposed rusted metal spots shall be cleaned and painted before erection. Paint shall be same as applied by fabricator. B . After erection, all steel exposed to earth or weather shall be painted with a 2nd coat of rust inhibitive paint. C . After erection, all abrasions or damaged paint marks, including bolts, nuts and welds, shall be touched up with shop paint by the erector. D . See 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating for finish coats required. 2.8 GALVANIZING A . Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A123/A123M. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 8 1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles, and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A . Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B . Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts." C . Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M. D . In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. E . Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 9 loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in- place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A . Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B . Baseplates, Bearing Plates, and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Pretension anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. a. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C . Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D . Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E . Splice members only where indicated. F . Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. G . Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H . Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A . High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Pretensioned Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 10 B . Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections, as well as those outlined in the Structural General Notes: 1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections. B . Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C . Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts." D . Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M. E . In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. 3.6 FIELD PAINTING A . Damage of shop paint or exposed rusted metal spots shall be cleaned and painted before erection. Paint shall be same as applied by fabricator. B . After erection, all steel exposed to earth or weather shall be painted with a 2nd coat of rust inhibitive paint. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 12 00 October 20, 2021 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Project #16-0996 05 12 00 - 11 C . After erection, all abrasions or damaged paint marks, including bolts, nuts and welds, shall be touched up with shop paint by the erector. D . See Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating for finish coats required. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A . Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. B . Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power- tool cleaning. C . Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. D . Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. 3.8 IMPROPER FIT OF STEEL WORK A . All framing or connections that do not properly fit, or are not located according to plans, shall be modified or replaced at contractor’s expense. Contractor shall submit to the Architect drawings and proposals for modifications and replacement, for approval. No work shall proceed until approval is received, but temporary shoring and bracing shall be placed until approved corrections are made. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 50 00 October 20, 2021 METAL FABRICATIONS Project #16-0996 05 50 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Delegated design of metal fabrications. B . Metal Fabrications. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 05 05 13 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: Factory applied coatings. E . 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field applied paint finish. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 2. Review FM and Owner requirements for quality assurance and testing 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For fabricator and design engineer. B . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C . Product Data: On all cleaning, galvanizing, and finishing products, including VOC content. D . Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. F . Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 50 00 October 20, 2021 METAL FABRICATIONS Project #16-0996 05 50 00 - 2 G . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Designer Qualifications: Professional structural engineer with 5 years of documented experience in design of this work and licensed in the location of the project. B . Fabricators Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172). Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years' experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.6 MOCKUP A . Enclosure Visual Mockup: 1. Construct and participate in Enclosure Visual Mockup specified in Section 01 43 39 - Mockups. B . Enclosure Performance Mockup: 1. Construct and participate in Enclosure Performance Mockup and testing specified in Section 01 43 39 - Mockups. C . Construct mockup of fabrications indicated below, representing finished work including joints and finishing: 1. Vanity Bracket. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Items designed and shop fabricated out of steel and aluminum sections, tubing, plates and pipe for exposed and concealed locations to include bar grating sun shade, metal canopy and metal gate. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 50 00 October 20, 2021 METAL FABRICATIONS Project #16-0996 05 50 00 - 3 2.3 MATERIALS A . Steel: 1. Steel Sections: a. ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Steel Tubing: a. ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. 3. Plates: a. ASTM A283/A283M. 4. Pipe: a. ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. 5. Slotted Channel Framing: a. ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33. 6. Slotted Channel Fittings: a. ASTM A1011/A1011M. 7. Fasteners: a. To suit application. Unless noted otherwise, match fasteners exposed to view with the material and color/finish of the material being fastened if metal; color and finish if not metal. Fasteners not exposed to view: Galvanized steel unless otherwise noted. 8. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: a. ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components. 9. Welding Materials: a. AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. 10. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: See Section 09 90 00. B . Stainless Steel: 1. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: a. ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304. 2. Tubing: a. ASTM A554, Grade MT 304. 3. Pipe: a. ASTM A312/A312M, Grade TP 304. 4. Castings: a. ASTM A743/A743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20. 5. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: a. ASTM A276/A276M, Type 304. 6. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: a. ASTM A 793. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 50 00 October 20, 2021 METAL FABRICATIONS Project #16-0996 05 50 00 - 4 7. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: a. Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593; with hex nuts, ASTM F594. C . Aluminum: 1. Extruded Aluminum: a. ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. 2. Sheet Aluminum: a. ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper. 3. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: a. ASTM B210 (ASTM B210M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. 4. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: a. ASTM B211 (ASTM B211M), 6061 alloy, T6 temper. 5. Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings: a. ASTM B26/B26M. 6. Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings: a. ASTM B85/85M. 7. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: a. Stainless steel. 8. Welding Materials: a. AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded. D . Fabricated Materials: 1. Sunshade: a. Basis of Design: McNICHOLS Bar Grating by McNICHOLS. 1) Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. b. Features: 1) Item Number: 6720315324 2) Product Line: Bar Grating. 3) Construction Type: Swage-Locked. 4) Bearing Bar Shape: Rectangular Bar. 5) Series Type & Name: GAL-200 (19-S-4). 6) Primary Material: Extruded aluminum; Alloy 6063-T6 (6063T6). 7) Material Finish: Mill finish. 8) Fascia: extruded tube. 9) Decking: Louver blade and airfoils. 2. Metal Gate: a. Basis of Design: Dynamic Gate Builder by GateCrafters; www.gatecrafters.com. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 50 00 October 20, 2021 METAL FABRICATIONS Project #16-0996 05 50 00 - 5 1) Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. b. Features: 1) Style: Single. 2) Type: Slide. 3) Color: Black powder coat. 4) Height: 8 feet. 5) Material: Galvanized Steel. 6) Post: Standard. 7) Trim, clips and fasteners: as recommended by manufacture for size and configuration of panels shown. 2.4 FABRICATION A . Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B . Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C . Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D . Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E . Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F . Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.5 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A . Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B . Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C . Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D . Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E . Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. 2.6 FINISHES A . Steel: 1. Prime paint all steel items. a. Exceptions: 1) Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2) Galvanize items specified for galvanized finish. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 50 00 October 20, 2021 METAL FABRICATIONS Project #16-0996 05 50 00 - 6 3) Do not prime surfaces indicated for spay fire proofing, weathering steel or blackened steel finish. 4) Field welding is required. b. See Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating for field finish painting. 2. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 3. Prime Painting: One coat. 4. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. 5. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating B . Stainless Steel: 1. #4 Satin. C . Aluminum: 1. Typical Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA- M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2. Typical Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class II Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA- M12C22A31 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.4 mils thick. 3. On systems indicated: High Performance Organic Coating System: In accordance with Section 05 05 13 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the fabricator for a complete installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.2 INSTALLATION A . Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B . Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C . Field weld components indicated. D . Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 50 00 October 20, 2021 METAL FABRICATIONS Project #16-0996 05 50 00 - 7 E . After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. F . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A . Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B . Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C . Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the fabricator to maintain finishes, product performance, design criteria, and warranty. 3.6 SCHEDULE A . Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, Backing Plates and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. B . Anchor bolts, steel pipe, cast in masonry anchors, pipe protection. C . Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Steel channel and angles; shop primed. D . Elevator Hoist way Divider Beams: Hoist Beams, Beam sections; prime paint finish. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 52 13 October 20, 2021 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Project #16-0996 05 52 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Delegated design of metal railings. B . Wall mounted handrails. C . Free-standing railings at steps and ramps. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete. E . 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of backing plates in stud wall construction. F . 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer, design engineer, and welder. B . Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. C . Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the engineering and manufacturing of metal railings, with not less than five years of experience. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 52 13 October 20, 2021 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Project #16-0996 05 52 13 - 2 B . Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the location of the project, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer. C . Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Delegated design steel, stainless steel, or aluminum pipe and tube railings. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Basis of Design: C.R. Laurence. 1. Model: CRL-L685, L68S. 2. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A . Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code. B . Distributed Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist distributed force of 75 pounds per linear foot applied to the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E935. C . Concentrated Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist a concentrated force of 200 pounds applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E935. D . Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. E . Configuration limitations: 1. Shop assembled in lengths not to exceed 24 feet for field erection. 2. Post spacing shall be a maximum of 6 feet. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 52 13 October 20, 2021 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Project #16-0996 05 52 13 - 3 3. Do not interrupt the continuation of the top rail at any point along the railing, including corners and end terminations with posts. F . Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. G . Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable, provide flush countersunk fasteners. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for welding anchors. 2. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates, for bolting anchors. H . Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 2.5 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A . Stainless steel at communication stair only. B . Steel Tube: 1. ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C . Steel Pipe: 1. ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, galvanized finish. D . Welding Fittings: 1. Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth. E . Exposed Fasteners: 1. No exposed bolts or screws. F . Straight Splice Connectors: 1. Steel welding collars. G . Galvanizing: 1. In accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M. a. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type II - Organic. H . Shop and Touch-Up Primer: 1. SSPC-Paint 20, Type II - Organic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.6 FABRICATION A . Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. B . Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 52 13 October 20, 2021 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Project #16-0996 05 52 13 - 4 C . Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. D . Welded Joints: 1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. 2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. 3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A . Field finish per Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B . Supply items required to be cast into concrete, embedded in masonry, or placed in partitions with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints. C . Anchor railings securely to structure. D . Field weld anchors as indicated on drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth. E . Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. F . After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. G . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 05 52 13 October 20, 2021 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Project #16-0996 05 52 13 - 5 3.4 TOLERANCES A . Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative. B . Maximum Offset From Adjoining Pieces: 1/32 inch. C . Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. D . Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products (including I-joists). 4. Prefabricated open web wood trusses (combination wood and metal): 5. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 6. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 7. Wood furring and grounds. 8. Wood sleepers. 9. Utility shelving. 10. Plywood backing panels. B . Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements. 2. Division 2 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood framing. 3. Division 6 Section "Sheathing." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B . Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C . Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. D . Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 2 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 6. Comply with submittal requirements of General Structural Notes for Engineered Wood Products and Prefabricated Open Web Wood Trusses (combination wood and metal): B . Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. C . LEED Submittals: 1. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for construction adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Credit EQ 4.4: Composite wood manufacturer's product data for each composite wood product used indicating that bonding agent used contains no urea formaldehyde. 3. Credit MR 7: Certificates of chain-of-custody signed by manufacturers certifying that products specified to be made from certified wood were made from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria." Include evidence that mill is certified for chain-of-custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. D . Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. E . Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Powder-actuated fasteners. 6. Expansion anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 3 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR OPEN WEB JOISTS. A . Structural Performance: Provide joists capable of withstanding design loads indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Comprehensive structural calculations of joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation shall be submitted to the Architect and Structural Engineer for review prior to joist fabrication. 2. Shop drawings and structural calculations shall also be submitted to the Building Official for review as required. B . Unless otherwise indicated, design open web joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections as indicated on structural drawings. C . Camber open web joists equal to the calculated dead load deflection. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A . Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B . Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 4 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A . Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Treatment C2 using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. Preservatives used shall comply with General Structural Notes. 1. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B . Pressure Treatment of Lumber in Contact with Soil: AWPA Treatment C2 using waterborne preservative designated in AWPA C2 as suitable for ground contact use to 0.4 lb/cu ft retention. Preservatives used shall comply with General Structural Notes. C . Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D . Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece, E . Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, ledgers, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A . General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B . Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C . Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 5 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A . Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B . Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Stud or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 3. Douglas fir, NLGA C . Load-Bearing Framing, including stud walls, joists, rafters, beams, headers and other miscellaneous load bearing members: See General Structural Notes. D . Ceiling Joists (Non-Load-Bearing): Construction or No. 2 grade of any species. E . Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 1. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing framing of same type. 2.5 TIMBER FRAMING A . Provide timber framing complying with the following requirements, according to grading rules of grading agency indicated: 1. Species and Grade: See General Structural Notes. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: See General Structural Notes. 3. Additional Restriction: Free of heart centers. 2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A . Laminated-Veneer Lumber (LVL): Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements listed in General Structural Notes. 2. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. B . Parallel-Strand Lumber (PSL): Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements listed in General Structural Notes. 2. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 6 C . Laminated-Strand Lumber (LSL): Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements listed in General Structural Notes. 2. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. D . Prefabricated Open Web Wood Trusses (Combination Wood and Metal): Prefabricated units made with solid or structural composite lumber chords, tubular steel webs connected to chords with steel pins, and bearing hardware/attachments of material and size as required by manufacturer. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitered according to an approved ICC-ES Evaluaton Report. 1. Provide trusses manufactured without urea formaldehyde. 2. Chord Material: Chord material shall have a minimum specific gravity (SG) of 0.50. 3. Web Material: Cold-formed steel tubes conforming to ASTM A500, Grade B, with exceptions approved by applicable ICC-ES Evaluation Report. 4. Structural Properties: Provide unit types with depths designated in Structural Drawings and designed to support all loads indicated in the Drawings. E . Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. 1. Provide I-joists manufactured without urea formaldehyde. 2. Chord Material: Chord material shall be manufactured with laminated veneer lumber (LVL) and have a minimum specific gravity (SG) of at least 0.50. 3. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. 4. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. 5. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. F . Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I- joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists. 2. Material: Laminated Strand Lumber or Laminated Veneer Lumber. Provide rim boards made without urea formaldehyde. 3. Thickness: See Structural Drawings. 4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA standard. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 7 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A . General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving. B . For items of dimension lumber size, provide lumber of same species and grade as load- bearing framing indicated above. C . For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D . For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E . For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.8 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A . Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,[ fire-retardant treated,] in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2- inch nominal thickness. 2.9 FASTENERS A . General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with post-hot-dip galvanized zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153, or mechanically galvanized complying with ASTM B695, Class 55 or greater. B . Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C . Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D . Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E . Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 F . Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 8 G . Expansion Anchors: Use only expansion bolts listed in General Structural Notes. 2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements listed in General Structural Notes. B . Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations only. 2. See General Structural Notes for requirements when used in exterior applications or with preservative-treated lumber. C . Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316L. 1. Use for exterior locations and only where specifically indicated in the drawings. See General Structural Notes for other requirements. D . Joist Hangers, Holdowns, Hurricane Clips, and other miscellaneous light gage connectors: Refer to Structural Drawings. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A . Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B . Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. C . Adhesives for Gluing [Furring] [and] [Sleepers] to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of [70] <Insert limit> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D . Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo- 2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A . Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate [furring, ]nailers, blocking, [grounds, ]and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B . Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C . Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 9 D . Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E . Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F . Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. G . Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. H . Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I . Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. J . Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. K . Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. L . For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Comply with indicated fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 061000 October 20, 2021 ROUGH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 061000 - 10 2. Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. [Do not countersink nail heads] [Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler]. 3.2 WOOD [GROUND,] [SLEEPER,] BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A . Install where indicated and where required for[ screeding or] attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B . Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C . Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A . Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B . Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal size furring [horizontally] [and] [vertically] at 24 inches o.c. C . Furring to Receive [Gypsum Board] [Plaster Lath]: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at16 inches o.c. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A . General: Provide single bottom plate (unless double bottom plates are shown on the drawings) and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B . Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C . Frame openings in accordance with following requirements: 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, see Structural Drawings. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 16 00 October 20, 2021 SHEATHING Project #16-0996 061600 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gypsum board sheathing. 2. Plywood sheathing. 3. Shear panel sheathing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: A. Division 1 Section "LEED Certification Procedures" for additional LEED requirements. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM D5516. 4. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. B. LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. C. WSSP Submittals: 1. Credit MW2.3 – Certified Wood. 2. Credit MW2.4 – Regional/Local Materials. 3. Credit IEQ3.1 – Low-Emitting Interior Finishes. D. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Laboratory Test Reports: For composite wood products, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 2. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content. 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For installation adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 4. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content. 5. Laboratory Test Reports: For installation adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: certifying compatibility of sheathing accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the sheathing. C. Product Test Reports: For each air and vapor-permeable barrier sheathing assembly, indicating compliance with specified requirements, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 16 00 October 20, 2021 SHEATHING Project #16-0996 061600 - 2 D. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Foam-plastic sheathing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution in compliance with Section014339 – Mockups. 1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly, as indicated in Section 014339, incorporating backup wall construction, window, storefront, door frame and sill, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate crack and joint treatment and sealing of gaps, and terminations 2. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection and testing of sheathing before external insulation and cladding are installed. a. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups until mockups are approved. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packaging and store in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. 1. Store within temperature limits required by manufacturer. 2. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for safety and handling. B. Store accessory materials in a location with constant ambient temperatures of 40 to 80 deg F. C. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Conditions: 1. Site Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Joint Flashing: Comply with manufacturer's cold weather application written instructions when atmospheric temperatures or substrate surface temperatures are less than 40 deg F. 2. Accessories and Sealants: Comply with manufacturer’s cold weather application instructions when atmospheric temperatures or substrate surface temperatures are less than 40 deg F. B. Exposure: Comply with manufacturer's limitations on exposure of applied product. 1.08 WARRANTY 1. Manufacturer will, at its option, replace nonconforming product or refund purchase price of quantity of product shown to be nonconforming. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 16 00 October 20, 2021 SHEATHING Project #16-0996 061600 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested per ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.02 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation: GlasRoc. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: DensGlass Fireguard Sheathing. c. National Gypsum Company: Gold Bond eXP Fire-Shield Interior Extreme Gypsum Panel. d. United States Gypsum Company: Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing Firecode X. e. Approved substitution. 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 inches by longest practical length for vertical installation. 4. Maximum framing spacing is 16 inches on center. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C1325, Type A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. C-Cure: C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products: Wonderboard. c. FinPan, Inc.: Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. d. United States Gypsum Company: Durock Cement Board. e. Approved substitution. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch unless indicated otherwise. 2.03 PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exterior Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Per structural drawings. 2. Performance Category: 3/4 PERF CAT. B. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 15/32 inch. C. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 15/32 inch. D. Plywood Parapet Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 15/32 inch. 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt- spray resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 16 00 October 20, 2021 SHEATHING Project #16-0996 061600 - 4 B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Screws for Fastening Sheathing to Wood Framing: ASTM C 1002. D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329-inch-thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112-inch-thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C954. E. Fasteners for Fastening Shear Panel Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by shear panel sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117. 2.05 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 079200 – Joint Sealants. B. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads per inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. C. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of Work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. D. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. E. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 16 00 October 20, 2021 SHEATHING Project #16-0996 061600 - 5 3.02 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated on structural drawings.: 3.03 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install boards with a 3/8 inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install boards with a 1/4 inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than 1 stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches on center and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. (Paper) Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. (Glass Mat) Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.04 SHEAR PANEL SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Install shear panel sheathing in locations indicated on structural Drawings for shear panels. B. Install shear panel sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Seal joints in sheathing panel as specified in Part 3 above according to sheathing panel type. 3.05 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION A. Installation cementitious backer units specified in Section 092900 and per manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ABAA Quality Assurance Program: Perform examinations, preparation, installation, testing, and inspections under ABAA's Quality Assurance Program. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 16 00 October 20, 2021 SHEATHING Project #16-0996 061600 - 6 3.07 PROTECTION A. Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 18 00 October 20, 2021 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Project #16-0996 06 18 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber. B . Related Requirements: 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Certification Procedures" for additional LEED requirements. 2. 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: For dimension lumber items associated with structural glued-laminated timber. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A .AITC 110 - Standard Appearance Grades for Structural Glued Laminated Timber; 2001. B .AITC 111 - Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage and Erection; 2005. C .AITC 117 - Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species; 2010. D .AITC A190.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; 2007. E .ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. F .ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. G .AWPA M4 - Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products; 2011. H .AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2017. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For preservative-treated wood products. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 18 00 October 20, 2021 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Project #16-0996 06 18 00 - 2 3. For connectors. Include installation instructions. B . Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout of structural glued-laminated timber system and full dimensions of each member. 2. Indicate species and laminating combination. 3. Include large-scale details of connections. C . Samples: Full width and depth, 24 inches long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of structural glued-laminated timber including variations due to specified treatment. 1. Apply specified factory finish to three sides of half length of each Sample. D . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A . Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. B . Material Certificates: For preservative-treated wood products, from manufacturer. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. C . Research/Evaluation Reports: For structural glued-laminated timber and timber connectors, from ICC-ES. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: An AITC- or APA-EWS-licensed firm certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B . Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER A . General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with the requirements listed in the General Structural Notes. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that are not exposed in the completed Work. 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from single species. 3. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 18 00 October 20, 2021 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Project #16-0996 06 18 00 - 3 4. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with AITC A190.1. B . Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: See General Structural Notes. C . Species and Grades for Beams: See General Structural Notes. D . Appearance Grade: Architectural, complying with AITC 110. 1. For Architectural appearance grades, fill voids as required by AITC 110. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A . Preservative Treatment: Where preservative-treated structural glued-laminated timber is indicated, comply with AWPA U1, Use Category 3B. 1. Use preservative solution without substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. 2. Do not incise structural glued-laminated timber or wood used to produce structural glued-laminated timber. B . Preservative: 1. Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. 2. Pentachlorophenol in light petroleum solvent. 3. Copper naphthenate in a light petroleum solvent. 4. Ammoniacal zinc copper arsenate (ACZA) in a water solution. 5. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA) in a water solution. 6. Ammoniacal copper quat Type A (ACQ-C) in a water solution. 7. Propiconazole tebuconazole imidacloprid (PTI) in a water emulsion. C . After dressing members, apply a copper naphthenate field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4 to surfaces cut to a depth of more than 1/16 inch. 2.3 TIMBER CONNECTORS A . See Structural Drawings and General Notes. B . Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil dry film thickness. C . Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A . End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. B . Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 18 00 October 20, 2021 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Project #16-0996 06 18 00 - 4 2.5 FABRICATION A . Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. 1. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. B . Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span unless otherwise noted on Structural Drawings. C . Where preservative-treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and sand) before treatment to greatest extent possible. Where fabrication must be done after treatment, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. D . End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length and after preservative treatment, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. E . Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit except for preservative-treated wood where treatment included a water repellent. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A . Wiped Stain Finish: Manufacturer's standard, dry-appearance, penetrating acrylic stain and sealer; oven dried and resistant to mildew and fungus. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B . Clear Finish: Manufacturer's standard, two-coat, clear varnish finish; resistant to mildew and fungus. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A . General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb and with uniform, close- fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Handle and temporarily support glued-laminated timber to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 18 00 October 20, 2021 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Project #16-0996 06 18 00 - 5 B . Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. C . Fit structural glued-laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing and finishing. 1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 2. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planning or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. 4. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field- treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. D . Install timber connectors as indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each connection and in similar connections. 2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3.3 ADJUSTING A . Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A . Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose, including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. 2. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 20 20 October 20, 2021 FINISH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 06 20 20 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . This Section includes the following: 1. Window stools 2. Plywood paneling. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. C . See Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. B . Samples: For each type of paneling indicated. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria": 1. Interior plywood paneling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A . Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. B . Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C . Hardboard: AHA A135.4. D . MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin. E . Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin. F . Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 2.2 WINDOW STOOLS 1. Preprimed Poplar: Refer to Interior Drawings and Finish Legends Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 20 20 October 20, 2021 FINISH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 06 20 20 - 2 2.3 PANELING A . Architectural Sound Panels: 1. Manufacturer: Smith & Fong Company, 475 Sixth Street, San Francisco, CA 94104; Telephone 415-896-0577; Toll Free 866-835-9859; FAX 415-896-0583; Website: www.plyboo.com; Email: sales@plyboo.com. 2. Product: Plyboo Sound Panels, Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend 3. Finish: Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend 2.4 PLYWOOD PANELS A . (WD) Plywood Panels: 1. Premium grade. 2. Features: a. Material: edge grained, bamboo plywood. b. Panel Thickness: 3/4-inch, 3-ply. c. Attachment: Concealed French cleat wall system. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A . Accessories 1. Wall Cleat, Monarch Z Clip 2. Ceiling Clip, Star Hanger Systems, 510 Ceiling Clip 3. Sound Backing: 1” sound backing per panel manufacturer where indicated on Interior Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A . Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 20 20 October 20, 2021 FINISH CARPENTRY Project #16-0996 06 20 20 - 3 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset. 3.4 PANELING INSTALLATION A. ARCHITECTURAL SOUND PANELS 1. Install bamboo panels in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 41 00 October 20, 2021 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Project #16-0996 06 41 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Cabinet units. B . Hardware. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry; for hidden shelf supports. E . 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry. F . 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for casework. G . 09 22 19 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking for metal stud construction. H . 12 36 00 - Countertops: for countertops installed with casework. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For fabricator and installer. B . Product Data: Provide data for hardware, accessories, and finishes. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) Architectural Woodwork Standards. D . Sample: Submit actual samples of Architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish. E . Hardware Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 41 00 October 20, 2021 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Project #16-0996 06 41 00 - 2 F . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. G . Accessory Material VOC Content Certification: 1. Form completed in accordance with Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. H . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For finishes and hardware. Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. I . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A . Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Upholstery Material: Full-width material, 5 yd. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1% for each product. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Fabricators Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of 5 years of experience. 1.8 MOCKUP A . Construct mockup of outside corner of pop-up mounted on solid substrate to show fit and finish of material. 12 inches tall and with 12 inch legs. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the quality standard and fabricator for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 41 00 October 20, 2021 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Project #16-0996 06 41 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Custom designed and fabricated casework made of wood and clad with wood veneer or laminates and associated accessories and hardware. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend for manufacturer, product, size, location and finish. 1. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B . Cabinet units. 1. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) Architectural Woodwork Standards for Grades as indicated. 2. Construction: a. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless. b. Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style 1 - Overlay; Full, unless detailed otherwise. c. Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: 1) All grades all styles of cabinetwork: Doors, drawer fronts and false fronts wood grain and laminate pattern to run and match vertically within each cabinet unit. 2) Custom Grade: Doors, drawer fronts and false fronts wood grain and laminate pattern to run and match vertically within each cabinet unit. 3. Laminate Materials: a. (PL) High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications. 1) Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness. 2) Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness. 3) Flame Retardant Surfaces: HGF, 0.048 inch nominal thickness. 4) Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness. 5) Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate. C . Hardware: 1. (H) Cabinet Hardware as indicated in Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend. a. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 41 00 October 20, 2021 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Project #16-0996 06 41 00 - 4 2. Hardware: ANSI A156.9. 3. Drawer and Door Pulls: Amerock BP76312 pull, 4" brushed chrome with US26D finish, wire pulls. 4. Countertop Support Brackets: a. 6063-T6 extruded aluminum, minimum 450 lb bracket, cut and sanded extrusions drilled with four 5/16" holes; www. rakks.com. b. Surface Mount (EH Series): 2"x 12" x depth" L-shaped Rakks Bracket; clear anodized finish. 5. Cabinet Locks: a. Olympus 100DR door lock and 200DW drawer lock easily rekeyable locks manufactured by Olympus Lock, Inc. b. All locks to include working cylinder slides and forwardly removable cylinders for rekeying without dismantling lock body. c. Furnish two (2) keys per lock. d. Spacers to be provided as required for flush fit with outside face of casework material. e. Locks shall be provided keyed alike per room and master keyed to Olympus’GM2 master key system. f. Locks to pass BHMA/ANSI Grade 1 performance requirements. g. Provide locks and install at doors and drawers located as indicated on drawings. h. Lock catches to be steel. 6. Door Catches: K&V 918 Magnetic catch with 7 lbs. minimum pull strength, aluminum. Provide at all cabinet doors without self closing hinges. 7. Drawer Slides: KV 6505 or equivalent zinc-plated cold rolled steel, ball bearing rollers, 125 lbs. capacity. 8. Paper Storage Extra Heavy Duty drawer slides: K&V 8800 or equivalent zinc-plated cold rolled steel, full extension, ball bearing rollers with 200 lbs. capacity. Length to suit application. 9. Shelf Clips: Polycarbonate, double 5 mm pegs, shelf securing clips designed to lock shelf in place, suitable for 3/4 inch and 1 inch thick shelves, min. 500 lb. load capacity per shelf. Clear color Lyman Associates (Ly-Line Self Securing), Allen Field (5553x), or Bainbridge Mfg. (3220). 10. Shelf Support Brackets: Rakks, Eclipse EC-0808, 125 lbs weight capacity for shelves, clear anodized finish. 11. Wall Bookshelf Standards and Rests: Adjustable extra heavy duty type; Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co. Products 85-185, double slot type, 14 gauge steel, 72 inch long and shelf brackets 10 and 16 inches long. 12. Hinges: 2 ¾ inch size, five knuckle, 270 degree swing hospital type, one pair per door except two pairs required on doors over 48 inches high. Exceed ANSI/BHMA 156.9 Grade 1 requirements. 13. Concealed Hinges: Blum #71B3550 (overlay) and #71B3650 (twin overlay); clip top Blumotion110º opening, self-closing. 14. Coat Hooks: Stanley 1430 Satin Chrome finished double hook. 15. Coat Rod and Shelf Brackets: KV #770-5 chrome rod with #766CHR end supports. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 41 00 October 20, 2021 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Project #16-0996 06 41 00 - 5 16. Elbow Catch: (for inactive leaf of locking cabinets) Hafele 245.74.200 chrome plated, provide two per inactive leaf. 17. Grommets: Rockler, Stainless Steel Oval Grommet, medium. Provide 1 grommet at each knee space 4 feet wide or less and additional grommets for each knee space over 4 feet wide at maximum 48” on center. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with Quality Standards. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication. C . Anchor cabinets to structure. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners 1. For shop finished items, use color matched wood filler. D . Doors and Drawers: To AWS standards. 1. Door and Drawer Fronts; 3/4 inch thick. E . Special Lock Requirement: Provide casework drawers and doors with locks; lock cylinders shall be master keyed in one or more systems and in addition, further keyed alike, keyed differently or separately as directed. F . Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. 3. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 06 41 00 October 20, 2021 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Project #16-0996 06 41 00 - 6 G . Shop Finishes: Touch up finishing after installation of architectural cabinets. Fill nail holes with matching filler. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. H . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide smooth operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 13 00 October 20, 2021 SHEET WATERPROOFING Project #16-0996 07 13 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Horizontal applied sheet waterproofing. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate. B . 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Rigid insulation board used as protection board. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer. B . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. D . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.5 MOCKUP A . Enclosure Visual Mockup: 1. Construct and participate in Enclosure Visual Mockup specified in Section 01 43 39 - Mockups. B . Enclosure Performance Mockup: 1. Construct and participate in Enclosure Performance Mockup and testing specified in Section 01 43 39 - Mockups. C . Construct mockup of 100 sq ft of vertical waterproofing, representing finished work including internal and external corners. D . Locate where directed. E . Mockup may remain as part of the Work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 13 00 October 20, 2021 SHEET WATERPROOFING Project #16-0996 07 13 00 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Installation Warranty: Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner. B . Manufacturer Warranty: Provide five year warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water. 1. Exception: Where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Waterproofing system composed on preformed sheet installed in a seamless manner to provide a barrier to water. 2.2 MATERIALS A . Vertical: 1. Basis of Design Product: GCP Applied Technologies Inc.: Bituthene 3000. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 70. b. Solar Reflectance Index (SR) after 3 years: 56. c. Composite Laminate Membrane: Comprised of 0.032 inch thickness of rubberized asphalt and a 0.008 inch thickness of HDPE; 0.040 inch total thickness. 1) Sheet Width: 36 inch, minimum. 2) Tensile Strength: 325 (membrane) 5000 (film) psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. 3) Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. 4) Water Absorption: 0.1 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM D570, 24 hour immersion. 5) Water Vapor Permeability: 0.05 perm inch, measured in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 13 00 October 20, 2021 SHEET WATERPROOFING Project #16-0996 07 13 00 - 3 B . Manufacturer's optional accessories required by the project: 1. Seaming Materials: a. As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2. Membrane Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. a. As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3. Termination Bars: Stainless steel. a. Stainless steel; compatible with membrane and adhesives. 4. Surface Conditioner: a. Type, compatible with membrane. 5. Adhesives: a. As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 6. Thinner and Cleaner: a. As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet membrane. 7. Protection Board: a. Type capable of preventing damage to waterproofing due to backfilling and construction traffic. 8. Drainage Panel: a. Drainage layer with geotextile filter fabric on earth side. 1) Composition: Dimpled polystyrene core; polypropylene filter fabric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 14 00 October 20, 2021 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING Project #16-0996 07 14 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Cold fluid applied membrane. B . Drainage panels. C . Protection board. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 07 17 13 - Bentonite Waterproofing: For additional waterproofing types. B . 07 18 00 - Traffic Coatings: For additional waterproofing types. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer. B . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate required flashings, sealing at openings. D . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. F . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials. 2. Precautions about actions that could be detrimental to components, and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ____ years of experience. 1.5 MOCKUP A . Construct mockup of 100 sq ft of horizontal waterproofing, representing finished work including internal and external corners. B . Locate where directed. C . Mockup may remain as part of the Work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 14 00 October 20, 2021 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING Project #16-0996 07 14 00 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Manufacturer Warranty: Provide 10 year warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water. 1. Exception: Where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Waterproofing system consisting of fluid applied membrane installed with accessories to provide a barrier to water intrusion of below grade structures not subject to traffic or UV light. 2.2 MATERIALS A . Cold fluid applied membrane: 1. Basis of Design Product: TREMproof 260 by Tremco. a. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing; www.carlisle-ccw.com. 2) Cetco; www.cetco.com. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Adhesion to Concrete: ASTM C794; 1 pli per ASTM C836/C836M. b. Exceeds Elongation: ASTM D412 800%. c. Crack Bridging Ability: ASTM C1305 Pass (*Tested at recommended application thickness of 60 dry mils). d. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96/E96M, wet cup 0.0251 g/h*m2 e. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, wet cup 0.09 perms 5.47 X 10 -9 g/Pa*S*m2 f. Water Vapor Permeability: ASTM E96/E96M, wet cup 0.0054 perm inch, 50% R.H. g. Hardness: Type 00 ASTM D2240 as modified in section; Passes 5.5 ASTM C836/C836M; 50 minimum. h. Stability: (80 degrees F/26.7 degrees C) 6 months Minimum 1 year. i. Vertical Hold: 60 mils Minimum 100 wet mils. j. Solids: 60%, Density: 8.3 lbs/gal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 14 00 October 20, 2021 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING Project #16-0996 07 14 00 - 3 2.3 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Manufacturer's accessories required by the project: 1. Joint backing: a. Closed-cell, polyethylene rod as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2. Joint Treatment: a. Acceptable product(s): 1) Dymeric 240FC; Tremco Inc. 2) Dymonic 100; Tremco Inc. 3) Or as recommended by membrane manufacturer for conditions present. 3. Base Material: a. Typar 3401, 10-Mil HDPE or Paraseal LG or other approved Base Material for below slab on grade, below slab, and blindside wall conditions upon approval by the manufacturer. 4. Prefabricated Composite Drainage: a. Acceptable product(s): Provide an approved drainage mat from the TREMDrain series of products such as TREMDrain 1000 or TREMDrain 2000 composed of a filter fabric laminated to free-draining, high-density, dimpled polystyrene drainage core. b. TREMDrain Total-Drain: Replaces perforated pipe and aggregate that connects directly to the approved TREMDrain Prefabricated Composite Drainage products at base of wall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Coordinate all transition details to adjacent waterproofing systems and substrates. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Manufacturer's field representation is required for the entire time of the entire installation of the coating. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 14 00 October 20, 2021 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING Project #16-0996 07 14 00 - 4 B . Inspection Requirement: 1. Concrete preparation and condition 2. Application technique and adherence to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Wet and then Dry film thickness of coating components and whole system. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 19 00 October 20, 2021 WATER REPELLENTS Project #16-0996 07 19 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Water Repellent for Concrete. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer. B . Product Data: Provide product description, details of tests performed, limitations, and chemical composition. C . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention; cautionary procedures required during application. D . Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E . Manufacturer's Field Reports: Report whether manufacturer's "best practices" are being followed; if not, state corrective recommendations. Email report to Architect the same day as inspection occurs; mail report on manufacturer's letterhead to Architect within 2 days after inspection. F . Field testing: Test surfaces with RILEM tube at: 1. Center of masonry unit. 2. Mortar joint between units. 3. Concrete walls. 4. Helipad. G . Installer's Qualifications: Submit documentation that proposed installer meets specified requirements. H . Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. Confirm compatibility with cleaning materials and adjacent sealants. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Water Repellent Material: Two gallons of the type installed. 3. Extra Anti-Graffiti Material: Two gallons (9 liters) of the type installed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 19 00 October 20, 2021 WATER REPELLENTS Project #16-0996 07 19 00 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. C . Owner reserves the right to provide continuous independent inspection of surface preparation and application of water repellent. D . Provide compatible water repellent and anti-graffiti coatings by same manufacturer. 1.6 MOCKUP A . Prepare a representative surface 36 by 36 inch in size using specified materials and preparation and application methods on surfaces identical to those to be coated; approved mockup constitutes standard for workmanship. B . For proposed substitutions, prepare side-by-side mockups of specified and substitute products. C . Locate where directed. D . Test using RILEM tube test method described in Field Quality Control. E . Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A . Protect liquid materials from freezing. B . Do not apply water repellent when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees F. C . Do not apply water repellents when wind velocity is higher than 5 mph. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Water Repellent: Non-glossy, colorless, penetrating, water-vapor-permeable, non-yellowing sealer, that dries invisibly leaving appearance of substrate unchanged. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A . Silane/Siloxane Water Repellents: 1. Cathedral Stone Products: www.cathedralstone.com 2. Euclid Chemical Company: www.euclidchemical.com 3. Evonik Corporation; www.evonik.com. 4. Vexcon Chemicals Inc: www.vexcon.com 5. PROSOCO, Inc: www.prosoco.com. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 19 00 October 20, 2021 WATER REPELLENTS Project #16-0996 07 19 00 - 3 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.3 WATER REPELLENT: A . Non-glossy, colorless, penetrating, water-vapor-permeable, non-yellowing sealer, that dries invisibly leaving appearance of substrate unchanged. 1. Applications: Vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces. 2. Number of Coats: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate materials. 3. VOC Content: As specified in Section 01 61 16. 4. VOC Content: Less than 600 g/L, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3690 or ASTM D5095. B . Water Repellent for Concrete: 1. Basis of Design: Vexcon Certi-Vex Penseal 244 40%; Euclid Eucoguard VOX Silane; clear penetrating liquid with 40 percent active substance and the following characteristics: a. Active substance: Alkyl-alkoxysilanes. b. VOC Content: 496 g/L. c. Flash Point: 109 degrees F. d. NCHRP 244: At 1 application at 125 sq ft/gal min. 90%. e. ASTM C67: Reduced absorption by >84%. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions before starting work. B . Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. C . Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of water repellent. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Protection of Adjacent Work: 1. Protect adjacent landscaping, property, and vehicles from drips and overspray. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive water repellent such as weep holes at through wall flashing locations and sealant joint locations. B . Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent and anti-graffiti coating manufacturer for best results. C . Do not start work until masonry mortar and concrete substrate is cured a minimum of 60 days. D . Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 19 00 October 20, 2021 WATER REPELLENTS Project #16-0996 07 19 00 - 4 E . Remove oil and foreign substances with a chemical solvent that will not affect water repellent. F . Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry. G . Acid etch smooth concrete surfaces to be coated, using procedures described in Master Painters Institute Consultantural Painting Specifications Manual; match approved mockup. H . Allow surfaces to dry completely to degree recommended by water repellent manufacturer before starting coating work. 3.3 APPLICATION A . Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using procedures and application methods recommended as producing the best results. B . Apply anti-graffiti coating on all masonry surfaces within 20 feet of grade and other horizontal public occupied surfaces. C . Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer, continuously over entire surface. D . Apply two coats, minimum. E . Remove water repellent from unintended surfaces immediately by a method instructed by water repellent manufacturer. F . Provide manufacturer's field service representative to inspect preparation and application work for at least 3 hours on first day to ensure that manufacturer's "best practices" for preparation and application are being followed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Manufacturer's representative's attendance for mockup and preinstallation conference is required. B . Provide manufacturer's field service representative to inspect preparation and application work continuously during entire application period to ensure that manufacturer's "best practices" for preparation and application are being followed. C . Field testing: 1. Equipment: Vertical and Horizontal RILEM tubes, and putty are available at http://www.prginc.com/. 2. Procedure: The testing apparatus is affixed by interposing a tape of putty between the flat, circular brim of the pipe and the surface of the masonry material. To ensure adhesion, manual pressure is exerted on the cylinder. Water is then added through the upper, open end of the pipe until the column reaches the 0 gradation mark. The quantity of water absorbed by the material during a specified period of time is read directly from the graduated tube. The periods of time appropriate for the test depend on the porosity of the material on which the measurement is being made; generally 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 and 60 minute intervals provide the most useful data. Measure water absorption through the mortar joint as well as through the surface of the substrate. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 19 00 October 20, 2021 WATER REPELLENTS Project #16-0996 07 19 00 - 5 3. Report: Results of the test measurements are presented in the form of a water absorption graph with the volume of water absorbed in cubic centimeters reported as a function of time in minutes. The masonry surface tested must be mentioned in the report. 4. Perform 3 tests on each surface coated and 3 at mortar joints in each type of masonry unit. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK A . Protect adjacent landscaping, property, vehicles, and finishes from drips and overspray. B . Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive water repellent. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Foam Board Insulation. B . Fiber Board Insulation. C . Fiber Batt Insulation. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: For acoustic insulation installed as a component of assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer, and design engineer. B . Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C . Test Report: Submit report of full-size mockup test for NFPA 285 fire performance, with project cladding assemblies highlighted, for foam insulation on exterior. D . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. E . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1. Include recommended fastening components and spacing to control sag. 2. Include manufacturer's recommended product for thermal barrier over foam insulation exposed to interior in accordance with IBC 2012.2603.4. a. ". . .tested in accordance with and meets the acceptance criteria of both the Temperature Transmission Fire Test and the Integrity Fire Test of NFPA 275." 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualification: B . Designer Qualifications: C . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 2 years experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 2 1.6 WARRANTY A . Installation Warranty: Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner. B . Manufacturer Warranty: Provide five year warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water. 1. Exception: Where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Foam board, fiber board, batt and low expansion detailing foam thermal insulation. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. B . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Foam Board Insulation: 1. Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578. a. Basis of Design Product: EPS by INSULFOAM. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. b. Performance Criteria: 1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2) Complies with fire-resistance requirements as part of an exterior non-load- bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285 in cladding systems matching project. 3) Water Absorption: 4 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM D2842. 4) Board Density: 0.7 lb/cu ft. 5) Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 6) Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.28. 7) Thermal Resistance (R Value) at 40 degrees F/inch of thickness: 3.6. c. Features: 1) Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 2) Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 3 3) Board Edges: Square. 2. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type X. a. Basis of Design Product: Styrofoam by Dow. b. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) Owens Corning Corporation: www.owenscorning.com. c. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. d. Performance Criteria: 1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3) Complies with fire-resistance requirements as part of an exterior non-load- bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285 in cladding systems matching project. 4) Water Absorption: 4 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM D2842. 5) Water Vapor Transmission: 1.5 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M based on 1 inch thickness. 6) Board Density: 1.3 lb/cu ft. 7) Compressive Resistance: 15 psi. 8) Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.28. 9) Thermal Resistance (R Value) at 40 degrees F/inch of thickness: 5.4. e. Features: 1) Completed Health Product Declaration in accordance with 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. 2) Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 3) Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 4) Board Edges: Square. 3. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: a. Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289. b. Basis of Design Product: 1) ECOMAXci by Rmax. 2) Thermax by Dow. 3) Product warranted by roofing manufacturer as component of their system. c. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. 2) Hunter Panels, LLC: www.hunterxci.com. 3) Johns Manville: www.jm.com. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 4 d. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. e. Performance Criteria: 1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3) Complies with fire-resistance requirements as part of an exterior non-load- bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285 in cladding systems matching project. 4) Water Absorption: <1 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM C209. 5) Water Vapor Transmission: <0.3 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M based on 1 inch thickness. 6) Board Density: 2 lb/cu ft. 7) Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 8) Thermal Resistance (R Value) at 40 degrees F/inch of thickness: 6.5. B . Fiber Board Insulation: 1. Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, ASTM C612. a. Basis of Design Product: 814 Spin-Glas by Johns Manville. b. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2) Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. c. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. d. Performance Criteria: 1) Facing: White kraft paper, fiberglass scrim, aluminum foil laminate (ASJ). 2) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84. 3) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4) Complies with fire-resistance requirements as part of an exterior non-load- bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285 in cladding systems matching project. 5) Water Absorption: <5 percent by weight, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM C209. 6) Water Vapor Transmission: <0.3 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M based on 1 inch thickness. 7) Board Density: 3 lb/cu ft. 8) Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 9) Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 5 10) Thermal Resistance (R Value) at 40 degrees F/inch of thickness: e. Features: 1) Board Thickness: Range of 1-4 inches. 2. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation: a. Rigid mineral fiber, ASTM C612. b. Basis of Design Products: 1) CavityRock DD by ROXUL. 2) ComfortBoard IS by ROXUL. 3) Rainbarrier 45 by Thermafiber. c. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) Thermafiber. 2) Roxul, inc: www.rspec.com. d. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. e. Performance Criteria: 1) Facing: White kraft paper, fiberglass scrim, aluminum foil laminate (ASJ). 2) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84. 3) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4) Rated Non-combustible per NFPA standard 220 in accordance with ASTM E136. 5) Water Absorption: 0.03 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM C1104. 6) Water Vapor Transmission: 50 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M based on 1 inch thickness. 7) Board Density: 4.5 lb/cu ft. 8) Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 9) Thermal Resistance (R Value) at 40 degrees F/inch of thickness: 4.2. f. Features: 1) Board Thickness: 2.5 inches. 2) Installation: Glue or friction fit between z-clips; no stick pin through fastening. 3. Acoustical board insulation: a. Rigid glass fiber, ASTM C612. b. Basis of Design Product: SoundSelect Black Acoustic Board by Owens Corning. c. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2) Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 6 3) Johns Manville. d. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. e. Performance Criteria: 1) Facing: Black non-woven mat. 2) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84. 3) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4) Complies with fire-resistance requirements as part of an exterior non-load- bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285 in cladding systems matching project. 5) Water Absorption: <5 percent by weight, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM C209 6) Water Vapor Transmission: <0.3 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M based on 1 inch thickness. 7) Board Density: 3 lb/cu ft. 8) Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 9) Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 10) Thermal Resistance (R Value) at 40 degrees F/inch of thickness: f. Features: 1) Color: Black with no markings on face. 2) Board Thickness: Range of 1-2 inches. C . Fiber Batt Insulation: 1. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. a. Basis of Design Product: Formaldehyde-free Fiber Glass Insulation by Johns Manville. b. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com. 2) ROXUL, Inc: www.rspec.com. c. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. d. Performance Criteria: 1) Facing: White kraft paper, fiberglass scrim, aluminum foil laminate (ASJ). 2) Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. 3) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 7 4) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5) Water Absorption: 0.03 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM C1104. 6) Water Vapor Transmission: 50 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M based on 1 inch thickness. 7) Board Density: 4.5 lb/cu ft. 8) Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 9) Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 10) Thermal Resistance (R Value) at 40 degrees F/inch of thickness: 3.7. e. Features: 1) Formaldehyde Free. 2. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. a. Basis of Design Product: MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts by Johns Manville. b. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2) Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. c. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. d. Performance Criteria: 1) Facing: White kraft paper, fiberglass scrim, aluminum foil laminate (ASJ). 2) Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. 3) Manufactured with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde. 4) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84. 5) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 6) Water Absorption: 0.03 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM C1104. 7) Water Vapor Transmission: 50 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M based on 1 inch thickness. 8) Board Density: 4.5 lb/cu ft. 9) Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 10) Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 11) Thermal Resistance (R Value) at 40 degrees F/inch of thickness: 3.1. e. Features: 1) Formaldehyde Free. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 8 D . Loose-Filled Building Insulation: 1. Basis of Design: Perlite Loose-Fill Insulation by The Perlite Institution; www.perlite.com. 2. Performance Criteria: a. ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water repellency and limited dust generation during application), with a thermal resistance for 4.1- to 7.4-lb/cu. ft. insulation of 3.3 to 2.8 deg F x h x sq. ft/Btu at 75 deg F for 1-inch thickness. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Sheet Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers. C . Protection Membrane: White, Polypropylene fiberglass scrim. 1. Basis of Design Product: WMP-10 by LAMTEC Corporation. 2. Performance: a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E84. b. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. c. Light Reflectance: 85% minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM C423. d. Tensile Strength: 40 lbs/inch width (MD) when tested in accordance with ASTM C1136. e. Dimensional Stability: 0.030% maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM D1204. D . Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. E . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 21 00 October 20, 2021 THERMAL INSULATION Project #16-0996 07 21 00 - 9 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 26 16 October 20, 2021 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Project #16-0996 07 26 16 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . A. This Section includes installation of below-grade vapor retarder, accessories, flashings, fasteners, and other related components. B . System Description 1. Furnish and install a vapor impermeable sheet vapor retarder system below concrete slab-on-grade conditions as shown on the architectural drawings and described herein. 2. Vapor retarder shall be sealed at joints, lap seams, transitions, and penetrations to achieve a continuous and vapor impermeable medium capable of prohibiting vapor drive through the concrete slab-on-grade. 3. Provide accessories, flashings, fasteners, and other components necessary. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A . Division 3 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.4 REFERENCES A . ASTM E1745 – 11 – Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B . ASTM E1643 - 11 – Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. C . ACI 302.2R-06 – Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. D . ACI 302.1R-15 – Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A . Before commencement of the work provide to the Architect/Consultant the following: 1. Product Data: Product literature including Technical Data Sheets (TDS) for each component. 2. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming, penetration repair, and perimeter seal per ASTM E1643. 3. Summary of test results per paragraph 9.3 of ASTM E 1745. 4. Sample Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard material warranty indicating that product shall be free from defects for the period indicated. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 26 16 October 20, 2021 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Project #16-0996 07 26 16 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Qualifications 1. Installer / Tradesmen involved in the work of this section shall have a minimum of 5 years documented experience regarding fabrication and installation of sheet metal components. 2. Quality control and quality assurance of installation is the General Contractor’s responsibility. a. Architect and Owner may, at their discretion, review installation for conformance with project documents, but final quality control shall be implemented by General Contractor. B . Mock-Up 1. An in-situ mock-up, showcasing installation, typical detail installations, and typical interfaces applicable to the work as depicted in the Architectural Drawings. a. Mock-up shall be reviewed by Architect, Owners Building Envelope Consultant, General Contractor, Installer, and Vapor Barrier Manufacturer’s representative. b. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finishes work. C . Single Source 1. All materials to be provided by a single source manufacturer. Use products provided by or recommended in writing by manufacturer. D . Pre-installation Meeting 1. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of vapor barrier installation. Attendees shall include General Contractor, Architect, Building Envelope Consultant, Installer, Owner’s Representative, and vapor barrier manufacturer’s designated representative. 2. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, quality control measures, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A . Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer’s seals, labels and batch / serial numbers intact and legible. B . Protect from moisture, water, UV exposure and damage. Provide and maintain dry, off- ground weatherproof storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS & REQUIREMENTS A . Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms as tested in accordance with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 Section 7.1 (7.1.1-7.1.5). B . Other performance criteria: 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 26 16 October 20, 2021 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Project #16-0996 07 26 16 - 3 1. Strength: ASTM E1745 Class A. 2. Thickness: 15 mils minimum 2.2 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE A . Basis of Design: 1. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC. B . Equivalent approved products meeting all performance and submittal requirements. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A . Seam Tape 1. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC 2. Per vapor retarder manufacturer B . Mastic 1. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC C . Perimeter/edge seal: 1. Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries LLC 2. Stego Term Bar by Stego Industries LLC 3. StegoTack Tape (double sided) by Stego Industries LLC D . Screed Pins: 1. Non penetrating, pedestal type to prohibit penetration of vapor retarder. 2. Stake-Rite by Bolt-Rite or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A . Substrate shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations. B . Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C . Ensure that subsoil base material is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Level and compact base material. 3.2 INSTALLATION A . Install vapor barrier in accordance with ASTM E1643, manufacturer’s installation instructions and the project documents. B . Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the placement whenever possible. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 26 16 October 20, 2021 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Project #16-0996 07 26 16 - 4 C . Extend vapor barrier to the perimeter of the slab. If practicable, terminate it at the top of the slab, otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to the structural engineer or (b) where obstructed by impediments, such as dowels, waterstops, or any other site condition requiring early termination of the vapor barrier. At the point of termination, seal vapor barrier to the foundation wall, grade beam or slab itself. D . Slabs doweled into wall: Terminate the vapor retarder on the horizontal with the vapor retarder butting into the wall. Install tape at the edge of the vapor retarder per the manufacturer’s typical detail. E . Grade Beam: Seal vapor retarder to top of grade beam with mastic where slab-on-grade is to be installed on top of the slab-on-grade. F . Seal vapor barrier to the entire perimeter wall or footing/grade beam with double sided StegoTack Tape, or both Stego Term Bar and StegoTack Tape, per manufacturer’s instructions. Ensure the concrete is clean and dry prior to adhering tape. G . Overlap joints 6" and seal with manufacturer’s seam tape. H . Apply tapes to a clean and dry vapor barrier. I . Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions. J . Do not allow screed pins for slab finish work to penetrate vapor retarder. Only pedestal type screed pins as noted in Part 2 herein should be considered. K . No penetration of the vapor retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. L . Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged area 6" and taping all sides with tape. 3.3 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A . The installed vapor retarder should be reviewed by the Building Envelope Consultant or Architect prior to placement of the slab-on-grade. B . The vapor retarder should be reviewed by the Building Envelope Consultant or Architect within 24 hours of the placement of the slab-on-grade. 3.4 PROTECTION A . Protect finished work from trade damage until slab-on-grade has been poured. END OF SECTION 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . This Section includes: 1. Materials and installation methods for vapor-permeable water and air barrier membrane system as indicated in Architectural Drawings. 2. Materials and installation methods to bridge and seal water and air leakage pathways in roof and foundation junctions, fenestration openings, control and expansion joints, piping and other penetrations through the wall assembly. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS: A . Division 03 – Cast-in-Place Concrete B . Division 06 – Gypsum Sheathing C . Division 07 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim D . Division 07 – Joint Sealants E . Division 08 – Vinyl Framed Windows and Doors F . Division 08 – Aluminum Framed Storefronts and Entrances 1.4 DEFINITIONS A . Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. 1.5 REFERENCES A . The following standards and publications are applicable to the extent referenced in the text. The most recent version of these standards is implied unless otherwise stated. 1. ASTM C920 – Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM D412 – Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension 3. ASTM D570 – Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics 4. ASTM D903 – Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds 5. ASTM D1004 – Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting 6. ASTM D1876 – Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives 7. ASTM D1938 – Test Method for Tear Propagation Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 2 8. ASTM D4263 – Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method 9. ASTM D5034 – Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics 10. ASTM E96/ E96M – Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 11. ASTM E398 – Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Sheet Materials Using Dynamic Relative Humidity Measurement 12. ASTM E1186 – Practice for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Retarder Systems 13. ASTM E2178 – Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 14. ASTM E2357 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies 15. ASTM E84 – Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 16. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC): ATCC 127 – Test Method for Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test. 17. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): ICC-ES AC38 – Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties of all components to be used under this Section. B . Manufacturer typical details. Include standard and non-standard details for substrate joints and cracks, counter flashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjacent construction. 1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of the air barrier. 2. Include details of mockups. C . Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory materials with project materials that connect to or come in contact with the barrier; signed by product manufacturer. D . Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. For air barriers, submit certified test report showing compliance with requirements specified for ASTM E2178. E . Warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions stated in Section 1.10. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Single Source: Self-adhered water-resistive vapor permeable air barrier membrane components and accessories must be obtained as a single-source membrane system to ensure total system compatibility and integrity. B . Manufacturer Qualifications: 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 3 1. Manufacturer of specified products listed in this Section to have a minimum 10 years of continued experience in the manufacture and supply of air barrier products successfully installed in similar project applications. 2. Manufacturer of specified products listed in this Section to have experienced in-house technical and field observation personal qualified to provide expert technical support. C . Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for the Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. D . Mock-Ups: Before beginning air barrier installation, provide air barrier work for exterior wall assembly mock-ups, incorporating back-up wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air barrier membrane. 1. Coordinate construction of mock-up to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed. 2. If Architect determines mock-ups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mock-ups and apply air barrier until mock-ups are approved. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . If Architect determines mock-ups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mock-ups and apply air barrier until mock-ups are approved B . Do not double-stack pallets of fluid-applied components on the Project Site. Provide cover on top and all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. C . Protect fluid-applied components from freezing and extreme heat. D . Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. 1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: A . A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and coordinate the Work with related and adjacent work. Pre-installation conference shall include the Contractor, installer, Architect, and system manufacturer's field representative. Agenda for meeting shall include but not be limited to: 1. Review of submittals 2. Review of surface preparation, minimum curing period, and installation procedures 3. Review of special details and flashings 4. Sequence of construction, responsibilities, and schedule for subsequent operations 5. Review of mock-up requirements 6. Review of inspection, testing, protection, and repair procedures 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A . Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. B . Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect the air barrier’s performance. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 4 C . Do not apply air barrier to a wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. 1.11 WARRANTY A . Submit manufacturer’s warranty that air barrier and accessories are free of defects and are manufactured to meet manufacturer’s published physical properties and material specifications. B . Warranty period: Five (5) years from date of completion of the air barrier membrane installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A . General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor air barrier and as a liquid water drainage plane, flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B . The building envelope shall be designed and constructed with a continuous air barrier to control air leakage into or out of the conditioned space. The air barrier shall have the following characteristics: 1. It must be continuous, with all joints made airtight. 2. It shall have an air permeability not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq ft under a pressure differential of 1.57, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. 3. Full air barrier system shall have an air permeability not to exceed 0.3 cfm/sq ft under a pressure differential of 1.57 psf, when tested in accordance with ASTM E779. 4. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan, and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. 5. It shall be durable or maintainable. 6. It shall be joined in an air-tight and flexible manner to air barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: a. Foundation and walls b. Walls and windows or doors c. Different wall systems d. Wall and roof e. Wall and roof over unconditioned space f. Walls, floor and roof across construction, control, and expansion joints g. Walls, floor and roof to utility, pipe, and duct penetrations 7. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made air tight. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 5 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A . The following manufacturers are pre-approved for use on the Project: 1. VaproShield 2. Cosella Dorken 3. Grace construction products 4. Soprema, Inc. 2.3 AIR AND WATER BARRIER MEMBRANES A . Allowable Manufacturers and Systems: 1. Basis of Design: a. VaproShield LLC, WrapShield SA 2. Allowable alternate systems, pending compliance with these Specifications and Project requirements: a. Cosella Dorken, Delta Vent SA b. Grace Construction Products, Perm-a-Barrier VPS c. Soprema, Sopraseal Stick VP B . Vapor-Permeable Adhered Air and Water Barrier Membrane: A zero VOC fully self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier sheet membrane consisting of multiple layers of spun-bonded polypropylene tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC 38 criteria to meet IBC and IRC requirements for weather-resistive barriers. 1. Use: a. For use as primary water and air barrier membrane in the field of wall, and at interfaces as recommended by manufacturer and as shown in Project Drawings. 2. Basis of Design Product: a. VaproShield, WrapShield SA 3. Product shall have the following physical properties: a. Air Permeance, ASTM E2178: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq ft under a pressure differential of 1.57 psf. b. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E96: Not less than 15 perms c. Water Penetration Resistance around Nails, ASTM D1970 Modified: Pass d. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly C . Water-Shedding UV Stable Membrane: Black sheet membrane consisting of multiple layers of spun-bonded polypropylene for use with open joint rainscreen cladding systems. 1. Use: For use in an open joint rainscreen cladding assembly. 2. Base of Design Product: a. VaproShield RevealShield SA 3. Product shall have the following physical properties: 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 6 a. Color: Black UV stable, 180 days 100% exposure prior to coverage with an open joint cladding. b. Breaking Strength and Elongation to ASTM D5034: 126.0 lbf, machine direction; 87.7 lbf, cross-machine direction. c. Water Vapor Permeance Tested to ASTM E96 Method B: Minimum 97 perms. d. Water Vapor Permeance Tested to ASTM E398: Minimum 74 perms. e. Water Resistance Tested to AATCC 127, 550 mm hydrostatic head for 5 hours: No leakage. f. Surface Burning Characteristics Tested to ASTM E84: Class A, Flame-Spread Index of less than 10, Smoke-Developed Index of less than 135. 2.4 TRANSITION MEMBRANES AND ACCESSORIES A . Foil Faced Self-Adhered Transition Flashing: Provide self-adhered waterproof membrane consisting of a butyl rubber adhesive layer laminated to a foil liner. Membrane should be interleaved with disposable release paper until installed. 1. Basis of Design: a. Protecto Wrap, Protecto Seal 45 Butyl b. Approved equivalent 2. Product shall have the following physical properties: a. Tensile Strength/Puncture: 100,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D882 and 2,500 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM E154. B . High-Temperature Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane: Provide self-adhered waterproof membrane consisting of a butyl rubber adhesive layer laminated to an HDPE liner, suitable for high-temperature applications. Membrane should be interleaved with disposable release paper until installed. 1. Basis of Design: a. Grace Ultra 2. Product shall have the following physical properties: a. Membrane Thickness: Minimum 30 mil ASTM D3767 Method A. b. Permeance (max): 0.05 perms ASTM E96. c. Service Temperature: Minimum 300° F per ASTM D1204 C . Liquid Flashing Membrane: 1. Basis of Design: a. FastFlash by Prosoco b. Approved equivalent 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . Primer: For each membrane and substrate condition, designed to provide a high-tack finish suitable for membrane application and adhesion, as recommended by manufacturer in published literature based on lab testing and field experience. 1. Basis of Design: 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 7 a. As recommended by manufacturer in writing. B . Fasteners: 1-3/4 inch-diameter pre-formed head caps with a center throat hole, sealing the membrane at fastener penetration designed and tested to withstand wind loads and protect against water intrusion at screw penetrations. 1. Basis of Design: VaproShield, Vaprocaps C . Tape: Black, butyl, UV-stable, single-sided, moisture-resistant flexible tape with adhesive backing for use at interfaces and laps as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design: VaproShield, VaproTape 2. Dimensions: As recommended by manufacturer for intended use. D . Fluid-Applied Transition Flashing: Vapor-permeable, fluid applied, membrane forming, gun-grade waterproofing and detailing compound that consists of silyl-terminated-poly-ether (STPE) compatible with water and air barrier membranes and recommended by the manufacture for use at interfaces. 1. Basis of Design: VaproShield, VaproLiquiFlash E . Detailing Sealant: Single-component, gun-grade, silicone sealant designed to adhere to low surface-energy materials for use at laps and interfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design: VaproShield, VaproBond 2. Alternate: Dowsil 758 F . Flexible Silicone Transition Strips: Flexible, pre-cured, unsupported, silicone transition strip material for use at interfaces with water and air barrier as recommended by manufacturer. Manufacturer-recommended sealant shall be used in conjunction with transition strip. 1. Basis of Design: VaproShield, VaproSilicone transition materials 2. Dimensions: As recommended by manufacturer for intended use G . Termination Bar: For use as recommended by manufacturer with their system: 1. Basis of Design: VaproTermination Bar H . Exterior Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 08 8000 – Sealants and as recommended by manufacturer for use with their system. I . Thermal Spacers: For exterior insulated cladding systems to minimize thermal bridging at cladding attachment: 1. Basis of Design: Cascadia Clip PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify substrates and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this Section and in compliance with membrane manufacturer’s published recommendations. Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the Work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of prepared substrates. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 8 B . All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of membranes. Fill voids, gaps, and spalled areas in substrate to provide an even plane. Strike masonry joints full flush. C . Curing compounds or release agents used in concrete construction must be resin-based without oil, wax or pigments. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A . Refer to and comply with manufacturer’s literature for substrate preparation requirements. Surfaces shall be sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate, and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil, and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone, and debris. Use repair materials and methods acceptable to the air barrier assembly manufacturer. B . Exterior Sheathing Panels: Ensure boards are sufficiently stabilized with corners and edges fastened with appropriate screws in accordance with exterior sheathing manufacturer’s written instructions. C . Masonry Substrates: Apply air and vapor barrier over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel-cut mortar joints, struck full and flush. Fill all voids and holes, particularly in mortar joints, with a lean mortar mix, non-shrinking grout or parge coat. D . Related Materials: Treat construction joints and install flashing as recommended by manufacturer. E . Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, dry substrate for air barrier application. F . Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. G . Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane. H . Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. I . At changes in substrate plane, apply manufacturer’s recommended sealant or detailing mastic at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. 3.3 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A . Refer to and comply with manufacturer’s literature for installation recommendations. B . Apply air barrier membrane to achieve a continuous air barrier according to the air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. C . All laps between membranes shall be sealed with sealant or with tape in accordance with manufacturers recommendations to provide a continually sealed air barrier. Drawings show laps diagrammatically but do not always show lap sealing approach; intent is to seal laps as is most practical per manufacturers recommendations. D . All interfaces shall be sealed in accordance with manufactures recommendations for air barrier continuity. This shall apply irrespective of whether condition is shown on drawings. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 9 E . Application of Self-Adhered Air Barrier Membrane: 1. Install air barrier to dry surfaces at air and surface temperatures of 40°F and above in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, at locations indicated in Construction Documents. 2. Prime substrate to receive air barrier membrane as required per manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Pre-cut pieces of air barrier into easily handled lengths. 4. Remove release linear and position membrane carefully before placing against the surface. 5. Begin installation at the base of wall, placing top edge of membrane immediately below any masonry reinforcement or ties protruding from substrate. 6. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place. Roll membrane with extension-handled countertop roller immediately after placement. 7. Overlap adjacent pieces 2 inches and roll seams. 8. Subsequent sheets of membrane applied above shall be positioned immediately below masonry reinforcement or ties. Bottom edge shall be slit to fit around reinforcing wires or ties, and membrane shall overlap the membrane sheet below by 2 inches. Roll firmly into place. 9. Seal around masonry reinforcing or ties and all penetrations with penetration and termination sealant. 10. Coordinate air barrier installation with Roof Installer to ensure continuity of membrane with roof air barrier. 11. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air barrier to substrate with termination sealant. 12. Do not expose air barrier membrane to sunlight for more than 150 days prior to enclosure. 13. Inspect installation prior to enclosing and repair punctures, damaged areas, and inadequately lapped seams with a patch of the membrane sized to extend 6 inches in all directions from the perimeter of the affected area. 14. Mechanical fasteners used to secure sheathing surfaces or penetrate sheathing surfaces shall be set flush with sheathing, fastened into solid backing and covered with the upper overlapping membrane. If exposed fasteners are present on the membrane surface, cover and seal with sealant per manufacturer recommendations. 3.4 TRANSITION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A . Install strips, transition membrane, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. Install all transition membrane only after application of air barrier. B . Apply primer to substrates to receive transition membrane at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by transition tape in same day. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C . Prime glass fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing not covered with air membrane material with the number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 10 D . Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. E . At end of each working day, seal top edge transition membrane to substrate with termination sealant. F . Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within sealant manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult sealant manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G . Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition membrane so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. H . Transition Membrane: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. I . Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant. J . Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in transition membrane. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition membrane extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Membrane Manufacturer’s Representative shall, as coordinated by the Installer, attend periodic site visits to review and comment on installation. Review shall focus on installation’s compliance with published instructions. Where pertinent, Representative shall also provide recommendations on unique conditions. 1. Manufacturer’s Representative shall furnish field visit report to Contractor and Architect following visit. B . Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and periodic reviews, and prepare test reports. C . Periodic Reviews: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to periodic reviews for compliance with requirements. Reviews may include checking that the following items have been completed: 1. Air barrier system continuity has been achieved throughout the building envelope, with no gaps or holes. 2. Continuous structural support of air barrier system has been provided. 3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings. 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 27 27 September 1, 2020 SELF-ADHERED SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIERS Project #16-0996 07 27 27 - 11 7. Laps in transition membrane comply with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 8. Termination sealant has been applied on cut edges. 9. Transition membrane has been firmly adhered to substrate. 10. Compatible materials have been used. 11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 12. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) comply with requirements for cleanliness, preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 13. All penetrations have been sealed. D . Tests: Testing to be performed will be determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization. E . Quality control and quality assurance of installation remains the full responsibility of the Contractor and Installer. Reviews by Manufacturer’s Representative, Architect, and Owner’s Representative are intended to provide documentation of installation only. F . Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above at no additional cost to Owner. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A . Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B . Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than 150 days. C . Review condition of air barrier membrane prior to installation of cladding. Repair damaged sections as required by the manufacturer. D . Cap and protect exposed back-up walls against wet weather conditions during and after application of membrane, including wall openings and construction activity above air barrier membrane installations. E . Remove and replace membrane affected by chemical spills, surfactants, or field painting. A . Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 42 13 October 20, 2021 METAL WALL PANELS Project #16-0996 07 42 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Metal wall panels. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 05 05 13 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: For finish on panels. E . 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: For insulation and exterior insulation thermal spacers installed with system. F . 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: For weather barrier underlayments installed with system wall panels. G . 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: For joint sealant installed with system. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer, installer, fabricator, and design engineer. B . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C . Product Data: Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal wall panel and accessory. D . Shop Drawings: Include layouts of panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, and special conditions. 1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled. 2. Indicate joint and reveal sizes and path for water drainage. E . Sample: For each panel specified, submit samples of minimum size 12 inches square, representing actual metal panel including material, thickness, profile, color, and texture. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 42 13 October 20, 2021 METAL WALL PANELS Project #16-0996 07 42 13 - 2 F . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. G . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. H . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. I . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. Confirm cleaners are compatible with adjacent materials and face sealers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of panels specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Designer Qualifications: Professional structural engineer with 5 years of documented experience in design of this work and licensed in the location of the project. C . Fabricators Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. D . Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by panel system manufacturer and specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.6 MOCKUP A . Enclosure Visual and Performance Mockup: 1. Construct and participate in Enclosure Visual Mockup specified in Section 01 43 39 - Mockups. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.8 WARRANTY A . Manufacturer’s Finish Warranty: Correct defective work within a 20 year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather. 1. Panel Finish Criteria are listed AAMA 2605. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 42 13 October 20, 2021 METAL WALL PANELS Project #16-0996 07 42 13 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Manufactured metal panels for walls and soffits, with insulation, liners, related flashings, and accessory components. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Design system to accommodate without deformation anticipated thermal movement over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F. B . Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E330/E330M. 1. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with code. 2. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/180 of span. C . Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. D . Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements and continuity of air barrier and vapor retarder seal at building enclosure elements in conjunction with materials specified in Section 07 25 00. E . Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. F . Fabricate and finish panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. G . Factory-install captive gaskets, sealants, or separator strips at panel joints to provide weathertight seals, eliminate metal-to-metal contact, and minimize noise from panel movements. H . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1. EQ Credit Low Emitting Materials, Option 1: Meet emissions testing and requirements of CDPH Standard Test Method v1.1. 2. EQ Credit Low Emitting Materials, Option 1: Meet the applicable VOC limits of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective June 3, 2011. a. Applies only to interior paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants applied onsite. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Specification is based on profiles listed below. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 42 13 October 20, 2021 METAL WALL PANELS Project #16-0996 07 42 13 - 4 1. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. a. AEP Span. 2. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 MATERIALS A . Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. B . Panel Finish: In accordance with Section 05 05 13 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal. 2.5 METAL WALL PANELS A . Concealed Fastener Metal Wall Panels: 1. Basis of Cost: AEP Span Prestige Series or comparable products. 2. Features: a. Panel Material: Aluminum Sheet. b. Sheet Thickness: 22 gauge with aluminum-zinc alloy coating conforming to ASTM A792, Class AZ50. c. Panel Width: 12 inches. d. Reveals: 1" where indicated. e. Color: Timeless Silver. f. Attachment: low profile concealed fastener. B . Corrugated Metal Wall Panels: 1. Basis of Cost: AEP Span Nu-Wave Corrugated Metal Wall Panels or comparable products. 2. Features: a. Panel Material: Aluminum Sheet. b. Sheet Thickness: 22 gauge with aluminum-zinc alloy coating conforming to ASTM A792, Class AZ50. c. Panel Width: 12 inches. d. Reveals: 1" where indicated. e. Color: Cool Tahoe Blue f. Attachment: low profile concealed fastener. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 42 13 October 20, 2021 METAL WALL PANELS Project #16-0996 07 42 13 - 5 B . Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: 1. Material recommended by manufacturer for compatibility with panel base metal and conditions present. Metal Compatibility and furring installed over fiberglass clips and continuous insulation as detailed. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard profile for conditions present. C . Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: 1. Provide flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the panels. D . Sealants: 1. As specified in Section 07 90 05. 2. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency. 3. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type. E . Clips: 1. Interlocking side lap feature which conceals the fasteners and is installed using clips to allow for thermal movement. Clips shall be designed to hold the panel 1/2 inch minimum from exterior insulation to create a drainage plane and ventilation cavity. Load span tables must include evaluation of clip and side joint interaction. F . Factory Applied Sealant: 1. Concealed within the interlocking joint. G . Internal and External Corners: 1. Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. H . Expansion Joints: 1. Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; 20 gage; manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system. I . Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, Flashings, Facias, and Infills: 1. Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. J . Anchors: 1. Galvanized steel or Stainless steel. K . Fasteners: 1. Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene washers, steel, hot dip galvanized. Fastener cap same color as exterior panel. L . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 42 13 October 20, 2021 METAL WALL PANELS Project #16-0996 07 42 13 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. C . Coordinate with installation of associated counterflashings and other components installed under other sections. D . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 TOLERANCES A . Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B . Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. 3.5 CLEANING A . Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish. B . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Ethylene Interpolymer (ketone ethylene ester (KEE)) sheet roofing adhered, mechanically fastened to roof deck. 1.2 RELATED WORK A . 01 23 00 - Alternates. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. C . 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. D . 07 62 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. E . 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A . Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B . Roofing System Energy Performance Requirements: Provide a roofing system identical to components that that have been successfully tested by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to meet the following requirements: 1. Energy Performance, Energy Star: Provide roofing system that is listed on DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products. 2. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. 3. Energy Performance, CRRC-1: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1. 4. Energy Performance, Aged: Provide roofing system with minimum three-year-aged solar reflectance not less than 0.55 when tested in accordance with ASTM C1549 or ASTM E1918, and in addition, a minimum three-year-aged thermal emittance of 0.75 when tested in accordance with ASTM C1371 or ASTM E408. a. Where tested aged values are not available for proposed product, submit calculations to adjust initial solar reflectance to demonstrate compliance as indicated in ASHRAE 90.1-2013 Addendum F. b. Alternatively, provide roofing system with minimum three-year aged Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 64 when determined in accordance with the Solar Reflectance Index method in ASTM E1980 using a convection coefficient of 12 W/m2K (2.1 BTU/h ft2). C . Roofing system design standard requirements: 1. Recommendations of the NRCA applicable to sheet roofing for storage, handling and application. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 2 2. Recommendations of FM Approvals 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Perimeter Flashings. 3. Recommendations of ANSI/SPRI ES-1 for roof edge design. 4. Roofing System Design: Provide roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7. a. Corner Uplift Pressure: kPa/sq. m ( lbf/sq. ft.). b. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: kPa/sq. m ( lbf/sq. ft.). c. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: kPa/sq. m ( lbf/sq. ft.). 5. FM Approvals Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashing, and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FM Approvals "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings. a. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-60 75 90 105 120. b. Hail Resistance: MH SH. 6. High Wind Zone Design Requirement: Contractor Option: In lieu of FM Approval Listing windstorm classification, provide roofing membrane, base flashing, and component materials that comply with Miami-Dade County requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer Qualifications: 1. A firm with a minimum of three (3) years’ experience in type of work required by this section. 2. A firm licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer to perform work under warranty requirements of this Section. 3. Employ full-time supervisors who have worked on roofing projects of similar types and scopes for a minimum of three (3) years. B . Inspector Qualifications: Inspection of work by inspector or manufacturer technical representative experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system who is, qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article. Inspector is to determine Installer’s compliance with the requirements of this Project, and be approved by the manufacturer to issue warranty certification. The Roofing Inspector to be one of the following: 1. An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer, not engaged in the sale of products. 2. An independent party certified as a Registered Roof Observer by the Roof Consultants Institute (RCI), retained by the Contractor or the Manufacturer and approved by the Manufacturer. C . Product/Material Requirements: 1. Obtain products from single manufacturer or from sources recommended by manufacturer for use with roofing system and incorporated in manufacturer's warranty. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 3 D . Pre Roofing Meeting: 1. Upon completion of roof deck installation and prior to roofing application, hold a pre roofing meeting arranged by the Contractor and attended by the Roofing Inspector, Material Manufacturers’ Technical Representative, Roofing Applicator, Contractor, and Contracting Officer Representative (COR). 2. Discuss specific expectations and responsibilities, construction procedures, specification requirements, application, environmental conditions, job and surface readiness, material storage, and protection. 3. Inspect roof deck at this time to: a. Verify that work of other trades which penetrates roof deck is completed. b. Determine adequacy of deck anchorage, presence of foreign material, moisture and unlevel surfaces, or other conditions that would prevent application of roofing system from commencing or cause a roof failure. c. Examine samples and installation instructions of manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A . Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES. B . Product Data: 1. Primer. 2. Adhesive materials. 3. Membrane sheet roofing and flashing membrane. 4. Roofing cement. 5. Roof walkway. 6. Fastening requirements. 7. Application instructions. C . Sustainable Design Submittals, as described below: 1. Volatile organic compounds per volume as specified in Products. D . Samples: 1. Nails and fasteners, each type. E . Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments. 1. Base flashings and terminations. F . Certificates: 1. Indicating materials and method of application of roofing system meets requirements of FM Approvals "RoofNav" for specified fire/windstorm classification. 2. Indicating compliance with Kent County requirements. 3. Indicating compliance with energy performance requirement. G . Warranty: As specified. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 4 H . Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Installer qualifications. 2. Inspector qualifications. I . Field reports of roofing inspector. J . Temporary protection plan. Include list of proposed temporary materials. K . Test reports. L . Contract Close-out Submittals: 1. Maintenance Manuals. 2. Warranty signed by installer and manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A . Comply with the recommendations of the NRCA applicable to single ply membrane roofing for storage, handling and installation. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A . Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B . Provide environmental controls in accordance with Section 01 57 21 Indoor Air Quality Controls. C . Provide protection of interior spaces in accordance with Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.8 WARRANTY A . Manufacturer Warranty: Manufacturer shall warranty their ethylene interpolymer (KEE) roofing system for a minimum of 25 years from the date of installation and final acceptance by the Government. Submit manufacturer warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 KEE MEMBRANE ROOFING A . Basis of Design Product: Sure-Flex KEE HP Sheet: ASTM E1980, fabric reinforced, 60 mils, 80 mils thick, with no backing with fabric backing. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Solar Reflective Index (SRI): 67. 3. Solar Reflective Index (SRI) after 3 years: 57. B . Alternate: 1. Basis of Design Product: VersiFlex KEE HP by Versico Roofing systems 2. Color: Gray. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 5 3. Solar Reflective Index (SRI): 70. 4. Solar Reflective Index (SRI) after 3 years: 56. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A . Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as KEE sheet membrane. B . Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based. C . Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 25 by 3 mm (1 by 1/8 inch) thick; with anchors. D . Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 25 mm wide by 13 mm (1 inch wide by 0.05 inch) thick, prepunched. E . Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate. F . Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resistant, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 5 mm (3/16 inch) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. G . Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide primer, sealers, preformed flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories acceptable to manufacturer. 2.3 ADHESIVE AND SEALANT MATERIALS A . General: Adhesive and sealant materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, identical to materials utilized in approved listed roofing system, and compatible with roofing membrane. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials to comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier to comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, (EPA Method 24): a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. f. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. g. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. h. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L i. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. j. Non-membrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. k. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 6 l. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Examine substrates and conditions with roofing Installer and roofing inspector to verify compliance with project requirements and suitability to accept subsequent roofing work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with roofing work. B . Do not apply roofing if roof surface will be used for subsequent work platform, storage of materials, or staging or scaffolding will be erected thereon unless system is protected. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Complete roof deck construction prior to commencing roofing work: 1. Install curbs, blocking, edge strips, nailers, cants, and other components where insulation, roofing, and base flashing is attached to, in place ready to receive insulation and roofing. 2. Complete deck and insulation to provide designed drainage to working roof drains. 3. Document installation of related materials to be concealed prior to installing roofing work. B . Dry out surfaces, including the flutes of metal deck that become wet from any cause during progress of the work before roofing work is resumed. Apply materials to dry substrates. C . Sweep decks to broom clean condition. Remove dust, dirt or debris. D . Remove projections that might damage materials. 3.3 TEMPORARY PROTECTION A . Install temporary protection at the end of day's work and when work is halted for an indefinite period, or work is stopped when precipitation is imminent. Comply with approved temporary protection plan. B . Install temporary cap flashing over the top of base flashings where permanent flashings are not in place to provide protection against moisture entering the roof system through or behind the base flashing. Securely anchor in place to prevent blow off and damage by construction activities. C . Provide for removal of water or drainage of water away from the work. D . Provide temporary protection over installed roofing by means of duckboard walkways, plywood platforms, or other materials, as approved by COR, for roof areas that are to remain intact, and that are subject to foot traffic and damage. Provide notches in sleepers to permit free drainage. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 7 3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A . FM Approvals Installation Standard: Install roofing membrane, base flashings, wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers, and component materials in compliance with requirements in FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system as listed in FM Approval's "RoofNav" for fire/windstorm classification indicated. Comply with recommendations in FM Approvals' Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, including requirements for wood nailers and cants. B . NRCA Installation Standard: Install roofing system in accordance with applicable NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA recommendations. C . Manufacturer Recommendations: Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written installation recommendations. D . Coordination with related work: Coordinate roof operations with roof insulation and sheet metal work so that insulation and flashings are installed concurrently to permit continuous roofing operations. E . Installation Conditions: 1. Apply dry roofing materials. Apply roofing work over dry substrates and materials. 2. Apply materials within temperature range and surface and ambient conditions recommended by manufacturer. 3. Except for temporary protection, do not apply materials during damp or rainy weather, during excessive wind conditions, nor while moisture (dew, snow, ice, fog or frost) is present in any amount in or on the materials to be covered or installed: a. Do not apply materials when the temperature is below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F). b. Do not apply materials to substrate having temperature of 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) or less. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING A . Do not allow the membrane to come in contact with surfaces contaminated with asphalt, coal tar, oil, grease, or other substances which are not compatible with KEE and its adhesion to the substrate. B . Install the membrane so the sheets run perpendicular to the long dimension of the insulation boards. C . Commence installation at the low point of the roof and work towards the high point. Lap the sheets so the flow of water is not against the edges of the sheet. D . Position the membrane so it is free of buckles and wrinkles. E . Roll sheet out on deck; inspect for defects as being rolled out and remove defective areas. Allow for relaxing before proceeding. 1. Lap edges and ends of sheets 50 mm (2 inches) or more as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Heat weld laps. Apply pressure as required. Seam strength of laps as required by ASTM D4434/D4434M. 3. Check seams to ensure continuous adhesion and correct defects. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 8 4. Finish edges of laps with a continuous beveled bead of sealant to sheet edges to provide smooth transition. 5. Finish seams same day as the membrane is being installed. 6. Anchor perimeter to deck or wall as specified. F . Repair areas of welded seams where samples have been taken or marginal welds, bond voids, or skips occurs. G . Repair fishmouths and wrinkles by cutting to lay flat and installing patch over cut area extending 101 mm (4 inches) beyond cut. H . Membrane Perimeter Anchorage: 1. Install metal fastening strip at the perimeter of each roof level, curb flashing, expansion joints and similar penetrations as indicated and in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions on top of roof membrane to deck or wall. 2. Mechanically Fastened Metal Fastening Strip: a. Set top of mechanical fastener flush with top surface of the metal fastening strip. Space mechanical fasteners a maximum 305 mm (12 inches) on center starting 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the nailing strip. b. When strips are cut round corners and eliminate sharp corners. c. After mechanically fastening strip, cover and seal strip with a 152 mm (6 inch) wide roof membrane strip; heat weld to roof membrane and seal edges. d. At roof edge metal, turn the membrane down over the front edge of the blocking or the nailer to below blocking. Secure the membrane to the vertical portion of the nailer; or, if required by the membrane manufacturer, with fasteners spaced not over 305 mm (12 inches) on centers. e. At parapet walls, intersecting building walls and curbs, secure the membrane to the structural deck with fasteners 305 mm (12 inches) on centers or as shown on NRCA manual. I . Adhered System: 1. Apply adhesive in quantities required by roof membrane manufacturer. 2. Fold sheet back on itself after rolling out and coat the bottom side of the membrane and the top of the deck with adhesive. Do not coat the lap joint area. 3. After adhesive has set according to adhesive manufacturer’s application instruction, roll the membrane into the adhesive in a manner that minimizes voids and wrinkles. 4. Repeat for other half of sheet. Cut voids and wrinkles to lay flat and clean for repair patch over cut area. J . Mechanically-Attached System: 1. Secure the membrane to the structural deck with fasteners through stress plate or batten strips spaced and patterned in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's instructions to achieve specified wind uplift performance. 2. When fasteners are installed within the laps of adjoining sheets, position the fastener so that the stress plates are a minimum 13 mm (1/2 inch) from the edge of the sheets. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 9 3. Where fasteners are installed over the membrane after the seams have been welded, cover the fasteners with a minimum 178 mm (7 inch) wide round KEE membrane cap centered over the fasteners. If batten strips are used, cover the strip with a minimum 178 mm (7 inch) wide KEE strip centered over the batten. Heat weld to the roof membrane and finish edges with sealant as specified. Finish edges with sealant as specified. 4. Before installing fasteners into cast in place concrete, pre-drill the correct size hole into the deck. Drill the hole 9 mm (3/8 inch) deeper than the fastener penetration. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLASHING A . Install flashings as the membrane is being installed. If the flashing cannot be completely installed in one (1) day, complete the installation until the flashing is in a watertight condition and provide temporary covers or seals. B . Flashing Roof Drains: 1. Install roof drain flashing as recommended by the membrane manufacturer, generally as follows: a. Coordinate to set the metal drain flashing in asphalt roof cement, holding cement back from the edge of the metal flange. b. Do not allow the roof cement to come in contact with the KEE roof membrane. c. Adhere the KEE roof membrane to the metal flashing with the membrane manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 2. Turn down the metal drain flashing and KEE roof membrane into the drain body and install clamping ring and strainer. C . Installing KEE Base Flashing and Pipe Flashing: 1. Install KEE flashing membranes to pipes, wall or curbs to a height not less than 203 mm (8 inches) above roof surfaces and 101 mm (4 inches) on roof membrane. a. Adhere flashing to pipe, wall or curb with adhesive. b. Form inside and outside corners of KEE flashing membrane in accordance with NRCA manual. Form pipe flashing with pipe boot in accordance with NRCA manual. c. Lap ends not less than 101 mm (4 inches). d. Heat weld flashing membranes together and flashing membranes to roof membranes. Finish exposed edges with sealant as specified. e. Install flashing membranes in accordance with NRCA manual. 2. Anchor top of flashing to walls or curbs with fasteners spaced not over 203 mm (8 inches) on centers. Use fastening strip on ducts. Use pipe clamps on pipes or other round penetrations. 3. Apply sealant to top edge of flashing. D . Repairs to membrane and flashings: 1. Remove sections of KEE sheet roofing or flashing that is creased wrinkled or fish mouthed. 2. Cover removed areas, cuts and damaged areas with a patch extending 101 mm (4 inches) beyond damaged, cut, or removed area. Heat weld to roof membrane or flashing. Finish edge of lap with sealant as specified. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 16 October 20, 2021 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 16 - 10 3.7 FLEXIBLE WALKWAYS A . Use reinforced sheet not less than 915 mm (3 feet) wide. B . Heat weld walkway sheet to roof sheet at edges. Weld area 50 mm (2 inches) wide by the entire length of the walkway sheet. C . Finish edges of laps with sealants as specified. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Roofing Inspector: Engage a qualified roofing inspector (approved by COR) for a minimum of 5 7 10 full-time days on site to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare start up, interim, and final reports. 1. Examine and probe seams in the membrane and flashing in the presence of COR and Membrane Manufacturer's Inspector. 2. Probe edge of welded seams with a blunt tipped instrument. Use sufficient hand pressure to detect marginal welds, voids, skips, and fishmouths. B . Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. 1. Notify COR 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C . Repair or remove and replace components of roofing work where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. 1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements. 3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A . Protect membrane-roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B . Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of acceptance by COR. C . Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction. Clean membrane and restore surface to like-new condition meeting solar reflectance requirements. END OF SECTION 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . This section includes: 1. Furnish and install a UL-listed, fully-adhered, fleece-backed, fully-reinforced polyvinyl- chloride (PVC) with KEE roofing membrane at locations per the Architectural Drawings. 2. Provide all labor, accessories, and components necessary for a complete water tight installation. 3. Provide flat insulation, tapered insulation, and air barrier/vapor retarder membrane as indicated. 4. Provide continuous tie-ins at roofing interfaces with adjacent components. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A . 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim B . 07 27 27 – Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Air Barriers C . 07 92 13 – Elastomeric Joint Sealants 1.4 REFERENCES A . Reference Standards 1. ASTM E84 – Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2. ASTM E96 – Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 3. ASTM E108 – Test Methods for External Fire Tests of Roof Coverings 4. ASTM D4434 – Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing 5. ASTM D8154 – Standard Test Methods for H-NMR Determination of Ketone-Ethylene- Ester and Polyvinyl Chloride Contents in KEE-PVC Roofing Fabrics 6. UL 790 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings 7. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Latest Edition 8. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Latest Edition 1.5 SUBMITTALS A . Submit letter from manufacturer signifying that the proposed system is warrantable per the requirements of the specifications. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 2 B . Product Data: Submit technical data sheets for all applicable components of the roofing system, including accessories. C . Test Data: Test data indicating roofing assembly compliance with project uplift and other requirements. D . Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions for specified system. E . Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings for each transition not shown as part of the manufacturer’s standard detail set. 2. Tapered insulation shop drawings showcasing slope to drain points. 3. Shop drawings to show extent of intended roofing installation. 4. Mechanically Fastened Insulation and Substrate Board Assemblies: Shop drawings indicating fastener layouts and patterns conforming to uplift design as provided by structural engineer of record. 5. Shop drawing shall indicate design uplift resistance of components as related to calculations by engineer. F . Sample Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s sample warranty. G . Installer’s Certificate: Submit installers’ letter / diploma from manufacturer certifying that installer is approved for a warrantable application of bid roofing system. H . Operations and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s recommended maintenance procedures for roofing system, including precautions and warnings to prevent damage and deterioration to roofing system. 2. Maintain copies of documentation on site in the job office. A bound copy shall be submitted independently to transfer to the Owner at completion of work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . General: Applicator shall be officially recognized as an approved applicator by the roofing materials manufacturer and shall meet the following requirements: 1. Provide evidence that they are an approved applicator in good standing with the specified or approved membrane manufacturer. Letter shall be on manufacturer’s corporate letterhead, complete with signature from officer of the corporation. 2. Employ a Superintendent and Foreman that are experienced in the application of the specified material and have been trained by the specified or approved manufacturer in the application of the materials. B . Pre-Installation Conference: Contractor shall conduct a pre-installation conference no less than five (5) days prior to commencing roofing activities. Parties responsible shall attend, including the Architect / Consultant, Owner, Contractor as well as any subcontractors / trades involved. Pre-Roofing Installation conference shall include: 1. The review and coordination of installation procedures and required related work. 2. Comprehensive review of substrate prior to application of roofing system components. Structural deck shall be clearly observable. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 3 3. Commencement of roof installation signifies that the installer has accepted the substrate and substrate is suitable for a warrantable roofing installation per manufacturer. C . Single Source: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners, air barrier/vapor retarder, and accessories for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . General: Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer’s seals, labels, and batch/serial numbers intact and legible in accordance with manufacturers published recommendations. 1. Store roofing rolls on pallets upright. DO NOT lay flat. 2. Protect from freezing, moisture, salt spray UV exposure and damage. 3. Maintain and store in a dry, weatherproof area. When storage is required outside, provide full protection with breathable canvas tarpaulins. Elevate roofing materials from horizontal surfaces away from moisture. 4. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written and submitted recommendations. 5. Store all temperature sensitive materials in a heated location with a 65° F minimum temperature and remove only as much as is needed for immediate use. Keep all materials away from open flame or welding sparks. B . Materials Stored at Roof Deck (Immediate Use Only): 1. Positively secure to prevent displacement by wind forces. 2. Materials opened and laid out for prefabrication shall be adequately secured at the end of each workday. 1.8 SITE CONDITIONS A . Emergency Water Cut-Off / Night Seals: Maintain on site equipment necessary to apply waterproof temporary edge seal in event of sudden storms, inclement weather, and at end of each work day at unfinished locations. 1.9 WARRANTY A . Upon successful completion of manufacturer and Architect / Consultant punch lists, manufacturer shall issue 25-year, NDL (no dollar limit) warranty to owner. Date of completed punchlist and all remediatory items indicates commencement of warranty period. B . Membrane, assembly and existing structure shall be guaranteed against leaks by manufacturer for a period not less than twenty-five (25) years. Roofing assembly (membrane, coverboard and accessories) shall be guaranteed against defects, discoloration and other related deleterious effects for duration of warranty period. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING MEMBRANE A . PVC Membrane with KEE Elvaloy – Fleece Enhanced. Internal fabric-reinforced with Elvaloy ketone ethylene ester (KEE) polymer thermoplastic polyvinyl chloride sheet enhanced with fleece conforming to Type III and/or Type IV by ASTM D4434. 1. Sure-Flex FleeceBACK KEE HP PVC by Carlisle 115-mil nominal thickness. a. Exposed face color: Gray b. Approved equivalent 2.2 MEMBRANE ACCESSORIES A . Membrane Bonding Adhesive: Low-VOC PVC Bonding Adhesive by Carlisle B . Insulation Adhesive: Two component, spray-applied foaming polyurethane adhesive for attaching insulation to roof decks. 1. FAST Adhesive by Carlisle C . Miscellaneous Sure-Flex Primers, Adhesives, Sealants, and Cleaners 1. Sure-Flex PVC Cut-Edge Sealant by Carlisle 2. Water Cut-Off Mastic by Carlisle 3. Universal Single-Ply Sealant by Carlisle 4. PVC and KEE HP Membrane Cleaner by Carlisle D . Sure-Flex Flashing: Provide manufacturer standard flashings at penetrations and transitions 1. Sure-Flex KEE HP Reinforced Cover Strip by Carlisle 2. Sure-Flex PVC Pressure-Sensitive Cover Strip by Carlisle 3. Sure-Flex PVC Curb Wrap Corners by Carlisle 4. Sure-Flex PVC Pipe Flashings by Carlisle E . Substrate board – Gypsum-fiber roof board 5/8” thick, or as required by the manufacturer. 1. DensDeck Prime Roof Board by Georgia-Pacific 2. Securock Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board to USG F . Polyisocyanurate Roof Board Insulation – Coated Glass Facer (CGF). Minimum 4’x8’ rigid roof insulation panel composed of a closed cell non-halogenated polyisocyanurate foam core bonded to inorganic coated glass facers (CGF) meeting ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3 (25 psi) on both sides. 1. ACFoam-III NH by Atlas Roofing Corporation 2. SecurShield NH by Carlisle 3. Approved equivalent G . Air / Vapor Control Membrane: Provide air/vapor barrier & temporary roof over the sheathing as shown on the project documents. A 40-mil thick composite consisting of 35-mil self-adhering rubberized asphalt membrane laminated to a 5-mil UV resistant poly film with 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 5 an anti-skid surface which is fully compatible with Adhesive. Provide primer as required per manufacture recommendations. 1. Carlisle VapAir Seal 725TR Air and Vapor Barrier 2. As approved by alternate membrane manufacturer. H . Fasteners: Threaded fasteners with 3” diameter plates as recommended by manufacturer for given structural substrate and uplift condition. I . Coping underlayment: Grace Ultra by GCP Applied Technologies J . Roof Drains: Provide cast iron bowl type drain with clamping ring and stainless steel fastener and interlocking steel strainer. Requirements for sizes, intervals and layout of roof drains and drainage plan shall be calculated and designed by Architect. 1. Pre-Approved Drain Manufacturer: Zurn 2. Approved equivalent K . Walkway. Heat weldable 180 mil thick white rolls with safety yellow welding tabs along both edges. 1. Sure-Flex PVC Heat Weldable Walkway Rolls 2. Approved equivalent L . Cold-fluid applied fleece-reinforced resinous liquid flashing for use at transitions and penetrations of geometric complexity. 1. Carlisle LiquiSeal Liquid Flashing 2. Approved Equivalent 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A . Roof decks and roof coverings shall be designed for wind load resistance by structural engineer of record. B . Uplift forces shall be calculated and provided by the structural engineer of record for uplift forces at field, perimeter, and corner conditions of the roof surface. C . Roof system shall be listed as an approved roof assembly by applicable building Codes and shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and listed in the current UL Roofing Materials Directory detailing compliance with the specified fire classification. D . Roofing System Design. Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift pressures: 1. Corner Uplift Pressure: Refer to Structural Notes Page 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: Refer to Structural Notes Page 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: Refer to Structural Notes Page E . Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790 Class A or Class B; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. F . Meets ENERGY STAR requirement for reflectance and emittance. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 6 1. Initial reflectance: 0.87 per ASTM C1549 2. 3-year aged reflectance: 0.71 per ASTM C1549 3. Initial emittance: 0.89 per ASTM C1371 4. 3-year aged emittance: 0.87 (CRRC Rapid Ratings) per ASTM C1371 G . Minimum Slope: Roof system shall slope to drains with a minimum 1/4-inch: 12-inch slope. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Prior to start of work, contractor shall evaluate and deem existing roof substrate suitable for installation of new roofing system per the project documents. It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that existing roof substrate will not prohibit roof from draining per approved tapered shop drawings. 1. Ponding water, regardless of manufacturer statements, claims or published literature will not be acceptable at locations where roofing system is installed. Ponded areas shall be remediated prior to issuance of warranty as part of bid work and will be provided at no additional cost to owner. Increase to project schedule / duration will not be considered. B . Contractor shall advise Architect / Contractor of any areas that will require remediation prior to installation. C . Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and are acceptable for compliance with manufacturer’s warranty requirements. D . Start of work constitutes that contractor has accepted roof substrate and site conditions for a warrantable application per roofing manufacturer. E . Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, low areas that will not drain properly, foreign material, ice, wet insulation, unevenness or any other defect which would prevent a warrantable installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Wood decking shall be sound, well-seasoned, or kiln dried and of proper thickness to accommodate design loads (including wind uplift) according to specified design criteria and/or local building code requirements. 3.3 AIR BARRIER/VAPOR RETARDER MEMBRANE A . Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. B . Install substrate board as needed for air barrier / vapor retarder if structural substrate is not suitable per manufacturer recommendations. C . Prime as recommended by manufacturer. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 7 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SUBSTRATE BOARD A . General: Install materials in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s published instructions. B . Boards shall be installed with minimum joint dimensions and shall be tightly butted where possible. Maximum joint widths shall be 3/8-inch. Damaged corners shall be cut out and replaced with an insulation piece a minimum of 12-inch x 12-inch pieces which are cut from larger panels and are smaller than one square foot will not be accepted. C . Install no more material than can be covered during the same working day. D . Taper roof insulation to drain sumps using tapered edge strips. If an insulation layer is 1-1/2- inches or less, taper 12-inches from the drain bowl. If insulation thickness exceeds 1-1/2- inches, taper 18 inches from the drain bowl. All taper boards or pieces must be adhered or mechanically fastened with a minimum of two fasteners per board. E . When a substrate board and/or multiple layers are installed each layer should be offset from the previous layer a minimum of 12-inches on center. F . At the end of each working day, provide a watertight cover on all unused insulation as to avoid moisture penetration. 3.5 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A . General: Install membrane in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s published instructions (including guide specifications and details) and project documents. B . Work shall be coordinated to ensure that sequencing of the installation promotes a 100% watertight installation at the end of each day. C . Un-roll approximately 30 feet of the fleece-backed roofing membrane and position roll over the properly installed/prepared substrate. Pull the tail back over the roll to expose a workable area (approx. 30') of substrate. (Do not utilize the “butterfly method”. D . Apply a 100% continuous coat of adhesive to the substrate per the manufacturer. E . The amount substrate that can be coated with a workable amount of adhesive will be determined by application method, ambient temperature, humidity and available manpower. F . To ensure proper application and curing of the adhesive, the outside air temperature shall be above 50°F and rising. G . Spray applied adhesive must also be rolled out by roller to ensure a smooth, even 100% coverage of the substrate with no voids, skips, globs, puddles or similar irregularities. H . Allow the solvents in the adhesive to slightly dissipate/cure only to the point that the adhesive is “sticky” but still “wet”. Do not allow adhesive to "dry”. I . Adhesives shall not be installed over moist or wet substrates. J . Broom the adhered portion of the membrane to ensure full contact and complete the bonding process by firmly pressing the bonded membrane into place with a weighted, foam-covered, lawn roller. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 8 K . Repeat the process for the remaining un-bonded portion of the membrane, lapping subsequent, adjacent rolls of membrane a minimum of 3 inches, ensuring proper shingling of the membrane to shed water along the laps. L . No adhesive shall be applied to the lap "seam" areas of the membrane. Areas contaminated with adhesive are difficult to clean, will impair proper welding of the seams and require a membrane patch. 3.6 HOT AIR WELDING A . General 1. Field seams exceeding 10 feet in length shall be welded with an approved automatic welder. 2. Field seams must be clean and dry prior to initiating any field welding. 3. Remove foreign materials from the seams (dirt, oils, etc.) with authorized solvent per roofing manufacturer. Use CLEAN WHITE COTTON cloths and allow approximately five minutes for solvents to dissipate before initiating the automatic welder. Do not use denim or synthetic rags for cleaning. 4. Welding shall be performed only by qualified personnel to ensure the quality and continuity of the weld. 5. Contaminated areas within a seam will inhibit proper welding and will require a membrane patch. B . Hand Welding 1. The lap or seam area of the membrane should be intermittently tack welded to hold the membrane in place. 2. The back "interior" edge of the membrane shall be welded first, with a thin, continuous weld to concentrate heat along the exterior edge of the lap during the final welding pass. 3. The nozzle of the hand held hot air welder shall be inserted into the lap at a 45° angle to the lap. Once the polymer on the material begins to flow, a hand roller shall be use to apply pressure at a right angle to the tip of the hand welder. Properly welded seams shall utilize a 1-1/2 inch wide nozzle, to create a homogeneous weld, a minimum of 1- 1/2 inches in width. 4. Smaller nozzles may be used for corners, and other field detailing, maintaining a minimum 1 inch weld. C . Automatic Machine Welding 1. Proper welding of the membrane can be achieved with a variety of automatic welding equipment. 2. Follow all manufacturers’ instructions for the safe operation of the automatic welder. 3. Follow local code requirements for electric supply, grounding and surge protection. 4. The use of a dedicated, portable generator is highly recommended to ensure a consistent electrical supply, without fluctuations that can interfere with weld consistency. 5. Properly welded seams shall utilize a 1-1/2 inch wide nozzle, to create a homogeneous weld, a minimum of 1-1/2 inches in width. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 9 D . Inspection 1. The job foreman and/or supervisor shall initiate daily inspections of all completed work which shall include, but is not limited to the probing of all field welding with a dull pointed instrument to assure the quality of the application and ensure that any equipment or operator deficiencies are immediately resolved. 2. Excessive patching of field seams because of inexperienced or poor workmanship will not be accepted. 3.7 FLASHINGS A . Clean all vents, pipes, conduits, tubes, walls, and stacks to bare metal. All protrusions must be properly secured to the roof deck with approved fasteners. B . Provide manufacturer’s proprietary one piece, heat-weldable boot flashing at pipe penetrations. Provide stainless steel worm band at top of membrane terminations prior to sealant application. C . The base flange of all membrane flashing shall extend out on to the plane of the deck, beyond the wood nailers to a maximum width of 8 inches. D . Vertical flashing shall be terminated no less than 8 inches above the plane of the deck with approved termination bar and counter-flashing or metal cap flashing. E . Complete all inside and outside corner flashing details with pre-formed corners. F . Probe all seams with a dull, pointed probe to ensure the weld has created a homogeneous bond. 3.8 ROOF DRAINS A . Provide a minimum 60 mil, non-reinforced membrane for drain sumps. B . The drain target sheet should be sized and installed to provide for a minimum of 12 inches of exposed 60 mil on all sides of the drain. 3.9 GENERAL USE SEALANT A . Apply authorized sealant(s) to exposed membrane terminations at pipe penetrations after installation of stainless steel worm bands. B . Sealant(s) are to shed water. Follow all manufacturer's instructions and installation guides. 3.10 CUT EDGE SEALANTS A . Provide manufacturer’s approved cut edge sealant at locations where reinforced membrane has been field cut and not concealed with wall cladding, etc. B . Exposed field cuts in roof membrane shall be kept to a minimum. 3.11 TEMPORARY SEALS A . At the end of each working day or at the sign of rain, install temporary, 100% watertight seal(s) where the completed new roofing adjoins the uncovered deck or existing roof surface. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 54 19 September 1, 2020 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING Project #16-0996 07 54 19 - 10 B . If water is allowed to enter beneath the newly completed roofing, the affected area(s) shall be removed and replaced at no additional expense to the building owner. C . Prior to the commencement of work, cut out and remove all contaminated membrane, insulation, roof cement or sealant and properly dispose off site. 3.12 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A . Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B . Roof-Paver Walkways: Install walkway roof pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 3 inches of space between adjacent roof pavers. 3.13 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A . Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B . Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C . Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 3.14 COMPLETION A . Remove any and all debris, excess materials, and scrap of any kind from the roof and surrounding premises prior to demobilization. B . Inspect all field welds, detailing, and terminations to ensure a 100% watertight installation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 55 63 October 20, 2021 VEGETATED ROOF COVERINGS Project #16-0996 07 55 63 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Delegated design of vegetated roof covering system. B . Protection Course. C . Root Barrier. D . Drainage Layer. E . Moisture Retention Fabric. F . Separation Fabric. G . Growing Medium. H . Electronic Field Vector Mapping (Leak Detection) 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 23 00 - Alternates: For procedures for Alternate No. 1. B . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. C . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 07 54 16 - Ethylene Interpolymer (KEE) Roofing: for mechanically adhered roofing membrane. F . Division 32: for plantings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . Garden Roof: An area of planting/landscaping, built up on a waterproofed substrate at any level that is separated from the natural ground by a man-made structure. B . Extensive Garden Roof: Landscaping consisting of shallow soil depths (3 to 6 inches) with plant varieties to be chosen by a certified Landscape Architect. C . Semi-Intensive Garden Roof: Landscaping consisting of medium soil depth (6 to 8 inches) with plant varieties to be chosen by a certified Landscape Architect. D . Intensive Garden Roof: Landscaping consisting of high soil depths (8+ inches) with plant varieties to be chosen by certified Landscape Architect. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 55 63 October 20, 2021 VEGETATED ROOF COVERINGS Project #16-0996 07 55 63 - 2 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For Installer, surveying engineer. B . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. D . Shop Drawings: Indicate required flashings, sealing at openings. E . Sample: 1. 8x10 inch samples of each sheet product. 2. 24 inch square assembled sample of all green roof components including growing plants. F . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. G . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. H . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. I . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Irrigation system: Warranty may be tied to use of particular systems. 4. Recommended schedule of maintenance. 5. Patch and repair procedures. J . Field Quality Control Submittals: 1. Roof readiness for work of this section. 2. Manufacturer's Representatives report(s). K . Closeout Submittals: 1. Closeout Submittals: Record actual locations of planted areas, hardscape features, existing concealed drains, irrigation system. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 55 63 October 20, 2021 VEGETATED ROOF COVERINGS Project #16-0996 07 55 63 - 3 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualification: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity and certified by the roofing membrane manufacturer. C . Single Source Responsibility: Provide Layered System, growing media, plant materials, flashings and maintenance for stipulated period as a single system by or under direction of vegetated roof manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Deliver materials to project site in original, unopened containers or wrappings. C . Store materials under cover and elevated above grade. D . Store and stack protection board in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. E . Store roll material lying down and on pallets. Fully protect from moisture. F . Remove damaged materials from job site. Replace damaged materials. G . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A . Ambient Conditions: Install garden roof between 1 April and 15 October unless otherwise required or recommended in writing by the manufacturer. B . Roof Slope: Do not install vegetated roofing over substrate with slope of less than 2 percent. C . Existing Conditions: Obtain written certification from the Architect or Owner that the structure can safely withstand the additional load imposed by the soil and plant overburden. 1.9 WARRANTY A . Manufacturer's Material Warranty: Correct defective work within a 20 year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of Green Roof Components including protection layer/root barrier, rigid thermal tapered insulation, drainage layer, filter fabric, river gravel maintenance strip/ballast, lightweight engineered growing medium (soil), vegetation, and automatic irrigation system. Include comprehensive coverage of plant survivability at a rate of 80% after two years, as well as the removal and replacement of overburden to access the waterproofing membrane. B . Manufacturer Roofing Warranty: See Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing. All components must be warranted by the Roofing Manufacture as a single-source. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 55 63 October 20, 2021 VEGETATED ROOF COVERINGS Project #16-0996 07 55 63 - 4 C . Installation Warranty: Contractor shall correct defective Work within a [5] year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Extensive green roof assembly of varying depths installed over drainage and protective layers and roofing membrane. Refer to Drawings for depths. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Install components of the overburden garden roof system without damage to the roofing membrane. B . Saturated Weight of Vegetated Roof System: +/- 35 lbs/sf. C . Rainwater Retention: 60%. D . Buildings or structures that have rooftop gardens or landscaped roofs and that are equipped with a standpipe system shall have the standpipe system extended to the roof level on which the rooftop garden or landscaped roof is located. 1. 2015 IBC 905.3.7. E . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Vegetated Roof Covering Systems. 1. Basis of Design Product: Extensive Garden Roof Assembly by American Hydrotech, Inc. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. 2. Features: a. Plantings: Fully grown-in sedum tiles. b. Growing Media: Proprietary LiteTop Growing Media by American Hydrotech, Inc. c. Soil Depth: Shallow 4-inch +/-. d. Drainage: Gardendrain GR15 by American Hydrotech, Inc. e. Air Space: STYROFOAM® by American Hydrotech, Inc. f. Root Barrier: Hydroflex 30/Root Stop HD bu American Hydrotech, Inc. g. Membrane: Monolithic Membrane 6125 (MM6125) thermoplastic self-healing membrane for refined asphalts and synthetic rubbers. h. Edging: 1) Manufacture’s standard extruded aluminum edge restraint. Install interlocking metal anchor flashing at openings between vegetated areas and perimeter roof edges to anchor vegetated areas, building perimeter flashings, and counter flashings together. Notch + configure for irrigation placement and access. Install per manufacturer's details and drawings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 55 63 October 20, 2021 VEGETATED ROOF COVERINGS Project #16-0996 07 55 63 - 5 2) L’s with slotted drainage holes at perimeters of vegetative cover and paver areas. 3) Install interlocking metal anchor flashing at openings between vegetated areas and perimeter roof edges to anchor vegetated areas, building perimeter flashings, and counter flashings together. 4) Notch and configure for irrigation placement and access. Install in accordance with manufacturers details and Arch details. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey and conduct testing and inspections to verify that roof may adequately support load of intensive vegetated multilayer covering and flood testing, if applicable. B . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. C . Verify that roofing membrane work is complete. D . Verify that surface of membrane is ready to accept vegetated roofing components. E . Inspections and Testing Prior to Installation of Vegetated Roof Components: 1. Verify that installed roofing system has been inspected by manufacturer's representative. 2. Verify that installed roofing system has been tested by controlled flooding, electronic testing or other leak detection method approved by the manufacturer. 3. Provide documentation that membrane installation has been approved by manufacturer and has passed specified testing. F . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Sweep with broom and then blow remaining dust and debris from substrate. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Heat weld root barrier and seam tape in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 55 63 October 20, 2021 VEGETATED ROOF COVERINGS Project #16-0996 07 55 63 - 6 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection. 1. Owner will provide testing services in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. Contractor shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing. B . Manufacturer: 1. Conduct preconstruction, interim, and final inspections to determine acceptance of vegetated roofing system in presence of Owner, Architect, Contractor, manufacturer’s representative, and installer. 2. Verify conformance to manufacturer’s instructions and Warranty provisions. C . Final Inspection and Acceptance: 1. Make arrangements for final inspection of in-place installation within 14 days following Substantial Completion with Owner, Architect, Contractor, installer, and others as requested to be present. 2. Owner will assume maintenance and care of vegetated roof Layered system following acceptance, except as modified by a maintenance service agreement between Owner and manufacturer. D . Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers [weekly] during installation of the Work. 3.5 ADJUSTING A . Make adjustments and alignments of Layered system and flashing trim as necessary to give a uniform and finished appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. B . Leave installations clean, premises free from debris and residue resulting from work of this Section. C . Remove stains from adjacent surfaces with manufacturer's recommended cleaning agents. 3.7 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria and warranty. B . Protect membrane waterproof from contamination from petroleum products, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable and mineral oils, animal fat, chemicals, and other foreign material. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 62 00 October 20, 2021 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Project #16-0996 07 62 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Fabricated sheet metal items. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 05 05 13 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: For finish on sheet metal flashing. E . 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Moisture protection and underlayments under sheet metal flashings. F . 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealants installed with sheet metal flashing and trim. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For fabricator. B . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing locations, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop and field assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners to adjoining work. D . Samples: 1. Finish Sample: Submit two samples illustrating each metal finish color. 2. Fabrication Sample: Submit sample of coping lap joint as it will occur every 10 feet. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 62 00 October 20, 2021 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Project #16-0996 07 62 00 - 2 E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. F . Warranty: Submit manufacturer finish warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Fabricators Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Manufacturer’s Finish Warranty: Correct defective work within a 20 year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather. 1. Panel Finish Criteria are listed AAMA 2605. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Sheet metal including steel, stainless steel, and aluminum fabricated into items such as flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and other items indicated and scheduled. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . General: Install sheet metal flashing and coping to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B . Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg, ambient; material surfaces. C . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions . 2.3 MATERIALS A . Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As scheduled below and indicated on drawings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 62 00 October 20, 2021 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Project #16-0996 07 62 00 - 3 B . Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209; 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre-coated with fluoropolymer coating. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As scheduled below and indicated on drawings. C . Stainless Steel: For all other uses: ASTM A666 Type 304, rollable temper, 0.018 inch thick; smooth No. 4 finish. 2.4 FABRICATION A . Conform to referenced SMACNA manual, Manufacturer's recommendations if premanufactured and as detailed. Conform to following general requirements: B . Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. C . Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D . Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. E . Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. F . Hem exposed edges 1/2 inch on unexposed side, miter and seam corners, unless noted otherwise. G . Cleats: Fabricate continuous cleats and starter strips from one gauge heavier material than sheet metal material, in widths required by SMACNA, interlockable with sheet. H . Fully soldered/welded stainless steel saddle and transition flashings at 3-D transitions such as roof to wall intersections, roof to elevator overrun, and the like. I . Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. J . Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection, and as required by SMACNA. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). K . Shingle laps in flashings: 6-inch minimum, sealed with two distinct beads of bib-skinning butyl sealant at each lap. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Flexible Flashing: 1. For use under metal copings and flashings Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers; use high temperature type. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 62 00 October 20, 2021 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Project #16-0996 07 62 00 - 4 C . Slip Sheet: 1. Rosin sized building paper. D . Protective Backing Paint: See Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. E . Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. 3.6 SCHEDULE A . Unless otherwise noted all exposed exterior sheet metal flashing and trim is Pre-Finished Aluminum. B . Sheet Metal Panel: 1. Material: Prefinished Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 22 gauge/0.080 inches. 3. Locations: As indicated. C . Counter Flashing: 1. Material: Prefinished Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 20 gauge/0.080 inches. 3. Seaming: Fully-welded shop fabricated corners and end dams. D . Window Head Flashing: 1. Material: Prefinished Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 20 gauge/0.032 inches. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 62 00 October 20, 2021 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Project #16-0996 07 62 00 - 5 3. Color: To be selected from manufacture's standard colors. 4. Seaming: Fully-welded shop fabricated corners and end dams. E . Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge flashings: 1. Material: Prefinished Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 20 gauge/0.080 inches 3. Color: To be selected from manufacture's standard colors. 4. Seaming: Butt joint with concealed splice plates. 5. Corners: Fully-welded shop fabricated corners, ends and intersections. F . Pre-finished Metal Sill Flashing: 1. Material: Prefinished Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 22 gauge/0.080 inches 3. Color: To be selected from manufacture's standard colors. 4. Seaming: Butt joint with concealed splice plates. 5. Corners: Fully-welded shop fabricated corners, ends and intersections. G . Pre-finished Aluminum Trim: 1. Material: Prefinished Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 20 gauge/0.080 inches 3. Color: To be selected from manufacture's standard colors. 4. Seaming: Butt joint with concealed splice plates. 5. Corners: Fully-welded shop fabricated corners, ends and intersections. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 72 00 October 20, 2021 ROOF ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 07 72 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Roof hatches. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 23 00 - Alternates: For procedures for alternates. B . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. C . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: For roofing system accessories are incorporated into. F . 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: For formed metal roof accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer. B . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and flashing methods. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate required flashings, curbs and conditions for tie into roofing membrane. D . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. E . Certificate: For smoke hatches, provide certificate of approval from authority having jurisdiction. F . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. H . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's operation and materials. 2. Recommendations on maintenance schedule. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 72 00 October 20, 2021 ROOF ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 07 72 00 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of 5 years of experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. 1.6 WARRANTY A . Installation Warranty: Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner. B . Manufacturer Warranty: Provide 2 year warranty for failing to resist penetration of water. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Factory fabricated unit roof accessories including roof hatches. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Roof Hatches: 1. Basis of Design: Bilco SS-50T or approved equal. 2. Roof Hatch: 3' x 6' thermally enhanced pre-fabricated single leaf aluminum roof access hatch with integral curb and flashings. Modify and coordinate operation for use with alternating tread ladder. a. Manual operations. b. Finish: TBD. c. Prefabricated steel platforms and stairs for rooftop equipment areas. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 72 00 October 20, 2021 ROOF ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 07 72 00 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. 3.5 CLEANING A . Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B . Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. C . Remove excess sealant. D . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 90 05 October 20, 2021 JOINT SEALERS Project #16-0996 07 90 05 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Sealants for interior surfaces. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. B . 07 92 13 - Exterior Joint Sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For Manufacturer, Installer, Testing Agency. B . Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C . Preliminary Selection Sample: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. D . Field Samples for Confirmation: Provide sealant samples in the color selected based on Manufacturer's charts for sealants other than the ones included in the Visual and Performance Mockup. Field samples shall be minimum 12 inches long and installed at joints intended for each particular sealant use. Mockup and field samples will be used to confirm sealant color selection. E . Sanded sealant samples: Include in the Visual and Performance mockup, as part of the brick portion of the mockup. F . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. G . SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. H . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. I . Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. J . Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. K . Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 90 05 October 20, 2021 JOINT SEALERS Project #16-0996 07 90 05 - 2 L . Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. M . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. N . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommendations on maintenance schedule. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. Minimum 5 years of documented experience in facilities of this size and scope. 1. Prequalification of single source installers for exterior sealants is encouraged. C . Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.5 MOCKUP A . Enclosure Visual and Performance Mockup: 1. Construct and participate in Enclosure Visual and Performance Mockup specified in Section 01 43 39 - Mockups. B . Enclosure Performance Mockup: 1. Construct and participate in Enclosure Performance Mockup and testing specified in Section 01 43 39 - Mockups. C . Construct mockup of 4 lineal feet of sealant at narrowest joint width and widest joint width, representing finished work including internal and external corners and control joints. D . Locate where directed. E . Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 90 05 October 20, 2021 JOINT SEALERS Project #16-0996 07 90 05 - 3 1.7 WARRANTY A . Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B . Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. C . Special warranties exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Joint sealers for properly designed joints in interior and exterior materials; selected for durability, movement capacity, adhesion to substrates and non-staining characteristics. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B . Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C . Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. D . Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 90 05 October 20, 2021 JOINT SEALERS Project #16-0996 07 90 05 - 4 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Specification is based on products listed below by Dow Corning Corporation. 1. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. a. Pecora Corporation. b. Tremco. 2. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 MATERIALS A . Sealants for interior surfaces: 1. General Purpose Interior Sealant: polyurethane; single, or multi- component, paintable. a. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. b. Product: Dymonic FC, Dymeric 240FC by Tremco Inc. c. Designed for interior movement and non-moving joints adjacent to painted surfaces. 2. Tile Sealant: Silicone; ASTM C920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant. a. Colors other than white may be required. b. Product: DOWSIL Tub and Tile Sealant manufactured by Dow. c. Sealant Used in Food preparation area must be USDA approved for that use. 3. Acoustical Sealant: Acrylic sealant; ASTM C834. a. Product: Tremco "Acoustical Sealant". b. Tested as part of acoustical assemblies. 4. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single or multi-component. a. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches. b. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. c. Product: Vulkem 45 SSL by Tremco Inc. d. Designed for exposed, trafficked joints with pourable self-leveling installation. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . Joint sealant backing: 1. General: a. Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 90 05 October 20, 2021 JOINT SEALERS Project #16-0996 07 90 05 - 5 2. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: a. ASTM C1330, TypeC (closed-cell material with a surface skin), O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin),or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 3. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: a. Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 degF. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. 4. Bond-Breaker Tape: a. Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. B . Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Primer: a. Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint- sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 2. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: a. Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. 3. Masking Tape: a. Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. 4. Natural Sand: a. Washed natural sand containing no contaminants that would affect the sealant. Color as approved by the architect for sanded joints as indicated or scheduled. C . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. D . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 90 05 October 20, 2021 JOINT SEALERS Project #16-0996 07 90 05 - 6 B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Joint Sanding: Sand sealant joints at brick and sidewalks. 1. Immediately after tooling and prior to skinning over of sealant, broadcast sand onto surface of sealant. 2. Retool by rolling a dowel over the joint to achieve sufficient embedment. 3. Maintain uniform appearance. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Field quality control to include field adhesion testing, field stain testing, test methods and evaluation of field test results. B . Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 92 13 September 1, 2021 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS Project #16-0996 07 92 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDES A . Furnish and install exterior elastomeric sealants and associated accessories as indicated on Architectural Drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A . Division 07 – Water Resistive Barriers B . Division 07 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim C . Division 07 – Fiber Cement Cladding D . Division 07 – Metal Cladding Panels E . Division 07 – Adhered Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing F . Division 07 – Modified Bitumen Roofing G . Division 08 – Glazed Aluminum Window Wall H . Division 08 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall I . Division 08 – Vinyl Framed Windows and Doors J . Division 08 – Aluminum Storefronts and Entrances 1.4 REFERENCES A . ASTM C834 – Specification for Latex Sealing Compounds B . ASTM C804 – Specification for the Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants C . ASTM C790 – Specification for the Use of Latex Sealing Compounds D . ASTM C1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealers E . ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealant F . Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) – Sealants: The Professional’s Guide (Industry Handbook) 1.5 SUBMITTALS A . Before commencement of the Work, provide to the Architect/Consultant the following: 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 92 13 September 1, 2021 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS Project #16-0996 07 92 13 - 2 1. Product literature including Technical Data Sheets (TDS) for all sealants and accessories. 2. Manufacturer’s published installation instructions. 3. Samples for Architect selection including manufacturer’s standard colors. 4. Test Reports: Pertinent test reports indicating compatibility with intended substrates and materials. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer/tradesmen involved in the Work of this Section shall have a minimum of 5 years’ documented experience in installation of joint sealants. B . Mock Up: Construct a mock-up of each typical condition to show location, joint preparation, and size, shape and depth of joints complete with back-up material, primer, and sealant. C . Pull Test: Contractor shall prepare an empirical pull test to be performed by the Building Envelope Consultant on an approximately 12"-inch-long specimen of each sealant on every applicable substrate, Requirements are as follows: 1. Adhesion: As pulled away from joint in a 90° direction (perpendicular to joint), bond adhesion of specimen to joint substrate shall be capable of resisting pull forces as required to complete test duration. 2. Elongation and Cohesive Tear Resistance: As specimen is resisting pull force adhesively, specimen shall reach +/- 300% elongation prior to rupture (cohesive failure). 3. Specimen shall be deemed suitable if at cohesive failure point, adhesion remains at substrate, Failure of specimen to reach 300% elongation or adhesion debonding at any time from substrate will be deemed an unacceptable installation. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A . Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer’s seals, labels, and batch/serial numbers intact and legible. B . Protect from freezing, moisture, water, and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A . Compatibility: Provide joint sealants and accessory materials that are compatible with one another, with joint substrates, and with materials in close proximity under use conditions, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer by testing and related experience. B . Joint Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other specified requirements for each liquid-applied joint sealant. C . Any sealant that remains exposed, or that will be in direct contact with porous materials and will remain exposed upon the Project’s completion shall be non-staining. D . Stain Test Characteristics: Where sealants are required to be non-staining, provide sealants tested per ASTM C 1248 as non-staining on porous joint substrates indicated for the Project. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 92 13 September 1, 2021 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS Project #16-0996 07 92 13 - 3 E . Primers: Provide and use primers in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions where required. F . Sealants within system assemblies as recommended by the manufacturer shall be capable of suiting the purpose intended and compatible with adjacent materials. G . Sealants shall exhibit no chalking or cracking as a result of exposure to heated aging per ASTM C792. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A . DOW Corning Corporation 2.3 SILICONE SEALANTS A . JS-#1, single-component, ultra-low-modulus, non-sag, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant: 1. Basis of Design Product: a. DOWSIL 790 Silicone Building Sealant 2. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T, NT, M, G, A, O 3. Staining, ASTM C 1248: None on concrete, granite, limestone, and brick 4. Hardness, ASTM C 661: 15 durometer Shore A 5. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 26 g/L maximum 6. Color: Match paint finish on storefront and curtain wall mullions 7. Primer: As determined by pull test. 8. Locations: Porous substrates such as concrete and brick B . JS-#2, single-component, medium modulus, non-sag, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant: 1. Basis of Design Product: a. DOWSIL 795 Silicone Building Sealant 2. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT, G, A, O 3. Staining, ASTM C 1248: None on concrete, marble, granite, limestone, and brick 4. Hardness, ASTM C 661: 35 – 45 durometer Shore A, minimum 5. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 32 g/L maximum 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of not less than 10 colors 7. Primer: As determined by pull test. 8. Locations: Non-porous substrates such as metals and glass. C . JS-#5, single-component, neutral cure silicone sealant designed for adhering to low energy surfaces: 1. Basis of Design Product: a. DOW Corning 758 Silicone Weather Barrier Sealant 2. ASTM C920 Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use G, A, O 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of not less than 10 colors 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 92 13 September 1, 2021 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS Project #16-0996 07 92 13 - 4 2.4 PAINTABLE MODIFIED POLYMER SEALANTS A . JS-#6, A low-modulus, single-component, moisture-cure, polyurethane hybrid (silyl-modified polymer) sealant: 1. Basis of Design Product: a. BASF Masterseal NP 150 b. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35, Use NT, M, A, and O 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of not less than 10 colors 3. Primer: As determined by pull test 4. Locations: Exterior joints at cladding to be field painted 2.5 BUTYL SEALANTS: FOR USE WITHIN UNITIZED GLAZING SYSTEMS A . JS-#9, single component; Shore A hardness of 10-20; black color; non skinning; compatible for use with glazing sealant. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A . Joint Substrate Primers: Substrate primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for application. 1. Necessity of primer shall be determined by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B . Cylindrical Sealant Backing: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. ASTM C 1330, Type B non-absorbent, bi-cellular material with surface skin, or Type O open cell polyurethane, as recommended by sealant manufacturer for application. 2. Size: Diameter of backer rod shall be 1/3 times greater than width of joint where it is to be installed, or as otherwise recommended by manufacturer of backer rod. C . Bond Breaker Tape: Polymer tape compatible with joint sealant materials and recommended by sealant manufacturer. D . Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work of other trades, and adjacent surfaces from staining or contamination. 3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINT SURFACES A . Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of back up materials and sealant. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 92 13 September 1, 2021 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS Project #16-0996 07 92 13 - 5 B . Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including but not limited to dust, rust, oil, grease, coatings, existing sealant, and all other foreign matter that may adversely affect sealant adhesion and performance. C . Do not apply sealant to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials, Remove coatings as required. D . Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free. E . Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking. F . Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. 3.3 PRIMING A . Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions immediately prior to caulking. B . Prime only as much area as can be sealed in the same day. 3.4 BACKUP MATERIAL A . Install backing rod or joint filler, as approved by the manufacturer, to achieve a joint depth and shape ration of 2:1 and approximately 25% compression. Install backer rod without stretching, twisting, braiding, puncturing or damaging outer skin. B . Where constraints prevent the use of backer rod, install bond breaker tape where required to prevent three-sided adhesion and to manufacturer’s instructions. 3.5 APPLICATION A . Follow manufacturer’s published installation instructions for sealant application and geometry. B . Apply sealant in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed application instructions. C . Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide neat joint. D . Apply sealant in continuous beads. E . Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle. F . Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. G . Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities. H . Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave and uniform shape. I . Minimum sealant joint width to be 3/8", with minimum sealant depth to be 1/4". J . Minimum fillet beads to be 3/8" x 3/8" with bond breaker used at all exterior joint locations. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 07 92 13 September 1, 2021 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS Project #16-0996 07 92 13 - 6 K . Remove excess compound promptly as the Work progresses and upon completion. L . Seal air and vapor barrier sheet and lap joints as follows: 1. Apply continuous bead of sealant to substrate, ensure no gaps exist in sealant bead. 2. Lap sheet over sealant and press into sealant bead to ensure proper and continuous bond between sheets. 3. Smooth out folds and ripples occurring in sheet over sealant. 3.6 CURING A . Cure sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions. B . Do not cover up sealant until proper curing has taken place. 3.7 CLEANING A . Cleaning: Remove excess sealant using materials and methods approved by sealant manufacturer that will not damage joint substrate materials. 1. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint without disturbing seal. 2. Remove excess sealant from nonporous surfaces while still uncured. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Field Adhesion Testing: Installer shall perform adhesion tests in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193, Method A - Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab. 1. Perform 5 tests for the first 1000' of joint length for each type of sealant and joint substrate, and 1 test for each 1000' of joint length thereafter, or 1 test per each floor per building elevation, minimum. 2. For sealant applied between dissimilar materials, test both sides of joint. B . Remove sealants failing adhesion test, clean substrates, reapply sealants, and re-test, Test adjacent sealants to failed sealants. C . Submit report of field adhesion testing indicating tests, locations, dates, results, and remedial actions taken. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 11 13 October 20, 2021 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Project #16-0996 08 11 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Non-fire rated steel doors. B . Non-fire rated steel frames. C . Exterior steel frames. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: For hardware installed in hollow metal doors. B . 08 80 00 - Glazing: For glass in doors and borrowed lites. C . 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: For field painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. Include U-value data for thermally broken doors and frames. B . Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. D . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. F . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 11 13 October 20, 2021 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Project #16-0996 08 11 13 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Hollow metal frames for hollow metal doors, wood doors and glazing. Hollow metal doors for non-fire rated openings. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Accessibility Requirements: For doors required to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in the Accessible and Usable Building Facilities ICC A117.1 and 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design – Department of Justice. B . VOC Content: Provide adhesive and sealant products with VOC content equal to or less than 50 grams/Liter. C . Comply with ANSI A250.8 in general and for grade and style specified. D . NAAMM HMMA doors of equivalent or better construction are allowed. E . Provide hardware preparation in accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. F . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. G . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Specification is based on Doors and Frames by one of the following: 1. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. a. Assa Abloy. b. Ceco. c. Curries. d. Fleming. e. Steelcraft. 2. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 MATERIALS A . Non-fire rated steel doors. 1. Basis of Design Product: PRODUCT by MANUFACTURER. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level C, Model 2, seamless. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 11 13 October 20, 2021 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Project #16-0996 08 11 13 - 3 b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Exterior Doors, Non-Fire Rated: 1) Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2) Insulating Value: U-value of 0.37, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363. 3. Features: a. Door Top and Closures: Steel, Flush with top of faces and edges. b. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. c. Face Texture: Smooth. d. Glazed Lights: Sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. Provide secure glazing stops on secure side of door. 1) Glazing: Fully Tempered Float Glass specified in Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. e. Finish: Factory primed for field finishing. f. Field Finish: In accordance with Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. g. Field Finish Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full range. B . Non-Fire Rated Frames: 1. Performance Criteria: a. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. b. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 2. c. Frames for Glass: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 18 gage. 2. Features: a. Completed Health Product Declaration in accordance with 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. b. Assembly: Fully welded. c. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. C . Exterior Frames: 1. Performance Criteria: a. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. b. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. c. Provide with true thermal break. 2. Features: a. Completed Health Product Declaration in accordance with 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. b. Assembly: Fully welded. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 11 13 October 20, 2021 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Project #16-0996 08 11 13 - 4 c. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00 - Glazing, factory installed. C . Mineral Fiber Insulation: For filling frame cavities. D . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.6 FINISHING A . Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B . Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating. C . Field Finish: In accordance with Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. C . Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. C . Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. D . Seal seam at top closures after finish is applied to create a smooth surface without groove or pits. 1. Seal with sealant Per Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 11 13 October 20, 2021 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Project #16-0996 08 11 13 - 5 E . Pack all frames with insulation. F . Coordinate installation of hardware. G . Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. H . Touch up damaged factory finishes. I . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 TOLERANCES A . Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B . Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.5 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. B . Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.7 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. 3.8 SCHEDULE A . Refer to door schedule on drawings. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 15 73 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS Project #16-0996 08 15 73 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Wood door panels. B . Sliding door hardware. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. B . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. C . Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacing, location of cutouts for hardware and reinforcement. 2. Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, and cutouts, joinery details, and stiffeners. 3. Include blocking required to support door. 4. Door hardware. D . Sample: Panel finish, finish of exposed hardware. E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. F . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. H . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's hardware, operation, materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommendations on maintenance schedule. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 15 73 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS Project #16-0996 08 15 73 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Sliding doors of various panel types top hung from a continuous track surface mounted to wall. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1. Ingredient Disclosure. Disclosed in a manufacturer inventory following USGBC guidelines or in accordance with a USGBC approved program. 2. Meet emissions testing and requirements of CDPH Standard Test Method v1.1. 3. Meet the applicable VOC limits of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective June 3, 2011 B . Ingredient Disclosure. Disclosed in a manufacturer inventory following USGBC guidelines or in accordance with a USGBC approved program. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Sliding Wood Door Panels: 1. Basis of Design Product: Single panel by Singcore; www.singcore.com. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Insulation: Built-it EPS. b. STC: 30. 3. Features: a. Panels: 1) Product: Single panel by Singcore; www.singcore.com. 2) Size: as detailed on drawings. 4. Finish: a. Skin Finish: Structural skins seperated by wood grid and foam to be selected by Architect. b. Painted at surfaces as indicated on drawings. 5. Styles and Rails: Manufacturer's standard wood; width as indicated on door schedule. 6. Locations: as indicated on Drawings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 15 73 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS Project #16-0996 08 15 73 - 3 B . Sliding Door Hardware. 1. Basis of Design Product: Hardware supplied by Real Carriage Door, Co. 2. Features: a. Stacking: outside of opening. b. Track: 400# Box Rail Track:Extruded aluminum track with automatic travelling carriage above lead door. c. Lead Door: automatic system directly attached to carriage above - end with door catch. d. End Stop: Padded adjustable end stop. e. Door Catch: Cascade door catch. f. Floor Guide: floor mounted T-guide. g. Valances: Extruded aluminum with integral end caps h. Top Rollers: Tandem nylon roller sized to match door weight. i. Soft-Closer: Soft and Self-closing mechanism at both sides of door leaf. j. Handles: 1) Flush Pull and custom pull handle by request. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work, including location of blocking. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Install sliding doors plumb, level, square, and in proper alignment. C . Install doors to close against walls without gaps. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 15 73 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS Project #16-0996 08 15 73 - 4 D . Install doors to open and close smoothly. E . Anchor sliding doors securely to supports. Blocking is required at full length of top track. F . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust doors for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B . Adjust doors to operate smoothly without binding or banging. C . Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Architect. D . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. 3.7 SCHEDULE A . Refer to door schedule on drawings. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 31 00 October 20, 2021 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Project #16-0996 08 31 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Wall access doors and panels. B . Ceiling access doors and panels. C . Floor access doors and panels. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in partitions and finishing of recessed access doors. B . 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B . Sample: Submit one of each access unit, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating frame configuration. C . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. E . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. F . Closeout Submittals: Project record documents recording actual locations of all access units. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A . Any special tools to operate access doors and panels. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 31 00 October 20, 2021 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Project #16-0996 08 31 00 - 2 B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Fire rated and non-rated hinged doors and non-hinged panels in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to concealed building components. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. B . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Basis of Design: Factory fabricated access doors and panels from: Karp Associates, Inc. or Nystrom, Inc. or J.L. Industries or comparable manufacturer. 1. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 MATERIALS A . Wall access doors and panels. 1. Recessed Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Units: a. Basis of Design Product: 1) In Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: a) Model RW-Series manufactured by Nystrom, Inc. b) Model KRP350 manufactured by Karp Associates. b. Features: 1) Frame: Drywall bead. 2) Hinges: Concealed. 3) Handle: No Handle. 4) Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch. 5) Gasketing: Manufacturers' standard. 6) Material: Galvanized Steel. 7) Finish: Prime painted for field finish. 8) Size(s): As indicated. B . Ceiling access doors and panels. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 31 00 October 20, 2021 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Project #16-0996 08 31 00 - 3 1. Recessed Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Units: a. Basis of Design Product: 1) In Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: a) Model RW-Series manufactured by Nystrom, Inc. b) Model KRP350 manufactured by Karp Associates. b. Features: 1) Hinges: Concealed. 2) Handle: No Handle. 3) Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch. 4) Gasketing: Manufacturers' standard. 5) Material: Galvanized Steel. 6) Finish: Prime painted for field finish. 7) Size(s): As indicated. C . Floor access doors and panels. 1. Floor Access Door and Frame Unit: a. Basis of Design Product: J-AL by Bilco. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. b. Performance Criteria: 1) Loading: AASHTO H-20. c. Features: 1) Frame: Extruded aluminum channel frame with anchors at the perimeter. 2) Hinges and Latch: Type 316 stainless steel. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 31 00 October 20, 2021 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Project #16-0996 08 31 00 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Install frames plumb and level in openings. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. 3.7 SCHEDULE A . Typical: Recessed Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for window walls, including Outswing Casement (For Installation into Storefront Systems). 3. Fiberglass entry and vestibule doors. 4. All anchors, bridging, brackets, and attachments. 5. Hardware, not specified elsewhere. B . System Description 1. Furnish labor, materials and other services to complete the fabrication of new fiberglass windows, including all materials required for the supply and installation of the units in the manner, direction and performance shown on the design drawings and specified herein. 2. Fiberglass window framing to incorporate a drained and vented system with complete air, vapor and moisture seals, allowing water entering the framing to drain to the exterior. . 3. Drawings and specifications for work of this section are based upon fiberglass windows manufactured by Cascadia Windows Ltd. #101 – 5350B 275 Street, Langley, BC, Canada (web: www.cascadiawindows.com). C . Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section “Performance Requirements”. 2. Division 07 Section “Metal Panels” for composite metal panel integration into storefront system at select entry locations. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing to be installed in Fiberglass frame system in the factory. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A . ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A . General Performance: Fiberglass Storefront systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 2 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units. B . Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. b. Importance Factor: As determined by IBC. c. Exposure Category: B 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C . Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Design glazing and spanning window frame members, including any required reinforcing, in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. D . Structural-Test Performance: Provide fiberglass-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. E . Air Infiltration: Provide Fiberglass-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.00 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.6 lbf/sq. ft. F . Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide fiberglass-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing, casements, awning, tilt & turn, hopper, inswing doors, and outswing door when tested according to ASTM E 331 at 15 lbf/sq. ft. G . Condensation Resistance: Provide fiberglass-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 77 when tested according to AAMA 1503. H . Thermal Conductance: Provide fiberglass-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.14 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fiberglass- framed systems. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 3 B . Shop Drawings: For fiberglass-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations from Cascadia’s limited options found here. C . Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D . Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. E . Maintenance Data: For fiberglass-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. F . Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B . Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. C . Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D . Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. E . Source Limitations for Fiberglass-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. F . Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. G . Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 4 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A . Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B . Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A . Alternate 1. Performance option Product: Fiberglass Windows and Doors shall be manufactured by: 1. Cascadia Windows and Doors – Langley, BC, Canada. 2.2 MATERIALS A . All frame and sash profiles are made from Pultruded Fiberglass. B . Pultrusions shall be manufactured with clamp-action equipment. No surface texture from rollers is permitted. C . Glass content average for pultruded profiles: 55% or more. D . Fasteners shall be 300 series stainless steel, 400 series stainless steel, or Leland Industries DT2000 coated of sufficient size and quantity to perform their intended function. E . Fastener corrosion resistance shall be: 2000 hours minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM B117. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 5 F . Glazing tape: black, closed cell copolymer, polyethylene foam coated with an aggressive acrylic adhesive. All upward facing horizontal joints to have an additional cap bead of neutral cure silicone. G . Internal sealants for frame joints and continuous heel beads: 1199 DOW Corning sealant, or equal or better neutral cure silicone sealant. H . Hardware 1. All hardware to be supplied by a single manufacturer: 2. Approved manufacturer: Roto Frank of America. 3. Casement and Awning windows: RotoSil nano corrosion resistant finish, rotary hardware with folding handle. 4. Tilt & Turn and Hopper windows: RotoSil nano corrosion resistant finish, multi-point locking hardware. 5. Inswing and Outswing doors: RotoSil nano corrosion resistant finish, multi-point locking hardware, and exposed hinges for swing-only doors. 6. Hardware finish: Color to be selected from supplier’s standard range. I . Finish 1. Hydro Tuff two-component waterborne polyurethane, meeting the requirements of AAMA-625. 2. Interior Frame Finish: Architect to choose from manufacturer’s standard color range. 3. Exterior Frame Finish: Architect to choose from manufacturer’s standard color range. 4. Glazing Stop 5. Provide manufacturer pultruded fiberglass glazing stops as required by IGU thickness. 6. Lock-in, screw-less type. 7. No PVC materials shall be used for glazing stop or related accessories. 2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS A . Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." B . Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C . Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D . Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. 2.4 WINDOW SYSTEMS A . Operable Windows in Storefront Framing System: Basis of Design – Kawneer IsoLock® Architectural Windows; 8225TL Operable Window System, Project Out Awning type windows B . Aluminum Operable Windows in Storefront Framing System: 1. Material Standard: ASTM B 221; G.S. 10A-T5; 6063-T5 alloy and temper Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 6 2. Total Frame Depth: Not less than 2-1/8" (1/4" glass) or 2-3/4" (1" glass) 3. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall have a wall thickness sufficient to meet the specified structural requirements. 4. The frame and ventilator corner construction shall consist of a mitered corner joint with an internal clip, sealed and mechanically staked. 5. The frame shall have a continuous primary weather seal of polyethylene clad urethane foam, the rainscreen weather stripping shall be dual durometer Santoprene. Each corner shall be neatly mitered. 6. The frame and ventilator shall be factory fabricated and assembled 7. Standard Hardware: Stainless Steel 4-Bar Hinges with adjustable limit stop. Base of awning window assembly shall not extend beyond 8 inches from storefront frame. 8. Provide cam lock for accessible controls. 9. Interior insect screen at each location, full width and height of operable area with screen access door at lever. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A . Entrance Doors: Basis of Design – Kawneer Aluminum Entrances 500 Heavy Wall Door; Medium stile, 5-1/2" vertical face dimension, 2" depth, 3/16" wall thickness, high traffic application. B . Aluminum (Entrances and Components): 1. Material Standard: ASTM B 221; 6063-T6 alloy and temper 2. The door shall be 2" thick and stile and rail face dimensions of: Door Vertical Stile Top Rail Bottom Rail 500 Heavy Wall 5" 5" 6-1/2" 3. Major portions of the door members to be 0.188" nominal in thickness and glazing molding to be 0.05" thick 4. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of entrance members are nominal and in compliance with Aluminum Standards and Data, published by The Aluminum Association 5. Glazing gaskets shall be either EPDM elastomeric extrusions or a thermoplastic elastomer. 6. Provide adjustable glass jacks to help center the glass in the door opening. 7. Coordinate rail and stile depths with access control devices and electric strikes. 8. Accessories a. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be aluminum, stainless steel or plated steel. b. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. c. Weatherstripping: 1) Meeting stiles on pairs of doors shall be equipped with an adjustable astragal utilizing wool pile with polymeric fin 2) The door weathering on a single acting butt hung door and frame (single or pairs) shall be Kawneer Sealair® weathering. This is comprised of a thermoplastic elastomer weathering on a tubular shape with a semi-rigid polymeric backing Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 7 3) Sill Sweep Strips: EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in an aluminum extrusion applied to the interior exposed surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners. 2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A . General: Provide entrance door hardware, in addition to hardware sets called for in Section 08 71 00 each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. B . Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. C . Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon- fabric or aluminum-strip backing. D . Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. 2.7 OUTRIGGER SUNSHADE A . Outrigger SunShade System: An aluminum sunshade (consisting of outriggers, louvers, and fascia selected from standard configurations), that is anchored directly to the vertical mullions. Outriggers shall be finished to match the aluminum storefront and window system. Louvers and fascia shall be painted or anodized to match the aluminum storefront and window system. 1. Provide Kawneer Versoleil sunshade system complete with all accessories at all windows units shown to receive steel louvered sunshades. Straight-Square Outriggers; Planar Louvers; Rectangular Fascia, 30 inch Projection; Color and Finish to match storefront system. 2. Where mounting conflicts occur with compensating jambs channels, omit compensating channel member. Note locations in shop drawing for Architect review. 2.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A . Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B . Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.9 FABRICATION A . Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B . Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 8 C . Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D . Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E . Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures. F . Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. G . Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H . After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A . Permanodic Anodized Aluminum, Architectural Class I, 0.7 mils minimum. B . Color as noted in section 09 00 00 material legend. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A . Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 9 3.2 INSTALLATION A . General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. Finish installation shall be leak-proof. B . Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C . Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D . Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E . Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F . Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." G . Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H . Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A . Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 52 01 October 20, 2021 FIBERGLASS-FRAMED STOREFRONTS, ENTRIES AND WINDOW SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 08 52 01 - 10 B . Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B . Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. All final installations shall be leak-proof under normal conditions. C . Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D . Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E . Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A . Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3- second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 08 41 13 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project. Quantities listed are for the contractor’s convenience only and are not guaranteed. Items not specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, matching the items specified in quality and finish. B . Related Sections: 1. Section 081100 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. Section 081400 Wood Doors 3. Section 084113 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Product Qualification: 1. To assure a uniform high quality of materials for the project, it is intended that only specified items be furnished. Comparable products may be accepted upon prior approval of architect. 2. Hardware to be new, free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (Mechanical latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer except where specified. 3. Fire-Rated opening in compliance with NFPA80. Hardware UL10C/UBC-7-2 (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved bearing hinges and smoke seal. Furnish openings complete. B . Supplier Qualifications: 1. Hardware supplier will be a direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available at all reasonable times during the course of the work for project hardware consultation to owner, architect and contractor. 2. Supplier will be responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. 3. Conduct pre-installation conference at jobsite. Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and related trades. Coordinate materials and techniques and sequence complex hardware items and systems installation. 4. Key Conference shall be initiated and conducted with owner to determine system, keyway(s) and structure. C . Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer to have not less than 3 years’ experience specializing in installation of work in this section. Company must maintain qualified personnel trained and experienced in installing hardware. 1.3 REFERENCES A . NFPA80 – Fire Doors and Windows Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 2 B . NFPA101 – Life Safety Code C . NFPA105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies D . ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Hardware schedule: Submit digital copies of schedule. Organize vertically formatted schedule into Hardware Sets with index of doors and headings, indication complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following: 1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items. 2. Name, part number and manufacture of each item. 3. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule. 5. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing. B . Product Data: Submit digital copies for each product indicated. C . Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other works specified to be prepared for installing door hardware. Wiring/Riser diagrams: As required for electric hardware indicated. ELECTRICAL COORDINATION MEETING: After receipt of approved finish hardware schedule, the hardware supplier shall organize and lead a meeting with all related suppliers and installers of electrified hardware and access control systems. Include copies of all door elevation drawings showing location of electrified hardware, point to point wiring diagrams, a separate hardware schedule only listing openings having electrified hardware as part of this section, and manufacturers’ catalog cuts of electrified hardware including electrical specifications of the product, will be provided, by the hardware supplier, for each attendee at the meeting. The purpose of this meeting will be to insure that all parties understand their scope of work and the operation and location of all electrified hardware products. Hardware supplier shall provide a system description for each hardware group that has electrified hardware. D . Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. E . Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, after receipt of the approved finish hardware schedule, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. F . Samples: Upon request submit material samples. G . THE SPECIFICATION WRITER MUST APPROVE ALL SUBMITTALS BEFORE ORDERS CAN BE PLACED. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Deliver, store, handle and protect products to project site under provisions of Division 1 and as specified herein. B . Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C . Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 3 1.6 WARRANTY A . The finish hardware shall have a limited warranty against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of one year from date of substantial completions and the following items are as shown: 1. Closers: Ten years 2. Automatic operators: Two Years 3. Exit Devices: Ten years mechanical, one year electrical 4. Locksets: Ten years mechanical, one year electrical PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION A . Provide all door hardware for complete work, in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. B . Provide items and quantities not specifically mentioned to ensure a proper and complete operational installation. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A . Approval of products from manufacturers indicated as “Acceptable Manufacturer” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product. ITEM SCHEDULED MANUFACTURER ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER Hinges Ives (IVE) Hager, Bommer Flush Bolts & Coordinators Ives (IVE) Burns, DCI Locksets & Deadlocks Falcon (FAL) Sargent, Corbin- Russwin Aluminum Door Locks - Narrow Style Adams Rite (ADA) Exit Devices & Mullions Falcon (FAL) Sargent Electric Strikes Von Duprin (VON) SDC, Trine Power Supplies Schlage Electronics (SCE) Precision, Sargent Cylinders & Keying Falcon (FAL) Dorma, Corbin-Ru Door Closers Falcon (FAL) , Corbin-Russwin Automatic Openers LCN (LCN) Norton, Beesam Door Trim Ives (IVE) Burns, DCI Protection Plates Ives (IVE) Burns, DCI Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson (GLY) Dorma Thresholds & Weatherstrip Zero International NGP, Reese 2.3 HANGING A . Conventional Hinges: Hinge open width minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing. Steel or stainless steel pins: 1. Three hinges per leaf to 7 feet, 6-inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in height or any fraction thereof. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 4 2. Provide 4 ½ x 4 ½ for 1 ¾” thick doors up to 36”. Provide 5 x 4 ½ on doors 36” and over. 3. Exterior outswing doors to have non removable (NRP) pins. 4. Pin tips, flat button, finish to match leaves 5. Interior doors over 36” – Heavy weight 6. Interior doors up to 36” – Standard weight 2.4 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS A . Mortise Locks - Falcon MA Series 1. Provide mortise locks certified as ANSI A156.13, Grade 1 Operational, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide multi-function lock case, field reversible for handing without opening case. 3. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel. 4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 5. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide electrified locksets with micro switch (RX) option that monitors retractor crank, and is actuated when rotation of inside or outside lever rotates retractor hub. Provide normally closed contacts or normally open contacts as required by security system. 6. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2- piece spindles. a. Lever Design: Falcon QG-Quantum Gala. B . Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks - Falcon T Series 1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. 2. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with a 1/2 inch (13 mm) latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 3. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 4. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag. 5. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 6. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. 7. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides. a. Lever Design: Falcon Lat 2.5 EXIT DEVICES A . Panic and Fire Exit Devices - Falcon 24/25 Series 1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 5 2. Exit Devices: Touchpad type, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 3. Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width. Match exit device finish or provide compatible finish. Provide compression springs in devices, latches, and outside trims or controls, tension springs also acceptable. 4. Provide devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and other electrical requirements. 5. Provide manufacturer's standard strikes. 6. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. 7. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits. 8. Provide cylinder[hex key] dogging at non-fire-rated exit devices. 9. Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled as keyed removable mullion, provide type that can be removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed. 10. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will travel to 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set. a. Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets. 11. Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings. 12. Field drill weep holes per manufacturer’s recommendation for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in the hardware sets. 13. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. 2.6 KEYS, KEYING, AND KEY CONTROL A . See Keying Requirements in this section 2.7 CLOSERS A . Heavy Duty Surface Closers - Falcon SC70 Series 1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code. 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with aluminum cylinder. 3. Closer Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter heat-treated pinion journal. 4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 6 7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 8. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. B . Surface Closers - Falcon SC80 Series 1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with aluminum cylinder. 3. Closer Body: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) diameter, with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter heat-treated pinion journal. 4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: not permitted. 8. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.8 OTHER HARDWARE A . Door stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide stops at each leaf of every swinging door leaf. 2. Where wall or floor stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B . Weatherstrip and Gasket 1. Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. 2. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer for application indicated. C . Thresholds 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as detailed or scheduled. D . Silencers 1. Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. E . Kickplates 1. Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 7 2.9 HARDWARE FINISH A . Provide the following finishes unless noted differently in hardware groups: Hinges 630 Stainless Steel Exterior, 652 Dull Chrome Interior Locksets 626 Dull Chrome Exit Devices 626 Dull Chrome Closers 689 Aluminum Kickplates 630 Stainless Steel Other Hardware 626 Dull Chrome Thresholds Aluminum Weatherstrip/Sweeps Aluminum 2.10 KEYING REQUIREMENTS A . All keyed cylinders shall be subject to a new Masterkey system. B . Furnish cylinders with construction cores. Following construction supply permanent keyed cores. C . Cylinders to be furnished with visual key control with key code. Stamped on the face of the keys and marked on the back or side of the cylinders. D . Key Quantities 6 EA Master Keys 4 EA Control Keys 2 EA Construction Control Keys 10 EA Construction Keys 3 EA Change Keys per keyed alike group PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS: A . Factory trained, certified, and carries a factory-issued card certifying that person as a “Certified Installer”. Alternative: can demonstrate suitably equivalent competence and experience. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. B . Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security codes. Notify Architect of any code conflicts before ordering materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. B . Locate floor stops not more than 4 inches from the wall. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 8 C . Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. B . Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods to be repaired or replaced to Owner’s satisfaction. 3.5 FOLLOW UP INSPECTION A . Installer to provide letter of agreement to Owner that approximately 6 months after substantial completion, installer will visit project with representative of the manufacturers of the locking devices and door closers to accomplish the following: 1. Re-adjust locks and closers 2. Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instruct Owner’s personnel. 3. Identify items that have deteriorated or failed. 4. Submit written report identifying problems and likely future problems. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A . Demonstrate electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware system including adjustment and maintenance procedures 3.7 PROTECTION/CLEANING A . Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation process. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 9 Door Hardware Groups Hardware Group No. 01 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET  626 IVE 4 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT  626 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10   689 VON 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74  626 BES 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 24-C-C-718-CYL  626 FAL 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE EL-24-C-C-718-CYL 24 VDC   626 FAL 2 EA RIM CYLINDER 1E72  626 BES 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 12" O  619 IVE 2 EA OH STOP 100S  630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA  689 FAL 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC)   ANDKB LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB MOUNT 8310-818T   630 LCN 1 EA TOP RAIL DROP PLATE SC70-18PA  689 FAL 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER SC70-61  689 FAL 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223  A ZER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 900-2RS   LGR FAL 1 CARD READER - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER Hardware Group No. 02 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET  626 IVE 4 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT  626 IVE 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74  626 BES 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 24-V-L-LAT-CYL  626 FAL 2 EA OH STOP 100S  630 GLY 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA  689 FAL 2 EA TOP RAIL DROP PLATE SC70-18PA  689 FAL 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER SC70-61  689 FAL 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223  A ZER 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER Hardware Group No. 03 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER Hardware Group No. 04 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 10 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74  626 BES 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-L-LAT-CYL  630 FAL 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1E72  626 BES 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE 12/24 VAC/VDC   630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HDPA  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE 1 CARD READER - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF DIVISION 28 Hardware Group No. 05 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 06 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP  630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG12  US32D IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA  AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223  A ZER Hardware Group No. 07 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 08 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 11 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 5 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8   652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458  626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2  626 IVE 1 EA EU STOREROOM LOCK T881BB7 LAT 12/24 VDC   626 FAL 1 EA OH STOP 100S  630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HDPA ACTIVE LEAF  689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 4 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE 1 CARD READER - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF DIVISION 28 Hardware Group No. 09 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HDPA  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223  A ZER 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 10 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458  626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2  626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HDPA  689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 4 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 11 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 12 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP  630 IVE 1 EA REMOVABLE MULLION KR4023 STAB  SP28 FAL 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74  626 BES 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-EO  630 FAL 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1E72  626 BES 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA  689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA  AA ZER 2 EA MEETING STILE 328AA-S  AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223  A ZER Hardware Group No. 12 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8300 10" 4" X 16"  630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 4" X 16"  630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 13 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74  626 BES 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-NL-CYL  630 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HDPA  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 14 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HDPA  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA FINGER GUARD 973AA-BIO 100" (2540MM)  AA ZER 1 EA FINGER GUARD 974AA-BIO 100" (2540MM)  AA ZER 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 15 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 13 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK T301S LAT  626 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 16 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 17 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA ENTRY LOCK T501BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 18 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET T101 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 19 Provide each PD door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA POCKET DOOR ASSEMBLY 1500  JOH 1 EA DOOR PULL, 1" ROUND PR 8103HD 10" N  630 IVE Hardware Group No. 20 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 LATA L583-363 L283-722  626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 21 Provide each PD door(s) with the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 14 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA POCKET DOOR LOCK 2001-SDL-2 1/2 X 7200 ADA TT 626 ACC 1 EA POCKET DOOR ASSEMBLY 1500  JOH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74 VERIFY LENGTH  626 BES 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 986 A20069-000  626 FAL 1 EA DOOR PULL, 1" ROUND PR 8103HD 10" N  630 IVE Hardware Group No. 22 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP  630 IVE 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74  626 BES 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-NL-CYL  630 FAL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA  AA ZER 1 EA GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223  A ZER Hardware Group No. 23 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA PIVOT SET 7226 SET  626 IVE 4 EA INTERMEDIATE PIVOT 7226 INT  626 IVE 2 EA PUSH/PULL BAR 9190HD-12"-NO  630 IVE 2 EA OH STOP 100S  630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 HDPA  689 FAL 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 MS AS REQ (120/240 VAC)   ANDKB LCN 2 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB MOUNT 8310-818T   630 LCN 1 EA TOP RAIL DROP PLATE SC70-18PA  689 FAL 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER SC70-61  689 FAL 1 CARD READER - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER Hardware Group No. 24 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 15 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK T301S LAT  626 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA FINGER GUARD 973AA-BIO 100" (2540MM)  AA ZER 1 EA FINGER GUARD 974AA-BIO 100" (2540MM)  AA ZER 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 25 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA FINGER GUARD 973AA-BIO 100" (2540MM)  AA ZER 1 EA FINGER GUARD 974AA-BIO 100" (2540MM)  AA ZER 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 26 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA SGL CYL, TURN I/S MA941BB7  FAL 1 EA FLUSH PULL 962  626 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 27 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74  626 BES 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-V-L-LBR-LAT-CYL  626 FAL 1 EA OH STOP 100S  630 GLY 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HDPA ACTIVE LEAF  689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 4 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 28 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 71 00 October 20, 2021 DOOR HARDWARE Project #16-0996 08 71 00 - 16 QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458  626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2  626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA OH STOP 100S  630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HDPA  689 FAL 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223  A ZER 4 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 29 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA SGL CYL, TURN I/S MA941BB7  FAL 1 EA FLUSH PULL 962  626 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD 655A-223  A ZER 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 30 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK T581BB7 LAT  626 FAL 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6210 FSE 12/16/24/28 VAC/VDC   630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 REG OR PA AS REQ  689 FAL 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE 1 CARD READER - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF DIVISION 28 END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 80 00 October 20, 2021 GLAZING Project #16-0996 08 80 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Delegated design of glazing units. B . Exterior vision glazing. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: For assembly requiring components from this section. F . 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: For assembly requiring components from this section. G . 08 44 13 - Aluminum Framed Curtain Walls: For assembly requiring components from this section. H . 08 54 13 - Fiberglass Windows: For assembly requiring components from this section. I . 08 83 00 - Mirrors: For frameless glass mirrors. J . 10 28 00 - Toilet Accessories: For framed mirrors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For installer, fabricator and design engineer. B . Early Performance Criteria Design Submittal: Submit design package identifying the following criteria, used to design aluminum framed entrances and storefront systems: 1. Load criteria, including seismic load criteria, wind load criteria. 2. Design Loads, including wind loads at typical locations and corners, corner zone width, glass dead load, and glazing makeup. 3. Anticipated movements, including the following: a. Horizontal Joint Movement: 1) Live load deflection. 2) Thermal expansion. 3) Long-term DL creep. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 80 00 October 20, 2021 GLAZING Project #16-0996 08 80 00 - 2 4) Column shortening. 5) Total Movement. b. Elastic Story Drift. c. Lateral Drift. d. Parallel-to-Wall Deflection. e. Cantilever Deflection of Framing Members. C . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Include the following: 1. Provide specific shadowbox calculations to determine if ventilation of the cavity is required D . Energy Performance Certificates: Certificates are required for this project including project specific frame types, spacer types and glass types. Project specific reports substantiate U- value, visual light transmission, and solar heat gain values required by the Energy Code for the project. 1. For projects following the Energy Code - Prescriptive Path: Submit NFRC Report with gateway sizes indicating compliance with requirements. 2. For projects following the Energy Code - Performance Path: Submit CMAST bid reports at time of product submittal. Prior to glazed assembly installation, submit NFRC- CMAST label certificates for the designed assemblies (not gateway sizes). Provide finite element computer thermal modeling and calculations per NFRC 100 and NFRC 200, using DOE/LBNL THERM 5.2 and WINDOWS 5.2 software. E . Product Data: 1. Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 2. Glazing Compounds & Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements and identify available colors. F . Shop Drawings: For any glazing installed with components from this section alone. 1. Submit shop drawings for glazing installed within other systems in accordance with the system submittal requirements. G . Sample: Submit two samples in manufacturer's standard size of glass type units, showing coloration and design. H . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. I . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. J . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 80 00 October 20, 2021 GLAZING Project #16-0996 08 80 00 - 3 K . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Fabricators Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Designer Qualifications: Professional structural engineer with 5 years of documented experience in design of this work and licensed in the location of the project. C . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.6 WARRANTY A . Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. B . Laminated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of failed units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Glass glazing, accessories installed as monolithic glazing or insulating glazing units within framing systems and support structures specified elsewhere. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Thermal Performance: 1. U-Value: a. Prescriptive Energy Code Limits: Based on NFRC 100 gateway size. 1) Fixed Glazing, including frame: U-value 0.45 maximum. b. The project is utilizing Total Building Performance approach to compliance with Washington State Energy Code (WSEC). Prescriptive limits above are provided as benchmarks. Refer to SCHEDULE below for weighted averages based on energy models. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 80 00 October 20, 2021 GLAZING Project #16-0996 08 80 00 - 4 1) U-Value, Maximum: For glass and frames, fixed and operable based on project specific opening sizes, configurations, frame types, spacer types and glass types. Advertised U-values substantiated by NFRC Bid Reports at time of bid. 2) U-Value Maximums are subject to change as the energy model is updated. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), Maximum: For the overall glazed assembly vision area and adjacent framing. 3. Visible Light Transmission (VLT), Minimum: For the overall glazed assembly vision area and adjacent framing. B . By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. C . Roll Wave Maximum Distortion Tolerance: 0.003 inch target with 0.005 inch maximum peak to valley measurement. D . Bow and Warp Maximum Tolerance: 50 percent of the maximum allowed in ASTM C1048. E . Thickness: As required for loads indicated. F . Deflection no greater than 1/175 of the longest dimension or 1/2 inch whichever is less. G . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Float Glass: 1. Performance Criteria: a. By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. b. Roll Wave Maximum Distortion Tolerance: 0.003 inch target with 0.005 inch maximum peak to valley measurement. c. Bow and Warp Maximum Tolerance: 50 percent of the maximum allowed in ASTM C1048. d. Tinted Types: Performance and features to match basis of design product. 2. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 3. Heat-Strengthened in accordance with ASTM C1048. 4. Fully Tempered in accordance with ASTM C1048. a. Safety Glazing: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. B . Ultraclear (low-iron) Float Glass: 1. Performance Criteria: a. ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. b. Visible Light Transmission: Not less than 91 percent. c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Not less than 0.87. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 80 00 October 20, 2021 GLAZING Project #16-0996 08 80 00 - 5 2. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 3. Heat-Strengthened in accordance with ASTM C1048. 4. Fully Tempered in accordance with ASTM C1048. a. Safety Glazing: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. b. If and where the need for fully-tempered glass is required, due to safety glazing or loading effects that cannot be compensated for by increasing the glass thickness or other means, then the glass must be heat soaked. 1) To waive this heat soaking requirement, the Contractor and glass manufacturer are required to provide the labor, equipment and materials necessary to replace all spontaneous glass breakages for a period 5 years after completion of installation. 2) In addition, the Contractor and glass manufacturer will be responsible for other property damages or personal injury liabilities caused by such breakages for the same 5-year period. C . Fire Resistive Glazing: For glazing in fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. 1. Specification is based on SuperLite II-XL 45 by SaftiFirst. a. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) Pyrostop Series by Technical Glass Products. b. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Type, thickness, and configuration as required to maintain indicated ratings of fire rated assemblies. b. Provide products not requiring surface applied films to maintain their performance criteria. Surface applied films can be easily damaged and performance criteria compromised. c. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 (Cat. I and II). d. Positive Pressure Test: UL 10C, UBC 7-2 and 7-4; passes e. Labeling: Provide permanent label on each piece giving the IBC rating and other information required by the applicable code. 3. Features: a. Surface Finish: Ground and polished on both sides. D . Low-E Coated Vision Glass: 1. Features: a. Color: Neutral. b. Location: #2 surface. E . Insulating Glazing Units: 1. Fabricator: a. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 80 00 October 20, 2021 GLAZING Project #16-0996 08 80 00 - 6 b. Any fabricator certified by glass manufacturer for type of glass, coating, and treatment involved and capable of providing specified performance, features and warranty. 2. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: a. Performance: 1) Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2) Edge Spacers: Material as required to meet performance criteria listed for assemblies. a) Color: Black. 3) Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. a) Color: Black. 4) Air Space: Hermetic air. 5) U-Value: As required to meet performance criteria of complete assembly, not to exceed 0.24 Center of Glass. F . Accessories: 1. Glazing Channels: Specification is based on CRL Wet Glaze U Channels by CRLaurence Co. Inc. a. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. b. Features: 1) 1 inch deep base channel. 2) 2 inch deep top channel. 3) Finish: Satin Anodized. 2. Vertical Glazing Gasket: Specification is based on CRL EZ Glaze Soundstrip by CRLaurence Co. Inc. a. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. b. Features: 1) Color: Clear 2) Depth: Selected to match glass panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 80 00 October 20, 2021 GLAZING Project #16-0996 08 80 00 - 7 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. 3.6 SCHEDULE A . Exterior Vision Glazing: 1. Window Wall Vision Glazing: a. Application: Exterior Wall Vision Glass. b. Performance: 1) U-Value, minimum: As indicated on drawings. c. Outboard Lite: Clear Float, low iron. 1) Coating: Low-E Coating on #2 surface by SunGuard SNX 51/23 by Guardian Glass. 2) Lite Thickness: 6 mm. d. Air Space: Argon or Air as required to meet full system U-values. 1) Thickness: 12 mm. e. Inboard Lite: Clear Float, low iron; tempered as required by local code and design of insulating glazing units. 1) Translucent Glazing: Fritted, laminated glass. a) Thickness: As required by panels sizes indicated. b) PVB Interlayer: 0.03 thickness, clear. c) Frit Color and Pattern: To be selected by Architect. f. Total Insulating Glazing Unit Thickness: As required by panel size indicated when designed in accordance with performance criteria. B . Fire Resistive Glazing: 1. Applications: In exterior openings as indicated on drawings. 2. Glass: Fully Tempered Fire Resistive Glazing in IGUs to match GL-01. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 80 00 October 20, 2021 GLAZING Project #16-0996 08 80 00 - 8 3. Lite Thickness: As required by panel size indicated and required rating when designed in accordance with performance criteria. C . Monolithic Tempered Glass: 1. Applications: All interior applications requiring safety glazing. 2. Glass: Clear, fully tempered. 3. Lite Thickness: As required by panel size indicated when designed in accordance with performance criteria. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 83 00 October 20, 2021 MIRRORS Project #16-0996 08 83 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Glass mirrors. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. B . Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. C . Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified requirements. D . Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. E . Samples: For each type of mirror product required, in the form indicated below: 1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long. F . Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer. G . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. H . Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Mirror Glazing: One of each type and size. I . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM) Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 83 00 October 20, 2021 MIRRORS Project #16-0996 08 83 00 - 2 B . Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of GANA (TIPS), "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A . Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B . Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Frameless glass mirrors wall mounted with clips and adhesive. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Mirror Glass: 1. ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q1 (mirror select); silvering, protective coating and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503; 6 mm minimum thick. a. Thickness: 1/4 inch. b. Size: As noted on drawings. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A . Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. B . Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. C . Manufacturers: 1. Gunther Mirror Mastics. 2. Palmer Products Corporation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 83 00 October 20, 2021 MIRRORS Project #16-0996 08 83 00 - 3 2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A . Setting Blocks: 1. Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. B . Spacer Shims: 1. Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness. C . Glazing Tape: 1. Preformed butyl compound; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; on release paper. D . Glazing Clips: 1. Manufacturer's standard type. E . Mirror Attachment Accessories: 1. Stainless steel J-profile channels at bottom only. a. Bottom Trim: C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.: D636 Type "J" Channel. b. Brite Anodized Aluminum. F . Mirror Adhesive: 1. Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. 2.6 FABRICATION A . Mirror Size: Per Interior Drawings. B . Mirror Edge Treatment: Rounded polished edge at exposed sides. 1. Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B . Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive mirrors. C . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 83 00 October 20, 2021 MIRRORS Project #16-0996 08 83 00 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A . Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B . Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C . Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A . Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations. B . Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion. C . Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. D . Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors with J-channel and adhesive, applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 1. Using a full bed of adhesive mount mirror to preservative pressure treated plywood backing. 2. Support mirror until adhesive has set. E . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A . Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces. B . Remove labels after work is complete. C . Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. D . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 91 00 October 20, 2021 LOUVERS Project #16-0996 08 91 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Fixed louvers. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. F . 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. G . Division 23: For louver performance requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B . Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. D . Sample: Submit two samples 4 inch x 6 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior surfaces. E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. F . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's performance, materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommendations on maintenance schedule. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 91 00 October 20, 2021 LOUVERS Project #16-0996 08 91 00 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.5 MOCKUP A . In-place visual mockup: Install one louver at Level 1 storefront for review of installation workmanship and joint detailing. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Manufacturer’s Finish Warranty: Correct defective work within a 20 year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather. 1. Panel Finish Criteria are listed AAMA 2605. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Factory fabricated and assembled architectural louvers including fixed, operable and acoustic types. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511. B . Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf without damage or permanent deformation. C . Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft water penetration at 850 feet per minute, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. D . Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. E . Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers. F . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 91 00 October 20, 2021 LOUVERS Project #16-0996 08 91 00 - 3 2.3 FIXED LOUVERS A . Fixed Louver: 1. Basis of Design: 5-inch-deep Storm Resistant Fixed Louver Model RS-5300 by Construction Specialties Inc. Material: Aluminum with two coat custom color fluoropolymer finish. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Free Area: 50 percent, minimum. b. Static Pressure Loss: 0.15 inch wg maximum per square foot of free area at velocity of 900 fpm, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 3. Features: a. Blades: Drainable. b. Frame: 5 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and, with continuous recessed caulking channel each side. c. Aluminum Thickness: Frame 12 gage, 0.0808 inch minimum; blades 12 gage, 0.0808 inch minimum. d. Finish: In accordance with Section 05 05 13 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal. 1) Color: As scheduled below. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Blank-Off Panels: 1. Same material as louver, painted black on exterior side; provide where duct connected to louver is smaller than louver frame, sealing off louver area outside duct. C . Bird Screen: 1. Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 14 gage, 0.0641 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, diagonal design. D . Insect Screen: 1. 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh. E . Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Stainless steel. F . Flashings: 1. Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one piece per location. G . Sealant: 1. Type, as specified in Section 07 90 05. H . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 08 91 00 October 20, 2021 LOUVERS Project #16-0996 08 91 00 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07 90 05. C . Coordinate with installation of mechanical ductwork. D . Coordinate with installation of louver actuators. E . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 05 10 October 20, 2021 FLOORING MOISTURE MEASUREMENT AND MITIGATION Project #16-0996 09 05 10 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Moisture measurement of concrete floor slabs. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. F . 03 35 13 - Concrete Floor and Architectural CIP Finishing. G . 03 54 00 - Cast Underlayment. H . Division 9 Flooring sections. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Coordinate self-leveling underlayment and moisture mitigation system work in relation to both flooring applications and slabs damaged during construction in most cases the underlayment manufacturer requires placement above the moisture mitigation system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer, applicator, and supervisor. B . Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and product limitations of materials VOC emission of paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. D . Test results of slab verification. E . Existing condition reports: Prior to installation of flooring moisture mitigation system, submit written report by system rep of existing relative humidity and alkalinity sub-floor. F . Certification: Upon completion of flooring moisture mitigation system, submit written certification by system manufacturer's representative that the sub-floor meets requirements for relative humidity, moisture vapor transmission and pH neutrality specified in this section. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 05 10 October 20, 2021 FLOORING MOISTURE MEASUREMENT AND MITIGATION Project #16-0996 09 05 10 - 2 G . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. 1. Include information on mixing and application. H . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. B . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. C . Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience and approved by the manufacturer. D . Supervisor Qualifications: Trained by product manufacturer. E . Provide all materials of the system including but not limited to: Primers, resins, hardening agents and finish or sealing coats, from a single manufacturer's recommendations 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Store all materials under cover and elevated above grade. B . Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C . Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure and freezing. D . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A . Do not install system until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete. B . Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 70 degrees F 72 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation of the system. C . During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture. 1.8 WARRANTY A . Manufacturer warrants product for a term of five (5) years that: 1. The product is free from manufacturing defects. 2. Relative humidity reduction and moisture vapor levels are maintained and the moisture mitigation product will remain adhered to the concrete substrate and adhesive or bonding agents applied on top of the moisture mitigation product will remain adhered. 3. Warranty covers the removal and replacement of flooring products. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 05 10 October 20, 2021 FLOORING MOISTURE MEASUREMENT AND MITIGATION Project #16-0996 09 05 10 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Restrict concrete relative humidity and alkalinity levels to those acceptable to the flooring manufacturers: Relative humidity of not greater than 75%RH, and Alkalinity-pH of not greater than 9.0 pH. Test per ASTM F2170, ASTM F710, and ASTM E96/E96M. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1. MR Credit BPDO - Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: LCA or EPD reports or compliant summary for each product in this section with a compliant evaluation. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Aquafin Vaportight Coat - SG3: www.aquafin.net. B . Ardex MC Plus: www.ardex.com. C . Synthetics International - Synthetic30: www.syntheticsintl.com. 2.4 MATERIALS A . System Main Component: Epoxy or Acrylic based materials. 1. Properties: a. ASTM F2170 In-Situ Relative Humidity: Tolerant to 100%RH + 3%. b. ASTM D1308 Alkali Resistance, 30 days: Resistant to 14pH. c. ASTM D1308 Alkali Resistance, 30 days: Resistant to application of 35% Potassium Hydroxide solution. d. VOC content: Not greater than 300g/liter. e. ASTM D4541 Adhesion Strength: 300 psi (100% Concrete Adhesive Failure). B . Crack filler: 1. Manufacturer's approved products for use. C . Primers for self-leveling materials: 1. Manufacturer approved two-component non-porous type primer. D . Top coat: 1. Calcium aluminate based self-leveling underlayment and patching compound meeting a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi per ASTM C109/C109M. Minimum of 1/8” thickness. E . Water: 1. Sufficiently cool so as not to speed up mix setting. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 05 10 October 20, 2021 FLOORING MOISTURE MEASUREMENT AND MITIGATION Project #16-0996 09 05 10 - 4 2.5 MIXING A . Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Record condition of floor. B . All concrete substrates must have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi and be structurally sound. C . Verify that surfaces are smooth, flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of the mitigation system to substrate. 1. Perform analysis of as many concrete cores as needed to verify lack of contaminants and warrantability of existing slab(s). a. If the condition of and chemicals applied to new slabs is not verifiable to the satisfaction of the mitigation system manufacturer, perform analysis of concrete cores of new slabs as required to satisfy system manufacturer. b. Vexcon Chemicals products do not require concrete coring. D . Test that concrete sub-floor is significantly dry and ready for finish flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate, internal relative humidity and alkalinity. 1. Calcium Chloride test in accord with the ASTM F1869. a. Perform this test, once the space has been conditioned next to the RH metering devices. Report both results to the manufacturer of the product prior to purchasing the floor mitigation system. 2. Use calibrated digital readout style equipment to ascertain ASTM F2170 relative humidity. 3. Use calibrated digital readout style equipment to ascertain ASTM F710 alkalinity. E . Verify surfaces are within tolerances for a warranted mitigation system. 1. Test at a rate of three tests for the first 1,000 square feet and one additional test for each 1,000 square feet of flooring. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by mitigation system manufacturer. F . Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 05 10 October 20, 2021 FLOORING MOISTURE MEASUREMENT AND MITIGATION Project #16-0996 09 05 10 - 5 G . Verify on site temperature and humidity of interior conditions prior to application. Notify manufactures of conditions not within tolerance for product application. H . If results are not within requirements of finish flooring manufacturer, proceed with installation of mitigation system. I . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . All concrete substrates must be structurally sound, solid, and mechanically prepared to a minimum surface profile of ICRI CSP #3. 1. "Open" the floor surface using one of the following methods: a. Shot blast using #390 shot on equipment approved by mitigation system manufacturer. b. Grind the entire floor with a metal grit / diamond to open the floor and expose new concrete on 100% of the surface. c. Acid etching and the use of sweeping compounds and solvents are not acceptable means of preparing the concrete. 1) If etching, diamond grind near wall base, columns, and difficult to reach areas. d. Method recommended in writing by mitigation system manufacturer and approved by Architect. B . Vacuum surfaces, cracks and joints to remove dust, debris and contaminates. C . Joint and Crack Preparation: 1. Moving Joints: Honor all expansion and isolation joints up through the System, and underlayment or topping. 2. Saw Cuts, Control Joints and Dormant Cracks: Fill all non-moving joints and cracks greater than 1/32 inch with manufacturer's approved product. 3. Once the cracks and joints have been properly filled, allow these areas to cure prior to proceeding with the installation of the system. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Where system stops, terminate under centerline of door and at wall edge. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A . Retest for moisture vapor transmission and pH per tests listed above. Results must be acceptable to flooring and flooring adhesive manufacturer, and system description listed above. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 05 10 October 20, 2021 FLOORING MOISTURE MEASUREMENT AND MITIGATION Project #16-0996 09 05 10 - 6 3.5 CLEANING A . Remove excess products from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B . Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Prohibit traffic on moisture mitigation system for a minimum of 12 hours and flooring installation for a period of 48 hours after installation. B . Prior to the installation of the mitigation system, underlayment or topping, finish flooring or sealer, the system should be protected from abuse by other trades by the use of plywood, Masonite or other suitable protection course. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 21 16 October 20, 2021 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project #16-0996 09 21 16 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Gypsum Sheathing. B . Exterior Soffit Board. C . Gypsum Board. D . Tile Backer Board. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing. F . 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. G . 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls. H . 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant. I . 09 22 19 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Blocking product and execution requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For Installer and design engineer. B . Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board, accessories, joint finishing system, and cement board. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. D . Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals. E . Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 21 16 October 20, 2021 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project #16-0996 09 21 16 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Designer Qualifications: Professional structural engineer with 5 years of documented experience in design of this work and licensed in the location of the project. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Includes Gypsum wallboard finishing, metal trim and accessories, and acoustical sealants and insulation. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide completed gypsum board assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. B . Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. C . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Specification is based on products listed below: 1. CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. a. Custom Building Products. 3. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 MATERIALS A . Gypsum Sheathing: 1. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. a. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. b. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 21 16 October 20, 2021 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project #16-0996 09 21 16 - 3 c. Glass-Mat-Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM C1177/C1177M. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Edges: Square, for vertical application. 4. Glass-Mat-Faced Products: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Sheathing; CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. B . Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1629/C1629, sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. a. Application: Use as indicated. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch. c. Edges: Tapered. d. Products: 1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock FireGuard X Abuse Resistant Gypsum Wallboard. 2) CertainTeed Extreme Impact Resistant Gypsum Panels. 3) National Gypsum; Hi-Impact XP Gypsum Wallboard. C . Exterior Soffit Board: 1. Exterior Soffit Board: Exterior gypsum soffit board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. a. Application: Ceilings and soffits in protected exterior areas, unless otherwise indicated. b. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly. c. Thickness: 5/8 inch. d. Edges: Tapered. e. Products: 1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Soffit Board. D . Gypsum Board: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch. c. Edges: Tapered. d. Products: 1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock, ToughRock Fireguard, and ToughRock FireGuard C Gypsum Wallboard. 2) CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc.; GlasRoc. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 21 16 October 20, 2021 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project #16-0996 09 21 16 - 4 E . Tile Backer Board: 1. Glass-Mat-Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C1178/C1178M. a. Standard Type: Thickness 1/2 inch. b. Fire-Resistant Type: Thickness 5/8 inch. c. Products: 1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Acoustic Sealant: 1. As specified in Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. C . Finishing Accessories: 1. ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. a. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. b. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead at exposed panel edges. D . Joint Materials: 1. ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. a. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. b. Typical: Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. c. Exterior Soffits: Chemical hardening type compound. E . High Build Drywall Surfacer: 1. Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish. F . Anchorage to Substrate: 1. Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. G . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 21 16 October 20, 2021 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project #16-0996 09 21 16 - 5 B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. C . Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. D . Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. E . Exterior Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing members or other solid backing. F . Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. G . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A . Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. 2. At exterior soffits, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions. B . Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C . Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.5 JOINT TREATMENT A . Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B . Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 3.6 FINISH A . Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings typical. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 21 16 October 20, 2021 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Project #16-0996 09 21 16 - 6 2. Level 4: For flat paint, a light final paint texture, or with lightweight wall covering for walls and ceilings. 3. Level 3: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 4. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. 5. Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of project. B . Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C . Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish. D . Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.7 FIELD OBSERVATION AT "PUNCH" A . Finish will be judged from a viewing difference of 4 feet. B . Ceilings will be viewed from a standing position. C . Finished lighting system or temporary lighting similar to proposed finished lighting should be used for judging the wall. D . Eye catching discrepancies and or blemishes, including “fuzzy” wall board surfaces, will be rejected. 3.8 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.9 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 30 00 October 20, 2021 TILING Project #16-0996 09 31 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Porcelain Tile 2. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations. 3. Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations. 4. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: 1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. C. LEED Submittals: 1. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile, Setting and Grouting Material: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. B. Installer Qualifications: Specializing in tile work having a minimum of 5 years of successful documented experience with work comparable to that required for this project. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 30 00 October 20, 2021 TILING Project #16-0996 09 31 00 - 2 C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Protect Materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing per manufacturers instructions. E. Broken, cracked or chipped materials will be rejected whether built or not. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver 1% of installed tile for each size, type and color B. Store at project site where directed. Ensure materials are identified by manufacturer, type and color. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE A. Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Schedule for manufacturer, product, size, locations and finish. 1. Substitution for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Crack-Suppression and Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Tile Installations: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the following. 1) Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane 2) LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. 3) Or approved 2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. (G) Grout: 1. Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Schedule for manufacturer, product, size, locations and finish. 2. Substitution for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be added. 2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. 3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 30 00 October 20, 2021 TILING Project #16-0996 09 31 00 - 3 C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 1. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 2. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. 3. 1/8” grout joints, typical 4. Unsanded grout: Custom Building Products, Prism Ultimate Performance Grout a. Color: Refer to Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legends D. Sealant: 1. Custom Building Products, Polyblend Ceramic Tile Caulk a. Color: Match Grout 2. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials. E. Metal Edge Strips: 1. Refer to Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legends. 2. Non-Ceramic Trim: a. Specification is based on products listed below. 1) Custom Building Products. 2) Genesis APS International. 3) Schluter. 4) Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 3. Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, or stainless steel as scheduled, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. F. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Prepare surfaces, Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 30 00 October 20, 2021 TILING Project #16-0996 09 31 00 - 4 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. I. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11. J. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. 1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. K. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 1. Tile floors in wet areas. L. Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 30 00 October 20, 2021 TILING Project #16-0996 09 31 00 - 5 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior floor installation on waterproof and crack-suppression membrane over concrete thin-set mortar; TCA F122. 1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 2. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. 3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior wall installation; thin-set mortar; over gypsum board; TCA W243 1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. 2. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. B. Interior bathtub wall installation over glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar; TCA B419 and TCA W245. 1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. 2. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 51 00 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Project #16-0996 09 51 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B . Acoustical units. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant. F . 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustical insulation. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer. B . Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other ceiling finishes, mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling, and perimeter molding and suspension/bracing details. C . Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components, acoustical units, and perimeter molding/seismic connections. D . Samples: Submit two samples 48 x 48 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. F . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 51 00 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Project #16-0996 09 51 00 - 2 H . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of 5 years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty on all acoustical panels for sagging and warping, grid system, rusting, and manufacturer's defects. B . Provide 15 year warranty for all products using additional "Humidity and Sag resistance" control systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Suspended metal grid ceiling systems with seismic edge clips and manufactured edge trim at changes in plane; gypsum based acoustical units. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Seismic Requirements: 1. Classification: Conform to ASTM C635/C635M, Heavy Duty Classification. 2. Code Compliance: IBC, American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE 7, and CISCA (AC) Guidelines. Comply with edition dates per local Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B . Components: Lock together in a positive manner. C . Pull out tension: 1. Cross Tee Connections: Minimum 300 pounds. 2. Main Tee Splices: Minimum 200 pounds. D . Seismic Lateral Design: Conform to IBC and ASCE 7 especially requirement for independent support from structure above for light fixture and mechanical services installed into acoustical lay-in panel ceiling systems. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 51 00 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Project #16-0996 09 51 00 - 3 E . Install to conceal plenum space above acoustical ceiling system and to allow access. F . Make provisions for vertical as well as horizontal suspension systems. G . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. 1. Basis of Design: Ultima High NRC by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. a. Smooth visual ceiling with Total Acoustics™ performance, sound absorption and blocking. 2. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 3. Performance Criteria: a. Light Reflectance: 0.87 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. b. NRC: 0.80, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. c. Articulation Class (AC): 170, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. d. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 4. Features: a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 5/8 inches. c. Details: Ultima Square Lay-in. d. Surface Color: White. e. Suspension System: 1) Prelude 15/16" Suspension System by Armstrong. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B . Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. 1. Basis of Design: CIRRUS® Second Look® III Panel by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. a. Medium-textured panels with scored plank visual ceiling with Total Acoustics™ performance, sound absorption and blocking. 2. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 3. Performance Criteria: a. Light Reflectance: 0.85 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. b. NRC: 0.65, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. c. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 4. Features: a. Size: 24 x 48 inches x 3/4". b. Thickness: 5/8 inches. c. Details: Scored Tegular - nominal 6" x 48" linear planks. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 51 00 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Project #16-0996 09 51 00 - 4 d. Surface Color: White. e. Suspension System: 1) Prelude 9/16" Suprafine Suspension System by Armstrong. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C . (GWB) Gypsum Board: 1. Thickness: 5/8". 2. Level 4 as indicated in Section 09 21 16. 3. Painted as indicated in Section 09 90 00. 2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A . Manufacturers: 1. Prelude 15/16" Suspension System by Armstrong. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B . Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. C . Support Channels and Hangers: 1. Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. D . Perimeter Moldings at Changes in Elevation: 1. Same material and finish as grid. a. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. Basis of Design Product: Axiom Trim and Transitions by Armstrong Commercial Ceilings. b. At Concealed Grid: Provide concealed molding. E . Seismic Suspension Edge Clips: 1. Manufacturer's approved, to meet code required movement without 2 inch wall angles. a. Basis of Design: Seismic RX BERC2 clip components by Armstrong or ACM7 seismic clips components by USG. F . Demountable Ceiling Grid Clips: 1. C1430 variable placement hook clip by Armstrong. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 51 00 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Project #16-0996 09 51 00 - 5 G . Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: 1. Specified in Section 07 90 05. H . Touch-up Paint: 1. Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Suspension system: 1. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. 2. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. 3. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size. a. See also reflected ceiling plans. Where 50 percent unit cannot be achieved, consult Architect before installation. 4. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 5. Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. 6. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 7. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 8. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes excess deflection. 9. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 51 00 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Project #16-0996 09 51 00 - 6 10. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. 11. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 TOLERANCES A . Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B . Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 64 00 October 20, 2021 WOOD FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 64 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Field finished wood flooring for gymnasium and dance studio. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: for depressed slab on grade flooring to receive wood gymnasium floor. E . 06 20 20 - Finish Carpentry: For other finished woodwork. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer. B . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate control joints and expansion joints and required details at openings, obstructions, and edges. D . Sample: For each type of wood flooring and accessory. E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. F . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. H . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 64 00 October 20, 2021 WOOD FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 64 00 - 2 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommended schedule of maintenance. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of 5 years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Installation Warranty: Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1% for each product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Pre-engineered wood plank flooring with related accessories. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD FLOORING A . (WDF-1C) Hardwood Floor: 1. Basis of Design: SAFE2 sports floor system as provided by Horner Flooring; www.hornerflooring.com. 2. Construction: Random length tongue and groove, and end-matched MFMA Northern Hard Maple, grade marked and stamped as manufactured by Horner Flooring Company. 3. Installation method: Floor fasteners 2" barbed cleat. 4. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread Index of 200, maximum; Smoke Developed Index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 64 00 October 20, 2021 WOOD FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 64 00 - 3 6. Static Load Resistance: 250 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM F970. B . Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, 6 mil thick. 1. Floor Assembly (top to bottom): a. Engineered plank floor; polyethylene sheet (6 mil). b. Plywood substrate: (5/8" min) depressed concrete slab on grade. C . Underlayment: 3mm EVA pad/underlayment rolls, 200 sf each. D . Concrete slab depression to use 3/5 SAFE pads. 1. 2-16" for 25/32" thick flooring. E . Stop Blocking: At heavy loads, stop blocking installed between pad locations. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. B . Sound Isolation Membrane: Noise-reducing recycled rubber impact insulation systems; ASTM E492. 1. Basis of Design: SonusWave SW48 by Regupol America, LLC. 2. Material: 100% recycled SBR (styrene-butadiene rubber) tire rubber. 3. Impact Insulation Class: 16" open web truss assembly with gypsum topping (IIC 57) STC (64) 8mm SonusWave, 3/4" plywood nail down hardwood. 4. Perimeter Isolation Strip: Regupol Sonus ISO6. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present, but not less than applicable recommendations in NWFA (IG)'s "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." B . Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than 1/2 inch. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 64 00 October 20, 2021 WOOD FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 64 00 - 4 3.4 FIELD FINISHING A . Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. 1. Comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA (IG)'s "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." B . Fill and repair wood flooring seams and defects. C . Apply floor-finish materials in number of coats recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than one coat of floor sealer and three finish coats. D . Cover wood flooring before finishing. E . Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after applying last finish coat. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 65 00 October 20, 2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 65 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Resilient sheet flooring. B . Resilient base. C . Resilient installation accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 03 54 00 - Cast Underlayment. F . 09 05 10 - Flooring Moisture Measurement and Mitigation: Concrete moisture testing and mitigation systems. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For installer. B . Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. D . Flooring Sample: Submit two samples, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified; heat weld rod samples for selection. E . Base and Accessory Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial selection. F . LEEDv4 Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 65 00 October 20, 2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 65 00 - 2 1. Low-Emitting Materials Submittals: G . Certificate: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of subfloor is acceptable. H . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. I . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. J . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1% for each product. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 2 years of experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. B . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. 1.8 WARRANTY A . Provide minimum Manufacturers Limited 5 year commercial warranty for manufacturing defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Resilient sheet and tile flooring, resilient base and installation accessories for transition to other flooring types. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 65 00 October 20, 2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 65 00 - 3 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. B . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend for manufacturer, product, size, locations and finish. 1. Substitution for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING A . (LVP) Vinyl Plank Flooring: 100 percent virgin composition, color and pattern through total thickness. 1. Performance Requirements: a. Homogenous sheet good. b. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1913, without backing and . c. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. B . (RUB) Rubber Flooring: 100 percent rubber composition. 2.5 RESILIENT BASE A . (RB) Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, top set toed, and as follows: 1. Type: Thermoset Rubber Base. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Length: Roll (4 foot sections are not acceptable except as maintenance stock). 4. PVC Free. 5. Top Set: a. Toed: standard locations. b. Toeless: polished concrete locations. 2.6 RESILIENT INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A . Basis of Design Product: Products by manufacturer of resilient flooring or base. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on color match and available profiles. B . Profile and Dimensions: As indicated or required for conditions present. C . Colors and Patterns: As selected from full range of industry colors. D . Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated and as recommended by flooring manufacturer for complete installation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 65 00 October 20, 2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 65 00 - 4 2.7 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Subfloor Filler: 1. White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. C . Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: 1. Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. D . Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: 1. Same material as flooring. E . Filler for Coved Base: 1. Plastic. F . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 013515 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. C . Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. D . Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. E . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: 1. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. 2. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions. 3. Fit joints tightly. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 65 00 October 20, 2021 RESILIENT FLOORING Project #16-0996 09 65 00 - 5 4. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. 5. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. a. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws. b. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive. 6. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 7. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers, maintaining floor pattern. 8. At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern. 9. Turn sheet flooring up 4 inches to create integral cove base. Heat weld corner seams. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 013515 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. B . Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C . Initial cleaning and finishing are the responsibility of the contractor. 1. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for initial cleaning and finishing procedures. 2. Not all types of flooring require finishing. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 68 13 October 20, 2021 TILE CARPETING Project #16-0996 09 68 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Carpet tile. B . Walk-off mat. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. F . 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring: For resilient installation accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For installer. B . Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints. D . Flooring Sample: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. E . Accessory Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. F . LEEDv4 Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. G . Certificate: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. H . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. I . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 68 13 October 20, 2021 TILE CARPETING Project #16-0996 09 68 13 - 2 J . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of materials including: 1. Methods for maintaining materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Provide minimum Manufacturers Limited 5 year commercial warranty for manufacturing defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Carpet tile flooring installed loose laid or fully adhered and walk-off mat. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. B . Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test"). C . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 CARPET TILE A . Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend for manufacturer, product, size, locations and finish. 1. Substitution for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B . (CPT) Carpet Tile: Manufactured in single dye lot. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 68 13 October 20, 2021 TILE CARPETING Project #16-0996 09 68 13 - 3 2.4 WALK-OFF MAT A . (WM) Walk-Off Mat: Traps dirt and moisture at the entrance. 1. Basis of Design: OBEX Tile by Milliken. 2. Material: Cut nylon pile permanently bonded to vinyl backing. 3. Nominal Total Thickness: 0.50". 4. Tile Size: 19.7" x 19.7". 5. Fabricate mats in single unit sizes; fabricate multiple mats where indicated on drawings. 6. Backing: Standard PVC-Free WellBAC Comfort Plus Cushion. 7. Location: Entry vestibule. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. C . Subfloor Filler: Type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. D . Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. E . Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B . Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates meet moisture, internal relative humidity and alkalinity requirements of flooring and adhesive manufacturers in accordance with Section 09 05 10 - Flooring Moisture Measurement and Mitigation. 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. C . Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. D . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 68 13 October 20, 2021 TILE CARPETING Project #16-0996 09 68 13 - 4 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: 1. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. 2. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. 3. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. 4. Lay carpet tile in pattern scheduled in Finish Legend on Drawings, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set aligned as indicated on shop drawings. 5. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions. 6. Fit joints tightly. 7. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 8. Adhere carpet tile to substrate along centerline of rooms, at perimeter of rooms, where tiles are cut, and at 15 foot intervals throughout rooms. Lay remainder of tile dry over substrate. 9. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. 10. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. a. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws. b. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A . Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B . Clean and vacuum carpet tile surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 83 11 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL COMPONENTS Project #16-0996 09 83 11 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Acoustical ceiling panels. B . Accessories as required for complete installation. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer. B . Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Specimen warranty. C . Test Reports: Certified test data from an independent test agency verifying that wall systems meet specified requirements for acoustical and fire performance. D . Shop Drawings: Elevations indicating proposed locations of fabric seams and details indicating typical transitions to other finish surfaces. Include details of inside and outside corners and backing at fixtures mounted within panels. E . Verification Samples: 1. For each textile specified, minimum size 8 inches square, representing actual product in color, texture, and pattern. 2. Accessory package. F . LEEDv4 Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. G . Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. H . Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Supply an additional 10 percent of accessories installed for Owner's use in maintenance of project. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 83 11 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL COMPONENTS Project #16-0996 09 83 11 - 2 2. Supply an additional 5 percent of fabric installed for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all components of acoustical wall systems by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants. B . Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in site-fabricated wall systems, with not less than 2 years of documented experience in installing wall systems of the type specified, and approved by the manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. 1.6 WARRANTY A . Installation Warranty: Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Acoustical ceiling components including prefabricated units. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Seismic Requirements: 1. Classification: Conform to ASTM C635/C635M, Heavy Duty Classification. 2. Code Compliance: IBC, American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE 7, and CISCA (AC) Guidelines. Comply with edition dates per local Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B . Components: Lock together in a positive manner. C . Pull out tension: 1. Cross Tee Connections: Minimum 300 pounds. 2. Main Tee Splices: Minimum 200 pounds. D . Seismic Lateral Design: Conform to IBC and ASCE 7 especially requirement for independent support from structure above for light fixture and mechanical services installed into acoustical lay-in panel ceiling systems. E . Install to conceal plenum space above acoustical ceiling system and to allow access. F . Make provisions for vertical as well as horizontal suspension systems. G . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 83 11 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL COMPONENTS Project #16-0996 09 83 11 - 3 2.3 MATERIALS A . Frame: Extruded polymer track system with serrated jaws of sufficient strength to hold fabric in place after repeated applications. 1. Track Size: 1 inch protrusion from wall with minimum 1 inch base leg. 2. Track Shape: Square at perimeter; square at intermediate abutting joints. 3. Wall Thickness of Track: Minimum 0.062 inch. 4. Profile: Square, 1 inch overall height. 5. Intermediate Joints: Butt joints square. 6. Color: ma. B . Acoustical Core: 1. Type and thickness as required to achieve specified noise reduction coefficient, sufficient to fill depth of track without blocking behind, and one of the following: 2. Thickness: 1 inch, minimum. 3. Material: Multi-density fiberglass board, consisting of a facing sheet of 12 pounds per cubic foot density board laminated over 3 pounds per cubic foot density board. C . Rigid Blocking: Fire-retardant treated medium density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2. D . Acoustical Core: Fiberglass board, 6 pcf density, 1 inch thickness; minimum NRC of 0.80 per ASTM C423, Type A mounting. E . Acoustical Tackable Core: Acoustical core faced with 1/8 inch high density fiberglass face with microperforated Tyvek liner for tack. F . Fabric: Heavy-duty fire-retardant commercial fabric, as provided by manufacturer of acoustical wall system; color, pattern, and texture as selected from manufacturer's standards. G . Acoustical Wall and Ceiling Panel: 1. Manufacturer: FSorb; www.f-sorb.com. a. Core Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard finishes. b. Fabric Finish: Matte non-ironed. c. Applications: 1) Gym: 2" thick ceiling and wall panels mounted on the upper portion of walls. a) NRC: 1.05. b) Size: 48" x 96". c) Color: to be selected by Architect. 2) Staff Carrels, Meeting Room and Maker Space: 1" thick ceiling acoustical panel, direct applied. a) NRC: 0.70. b) Size: 48" x 96". c) Color: White. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 83 11 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL COMPONENTS Project #16-0996 09 83 11 - 4 d) Layout: as coordinated by Architect. 3) Gym: Protective wall pads mounted at lower portion of gym walls. a) Wall Pads: OFOI. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants and IEQ 4.2: For Paints and Coatings in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B . Verify that all casework, markerboards, door and window jambs, finished ceiling, and other finished items abutting acoustical wall systems have been installed. C . If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B . Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C . Remove wall plates and other obstacles, and prepare substrates to receive core material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . Acoustic Ceiling Panels: Fabric finish shall be bonded to, or stretched over, the panel face, bonded to the panel edges and returned a minimum of one inch on the back of the panel. The finish shall be flat and wrinkle free and fully tailored at corners with no exposed darting. B . Track: Install perimeter and intermediate track using fasteners appropriate to substrate, securing firmly to prevent track separation from substrate. 1. At outside corners, miter track to allow installation of core and fabric around corner without intermediate track members. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 83 11 October 20, 2021 ACOUSTICAL COMPONENTS Project #16-0996 09 83 11 - 5 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed products until completion of project, using methods that will ensure that the finished work will be without damage or deterioration at Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 90 00 October 20, 2021 PAINTING AND COATING Project #16-0996 09 90 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Interior paint systems. B . Exterior paint systems. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: LEED rating system definition. C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 05 05 13 - Shop-Applied Coatings for Metal: For factory applied finishes. E . 09 96 53 - Elastomeric Coating: For elastomeric coatings at cast-in-place concrete substrates. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. B . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. C . Sample: Submit three paper chip samples, 8.5 x 11 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. D . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommendations on maintenance schedule. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 90 00 October 20, 2021 PAINTING AND COATING Project #16-0996 09 90 00 - 2 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1% for each product. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of paint and coating products used in the work of this section with minimum ten years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Surface preparation and field application of paints. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; unless noted otherwise below. B . Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend for manufacturer, product, size, locations and finish. 1. Substitution for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 MATERIALS A . (PT) Interior paint systems: 1. Substrate: Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units, Gypsum Board. a. Acrylic-Enamel. 2. Substrate: Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units, Gypsum Board. a. Epoxy. 3. Substrate: Ferrous, Non-Ferrous, and Zinc-Coated Metals. a. Urethane Acrylic. 4. Substrate: Interior Ferrous Metal. a. Acrylic. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 90 00 October 20, 2021 PAINTING AND COATING Project #16-0996 09 90 00 - 3 B . Exterior paint systems: 1. Substrate: Ferrous Metal; typical steel; AESS.PS-06 Zinc Rich Epoxy Urethane. a. Zinc Rich Epoxy Urethane. 2. Substrate: Galvanized Metal. a. Urethane. 3. Substrate: Aluminum. a. Epoxy Urethane. 4. Substrate: Glulam. a. Exterior: Rosewood oil or approved substitute. b. Interior: Clear finish. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Glulam: remove preservative treatment prior to using rosewood oil. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 96 53 September 1, 2021 ELASTOMERIC COATING Project #16-0996 09 96 53 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Provide labor and materials for surface cleaning, preparation, and application of elastomeric coating as specified herein. Preparation and coating of exterior surfaces of the project including existing cast-in-place concrete and masonry. B . Elastomeric coating on exterior exposed architectural concrete walls at occupied areas and locations with interior finishes. 1.3 REFERENCES A . ASTM D 412 – Standard Test Method for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension B . ASTM D 522 – Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings C . ASTM D 711 – Standard Test Method for No-Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint D . ASTM D 1653 – Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coatings E . ASTM D 1737 – Method of Test for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus F . ASTM D 2240 – Rubber Property Durometer Hardness G . ASTM D 2369 – Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of Coatings H . ASTM D 3273 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber I . ASTM D 3274 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth of Soil and Dirt J . ASTM D7234 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers K . NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) – Guide to US Government Paint Specifications L . SSPC/NACE – Guide to Good Painting Practices, Volumes I and 2 M . ICRI – International Concrete Repair Institute 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 96 53 September 1, 2021 ELASTOMERIC COATING Project #16-0996 09 96 53 - 2 1. Sample (exposed coating only): Submit 3 paper chip samples, 8.5" x 11" in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. Provide step-coated sample cards with each coat labeled. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 3. Maintenance Data: For user operation and maintenance of system including: a. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. b. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. c. Furnish extra materials packaged for storage in unopened containers labeled with product name, color and texture information, and local source contact information. d. Provide 1 gallon of each type of product. B . Closeout Submittals 1. 8-1/2" x 11" card, painted on 1 side, paint color formula on the other, and availability information and any “custom” property of the product for each paint color and texture used on the Project. 1.5 FIELD MOCK-UPS A . Provide field mock-ups consisting of approximately 10 square feet to illustrate the coating color, texture, and finish. Step down mock-up. B . Install field mock-ups at location determined by Owner. C . Owner shall review field mock-ups installed for acceptability of quality of finish. Accepted area will serve as the standard for the Work. D . Accepted mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualification: Company specializing in the manufacture of paint and coating products used in the Work of this Section with minimum 10 years of experience. 1. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. B . Mock-Ups 1. Exterior exposed concrete: Paint approximately 10 sq ft to serve as a mock-up 2. Field mock-ups shall be installed and reviewed for acceptability of quality of finish. Accepted area will serve as the standard for the Work. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 3. Locate where directed by the Architect. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by manufacturer for a warrantable installation of installed products to meet performance and design criteria. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 96 53 September 1, 2021 ELASTOMERIC COATING Project #16-0996 09 96 53 - 3 B . Deliver products to site in Manufacturer's original sealed containers with labels intact and legible; inspect to verify acceptability. Provide invoices. C . Container labels shall include manufacturer's name, type of material, brand name, lot number, brand code and color designation. D . Store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45° F and a maximum of 90° F, in ventilated area and as required by manufacturer's storage instructions. E . Store flammable materials to protect from fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. F . Remove materials and empty containers from the area of work at the close of each day. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A . Conform to applicable federal, state, and local regulatory requirements. B . Flammable Liquids: Observe regulations regarding flammable liquids such as posting “No Smoking” signs. Allow no open flames, welding, or other ignition sources in the work area. C . Conform to applicable laws, codes, and regulations for disposal of materials, debris, and containers. D . High-performance coatings materials shall be VOC compliant. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A . Do not apply coatings to wet or damp surfaces, or when relative humidity is outside the ranges required by the product manufacturer or when rain is imminent. B . Minimum Application Temperatures: 50° F. minimum and 90° F. maximum; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C . Provide additional lighting if needed to illuminate the substrate surface during coating application. D . Provide an environmental log of weather during application and cure. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Upon request, provide touch-up quart of each color and type to Owner. B . Label each sealed container with color, type, texture, etc. 1.11 WARRANTY A . Provide a 1-year labor warranty signed by the Contractor. The manufacturer will provide a 5- year limited material warranty. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 96 53 September 1, 2021 ELASTOMERIC COATING Project #16-0996 09 96 53 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE ELASTOMERIC COATING AT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SUBSTRATES A . Minimum 2 coat, elastomeric, high solids content coating designed for field application containing uniformly dispersed pigments in a homogeneous coating with good flow properties; capable of air-drying or curing free of discoloration. 1. AllGuard by DOW Corning 2. Silshield by GE 3. Approved Equivalent B . Color: Per Architect C . Accessories for Concrete Substrates: 1. Filler Surfacer: Tnemec Series 215 100% solids 2. First Coat: Tnemec Series 156 Enviro-Crete. Install detail coat over dynamic cracks 3. Second Coat: Tnemec Series 156 Enviro-Crete 2.2 TRANSLUCENT SILICONE COATING AT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SUBSTRATES A . Minimum 2 coat, translucent silicone elastomeric, high solids content coating designed for above grade field application; vapor permeable and allows visibility to the substrate beneath. 1. Optic* 2401 by GE 2. Approved Equivalent B . Accessories for Concrete Substrates: 1. Filler Surfacer: GE SilPruf* or SCS2800 silicone sealant 2. First Coat: GE Optic* 2401 3. Second Coat: GE Optic* 2401 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Contractor shall verify that surfaces are ready to receive work per the manufacturer. Unsound or otherwise deficient substrate conditions shall be brought to the attention of the project team immediately. 1. Contractor shall examine surfaces scheduled to be finished before commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Failures as a result of poor substrate preparation or installation of materials over unsuitable substrates will require that the Work be remediated at no cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION - SURFACES TO RECEIVE COATINGS A . High Performance Elastomeric Coating 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 96 53 September 1, 2021 ELASTOMERIC COATING Project #16-0996 09 96 53 - 5 1. Surface Appointments: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixtures, trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Store and protect from damage and reinstall after completion of the Work. 2. Surfaces: Clean exterior surfaces to be coated of dirt, dust, oil, grease, oxidized, loose and scaling paint, mildew, white rust efflorescence and other foreign matter. To the extent possible, apply the coating system into the joint slot where sealants have been removed before the application of new joint sealants. 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Abrade entire surface using abrasive media. High temperature, high pressure, high volume water preparation allowed. Remove laitance, moss, mold mildew. Provide rough provide equal to 40 to 60 grit sand paper. Standard: ICRI Level 3 or 4. 4. Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions, these specifications and referenced standards. Where these may be in conflict the more stringent shall apply. B . Translucent Silicone Coating 1. Surface Appointments: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixtures, trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Store and protect from damage and reinstall after completion of the Work. 2. Surfaces: Clean exterior surfaces to be coated of dirt, dust, oil, grease, oxidized, loose and scaling paint, mildew, white rust efflorescence and other foreign matter. Allow sufficient time after cleaning for the substrate to dry completely prior to application. 3. Crack and hole repairs: Cracks and holes greater than 1/16 inch wide must be filled. Repairs to cracks and holes should match the existing substrate as closely as possible in texture and color. 4. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Cast-in-place concrete should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 30 days. Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION AT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SUBSTRATES A . High Performance Elastomeric Coating 1. Apply products in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. a. First Coat: 4 to 6 mils DFT (Dry Film Thickness) b. Second Coat: 4 to 6 mils DFT 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry as required before next coat is applied. Do not exceed recoat window listed on product data sheet. 3. Batch-mix multiple containers of a single color to assure a continuous balance of ingredients. 4. Clean surfaces free of loose particles using a dust brush just prior to applying coatings. B . Translucent Silicone Coating 1. Apply products in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. a. 2-coats yielding minimum DFT of 10 mils b. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry as required before next coat is applied. Do not exceed recoat window listed on product data sheet. 4EA Building Science FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 09 96 53 September 1, 2021 ELASTOMERIC COATING Project #16-0996 09 96 53 - 6 c. Clean surfaces free of loose particles using a wire brush and then pressure washing just prior to applying coatings. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Coating Contractor shall field inspect the Work upon initial completion. Non-complying work shall be corrected as required. Create pinhole free film using the coating system. 3.5 PROTECTION A . Protect adjacent materials and surfaces including landscaping and roofing from damage during work including cleaning, preparation, and application of exterior coating materials. Notify owner of any on-site or adjacent property such as parked vehicles, bicycles, landscaping, etc. that may be damaged from coating operations. Provide protection of grade-level horizontal surface to the extent possible. B . Coating Contractor shall replace materials in kind that are damaged during work of this section. C . Touch-up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces that occur as a result of the Work of this Section. 3.6 CLEANING A . Remove spills and overspray from adjacent surface. B . Legally dispose of debris in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 11 00 October 20, 2021 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES Project #16-0996 10 11 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Marker boards. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and methods, and termination details for visual display surfaces and accessories. B . Sample: Each visual display surface. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. D . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's hardware, operation, materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommendations on maintenance schedule. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Visual display surfaces - marker boards. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 11 00 October 20, 2021 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES Project #16-0996 10 11 00 - 2 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. C . Products proposed for substitution must have EPDs that conform to ISO 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope. D . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Marker Boards: 1. Basis of Design Product: Series 5 white markerboard by Claridge. a. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Perimeter trim is 5/8” wide. 3. Steel mounting clips at top and angle clips at bottom, 2’ on center. 4. Satin anodize aluminum frame. 5. Maximum length, 16’0”; maximum height - Type A and Type CO units - 4’0” 6. Location: Maker Space. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work, including location of blocking. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 11 00 October 20, 2021 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES Project #16-0996 10 11 00 - 3 B . Install components plumb, level, square, and in proper alignment with drawings. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Architect. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 14 00 October 20, 2021 SIGNAGE Project #16-0996 10 14 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Signage as required by code and to facilitate wayfinding. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A . AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. B . ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. C . ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. D . ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. E . ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel. F . ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. G . ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. H . ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. I . ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. J . ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. K . ASTM D648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. L . ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. M . NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 14 00 October 20, 2021 SIGNAGE Project #16-0996 10 14 00 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For fabricator and design engineer. B . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and attachment methods. D . Shop Drawings: 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. E . Sample: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter, number, and graphic element). 2. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6 inch long sections of extrusions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches. 3. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 4. Polycarbonate Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 5. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square for each type. 6. Accessories: One of each, for each type. F . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. H . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Include manufacturers' brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials installed. I . Closeout Submittals: 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualification: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 14 00 October 20, 2021 SIGNAGE Project #16-0996 10 14 00 - 3 B . Fabricators Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. C . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Signage as required by code and to facilitate wayfinding. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Tactile and Braille Characters: Text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Braille dots with domed or rounded shape produced using Raster Method. 1. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 0.7 mm and not more than 3 mm. B . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32. B . Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T5. C . Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A1008/A1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed. D . Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. E . Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A529/A529M or ASTM A572/A572M, 42,000-psi (290-MPa) minimum yield strength. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 14 00 October 20, 2021 SIGNAGE Project #16-0996 10 14 00 - 4 F . Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). G . Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating: 1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lb/in. per ASTM D256, Method A. 2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D638. 3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D790. 4. Heat Deflection: 265 degrees F at 264 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D648. 5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. H . Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications. 1. Opaque Vinyl: Basis of Design: 3M Scotchcal Electro Cut Graphic Film, or a comparable product by the following: a. Gerber Scientific Products. 2. Translucent Vinyl: Basis of Design 3M Scotchcal Electro Cut Graphic Film, Dusted Crystal Translucent Vinyl, or a comparable product by the following: a. Gerber Scientific Products. 3. Printed Vinyl Sheet: Digitally printed vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply UV and water resistant coating to face of sheet. Apply sheet to panels indicated. 2.4 FINISHES A . Aluminum Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611. B . Stainless Steel: No. 4 finish. C . Painted Finishes: Specification is based on products listed by Matthews Paint. 1. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. a. Akzo Nobel. 2. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 3. Steel and Galvanized Steel: a. Primer: 274 Series Epoxy Primer, color as required for topcoat color indicated, 1.5 - 2.0 mils DFT. b. Topcoat: VOC MAP, 2.0 mils DFT minimum, satin sheet unless indicated otherwise. 4. Aluminum: a. Primer: 274 Series Epoxy Primer, color as required for topcoat color indicated, 1.5 - 2.0 mils DFT. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 14 00 October 20, 2021 SIGNAGE Project #16-0996 10 14 00 - 5 b. Topcoat: VOC MAP, 2.0 mils DFT minimum, satin sheet unless indicated otherwise. 5. Acrylic, Polycarbonate: a. Primer: 74 777SP Tie Bond 0.4 - 0.6 mils DFT. b. Topcoat: VOC MAP, 2.0 mils DFT minimum, satin sheet unless indicated otherwise. 6. Clear Coat: a. VOC 281 228SP VOC Satin Clear, 2.0 mils DFT minimum, satin sheen unless indicated otherwise. 2.5 FABRICATION A . Dimensional character signs: 1. Fabricated Channel Characters: Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. 2. Provide manufacturer's hardware for projection mounting of channel characters at distance from wall surface indicated. 3. Signage material, color and finish as Scheduled. B . Panel Signs: 1. Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner signs. 2. Edge Condition: Square. 3. Corner Condition: Square. 4. Mounting: Unframed, as indicated. a. Wall or Projection mounted with concealed attachment. b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 5. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above surface with contrasting colors. C . Illuminated panels: 1. <<<<add info>>> D . Applied Decal Signs: 1. Applied Vinyl Characters: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to surfaces indicated. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 14 00 October 20, 2021 SIGNAGE Project #16-0996 10 14 00 - 6 B . Manufacturer's optional accessories required by the project: 1. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory paint brackets in color matching background color of panel sign. 3. Cable: Fabricate cable and fittings for cable mounted signs from stainless steel cable to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. C . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 21 13 October 20, 2021 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Project #16-0996 10 21 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . HDPL toilet compartments. B . Urinal privacy screens. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: For concealed steel support members. E . 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: For blocking and supports. F . 10 28 00 - Toilet Accessories: For accessories mounted on compartments. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer and design engineer. B . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C . Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D . Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of ceiling supports, door swings. 1. Provide template layouts and installation instructions for anchorage devices built into other work. E . Sample: 1. Submit two samples of partition panels, minimum size 6 inches, illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. 2. Submit one sample of full set of hardware illustrating operation and finish. F . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1. Low-Emitting Materials Submittals: G . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 21 13 October 20, 2021 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Project #16-0996 10 21 13 - 2 H . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 2 years of experience. B . Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements applicable in the jurisdiction of the project, including but not limited to ADA and ICC/ANSI A117.1 requirements as applicable. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.6 WARRANTY A . Installation Warranty: Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner. B . Manufacturer Warranty: Provide five year warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Doors, panels, screens, and pilasters assembled into complete compartment system, with cutouts and drilled holes to receive hardware as indicated; processed and fabricated in accordance with industry standards. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Fire Resistance: 1. National Fire Protection Association/International Building Code Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish: Class B / Uniform Building Code: Class II. a. Flame Spread Index (ASTM E 84): 60 for panels and stiles. b. Smoke Developed Index (ASTM E 84): 265 for panels and stiles. B . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 21 13 October 20, 2021 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Project #16-0996 10 21 13 - 3 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A . Basis of Design Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., which is located at: 6901 Tujunga Ave.; North Hollywood, CA 91605-6213; Tel: 818-764-1000; Fax: 818-765-2700; Email:info@bobrick.com; Web:www.bobrick.com. 1. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.4 HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE WITH PARTICLE BOARD SUBSTRATE A . (HPL) High Pressure Laminate Toilet Partitions: 1. Basis of Design Product: Designer Series. 2. Partitions: a. Standard Height: 1) Door/Panel Height: 58 inches (147 cm). 2) Floor Clearance: 12 inches (30 cm). b. Mounting Configuration: 1) Floor-mounted. a) Stile Standard Height: 69 inches (175 cm); Maximum Height: 75-5/16 inches (194 cm). c. No sight gaps on hinge side or lock side of door. d. All fasteners and reinforcing concealed from view from outside compartment. e. Pedestal fastened to floor with concealed anchors. B . High Pressure Laminate Urinal Screens: 1. Wall Hung: a. Screen Height: 42 inches (107 cm) with 18 inches (46 cm) floor clearance. C . Features: 1. Finished Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) for stiles, doors, screens and panels. 2. Materials: 3-ply, stiles, panels, doors, and screens. 3. Cores: 45 lb (20.4 kg) density, industrial grade, resin-impregnated, particle board. 4. Surfaces: High-pressure laminated plastic NEMA LDS-1985 minimum thickness 0.050 inch (1.33 mm) with matte finish. 5. Fabrication: Bonded high-pressure plastic laminate to core material with adhesive specially formulated to prevent delamination. Edges bonded prior to bonding face sheets. Splices or joints in faces or edges are not acceptable except in the case of laminate material limitations. 6. Color/Finish: To be selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 HARDWARE A . Compliance: Operating force of less than 5 lb (2.25 kg). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 21 13 October 20, 2021 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Project #16-0996 10 21 13 - 4 B . Emergency Access: Hinges, latch allow door to be lifted over keeper from outside compartment on inswing doors. C . Materials: Stainless Steel 18-8, Type 304, heavy-gauge stainless steel with satin finish. D . Fastening: Hardware secured to door and stile by theft-resistant, pin-in-head Torx stainless steel machine screws into factory-installed, threaded inserts. E . Door Latch: Track of door latch prevents inswing doors from swinging out beyond stile; on outswing doors, door keeper prevents door from swinging in beyond stile; 16 gauge (1.6 mm) sliding door latch, 14 gauge (2 mm) keeper. F . Locking: Door locked from inside by sliding door latch into keeper. G . Hinge Type: 1. Standard: Balanced, with field-adjustable cam to permit door to be fully closed or partially open when compartment is unoccupied. 2.6 MATERIALS A . Stiles: 1. Floor-anchored stiles furnished with expansion shields and threaded rods. 2. Leveling Devices: 3/8 inch x 7/8 inch (10 mm x 22 mm) steel bar welded to 11 gauge (3 mm) steel-reinforcing core; chromate-treated and double zinc-plated; welded to sheet- steel core of stiles. 3. Stile Shoes: One-piece, 22 gauge (0.8 mm), 18-8, Type 304 stainless steel, 4 inch (102 mm) height; tops with 90 degree return to stile. One-piece shoe capable of adapting to 3/4 inch (19 mm) or 1 inch (25 mm) stile thickness and capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at wall line. B . Wall Posts: Pre-drilled for door hardware, 18-8, Type 304, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) stainless steel with satin finish; 1 inch (25 mm) x 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) x 58 inches high (1473 mm). C . Anchors: Expansion shields and threaded rods at floor connections as applicable. Threaded rods secured to supports above ceiling as applicable. Supports above ceiling furnished and installed as Work of Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 21 13 October 20, 2021 TOILET COMPARTMENTS Project #16-0996 10 21 13 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swing doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out- swing doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 26 00 October 20, 2021 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION Project #16-0996 10 26 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Fiber reinforced plastic sheet. B . Fiber reinforced plastic laminate. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: For additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: For additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: For additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and methods, and termination details for curtains, track and accessories. B . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. C . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's hardware, operation, materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommendations on maintenance schedule. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1% for each product. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 26 00 October 20, 2021 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION Project #16-0996 10 26 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Surface applied wall protection including fiber reinforced plastic sheet and fiber reinforced plastic laminate. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. C . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend for manufacturer, product, locations and finish. 1. Substitution for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B . Sheet Wall Protection. 1. (FRP) Fiber Reinforced Plastic Sheet: a. Height: As indicated in elevations. b. Thickness: _______ inch. c. Mounting: Adhesive. d. Seams: Provide manufacturer's color matched PVC trim components. 2. (FRL) Fiber Reinforced Plastic Laminate : a. Height: As indicated in elevations. b. Thickness: _______ inch. c. Mounting: Adhesive. d. Seams: Provide manufacturer's anodized aluminum trim components. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 26 00 October 20, 2021 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION Project #16-0996 10 26 00 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work, including location of blocking. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Install components plumb, level, square, and in proper alignment with drawings. C . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Architect. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 28 00 October 20, 2021 TOILET ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 10 28 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Toilet Room Accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: For blocking and supports. B . 09 30 00 - Tiling, coordination with layout and installation. C . 10 21 13 - Toilet Compartments: For partition materials products from this section are installed in. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. B . Sample: Submit 1 sample of each accessory, illustrating color and finish. C . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. E . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements applicable in the jurisdiction of the project, including but not limited to ADA and ICC/ANSI A117.1 requirements as applicable. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 28 00 October 20, 2021 TOILET ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 10 28 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Accessories to be installed in toilet rooms. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA Standards). B . Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. C . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. D . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Stainless Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A666, Type 304. B . Stainless Steel Tubing: 1. ASTM A269/A269M, Type 304 or 316. C . Back paint, in accordance with Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating, where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. D . Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: 1. Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type. E . Expansion Shields: 1. Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . Toilet Room Accessories: 1. Surface Mounted Soap Dispenser: a. Product: Contura Series B-4112. 2. Recessed Multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser : a. Product: B-3888 Recessed Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser. 3. Seat Cover Dispenser: a. Product: Bobrick B-221. 4. Recessed Convertible Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Dispenser: a. Product: B-3944. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 28 00 October 20, 2021 TOILET ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 10 28 00 - 3 5. Concealed Mounting Grab Bar: a. Product: B-6806 Series 18”,36” and 42” b. Diameter: 1-1/2-inch diameter. 6. Changing Station: a. Product: KB-200 Koala Care Products, horizontal wall mounted changing station. b. Color: Gray. 7. Channel Frame Mirror: a. Product: B-165 2436 Channel Frame Mirror, 24” x 48” . 8. Locker Room Mirrors: a. Custom per Interiors. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C . Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings. D . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 TOLERANCES A . Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 28 00 October 20, 2021 TOILET ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 10 28 00 - 4 B . Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.5 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. 3.6 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.7 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 44 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 10 44 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Fire extinguishers. B . Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Roughed-in wall openings and blocking. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B . Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details. C . Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, and location. D . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 2. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 3. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Fire extinguishers, fire rated and non-rated cabinets, surface or recess mounted with accessories for proper use. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 44 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 10 44 00 - 2 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Portable fire extinguishers shall be selected and installed in accordance with this section and NFPA 10. 1. 2015 IBC.906.2. B . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Fire Extinguishers: 1. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Extinguisher: a. Specification is based on MP Series by Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 1) Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. a) JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. b) Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com. 2) Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. b. Performance Criteria: 1) Complying with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 2) Labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated. 3) Class: A:B:C. 4) UL Rating: 4A-80B:C. 5) Extinguisher Model: Larsen's #MP10. 6) Size: 10 pound. c. Features: 1) Finish: Baked polyester powder coat. 2) Color: Red. B . Fire extinguisher cabinets: 1. Recess Mounted Cabinets in Fire Rated Walls: a. Specification is based on Ridge Series Cabinet by Nystrom. 1) Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. a) Larsen's Manufacturing Co. b) JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. c) Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com. 2) Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 44 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 10 44 00 - 3 b. Performance Criteria: 1) Sized to fit specified fire extinguisher. 2) Provide Flame Shield option to maintain fire rating of assembly. c. Features: 1) Door and Trim Material: Cold steel sheet with recoat able white polyester finish. 2) Door Style: Convex, clear plastic bubble window. 3) Trim Style: Flat with square corners. 4) Glazing: Clear Acrylic. 5) Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Red enamel. 2. Surface Mounted Cabinets: a. Specification is based on Ridge Series Cabinet by Nystrom. 1) Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. a) Larsen's Manufacturing Co. b) JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. c) Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com. 2) Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. b. Performance Criteria: 1) Sized to fit specified fire extinguisher. c. Features: 1) Door and Trim Material: Cold steel sheet with recoat able white polyester finish. 2) Door Style: Convex, clear plastic bubble window. 3) Trim Style: Flat with square corners. 4) Glazing: Clear Acrylic. 5) Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: White enamel. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Manufacturer's accessories required by the project: 1. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished. C . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 44 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 10 44 00 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 51 00 October 20, 2021 LOCKERS Project #16-0996 10 51 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Metal lockers. B . Wood lockers C . Phenolic lockers. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes, and accessories. B . Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan. C . Samples: Submit two samples 3 x 6 inches in size, of each color scheduled; applied to specified substrate. D . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly. E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 51 00 October 20, 2021 LOCKERS Project #16-0996 10 51 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Phenolic lockers and wood Lockers with HPDL finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Code required criteria. 1. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1. B . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 PHENOLIC LOCKERS A . Basis of Design: Phenolic Locker by ASI Storage Solutions. 1. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B . Lockers: Factory assembled, made of phenolic core panels with mortise and tenon joints and stainless steel mechanical joint fasteners; fully finished inside and out; each locker capable of standing alone. 1. Doors: Full overlay, covering full width and height of locker body; square edges. 2. Panel Core Exposed at Edges: Machine polished, without chips or tool marks; square edge unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where locker ends or sides are exposed, finish the same as fronts or provide extra panels to match fronts. 4. Ventilation: By holes drilled in tops, bottoms, and intermediate shelves, and by open space between the back of door and locker body. 5. Door Color: To be selected by Architect; allow for 2 different colors. 6. Body Color: Manufacturer's standard white or light color. 7. Fasteners for Accessories and Locking Mechanisms: Tamperproof type. C . Component Thicknesses: 1. Doors: 1/2 inch minimum thickness. 2. Locker Body: One of the following combinations: a. Tops, bottoms, and shelves 3/8 inch; sides and backs 5/16 inch; minimum. b. Tops, bottoms, and shelves 1/2 inch; sides 3/8 inch; backs 1/4 inch; minimum. 3. Sloped Tops: 1/2 inch minimum thickness. D . Phenolic Core Panels: Nonporous phenolic resin and paper core formed under high pressure, with natural colored finished edges, integral melamine surface, matte finish, and uniform surface appearance; glued laminated panels not acceptable. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 75 or less, and smoke developed index of 450 or less; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 51 00 October 20, 2021 LOCKERS Project #16-0996 10 51 00 - 3 E . Hinges: Stainless steel, satin finish; minimum of 90 degree opening; either exposed barrel 5-knuckle hinge attached to back of door and inside of body with tamperproof screws, or completely concealed cabinetwork style hinge attached with tamperproof screws. F . Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard, minimum 4-digit, permanently attached with adhesive; may be field installed. G . Locks: Padlock hasp. 2.4 WOOD LOCKERS A . Basis of Design: Double Tier "S" Style by Salsbury Industries; www.lockers.com. 1. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B . Features: 1. Locking: a. Model 33320: Padlock - combination style. b. Recessed hasp. 2. Base: Fabricate for wood base. a. Base Height: 4 inch. 3. Shelf: 5" deep. 4. Hook: Double prong ceiling hook. 5. Slope Hood and side panel: matching plastic laminate. 6. Panel Finish: Maple. C . Model 37168 - One Wide: 1. Dimensions One Wide: 2. Width: 12 inches. 3. Depth: 18 inches. 4. Height: 72 inches. 5. Weight: 110 lbs. D . Model 37368 - Three Wide: 1. Dimensions One Wide: 2. Width: 36 inches. 3. Depth: 18 inches. 4. Height: 72 inches. 5. Weight: 330 lbs. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 51 00 October 20, 2021 LOCKERS Project #16-0996 10 51 00 - 4 B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. B . Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized. C . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 INSTALLATION A . Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Install lockers plumb and square. C . Place and secure on prepared base. D . Install accessories. E . Replace components that do not operate smoothly. F . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.3 CLEANING A . Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. B . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 80 13 October 20, 2021 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 10 80 13 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Knox Box. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of specialty, indicating colors, locations, overall dimensions. B . Samples: Submit sample of finish options for verification. C . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. D . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. E . Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Exterior Specialties: Miscellaneous specialties on building exterior. 2.2 KNOX BOX A . High Security Industrial/Government Key Vault. B . Basis of Design: Knox-Vault 4400 Series Single Lock Model by Knox Company. C . Finish: Dark Bronze. D . Options: 1. Aluminization. 2. Recessed Mounting Kit. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 10 80 13 October 20, 2021 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 10 80 13 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 INSTALLATION A . Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C . Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. D . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.3 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 01 14 October 20, 2021 FALL ARREST & FALL RESTRAINT SYSTEM Project #16-0996 11 01 14 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Anchors. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealants installed with fall arrest and fall restraint system. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Owner Coordination Meeting: Convene prior to starting design and layout work of this section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer, installer, and design engineer. B . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Include details transferring load of anchors to primary structure. C . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, performance data, and limitations. D . Shop Drawings: Show interface with adjacent materials. E . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. G . Closeout Submittals: 1. Project Record Drawings: Show location of each fall arrest anchor as installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Installer Qualifications: Company approved by manufacturer, specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 01 14 October 20, 2021 FALL ARREST & FALL RESTRAINT SYSTEM Project #16-0996 11 01 14 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . System of components designed to allow free movement of persons over entire roof while attached by full body harness in accordance with requirements of ASME A120.1 and OSHA 1910.66 app C for structural connections and components. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Design and layout system to conform to State Industrial Safety Regulations. B . Design and layout system to conform to additional requirements of OSHA - Occupational and Safety Health Administration Standards. 1. OSHA - Occupational and Safety Health Administration Standards. a. OSHA Standards for the Construction Industry 29 CFR. 1) 1910.66 Appendix C. 2) 1926.500 Subpart M through § 1926 Subpart M Appendix E. C . Design upright anchors as instructed by manufacture in layout acceptable to Owner's representative. Space uprights so that the fewest number of horizontal life lines is required. D . Design to safety factor to meet ASME A120.1 and OSHA 1910.66 app C for structural connections and components. 1. Design fall arrest system for one person and fall restraint system for up to four persons on roof. 2. Design fall arrest anchors with permanent attachments to roof structure to resist the load required and pullout force and as required by current code. 3. Design fall arrest system to limit fall distance to 6 foot and to limit arrest force to that required or less per the current code. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Anchors: 1. Basis of Design Product: Fabricated Post Anchors by Hy-Safe. 2. Performance Criteria: a. ASTM A36 and ASTM A53 Grade B. b. Single point/Intermediate Post: 2,600 lbs. capacity; 2,250 lbs without deformation. c. End/Corner Post: 7,000 lbs. capacity; 4,200 lbs. without deformation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 01 14 October 20, 2021 FALL ARREST & FALL RESTRAINT SYSTEM Project #16-0996 11 01 14 - 3 3. Features: a. Steel Pipe: Galvanized or stainless steel. b. Selection of roof and wall anchors available from single manufacturer. c. Plate and pipe columns. d. End/Corner and Single Point Posts: 5/8-11 top bolt. e. Intermediate Post: 1/2-13 top bolt. f. Standard Finish: hot-dip galvanized. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. C . Manufacturer's optional accessories required by the project: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Field test anchors: 1. Test 25 percent of all anchors. 2. Test using load cell test apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate moving parts for proper operation. 3.6 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 01 14 October 20, 2021 FALL ARREST & FALL RESTRAINT SYSTEM Project #16-0996 11 01 14 - 4 3.7 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. 3.8 SCHEDULE A . Anchors: At locations indicated. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 31 00 October 20, 2021 APPLIANCES Project #16-0996 11 31 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Kitchen appliances. B . Laundry appliances. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. D . 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances. E . 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B . Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C . Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. D . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B . Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by CSA/UL and complying with NEMA standards. C . Gas Appliances: Bearing design certification seal of AGA. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 31 00 October 20, 2021 APPLIANCES Project #16-0996 11 31 00 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B . Storage: 1. Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Keep materials from freezing. C . Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent contamination or damage. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators. B . Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Kitchen Appliances: All equipment eligible for Energy Star Rating: B . Laundry Appliances: Provide equipment eligible for Energy Star Rating: 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Accessibility Requirements: For appliances required to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1. B . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.3 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A . All Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated. B . Kitchen Appliances: 1. Basis of Design: GE or approved equal. a. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) Frigidaire Home Products; www.frigidaire.com. 2) Whirlpool Corp; www.whirlpool.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C . Refrigerator: 1. GE Model: CWE19SP2NS1. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 31 00 October 20, 2021 APPLIANCES Project #16-0996 11 31 00 - 3 2. Configuration: Counter-depth French Door. 3. Capacity: 18.6 cu. ft. 4. Opening: 33-inch. 5. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency standards set by DOE. 6. Finish: Stainless steel with brushed stainless handles. D . Range: 1. GE Model: JD630SFSS. 2. Configuration: Drop-In Electric Range. 3. Width: 30-inch. 4. Ceramic glass cooktop. 5. Black gloss oven interior. 6. Electronic oven controls. 7. Finish: Stainless steel. E . Dishwasher: 1. GE Model GDT226SSLSS. 2. Configuration: Built-In ready. 3. Height: 32-1/4" minimum. 4. 3-Level wash. 5. Finish: Stainless steel. F . Microwave Oven: 1. Sharp Model KB-6524PS. 2. Configuration: Built-in ready. 3. Capacity: 1.2 cu. ft.. 4. Size: 24-inch. 5. Finish: Stainless steel. G . Range Hood - Decorative: 1. ZEPHR DCBL. 2. Size: 36-inch. 3. ADA Compliant: Wireless remote control. H . Range Hood - Hidden: 1. ZEPHR Model ALU-E43BSX. 2. Size: 43-inch. 3. Finish: Stainless steel. 4. ADA Compliant: Wireless remote control. 5. Ceiling Height: 9'. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 31 00 October 20, 2021 APPLIANCES Project #16-0996 11 31 00 - 4 I . Range Hood - Wired Solution: 1. Thermador Model VCI12ODS. 2. Size: 30-inch custom insert. 3. Remote control panel: Model VC12REMFS. 4. Dimensions: 4-1/8" H x 18-5/8" W x 4-3/8" D. 5. Inline Blower: VT1610P-600 CFM. 6. Finish: Stainless steel. 2.4 LAUNDRY APPLIANCES A . Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated. B . Laundry Appliances: 1. Basis of Design: GE or approved equal. a. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for submittal requirements. 1) Frigidaire Home Products; www.frigidaire.com. 2) Whirlpool Corp; www.whirlpool.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required to comply with IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants and IEQ 4.2: For Paints and Coatings in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A . All adhesives, sealants, paints, and coating applied on site must comply with the VOC limits and Submittal requirements for IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, IEQ 4.2: For Paints and Coatings, and IEQ 4.3: For Flooring and Systems (wall base) as specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. B . Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C . Anchor built-in equipment in place. 3.3 ADJUSTING A . Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 31 00 October 20, 2021 APPLIANCES Project #16-0996 11 31 00 - 5 3.4 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. B . Remove packing materials from equipment. C . Wash and clean equipment. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Roll-Up Gym Divider. B . Fold-Up Gym Divider. C . Bleachers. D . Ballet bars. E . Safety padding 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification C . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For manufacturer, fabricator, and installer. B . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. D . Shop Drawings: Indicate required flashings, sealing at openings. E . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. F . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 2 H . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommended schedule of maintenance. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of work specified in this section with minimum 5 years of experience. B . Fabricators Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. C . Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum of 5 years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. 1.7 WARRANTY A . Installation Warranty: Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Athletic and recreational equipment to include roll-up and fold-up gym dividers, bleachers, ballet bars and safety padding. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Provide materials that meet the guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. B . Class A rated according to requirements of NFPA-101. 2.3 MATERIALS A . Folding Basketball Backstops: 1. Basis of Design Product: EZ Fold TF-20 as manufacturerd by Draper, Inc. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. 2. Configuration: Ceiling suspended, forward folding, front braced, under 28”-4”. 3.Features: a.Structural steel tubing: Steel, mechanical, round tubing conforming to ASTM A500. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 3 b. Clamps: 1) Beam clamps: Split-A type with [7 square inches] [4516 square mm] minimum beam flange contact area and secured with 2 all thread bolts at each attachment point. Clamps shall be designed to be capable of supporting a minimum of 20,000 Lbs. each. Superstructure shall be designed with a minimum of four attachment clamps to produce a combined minimum attachment point safety factor of 75 to 1. Superstructure tubes shall be reinforced with bridging and/or bracing when truss centers exceed 10'0" 2) Component attachment clamps: Full surface type fabricated from [1/4 inch] [6 mm] thick steel or saddle style utilizing serrated clamping surface and minimum 5/8” U-Bolt. 3) Goal brace: Type attaching behind goal mounting plate and directly to backstop main stem transferring load directly to structural frame. c. Extruded aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063 Temper T5. d. Aluminum castings: ASTM B85. e. Particleboard: Solid core, 55 pounds per cubic foot density industrial grade complying with ASTM A208, Type 1, Grade 1-M-3 factory finished with phenolic resin sheet thermally fused to front and back surfaces. f. Finish: Powder coat; white. g. Electric Winch: 1)Provide for each folding basketball backstop separate electric winch mechanism. 2) Type: Fully enclosed, direct drive, worm gear, electric winch designed to hold backstop at any position during raising and lowering; Model 503285 Motorized Winch as manufactured by Draper, Inc. 3) Motor: 3/4 HP, 11.5 AMP, capacitor type, 60 cycle, 115 volt, single phase with automatic thermal overload protection manufactured in compliance with NEMA specifications. 4) Hoist cable: [1/4 inch] [6 mm] diameter, 7 by 19, galvanized aircraft cable with [7,000 pounds] [3175 kg] ultimate breaking strength. 5) Roller: Spring-load providing tensioning pressure to ensure cable tracks evenly on grooved drum. 6) Limit switches: Rotary counting up and down type, pre-wired to motor as integral part of winch. h. Controls: 1)Controls: Provide key lock, 3 position, momentary contact wall control switch to lower, raise, and stop backstop. a) Provide two keys. b) Provide with stainless steel cover plate. i. Backboard: 1) Model 503136 - Rectangular, glass backboard for backstop. 2) Type: Rectangular, glass, official size backboard to be used with direct attachment goal; Model 503136 as manufactured by Draper, Inc. 3)Goal mounting assembly: Steel assembly secured to aluminum frame and equipped with steel sleeves through glass allowing rear structure to be Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 4 secured to front mounting plate. Provide with holes and studs to secure backboard and goal directly to goal brace. Front plate provided with holes for goal attachment. 4) Equip frame and goal mounting assembly with neoprene shock absorbing cushions. 5) Permanently etch official white border and target area on front side of glass. j.Goals: Model 503576 – Breakaway goal with standard no-tie net attachment. 1)Type: Breakaway goal with standard no-tie net attachment and designed to withstand shock loads from player slam dunking or hanging on rim; Model 503576 as manufactured by Draper, Inc. k.Height Adjuster: 503092— For manual 8'-10' (244 cm-305 cm) height adjustment of rectangular bank. 1) Type: Mechanism for manually adjusting height of rectangular backboard and goal. l. Safety Edge Padding: Model 5032XX Safe-Edge Padding. 1) Color: Gray. B . Roll-Up Gymnasium Divider 1. Basis of Design Product: Roll-Up Gym Divider as manufactured by Draper, Inc. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Type: Electrically operated, roll-up gymnasium divider including motor, belts, controls, clamps for attachment to building structure, threaded rod supports, and other components required for complete functional installation. b. Operation: Curtain rolled up and down by belts wound onto overhead rotating drive pipe operated by electrical motor. 3. Configuration: Rectangular shape with straight bottom and extending across room as indicated on Drawings. a. 62’ wide x 26’ high (nominal). b. 10’ of 18 oz vinyl with mesh above. c. 1/2" Threaded Rod with 4 Flange Nuts. d. 15/8" O Steel Pipe Top Batten. e. 4" O Steel Pipe Bottom Batten. f. Maximum dimension of stored divider: 2 feet from bottom of structural support to bottom of rolled curtain. g. Minimum required clearance between vertical curtain edges and adjacent fixed objects: 6 inches. h. Provide 36 inches space between curtain ends and walls or fixed objects to allow passage space around divider. 4. Operating mechanism: Drive pipe winch powered with 3/4 HP, 110VAC, 60-cycle, single-phase, reversible capacitor, C-Face motor with thermal overload protection. Winch assembly shall carry a five-year warranty. Provide with load holding worm gear reduction and integral limit switches to control curtain travel. Drive pipe shall rotate in pipe support assemblies spaced at approximately 9 feet. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 5 5. Attachment: Attach to structural support with beam clamps, hanger brackets, and 1/2 inch diameter threaded rods. Attachment clamps designed to be capable of supporting a minimum of 5,000 lbs. each and provided in sufficient number to provide a combined minimum 45:1 attachment point safety factor. 6. Hoist belts: 5 inches wide white polyester webbing attached to drive pipe, passing under bottom batten, and terminating at top batten. Space belts at approximately 15 feet. 7. Bottom roller: 4 inches diameter steel pipe with aluminum strip for attachment of curtain. C . Fold-Up Gymnasium Divider 1. Basis of Design Product: Fold-Up Gym Divider as manufactured by Draper, Inc. Comparable and substituted products will be judged based on the following performance criteria, features, warranty, and qualifications. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Type: Electrically operated, roll-up gymnasium divider including motor, belts, controls, clamps for attachment to building structure, threaded rod supports, and other components required for complete functional installation. b. Operation: Curtain rolled up and down by belts wound onto overhead rotating drive pipe operated by electrical motor. 3. Configuration: Rectangular shape with straight bottom and extending across room as indicated on Drawings. a. Curtain mounted between trusses. b. 62’ wide x 26’ high (nominal). c. 10’ of 18oz vinyl with mesh above. d. Grommets: 18” o.c., minimum. e. 1/2"-13 Threaded Rod with 4 Flange Nuts. f. 15/8" O Steel Pipe Bottom Batten. g. 1/8" O Steel Aircraft Cable. 4. Operating mechanism: Drive pipe winch powered with 3/4 HP, 110VAC, 60-cycle, single-phase, reversible capacitor, C-Face motor with thermal overload protection. Winch assembly shall carry a five-year warranty. Provide with load holding worm gear reduction and integral limit switches to control curtain travel. Drive pipe shall rotate in pipe support assemblies spaced at approximately 9 feet. 5. Attachment: Attach to structural support with beam clamps, hanger brackets, and 1/2 inch diameter threaded rods. Attachment clamps designed to be capable of supporting a minimum of 5,000 lbs. each and provided in sufficient number to provide a combined minimum 45:1 attachment point safety factor. 6. Hoist belts: 5 inches wide white polyester webbing attached to drive pipe, passing under bottom batten, and terminating at top batten. Space belts at approximately 15 feet. D . Curtain 1. Full height curtain a. Bottom 8 feet. b. Opaque solid vinyl coated polyester fabric. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 6 c. Weight: 18 ounces per SY. d. Resistant to rot, mildew, and ultraviolet light. e. Flammability: Rated self-extinguishing in accordance with California State Fire Marshall Title 19. E . Seams 1. Seams: Horizontal and electronically welded with 1 inch full contact weld. 2. Top Edge: Solid fabric in triple thickness and double welded to curtain fabric to form 6 inches wide pocket for top pipe batten. 3. Bottom edge cut square for attachment to roller pipe with aluminum stop strip. F . Curtain Safety Device: 1. Provide Draper Model 504321 Curtain Lock safety device. Curtain Lok to be directly speed sensitive to automatically lock divider curtain in position at any time during storage or operation. In the event of an over-speed situation greater than 1.5 feet per second caused by malfunction of the hoisting apparatus, whether sudden or gradual, device will immediately activate. G . Controls 1. Provide key lock, 3-position, momentary contact wall control switch to lower, raise, and stop gymnasium divider. Provide with switch box and plastic cover plate. 2. Provide EZ-Pad Plus Group Controller capable of controlling Electric Divider Curtains, Electric Height Adjusters, Basketball Backstops with Electric Winches, Wrestling Mat Lifters and other Auxiliary Devices from a centralized location. Group Control Systems is fully field programmable and supports individual device operation as well as operation of items of part of one or more group of up to 8 devices. 3. Devices are controlled via 120V relay/controller panels that may be mounted at remote location(s.) Each relay panel includes 18 relays configured in eight directional control pairs and two on-off individual relays. As many as (16) Relay Boxes may be networked to allow up to (128) directional gym equipment devices and up to (32) on-off auxiliary items to be operated. Relay Boxes shall distribute power to the appropriate devices as a result of commands entered at the Touch Pad. Relay Boxes shall be dual powered and sized to accept two 120 volt, 30 amp, single-phase circuits. 4. User interacts via low voltage, momentary contact, Touch Pad (12V) to communicate with the Relay/Controller enclosure. Touch pad should be mounted at such a position in the gymnasium as to allow a clear line of sight to all the equipment under the control of the system. Touch Pad shall be flush mounted and fit into a standard 8-5/8" x 4-1/2" x 2-1/2” electrical box (RACO Box #942 or equivalent). Touch Pads to have password protection to prevent usage by unauthorized personnel. Password protection is programmable and is multi-level with a 6-digit user’s security code as well as a separate 6-digit supervisor’s code. User code allows for operation of individual devices and pre- defined groups. Supervisor’s code allows same functions as user’s code plus the ability to change passwords, define groups and change reset time period. Touch Pad also has a hard coded manufacturer’s backdoor password which can be provided by manufacturer in case passwords are compromised or forgotten. Touch Pad automatically reverts back to secure mode if inactive for more than the user defined reset time period. Multiple Touch pads (up to 16) can be used on one any system. 5. Groups shall be definable by user with supervisor password. Groups are stored in each Touch Pad and each touch cad can support up to 10 groups with a maximum of eight devices per group. A maximum of four devices per relay/controller box can be included Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 7 in a single group. Touch Pad includes logic to prevent the creation of groups that create a circuit overload. 6. Complete control system to include a combination of Model 503058 Relay/Controller Panels and Model 503057 Touch Pads. 7. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL: All conduits, wires (including low voltage), touch pad mounting box and programming. 8. Provide Smart Gym Group Controller capable of controlling Electric Divider Curtains, Electric Height Adjusters, Basketball Backstops with Electric Winches, Wrestling Mat Lifters and other Auxiliary Devices from a centralized location. Group Control Systems to have 120V control processor that is fully programmable to operate gymnasium equipment and auxiliary devices provided by others. Group Control System must be capable of operating up to 1000 devices and can be programmed to operate single devices or groups of up to four devices simultaneously. 9. Devices are controlled via 120V relay panels that may be mounted at remote location(s.) Each relay panel includes 8 relays. Devices that operate in an up/down or in/out cycle require two relays; devices that operate in an on/off cycle require one relay. Communications between processor and the relay panel(s) is 24V. 10. User interacts via a 24V flush mounted graphical color touch screen to be custom programmed to match the project conditions. Touch screen to require entry of four-digit security code prior to accessing control screens. Security code is to be fully programmable by the user. Touch screen should be mounted in full view of equipment being operated and a minimum of one touch screen should be each room with equipment being operated. 11. Complete control system to include one pre-programmed Model 503024 control processor and power supply in 18" x 18" x 6" surface mounted enclosure, the required number of Model 503027 relay panels in surface mounted 15" x 8" x 2" surface mounted enclosure and the requested number of [Model 503025 Grayscale or Model 503026 color] graphical touch screen to be mounted in 4 ½" x 4 ½" x 2 ½" electrical box. 12. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL: All conduits complete with wire from power source to control processor, from control processor to relay panels, from relay panels to devices and from control processor to touch screen and one 4 ½" x 4 ½" x 2 ½" electrical box for mounting touch screen. 2.4 BLEACHERS A . Basis of Design: Low Rise Aluminum Angle Frame Tip-N-Roll by BuiltRiteBleachers. 1. Performance Criteria: a. Live Loads: Uniform loading - Structure = 100 psf 1) Uniform loading - Seat and Foot plank = 120 plf b. Sway Loads: Perpendicular to seats = 10 plf 1) Parallel to seats = 24 plf c. Guardrail Loads: Uniform vertical load = 100 plf 1) Uniform horizontal load = 50 plf 2) Concentrated horizontal load = 200 pounds d. *Wind Loads: Basic design wind speed = 150 mph (exposure “B”) e. Bleacher must be anchored to meet wind loads above Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 8 2. Framework: a. Aluminum: Structural fabrication with aluminum alloy 6061-T6 mill finish. Each frame shall be unit-welded, using metal inert gas method, under guidelines by the American Welding Society. b. After fabrication all steel is hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A-1 23 specifications. c. All cross bracing and horizontal bracing shall be aluminum angle 6061-T6 mill finish. 3. Extruded Aluminum: a. Seat planks: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear anodized 204R1, AA-M 1 0C22A31, Class II with a wall thickness nominally .078' for impact and deformation resistance. b. Tread and Riser Planks: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6, mill finish. With a wall thickness nominally .078” for impact and deformation resistance. 4. Accessories: a. Channel End Caps: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear anodized 204R1 ,AA-M 1 0C22A31 ,Class II. b. Hardware: Bolts and Nuts shall be hot dipped galvanized. c. Hold Down Clip Assembly: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6 mill finish. d. Joint Sleeve Assembly: Aluminum alloy 6061-T6, mill finish. 2.5 BALLET BARS A . Wall Mounted Adjustable Ballet Bars: B . 1. Basis of Design: Dance Equipment International; www.danceequipmentintl.com. 1. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C . Features: 1. Single bar. 2. Weight: 2.5 lbs. 3. Spacing for brackets: 4. Single Barre: 5. Height: bottom of channel at 29" AFF per manufacturer's recommendation 6. Mounting Bracket: a. 2 brackets spaced 80" apart. 7. Wood Species: Maple. 8. Finish: Chrome 9. Flush with face of mirror. 10. Length: as indicated on drawings. 11. Distance from wall to bar: as indicated on drawings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 9 2.6 SAFETY PADDING A . Backboard Safety Pads: Designed for backboard thickness and extending continuously along bottom and up sides of backboard and over backstop according to manufacturer's standard design. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Draper, Inc.: A0142. b. Performance Sports Systems: PMCE Pro Mold. c. Porter Athletic Equipment: 00326-500 Pro-Pad. d. Substitutions for products by manufacturers other than those listed above: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Attachment: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required to comply with IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants and IEQ 4.2: For Paints and Coatings in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. B . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B .Coordinate electrical requirements for electrically operated winch to ensure proper power source, conduit, wiring, and boxes for keyed switches. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . All adhesives, sealants, paints, and coating applied on site must comply with the VOC limits and Submittal requirements for IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, IEQ 4.2: For Paints and Coatings, and IEQ 4.3: For Flooring and Systems (wall base) as specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. B . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 66 23 October 20, 2021 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 66 23 - 10 3.5 CLEANING A . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 70 00 October 20, 2021 HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 70 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Medical and Dental equipment schedule. 2. Installation requirements for Contractor installed equipment items. B . Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C . Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installers: Contractor shall coordinate with manufacturers or suppliers for installation of FOIC equipment. B . Installations shall conform to requirements of the International Building Code, current edition. Furnish all seismic calculations and details as required by the Code Authorities or the Architect to verify compliance with seismic requirements. Calculations and details shall be stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Washington. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A . Owner Furnished Medical Equipment Schedule: 1. Digital Scale 2. Afinion machine 3. AudioScope 4. Hemoglobin Test Kit 5. Autoclave 6. Patient chair 7. Centrifuge 8. Integrated wall diagnostic system 9. Electrocardiograph machine with cart 10. Exam light 11. Exam stool 12. Exam table 13. Glove box holder Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 70 00 October 20, 2021 HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 70 00 - 2 14. Defibrillator 15. Glucose Analyzer 16. Instrument stand and tray 17. Leadcare machine 18. Microscope 19. Nebulizer/ Compressor 20. Sharps collector wall cabinet 21. Vital sign monitor 22. Trash cans 23. Sundry jars 24. Cryosurgical instrument ultrafreeze 25. Urysis analyzer 26. Utility cart 27. Wheelchair B . Owner Furnished Dental Equipment Schedule: 1. Dental Exam Chair 2. Overhead Light (Contractor to provide structural support from ceiling structure and power connection required) 3. Autoclave 4. Statum 5. Hydrim (power and water connection required) 6. Compressor (Outside air and power connection required) 7. Panorex (Backing in wall to structure required) 8. Vacuum (Outside and air and power connection required) 9. Amalgam Separator 10. Digital Imaging 11. Ultrasonic Cleaner 12. 12’ o’clock Dental Casework (power and plumbing connections required) 13. Central Dental Casework (power and plumbing connections required) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B . Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 11 70 00 October 20, 2021 HEALTHCARE EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 11 70 00 - 3 3.2 INSTALLATION A . Provide all blocking and supports necessary for the installation of the medical and dental equipment. Sequence and coordinate adjacent construction as necessary to accommodate installation of blocking and supports. B . Install medical and dental equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation requirements C . Coordinate final connections for all mechanical, plumbing, electrical and low voltage connections with equipment supplier. Connections to be performed by certified personnel. D . Provide all final cleaning, testing and certification of all compressed air and vacuum lines. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 12 20 00 October 20, 2021 WINDOW TREATMENTS POSTAL SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 12 20 00 - 1 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Manually operated Roller Shades 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Subject under provisions of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets shall be submitted for each product specified, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations 2. Finishes, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components 3. Construction and installation instructions 4. Manufacturers recommendations for maintenance and cleaning C. Drawings and Diagrams: Product details, installation details, working and assembly drawings shall be supplied as requested. D. Sample: one sample shade of each type specified in this contract for approval. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier: Manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty. B. Installer: Installer or agent shall be qualified to install specified products by prior experience, demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, or licensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation. C. Uniformity: Provide Manual Roller Shades of only one manufacturer for entire project. D. Mock up: Provide (1) mock-up shade for each roller shade type/assembly specified. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer’s original packaging. B. Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating mechanisms. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 12 20 00 October 20, 2021 WINDOW TREATMENTS POSTAL SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 12 20 00 - 2 B. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60° F. and 90° F. during and after installation; relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Lifetime Limited Warranty. Fabrics warranted for 5 years. Specific product warranties available from manufacturer or its authorized agent. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER A. Hunter Douglas Contract/ 12250 Parkway Centre Dr. / Poway, CA 92064/ Phone: 800- 727-8953 Fax: 800-205-9819/ Website: www.hunterdouglascontract.com, B. Substitutions permitted. 2.02 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES A. PRODUCT: Hunter Douglas Contract “RB 500 Manual Roller Shades” B. MATERIALS: 1. FABRICS: Inherently anti-static, flame retardant, fade and stain resistant, light filtering, room darkening, & blackout fabrics providing 0% - 14% openness factors. Fabric weights to range between 6.00 oz/sq.yd. – 20.70 oz/sq.yd., containing fiberglass, PVC, polyester, acrylic, vinyl laminates, cotton, & vinyl coatings. Finish selected by architect from manufacturer’s available contract colors. 2. CONTROL SYSTEMS: A. CLUTCH OPERATED: Engineered heavy duty chain drive pulley operating system consisting of metal clutch housing and locking plug containing minimum 6 ribs and inserted at minimum of 2-1/4” into roller tube. Lift torque enhancement provided by Counter Balance System with integrated spring support module. Utilization of adjustment-free continuous qualified T304 stainless steel ball chain with 110 lbs breaking strength for precise control, smooth operation and ensuring a uniform look. Chain tensioner to be compliant with WCMA safety standard A100.1-2010 and must prevent the clutch system from moving the roller shade through lowering and raising if not properly installed as specified in ANSI Standard Section 6.5.2. Components will be maintenance free from adjustments or lubrication for trouble-free operation. B. CRANK OPERATED: Gear box assembly made from die cast aluminum and steel construction with steel crank insert. Permanent (or detachable) steel handle with flexible universal joints for easy turning force. 3. ROLLER TUBE: Circular-shaped aluminum tube extruded from alloy and temper 6063 T-6. 2”outside diameter extruded tube to have a .063” wall thickness (2.5” outside diameter to have a .079” wall thickness). Heavily reinforced with minimum six internal ribs providing additional tensile strength and allows for secure placement of clutch & end plug. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 12 20 00 October 20, 2021 WINDOW TREATMENTS POSTAL SPECIALTIES Project #16-0996 12 20 00 - 3 4. HEAVY DUTY TUBE BEARING PLUG: Die cast metal and reinforced idler assembly containing spring loaded end plug with positive locking wheel allows for up to 7/8” adjustment and provides for a secure installation and removal of shade. Locking tube bearing plug contains minimum 6 ribs and inserted a minimum of 2-3/8” into roller tube. 5. BOTTOM BAR: Extruded aluminum weight in a Sealed Pocket Hem Bar, or RB Bottom Bar for fabrics that are not seamable. Bottom bar is for tracking adjustments and provides uniform look. 6. MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer’s standard heavy duty bracket constructed of hardened 1/8” thick steel to support full weight of shade with bracket & screw hole covers to provide uniform look. Integrated leveling device for enhanced level adjustment of overall shade. Locking mechanism on bracket adapter provides for a secure installation and removal of the shade. 7. FASCIA: L shape removable aluminum extrusion valance that attaches to brackets and conceals roller shade. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shade measurements shall be accurate to within + 1/8” or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICS A. FABRIC selection from the following: 1. 3% Openness in Common Areas 2. Color: From manufacturers standard options 3. See “Finish Legend” in Interior Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. SUBCONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surfaces, installation conditions and field measurement for this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. INSTALLATION shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications, standards and procedures as detailed on contract drawings. B. ADEQUATE CLEARANCE shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and hardware. C. CLEAN finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 12 36 00 October 20, 2021 COUNTERTOPS Project #16-0996 12 36 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A . Countertops for cabinetwork. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A . 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: for additional requirements of preinstallation meeting. B . 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures: for additional procedures required for LEED certification. C . 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: for additional requirements related to Quality Requirements. D . 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E . 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: For casework supporting countertops. F . 10 28 00 - Toilet Accessories: For counter mounted accessories. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A . Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Qualification Data: For design engineer and fabricator. B . Delegated-Design Submittal: For assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C . Product Data: Provide product criteria, characteristics, accessories, jointing and seaming methods, and termination conditions. D . Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation. E . Sample: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1. For sealant and accessories submit manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns for selection. F . Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. G . LEED Submittals: For components of this section submit the following in compliance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 12 36 00 October 20, 2021 COUNTERTOPS Project #16-0996 12 36 00 - 2 H . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special preparation of substrate, installation and attachment methods, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. I . Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. J . Maintenance Data: For user's operation and maintenance of system including: 1. Methods for maintaining system's materials and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to components, finishes, and performance. 3. Recommendations on maintenance schedule. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1% for each product. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Designer Qualifications: Professional structural engineer with 5 years of documented experience in design of this work and licensed in the location of the project. B . Fabricators Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . As required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products to meet the Performance and Design Criteria. B . As required by SMACNA Guideline Chapter 3 and Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A . Wall hung and casework supported countertops fabricated from solid surface quartz and plastic laminate. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A . Quality Standard: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) Architectural Woodwork Standards. B . Product Contents: Provide products that do not contain any components listed in 01 61 19 - Chemicals of Concern Restrictions. C . Provide materials that meet guidelines in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 12 36 00 October 20, 2021 COUNTERTOPS Project #16-0996 12 36 00 - 3 2.3 MATERIALS A . Refer to Interior Design Drawings and Finish Legend for manufacturer, product, size, locations and finish. 1. Substitution for products by manufacturers other than those listed: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B . Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate. 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch (HGS, 1.2 mm) nominal thickness. b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Features: a. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction, square top; minimum 4 inches high. b. Exposed Edge Treatment: 1) Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; covered with matching laminate. 4. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface. C . (SS) Natural Quartz Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz. 1. Performance Criteria: a. Natural Quartz Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA-2 and NEMA LD 3; orthophthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. b. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes indicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual. c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. d. NSF approved for food contact. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A . All accessory materials required by the manufacturer for a warrantable installation of the installed products in a manner that meets the Performance and Design Criteria. B . Particleboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf (20 kg/cu m) minimum density; minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; join lengths using metal splines. 1. Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. C . Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 12 36 00 October 20, 2021 COUNTERTOPS Project #16-0996 12 36 00 - 4 D . Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E . All accessory materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 2.5 FABRICATION A . Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B . Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and secure finish surfaces with contact surfaces with a waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C . Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. D . Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to match. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify existing conditions meet the manufacturer's requirements before starting work. B . Verify products have been stored, and will be installed, in accordance with project's Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in Section 01 57 21 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Prepare surfaces to receive work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . General: Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions based on conditions present. B . Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. C . Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 1. Where indicated use rubber cove molding. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 12 36 00 October 20, 2021 COUNTERTOPS Project #16-0996 12 36 00 - 5 2. Where applied cove molding is not indicated use specified sealant. D . Joints between adjacent pieces of surfacing. 1. Securely join with manufacturer's approved adhesive. 2. Fill joints level with surfacing. 3. Clamp or brace surfacing in position until adhesive sets. 4. Joints shall be flush, tight fitting, level, and neat. E . All miscellaneous installation materials required to comply with EQ credit: Low Emitting Materials, Option 1 in accordance with Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.4 TOLERANCES A . Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum. B . Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum. C . Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum. 3.5 CLEANING A . Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. B . Dispose of all waste material in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal and project's Waste Management Plan. 3.6 PROTECTION A . Protect installed work as required by the manufacturer to maintain product performance, design criteria, and warranty. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 1 SECTION 21 00 00 – FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and Division 1 - General Requirements for all work. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Design Intent: 1. System to provide coverage for entire building. 2. Provide hydraulically designed system to NFPA 13 occupancy requirements. 3. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. 4. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm systems. 5. Piping from the site connection to the flange at the base of the sprinkler riser is specifically included in Division 210000. B. This is a design/build specification. Provide all required design, permits, labor, materials and installation of fire protection work, complete and operable in accordance with these specifications and drawings. Work of Division 21 includes, but is not limited to, that as delineated in conceptual information shown on the drawings and the following specification sections: 21 00 00 Fire Suppression General Conditions 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 16 Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to following code and agency requirements having jurisdictional authority over fire protection installation. 1. International Building Code (IBC) with local amendments. 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. 3. Requirements of OSHA. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes and Standards. 5. ASTM, ASME, ANSI and NEMA standards, as referenced in subsequent sections. 6. Local Water District Requirements. 7. Local Health Department Requirements. 8. LEED Silver level requirements. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 - Submittal Procedures. B. Field Test Reports: Include results of hydrostatic and flow tests with hydraulic calculations. C. Design Data: Submit design calculations signed and sealed by NICET Level III Certified Designer. D. Provide one electronic copy of product data submittals for all products listed under “Part 2 Products” of Division 21 and all additional products noted on drawings or required for completion of project. E. Submittals shall be complete in one PDF file with bookmarks for each Division. Multi- part submittals will be returned without review. 1. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. 2. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item. 3. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing in index. F. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation (Tag) and/or specification section, as applicable. Indicate model and all accessories intended for use. G. Equipment vendor cover page with contact information shall precede submittal by that vendor. H. Submitted product information shall include (as applicable) but not be limited to the following information: 1. Product description 2. Manufacturer and model 3. Dimensions 4. Performance Ratings (i.e. capacity, rpm, HP, temperature) 5. Construction Materials 6. Ratings (i.e. UL, FM, NEMA, etc) 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare Shop Drawings stamped and signed by a NICET Class III Certified designer. Develop in accordance with NFPA 13 and the State and Local Fire Marshals. Submit PDF copies of these drawings for approval prior to beginning work. B. Submit shop drawings to Architect, Local Fire Marshal, and all other approving authorities. Drawings shall be approved by all agencies prior to fabrication or installation. Drawings submitted for Architect's approval shall have been stamped approved by the Fire Department. C. The Contractor shall draw the design team’s attention to any areas in which they contemplate deviations from the conceptual information shown on the contract documents (e.g., due to site conditions). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 3 D. These drawings and diagrams shall show all pipe sizes as well as the manufacturer’s name and catalog number of each piece of equipment used. E. The Architect’s review of such drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the Contract drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors or omission in such drawings. F. Fire Sprinkler shop drawings shall indicate all relevant pipe, ceiling, and structural elevations and clearances. All elbows, offsets, and turns shall be clearly identified. All required access doors shall be shown. By submission of sheet fire sprinkler shop drawings, the Contractor acknowledges that coordination has been done to ensure that all ductwork and piping fits and no conflicts exist. G. Indicate layout of piping and sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling type, lighting, structural and mechanical. Conform to symmetrical spacing of heads and integrate into locations of lights and other ceiling devices. Center heads on ceiling tiles (+/- 1") and align in straight rows. H. Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Include building sections and a plot plan showing location of underground supply connections, outside control valves, fire department connections and other equipment to be used. I. Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation layout, mounting and support details, and piping connections. J. Indicate layout of flexible connectors, expansion joints, expansion compensators, loops, offsets and swing joints. K. Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each. L. Indicate layout of finished ceiling areas indicating sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. M. Indicate system controls. N. Submit shop drawings for the following required fire protection system(s) through DPD for plan approval prior to installation: 1. Automatic Sprinkler – Plans shall include water supply information from a recent (within five years) flow test in close proximity to the project site and in the same pressure zone and on the main to be tapped for sprinkler protection. 2. Fire alarm. 3. Class I Standpipe 1.6 FIRE SPRINKLER PERMIT A. Fire Sprinkler contractor shall prepare all documents for permit application, submit and obtain the permit from reviewing authority. All costs and fees to obtain the permit shall be paid by the Fire Sprinkler Contractor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 4 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and Local and/ or State Fire Marshal. B. Perform work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. C. CPVC fire sprinkler piping located in plenums: Peak optical density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet when tested in accordance with UL 1887. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of continuous representation, a stocking distributor and service representative in the State of Washington. B. Contractor: Licensed and regularly engaged in the specialized design and installation of automatic sprinkler equipment as listed by UL or other nationally recognized testing laboratories. Minimum three years’ experience and have installed at least five systems of comparable size. C. Bids by wholesalers, suppliers or any firm whose principal business is no t that of manufacturing and/or installing fire protection systems are not acceptable. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place. B. Furnish cast iron and steel valves with temporary protective coat ing with end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Where the word ‘verify’ is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the existing conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified conditions without additional cost to the Owner. B. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. C. Visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work. D. Verify locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near site. Determine such locations in conjunction with all public and private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 5 E. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate all possible site conditions. The contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions and connections on site and coordinate between trades to preclude interferences. The contractor shall provide adjustments to piping as necessary to fit conditions including but is not limited to relocation, offsets, and transitions. F. In the event of a conflict with other trades of work, the following priority from highest to lowest shall be followed: Structural, lighting, HVAC, plumbing/piping and sprinklers. Starting with the lowest priority, the HVAC, plumbing, and sprinkler contractors shall provide whatever materials, offsets, labor etc. is required to resolve the conflict. G. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Arch itect will determine which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no additional cost. H. Prior to ordering equipment cross-check mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications to assure proper location and electrical characteristics of connections serving mechanical and electrical equipment. I. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit equipment furnished. Costs for modifications due to equipment substitution will be borne by the contractor. J. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents the greater quantity, the better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in writing. K. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, bu t the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Owner will be considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any device of fixture roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied centerlines or as required by good practice must be repositioned at no cost to the Owner. 1.11 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other trades where necessary for installation of mechanical work. Perform work only with craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of rough-frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for ducts and piping. C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without breaking out around holes. 1.12 SALVAGE A. Remove excess piping and plug or cap any unused branch connections. Remove scrap pipe and all other excess materials from the site. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 6 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13. B. Furnish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. C. Furnish metal storage cabinet adjacent to alarm valve. Lettered "Automatic Sprinklers - Reserve Supplies." 1.14 FINAL APPROVAL A. Completion and approval of the following is required for final approval of systems. 1. Execution of Architect's and Engineer’s final observation reports 2. Operation and maintenance instruction 3. Operation and maintenance manuals submitted 4. Equipment cleaning 5. Record drawings submitted B. See Division 01. 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. General: In addition to requirements of Division 01, following initial operation of mechanical systems and prior to acceptance by the Architect, perform the following services. B. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period, give written notification of readiness to proceed to the Architect and Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates. C. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out requirements for operating, servicing and maintaining equipment and systems. Describe general system operation and specific equipment functions. Cover all equipment calibration, setpoint adjustment, safeties and alarms. D. During demonstrations and instructions include and reference i nformation from maintenance manuals and contract drawings. E. Minimum duration of instruction period is 1 hour. 1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Contents: Furnish, in accord with Division 1, one PDF and one bound copy of operating and maintenance manuals to include the following. 1. Manufacturers, suppliers, contractor names, addresses and phone numbers. 2. Warranty service contractors' names, address and phone numbers (if different from above). 3. Schedule and description of routine maintenance for each component to include oiling, lubrication and greasing data. 4. Test data log. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 7 5. Manufacturer's cuts and rating tables, including brochures for all submittal items. 6. Part numbers of all replaceable items. 7. Control diagrams and operation sequence. 8. Written guarantees. 9. Record drawings corrected and completed. 10. Completed equipment start-up forms and checklists. B. Binders: 1. Furnish typewritten or printed index and tabbed dividers between principal categories. 2. Bind each manual in a hard-backed loose-leaf binder. C. Imprint on cover: 1. Name of project. 2. Owner. 3. Location of project. 4. Architect. 5. Contractor. 6. Year of completion. D. Imprint on backing: 1. Name of project. 2. Year of completion. E. Submittals: 1. Preliminary Copies: Prior to scheduled completion of the project, submit one PDF copy for review by the Architect. 2. Final Copies: After approval of the preliminary copies, submit one PDF and one bound finished copy to the Owner. 1.17 EQUIPMENT AND PIPE CLEANING A. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment. Equipment shall be free of dirt, construction debris, corrosion, etc. B. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to eliminate dirt, debris or other material from entering and collecting inside of pipe. Any collection of material shall be thoroughly cleaned before equipment startup and if necessary before owner occupancy. C. Clean exterior of all exposed pipe. D. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. See Division 1. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 8 B. Submit one DVD or CD with all drawings in PDF format. C. Show location of equipment and size of piping. Where appropriate provide tag or label identification for all valves and similar equipment. Indicate locations and elevations of exterior pipe and utility connections. Maintain continuously updated drawings during progress of project. 1.19 TESTING A. Provide completed start-up forms and checklists. 1.20 WARRANTIES AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Furnish one year warranty from date of substantial completion for all systems unless specifically noted otherwise. B. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and in perfect operating order at time of delivery to Owner. C. Without cost to Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from date of final acceptance, except when in the opinion of the Architect such condition is due to neglect or carelessness of the Owner. D. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment he has furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees which exceed one year. E. Make all necessary adjustments during first year of operation. F. The presence of any inspector or observer during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work . PART 2 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DOCUMENTATION A. Additional plan submittals to Local Fire Marshal: If additional drawing submittals are required at any time during construction contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, review with Fire Marshal, and pick up subsequent approved drawings. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work. B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, Contractor shall at his own expense uncover work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work disturbed by him to its original condition. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 00 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 21 00 00 - 9 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Verify devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 1 SECTION 21 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 EXPANSION AND SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and contraction of piping. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion joints provide and adequately protect system. B. Expansion Compensation Design Criteria: 1. Installation Temperature: 50 degrees F. 2. Fire Protection System Temperature: 90 degrees F. 3. Safety Factor: 30 percent. C. Seismic performance: Provide seismic restraint in compliance with local jurisdiction and IBC 1613 requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Through penetration firestopping of fire rated assemblies: ASTM E814 with 0.10” w.g. minimum positive pressure differential. Minimum 1-hour protection. B. Installed products shall have surface Burning Characteristics: 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Perform work in accordance with local jurisdiction’s requirements and AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. D. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BURIED PIPING A. Note that piping from the combination meter to the RPBP must be in piping suitable for domestic water (i.e., stainless steel). B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Grade B, ASTM A135, ASTM A795 Schedule 40 black. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; with half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1 flanges and flanged fittings. 3. Joints: AWS D1.1, welded. 4. Protection: ASME C105 polyethylene jacket with heat shrink sleeves or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape to 6" above grade. C. Copper Tubing: Type K annealed. ASTM B75, ASTM B88, ASTM B251. 1. Fittings: Cast copper alloy ASME B16.18; wrought copper and bronze, ASME B16.22. Pressure type solder joint. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 2 2. Joints: Silver braze, AWS A5.8 Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4; Solder, ASTM B32 Grade 95TA. 3. Protection: ASME C105 polyethylene jacket with heat shrink sleeves or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape to 6" above grade. 2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Note that piping from the combination meter to the RPBP must be in piping suitable for domestic water (i.e., stainless steel). B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Grade B, ASTM A135, ASTM A795 Schedule 40 black; Schedule 10 UL listed light wall; ASTM A-795 Type E, Grade A Eddy-Flow or Dyna-Flow UL listed thin wall flow pipe. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME 16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt weld; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1 flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Victaulic, Gruvlok or approved equal. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Grade B, ASTM A135, ASTM A795 Schedule 40 galvanized. Use only for dry-pipe sprinkler system and dry standpipes. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME 16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt weld; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1 flanges and flanged fittings; ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable galvanized housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Victaulic, Gruvlok or approved equal. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A135 Grade A, UL threadable thin wall, black. 1. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. 2. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3 threaded type. E. CPVC Pipe: Harvel “Blazemaster” or approved, 175 psi at 150 degrees F, UL and FM, ASTM F442, SDR 13.5. (concealed locations only). 1. Fittings: ASTM F438 schedule 40, or ASTM F439 schedule 80, CPVC. 2. Joints: ASTM F493, solvent weld. 2.3 VALVES A. Manufacturers: UL & FM approved by Nibco, Stockham, Milwaukee or approved equal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 3 B. Gate Valves: 1. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch, hand wheel, OS&Y, solid bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged or grooved ends. 2. Over 4 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge, flanged ends. C. Ball Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, threaded or sweat fitting ends. D. Butterfly Valves: 1. Bronze Body: Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built -in tamper proof switch where required. 2. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends. With extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device where required. E. Check Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends. 2. 2 to 4 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and seat, grooved or flanged ends. 3. 4 inches and over: Iron body, bronze disc with stainless steel spring, resilient seal, wafer, grooved or flanged ends. F. Drain Valves: 1. Compression Stop: Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap. 2. Ball Valve: Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. 2.4 BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY A. Double check valve, detector check or as jurisdiction requires. FDA approved epoxy coated cast iron check valve bodies with bronze seats. Furnish with bronze body ball valve test cocks. Suitable for supply pressures to 175 psi and water temperatures to 140 degrees. Tamper switches on gate valves for monitoring. Ames, Watts, Apollo, FEBCO, Wilkins or approved. 2.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 to 6 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, band hanger. Tolco Fig 200 or equal. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 4 E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G. Floor Support: Cast iron pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex, Mason or approved equal. 2.7 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: FlexHead or approved equal. B. Performance: 1. FM Approved for its intended use pursuant to FM 1637 Approval Standard for Flexible Sprinkler Hose with Threaded End Fittings. 2. UL Listed for its intended use pursuant to UL 2443 Standard for Flexible Sprinkler Hose with Fittings for Fire Protection Service. 3. Seismically qualified for use pursuant to ICC-ES AC-156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural Components and Systems. C. Flexible Hose Assemblies and End Fittings: 1. 100% Type 304 Stainless Steel. 2. Straight Hose Assembly or Elbow Hose Assembly. 3. ½ inch or ¾ inch outlet. 4. 175 psi / 300 psi maximum rated pressure. 5. Fully welded non-mechanical fittings, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1 inch true- bore internal corrugated hose diameter. D. Ceiling Bracket: 1. Type G90 Galvanized Steel. 2. Direct attachment type, having integrated snap-on clip ends positively attached to the ceiling using tamper-resistant screws. 3. Flexible Hose Attachment: Removable hub type with set screw. 2.8 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex, Mason or approved equal. 2.9 FIRESTOPPING-APPLIED A. Manufacturers: RectorSeal, Dow Corning, 3M Fire Protection or approved equal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 5 B. General: 1. Fire stopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by applicable building codes and tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 fire tests for through penetrations, and ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 for construction joints, and UL 2307 for perimeter edge joints. 2. Fire stopping material shall be free of asbestos, PCBs, ethylene glycol, and lead. 3. Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal. 4. Fire stopping shall be performed by a contractor trained or approved by firestop manufacturer. 5. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide firestop systems for all conditions from a single supplier. 2.10 FIRE STOPPING-CAST IN PLACE A. Manufacturers: Presealed Systems "Hydro Flame" or approved equal. B. Product Description: Factory assembled for use in concrete floors, outer sleeve lined with intumescent strip, radial extended flange, waterstop gasket/mid-body seal. C. General: UL listed system with 3 hour fire rating. Watertight, Class 1 with 3 feet head pressure for 72 hours. D. Installation: Provide device based upon pipe type, size and concrete thickness. Align with penetration layout and nail in place. Secure cap prior to pouring concrete. Deburr and clean debris from pipe prior to installation. Coat pipe end with compatible lubricant as necessary. 2.11 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex Metraseal, Thunderline Link -Seal or approved equal. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. 2.12 MECHANICAL FIRESTOPPING SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex Metraseal 120 or approved equal. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking intumescent synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. UL listed for 2 hour fire protection. 2.13 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Grinnell, EMCO Wheaton, OPW or approved equal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 6 B. Pipe Alignment Guides: Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch thick insulation, minimum 3 inch travel. C. Swivel Joints: Fabricated steel, bronze, ductile Iron or cast steel body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber or Buna-N o-ring seals. 2.14 ELECTRIC HEAT TRACE (Freeze Protection) A. Manufacturers: Raychem XL-Trace or approved equal. B. General: Provide a complete UL listed and FM approved system of heating cables, components and control for preventing pipes from freezing. C. Cable: Self-regulating cable with nickel-copper bus wires embedded in conductive polymer core with dielectric polyolefin jacket, braided tinned copper ground and outer jacket of polyolefin. Cable shall vary power output in response to temperature all along its length with a self-regulating factor of at least 90%. D. Components: Control enclosures shall be NEMA 4X rated. Connection system shall not require stripping of wires. E. Control: Thermostatic control with ambient sensor set at 40 F. F. Installation: 1. Apply "Electric Traced" labels to outside of insulated pipe. 2. Attached cable to metal pipe with glass cloth tape and plastic pipe with aluminum tape. 3. Adjust pipe insulation size to accommodate maintenance tape. 4. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. Provide alarm as an addressable point in the fire alarm system. Coordinate with fire alarm contractor. 2.15 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering shall conform to ASME A13.1. B. Fire service piping labels shall be red background with white lettering. Legend shall indicate service of pipe. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION - PIPING A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 7 B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges, unions or grooved couplings. 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING A. Blazemaster CPVC piping may only be installed where pipe is fully connected. All exposed piping must be steel. B. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems. C. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 14 for standpipe and hose systems. D. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 24 for service mains. E. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. F. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. H. Install pipe sleeve at piping penetrations through footings, partitions, walls, and floors. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation. I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. J. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. 2. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 6. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 7. Install copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 8. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. K. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. L. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. M. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 8 N. Where more than one piping system material is specified, install compatible system components and joints. Install flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. O. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red le ad and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after installation. Q. Install gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. R. Install drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. 3.3 INSTALLATION – HEAT TRACE A. Provide electric heat trace and insulation on wet piping subject to freezing. B. Heat trace failure is an alarm point in the building fire alarm system. Provide control point(s) and coordinate with the alarm system subcontractor. 3.4 INSTALLATION – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS A. Install Work in accordance with ASME B31.9. B. Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and contractio n of piping. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion joints provide and adequately protect system. C. Provide support and anchors for controlling expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required. D. Provide grooved piping systems with minimum one joint per inch pipe diameter instead of flexible connector supported by vibration isolation. Grooved piping systems need not be anchored. 3.5 INSTALLATION – SEISMIC CONTROLS A. Provide seismic restraints and hangers in compliance with NFPA 13. B. Seismic Bracing: Follow NFPA 13 and the following. 1. Bracing shall be bidder designed to resist seismic loading. 2. Provide seismic calculations as required for Ip = 1.5. 3.6 INSTALLATION – FIRESTOPPING AND SEALS AT PARTITIONS A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping and other items requiring firestopping. B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. Primers must comply with VOC limits per Green Seal standards GS-03 (1997), GS-11 (1993), or SCAQMD Rule #1113 (2004). C. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 9 D. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. E. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and/or roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. c. Pack void with backing material. d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. F. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition, floor, ceiling, and/or roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and b uilding element. 2. Install escutcheons where piping penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manu facturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations air tight. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.7 INSTALLATION - IDENTIFICATION A. Identification is not required on sprinkler branch lines and run-outs to heads. B. Identification is required on: 1. Bulk mains 2. Incoming fire service 3. FDC piping 4. Standpipe (not in stairwell) C. Identify service and flow direction (and pressure where more than one pressure is used). Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. Install a minimu m of one label for each story traversed by piping. D. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. E. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Project #16-0996 21 05 00 - 10 3.8 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Install hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 13 13 October 20, 2021 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 21 13 13 - 1 SECTION 21 13 13 – WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This section requires design and installation of wet pipe sprinkler systems for building fire protection. For areas subject to freezing, see Section 21 13 16 for design and installation of dry pipe sprinkler systems. B. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 13, FM and local municipality having jurisdiction. C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. Revise design when test data become available prior to submittals. D. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. E. Provide fire department connections. Note if location(s) are indicated on Drawings. F. Fire suppression system shall not contain ozone depleting substances such as halons, CFC’s and HCFC’s. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Tyco, Reliable, Viking or approved equal. B. Provide “quick response” heads in all light hazard occupancies. C. Suspended T-bar Ceiling Type: 1. Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching escutcheon plate. 2. Sprinkler and escutcheon plate finish: White enamel factory finish. 3. Fusible link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. GWB Ceiling Type: 1. Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching escutcheon plate. 2. Sprinkler and escutcheon plate finish: White enamel factory finish. 3. Fusible link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type. 2. Finish: Brass 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. F. Side wall Type: 1. Type: Semi-recessed horizontal side wall type. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 13 13 October 20, 2021 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 21 13 13 - 2 2. Sprinkler and escutcheon plate finish: White enamel factory finish. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. G. Guards: Finish matching sprinkler finish. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated or red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch. B. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts. 2.3 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Manufacturer: Potter-Roemer or approved equal. B. Wall Type: Cast brass flush mounted wall type with brass or chrome plated finish. C. Threaded Inlets: Two-way or Four-way 2-1/2" connections with fire department threads as required. Threaded cast brass plug and chain of matching material and finish. D. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside or connect to drain. E. Label: “Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection". 2.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Controls: Supervisory switches. Coordinate with fire alarm section of work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Furnish post indicator. C. Install pressure gauges on each side of sprinkler alarm valve. D. Install approved backflow assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. E. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. F. Locate outside alarm on building exterior wall. G. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. H. It shall be a specific requirement that insofar as possible, all sprinkler system mains and branches shall be installed as close as possible to the structural members, not the ceiling. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 13 13 October 20, 2021 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 21 13 13 - 3 I. Install main piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings or soffi ts; branch piping in joist space or other concealed space to sprinkler heads. J. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and install piping offsets. K. Install guards on sprinklers exposed to potential damage. All heads in the Gymnasium and Fitness areas must have heavy gauge wire guards. L. Provide drains at system low points. M. Hydrostatically test entire system. N. Testing must be witnessed by Authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 CLEANING A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. 3.3 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply masking tape or paper cover to protect concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons not receiving field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers with new. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 13 16 October 20, 2021 DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 21 13 16 - 1 SECTION 21 13 16 - DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. Revise design when test data become available prior to submittals. B. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. C. Provide fire department connections. Note if location(s) are indicated on Drawings. D. Fire suppression system shall not contain ozone depleting substances such as halons, CFC’s and HCFC’s. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 13, FM approval guide, state and local municipality having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Tyco, Reliable, Viking or approved equal. B. Suspended T-bar Ceiling Type: 1. Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching escutcheon plate. 2. Sprinkler and escutcheon plate finish: White enamel factory finish. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. GWB Ceiling Type: 1. Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching escutcheon plate. 2. Sprinkler and escutcheon plate finish: White enamel factory finish. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type. 2. Finish: Brass 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Side wall Type: 1. Type: Semi-recessed horizontal side wall type with matching escutcheon plate. 2. Sprinkler and escutcheon plate finish: White enamel factory finish. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 13 16 October 20, 2021 DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 21 13 16 - 2 F. Guards: Finish matching sprinkler finish. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, bronze main seat and mechanism to automatically actuate electric alarm with test and drain. Pressure gauges each side of valve. Viking or approved equal. B. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated \ red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch. C. Pressure Switch: Two contacts; rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. 2.3 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. See Section 21 13 13. 2.4 AIR COMPRESSOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett 2. Quincy 3. Ingersoll Rand 4. Jenny 5. Gast B. Compressor: Single unit, electric motor driven, motor, motor starter, safety valves, check valves, air maintenance device incorporating electric pressure switch and unloading valve. 2.5 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Controls: Supervisory switches, Water Level Supervisory Switches, Tank Temperature Supervisory Switches, Room Temperature Supervisory Switches. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount in control panel \ on equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install piping to minimize obstruction with other work. C. It shall be a specific requirement that insofar as possible, all sprinkler system mains and branches shall be installed as close as possible to the structural members, not the ceiling. D. Install main piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings or soffits; branch piping in joist space or other concealed space to sprinkler heads. E. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and install piping offsets. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 21 13 16 October 20, 2021 DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 21 13 16 - 3 F. Install guards on sprinklers exposed to potential damage. G. Install air compressor on vibration isolators. H. Provide drains at system low points. I. Hydrostatically test entire system. J. Test must be witnessed by Authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 CLEANING A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. 3.3 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply masking tape or paper cover to protect concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons not receiving field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers with new. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 1 SECTION 22 00 00 – PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and Division 01 - General Requirements for all work in Division 22. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials and appliances necessary for satisfactory installation of mechanical work ready to operate in strict accordance with these specifications and drawings. Work of Division 22 includes, but is not limited to, that as delineated in the following specification sections: 22 00 00 Plumbing General Conditions 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 22 11 00 Facility Water Distribution 22 11 16 PEX Domestic Water Piping 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage 22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage 22 23 00 Natural-Gas Systems 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 60 00 Medical Gas Equipment and Piping Systems 22 69 00 Medical Gas System Certification B. TEST AND BALANCE: Provided by 23 05 93. Provide all necessary coordination, assistance and documentation. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to following code and agency requirements having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installations. 1. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with local amendments. 2. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with local amendments. 3. International Building Code (IBC) with local amendments. 4. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) with local amendments. 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. 6. Requirements of OSHA and EPA. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes and Standards. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 2 8. ASME code for construction of pressure vessels. 9. American Gas Association (AGA) Standards. 10. ASTM, ANSI and NEMA standards, as referenced in subsequent sections. 11. Local Sewer District Requirements. 12. Local Water District Requirements. 13. Local Health Department Requirements. 14. Washington State Energy Code. 15. LEED Silver level requirements. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to Seattle Building Code with local amendments, FM and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment 0.5 hp or more, plus connected piping. C. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as follows: 1. 5 hp and less: 1 inch 2. Over 5 hp: 2 inch 1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Manufacturers and models of equipment and material indicated herein and on drawings are those upon which mechanical design is based. Other manufacturers with products considered equal in general quality may be listed without specific model designation. Manufacturers not listed must be submitted for approval. B. Substitutions will be evaluated based on product manufacturer only. Specific product model, specifications, options and accessories will be evaluated during submittals. Approval of a manufacturer substitution does not constitute approval of the submitted product. C. Any equipment other than the basis of design is considered a substitution. D. In selecting substitute equipment, the Contractor is responsible f or and must guarantee equal performance and fit. Cost of redesign and all additional costs incurred to accommodate the substituted equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Unless indicated otherwise, "or approved" may be assumed for all products in Division 22. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide one electronic copy of product data submittals for all products listed under “Part 2 Products” of Division 22 and all additional products noted on drawings or required for completion of sequence of operations. B. Submittals shall be complete in one PDF file with bookmarks for each Division. Multi-part submittals will be returned without review. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 3 1. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. 2. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item. 3. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing in index. C. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation (Tag) and/or specification section, as applicable. Indicate selected model and all accessories intended for use. D. Equipment vendor cover page with contact information shall precede submittal by that vendor. E. Submitted product information shall include (as applicable) but not be limited to the following information: 1. Product description 2. Manufacturer and model 3. Dimensions 4. Performance Ratings (i.e. capacity, rpm, HP, temperature) 5. Construction Materials 6. Ratings (i.e. UL, ASTM, NEMA, etc) 7. Electrical data 8. Sound level data (corresponding to scheduled values) 9. Vibration Isolation 10. Controls and wiring diagrams 11. Accessories 12. Engineering technical data (i.e. pressure drops, leakage rates, pump curves) F. If requested by Architect or Engineer, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions on any equipment, procedures, or certifications so requested. G. Do no ordering, fabrication or manufacturing of products until return of approved submittals. H. The Contractor is responsible for providing the Commissioning Authority with copies of the following information for inclusion in the Systems Manual. The Commissioning Authority will compile the final Systems Manual based on the contractor submitted documentation along with additional material provided by the Commissioning Authority. 1. As-built documents 2. Description of systems, including capabilities and l imitations 3. Operating procedures for all normal, abnormal, and emergency modes of operation. 4. Sequence of operation as actually implemented, with control system data including all set points, calibration data, etc. 5. Location of all control sensors and test ports. 6. Seasonal start-up and shutdown procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 4 7. Control schematics and computer graphics. 8. Complete terminal interface procedures and capabilities for DDC systems. 9. A list of recommended operational recordkeeping procedures including sample forms, trend logs, or others, and a rational for each. 10. Maintenance procedures. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit drawings and/or diagrams for review and for job coordination in all cases where deviation from the Contract Drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, interference or substitution of equipment, or when requested by the Engineer for purposes of clarification of the Contractor’s intent. Also submit detailed drawings, rough-in sheets, etc., for all special or custom-built items or equipment. Drawings and details under the section shall include (but not be limited to) the following, where applicable to this project: 1. Electrical interlock wiring diagrams. 2. Piping layout plans and interference details. 3. Custom sink layout. B. By submission of plumbing shop drawings, the Contractor acknowledges that coordination has been done to ensure that all piping fits and no conflicts exist. C. The Architect’s review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the Contract drawings or specifications, unless he has, in writing, called the attention of the Architect to such deviations at the time of the submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors or omission in such shop drawings. 1.8 COMMISSIONING A. See Division 01 for roles and responsibilities of commissioning. B. Provide all necessary commissioning assistance, equipment and documentation as required by the Commissioning Plan. C. The duty and responsibility for all Division 22 commissioning work shall be assigned t o a specific individual. Inform the General Contractor, Commissioning Professional (CCXP) of the contact information for the person so assigned. D. Perform corrective actions needed to resolve deficiencies identified during commissioning. Record action taken on commissioning deficiency log. 1.9 PLUMBING PERMIT A. Plumbing contractor shall receive plans for plumbing permit application from Sider + Byers, fill out all forms, submit for and obtain the permit. All costs and fees to obtain the permit shall be paid by the Plumbing Contractor. Permit drawings will be provided by Sider + Byers. The contractor will submit the signed drawings provided by the engineer. Sider + Byers will reply to any and all permit comments, and the drawings and any re lated information will be resubmitted by the contractor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 5 B. Contractor shall not commence work until permit is obtained. Contractor is solely responsible to insure that the permit application and any revisions are submitted in a timely manner so as not to impact project schedule. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 – Building Services Piping for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX – Welding and Brazing Qualifications for welding materials and procedures. B. Perform Work in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code including State and local amendments. C. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. D. Perform Work in accordance with Washington State / Seattle Energy Code. 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years’ experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum thr ee years’ experience. 1.12 SEQUENCING A. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion. 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect all equipment, materials, and insulation from weather, construction traffic, dirt, water, chemicals, and damage by storing in original packaging and under cover. Where original packaging is insufficient, provide additional protection. Maintain protection in place until installation. C. Inspect all products and materials for damage prior to installation. D. Protect piping from all entry of foreign materials by providing temporary end caps or closures on piping and fittings. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. E. Protect heat exchangers and tanks with temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. F. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 6 G. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. H. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.14 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply fire stopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of fire stopping materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. C. Do not install underground piping or valves when bedding is wet or frozen. D. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. E. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except rough in, taps, supports and test plugs. 1.15 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. B. Verify by field measurements, sizes and configurations are compatible with wall construction and layout. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. 1.16 COORDINATION A. Visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work. B. Verify locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near site. Determine such locations in conjunction with all public and private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. D. Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate all possible site conditions. The contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions and connections on site and coordinate between trades to preclude interferences. The contractor shall provide adjustments to piping as necessary to fit conditions including but is not limited to relocation, offsets, and transitions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 7 E. In the event of a conflict with other trades of work, the following priority from highest to lowest shall be followed: Structural, lighting, HVAC, plumbing/piping and sprinklers. Starting with the lowest priority, the HVAC, plumbing, and sprinkler contractors shall provide whatever materials, offsets, labor etc. is required to resolve the conflict. F. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect will determine which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no additional cost. G. Prior to ordering equipment cross-check plumbing and electrical drawings and specifications to assure proper location and electrical characteristics of connections serving mechanical and electrical equipment. H. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit equipment furnished. Costs for modifications due to equipment substitution will be borne by the contractor. I. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents the greater quantity, the better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in writing. J. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Owner will be considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any device or fixture roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied centerlines or as required by good practice must be repositioned at no cost to the Owner. K. Where the word ‘verify’ is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the existing conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified conditions without additional cost to the Owner. L. Coordinate trenching, excavating, bedding, backfilling of buried systems with requirements of this specification. M. Coordinate wall openings, piping rough-in locations, concrete housekeeping pads, and electrical rough-in locations to accommodate Work of this Section. 1.17 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other trades where necessary for installation of plumbing work. Perform work only with craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of rough-frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for piping. C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without breaking out around holes. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 8 1.18 SALVAGE A. Remove excess piping and plug or cap any unused branch connections. Remove scrap pipe and all other excess materials from the site. B. Comply with contractor’s Construction Waste Management Plan. 1.19 ELECTRICAL A. Motors: 1. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degree C environment with maximum 50 degree C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load. 2. Starting Capability: Not less than 12 starts per hour. 3. Phase Characteristics: Squirrel-cage induction poly-phase motors for 3/4 HP and larger, and capacitor-start single-phase motors for 1/2 HP and smaller. At equipment manufacturer's option, 1/6 HP and smaller may be split-phase type. 4. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. 5. Enclosure Type: Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Weather-protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II, where not housed. 6. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection. 7. Name Plate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. 8. All motor efficiencies shall conform to Washington State \ Seattle Energy Code and NEMA MG-1. B. Motor Starters: By plumbing equipment manufacturer where factory mounted controls are provided. Variable frequency drives by Division 22, all other starters provided by Electrical Contractor. C. Power Wiring: By Electrical Contractor. D. Control Wiring: Responsibility of Division 22, including all line and low voltage control wiring. Owner will not entertain additional cost due to lack of coordination between Plumbing Contractor and Electrical Contractor. 1.20 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Completion, submission and approval of the following is required for final project closeout. 1. Execution of Architect's and Engineer’s final observation reports (punchlist) 2. Operating and Maintenance Instructions 3. Operating and Maintenance Manual 4. Equipment and Pipe Cleaning 5. Record Drawings 6. Testing Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 9 7. Commissioning 8. Warranty B. See Division 01 for additional requirements. 1.21 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. General: In addition to requirements of Division 01, following initial operation of plumbing systems and prior to acceptance by the Architect, perform the following services. B. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period, give written notification of readiness to proceed to the Architect and Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates. C. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out requirements for operating, servicing and maintaining equipment and systems. Describe general system operation and specific equipment functions. Cover all equipment calibration, setpoint adjustment, safeties and alarms. D. Furnish qualifications of Contractor's personnel in charge of the instruction; foreman position is minimum acceptable. Where equipment startup is performed by supplier’s or manufacturer’s personnel, those personnel should also provide training on that equipment. E. During demonstrations and instructions include and reference information from maintenance manuals and contract drawings. 1. Provide documentation of all instruction which includes: a. Date and time of instruction b. Name, affiliation and qualifications of the instructor c. Name and affiliation of the attendees d. Topics, systems, and equipment covered e. Length of instruction F. Minimum duration of instruction periods: 1. Plumbing Systems 4 hours 1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Contents: Furnish, in accord with Division 1, one PDF and one bound copy of operating and maintenance manuals to include the following: 1. Manufacturers, suppliers, contractor names, addresses and phone numbers. 2. Warranty service contractors' names, address and phone numbers (if different from above). 3. Schedule and description of routine maintenance for each component to include oiling, lubrication and greasing data. 4. Test data log. 5. Manufacturer's cuts and rating tables, including brochures for all submittal items. 6. Part numbers of all replaceable items. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 10 7. Control diagrams and operation sequence. 8. Written guarantees. 9. Record drawings corrected and completed. 10. Completed equipment start-up forms and checklists. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors. Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment. 2. Submit fixture, trim, exploded view and replacement parts lists. 3. Submit replacement part numbers and availability, and nearest service depot location and telephone number. C. Binders: 1. Furnish typewritten or printed index and tabbed dividers between principal categories. 2. Bind each manual in a hard-backed loose-leaf binder. D. Imprint on cover: 1. Name of project. 2. Owner. 3. Location of project. 4. Architect. 5. Contractor. 6. Year of completion. E. Imprint on backing: 1. Name of project. 2. Year of completion. F. Submittals: 1. Preliminary Copies: Prior to scheduled completion of the project, submit one PDF copy for review by the Architect. 2. Final Copies: After approval of the preliminary copy, submit one PDF and one bound volume to the Owner. 1.23 EQUIPMENT AND PIPE CLEANING A. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment. Equipment shall be free of dirt, construction debris, corrosion, etc. B. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to eliminate dirt, debris or other material from entering and collecting inside of pipe and equipment. Any collection of material shall be thoroughly cleaned before equipment startup and if necessary again before owner occupancy. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 11 C. Clean exterior of all exposed pipe and equipment. 1.24 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit one CD or DVD with all drawings in PDF format. B. Show location of equipment, location and size of piping. Locate all valves and similar equipment with tag or label identification. Indicate locations and elevations of exterior pipe and utility connections. Maintain continuously updated drawings during progress of project. C. Record actual locations of equipment, clean-outs, controlling devices, and all above grade, under-floor, and buried piping. 1.25 TESTING A. Provide completed start-up forms and checklists. B. Coordinate Test and Balance with Division 23 05 93. Provide all necessary assistance and documentation. 1.26 WARRANTIES AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and in perfect operating order at time of delivery to Owner. B. Furnish one year warranty from date of substantial completion for all systems unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Without cost to Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from date of final acceptance, except when in the opinion of the Architect a failure is due to neglect or carelessness of the Owner. D. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees that exceed one year (e.g.: water heaters). E. Make all necessary balancing and control adjustments during first year of operation. F. The presence of any inspector or observer during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work. PART 2 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DOCUMENTATION A. Additional plan submittals to reviewing authority: If additional drawing submittals are required at any time during construction contractor shall submit drawings, review with authority, and pick up subsequent approved drawings. Engineer will revise and/or prepare drawings for submittal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 00 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 22 00 00 - 12 3.2 INSPECTION A. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work. B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, Contractor shall at his own expense uncover work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work disturbed by him to its original condition. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed fire stopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule. B. Inspect isolated equipment after installation for proper movement clearance. C. Test domestic water piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority having jurisdiction. E. Test storm drainage piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority having jurisdiction. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials. B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. C. Use acceptable cleaning products per IAQ Management Plan. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. B. Do not permit use of plumbing fixtures before final acceptance. 3.6 COMMISSIONING A. Selected Division 22 equipment and systems referenced are to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements and Section 22 08 00, Commissioning of Plumbing Systems. The contractor has specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation. Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 1 SECTION 22 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Standards SP-58 and SP-69. B. Comply with Federal "Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act" – 2011. Pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings and fixtures shall be "Lead Free" meaning not more than a weighted average of 0.25% lead in wetted surfaces. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section includes products, assemblies and methods applicable to more than one of the systems specified in the following sections of Division 22. 1.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Where two or more units of same class of equipment are required, use products of a single manufacturer. All equipment shall be new and free from damage. B. Provide major equipment components with manufacturer's name, address, catalog number and capacity indicated on a nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place. C. Furnish standard and fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers and other accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installed products shall have surface Burning Characteristics: 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Perform work in accordance with local jurisdiction’s requirements and AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. C. Plastic welding and solvents must comply with VOC limits per SCAQMD Rule #1168, IEQ Credit 4.2. VOC limits are no more than 510 g/L for PVC; 490 g/L for CPVC; and 325g/L for ABS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL VALVE REQUIREMENTS A. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. Brass valves are not permitted. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 2 C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: NIBCO or equal by Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Stockham or approved equal. B. 4 inches and Smaller: Use ball valve or butterfly valve in lieu of gate valve. 2.3 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: NIBCO or equal by Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Stockham or approved equal. B. 2 inches and Smaller: Lead-Free, NSF-61-8, UPC-IGC-157, MSS SP 110, 600 psi WOG, two piece silicon performance bronze body, bronze trim, bronze ball, full port, PTFE seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with union, lever handle. For insulated piping provide 2" extended handles of non-thermal conductive material. Nibco Model T/S-585-80- LF. 2.4 BALL VALVES – STAINLESS STEEL A. Manufacturers: Victaulic (for specific use with Vic-press stainless steel piping system) or approved equal. B. Stainless steel body, ball, and stem, PTFE seats, 304 stainless steel handle, nut, and stem washer, with Schedule 10S stainless steel type 316 Vic-Press™ and/or grooved ends. Victaulic Series P569. 2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: NIBCO or equal by Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Stockham, Victaulic or approved equal. B. 2-1/2 inches to 6": Lead-Free, MSS-SP67, 300 psi CWP, grooved end, coated ductile iron body, suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. EPDM encapsulated disc, EPDM O-Ring seal, geometric drive, two- piece stainless steel stem. Lever operated with 10-position throttling plate. For insulated piping provide 2" extended neck. Nibco GD-4765. C. 2-1/2" to 6" Grooved-End Copper Butterfly Valve: rated to 300 psi with copper tubing sized grooved ends. Cast bronze body, elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with integrally cast stem. Bubble tight, dea d-end or bi-directional service, with memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service. Valve may be automated with electric, pneumatic, or hydraulic operators. Victaulic Series 608. 2.6 CHECK VALVES A. Swing Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: NIBCO or equal by Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Stockham or approved equal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 3 2. 2 inches and Smaller: Lead-Free, NSF-61-8, MSS SP 80, 200 psi CWP, silicone performance bronze body and cap, bronze disc with PTFE seat, Y-pattern design, solder or threaded ends. Nibco Model T/S-413-Y-LF. 3. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Lead-Free, NSF-61-8, MSS SP 71, Class 125, 200 psi CWP, cast iron body, bronze trim, bronze disc and seat, flanged ends. Nibco Model F-910-LF. B. Spring Loaded Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: NIBCO or equal by Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Stockham, Titan or approved equal. 2. 2 inches and Smaller: Lead-Free, NSF-61-8, MSS SP 80, 250 psi CWP, silicone performance bronze body, in-line spring lift check, silent closing, PTFE disc, integral seat, solder or threaded ends. Nibco Model T/S-480-Y-LF. 3. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Lead-Free, NSF-61-8, MSS SP 71, Class 125, 200 psi CWP, wafer style, cast iron body, Buna-N bonded to bronze seat, center guided bronze disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends. Nibco Model F-910-LF. 2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports with incompressible insulation inserts and shields for all piping to be insulated per 220700. 1. Manufacturer: Pipe Shields, INC or approved equal. 2. Material: Calcium Silicate or Uretherne per temperature application. 3. Thickness: Insert thickness shall match required insulation thickness per 220700. B. Plumbing Piping - DWV: Cast-iron or PVC 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: Copper 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring , with rigid insulation inserts. 2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis, with rigid insulation inserts and saddle. 3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis, with rigid insulation inserts and saddle. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 4 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring. D. Steel Piping: Natural Gas, LPG, Fuel Oil 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks. 5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support for Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. E. Secondary Pipe Positioning and Supports: 1. Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. Hubbard "HOLDRITE" support systems or approved equal. 2. For vertical mid-span supports of piping 4” and under, use HOLDRITE Stout Brackets™ with HOLDRITE Stout Clamps or two-hole pipe clamps (MSS Type 26). 3. For plenum applications use pipe supports that meet ASTM E-84 25/50 standards, such as the HOLDRITE Flame Fighter TM or approved equal. 2.8 HANGER ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.9 INSERTS A. Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.10 PIPE ROOF SUPPORT A. Manufacturers: Erico Caddy or approved equal. B. General: Pyramid 50, polyethylene closed-cell form, electro-galvanized 16 gauge steel metal cover pipe clamp support. C. 1-1/2” and smaller pipe: Pyramid EZ, UV stabilized EPDM, adjustable height. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 5 D. 2”-6” or general use: Pyramid ST, strut support with galvanized finish, fixed or adjustable height, UV stabilized thermoplastic base with rubber mat. E. 2”-6” pipe with expansion: Pyramid RL, thermoplastic rollers with galvanized supports, fixed or adjustable height, UV stabilized thermoplastic base with rubber mat. 2.11 ACCESS PANELS A. Milcor or approved equal. B. Include an allowance for a minimum of 115 access panels. C. Architectural grade, 14 guage frame and door, painted steel or stainless steel based on application. 2.12 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, bronze unions. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 4. PVC Piping: PVC. 5. CPVC Piping: CPVC. B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, slip-on bronze flanges. 3. PVC Piping: PVC flanges. 4. CPVC Piping: CPVC flanges. 5. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. C. PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections, furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters and unions, or Schedule 80 threaded PVC pipe (ASTM D2464). 2.13 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex, Mason or approved equal. B. Braided Stainless Steel (Pump Connection) 1. 304 Stainless Steel flexible hose, close pitch, annular corrugated. 2. 304 Stainless Steel double braided outer covering. 3. ANSI Class 150 carbon steel flanges or carbon steel male pipe thread. 4. UL listed, ANSI/NSF-61 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 6 C. Victaulic Style flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors for vibration isolation at equipment connections. Three (3) couplings, for each connector, shall be placed in close proximity to the source of vibration. 2.14 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex, Mason or approved equal. B. Flexible Expansion Loop (seismic joints): Copper Pipe 1. Bronze hose & double bronze braid, copper fittings. 2. Two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90° elbows and a 180° return, assembled. 3. Support nut and drain plug at bottom of 180 ° return. 4. Provide nesting for multiple pipe runs. 5. UL listed, ANSI/NSF-61 C. Flexible Expansion Loop (seismic joints): Steel Pipe 1. Stainless steel hose & double stainless steel braid, carbon steel fittings. 2. Two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90° elbows and a 180° return, assembled. 3. Support nut and drain plug at bottom of 180 ° return. 4. Provide nesting for multiple pipe runs. 5. For natural gas service provide AGA certification. 2.15 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead. 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq. ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.16 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel. C. Sealant: Acrylic Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 7 D. Size large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous insulation or installation of fire sealant at fire-rated walls. Note that insulation is discontinuous at fire walls. 2.17 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex Metraseal, Thunderline Link-Seal or approved equal. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. 2.18 MECHANICAL FIRESTOPPING SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex Metraseal 120 or approved equal. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, cons isting of interlocking intumescent synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. UL listed for 2 hour fire protection. 2.19 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: Allied Tube & Conduit, B-Line Systems, Unistrut or approved equal. B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage steel with holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.20 SUPPORT ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Alignment Guides: Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch thick insulation, minimum 3 inch travel. B. Swivel Joints: Bronze body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber (Buna-N) o-ring seals. 2.21 ELECTRIC HEAT TRACE (Freeze Protection) A. Manufacturers: Raychem XL-Trace or approved equal. B. General: Provide a complete UL listed system of heating cables, components and contr ol for preventing pipes from freezing. C. Cable: Self-regulating cable with nickel-copper bus wires embedded in conductive polymer core with dielectric polyolefin jacket, braided tinned copper ground and outer jacket of polyolefin. Cable shall vary power output in response to temperature all along its length with a self-regulating factor of at least 90%. D. Components: Control enclosures shall be NEMA 4X rated. Connection system shall not require stripping of wires. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 8 E. Control: Thermostatic control with ambient sensor set at 40 F. F. Installation: 1. Apply "Electric Traced" labels to outside of insulated pipe. 2. Attached cable to metal pipe with glass cloth tape and plastic pipe with aluminum tape. 3. Adjust pipe insulation size to accommodate maintenance tape. 4. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. 2.22 FIRESTOPPING-APPLIED A. Manufacturers: RectorSeal, Dow Corning, 3M Fire Protection or approved equal. B. General: 1. Fire stopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by applicable building codes and tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 fire tests for through penetrations, and ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 for construction joints, and UL 2307 for perimeter edge joints. 2. Fire stopping material shall be free of asbestos, PCBs, ethylene glycol, and lead. 3. Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal. 4. Fire stopping shall be performed by a contractor trained or approved by firestop manufacturer. 5. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide firestop systems for all conditions from a single supplier. 2.23 FIRE STOPPING-CAST IN PLACE A. Manufacturers: Presealed Systems "Hydro Flame" or approved equal. B. Product Description: Factory assembled for use in concrete floors, outer sleeve lined with intumescent strip, radial extended flange, waterstop gasket/mid-body seal. C. General: UL listed system with 3 hour fire rating. Watertight, Class 1 with 3 feet head pressure for 72 hours. D. Installation: Provide device based upon pipe type, size and concrete thickness. Align with penetration layout and nail in place. Secure cap prior to pouring concrete. Deburr and clean debris from pipe prior to installation. Coat pip e end with compatible lubricant as necessary. 2.24 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: Mason, Amber Booth or approved equal. B. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 9 a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance and limit stops. C. Spring Hanger: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. D. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Rubber or neoprene-waffle pads. a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum 1/2 inch thick. c. Maximum loading 40 psi. d. Height of ribs: not to exceed 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: Single layer. E. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.5 inches deflection with threaded insert. F. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass fiber. G. Seismic Snubbers: 1. Type: Non-directional and double acting unit consisting of interlocking steel members restrained by neoprene elements. 2. Neoprene Elements: Replaceable, minimum of 0.75 inch thick. 3. Capacity: 4 times load assigned to mount groupings at 0.4 inch deflection. 4. Attachment Points and Fasteners: Capable of withstanding 3 times rated load capacity of seismic snubber. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 10 2.25 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches high. B. Metal Tags: Brass, Aluminum or Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1 - 1/2 inches diameter with finished edges. Plain English designations. C. Information Tags: Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. D. Tag Chart: Plain English designations so no chart or index is required. 2.26 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering shall conform to ASME A13.1 and UPC. Specific examples are noted in the table below. Service Background Color Letter Color Legend Domestic Cold Water Green White DOMESTIC COLD WATER Domestic Hot Water Green White DOMESTIC HOT WATER Domestic Recirculation Green White DHW RECIRC Waste Black White SANITARY SEWER Vent Black White SANITARY VENT Condensate Drain Black White CONDENSATE Storm Drainage Black White STORM Natural Gas Yellow Black NATURAL GAS B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. 2.27 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head. B. Color code plumbing valves green. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING WORK A. Provide access to existing piping and equipment and other installations remaining active and requiring access. B. Extend existing piping installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond of adhesives or firestopping. C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural member s. E. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION-CLEARANCE A. Appliances and equipment shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair and replacement. B. A minimum of 36” of clearance shall be provided in front of the control side of appliances and equipment. Provide additional space when required by NEC. 3.4 INSTALLATION - INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.5 INSTALLATION – ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for installation at all concealed equipment which requires service, maintenance or adjustment to include but not limited to equipment, valves, open drains, control valves and controls. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 12 B. Provide location layout and required size for all access panels to general contractor. Layout shall be regular and consistent, maintain a uniform wall panel height of 24” centerline above finished floor, unless noted otherwise. C. Provide fire rated access panels where installed in fire rated assembly. D. Provide stainless steel access panels where installed in tile surfaces. E. Furnish access panels to general contractor for installation. F. Paint installed access panels to match wall or ceiling. Verify that panels are not painted shut. 3.6 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Install 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. D. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation and allowing access. E. Provide access panels where valves and fittings are not accessible. F. Insulate valves according to application in Section 22 07 00. G. For installation of valves in domestic water systems refer to Section 22 11 00. 3.7 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. B. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. C. Install spring loaded check valves on discharge of pumps. 3.8 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. F. Where piping is parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 13 G. Adjust hangers and supports as required to bring system to proper line and grade. Piping shall be plumb with floor and parallel/perpendicular to building structure. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping, or sheet lead packin g between pipe and hanger. J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Insulated piping shall have insulation run continuous through hangers and supports with use of rigid inserts. Insulation shall be glued to both si des of insert at hangers and supports, no insulation gaps are allowed. Refer to Section 22 07 00. M. Support of pipe, tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed. N. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. 3.9 INSTALLATION – SEISMIC CONTROLS A. Provide seismic restraints and hangers in compliance with IBC 1613 and ASCE 7. B. Seismic Bracing: Follow IBC 1613, ASCE 7, SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual and the following. 1. Bracing shall be bidder designed to resist seismic loading in accord with Chapter 16 of the International Building Code, ASCE 7 or the SMACNA guideline. 2. Provide seismic calculations as required for Ip = 1.5. 3.10 INSTALLATION-PIPING PROTECTION A. Provide protective shield plates in concealed locations where piping, other than cast-iron or steel, is installed in studs, joists or rafters. Plates shall be 16 gage steel and cover the pipe area plus 2”. Shields may be omitted if piping is more than 1-1/2” from nearest edge of structural member. B. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals, such as copper tubing and steel, by use of copper-plated, plastic coated, or flexible materials. All supports which contact copper tubing shall be copper plated. 3.11 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 14 B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members, formed steel channel or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. E. When water heaters and similar equipment are installed in a suspended application, an engineered and manufactured platform, such as the Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE Suspended Water Heater Platform shall be used. Weight loading capability shall include a minimum safety factor of 2. 3.12 INSTALLATION - FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around pipes penetrating equipment rooms for sound control. C. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal. D. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to d rain clamp device. E. Seal drains watertight to adjacent materials. F. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. 3.13 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with insulation and caulk or fireproof airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. 3.14 INSTALLATION – FIRESTOPPING AND SEALS AT PARTITIONS A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping and other items requiring firestopping. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 15 B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating and to uniform density and texture. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. D. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials. E. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required. F. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. G. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition, floor, ceiling, and/or roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. 2. Install escutcheons where piping penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations air tight. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.15 INSTALLATION – VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Install isolation for motor driven equipment. B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment support ed by vibration isolation. Provide line size flexible connectors. C. Provide grooved piping systems with minimum of three flexible couplings instead of flexible connector supported by vibration isolation. D. Adjust equipment level. E. Install spring hangers without binding. F. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. 3.16 INSTALLATION – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS A. Provide support and anchors for controlling contraction of piping. Provide loops, pip e offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 16 B. Install Work in accordance with ASME B31.9. C. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure. Provide pipe guides to direct movement only along axis of pipe. Erect piping so strain and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus. D. Provide expansion loops as indicated in Drawings. 3.17 INSTALLATION - IDENTIFICATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. D. Nameplates: Identify plumbing equipment (water heaters, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices) with plastic nameplates. 1. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with name tags. 2. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. 3. Identity description should be as numbered on drawings or plain English description. i.e. “WH-1” or “Rain Water Storage Tank”. 4. Label automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. 5. Label wall controls and switches with associated equipment designation and control function, i.e. “DCP, Timer”. E. Valve Tags: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. 1. Do not provide numbered tags. 2. Provide tags with plain English description of service and function. i.e. “Domestic Hot Water, Kitchen” F. Pipe Labels: Identify main service piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. 1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Piping inside dwelling units need not be labeled. 2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 3. Locate identification on straight runs including risers and drops with spacing not to exceed 20 feet. 4. Locate adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. G. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. H. Equipment and Valve Tag Index: Plain English designations so no chart or index is required. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 05 00 - 17 3.18 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by firestoppping material installation. 3.19 SCHEDULES A. Equipment isolation schedule: ISOLATED EQUIPMENT BASE ISOLATOR TYPE THICKNESS TYPE DEFLECTION Inline Pumps N/A N/A Braided Flex Water Heater Copper Flex END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 07 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING INSULATION Project #16-0996 22 07 00 - 1 SECTION 22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide insulation tested for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. All systems components subject to heat loss or gain, such as, piping, storage tanks, vessels, valves etc. shall be insulated to conform with the Washington State Energy Code and Evergreen Standards (as minimum). 1.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Insulation shall bear a manufacturer’s mark indicating the product R-value or K-value and thickness. This mark shall be visible after installation and shall be repe ated at an interval of no more than 10 feet. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Micro-Lok AP-T Plus or equal by Owens-Corning, Knauf, Manson or approved equal. B. Insulation: Rigid, noncombustible. ASTM C547. 1. ‘K’ factor: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Fiberglass or Earthwool with ECOSE 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 5. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ+ or Type I, reinforced facing, paintable. Longitudinal acrylic adhesive closure system with factory supplied butt strips. ASTM C1136. D. Rigid clamp/hanger insert: Preformed, incompressible (Calcium Silicate or similar), matching pipe size and insulation thickness. 2.2 GLASS FIBER, BLANKET A. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Micro-Flex or equal by Owens-Corning, Knauf, Manson or approved equal. B. Insulation: Semi-rigid, shot-free, continuous fiber, noncombustible. ASTM C1393. 1. ‘K’ factor: 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 07 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING INSULATION Project #16-0996 22 07 00 - 2 4. Density: 2.5 lb/cu ft. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Type I, reinforced facing, will accept paint. Seal with pressure sensitive tape. ASTM C1136. 2.3 POLYOLEFIN INSULATION A. Manufacturers: IMCOA or similar. B. Polyolefin or Polyethylene pipe insulation is NOT ACCEPTABLE for any application. 2.4 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM A. Manufacturers: Armacell AP/Armaflex, Aeroflex Aerocel or approved equal. B. NOT ACCEPTABLE where piping is exposed. C. Preformed flexible, closed-cell, elastomeric thermal insulation: Type I, Tubular form, self- seal or continuous, 25/50-rated, CFC free, low VOC, 'K' factor: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. ASTM C534. D. Rigid clamp/hanger insert: Armacell Armafix, polyurethane insert and aluminum jacket, single piece with self-adhering closure. 2.5 PIPE INSULATION AND EQUIPMENT JACKETS A. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 1. Product Description: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off -white color. ASTM D1784. 2. Thickness: 15 mil indoor, 30 mil outdoor. 3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. B. Aluminum Pipe Jacket: 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet. ASTM B209. 2. Finish: Embossed 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 07 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING INSULATION Project #16-0996 22 07 00 - 3 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Apply insulation when building is thoroughly dry to prevent shrinkage. B. Interior Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. Insulation must be preformed fiberglass with white FSK facing. No alternates. C. Insulate entire piping system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump fittings, connections to equipment and expansion joints. Use canvas jackets for valves and other irregular shapes. D. Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections a nd jackets. E. Piping Inserts and Shields: 1. Insulation shall be continuous through supports and hangers with incompressible inserts and shields. Do not directly clamp/support pipe scheduled to be insulated. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel saddle between pipe clevis hangers or pipe rollers and insulation. Minimum 6 inches long, of contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 3. Inserts: Between pipe clamps, hangers or rollers and piping. 4. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating mate rial suitable for insulation type and planned temperature range and service. 5. Glue insulation to both sides of insert. 6. Shields without inserts may be used at clevis hangers on refrigerant piping 5/8” and smaller with continuous insulation. F. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. H. Exterior Piping Applications: Use only elastomeric closed-cell foam insulation. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with sealant. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal equipment. I. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size insulation large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. J. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. K. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. L. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smoo th surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 07 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING INSULATION Project #16-0996 22 07 00 - 4 M. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. N. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over. O. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and replacement without damage. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Piping: Provide insulation on all piping as listed below. Exception: In residential units only, the water piping downstream of the submeters can be insulated per the minimum Washington State Energy Code requirements. PIPE SIZE Service Insulation Type <1” 1" to 1-1/4” 1-1/2" to 4" 4" to 8” Domestic Cold Water Glass Fiber RIGID 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" Domestic Hot Water Glass Fiber RIGID 1" 1" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" Domestic Hot Water Recirc. Glass Fiber RIGID 1" 1" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" Domestic water H/C/R/T outside conditioned space Glass Fiber RIGID 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 2” 2” Condensate Drains RIGID / FOAM 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" Roof Drain & Overflow Bowls in conditioned area Glass Fiber RIGID 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" Rainleader & Overflow Piping in conditioned area Glass Fiber RIGID 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1. Do not insulate direct burial rain leader. 2. Do not insulate direct burial cold water. 3. For all exterior piping applications use only Elastomeric Cellular Foam with Aluminum jacket. 4. For all below grade piping application use only insulation specifically engineered for application. (Closed Cell Polyurethane System) END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. System specific commissioning procedures B . Related Sections: 1. The following sections specify commissioning activities for this project: a. 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements 2. All sections related to the following commissioned systems may contain start-up, testing and/or commissioning related activities: a. Domestic Hot Water & Circulator b. Gas & Utility Meters 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A . Work includes the completion and documentation of formal commissioning procedures by the Contractor on selected equipment and systems as listed under 1.1 B. Commissioning is defined as the process of verifying and documenting that the installation and performance of selected building systems meet the specified design criteria and therefore satisfies the design intent and the Owner’s operational needs. The Contractor shall be responsible for participation in the commissioning process as outlined herein, and in subsequent sectional references and attachments throughout the project documents. Commissioning procedures shall be designed and conducted under the direction of the Commissioning Authority (CxA) and coordinated by the Contractor Commissioning Coordinator (CCC). B . This section contains the system specific commissioning requirements for the systems referenced herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THE SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED ARE SPECIFIED IN SECTION 01 91 13, PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION OF THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS FOR THE SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED IS SPECIFIED SECTION 01 91 13, PART 3 – EXECUTION SCHEDULE A – Start-up Plan , Contractor Checklists and Document Tracking A Startup Plan shall be developed as outlined in Section 01 91 13. The Startup Plan shall include manufacturer’s startup procedures and Contractor Checklists (CCL) as provided by the CxA. Sample CCLs are included in this Schedule. The Contractor responsible for delivery of the equipment and appurtenances associated with the systems listed in Table – A shall be responsible for completion of the CCL for each individual piece of equipment in the system group. The CCLs included within this Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 2 Schedule are sample versions and are representative of what will be included in the final Commissioning Plan. The Contractor is responsible to demonstrate the proper operation of all installed systems and the final CCLs shall contain the requirements to document these demonstrations. In no case shall the checklists require performance criteria more stringent than specified by the Project Documents. The CCC is responsible for collecting the completed CCLs and start-up documents and maintaining the Startup Plan during installation and startup activities. The CCC shall review the material for completeness, then sign off on the CCLs as an indication that documents are complete. Once all CCLs and start-up documents are received, they shall be turned over to the CxA. The following Table - A identifies the CCLs and related documents that will be included in the final Startup Plan. Listed as subcategories below each system are the documents that shall be required to be submitted as part of the system startup activities. This documentation includes installation, startup, static tests, pressure tests, cleaning, flushing, disinfecting, certifications and other miscellaneous checklists. This table shall be used as a document tracking mechanism by the CxA, CCC and Contractor for the process of submittal, review and approval of installation and startup documents and CCLs. The table shall be included in the Startup Plan, which is a subset of the Commissioning Plan. Table-A Key: A. System description for each system commissioned. A Contractor Checklist is included for each commissioned system. The subcategories include required documentation to be submitted with the CCL. B. Contractor responsible for installation, startup, testing and submittal of documents for commissioned system. To be filled in after contract award. C. Date the proposed documents are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor. NOTE: These documents shall include, but are not limited to, procedures and forms to include such activities as: manufacturer’s installation and start-up, pressure testing, TAB, cleaning, flushing and disinfection. The CCL is provided by the CxA. D. Indicates that CxA has received and approved proposed installation and start-up documentation. E. Date the completed documents are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor. F. Indicates that CxA has received and approved completed documentation. G. Notes on status of forms, irregularities and rework needed Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 3 Table - A: System Summary and Documentation Tracking A B C D E F G System Description Documents Required Responsible Contractor Proposed Document Received O K Completed Document Received O K Notes Domestic Hot Water Heater Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Domestic Hot Water Pumps Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Gas & Utility Meters Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Zero/Span calibration check CxA Provided Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 4 SAMPLE Domestic Hot Water Heaters – Gas Contractor Checklist Water Heater WH-1 Location: Area/Room Served: Manufacturer: Model: Check RC CxA Note Equipment Area is cleaned and clear of construction debris. Unit is clean and has no visible physical damage. Equipment labels are installed per project documents. Unit is accessible for service. Mounting is appropriate with vibration isolation as specified. Piping Piping insulated per project documents. Piping, valves and insulation are complete. Temperature and pressure indicators as specified. Control Devices Control wires and devices are complete. Control wire and devices are labeled. Electrical Supply power is installed and disconnect is accessible. Disconnect is labeled. Nameplate Minimum Circuit Amps. Nameplate Maximum Overcurrent Protection Device Amps. Installed overload. Overloads and/or fusing is appropriate. Operating controls and safeties are installed. Convenience outlet within 50’ of equipment. Start-Up Manufacturer’s installation and start-up procedures complete. Start-up documentation submitted to CxA. Readiness System is ready for functional performance testing Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 5 Representative photograph provided Sign-Off: Team Member Name Date Responsible Contractor (RC): Commissioning Authority (CxA): Notes: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 6 Sample Contractor Checklist Gas & Utility Meters Unit No:Contractor: Location: Serves: Manufacturer:Model: Check RC CxA Note Equipment Area is cleaned and clear of construction debris. Unit is clean and has no visible physical damage. Equipment labels are installed per project documents. Unit is accessible for service. Mounting is appropriate. Meter readout is visible and per project documents. Electrical Supply power is installed and disconnect is accessible. Disconnect is labeled. Supply power is sourced per project documents (e-power). Wires labeled per project documents. Piping Unions installed on all equipment requiring disconnects for servicing. Pressure gauges installed per project documents All valves tagged with number and function, valve index posted. Start-Up Manufacturer’s installation and start-up procedures complete. Meter calibration complete and documented. Communication protocols set up and interface verified working correctly (ModBus, BacNet, LonWorks, IP address, etc.) Communication with Building Automation System and/or data acquisition and display system confirmed Start-up documentation submitted to CxA. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 7 Readiness System is ready for functional performance testing Representative photograph provided Sign-Off: Team Member Name Date Responsible Contractor (RC): Commissioning Authority (CxA): Notes: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 8 SCHEDULE B – Functional Performance Tests Functional Performance Tests 1 The preliminary versions of the Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets contained in this Schedule define the individual systems to be tested and Contractor responsibilities based on the specific method of commissioning. These preliminary Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets represent information available at the time of commissioning specification development. The final versions may be somewhat different and will be included within the Commissioning Plan as presented at the initial commissioning coordination meeting. 2 The methods of functional performance test and verification are listed in Table 1 of this Schedule. The Contractor will be responsible for supporting the testing activity as indicated. This may include developing the test plan and functional performance test forms for approval by the Commissioning Authority, performing testing to be witnessed by the CxA or providing support during functional performance testing conducted by the CxA or their sub-Authority. 3 Contract documents state that the Contractor is responsible to demonstrate that all systems comply with contract requirements and meet the project design intent. The scope of testing outlined in the following Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets in this Schedule represent the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. If systems fail the initial tests additional testing may be required. 4 The following Test Summary Table identifies the functional tests that will be conducted on this project. This table will be used as a document tracking mechanism for the process of submittal and review of contractor provided testing documentation. 5 The contractor is responsible for submitting proposed functional test documentation to the Commissioning Authority for review and approval at least one month prior to these activities. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Commissioning Authority in advance of the scheduled activity, testing or startup date. A minimum of 5 working days advance notification is required. If the CxA is not notified in advance of a scheduled start-up or testing activity, the start-up or testing shall be rescheduled and repeated to the satisfaction of the CxA. 6 The “Responsible Contractor” column of the table will be completed during the Initial Commissioning Coordination Meeting by assigning an individual Contractor responsible for the activities associated with each system based on what contractor provided that system. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 9 Table – B: Functional Test Summary Table A B C D E F G Responsible Contractor Proposed Test Forms Received O K Testing Complete O K Notes Hot Water Heaters/Pumps Gas & Utility Meters Summary Table Key: A. System description for each system commissioned. B. Contractor responsible for providing testing. To be filled in after contract award. C. Date the proposed test forms are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor (if applicable). D. Indicates that CxA has received and approved the proposed test forms. E. Date(s) testing was performed by contractor. F. Indicates that Commissioning Authority has witnessed and approved the testing and received all completed test forms. G. Notes on status of forms, irregularities and rework needed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 10 Table 1 – Functional Test and Verification Methods The following applies regardless of test method. The contractor shall support the CxA during testing or verification, including but not limited to: scheduling and sequencing and adequate time for testing, on-site support during testing, testing instruments and equipment, setting up trend logs, providing access to equipment (including lifts), providing access to control systems both on-site and remotely. The CxA shall do one or a combination of the following to verify contractor testing: 1. The CxA shall witness all or portions of the tests during contractor testing. 2. The CxA shall re-conduct the functional tests on all or portions of the systems using the same test plan and data sheets. 3. The contractor shall be required to duplicate some of the testing by demonstrating a percentage of the system as selected and witnessed by the CxA. If during the verification process inconsistencies are found that demonstrate that the functional testing conducted by the contractor was not properly executed, the CxA shall suspend verification and the contractor shall be required to correct the problems and re-conduct the entire functional test and verification for the system(s) in question. Excessive test failures shall be subject to the back-charging provisions in Section 01 91 13. Test Method A – Contractor Written and Conducted with CxA Oversight The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the contractor responsible for the system and submitted to the CxA for approval. These can be the system manufacturer’s stock test forms if appropriate. The CxA shall assist contractor in development of test forms if requested to do so. The contractor shall conduct the tests on 100% of the equipment per the plan, document results and submit completed test forms to the CxA for review and approval. Test Method B – CxA Written and Conducted, Contractor Supports The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the CxA. The CxA shall conduct the tests per the plan, document results and notify contractor of any issues found. Test Method C – CxA Written, Contractor Conducts The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the CxA. The CxA shall turn over the test plan and test data sheets to the contractor. The contractor shall conduct the tests on 100% of the equipment per the plan, document results and submit completed test forms to the CxA for review and approval. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 11 Domestic Water Systems Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule - B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Will Sample or Witness C.1 CxA Contractor N/A 25% Functional Tests: 1) Distribution a) Pump Operation 2) Water Heater a) Temperature control b) Relief 3) Mixing Valves a) Temperature control Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 12 Gas & Utility Meters Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule-B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Will Sample or Witness C.3 CxA Contractor 100%N/A Functional Tests: 1) Demonstrate and document the following: a) Two point calibration at zero and at a known consumption equal to at least a third of the system maximum load. This can be accomplished by applying a known load or by measuring the actual load (volts & amps) at the panel being metered. b) Communication with Building Automation System and/or data acquisition and display system. c) All features and functions of the meter Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 13 PART 4 - SAMPLE FUNCTIONAL TEST DOCUMENTS 4.1 SAMPLE FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES AND DATA FORMS ARE PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION TO DEMONSTRATE THE RIGOR OF THE PROCESS, TEST PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION THAT WILL BE REQUIRED FROM THE CONTRACTOR. THESE FORMS AND PROCEDURES WILL BE AMENDED, AUGMENTED AND UPDATED IN THE FINAL COMMISSIONING PLAN BASED ON THE FINAL PROJECT DOCUMENTS, ADDENDUMS AND SUBMITTAL INFORMATION. THIS SAMPLE SECTION DOES NOT CONTAIN ALL FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES AND DATA FORMS THAT ARE REQUIRED TO BE EXECUTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. SCHEDULE - B OF PART 3 PROVIDES A FULL LIST OF THE FUNCTIONAL TESTS THAT WILL BE REQUIRED TO BE EXECUTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. Domestic Hot Water – BAS Controlled with BAS Aquastat and Pump Proof Occupied Mode 1.Place the system in the occupied mode. 2.Create a demand for hot water by increasing the temperature set point if necessary or using hot water. 3.If circulation pump is equipped with an aqua-stat, verify aqua-stat set point is high enough to cause pump to circulate. 4.Return set point to original value at end of test. Hot water tank set point at start of test _____ 1 2 Hot water circulation pump is enabled. Combustion air damper is open. Water heater burner is enabled and firing. Hot water tank set point returned to original setting. Unoccupied Mode: 1.With the system in the occupied mode, create a demand for hot water at the hot water tank (or continue from previous test). 2.Adjust the return water temperature set point to well below the return water temperature. 3.Place the system in the unoccupied mode. 4.Verify pump is disabled, combustion damper is closed and hot water is disabled. 5.Return hot water tank to original set point as needed. 1 2 Hot water circulation pump is disabled Combustion air damper is closed Water heater burner is disabled Hot water tank set point returned to original setting Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING Project #16-0996 22 08 00- 14 BAS Aqua-Stat Operation: 1.Verify system is in the occupied mode. 2.Start test with return water temperature above set point, adjust set point as needed. 3.Record initial parameters. 4.Turn the aqua-stat set point up higher than the return water temperature. 5.Verify pump is commanded on, status is on and pump is observed on. 6.Turn off the pump at the disconnect and verify pump failure alarm is generated. 7.Turn power to pump back on and verify alarm clears. 8.Turn the aqua-stat set point down to lower than the return water temperature. 9.Verify pump is commanded off, status is off and pump is observed off. 10.Return set point to original setting. 1 2 PRE-TEST: System in occupied mode Return water temperature. Return water temperature set point Pump command/status is OFF TEST: Return water set point changed to Pump command/status are ON Pump failure alarm received Pump failure alarm cleared Pump observed ON Return water set point changed to Pump command/status are OFF Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Commissioning Authority: Date: Comments: END OF SECTION 22 08 00 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Project #16-0996 22 11 00 - 1 SECTION 22 11 00 – FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Federal "Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act" – 2011. Pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings and fixtures shall be "Lead Free" meaning not more than a weighted average of 0.25% lead in wetted surfaces. 1.2 SITE MAINS A. Provide connections to Site water mains as indicated on drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on -site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).) B. The mechanical press fitting manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on- site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of press fittings and crimping tools. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).) C. Plastic welding and solvents must comply with VOC limits per SCAQMD Rule #1168, IEQ Credit 4.2. VOC limits are no more than 510 g/L for PVC; 490 g/L for CPVC; and 325g/L for ABS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Tubing: Type K hard drawn or annealed. ASTM B88. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, ASTM B75, wrought copper. 2. Joints: Brazed a. Copper to copper: Silver/phosphorus/copper alloy (15 percent silver). AWS A5.8 BCuP-5. b. Copper to brass or steel: AWS Bag-5 Silver (45 percent silver) 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: Type L hard drawn seamless. ASTM B88. 1. Fittings: a. Wrought copper and bronze. ASME B16.22, ASTM B75. b. Copper press with EPDM O-ring, ASME B16.22, 200 psi. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Project #16-0996 22 11 00 - 2 2. Joints: a. Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver. ASTM B32. b. Press connection, Viega ProPress or approved equal. B. Copper Tubing: Type L hard drawn, rolled grooved ends. ASTM B88. 1. Copper Grooved-End Fittings: ASME B75 copper tube or bronze ASTM B584 bronze castings, with copper tube dimensioned grooved ends (flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not permitted). 2. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476. Victaulic or approved equal. a. Housing Clamps: ASTM A395 and ASTM A536 ductile iron cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads, copper-colored enamel coated, compatible with copper tubing sizes, to engage and lock designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion. b. Gasket: Grade “EHP” EPDM. c. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers. d. Design: “Installation Ready” designed for direct ‘stab’ installation onto roll grooved copper tube without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. Victaulic Style 607 QuickVic™. C. Stainless Steel Piping: ½” through 2” Vic-Press Type 304/304L, Schedule 10S, ASTM A312. 1. Fittings: Austenitic stainless steel, Type 304/304L, complete with synthetic rubber HNBR o-rings (UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for hot (+180°F) and cold (+86°F) potable water service) and pipe stops. 2. Use a Victaulic "PFT" series tool with the proper sized jaw for pressing. 3. Joints: Stainless steel, pressure-sealed, Victaulic Vic Press 304™ D. Stainless Steel Piping: 2” and larger, Type 304/304L, Schedule 10, grooved ends, ASTM A312. 1. Fittings: Stainless steel, factory grooved ends, Type 304/304L, ASTM A312. 2. Joints: Two or more segment cast stainless steel, ASTM A351, A743 and A744. Synthetic rubber gaskets, UL ANSI/NSF-61. Stainless steel, Type 316 bolts. 3. 2 inches through 4 inches may be “Installation Ready” stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. Gasket shall be Grade “EHP” EPDM suitable for hot water up to +250 deg F. Victaulic Style 89. 4. Use Victaulic specific “RX” roll sets when grooving schedule 5 or 10 stainless steel pipe. E. CPVC Pipe (2" and larger): Schedule 80 CPVC, Charlotte Corzan or approved equal. ASTM D1784, ASTM F441, NSF 61. 1. Fittings: Schedule 80 CPVC. ASTM F439, NSF 61. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM F493 two-step solvent cement with primer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Project #16-0996 22 11 00 - 3 F. PEX Pipe: See Section 22 11 16. 2.3 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Manufacturers: Marsh, Trerice, Weiss or approved equal. B. Gauge: Rotary stainless steel movement, 316 stainless steel socket, front calibration adjustment, black scale on white background. ASME B40.1. Trerice 700. 1. Case: 304 stainless steel 2. Bourdon Tube and wetted parts: 316 stainless steel. 3. Dial Size: 4 inch diameter within 7' of floor, 6 inch diameter over 7'. 4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: 1/2 percent. 5. Scale: PSI. 2.4 PRESSURE GAUGE TAPS A. Needle Valve: 316 stainless steel, 1/4 inch NPT for minimum 300 psi. Trerice 735. B. Pulsation Damper: 316 stainless steel, 1/4 inch NPT connections. Trerice 870 C. Pressure Snubber: 316 stainless steel, 1/4 inch NPT connections. Trerice 872 D. Siphon: 316 stainless steel, 1/4 inch NPT angle or straight pattern. Trerice 885. 2.5 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Marsh, Trerice, Weiss or approved equal. B. Thermometer: Blue appearing organic, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with epoxy finish, adjustable angle. ASTM E1. Trerice AX/BX. 1. Size: 7-inch scale within 7' of floor, 9-inch scale mounted over 7'. 2. Window: Clear. 3. Stem: 304SS, 3/4 inch NPT. 4. Accuracy: 2 percent. 5. Calibration: Degrees F. 2.6 AUTOMATIC FLOW BALANCING VALVE A. Manufacturers: Caleffi 127 or approved equal. B. Construction: Low-lead brass body, anti-scale polymer flow cartridge, stainless steel spring, EPDM seals. 200 psi max working pressure. 200 F max temperature. C. Control: Working pressure ranges 2-14 psid or 2-32 psid for flows from 0.5 gpm to 5 gpm. 2.7 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Project #16-0996 22 11 00 - 4 1. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. ANSI Z21.22 certified. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME certified and labeled. ANSI Z21.22 certified. 2.8 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: Apollo/Conbraco, Metraflex, Titan, Nibco or approved equal. B. 4 inch and Smaller: Threaded or Solder, 400 PSI CWP, lead-free bronze body, Y-pattern with 20 mesh stainless steel perforated screen. Apollo 59LF. C. 5 inch and Larger: Flanged, 200 psi CWP, iron body, epoxy coated, Y-pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. Apollo 125YF 2.9 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS (RPBA) A. Manufacturers: Watts or equal by Apollo/Conbraco, Wilkens or approved equal. Must be listed as acceptable by the State of Washington Cross Connection Manual. B. 2 inches and Smaller: Lead-Free. Comply with ASSE 1013. Cast copper silicone body with internal pressure differential relief valve located between two positive seating captured spring check valves, inlet Y-strainer, inlet and outlet shutoff ball valves, ball valve test cocks, replaceable polymer seats and silicone seat discs, air gap drain fitting, 175 psi working pressure, 33-180 F operating temperature range. Watts model LF919. C. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Lead- Free. Comply with ASSE 1013. 300 stainless steel body with internal pressure differential air-in/water-out relief valve located between two positive seating captured spring check valves, epoxy coated inlet Y-strainer, inlet and outlet epoxy coated gate valves, ball valve test cocks, stainless steel internal parts, replaceable stainless steel seats, air gap drain fitting, 175 psi working pressure, 33 -110 F operating temperature range. Watts model 994. 2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: Wade, PPP or approved equal. B. ASSE 1010; stainless steel or copper construction, pre -charged, bellows or piston type sized in accordance with PDI WH-201. 2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Manufacturers: Symmons, Lawler, Powers, Leonard, or approved equal. B. Valve: Lead-Free cast brass body liquid filled thermal motor with bellows, stainless steel piston, integral temperature adjustment control. C. Assembly: Valve and piping assembly with wall mounting bracket, pipe unions, check valve and strainer stop inlets, outlet dial thermometer, outlet ball valve. Factory assembled and tested. Certified to ASSE 1017 standard. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Project #16-0996 22 11 00 - 5 2.12 TEMPERING VALVE (PUBLIC LAV) A. Manufacturers: Symmons, Leonard, Powers or approved equal. B. General: Lead-Free brass and bronze body with brass and stainless steel flow control components with check stops, vandal resistant lockable handle. Certified to ASSE 1070 standard. C. Accessories: 1. Cabinet PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel or groove plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with groove couplings, flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.2 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings. B. Provide connections to site mains as indicated on drawings. C. Grade piping at 1/4” per foot where possible, but in no case less than 1/8” per foot. Install all main vertical soil and waste stacks with provisions for expansion and extend full size to roof line as vents. D. Backfill trenching with pea-gravel if available at site for other purposes. If pea-gravel is unavailable, native soil may be used for backfill if all the following conditions are met. 1. All broken concrete and sharp stones (+1” dia.) to be removed from backfill soil. 2. All large stones (3’ dia. or bigger) to be removed from backfill soil. 3. Piping shall be bedded on min. 2” thickness of replaced “rock free” soil and then checked for grade. E. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 3 ft of cover. F. Estalish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with Code. G. Route pipe in straight line. H. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Project #16-0996 22 11 00 - 6 3.3 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. B. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Install piping on interior side of building insulation. E. Provide heat tape for all piping in unheated areas. F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Protection: Where piping, other than cast iron or steel, is installed in a concealed location through holes or notches in framing (i.e. studs, joists, rafters, etc.), less than 1-1/2 from framing edge, provide shield plates. Shield plates shall be 16 gauge steel and cover the piping area within framing plus 2” on each side along framing. I. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 00. J. Grooved Joints: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's (Victaulic) guidelines and recommendations. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. A factory-trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. Factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. K. Provide access panel where valves and fittings are not accessible. L. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. M. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Provide hose bibb if low point is not at a plumbing fixture. N. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. O. Insulate piping. Refer to Section 22 07 00. P. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 22 05 00. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Project #16-0996 22 11 00 - 7 3.4 INSTALLATION – VIC-PRESS STAINLESS STEEL A. Victaulic’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel prior to installation in the use of PFT tools, application, and installation of products. B. Use Vic-Press in lieu of soldered copper for pipe sizes ½” through 2”. C. Use Vic-Press end valves where possible. Install Vic-Press 304 flange or threaded adapters where flanged or threaded valves are required. D. Victaulic’s representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any joints deemed improperly installed. 3.5 INSTALLATION - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install domestic water piping system in accordance with ASME B31.9. B. Grade piping to drain at low points. Provide hose bibb if low point is not at plumbing fixture. C. Install water piping on interior side of building insulation. Provide heat tape for all piping in unheated areas. D. Install water hammer arrestors on hot and cold water of each fixture group (e.g.: one arrestor may serve each service to a toilet). Select unit sizes and install in accord with PDI Standard WH-201. 3.6 VALVES A. Use ball valves for up to 4” piping. Gate valves are not approved for use up to 4” piping. Gate valves are for 6” piping and larger only. B. Gate valves which are part of a valve assembly are acceptable. 3.7 INSTALLATION - METERS A. Install positive displacement meters in accordance with AWWA M6, with isolating valv es on inlet and outlet. 3.8 INSTALLATION - THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES A. Install pressure gauges on each side of domestic water service assembly (i.e double check, PRV, etc.). B. Install one pressure gauge for each pump, locate taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump; pipe to gauge. C. Install gauge taps in piping. D. Install pressure gauges with pulsation dampers. Provide needle valve or ball valve to isolate each gauge. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Project #16-0996 22 11 00 - 8 E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation. F. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. G. Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. H. Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. 3.9 INSTALLATION - SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new water service complete with approved double check back-flow preventer, pressure reducing valve, by -pass valves, pressure gauges and strainer. B. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced-concrete bridge. Caulk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete wall. C. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch above floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2 inches of loose batt insulation stuffing. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test domestic water piping system at 100 psig minimum for a period of not less than 4 hours. 3.11 CLEANING A. Flush system with water for minimum of 60 minutes to remove all dirt and foreign materials. Use minimum of 80 psi flushing pressure. B. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L. C. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum of 15 percent of outlets. D. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. E. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 16 October 20, 2021 PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project #16-0996 22 11 16 - 1 SECTION 22 11 16 – PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 2765 - Test Methods for Determination of Gel Content and Swell Ratio of Crosslinked Ethylene Plastics. 2. ASTM F 876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 3. ASTM F 877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems. 4. ASTM F 1960 - Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. B. Uponor, Inc. 1. Uponor Professional Plumbing Installation Guide (UPPIG), 2015. 2. Uponor Plumbing Design Assistance Manual (PDAM), 2015. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity with documentation proving successful completion of plumbing system installation and/or training by the PEX tubing manufacturer. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Store PEX tubing in original packaging to avoid dirt or foreign material from entering the tubing. 2. Do not store PEX tubing or EP fittings outdoors or in direct sunlight. Do not use PEX tubing or EP fittings which has be exposed to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: PEX-a manufacturer system warranty shall cover piping and fittings for a duration of 25 years from the date of installation. Piping system warranty shall apply to potable water distribution and water service systems constructed of pipe and fitting products sourced from the same manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 16 October 20, 2021 PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project #16-0996 22 11 16 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Uponor AquaPEX, Rehau Everloc+ or approved equal. 2.2 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PEX-a (Engel-Method Crosslinked Polyethylene) Piping: NSF 61, ASTM F 876 and F877. B. ProPEX Ring: Reinforcing cold-expansion rings shall be manufactured from the same source as PEX-a piping manufacturer and marked ASTM F1960. C. PEX-a Fittings: elbows, adapters, couplings, plugs, tees and multi-port tees (1/2 inch through 3 inch nominal pipe size): ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fitting manufactured from the following material types: 1. UNS No. C69300 Lead-free (LF) Brass, NSF/ANSI 61. 2. Engineered Polymer (EP): UDEL Polysulfone, Radel R Polyphenylsulfone or Acudel modified polyphenylsulfone, ASTM D 6394, NSF/ANSI 61. D. (Below Grade) Pre-Sleeved Ecoflex Potable Piping (3/4 inch through 3 inch nominal pipe size): PEX-a piping, multilayered closed-cell insulation and a corrugated seamless high- density polyethylene (HDPE) jacket. E. (Hot Water) Pre-Insulated Piping (1/2 inch through 1-1/4 inch nominal pipe size): PEX-a piping, with 1” closed-cell polyethylene foam insulation. F. (Hot Water) Pre-Insulated Piping (1-1/2 inch through 2 inch nominal pipe size): PEX-a piping, with 1-1/2” closed-cell polyethylene foam insulation. G. Multi-Port Tees: Not allowed on this project. H. Manifolds: Multiple-outlet assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with ASTM F 1960 outlets. 1. Engineered polymer valved manifold. 2. Engineered polymer valveless manifold. 3. Lead-free copper branch manifold. 4. Lead-free copper valved manifold. 2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. PEX-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Provide fittings from the same manufacturer of the piping. 2. Threaded Brass to PEX-a Transition: one-piece brass fitting with male or female threaded adapter and ASTM F 1960 cold-expansion end, with PEX-a reinforcing cold- expansion ring. 3. Brass Sweat to PEX-a Transition: one-piece brass fitting with sweat adapter and ASTM F 1960 cold-expansion end, with PEX-a reinforcing cold-expansion ring. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 16 October 20, 2021 PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project #16-0996 22 11 16 - 3 4. PEX-a to Flange Transition: Two-piece brass fitting with lead-free ProPEX adapter and steel flange conforming to ASME B 16.5. B. PEX-to-Thermoplastic Transition Fittings: CPVC to PEX-a Transition: Thermoplastic fitting with one spigot or socket end and one ASTM F 1960 cold-expansion end, with PEX-a reinforcing cold-expansion ring. 2.4 VALVES A. PEX-to-PEX (1/2 inch through 2 inch nominal pipe size): 1. Manufacturers: Provide ball valve(s) from the same manufacturer as the piping system. 2. Full-port ball valve: two-piece, ASTM F1960 cold-expansion ends, with PEX-a reinforcing cold-expansion ring. 3. Lead Free (LF) Brass Ball Valve with a positive stop shoulder manufactured from C69300 brass. 4. 250 CWP, ANSI/NSF 359, ANSI/NSF 14/61. B. All other valves per section 22 05 00. 2.5 PIPE SUPPORT A. Horizontal Pipe Support: 23 ga galvanized-steel channel half-round, self-gripping for continuous, uninterrupted support of PEX pipe. Provide with nylon-coated, stainless-steel strapping with minimum 300-lb tensile strength. B. 90-degree bend support: Snap-on metal or glass-reinforced nylon bend support sleeve for ½” and ¾” piping. C. Drop ear bend support: Snap-on metal or glass-reinforced nylon bend support sleeve and stud wall mounting plate for ½” piping. D. Out-of-the-Wall Support System: Wall support bracket, bend support and escutcheon. E. Drop Ear Elbow: 90-degree brass elbow for showerhead. F. Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of sc rap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. Hubbard "HOLDRITE" support systems or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the domestic water piping. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Do not use PEX tubing smaller than ½”. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 16 October 20, 2021 PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project #16-0996 22 11 16 - 4 B. PEX piping up to 1-1/2” may be used on this project. C. ½” and ¾” piping may be run through framing with appropriate isolators. 1” and larger piping shall be supported with hangers. D. Domestic Cold Water: Use Blue PEX tubing. E. Domestic Hot Water: Use Red PEX tubing, pre-insulated. F. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: Use White PEX tubing, pre-insulated. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Maximum hot water pipe length in units shall comply with ESDS 4.4. B. Install plumbing system according to approved shop drawings and coordination drawings. C. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions and design drawings. D. Water velocity in piping for hot water recirculating systems shall not exceed 2 ft/sec. E. Penetrations of tubing through framing members shall be make w ith engineered isolators. F. Piping Installation: 1. Install PEX-a Pipe Supports in compliance with Chapter 5 - "System Design and Layout" and Chapter 6 – “Installation Methods” in the Uponor Plumbing Design Assistance Manual (PDAM). 2. Install piping in compliance with manufacturer's Plumbing Installation Guide. G. Hangers and Supports: 1. Horizontal PEX-a Piping Hangers: Install CTS hangers suitable for PEX-a piping in compliance with Chapter 6 - "Installation Methods" of the Uponor Plumbing Design Assistance Manual (PDAM) and local codes, with the following maximum spacing: a. 1 inch and below: Maximum span, 32 inches. b. 1-1/4 inch and above: Maximum span, 48 inches. c. Note: The above maximum hanger spacing requirements may be extended with the use of a continuous support channel such as Uponor PEX-a Pipe Support. 2. Horizontal PEX-a Piping with PEX-a Pipe Channel: Install hangers for PEX-a piping with horizontal support channel in accordance with local jurisdiction and manufacturer's recommendations, with the following maximum spacing: a. 3/4 inch and below: Maximum span, 6 feet. b. 1 inch and above: Maximum span, 8 feet. 3. Provide pipe support channel for all horizontal piping to control linear thermal expansion. Provide fix transverse and longitudinal support struts every 65 ft for hot water piping and every 150 ft for cold water piping. 4. Vertical PEX-a Piping (<1”): Support PEX-a piping with maximum spacing of 5 feet. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 16 October 20, 2021 PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project #16-0996 22 11 16 - 5 5. PEX-a Riser Supports (1” and larger): Install CTS riser clamps at the base of each floor and at the top of every other floor for domestic hot-water systems. Install mid-story guides between each floor. Install CTS riser clamps at the base of each floor and at the top of every fourth floor for domestic cold-water systems. Install mid-story guides. H. Piping Schedule: 1. Underground / under-building slab, domestic water piping (3 inch and below) shall be the following: a. 1/2 inch through 3 inch - PEX-a piping with engineered polymer (EP) or lead-free brass F1960 cold-expansion fittings. Insulate in compliance with Section - 9 "Plumbing Piping Insulation." Use the fewest possible joints and install per manufacturer's recommendations. b. 1/2 inch through 2 inch - Pre-insulated PEX-a piping with PEX-foam insulation with engineered polymer (EP) or lead-free brass ASTM F 1960 cold-expansion fittings. Use the fewest possible joints and install per manufacturer's recommendations. c. 3/4 inch through 2 inch - Pre-insulated PEX-a piping with multi-layer, closed-closed cell PEX-foam insulation and a corrugated HDPE jacket with engineered p olymer (EP) or lead-free brass ASTM F 1960 cold-expansion fittings. Use the fewest possible joints and install per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. In-slab, domestic water piping (3 inch and below) shall be the following: Bare PEX -a piping, pre-sleeved PEX-a piping, or pre-insulated PEX-a piping with engineered polymer (EP) or lead-free brass F1960 cold-expansion fittings. Use the fewest possible joints and install per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Aboveground domestic water piping (3 inch and below) shall be the following: PEX-a piping, with engineered polymer (EP) or lead-free brass F1960 cold-expansion fittings. I. Pipe Joint Construction: PEX-a Connections: Install per manufacturer's recommendations. Use manufacturer-recommended cold-expansion tool for ASTM F 1960 connections. J. Field Quality Control: Do not expose PEX piping or EP fittings to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. 3.4 CLEARANCES AND WARNINGS A. Do not weld, glue or use adhesives or adhesive tape on PEX tubing. B. Do not apply open flame to PEX tubing or EP fittings. C. Do not install PEX tubing within 6” of any gas appliance vent. D. Do not install PEX tubing within the first 18” of a connection to a water heater. E. Do not install PEX tubing within 12” of any recessed light fixture. F. Do not solder within 18” of any PEX tubing or EP fittings. G. Do not install PEX tubing between the tub/shower valve and tub spout. H. Do not install PEX tubing in direct view of florescent lighting. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 11 16 October 20, 2021 PEX DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Project #16-0996 22 11 16 - 6 I. Do not install PEX tubing within five feet of UV light. J. Prevent direct contact between urethane foam and EP fittings. K. Do not reuse EP fittings. Brass fitting may be disconnected and reused. 3.5 PIPE LABELS A. Use permanent, flexible, vinyl stickers with pressure-sensitive acrylic as approved by piping manufacturer. 3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Where PEX tubing or seismic joints are installed, furnish inspection services by manufacturer's representative and certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and equipment is performing satisfactorily. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 13 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE Project #16-0996 22 13 00 - 1 SECTION 22 13 00 – FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 GENERAL NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe & Fittings: ASTM A888, CISPI 301, hub-less. Made in USA by AB&I, Charlotte or Tyler marked with collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and listed by NSF International. 1. Fittings: Long pattern cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gasket ASTM C-564, all type 304 stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies, 80 in/lbs worm drive. FM-1680, Class 1, CISPI 310 and certified by NSF international. Minimum 4 clamps up to 4”, 6 clamps for 5” and larger. Husky SD 4000, Mission Heavy Weight, Clamp-All or approved equal. B. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 solid wall PVC, bell and spigot solvent sealed ends. NSF Standard 14, ASTM D1785, ASTM D1784. 1. Fittings: Schedule 40, PVC, ASTM D2665. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe & Fittings: ASTM A888, CISPI 301, hub-less. Made in USA by AB&I, Charlotte or Tyler marked with collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and listed by NSF International. 1. Fittings: Long pattern cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gasket ASTM C-564, all type 304 stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies, 80 in/lbs worm drive. FM-1680, Class 1. Husky, Mission, Clamp-All or approved equal. B. Copper Tube (Use only for short piping sections where dimensional constraints require thin wall pipe): ASTM B306 DWV. 1. Fittings: Long Pattern, ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver. C. Steel Pipe (water closet connections only): Schedule 40, galvanized. ASTM A 53. 1. Fittings: Cast Iron, ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. 2. Joints: Threaded. D. [VENT ONLY] ABS Pipe: Schedule 40, ABS, DWV, Cellular Core, bell and spigot style solvent sealed ends (If approved by local authorities). NSF Standard 14, ASTM F628, ASTM D3965. Not for use in air plenum. 1. Fittings: ABS, DWV, ASTM D2661. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 13 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE Project #16-0996 22 13 00 - 2 2. Joints: Solvent weld. ASTM D2235. E. [VENT ONLY] PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 solid wall PVC, bell and spigot solvent sealed ends (If approved by local authorities). NSF Standard 14, ASTM D1785, ASTM D1784. Not for use in air plenum. 1. Fittings: Schedule 40, PVC, ASTM D2665. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.3 EQUIPMENT DRAINS (CONDENSATE) A. Copper Tubing: Type L, hard drawn. ASTM B88. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. B. CPVC Pipe: Schedule 40. ASTM D2846. Not for use in air plenum. 1. Fittings: Schedule 40 CPVC. ASTM D2846. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. ASTM D2846. 2.4 FLOOR DRAINS A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or approved equal. B. General Service: Cast iron body, membrane clamp, adjustable collar, polished nickel bronze strainer, trap primer connection. Provide funnel where scheduled. 2.5 FLOOR SINKS A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or approved equal. B. Cast iron body with white acid resisting porcelain enamel coating on body and grate, sump dome strainer, trap primer connection. 2.6 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: Zurn, J.R. Smith, Josam, Wade or approved equal. B. Exterior or interior vehicle areas: Heavy-Duty round coated cast iron body and cover with bronze plug. C. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame with bronze gasket threaded plug and non-skid cover. D. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and bronze gasket threaded plug. E. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Type of ferrule, top and cover as required for the type of floor construction, finish surface and traffic conditions. Cleanout construction material to match waste piping with anchor flange, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and round depressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 13 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE Project #16-0996 22 13 00 - 3 finished floor areas. For carpet provide marker. For cast iron construction provide bronze gasket threaded plug. F. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Cleanout construction material to match waste piping, line type with round gasket threaded plug, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. For cast iron construction provide bronze gasket threaded plug. G. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical waste stacks. 2.7 BACKWATER VALVES A. Manufacturers: Clean Check or approved equal. B. Check: PVC tee-shaped valve body, top collar with stainless steel thumb screw and bottom collar with PVC flapper. Contractor to provide PVC access riser and traffic rated access cover set flush with finished grade. 2.8 FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING A. 3lb. lead soldered joints and seams, 24 x 24 base pad and counterflashed into pipe. 2.9 TRAP PRIMER A. Manufacturers: PPP, Wade, J.R. Smith, Josam, Watts, Zurn or approved equal. B. Construction: Automatic, bronze body, integral vacuum breaker. 2.10 TRAP SEAL MAINTENANCE DEVICE A. Manufacturers: Sure-Seal, Jay R Smith or approved equal. B. Inline floor drain trap sealer, commercial grade, neoprene rubber diaphragm and rubber sealing gaskets. 2.11 GREASE INTERCEPTORS A. Manufacturers: Schier, Endura or approved equal B. Construction: Made in USA 1. Material: Seamless, rotationally-molded, High Density Polyethylene with minimum 3/8” uniform wall thickness. 2. Rough in: Below grade, provide risers for cover to meet grade. 3. Certified by NSF and listed by IAPMO to ASME A112.14.3 - Grease Interceptors standards, PDI rated at 100 ppm. C. Cover: Water and gas-tight cover with minimum H20 load capacity. D. Accessories: 1. Adjustable riser system for extension to grade 2. Anchor kit (on required for high water table) Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 13 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE Project #16-0996 22 13 00 - 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. B. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. C. Verify and provide required extensions, clamps and drain styles to match floor construction and finish. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate location of floor drains in mechanical spaces with mechanical contractor equipment layout. B. Protect floor drain strainer during construction. C. TRAPS: 1. Install trap seal maintenance devices only where called for on plans or approved by engineer; at all other drain locations provide automatic trap primers. 2. Install automatic trap primers throughout at site drains and floor drains except those located in showers or provided with trap seal maintenance devices. 3. Provide access panels for automatic trap primers. 4. Adjust automatic trap primer pressure setting for proper operation. D. Align square floor drains with floor tiles or parallel with walls. E. Install interceptors with top flush with adjacent surface or grade. Provide quantity and size of vents as indicated in manufacturer’s literature. Terminate vents minimum 10 feet above grade or through roof at a location determined by the architect. 3.3 CONDENSATE PIPING A. Provide condensate piping for air-conditioning and high-efficiency gas fired equipment. Coordinate quantity required with mechanical contractor. Provide minimum 3” deep p-trap at equipment. B. Determine best routing to nearest indirect waste using minimum 3/4” piping with minimum 1/8” per foot slope. Acceptable indirect waste locations are service sink, laundry sink, floor drain or air gap fitting into waste pipe. Provide open drain box or access panel for air gap fitting as approved by local authority. Discharge onto roof or at grade is acceptable if allowed by local code, provide splash block. C. If proper slope cannot be achieved advise Mechanical Contractor to provide condensate pump. 3.4 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 13 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE Project #16-0996 22 13 00 - 5 B. Provide connections to site mains as indicated on drawings. C. Grade piping at 1/4” per foot where possible, but in no case less than 1/8” per foot. Install all main vertical soil and waste stacks with provisions for expansion and extend full size to roof line as vents. D. Install buried ABS piping per ASTM D2321 and ASTM F1668. E. Backfill trenching with pea-gravel if available at site for other purposes. If pea-gravel is unavailable, native soil may be used for backfill if all the following conditions are met. 1. All broken concrete and sharp stones (+1” dia.) to be removed from backfill soil. 2. All large stones (3’ dia. or bigger) to be removed from backfill soil. 3. Piping shall be bedded on min. 2” thickness of replaced “rock free” soil and then checked for grade. F. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 3 ft of cover. G. Establish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with Code. H. Provide piping layout to satisfy the UPC requirements for suds relief. I. Route pipe in straight line. J. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. 3.5 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient at 1/4” per foot where possible, but in no case less than 1/8” per foot. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. B. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Install piping on interior side of building insulation. E. Provide heat tape for all p-traps in unheated areas. F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Protection: Where piping, other than cast iron or steel, is installed in a concealed location through holes or notches in framing (i.e. studs, joists, rafters, etc.), less than 1-1/2 from framing edge, provide shield plates. Shield plates shall be 16 gauge steel and cover the piping area within framing plus 2” on each side along framing. I. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 13 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE Project #16-0996 22 13 00 - 6 J. Provide access panel where valves and fittings are not accessible. K. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. L. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot minimum. Provide 1/8 inch per foot only where necessary and allowed by local jurisdiction. Maintain gradients. M. Provide piping layout to satisfy the UPC requirements for suds relief. N. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. O. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. P. Insulate piping. Refer to Section 22 07 00. Q. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 22 05 00. 3.6 INSTALLATION - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS A. Install sanitary waste and vent piping systems in accordance with ASME B31.9 and local plumbing code. B. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. C. Flash and counterflash. Install vents passing through roof with roof flashing and counterflashing assemblies. 3lb. lead soldered joints and seams, 24 x 24 base pad and counterflashed into pipe. D. Install automatic trap primers throughout at floor drains except those located in showers. Provide access panel for trap primers. E. Provide piping layout to satisfy the UPC requirements for suds relief. F. Provide cleanouts every 50 feet and install at all locations required by code and to permit cleaning of all waste piping. Provide cleanouts full size of pipe, but no larger than 4”. Coordinate with Architect when cleanouts are located in finished rooms. Install cleanout threads with graphite. Locate cleanouts to clear cabinet work and to be easily accessible. 3.7 INSTALLATION – BACKWATER VALVES A. Label all cleanouts upstream of a backwater valve with a permanent label which reads “Backwater Valve Downstream”. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain written approval of local Plumbing Authority prior to covering or concealing any work. B. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system to hydrostatic test of 10 feet head of water. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 14 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Project #16-0996 22 14 00 - 1 SECTION 22 14 00 – FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe & Fittings: ASTM A888, CISPI 301, hub-less. Made in USA by AB&I, Charlotte or Tyler marked with collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and listed by NSF International. 1. Fittings: Long pattern cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gasket ASTM C-564, all type 304 stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies, 80 in/lbs worm drive. FM-1680, Class 1, CISPI 310 and certified by NSF international. Minimum 4 clamps up to 4”, 6 clamps for 5” and larger. Husky SD 4000, Mission Heavy Weight, Clamp-All or approved equal. B. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 solid wall PVC, bell and spigot solvent sealed ends. NSF Standard 14, ASTM D1785, ASTM D1784. 1. Fittings: Schedule 40, PVC, ASTM D2665. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.2 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888, CISPI 301, hub-less. Made in USA by AB&I, Charlotte or Tyler marked with collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and listed by NSF International. 1. Fittings: Long pattern cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gasket ASTM C-564, all type 304 stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies, 80 in/lbs worm drive. FM-1680, Class 1. Husky, Mission, Clamp-All or approved equal. 2.3 ROOF DRAINS A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or approved equal. B. Coated cast iron body with aluminum dome, membrane flange and clamp, underdeck clamp, roof sump receiver, waterproofing flange, adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. On overflow drains provide 2” internal water dam. 2.4 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLE A. Manufacturers: Zurn Z-199 or approved equal. B. Construction: Nickel bronze body, decorative face wall flange, outlet “cow’s tongue” nozzle, stainless steel screen. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 14 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Project #16-0996 22 14 00 - 2 2.5 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: Zurn, J.R. Smith, Josam, Wade or approved equal. B. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame with bronze gasket threaded plug and non-skid cover. C. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and bronze gasket threaded plug. D. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Type of ferrule, top and cover as required for the type of floor construction, finish surface and traffic conditions. Cleanout construction material to match waste piping with anchor flange, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and round depressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. For carpet provide marker. For cast iron construction provide bronze gasket threaded plug. E. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Cleanout construction material to match waste piping, line type with round gasket threaded plug, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. For cast iron construction provide bronze gasket threaded plug. F. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify and provide required extensions, clamps and drain styles to match deck or roof construction and finish. 3.2 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings. B. Provide connections to site mains as indicated on drawings. C. Grade piping at 1/4” per foot where possible, but in no case less than 1/8” per foot. Install all main vertical soil and waste stacks with provisions for expansion and extend full size to roof line as vents. D. Backfill trenching with pea-gravel if available at site for other purposes. If pea-gravel is unavailable, native soil may be used for backfill if all the following conditio ns are met. 1. All broken concrete and sharp stones (+1” dia.) to be removed from backfill soil. 2. All large stones (3’ dia. or bigger) to be removed from backfill soil. 3. Piping shall be bedded on min. 2” thickness of replaced “rock free” soil and then checked for grade. E. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 3 ft of cover. F. Establish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with Code. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 14 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Project #16-0996 22 14 00 - 3 G. Route pipe in straight line. H. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. I. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. B. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Install piping on interior side of building insulation. E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Protection: Where piping, other than cast iron or steel, is installed in a concealed location through holes or notches in framing (i.e. studs, joists, rafters, etc.), less than 1-1/2 from framing edge, provide shield plates. Shield plates shall be 16 gauge steel and cover the piping area within framing plus 2” on each side along framing. H. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. I. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot minimum. Provide 1/8 inch per foot only where necessary and allowed by local jurisdiction. Maintain gradie nts. J. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. K. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. L. Insulate piping. Refer to Section 22 07 00. M. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 22 05 00. 3.4 INSTALLATION - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install storm drainage piping systems in accordance with ASME B31.9 and local plumbing code. B. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 14 00 October 20, 2021 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE Project #16-0996 22 14 00 - 4 C. Provide cleanouts every 50 feet and install at all locations required by code and to permit cleaning of all waste piping. Provide cleanouts full size of pipe, but no larger that 4”. Coordinate with Architect when cleanouts are located in finished rooms. Install cleanout threads with graphite. Locate cleanouts to clear cabinet work and to be easily accessible. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain written approval of local Plumbing Authority prior to covering or concealing any work. B. Test storm piping system to hydrostatic test of 10 feet head of water. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 23 00 October 20, 2021 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 22 23 00 - 1 SECTION 22 23 00 – NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment. C. Use ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code. B. Perform work in accordance with applicable code and local gas company requirements. C. Furnish shutoff valves complying with ASME B16.33 or ANSI Z21.15. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Refer to plans for meter location and coordinate with the Gas Company for installation and size. Facilitate application for gas service and pay all charges necessary for complete installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black, seamless. Manufactured in the USA. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.9, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2.2 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black, seamless. Manufactured in the USA. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: 2 inch and smaller pipe - Threaded. 3. Joints: 2-1/2 inches and larger pipe – welded. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 23 00 October 20, 2021 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 22 23 00 - 2 B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black, seamless. Manufactured in the USA. 1. Fittings: Compression type, Viega MegaPress G, ANSI LC4-2012, zinc and nickel coating, HNBR sealing element, 420 stainless steel grip ring, 304 stainless steel separator ring and smart connect feature. 2. Joints: 2 inch and smaller pipe - Viega MegaPress G Ridgid tool press. C. Copper Tubing: Type L hard drawn. ASTM B88. 1. Fittings: Compression type, Viega ProPress G, copper alloy. 2. Joints: 2 inch and smaller pipe – Viega ProPress G Ridgid tool press. 2.3 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: Nibco, Stockham, Milwaukee, or approved equal. B. 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch (appliance shutoff valve): 1/2 psi rated for indoor appliance connections per ANSI Z21.15. Forged brass body, chrome plated brass ball, fluorocarbon o-rings, brass stem, painted aluminum lever handle. (Nibco G10) C. 1/4 inch to 1 inch: MSS SP 110, Class 125, two piece, threaded ends, bronze body, chrome plated bronze ball, reinforced teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, UL 842 listed for flammable liquids and LPG, full port. (Nibco T585-70-UL) D. 1-1/4 inch to 3 inch: MSS SP 110, Class 125, two piece, threaded ends, bronze body, chrome plated bronze ball, reinforced teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, UL 842 listed for flammable liquids and LPG, conventional port. (Nibco T580-70-UL) 2.4 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Tubing: Annealed, 304 stainless steel, ASTM A240 B. Fittings: Brass or stainless steel. C. Coating: Yellow polymer. 2.5 QUICK CONNECT FITTING A. Manufacturers: T&S or approved equal. B. 3/4" one-way shut-off coupling and plug body. Bass body construction with stainless steel internal parts. 2.6 EARTHQUAKE VALVE A. Manufacturers: California Seismic Valves 300 series or approved equal. B. Valve shall be full size of pipe off meter. No external electrical power required. Swing check valve arrangement with an acceleration sensitive triggering mechanism. Trip mechanism consists of steel ball. Horizontal motion of an earthquake triggers shut off. Manual reset. Sight glass indicates open or closed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 23 00 October 20, 2021 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 22 23 00 - 3 2.7 STRAINERS A. 2 inch and Smaller: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. B. 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.8 NATURAL GAS PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: Fisher, Maxitrol or approved equal. B. Product Description: Quick-reacting, low-shock natural gas, spring loaded pressure regulator, ductile Iron body, aluminum casings and orifice, nitrile diaphragm a nd o-rings, full internal relief, 125 psi inlet rated. Threaded or flanged ends depending on size. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GAS METERS AND DISTRIBUTION A. Refer to plans for meter location and coordinate with the Gas Company for installation and size. Facilitate application for gas service and pay all charges necessary for complete installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside of pipe, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install earthquake value at location of exterior gas meter. B. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code. C. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert. D. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 2 ft of cover. E. Establish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with code. F. Install pipe on prepared bedding. G. Route pipe in straight line. H. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. I. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe and buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe line. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 23 00 October 20, 2021 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 22 23 00 - 4 3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Provide flexible pipe at connections to all equipment. Use sufficient length to allo w for 4” of movement. D. Grade horizontal pipe not less than ¼” in 15 feet. E. Route piping in orderly manner and to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Provide 6” long drip leg at bottom of vertical pipe. H. Take from top or side of horizontal pipe. I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. J. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. K. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. L. Provide clearance for access to valves and fittings. M. Provide access doors where valves and fittings are not exposed. N. Do not embed any building service low pressure pipe in concrete, in masonry, or below grade. Install such pipe in Schedule 40 welded pipe sleeves and vent to roof. O. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility company. P. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. Q. Install identification on piping systems. R. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. S. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 23 00 October 20, 2021 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 22 23 00 - 5 3.5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. If PRV is installed indoors, and is not the ventless type, determine routing to an approved location and provide independent relief pipe to outside. Size relief vent pipe full port size, ¾” minimum. Increase vent pipe size one pipe size for lengths greater than 15’. Increase vent pipe size two pipe sizes for lengths greater than 25’. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure test natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code. B. Subject pipe to air pressure of 60 psig for 30 minutes with no perceptible drop in pressure. C. When pressure tests do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 30 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 22 30 00 - 1 SECTION 22 30 00 – PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide plastic venting and combustion air for water heaters and boilers in this section. 1.2 COORDINATION A. For equipment which requires metal venting coordinate required material and location with Division 23. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Water Heater Performance Requirements: Equipment efficiency not less than prescribed by Seattle Energy Code and scheduled on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS (MODULATING) A. Manufacturers: Laars, HTP Phoenix, Bock or approved equal. B. Type: Automatic, natural gas, modulating, condensing, sealed combustion. C. Controls: Electronic water thermostat with adjustable temperature range from 120 to 160 degrees F with LED display; Automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat, low water cutoff, upper hot water sensor, lower cold water sensor, gas pressure regulator, modulating burner. D. Accessories: 1. Temperature and pressure relief valve. 2.2 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE EXPANSION TANKS A. Manufacturers: Amtrol, Armstrong or approved equal. B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII; with pre-charged flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank; steel ring base (vertical) or saddles (horizontal) C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain. D. Installation: Before installation, charge tank with Nitrogen gas to equal domestic water line pressure at tank. Permanently mark fill pressure on tank. 2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Armstrong ARMflo E Series or similar by B&G, Taco or approved equal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 30 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 22 30 00 - 2 B. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with dry motor for in -line mounting, for 150 psig maximum working pressure. C. Casing: bronze with flanged pump connections. D. Impeller: 30% glass-filled noryl. E. Bearings: Sealed, permanently lubricated stainless steel. F. Shaft: Stainless steel. G. Seal: Silicon carbide enviroseal with viton eleastomer. 230 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. H. Drive: Two pole, single phase. I. Accessories: 1. 24 hour timer control. 2. Temperature sensor. 3. P/T test plugs 2.4 FLUE AND COMBUSTION AIR PIPING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 solid wall, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2665, Schedule 40, PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. Prime joints with a contrasting color. B. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M, Schedule 40 solid wall, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM F438, CPVC, Schedule 40, socket type. 2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. Prime joints with a contrasting color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION – WATER HEATER A. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over water heaters. B. Install water heater on conc rete housekeeping pad, minimum 18 inches high and 6 inches larger than water heater base on each side. For electric water heaters include incompressible insulated surface (R-10 min). C. Anchor or strap to structure to resist horizontal displacement due to earthqu ake. IAPMO listed, galvanized steel, double body straps, Hubbard or approved equal. D. Connect domestic hot water and domestic cold water piping to water heater connections. E. Install the following piping accessories. Refer to Section 22 11 00. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 30 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 22 30 00 - 3 1. On cold water: a. Strainer. b. Shutoff ball valve. 2. On hot water: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Shutoff ball valve. F. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain or indirect waste location. Determine best routing. G. Provide pan where required or specified. H. Install water heater trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting. I. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. J. Install control wiring between water heater control panel and field mounted control devices. 3.2 INSTALLATION – NATURAL GAS FIRED A. Connect natural gas piping to water heater in accordance with NFPA 54, full size of water heater gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner removal and service. B. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 22 23 00. 1. Shutoff valve. C. Connect flue to water heater outlet, full size of outlet. 3.3 INSTALLATION - FLUE AND COMBUSTION AIR PIPING A. Install flue and vent piping per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Note maximum allowable venting length. B. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Protection: Where piping, other than cast iron or steel, is installed in a concealed location through holes or notches in framing (i.e. studs, joists, rafters, etc.), less than 1-1/2 from framing edge, provide shield plates. Shield plates shall be 16 gauge steel and cover the piping area within framing plus 2” on each side along framing. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 30 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 22 30 00 - 4 G. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. H. Provide factory vent and combustion air terminations. Flash and seal piping penetrating building exterior to maintain integrity of assembly. I. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 22 05 00. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PUMPS A. Provide pumps to operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. B. Install long radius reducing elbows or reducers between pump and piping. Support piping adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, install supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. C. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide suppor ts under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and larger. D. Where appropriate, lubricate pumps before start-up. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 40 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING FIXTURES Project #16-0996 22 40 00 - 1 SECTION 22 40 00 – PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. All china fixtures shall be white or manufacturer’s standard unless otherwise indicated. B. Ensure that that all china fixtures install in a room or area are the exact same color and hue, especially if from different manufacturers. C. Fixtures by type and material shall be of the same manufacturer except when scheduled or approved otherwise. D. Tank type water closets shall have a minimum MaP (Maximum Performance) of 500 g. E. Fixtures shall be designed or equipped to meet the following water use efficiency standards: 1. Water closets (tank or flush valve) 1.28 GPF 2. Shower heads 1.5 GPM 3. Lavatory faucets (Private) 0.5 GPM 4. Lavatory faucets (Public) 0.5 GPM 5. Kitchen faucets 1.5 GPM PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS A. Manufacturers: Kohler, or approved equal. B. Floor Mount (ADA): white, vitreous china, 10” or 12” rough-in, 17-1/2” rim height, ADA compliant, 1-1/2” top spud, elongated bowl, siphon jet, 2-1/4” passageway, china bolt caps. 2.2 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS A. Not allowed on this project. 2.3 FLUSH VALVES A. Manufacturers: Sloan, Zurn, no equal. B. Water Closet (Manual): Quiet, exposed, diaphragm type, chrome plated flush valve with synthetic rubber diaphragm, dual filtered fixed bypass, ADA compliant non-hold open triple seal handle, angle stop, adjustable tailpiece, back pressure vacuum breaker, escutcheon. 2.4 WATER CLOSET SEATS A. Manufacturers: Bemis, Olsonite or approved equal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 40 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING FIXTURES Project #16-0996 22 40 00 - 2 2.5 HOSE BIBBS A. Manufacturers: Woodford, Zurn, JR Smith or approved equal. B. Exterior (Freeze Proof): Automatic draining, freezeless, hose connection backflow protection, two check valves, 3/4” hose thread, loose key handle, wall clamp. 2.6 RECESSED VALVE BOX A. Manufacturers: Guy Gray, Acorn, Oatey, Sioux Chief or approved equal. B. General: Box construction shall match fire rating of wall. C. Washing Machine: 2” drain socket, 3/4” hot & cold brass valves, wall brackets, face plate. D. Water: 1/4 turn brass ball valve with recessed wall box, wall brackets, face plate. 2.7 FIXTURE SUPPLIES A. Manufacturers: Brass Craft or approved equal. B. Chrome plated brass angle stops with fixed key metal handle and chrome plated escutcheon. Chrome plated copper flexible supplies for exposed connections, braided supplies acceptable where concealed. Provide stop and supply type as applicable to specific fixtures. 2.8 TRAPS A. Manufacturers: Brass Craft, Dearborn Brass or approved equal. B. Adjustable type, polished chrome plated brass with escutcheon. Provide type as applicable to specific fixture installation. PVC acceptable only where concealed. 2.9 LAVATORY INSULATION KIT A. Manufacturers: Truebro, Plumberex, or approved equal. B. Where lavatories or sinks have exposed traps or supplies furnish the following for ADA compliance: Safety Covers conforming to ANSI A177.1 and consisting of insulation kit of molded closed cell vinyl construction, 3/16 inch thick, white color, for insulating tailpiece, P- trap, valves, and supply piping. Furnish with weep hole and angle valve access covers , antimicrobial, with flush reusable fasteners. 2.10 CARRIERS A. Manufacturers: Wade, J.R. Smith, Zurn, Josam or approved equal. B. Lavatory: Provide concealed arm carriers for all wall mounted lavatories. Coated steel uprights with welded feet, cast iron adjustable headers, concealed arms, lugs for floor and wall attachment, steel sleaves, alignment truss. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 40 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING FIXTURES Project #16-0996 22 40 00 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics. C. For all lavatories and sinks verify required number of holes and hole spacing before ordering. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures and in accordance with manufacturer's details. B. Locate fixtures in accordance with architectural drawings, details on structural drawings and/or Engineer's direction in field. Mount ADA fixtures according to dimensions on architectural drawings. C. If drain, tailpiece, strainer or other accessories are not furnished by fixture manufacturer then provide accessories by Brass Craft or approved equal. D. Provide vandal proof features on faucets, aerators, bubblers and pop-up waste assemblies on fixtures in public areas. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install shut-off valves on water lines servicing a fixture group. B. Support piping at stop, valve or flush valve. C. Align fixtures and equipment installed in accord with architectural drawings. D. Locate shower head mounting height 80” minimum from drain to centerline of head pipe. E. Locate shower curtain rod minimum 6’-3” AFF (verify with architect). F. Locate floor service sink (mop sink) faucet rough-in at 36” AFF. G. Locate water recessed valve boxes for refrigerators at 18” AFF. H. Locate water recessed valve boxes for coffee makers per architectural plans. I. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with silicon sealant, color to match fixture. J. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. K. For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 40 00 October 20, 2021 PLUMBING FIXTURES Project #16-0996 22 40 00 - 4 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop-drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and ordering. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. B. Adjust flush lever or valve for intended flow rate and operation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 60 00 October 20, 2021 MEDICAL GAS EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 22 60 00 - 1 SECTION 22 60 00 – MEDICAL GAS EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of NFPA 99. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section includes piping and installation of controls and associated equipment and materials for dental compressed air and vacuum. B. The Medical Gas Vendor shall be responsible for furnishing all wall outlets /slides, air compressor, vacuum pump, and accessories and appurtenances for a complete and operable system in compliance with NFPA 99. Vendor shall certify system and provide vacuum pump and air compressor startup. See Section 22 69 00. C. This section includes coordination of system components and line sizes and lo cations between installer and vendor prior to installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All piping equipment, installation and testing shall conform to the latest editions (including changes and revisions) of the following Codes and Standards: 1. NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities. 2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 3. CSA Z305.1-1992 Non-flammable Medical Gas Piping Systems. 4. ASTM B819 Standard Specifications for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas Systems 5. AWS A5.8 Brazing Filler Metal. B. Comply with Federal, State and Local Codes applicable to this installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS A. Piping: All distribution system piping shall be Type “L” washed and degreased, seamless copper tubing, provided with protective caps at both ends. Where concealed it shall be soft temper and where exposed it shall be hard temper. B. Fittings: All fittings shall be of wrought copper, brass or bronze, designed expressly for brazed silver solder connections. C. Brazing Alloy: Fittings shall be assembled using a silver brazing alloy confirming to AWS classifications BcuP-5. Purge with nitrogen during pipefitting. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 60 00 October 20, 2021 MEDICAL GAS EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 22 60 00 - 2 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering shall conform to NFPA 99. Specific examples are noted in the table below. Service Background Color Letter Color Legend Medical Air Yellow Black MEDICAL AIR Medical Vacuum White Black MEDICAL VACUUM B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. 2.3 VALVES, STATION OUTLETS, MANIFOLDS AND ALARMS A. Vendor to hand to Division 22 65 00 for installation by Division 22 65 00. 2.4 VACUUM PUMP A. Handed to Division 22 65 00 by medical gas vendor. Division 22 65 00 to install pump and provide connection to pump. 2.5 DENTAL AIR COMPRESSOR A. Handed to Division 22 65 00 by medical gas vendor. Division 22 65 00 to install compressor and provide connection to compressor. 2.6 LINE PRESSURE ALARMS AND ZONE VALVES A. Handed to Division 22 65 00 by medical gas vendor for installation by Division 22 65 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES A. Install in accord with NFPA 99 and manufacturers recommendations. B. Installer shall be a Certified Medical Gas Pipefitter. 3.2 LABELS A. Provide per NFPA 99. B. Indicate direction of flow and nonstandard pressures. C. Provide at 20' intervals. D. Provide at least once in or above every room E. Provide on both sides of wall or partitions and at least once in every story for risers. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 60 00 October 20, 2021 MEDICAL GAS EQUIPMENT Project #16-0996 22 60 00 - 3 3.3 TESTS A. Piping: Subject pipe to air pressure of 150 to 200 PSIG of oil-free, dry air in accord with NFPA 99. B. Systems: Test piping systems in accordance with Section 22 69 00. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 69 00 October 20, 2021 MEDICAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM CERTIFICATION Project #16-0996 22 69 00 - 1 SECTION 22 69 00 – MEDICAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM CERTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The general and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of NFPA 99. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section includes testing and certification of dental compressed and vacuum systems to include a written report furnished to the owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TESTING A. A step-by-step checklist must be followed to ensure that every aspect of the medical gas and vacuum system is tested properly. B. Prior to having the system certified, the plumbing contractor shall perform items C, D, E, F, G and local inspectors will typically inspect these. C. Clean the piping system by clearing it with pressurized, oil-free dry air or nitrogen. This cleaning shall be performed just after the installation of the piping system, but before the installation of the alarm switches, manifolds, pressure gauges, and other “peripheral” components. D. Visually inspect each brazed joint. This inspection shall be done to make sure that the brazing alloy has been properly applied to the joint and that there are no discernible defects. During the inspection, excess flux shall be removed. E. Before the wallboard application, pressurize each section of the piping system to 150 psig using oil-free dry air or nitrogen. After the system has been pressurized, each joint shall be checked for leakage using a soap water solution of other nontoxic leak -detecting agent. If leaks are detected, the system shall be repaired and re-tested. F. After testing each individual medical gas system, the completely assembled station outlets and all other components shall be installed, and subjected to a 24 hour standing pressure test at 20 percent above normal operated line pressure. This test gas shall be oil-free, dry nitrogen. The source valve shall be closed. Leaks, if any, shall be located, repaired and re-tested. G. Each dedicated gas system shall be tested with oil-free, dry nitrogen, to verify that there are no cross-connection to any other system. To determine the presence of cross-connections to any other system. To determine the presence of cross-connections is to pressurize only one system to 50 psig at a time, and then test each outlet to verify that the gas exists only at each of the expected outlets. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 69 00 October 20, 2021 MEDICAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM CERTIFICATION Project #16-0996 22 69 00 - 2 H. Each dedicated gas system shall be purged of contaminants by flushing with the appropriate source gas while under system pressure. The piping system for each gas shall be purged by successively opening each outlet in progressive order, starting with the outlet that is nearest the pressure source and ending at the outlet that is farthest from the pressure source. The gas shall be purged through a white cloth material at a flow rate of at least 100 liters per minute until there is no longer any evidence of discoloration or particulate. It is also important to purge for a sufficiently long time so that all of the test gas previously used has been removed from the system. Start-up, testing and certification of the medical gas systems shall be conducted by a factory trained representative with a minimum of five- (5) years of experience in medical gas pipeline testing and certification. Proof of two million dollars liability insurance should be requested by the Owner/General Contractor. After successful start-up of all systems and components, vital information regarding the proper operation of the equipment shall be made a part of the medical gas certification. This shall include, but not be limited to: 1. The dental air compressor 2. The dental vacuum pump 3. The outlets I. Cross-Connection Test: 1. After closing of walls and completion of requirements of NFPOA 99-1993 4-5.1.2, it shall be determined that no cross-connection of piping systems exists. All medical gas systems shall be reduced to atmospheric pressure. All sources of test gas from all of the medical gas systems, with the exception of the one system to be checked, shall be disconnected. This system shall be pressurized with oil-free nitrogen to 50 psig (350 kPa gauge). With appropriate adapter matching outlet labels, each individual station outlet of all medical gas systems installed shall be checked to determine that test gas is being dispensed only from the outlets of the medical gas system being tested. 2. The source of test gas shall be disconnected and the system tested reduced to atmospheric pressure. Proceed to test each additional piping system in accordance with G (1). 3. Where a medical vacuum piping system is installed, the cross-connection testing shall include that piped vacuum system with all medical gas piping systems. 4. The presence and correctness of labeling required by this standard for all components (e.g., station outlets, shutoff valves, and signal panels) shall be verified. J. Valve Test: 1. Valves installed in each dental gas piping system shall be tested to verify proper operation and rooms or areas of control. K. Flow Test: 1. All outlets shall be tested for flow. Tests shall be performed with the use of oil-free, dry nitrogen as described in CGA P-9, Inert Gases: Argon, Nitrogen and Helium. 2. Oxygen outlets shall deliver 3.5 SCFM with a pressure drop of no more than 5 psig (35 kPa), and static pressure of 50 psig (349 kPa). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 69 00 October 20, 2021 MEDICAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM CERTIFICATION Project #16-0996 22 69 00 - 3 L. Piping Purge Test. In order to remove any traces of particulate matter deposited in the pipelines as a result of construction, a heavy, intermittent purging of the pipeline shall be done. The appropriate adapter shall be obtained from the facility or manufacturer, and high purge rates of least 225 L per min. (8 cfm) shall be put on each outlet. After the purge is started, it shall be rapidly interrupted several times until the purge produces no discoloration in a white cloth loosely held over the adapter during the purge. In order to avoid possible damage to the outlet and its components, this test shall not be conducted using any implement other than the proper adapter. For each positive-pressure gas system, cleanliness of piping system shall be verified. Filter a minimum of 35 cu ft (1000 L) of gas through a clean, white 0.45 micron filter at a minimum flow of 3.5 SCFM (100 Lpm). Filter shall show no discoloration, and shall accrue no more than 0.1 mg of matter. Each zone shall be tested at the outlet most remote from the source. Test shall be performed with the use of oil-free, dry nitrogen described in CGA P-9. M. Piping Purity Test. For each positive-pressure system, the purity of the piping system shall be verified. Test each zone at the most remote outlet for dew point, total hydrocarbons (as methane), and halogenated hydrocarbons, and compare with source gas. The two tests shall in no case exceed variation as specified in the Maximum Allowable Variation Table, which follows. Test shall be performed with the use of oil-free nitrogen gas as described in CGA P-9. Maximum Allowable Variation Table Dew Point 5C @ 50 psig Total Hydrocarbons as Methane  1 ppm Halogenated Hydrocarbons 2 ppm N. Final Tie-in Test. Prior to connection of any work or any extension or addition to an existing piping system, the test in (G) through (L) shall be successfully performed. After connection to the existing system and before use of addition for patient care, the tests in (N) through (P) shall be completed. Permanent records of these tests shall be maintained in accordance with NFPA 99-1993 4-6.3.1. The final connection between the addition and existing system shall be leak -tested with the gas of system designation at the normal operating pressure. This pressure shall be maintained until each joint has been examined for leakage by means of soapy water or other equally effective means of leak detection safe for use with oxygen. O. Operational Pressure Test: 1. Piping systems, with the exception of nitrogen systems, shall maintain pressure at 50 +5/-0 psig (345 +35/-0 kPa gauge) at all station outlets at the maximum flow rate in (N) and (d). 2. Piping systems that vary from the normal pressures in (N) (a) and (b) shall be capable of delivering flows and pressures consistent with their intended use. 3. Record air delivery for compressed air outlets. This is typically 2 SCFM with a pressure drop of no more than 5 psig (35 kPa) and static pressure of 50 psig (350 kPa) for drills and 3 SCFM at 30 psi for low pressure tools. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 22 69 00 October 20, 2021 MEDICAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM CERTIFICATION Project #16-0996 22 69 00 - 4 2.2 CERTIFICATION REPORT A. Present to the owner a notarized Letter of Pipeline Certification from the equipment manufacturer, which Letter of Certification shall indicate: 1. That the system is free of cross-connections, 2. That all system components perform to the manufacturer’s design specifications. 3. That all system components, particularly the medical air compressor and vacuum pump controls and the alarm system, have been adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations; and 4. Pipe testing as detailed in 22 69 00, 2.1 has been performed. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 1 SECTION 23 00 00 – HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and Division 01 - General Requirements for all work in Division 23. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials and appliances necessary for satisfactory installation of mechanical work ready to operate in strict accordance with these specifications and drawings. Work of Division 23 includes, but is not limited to, that as delineated in the following specification sections: 23 00 00 HVAC General Conditions 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 72 00 Energy Recovery Units 23 74 00 Outdoor Air Handling Units 23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioning Units and Heat Pumps 23 81 43 Air-Cooled, Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pumps B. Related Sections: 016000 Product Requirements 017419 Construction Waste Management 018113 LEED Requirements 018116 LEED Submittal Forms 018119 Construction Indoor Air Quality 019113 General Commissioning Requirements 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to following code and agency requirements having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation. 1. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with local amendments. 2. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with local amendments. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 2 3. International Building Code (IBC) with local amendments. 4. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) with local amendments. 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. 6. Requirements of OSHA and EPA. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes and Stand ards. 8. ASME code for construction of pressure vessels. 9. American Gas Association (AGA) Standards. 10. ASTM, ANSI and NEMA standards, as referenced in subsequent sections. 11. Local Sewer District Requirements. 12. Local Water District Requirements. 13. Local Health Department Requirements. 14. Washington State Energy Code. 15. LEED Silver level requirements. 1.4 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. Comply with project requirements to achieve LEED V4.0 Silver Certification. B. Comply with Construction Waste Management plan. Refer to Division 1. C. LEED-Compliant Products: Inside the building envelope, use materials that contain acceptable or lower levels of VOC, per referenced standards (SCAQMD Rule #1168 & #1113, Green Seal GS-03, GS-011, GS-036, etc.) and no added urea-formaldehyde. Cleaning products used during construction and close-out procedures shall meet Green Seal standards GS-34, GS-37, and SG-40, or the California Code of Regulations, Title 17 Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products. D. Commissioning activities and submittals: Refer to Divisions 1, 22, and 23. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to Seattle Building Code with local amendments, FM, and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 hp, plus connected piping and ductwork. C. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as follows: 1. 5 hp and less: 1 inch 2. Over 5 hp: 2 inch 1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Manufacturers and models of equipment and material indicated herein and on drawings are those upon which mechanical design is based. Other manufacturers with products Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 3 considered equal in general quality may be listed without specific model designation. Manufacturers not listed shall be submitted for approval, see Division 01. B. Substitutions will be evaluated based on product manufacturer only. Specific product model, specifications, options and accessories will be evaluated during submittals. Approval of a manufacturer substitution does not constitute approval of the submitted product. C. Any equipment other than the basis of design is considered a substitution. D. In selecting substitute equipment, the Contractor is responsible for and shall guarantee equal performance and fit. Cost of redesign and all additional costs i ncurred to accommodate the substituted equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Unless indicated otherwise, “or approved” may be assumed for all products in Division 23. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Provide one electronic copy of product data submittals for all products listed under “Part 2 Products” of Division 23 and all additional products noted on drawings or required for completion of sequence of operations. B. Electronic: Submittals shall be complete in one PDF file with bookmarks for each Division. Multi-part submittals will be returned without review. 1. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. 2. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item. 3. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing in index. C. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation (Tag) and/or specification section, as applicable. Indicate selected model and all accessories intended for use. D. Equipment vendor cover page with contact information shall precede submittal by that vendor. E. Submitted product information shall include (as applicable) but not be limited to the following information: 1. Product description 2. Manufacturer and model 3. Dimensions 4. Performance Ratings (i.e. capacity, rpm, HP, temperature) 5. Construction Materials 6. Ratings (i.e. UL, ASTM, NEMA, etc) 7. Electrical data 8. Sound level data (corresponding to scheduled values) 9. Vibration Isolation Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 4 10. Controls and wiring diagrams 11. Accessories 12. Engineering technical data (i.e. pressure drops, leakage rates, pump curves, fan curves) F. If requested by Architect or Engineer, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions on any equipment, procedures, or certifications so requested. G. Do no ordering, fabrication or manufacturing of products until return of approved submittals. H. See specification section 01 81 13 for LEED submittal requirements. I. The Contractor is responsible for providing the Commissioning Authority with copies of the following information for inclusion in the Systems Manual. The Commissioning Authority will compile the final Systems Manual based on the contractor submitted documentation along with additional material provided by the Commissioning Authority. 1. As-built documents. 2. Description of systems, including capabilities and limitations. 3. Operating procedures for all normal, abnormal, and emergency modes of operation. 4. Sequence of operation as actually implemented, with control system data including all set points, calibration data, etc. 5. Location of all control sensors and test ports. 6. Seasonal start-up and shutdown procedures. 7. Control schematics and computer graphics. 8. Complete terminal interface procedures and capabilities for DDC sytems. 9. A list of recommended operation recordkeeping procedures including sample forms, trend logs, or others, and a rationale for each. 10. Maintenance procedures. 1.8 LEED RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND ACTIVITIES A. Credits EAp3 and EA3: Provide energy metering collection and graphic dashboard available on the world wide web. B. Waste Management: Comply with General Contractor’s waste management program to obtain LEED credits. C. Provide airflow monitoring for all units that deliver outside air. D. Provide commissioning documentation per EA Prerequisite 1 and as the Commissioning Authority (CxA) requests. E. Provide list of all filters used during construction and installed immediately before occupancy, including product manufacturer, model number, location, MERV rating, and date installed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 5 F. Perform indoor air testing; install permanent MERV 13 filters. Provide IAQ Testing Report in compliance with LEED requirements. G. Comply with IAQ Management Plan by the general contractor. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Maintain clean and sealed ductwork: from the point of fabrication, shipping, delivery and jobsite storage, keep ductwork wrapped, covered, clean and free of moisture and debris at all times. Clean any contaminated components after construction is complete. 2. When duct protection is removed for air balancing, immediately reinstall when balancing is complete. 3. During construction and before occupancy, maintain installation of MERV 8 filters on return air grilles and exhaust / negative side of system. H. Submit the LEED VOC Form, for any VOC-containing material to be used inside the building envelope, including materials for patching, touch-up and cleaning. 1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit drawings and/or diagrams for review and for job coordination in all cases where deviation from the Contract Drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, interference or substitution of equipment, or when requested by the Engineer for purposes of clarification of the Contractor’s intent. B. Submit detailed drawings, rough-in sheets, etc., for all special or custom-built items or equipment. Drawings and details under the section shall include (but not be limited to) the following, where applicable to this project: 1. Electrical interlock wiring diagrams. 2. Piping layout plans and interference details. C. By submission of piping and ductwork shop drawings, the Contractor acknowledges that coordination has been done to ensure that all piping and ductwork fits and that no conflicts exist. D. The Architect’s review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the Contract drawings or specifications, unless he has, in writing, called the attention of the Architect to such deviations at the time of the submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors or omission in such shop drawings. 1.10 COMMISSIONING A. See Division 01 and the notes on the drawings for Division 23’s roles and responsibilities for commissioning. B. Provide all necessary commissioning assistance, equipment and documentation as required by the Commissioning Plan. C. The duty and responsibility for mechanical commissioning work shall be assigned to a specific individual. Inform the General Contractor and Certified Commissioning Professional (CCXP) of the contact information for the person so assigned. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 6 D. Perform corrective actions needed to resolve deficiencies identified during commissioning. Record action taken on commissioning deficiency log. 1.11 HVAC PERMIT A. The contractor is responsible for submitting, obtaining, and paying for all permits. Permit drawings will be provided by Sider + Byers. The contractor will fill out any and all forms, and submit the signed drawings provided by the engineer. Sider + Byers will reply to any and all permit comments, and the drawings and any related information will be resubmitted by the contractor. B. Contractor shall not commence work until permit is obtained. 1.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 – Building Services Piping for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX – Welding and Brazing Qualifications for welding materials and procedures. B. Perform Work in accordance with the International Mechanical Code including State and local amendments. C. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. D. Perform Work in accordance with Seattle Energy Code. 1.13 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years’ experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years’ experience. 1.14 SEQUENCING A. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion. 1.15 SCHEDULING A. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of life safety \ smoke evacuation \ smoke control system with Fire Authority. 1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect all equipment, materials, and insulation from weather, construction traffic, dirt, water, chemicals, and damage by storing in original packaging and under cover. Where Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 7 original packaging is insufficient, provide additional protection. Maintain protection in place until installation. C. Inspect all products and materials for damage prior to installation. D. Protect piping from all entry of foreign materials by providing temporary end caps or closures on piping and fittings. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. E. Protect heat exchangers and tanks with temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. F. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. G. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. H. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by storing indoors. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs. I. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. J. Comply with contractor’s construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Plan. 1.17 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply fire stopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of fire stopping materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. C. Do not install underground piping, tanks, or tank foundations when bedding is wet or frozen. D. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. E. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except rough in, taps , supports and test plugs. F. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant. G. Maintain water integrity of roof during and after installation of chimney or vent. H. Do not install condensing unit foundation pad when ground is frozen or muddy. 1.18 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 8 B. Verify by field measurements, sizes and configurations are compatible with wall construction and layout. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. 1.19 COORDINATION A. Visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work. B. Verify locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near site. Determine such locations in conjunction with all public and private utility companies an d with all authorities having jurisdiction. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. D. HVAC drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate all possible site conditions. The contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions and connections on site and coordinate between trades to preclude interferences. The contractor shall provide adjustments to piping or ductwork as necessary to fit conditions including but is not limited to relocation, offsets, and transitions. E. In the event of a conflict with other trades of work, the following priority from highest to lowest shall be followed: Structural, lighting, HVAC, plumbing/piping and sprinklers. Starting with the lowest priority, the HVAC, plumbing, and sprinkler contractors shall provide whatever materials, offsets, labor etc. is required to resolve the conflict. F. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect will determine which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no additional cost. G. Prior to ordering equipment cross-check mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications to assure proper location and electrical characteristics of connections serving mechanical and electrical equipment. H. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit equipment furnished. Costs for modifications due to equipment substitution will be borne by the contractor. I. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents the greater quantity, the better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in writing. J. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Owner will be considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any device or equipment roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied centerlines or as required by good practice shall be repositioned at no cost to the Owner. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 9 K. Where the word ‘verify’ is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the existing conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified conditions without additional cost to the Owner. L. Coordinate trenching, excavating, bedding, backfilling of bur ied systems with requirements of this specification. M. Coordinate wall openings, piping rough-in locations, concrete housekeeping pads, and electrical rough-in locations to accommodate Work of this Section. N. Coordinate all equipment with building control work. O. Coordinate installation of 1. Condensing units with concrete pad and roof structure. 2. Air handling units with building structure. 3. Unit installation with roof structure, piping systems, and ceiling for unit access. 4. Roof curbs with roof structure, roof deck and roof membrane installation. 1.20 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other trades where necessary for installation of mechanical work. Perform work only with craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of rough-frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for ducts and piping. C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without breaking out around holes. 1.21 SALVAGE A. Remove excess piping and ductwork, plug or cap any unused branch connections. Remove scrap pipe and all other excess materials from the site. B. Comply with contractor’s Construction Waste Management Plan. Retain and submit all trip and tip tickets for all construction debris and waste hauling, indicating material content, tonnage, date hauled and facility to where materials were hauled. 1.22 ELECTRICAL A. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): All HVAC and refrigeration equipment with multi- motor or combination electrical loads shall comply with NEC 110.10 & 440.4 and must include a SCCR greater than the Available Interrupting Current (AIC) of the electrical circuit serving the equipment. See electrical drawings for required AIC kA rating. Equipment SCCR may be presented in writing from the manufacturer or shown on the unit nameplate. Refrigeration or air-conditioning equipment over 60 Amps MOCP must list the SCCR on the unit nameplate. If the AIC rating is unavailable or cannot be determined provide equipment with a minimum SCCR of 10kA. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 10 B. Motors: 1. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degree C environment with maximum 50 degree C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load. 2. Starting Capability: Not less than 12 starts per hour. 3. Phase Characteristics: Squirrel-cage induction poly-phase motors for 3/4 HP and larger, and capacitor-start single-phase motors for 1/2 HP and smaller. At equipment manufacturer's option, 1/6 HP and smaller may be split-phase type. 4. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. 5. Enclosure Type: Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Weather-protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II, where not housed. 6. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection. 7. Name Plate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. 8. All motor efficiencies shall conform to Seattle Energy Code and NEMA MG-1. C. Motor Starters: By mechanical equipment manufacturer where factory mounted controls are provided. Variable frequency drives by Division 23, all other starters provided by Electrical Contractor. D. Power Wiring: By Electrical Contractor. E. Control Wiring: Responsibility of Division 23, including all line and low voltage control wiring. Owner will not entertain additional cost due to lack of coordination between HVAC Contractor and Electrical Contractor. 1.23 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Completion, submission and approval of the following is required for final project closeout. 1. Execution of Architect's and Engineer’s final observation reports (punchlist) 2. Operating and Maintenance Instructions 3. Operating and Maintenance Manual 4. Equipment and Pipe Cleaning 5. Record Drawings 6. Testing 7. Commissioning 8. Warranty B. See Division 01 for additional requirements. 1.24 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. General: In addition to requirements of Division 01, following initial operation of HVAC systems and prior to acceptance by the Architect, perform the following services. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 11 B. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period, give written notification of readiness to proceed to the Architect and Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates. C. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out requirements for operating, servicing and maintaining equipment and systems. Describe general system operation and specific equipment functions. Cover all equipment calibration, setpoint adjustment, safeties and alarms. D. Furnish qualifications of Contractor's personnel in charge of the instruction; foreman position is minimum acceptable. Where equipment startup is performed by supplier’s or manufacturer’s personnel, those personnel should also provide training on that equipment. E. During demonstrations and instructions include and reference information from maintenance manuals and contract drawings. 1. Provide documentation of all instruction which includes: a. Date and time of instruction b. Name, affiliation and qualifications of the instructor c. Name and affiliation of the attendees d. Topics, systems, and equipment covered e. Length of instruction F. Minimum duration of instruction periods: 1. HVAC Systems 2 sessions of 4 hours each 2. Control Systems 2 sessions of 4 hours each 1.25 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Contents: Furnish, in accord with Division 1, one bound and one PDF copy of operating and maintenance manuals to include the following: 1. Manufacturers, suppliers, contractor names, addresses and phone numbers. 2. Warranty service contractors' names, address and phone numbers (if different from above). 3. Schedule and description of routine maintenance for each component to include oiling, lubrication and greasing data. 4. Manufacturer's cuts and rating tables, including brochures for all submittal items. 5. Part numbers of all replaceable items. 6. Control diagrams and operation sequence. 7. Written guarantees. 8. Record drawings corrected and completed. 9. Completed equipment start-up forms and checklists. 10. Final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for all equipment. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 12 2. Submit installation instructions, adjustment instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for all equipment. 3. Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances. 4. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and mai ntenance and repair data. Include directions for resetting constant volume regulators. C. Filters: Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for operation, changing, and periodic cleaning. 1. Submit replacement part numbers and availability, and nearest service depot location and telephone number. D. Binders: 1. Furnish typewritten or printed index and tabbed dividers between principal categories. 2. Bind each manual in a hard-backed loose-leaf binder. E. Imprint on cover: 1. Name of project. 2. Owner. 3. Location of project. 4. Architect. 5. Contractor. 6. Year of completion. F. Imprint on backing: 1. Name of project. 2. Year of completion. G. Submittals: 1. Preliminary Copies: Prior to scheduled completion of the project, submit one PDF copy for review by the Architect. 2. Final Copies: After approval of the preliminary copies, submit one bound and one PDF copy to the Owner. 1.26 EQUIPMENT AND PIPE CLEANING A. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment. Equipment shall be free of dirt, construction debris, corrosion, etc. B. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to eliminate dirt, debris or other material from entering and collecting inside of pipe, ductwork and equipment. Any collection of material shall be thoroughly cleaned before equipment startup and if necessary again before owner occupancy. C. Clean exterior of all exposed pipe and ductwork. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 13 D. Use LEED Compliant Products: Materials intended for use inside the building envelope, including those used for patching, painting, touch-up, and cleaning, must contain acceptable levels of VOC’s and contain no added urea-formaldehyde. 1.27 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit one CD or DVD with all drawings in PDF format. B. Make all notes and revisions on PDF set in red. C. Show location of equipment, location and size of piping, location and size of ductwork. Locate all valves, control dampers and similar equipment with tag or label identification. Indicate locations and elevations of exterior pipe and utility connections. Maintain continuously updated drawings during progress of project. D. Record actual locations of tagged valves and control dampers; include valve tag numbers. Record actual locations of flexible connectors and expansion joints. E. Record actual locations of equipment, clean-outs, controlling devices, and all above grade, under-floor, and buried piping and ductwork. Provide dimensions from gridline or walls to indicate specific locations. 1.28 TESTING A. Provide completed start-up forms and checklists. B. Perform testing and balancing of HVAC systems as described in this Division and as required by applicable codes and ordinances. C. Provide changes in sheaves, belts, and dampers as required for correct balance. D. Commissioning will be performed by a third party contractor. Support c ommissioning of control systems and all other mechanical components in compliance with the applicable Energy Code, the commissioning notes on the drawings and commissioning specifications of this Division. 1.29 WARRANTIES AND CONTRACTOR’S GUARANTEE A. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and i n perfect operating order at time of delivery to Owner. B. Furnish one year warranty from date of substantial completion for all systems unless specifically noted otherwise. C. Without cost to Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from date of final acceptance, except when in the opinion of the Architect a failure is due to neglect or carelessness of the Owner. D. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees which exceed one year. E. Make all necessary balancing and control adjustments during first year of operation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 14 F. The presence of any inspector or observer during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work. PART 2 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DOCUMENTATION A. Additional plan submittals to reviewing authority: If additional drawing submittals are required at any time during construction contractor shall subm it drawings, review with authority, and pick up subsequent approved drawings. Engineer will revise and/or prepare drawings for submittal. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work. B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, Contractor shall at his own expense uncover work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work disturbed by him to its original condition. C. Energy Code C104 specifically requires the following inspections. 1. Mechanical Equipment Efficiency and Economizer: To be made after all equipment and controls required by the Energy Code and this specification are installed and prior to the concealment of such equipment or controls. 2. Mechanical Pipe and Duct Insulation: To be made after all pipe and duct insulation is in place, but before concealment. 3. Motor Inspections: To be made after installation of all equipment covered by the Energy Code and this specification but before concealment. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation for proper movement clearance. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials. B. Clean ductwork and equipment. C. Use LEED Compliant Products: Materials intended for use inside the building envelope, including those used for patching, painting, touch-up, and cleaning, must contain acceptable levels of VOC’s and contain no added urea-formaldehyde. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 00 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 23 00 00 - 15 3.6 COMMISSIONING A. Selected Division 23 equipment and systems referenced are to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements and Section 23 08 00, Commissioning of HVAC. The contractor has specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation. Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 1 SECTION 23 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Standards SP-58 and SP-69. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Duct Construction Standards. C. Conform to requirements of IBC 1613 and SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems". 1.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Where two or more units of same class of equipment are required, use products of a single manufacturer. All equipment shall be new and free from damage. B. Protect stored material and equipment against weather, corrosion and dirt. Protect installed mechanical components, including but not limited to piping, ductwork, and equipment against weather damage, corrosion, dirt and construction dust. Seal equipment and ductwork where and when necessary to be kept clean. C. Provide major equipment components with manufacturer's name, address, catalog number and capacity indicated on a nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place. D. Furnish standard and fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers and other accessories. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. Provide incompressible inserts and shields at all piping supports on pipe to be insulated per 23 07 00. B. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment, plus connected piping. C. Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and contraction of piping. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion joints provide and adequately protect system. D. Firestopping Materials: Provide to achieve fire ratings as noted on architect’s drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. ASTM and UL. 1. Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated assemblies unless otherwise required by applicable codes. 2. Surface Burning: UL 723 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/50. 3. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 2 E. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals, such as copper tubing and steel, by use of copper-plated, plastic coated, or flexible materials. All supports which contact copper tubing shall be copper plated. F. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials and components. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installed products shall have surface Burning Characteristics: 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Perform work in accordance with local jurisdiction’s requirements and AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. C. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping sy stems and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger straps and rods shall be in accord with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. B. Fasten bracing to ductwork, including riveting, bolting, and tack welding per SMACNA. C. Provide galvanized steel band or fabricated angle iron brackets for wall supports. D. Exposed ducts shall be supported/anchored to structure at closer spacing and using heavier materials, wherever so indicated on drawings. E. Hanger Rods: Carbon Steel, with hex nuts and flat washers. F. Concrete Inserts: 1. Continuous channel - Unistrut or approved. 2. Universal, malleable iron - Type 18, FS WW-H-171. G. Beam Clamps and Attachments as required. 2.2 DUCT ROOF SUPPORT A. Manufacturers: Erico, Caddy or approved equal. B. Pyramid H-Frame thermoplastic base with rubber bottom, pre-installed strut nuts and hardware kit to construct frame. All steel components shall be hot-dipped galvanized. 750 lb load rating per base. 2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports with incompressible insulation inserts and shields for all piping to be insulated per 230700. 1. Manufacturer: Pipe Shields, INC or approved equal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 3 2. Material: Calcium Silicate or Uretherne per temperature application. 3. Thickness: Insert thickness shall match required insulation thickness per 230700. B. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Hangers for rigid pipe: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring with Armacell Armafix insulated rigid insert. 2. Hangers for flexible pipe: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis with Armacell Armafix insulated rigid insert and saddle. 3. Hangers for paired flexible pipe: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis with 1” wide overlapping steel band and saddle. 2.4 HANGER ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.5 INSERTS A. Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.6 PIPE ROOF SUPPORT A. See drawings for refrigerant piping support details. B. Manufacturers: Erico, Caddy or approved equal. C. General: Pyramid 50, polyethylene closed-cell form, electro-galvanized 16 gauge steel metal cover pipe clamp support. D. 1-1/2” and smaller pipe: Pyramid EZ, UV stabilized EPDM, adjustable height. E. 2”-6” or general use: Pyramid ST, strut support with galvanized finish, fixed or adjustable height, UV stabilized thermoplastic base with rubber mat. 2.7 ACCESS PANELS A. Milcor or approved equal. B. Include an allowance for a minimum of 24 access panels. C. Architectural grade, 14 guage frame and door, painted steel or stainless steel based on application. 2.8 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex, Mason or approved equal. B. Braided Refrigeration Piping Connection 1. Bronze flexible hose and bronze braided outer covering. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 4 2. Copper sweat connections, cleaned de-greased, and bagged. 3. UL listed 2.9 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead. 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq. ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.10 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Manufacturers’ curbs where indicated on drawings. B. Fabricated: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, variable step to match roof insulation, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, wood nailer. 2.11 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Ductwork: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. D. Sealant: Acrylic E. Size large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to prov ide for continuous insulation or installation of fire sealant at fire-rated walls. Note that insulation is discontinuous at fire walls. 2.12 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: Allied Tube & Conduit, B-Line Systems, Unistrut or approved equal. B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel, with holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.13 SUPPORT ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Alignment Guides: Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch thick insulation, minimum 3 inch travel. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 5 B. Swivel Joints: Steel / Bronze body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber (Buna-N) o-ring seals. 2.14 FIRESTOPPING-APPLIED A. Manufacturers: RectorSeal, Dow Corning, 3M Fire Protection or approved equal. B. General: 1. Fire stopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by applicable building codes and tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 fire tests for through penetrations, and ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 for construction joints, and UL 2307 for perimeter edge joints. 2. Fire stopping material shall be free of asbestos, PCBs, ethylene glycol, and lead. 3. Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal. 4. Fire stopping shall be performed by a contractor trained or approved by firestop manufacturer. 5. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide firestop systems for all conditions from a single supplier. D. Product Description: Provide Latex caulk/sealant, Silicone caulk/sealant, Intumescent Wrap Strip, Firestop Putty, Firestop Collar or Intumescent Sleeve to meet each specific application and performance requirement. E. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. F. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. 1. Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard, backer rod or other type recommended by Manufacturer’s tested system. 2.15 PENETRATIONS OF NON-RATED SURFACES A. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. B. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening o r water-stop type wall sleeve. 2.16 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: Metraflex, Mason, Amber Booth or approved equal. B. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 6 b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance and limit stops. C. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Rubber or neoprene-waffle pads. a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum 1/2 inch thick. c. Maximum loading 40 psi. d. Height of ribs: not to exceed 0.7 times width. D. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.5 inches deflection with threaded insert. 2.17 SPRING ISOLATION ROOF CURB (SEISMIC) A. Manufacturers: Mason Type SRSC, Amber Booth, Vibro-Acoustics or approved. B. Spring isolation type with rectangular steel tube lower member, continuous upper frame within "captive: guides to resist wind and seismic forces, adjustable and removable rust- resistant steel springs mounted on 1/4" neoprene pads and having minimum deflection of 2", plated or galvanized hardware, flexible aluminum seal weatherproofing and 2" insulation on lower curb. C. Curb shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. 2.18 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches high. B. Metal Tags: Brass, Aluminum or Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1 - 1/2 inches diameter with finished edges. Plain English designations. C. Information Tags: Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. D. Tag Chart: Plain English designations so no tag or valve chart is required. 2.19 PIPE MARKERS A. Mark exposed refrigerant piping runs with the system that they serve for example “CW-6 to BC-6”. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 7 B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. 2.20 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head. B. Color code as follows: 1. HVAC equipment: Yellow. 2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red. 3. Heating/cooling valves: Blue. 2.21 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches. B. Valve Lockout Devices: Nylon device preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle. 2.22 PAINT A. Fatory Finished Equipment: See individual equipment specification. B. Ducwork: Paint interior of ductwork visible through grilles and diffusers with a flat black paint. Prepare and paint surfaces in accord with Division 9. 2.23 SEISMIC SUPPORTS A. Provide seismic support as required by IBC 1613 and local authorities. B. Sway bracing for ductwork, piping, and equipment shall consist of steel angles, rods or pipes. Shapes, lengths and methods of attachment shall be in accord with SMACNA “Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems”. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING WORK A. Provide access to existing piping, ductwork, equipment and other installations remaining active and requiring access. B. Extend existing piping and ductwork installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matte r affecting bond of firestopping material. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 8 B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond of adhesives or firestopping. C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. E. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION-CLEARANCE A. Appliances and equipment shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair and replacement. B. Clearance shall be provided for the replacement of filters. C. A minimum of 30” of clearance shall be provided in front of the control side of appliances and equipment. Provide additional space when required by NEC. D. All control components shall be accessible for inspection and replacement. 3.4 INSTALLATION - INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pip e 4 inches and larger. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation and allowing access. B. Provide access panels where valves and fittings are not accessible. C. Insulate valves according to application in Section 23 07 00. 3.6 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 9 E. Support vertical piping at every floor. F. Where piping is parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. I. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. J. Adjust hangers and supports as required to bring system to proper line and grade. Piping shall be plumb with floor and parallel/perpendicular to building structure. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Insulated piping shall have insulation run continuous through hangers and supports with use of rigid inserts. Insulation shall be glued to both sides of insert at hangers and supports, no insulation gaps are allow ed. Refer to Section 23 07 00. M. Support of pipe, tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed. 3.7 INSTALLATION-PIPING PROTECTION A. Provide protective shield plates in concealed locations where piping, other than cast-iron or steel, is installed in studs, joists or rafters. Plates shall be 16 gage steel and cover the pipe area plus 2”. Shields may be omitted if piping is more than 1-1/2” from nearest edge of structural member. 3.8 INSTALLATION – DUCTWORK A. Locate hangers, supports and accessories to handle loads imposed by ductwork, and air distribution devices and with maximum spacing noted. B. Support all ductwork to prevent sag, undue play and swing. C. Maximum support spacing per SMACNA standards. Spacing shall not exceed 10 feet. D. Before concrete is placed, install embedded inserts and secure firmly to form work. E. Assemble and install hangers and supports on ductwork. F. All supports and attachments for exposed ducts shall have non-removable fasteners. G. Attachments to fireproofed steel structure shall be made prior to spraying of fireproofing material. If necessary to disturb fireproofing after initial spraying, provide respraying or repairs necessary to restore the integrity of the fireproofing. H. Adjust hangers and supports as required to bring system to proper line and grade. Ductwork shall be plumb with floor and parallel/perpendicular to building structure. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 10 3.9 INSTALLATION – SEISMIC CONTROLS A. Provide seismic restraints and hangers in compliance with IBC 1613 and ASCE 7. B. Seismic Bracing is specifically required for but not limited to: 1. All smoke control ductwork. 2. All ductwork associated with life safety systems (Including stair and elevator pressurization. 3. All ductwork with a cross sectional area of 6 square feet or a diameter of 34 inches or greater. C. Seismic Bracing: Follow IBC 1613, ASCE 7, SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual and the following. 1. Bracing shall be bidder designed to resist seismic loading in accord with Chapter 16 of the International Building Code, ASCE 7 or the SMACNA guideline. 2. Provide seismic calculations as required for Ip = 1.5. 3. Transverse bracing shall occur at a maximum interval of 30 feet, at each duct turn and at the end of a duct run. 4. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at a maximum interval of 60 feet. 5. Bracing may be omitted where duct hangers are less than 12 inches in length. 3.10 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of formed steel channel or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.11 INSTALLATION - FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms for sound control. C. Provide curbs for roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach Counterflashing to equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints. D. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 11 3.12 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with insulation and caulk or fireproof airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. 3.13 INSTALLATION – ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for installation at all concealed equipment which requires service, maintenance or adjustment to include but not limited to equipment, dampers, control valves, filters and controls. B. Provide location layout and required size for all access panels to general contractor. Layout shall be regular and consistent, maintain a uniform wall panel height of 24” CL AFF, unless noted otherwise. C. Furnish fire rated access panels where installed in fire rated assembly. D. Provide stainless steel access panels where installed in tile surfaces. E. Furnish access panels to general contractor for installation F. Paint installed access panels to match wall or ceiling. Verify that panels are not painted shut. 3.14 INSTALLATION – FIRESTOPPING AND SEALS AT PARTITIONS A. Installation of Firestop shall be performed by either a specialty contractor s pecializing in firestop application (FM G 4991 or UL Qualified Firestop Contractor), or general or sub - contractors with experience in similar applications and projects with installers qualified, trained, and certified by the firestop manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s detailed installation procedures. B. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring firestoppi ng. C. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. D. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke r ating, to uniform density and texture. E. Install dams when required to properly contain Fire stopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Combustible damming material must Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 12 be removed after appropriate curing. Incombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the Firestop system. F. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials. G. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required. H. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. I. Seal openings at surface as follows: 1. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. 2. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. 3. Pack void with backing material. 4. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 3.15 INSTALLATION - PENETRATIONS OF NON-RATED SURFACES A. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition, floor, ceiling, and/or roof opening as follows: 1. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element. 2. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element. B. Install escutcheons where piping penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. C. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations air tight. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit. 3.16 INSTALLATION-VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Install isolation for motor driven equipment. B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Provide line size flexible connectors. C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other ends. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise. D. Adjust equipment level. E. Install spring hangers without binding. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 13 F. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. G. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. 3.17 INSTALLATION - SPRING ISOLATION ROOF CURB (SEISMIC) A. Unit supported must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail and the lower section anchored to the roof structure. Mechanical contractor to hire third party structural engineer to provide exact number and size of bolts/fasteners and provide equipment seismic calculations. B. Provide acoustical materials in bottom of curb as shown on plan detail. 3.18 INSTALLATION – CONDENSATE A. For all cooling coils, high efficiency gas burners and other equipment requiring condensate drainage, provide appropriately sized condensate pumps where gravity drainage is not possible or where scheduled. B. Coordinate number and type of condensate pumps required with Plumbing Contractor. C. Provide condensate overflow switches on cooling coils where damage to building components could occur as a result of overflow as required by IMC. 3.19 INSTALLATION-IDENTIFICATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. D. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Use plain English designations so no index or chart is required. E. Nameplates: Identify mechanical equipment (air handling units, air terminal units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices ) with plastic nameplates. 1. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with name tags. 2. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. 3. Identity description should be as numbered on drawings or plain English description. i.e. “EF-1” or “Boiler Controls”. 4. Label automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. 5. Label wall controls and switches with associated equipment designation and control function, i.e. “EF-1 Switch”. F. Valve Tags: Identify valves in main and branch piping and radiator valves with tags. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 05 00 - 14 1. Do not provide numbered tags. 2. Provide tags with plain English description of service and function. i.e. “Hot Water Supply, 2nd Floor” G. Pipe Labels: Identify exposed refrigerant piping with laels identifying which system is served by each lineset. H. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. I. Equipment and Valve Tag Index: Plain English designations so no chart or index is required. 3.20 CLEANING A. Contractor shall make all mechanical components free of dust and dirt prior to startup. 3.21 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 93 October 20, 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING Project #16-0996 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air systems. B. Testing, adjusting and balancing of Division 22 domestic water systems. C. Measurement of final operating conditions of above systems. D. Duct pressure (leakage) testing as required by 23 31 00. E. Preparation of formal report. 1.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Work shall be performed by approved independent testing and balancing agency. B. Perform testing and balancing in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). All work shall be supervised. C. Calibrate instruments used for testing and balancing within a period of six months of start of work. D. Mechanical contractor shall assist Balancing Agency in testing and balancing of mechanical system. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. Provide one PDF and two bound copies of typed and bound report to be included in Preliminary Commissioning Report. B. Provide one PDF and two bound copies of updated and/or corrected report for Final Commissioning Report. 1.4 FORMAT A. Report shall consist of test sheets similar to AABC Standard Forms for Diffusers and Grilles, Air Handling Equipment, Exhaust Fans, and Pumps (i.e., Form 12666 for Diffusers and Grilles). B. Report shall include the following. 1. Preface suggesting abnormalities and problems encountered. 2. Instrumentation List including type, model, manufacturer, serial number, and calibration dates. 3. System Identification reporting location of equipment, zones, supply, return, and exhaust openings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 93 October 20, 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING Project #16-0996 23 05 93 - 2 4. Record following for each piece of air handling equipment. a. Manufacturer, model number, and serial number. b. Design and manufacturer rated data. c. Actual CFM d. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. e. Outside-air and return-air total CFM. f. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. g. Final RPM of each motor. h. Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model, size, number of grooves and center distance. i. Belt size and quantity. j. Static-pressure controls final operating set points. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Work of this section shall be performed by independent Air Testing and Balance Agency specializing in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating, and cooling systems to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment, air distribution, and exhaust systems. B. Agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five years of specialized experience in air and hydronic system balancing. Work by this Agency shall be done under direct supervision of qualified heating and ventilating engineer employed by Agency. C. Agency shall be approved in writing by Architect. D. Neither Architect’s engineering consultant nor anyone performing work o n this Project under Division 23 shall be permitted to do this work. 1.6 ACCEPTABLE TEST AND BALANCE COMPANIES A. AIRTEST Co., Inc. 425-313-0172 B. Neudorfer Engineers, Inc. 206-621-1810 C. Hardin & Sons 253-862-6645 D. American Air Measurement 425-788-4036 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 93 October 20, 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING Project #16-0996 23 05 93 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify systems are complete and in good working order before commencing work. Then, put all systems and equipment into operation and continue operation until all adjusting, balancing, testing, demonstrations, instructions and cleaning of systems have been completed. Verify the following: 1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 3.2 PREPARATION A. If requested, conduct tests in presence of Architect. B. Instruments used by Agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. C. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations including ladders, scaffolding, additional dampers and clean filters. D. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. E. During balancing technician's initial test of air handling systems, the Mechanical Contractor shall have his sheetmetal foreman present to assist in any drive changes or dampers necessary. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Diffuser, register and grille air flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within 10% and within 50 cfm of design rates. B. Fan air flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within 10% and within 50 cfm of design rates. C. Water flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within 10% and within 5 gpm of design rates. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 93 October 20, 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING Project #16-0996 23 05 93 - 4 D. Pump flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within 10% and within 25 gpm of design rates. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Ensure that clean filters, of the type specified, are installed prior to air balancing. B. Provide additional volume dampers as necessary to accomplish design balance s. C. Set minimum position of motorized dampers for scheduled minimum outside air. D. Check motors for proper rotation, coupling and drive alignment, belt tension and freedom from vibration, etc. E. Provide belt drive/sheave changes to adjust fan rpm as necessary to accomplish design balances. F. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. G. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. H. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made. I. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance. J. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. K. After completion of testing and balancing, operate systems under normal conditions for at least two days of 8 hours each to demonstrate specified performance. 3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Perform soloing testing and balancing functions in accordance with Associates Air Balance Council National Standards. B. Adjust air handling and air distribution systems to obtain design supply, return, and/or exhaust air quantities. 1. Test and adjust total system CFM by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes as necessary. 2. Perform tests at high and low speeds of variable speed systems. 3. Adjust branch air quantities by damper regulation. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open to minimize throttling losses. 4. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts and for outside air by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. 5. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 93 October 20, 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING Project #16-0996 23 05 93 - 5 C. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: 1. Adjust air distribution to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts. 2. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that the adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. 3. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts. D. Provide system schematic: 1. Identify the location and area of each grille, diffuser, register, and terminal box. 2. Record the required and actual air quantities at each outlet or inlet. 3. Record size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register on air outlet data sheets. E. Air Temperature: 1. Measure wet and dry bulb air temperatures on entering and leaving side of each cooling coil and unit in cooling mode. 2. Measure dry bulb temperatures on entering and leaving side of each heating coil and unit in heating mode. F. Pressure: 1. Measure static pressure conditions on air units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across fan with suction and discharge pressures. 2. Make air balancing allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. 3. Measure building static pressure. G. Electrical: 1. Record nameplate motor current and voltage. 2. Measure actual motor current and voltage at balanced condition. H. Dampers: 1. Adjust outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. 2. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and bala nce at extreme conditions. I. Permanently mark all outside air, supply air, and return air damper positions after balancing has been completed. J. Smoke testing, or some other approved means, may be required to determine leak locations if air balance report indicated that any system’s CFM total is less than 10 percent of design CFM. Prior to test, verify that system’s duct joints have been sealed as specified and that air moving device in question is supplying required design system air flow. Architect will approve test method required. If smoke test is selected, use following procedure. Provide necessary precautions to protect those performing or observing test from being exposed to smoke. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 05 93 October 20, 2021 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING Project #16-0996 23 05 93 - 6 1. Use zinc chloride smoke candles, titanium tetrachloride ampules or sticks, or other devices acceptable to Architect to generate smoke. 2. Close openings in duct except for one opening at farthest end of duct run. 3. If re-balancing is required, submit revised air test and balance reports to Arc hitect before Substantial Completion. 4. Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. 3.6 PLUMBING PROCEDURE A. Domestic pump circulators: 1. Test total system GPM and head. 2. Adjust branch flows by circuit setters for equal flow distribution. 3.7 FINAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS A. System shall be balanced and reports submitted before substantial completion inspection. B. Balancing Agency shall be represented at inspection meeting(s) by qualified testing personnel with balancing equipment and two copies of current air balancing test report. 1. Architect will choose and direct spot balancing. Differences greater than specified tolerance between the spot balance and test report will be justification for requiring repeat of testing and balancing for entire building and submission of a new test report. In such case a new inspection will be made. 2. Perform rebalancing in presence of Architect/Engineer and subject to their approval. 3. If re-balancing is required, submit revised air test and balance reports to Architect before Substantial Completion. 4. Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. C. Where systems provides over 5 percent more air than schedule requirements, rooms supplied by that system shall have their supply air quantities increased by ratio of actual total air quantity supplied to minimum air quantity required by system schedule. 3.8 SUPPLEMENTAL WARRANTY A. Test and balance agency shall include an extended warranty of 90 da ys, after occupancy, during which the Owner's representative, at his discretion, may request a recheck or resetting of any outlet, supply air or exhaust fan, as listed in test report. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 07 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC INSULATION Project #16-0996 23 07 00 - 1 SECTION 23 07 00 – HVAC INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation must have maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. All systems components subject to heat loss or gain, such as, piping, storage tanks, vessels, valves etc. shall be insulated to conform with the Washington State Energy Code and Evergreen Standards (as minimum) and this section. 1.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Insulation shall bear a manufacturer’s mark indicating the product R-value or K-value and thickness. This mark shall be visible after installation and shall be repeated at an interval of no more than 10 feet. B. External duct insulation shall be legibly printed or indentified at intervals not greater than 36 inches with name of manufacturer, R-value, thickness, flame spread and smoke-developed index. C. R-values shall be based on insulation only at 75 F mean temperature difference. D. For rigid or spray foam the aged R-value per inch shall be provided in submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYOLEFIN INSULATION A. Manufacturers: IMCOA or similar. B. Polyolefin or Polyethylene pipe insulation is NOT ACCEPTABLE for any application. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM (PIPE) A. Manufacturers: Armacell AP/Armaflex, Aeroflex Aerocel or approved equal. B. Preformed flexible, closed-cell, elastomeric thermal insulation: Type I, Tubular form, self- seal or continuous, 25/50-rated, CFC free, low VOC, 'K' factor: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. ASTM C534. C. Rigid clamp/hanger insert: Armacell Armafix, polyurethane insert and aluminum jacket, single piece with self-adhering closure. 2.3 FLEXIBLE GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER (SOUND LINER) A. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Linacoustic RC or equal by Knauf, Manson or approved equal. B. Description: Flexible duct liner, glass fiber bonded with thermosetting resin, airstream surface protected with reinforced coating. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 07 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC INSULATION Project #16-0996 23 07 00 - 2 1. ASTM E84, UL 723 2. Installed R Value: 1" R-4.2, 2” R-8.0 3. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 4. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 6,000 fpm. 5. Acrylic polymer coating to prevent dust incursion and biological growth. C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied or welded with integral head. D. Field coat edges with Superseal edge treatment. E. Application: Building interior usage only. 2.4 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM DUCT LINER (SOUND LINER) A. Manufacturers: Armacell AP/Coilflex or approved equal. B. Description: Fiber-free, non-particulating, formaldehyde-free, low VOC elastomeric form roll which conforms to duct corners without compression. Microban antimicrobial protection inhibits mold and mildew. 1. ASTM E84, UL 723 2. Installed R Value: 1” R-4.2, 1-1/2” R-6.0, 2” R-8.0 3. Maximum service temperature: 180 degrees F 4. Maximum velocity: 10,000 fpm. C. Install as a cross-section single piece fitting around corners. D. Apply with water based adhesive. E. Application: Required for building exterior usage. 2.5 GLASS FIBER ROUND DUCT LINER (SOUND LINER) A. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Spiracoustic Plus or equal by Knauf, Manson or approved equal. B. Description: High-density fiber glass board with kerfs; acrylic polymer meeting ASTM G21 impregnated surface coat. ASTM C1071. 1. ‘K’ factor: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Installed R Value: 1" R-4.3, 2” R-8.4 3. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 4. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 fpm. 2.6 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM ROUND DUCT LINER (SOUND LINER) A. Manufacturers: Armacell AP/Spiralflex or approved equal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 07 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC INSULATION Project #16-0996 23 07 00 - 3 B. Description: Fiber-free, non-particulating, formaldehyde-free, low VOC elastomeric form roll which is self-supporting and conformable to round duct. Microban antimicrobial protection inhibits mold and mildew. 1. ASTM E84, UL 723 2. ‘K’ factor: 0.28 at 75 degrees F 3. Installed R Value: 1” R-4.2 4. Maximum service temperature: 180 degrees F 5. Maximum velocity: 10,000 fpm. 2.7 GLASS FIBER DUCT WRAP A. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Microlite XG 75 or equal by Owens-Corning, Knauf, Manson or approved equal. B. Dscription: Formaldehyde-free, flame-attenuated glass fibers bonded with thermosetting acrylic resin, FSK facing. 1. ‘ASTM E84, UL 723 2. Installed R Value: 1-1/2" R-4.2, 2” R-5.6, 3” R-8.3. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F. 4. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Reinforced FSK facing. Seal with pressure sensitive 2” tape. D. Identification: At intervals not greater than 36” print the name of manufacturer, the thermal resistance R-value at insulation thickness, the flame spread and smoke developed indexes. 2.8 PIPE INSULATION AND EQUIPMENT JACKETS A. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 1. Product Description: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, white color. ASTM D1784. 2. Thickness: 15 mil indoor, 30 mil outdoor. 3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. B. Aluminum Pipe Jacket: 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet. ASTM B209. 2. Finish: Embossed 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protect ive liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 07 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC INSULATION Project #16-0996 23 07 00 - 4 B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Apply insulation when building is thoroughly dry to prevent shrinkage. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulate entire piping system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexibl e connections, pump fittings, connections to equipment and expansion joints. Use canvas jackets for valves and other irregular shapes. D. Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets. E. Piping Inserts and Shields: 1. Insulation shall be continuous through supports and hangers with incompressible inserts and shields. Do not directly clamp/support pipe scheduled to be insulated. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel saddle between pipe clevis hangers or pipe rollers and insulation. Minimum 6 inches long, of contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 3. Inserts: Between pipe clamps, hangers or rollers and piping. 4. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for insulation type and planned temperature range and service. 5. Glue insulation to both sides of insert. 6. Shields without inserts may be used at clevis hangers on refrigerant piping 5/8” and smaller with continuous insulation. F. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. H. Exterior Piping Applications: Use only elastomeric closed-cell foam insulation. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with sealant. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal equipment. I. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. J. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. K. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement. L. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. M. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 07 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC INSULATION Project #16-0996 23 07 00 - 5 N. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and replacement without damage. O. Insulate exhaust air ductwork where it is outside the insulated building envelope to prevent condensation. P. For all insulated ductwork: 1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. Q. Exterior Ductwork and Equipment: Provide elastomeric duct liner. Do not provide exterior insulation on ductwork or equipment. R. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA Standards for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Piping: Provide on piping as listed below. PIPE SIZE Service Insulation Type <1” 1” to <1-1/2" 1-1/2 to < 4" 4" to < 8” Refrigerant Suction(1) Elastomeric Cellular FOAM 1" 1" 1-1/2" - Refrigerant Hot Gas Elastomeric Cellular FOAM 1" 1" 1-1/2" - 1. Note: Insulate Refrigerant Liquid lines same as Suction lines on all Mitsubishi brand equipment, where noted by manufacturer or called for on plans. 2. For all exterior piping applications use only Elastomeric Cellular Foam with Aluminum jacket. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 07 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC INSULATION Project #16-0996 23 07 00 - 6 B. Ductwork: Provide on ductwork as listed below. Insulation thickness is provided as reference; each application must meet minimum installed R-Value. Service Location Insulation Type Approx. Thickness Min. Installed R-Value Jacket Supply, Return Building Exterior Elastomeric Duct Liner 2" R-8 - Supply, Return Attic, crawlspace or uninsulated areas within building. Glass Fiber Duct Wrap 2" R-6 FSK Supply, Return, Exhaust Unconditioned Space Inside Bldg. Glass Fiber Duct Wrap 2" R-6 FSK Supply Concealed Space (3) Glass Fiber Duct Wrap 1-1/2" R-3.3 FSK Supply Exposed (4) in Space With Supply Air Temp ≤55 F or ≥105 F Glass Fiber Duct Wrap / Duct Liner 1-1/2" R-3.3 FSK Supply Exposed in Space With Supply Air Temp Between 56-104F None, Except Duct Liner shown on Plans. Outside Air Within Building <2800 cfm (5) Glass Fiber Duct Wrap / Duct Liner 3" R-7 FSK Outside Air (5) Within Building >=2800 cfm (5) Glass Fiber Duct Wrap / Duct Liner + Building envelope vapor barrier per IBC Multi-layer R-19 FSK Exhaust Air Outside the Insulated Building Envelope Glass Fiber Duct Wrap 2" R-6 FSK Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 07 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC INSULATION Project #16-0996 23 07 00 - 7 Exhaust Air Between backdraft damper & building exterior. Glass Fiber Duct Wrap 3" R-7 FSK 1. Secure duct wrap with mechanical fasteners spaced 12” on center, minimum. For horizontal ducts 24” or more in width, duct wrap shall also be secured with mechanical fasteners spaced 18” on center, on centerline of bottom of duct. 2. Insulation is not required on sound lined ductwork with sufficient insulating value. 3. Concealed space: Any space within the insulated building envelope that is concealed from view, i.e. behind ceiling, wall, shaft, soffit, etc. 4. For exposed ductwork in finished spaces which is required to be insulated provide internal liner with equivalent R-value. 5. Insulation required from exterior to shutoff damper or equipment. After damper provide R-7 insulation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. System specific commissioning procedures B . Related Sections: 1. The following section specifies general commissioning activities for this project: a. 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 2. All sections related to the following commissioned systems may contain start-up, testing and/or commissioning related activities: a. All HVAC Systems b. All Building Automation and Control Systems c. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A . Work includes the completion and documentation of formal commissioning procedures by the Contractor on selected equipment and systems as listed under 1.1 B. Commissioning is defined as the process of verifying and documenting that the installation and performance of selected building systems meet the specified design criteria and therefore satisfies the design intent and the Owner’s operational needs. The Contractor shall be responsible for participation in the commissioning process as outlined herein, and in subsequent sectional references and attachments throughout the project documents. Commissioning procedures shall be designed and conducted under the direction of the Commissioning Authority (CxA) and coordinated by the Contractor Commissioning Coordinator (CCC). B . This section contains the system specific commissioning requirements for the systems referenced herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THE SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED ARE SPECIFIED IN SECTION 01 91 13, COMMISSIONING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, PART 2 – PRODUCTS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION OF THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS FOR THE SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED IS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 01 91 13, COMMISSIONING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, PART 3 – EXECUTION. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 2 SCHEDULE A – Start-up Plan, Contractor Checklists and Document Tracking A Startup Plan shall be developed as outlined in Section 01 91 13. The Startup Plan shall include manufacturer’s startup procedures and Contractor Checklists (CCL) as provided by the CxA. Sample CCLs are included in this Schedule. The Contractor responsible for delivery of the equipment and appurtenances associated with the systems listed in Table – A shall be responsible for completion of the CCL for each individual piece of equipment in the system group. The CCLs included within this Schedule are sample versions and are representative of what will be included in the final Commissioning Plan. The Contractor is responsible to demonstrate the proper operation of all installed systems and the final CCLs shall contain the requirements to document these demonstrations. In no case shall the checklists require performance criteria more stringent than specified by the Project Documents. The CCC is responsible for collecting the completed CCLs and start-up documents and maintaining the Startup Plan during installation and startup activities. The CCC shall review the material for completeness, then sign off on the CCLs as an indication that documents are complete. Once all CCLs and start-up documents are received, they shall be turned over to the CxA. The following Table - A identifies the CCLs and related documents that will be included in the final Startup Plan. Listed as subcategories below each system are the documents that shall be required to be submitted as part of the system startup activities. This documentation includes installation, startup, static tests, pressure tests, cleaning, flushing, disinfecting, certifications and other miscellaneous checklists. This table shall be used as a document tracking mechanism by the CxA, CCC and Contractor for the process of submittal, review and approval of installation and startup documents and CCLs. The table shall be included in the Startup Plan, which is a subset of the Commissioning Plan. Table-A Key: A. System description for each system commissioned. A Contractor Checklist is included for each commissioned system. The subcategories include required documentation to be submitted with the CCL. B. Contractor responsible for installation, startup, testing and submittal of documents for commissioned system. To be filled in after contract award. C. Date the proposed documents are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor. NOTE: These documents shall include, but are not limited to, procedures and forms to include such activities as: manufacturer’s installation and start-up, pressure testing, TAB, cleaning, flushing and disinfection. The CCL is provided by the CxA. D. Indicates that CxA has received and approved proposed installation and start-up documentation. E. Date the completed documents are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor. F. Indicates that CxA has received and approved completed documentation. G. Notes on status of forms, irregularities and rework needed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 3 Table - A: System Summary and Documentation Tracking A B C D E F G System Description Documents Required Responsible Contractor Proposed Document Received O K Completed Document Received O K Notes Ducted VRF Heat Pumps Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Ductless VRF Heat Pumps Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided VRF Outdoor Units Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Energy Recovery Ventilators Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Electric Duct Heaters Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Rooftop Units Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Ductwork Systems Ductwork Pressure Test Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Energy Management Control System Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 4 A B C D E F G System Description Documents Required Responsible Contractor Proposed Document Received O K Completed Document Received O K Notes Graphical interface plan Point-to-point and sensor calibration verification CxA Provided Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Sequence Confirmation Checklist CxA Provided Contractor Checklist CxA Provided VRFZ Control System Graphical interface plan Point-to-point and sensor calibration verification CxA Provided Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Sequence Confirmation Checklist CxA Provided Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing TAB Agenda TAB Meeting Minutes Preliminary TAB Report Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 5 SAMPLE Contractor Checklist Unit Type:VRF Split System Heat Pump Unit No: Location: Serves: Manufacturer:Model: Check RC CxA Note Equipment Area is cleaned and clear of construction debris Unit is clean and has no visible physical damage Equipment labels are installed per project documents Unit is accessible for service Mounting is appropriate with vibration isolation as specified Accessibility and condition of air filter Accessibility and condition of coil Accessibility and condition of fan motor Piping Refrigerant piping is complete Refrigerant piping is insulated Condensate drain installed with p-trap, clean out & piped to drain -or- Unit equipped with condensate pumping system piped to drain Condensate pump wired and powered up Ductwork Associated duct work is complete Diffuser locations per Project documents Control Devices Control wires and devices are complete Control wire and devices are labeled per project documents BAS sensor installed and in appropriate location Thermostat installed and in appropriate location Electrical Supply power is installed and disconnect is accessible Disconnect is labeled Nameplate Minimum Circuit Amps Nameplate Maximum Overcurrent Protection Device Amps Installed overload Overloads and/or fusing is appropriate Convenience outlet within 50’ of equipment Start-Up Manufacturer’s installation and start-up procedures complete Start-up documentation submitted to CxA Readiness System is ready for functional performance testing Representative photograph provided Sign-Off: Team Member Name Date Responsible Contractor (RC): Commissioning Authority (CxA): Notes: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 6 SAMPLE Contractor Checklist Unit Type:VRF Outdoor Unit Unit No: Location: Serves: Manufacturer:Model: Check RC CxA Note Equipment Area is cleaned and clear of construction debris Unit is clean and has no visible physical damage Equipment labels are installed per project documents Unit is accessible for service Mounting is appropriate with vibration isolation as specified Accessibility and condition of outdoor coil Accessibility and condition of fan and motor Piping Refrigeration piping complete with valves, sensors, strainers, filter driers and sight glasses Refrigerant piping is insulated Control Devices Control wires and devices are complete Control wire and devices are labeled per project documents Electrical Supply power is installed and disconnect is accessible Disconnect is labeled Nameplate Minimum Circuit Amps Nameplate Maximum Overcurrent Protection Device Amps Installed overload Overloads and/or fusing is appropriate Convenience outlet within 50’ of equipment Start-Up Manufacturer’s installation and start-up procedures complete Start-up documentation submitted to CxA Readiness System is ready for functional performance testing Representative photograph provided Sign-Off: Team Member Name Date Responsible Contractor (RC): Commissioning Authority (CxA): Notes: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 7 SAMPLE Contractor Checklist Unit Type:Building Automation System Unit No:N/A Location: Serves: Manufacturer:Model: Check RC CxA Note Equipment Controllers mounted in panels per project documents Controller panels labeled per project documents Control wires and control devices labeled per project documents All control devices (actuators, sensors, etc) have been provided per the project documents Wires installed neatly in cable trays, D-rings, conduit, cable tied or plenum rated per requirements Front end computer and peripherals provided per project document specifications Surge protection and battery back-up devices installed per project documents External communication connected Common Sensors OSA sensor installation is complete OSA sensor location is appropriate with no artificial heat loads Photocell sensor installation is complete Photocell sensor location is appropriate with no artificial light sources Demand pulse meter installation is complete Gas pulse meter installation is complete Start-Up System graphics are complete, accurate and verified point-to-point Point to point testing and sensor calibration is complete Room temperature and other set points configured per owner Operating schedules have been set up per owner’s direction Alarms have been programmed and owner’s direction Access Security levels have been set up per owner’s needs Trend logs have been set up as directed by the CA Network connection is complete & remote access confirmed Point-to-point and calibration documentation submitted to CxA Readiness System is ready for functional performance testing Sign-Off: Team Member Name Date Responsible Contractor (RC): Commissioning Authority (CxA): Notes: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 8 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 9 Building Automation System Sequence of Operations Confirmation – SAMPLE Sequence Programmed Tested RTUs and ERV Unoccupied mode Unoccupied limits high and low Occupant override mode Optimal Start Warm-up mode Freeze protection mode Occupied mode Heating valve leak test Cooling valve leak test Heating mode Cooling mode – including economizer Economizer lockout CO2 demand ventilation VAV vent terminal Door interlock mode VRF Split System Heat Pumps Unoccupied mode Unoccupied limits high and low Occupant override mode Optimal Start Warm-up mode Freeze protection mode Occupied mode Heating valve leak test Cooling valve leak test Heating mode Cooling mode – including economizer Electric Duct Heaters Miscellaneous Electric, gas and water meters displayed and trending Power and/or phase loss mode Freezer / Cooler monitoring and alarm Glycol level monitoring and alarm Shelter-in-place mode Domestic hot water circulation pumps and loop temp alarm Lighting control interface Sign-Off: Team Member Name Date Responsible Contractor (RC): Notes: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 10 SCHEDULE B – Functional Performance Tests Functional Performance Tests 1 The preliminary versions of the Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets contained in this Schedule define the individual systems to be tested and Contractor responsibilities based on the specific method of commissioning. These preliminary Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets represent information available at the time of commissioning specification development. The final versions may be somewhat different and will be included within the Commissioning Plan as presented at the initial commissioning coordination meeting. 2 The methods of functional performance test and verification are listed in Table 1 of this Schedule. The Contractor shall be responsible for supporting the testing activity as indicated. This may include developing the test plan and functional performance test forms for approval by the Commissioning Authority, performing testing to be witnessed by the CxA or providing support during functional performance testing conducted by the CxA or their sub-Authority. 3 Contract documents state that the Contractor is responsible to demonstrate that all systems comply with contract requirements and meet the project design intent. The scope of testing outlined in the following Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets in this Schedule represent the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove systems comply with the design intent. If systems fail the initial tests additional testing may be required. 4 The following Test Summary Table identifies the functional tests that shall be conducted on this project. This table shall be used as a document tracking mechanism for the process of submittal and review of contractor provided testing documentation. 5 The contractor is responsible for submitting proposed functional test documentation to the Commissioning Authority for review and approval at least one month prior to these activities. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Commissioning Authority in advance of the scheduled activity, testing or startup date. A minimum of 5 working days advance notification is required. If the CxA is not notified in advance of a scheduled start-up or testing activity, the start-up or testing shall be rescheduled and repeated to the satisfaction of the CxA. 6 The “Responsible Contractor” column of the table shall be completed during the Initial Commissioning Coordination Meeting by assigning an individual Contractor responsible for the activities associated with each system based on what contractor provided that system. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 11 Table – B: Functional Test Summary Table A B C D E F G System Description Responsible Contractor Proposed Test Forms Received O K Testing Complete O K Notes VRF Split System Heat Pumps Energy Recovery Ventilators Rooftop Unit Electric Duct Heaters Air Distribution System Balancing Air and Water EMCS & VRF Control Systems Summary Table Key: A. System description for each system commissioned. B. Contractor responsible for providing testing. To be filled in after contract award. C. Date the proposed test forms are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor (if applicable). D. Indicates that CxA has received and approved the proposed test forms. E. Date(s) testing was performed by contractor. F. Indicates that Commissioning Authority has witnessed and approved the testing and received all completed test forms. G. Notes on status of forms, irregularities and rework needed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 12 Table 1 – Functional Test and Verification Methods The following applies regardless of test method. The contractor shall support the CxA during testing or verification, including but not limited to: scheduling and sequencing and adequate time for testing, on-site support during testing, testing instruments and equipment, setting up trend logs, providing access to equipment (including lifts), providing access to control systems both on-site and remotely. The CxA shall do one or a combination of the following to verify contractor testing: 1. The CxA shall witness all or portions of the tests during contractor testing. 2. The CxA shall re-conduct the functional tests on all or portions of the systems using the same test plan and data sheets. 3. The contractor shall be required to duplicate some of the testing by demonstrating a percentage of the system as selected and witnessed by the CxA. If during the verification process inconsistencies are found that demonstrate that the functional testing conducted by the contractor was not properly executed, the CxA shall suspend verification and the contractor shall be required to correct the problems and re- conduct the entire functional test and verification for the system(s) in question. Excessive test failures shall be subject to the back-charging provisions in Section 01 91 13. Test Method A – Contractor Written and Conducted with CxA Oversight The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the contractor responsible for the system and submitted to the CxA for approval. These can be the system manufacturer’s stock test forms if appropriate. The CxA shall assist contractor in development of test forms if requested to do so. The contractor shall conduct the tests on 100% of the equipment per the plan, document results and submit completed test forms to the CxA for review and approval. Test Method B – CxA Written and Conducted, Contractor Supports The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the CxA. The CxA shall conduct the tests per the plan, document results and notify contractor of any issues found. Test Method C – CxA Written, Contractor Conducts The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the CxA. The CxA shall turn over the test plan and test data sheets to the contractor. The contractor shall conduct the tests on 100% of the equipment per the plan, document results and submit completed test forms to the CxA for review and approval. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 13 VRF System (VRF Certified Installer) Indoor Units, Outdoor Units, BC Controllers, Control System Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Appendix - B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Shall Sample or Witness C.2 CxA Contractor N/A 15% or 5 units Functional Tests: 1) Unit Operation a) Demonstrate operation of all features and functions b) Simulate all alarm conditions and demonstrate all safeties and alarm reporting. c) Demonstrate fan HOA functions d) Demonstrate modulation and temperature control. e) Demonstrate EMCS Interface f) Demonstrate condensate pump operation Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 14 Energy Recovery Ventilator Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Appendix - B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Will Sample or Witness C.1 CxA Contractor N/A 100% Functional Tests: 1) Unit Operation a) Demonstrate and document operation of all features and functions b) Simulate all alarm conditions and demonstrate and document all safeties and alarm reporting. c) Demonstrate and document fan HOA functions d) Demonstrate and document modulation, temperature control and heat recovery, record all parameters. e) Demonstrate and document BCS Interface Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 15 Electric Duct Heaters Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Appendix - B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Shall Sample or Witness C.2 CxA Contractor N/A 15% or 5 units Functional Tests: 1) Unit Operation a) Demonstrate operation of all features and functions b) Demonstrate modulation and temperature control. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 16 Air Distribution Systems Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule - B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Preliminary Activities: The contractor shall be responsible for marking the motorized smoke control damper shaft ends with the damper blade orientation and providing access (ladders, lifts, etc.) to the motorized dampers during testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Shall Sample or Witness C.2 CxA Contractor N/A 15% or 5 units Fire and Smoke Control 1) Demonstrate and document the operation (open/close) of all motorized Fire/Smoke Dampers. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 17 Balancing Air and Water Systems Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule - B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Shall Sample or Witness C.3 CxA Contractor 10%N/A Functional Tests: 1) Perform measurements to demonstrate air balance meets design tolerances. 2) Perform measurements to demonstrate building pressurization in various modes of operation. 3) Perform measurements to demonstrate room pressurization in various modes of operation. The testing and air balancing contractor shall demonstrate a properly balanced system by measuring and verifying the specified percentage of the previously balanced systems as selected and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority. The TAB contractor shall also demonstrate the proper pressure relationship of the spaces to each other and the outside. In the event that the testing and balance verification values are off by more than 10% of original testing values, the balancing contractor shall readjust the systems to the satisfaction of the owner and design team. All balancing set points, including, but not limited to, outside air minimum positions, air flow measuring stations, duct static set points, and differential pressure information shall be communicated to the controls contractor for implementation into the DDC system and recorded in the final balance report. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 18 Energy Management Control System (EMCS) And Variable Refrigerant Flow Zoning (VRFZ) Control System Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule - B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Preliminary Activities: A Controls Integration Meeting (CIM) shall be conducted after the controls submittal is complete and the CxA has reviewed the submittal. The meeting is to be conducted prior to finalizing the functional test procedures and shall be attended by the CxA, EMCS contractor, the VRFZ Control System contractor/supplier, mechanical engineer and a representative of the Owner’s maintenance group at a minimum. The CIM shall include, but not be limited to, the following topics: 1. Sequence of Operations 2. Alarm Points List 3. Trend Points List 4. Displayed/Adjustable Point List 5. Graphical Interface 6. Integration with packaged equipment 7. Integration between two control systems 8. Point-to-Point Checkout and Commissioning of Existing Equipment 9. Metering system and energy dashboard integration Prior to any functional testing, a complete and documented start-up process shall have occurred. This includes point-to-point verification, sensor calibration and operational mode verification. Prior to any graphical system development, the control contractor is to submit a System Setup Outline to the Commissioning Authority and Owner/Owner’s representative for approval. The outline should describe the graphics to be provided along with a detailed list of the individual points to be displayed, screen linking, security levels, alarm management, schedules, trending, animation strategies, navigation, etc. Trend logs shall be entered per the direction of the CxA to support demonstration of operation as outlined below for the performance period. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Shall Sample or Witness C.2 CxA Contractor N/A 15% or 5 units The CxA shall develop a series of functional performance tests to be conducted by the contractor and as outlined below. Part 4 of this specification section includes sample functional test documents. These are samples only and do not reflect all functional test requirements. The contractor shall conduct the functional tests and turn over the completed functional test documentation and trend logs to the CxA. The CxA shall re-conduct a portion of the tests. The Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 19 contractor shall include time in their bid to support the CxA during this activity. This support does not include the normal point-to-point and operational verifications that should take place during start-up. The EMCS and VRFZ control contractors shall make available to the CxA, at no additional cost, a method of interfacing with the control system at the building site. This interface shall be made available regardless of if a permanent local work station is specified in the contract documents or not. The interface shall be made available for the duration of the commissioning process and all commissioned systems are accepted. The EMCS and VRFZ control contractors shall also make available to the CxA, at no additional cost, a method of remotely accessing the system during the commissioning process and up to one year after system acceptance. Remote and local access shall include all software, licensing, software keys and anything else required to facilitate full access to the system. The local and remote interfaces shall include all contract required interfaces including, but not limited to, all graphics, trends and alarms. The CxA shall be given an account with full security access privileges to the system. The contractor shall review the test plan provided by the CxA to verify the following: 1. The functional tests will not endanger the equipment or personnel in the facility. 2. The functional tests can be performed per the plan with the installed interface and equipment. Functional Tests: 1) Functional testing to demonstrate proper operation of ALL modes of operation of all systems under control of the automatic temperature control system and as described in the sequence of operations including but not limited to the following equipment: a) Packaged Rooftop Heat Pump Units b) VRFZ Fan Coil Units c) VRFZ FCU electric duct coils d) Energy recovery ventilators e) Electric duct heates f) Split System AC Units g) Metering Systems h) Integrated systems (generator, fire, etc.) 2) Functional testing to demonstrate proper operation of ALL modes of operation of all systems under control of the automatic temperature control system and as described in the sequence of operations including but not limited to the following modes: a) Unoccupied mode b) Unoccupied limits c) Occupant override mode d) Optimal Start i) Heating mode ii) Cooling mode e) Warm-up mode f) Occupied mode i) Heating mode ii) Cooling mode – including economizer 3) Functional testing to demonstrate operation of all sub-systems under control of the automatic temperature control system and as described in the sequence of operations including but not limited to the following categories: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 20 a) Fan control b) Interlocked fan operation c) Zone temperature control d) Thermostatic control e) Automatic damper control and modulation f) Heating/cooling capacity g) Alarm monitoring h) Graphical user interface 4) System stability and control verification via trending (performance period). Trend logs to be set up by control contractor to demonstrate system performance, to include, but not limited to the following performance variables. Trend logs shall be set up for all inputs/outputs, both digital and analog, for all points in the system both physical and virtual. Trend interval shall be 5 minutes unless otherwise directed by the CxA. The minimum trend period shall be 14 days. Trend log point headings as displayed on system graphs and data tables shall be adequately descriptive for the point but no longer than 12 characters unless approved by the CxA. System default names are not acceptable. The heading titles shall contain no extraneous characters that are not needed to describe the point. The contractor shall provide the trends to the Commissioning Authority in electronic format, in MS Excel or a comma delimited file. a) Zone temperature control b) Morning warm-up verification c) Optimum start-stop verification d) Water and electrical usage 5) Functional testing of all equipment protections monitored by the automatic temperature control system, safeties and alarms including but not limited to the following modes: a) Smoked detector, fire alarm shutdown for air handling equipment b) VRFZ parameter failures c) Dirty filter status d) Fan failure and alarms e) Phase loss protection Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 21 PART 4 - SAMPLE FUNCTIONAL TEST DOCUMENTS 4.1 Sample functional test procedures and data forms are provided in this section to demonstrate the rigor of the process, test procedures and documentation that shall be required from the contractor. These forms and procedures shall be amended, augmented and updated in the final commissioning plan based on the final project documents, addendums and submittal information. This sample section does not contain all functional test procedures and data forms that are required to be executed by the contractor. Schedule - B of part 3 provides a full list of the functional tests that shall be required to be executed by the contractor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 22 Automatic Temperature Control Functional Test Samples ERV w/ Heating, Cooling & Economizer Unoccupied Mode 1. Place the control system in the unoccupied mode by changing the schedule. 2. Verify that all controlled points listed are off, OSA dampers are closed. 3. Verify by direct observation that all controlled points are off and dampers are in the correct position. ERV: Supply/Return fan command displayed OFF Supply/Return fan status displayed OFF Supply/Return fan, observed OFF Heating command displayed Cooling command displayed OSA damper position displayed CLOSED OSA damper position, observed CLOSED Return air damper position displayed OPEN Return air damper position, Observed OPEN Relief damper position displayed CLOSED Relief damper position, observed CLOSED Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 23 Unoccupied Limits 1. Place the system in the unoccupied mode and verify all ERVs are off and heating, economizer and cooling are not locked out. 2. Simulate a zone temperature below the unoccupied low limit. 3. Verify unit comes on in full recirculation and heating system modulates to control zone temperature. 4. Verify unit stops when zone is satisfied. 5. Simulate a zone temperature above the unoccupied high limit 6. Verify unit comes on in cooling and the system modulates to control zone temperature. 7. Verify unit stops when zone is satisfied. 8. Unoccupied Limits ERV: Pre-Test: Unoccupied low limit Unoccupied high limit Zone temperature Test: Unoccupied low limit changed to: Supply/Return fan command displayed Supply/Return fan status displayed Heating command displayed Cooling command displayed OSA/Relief damper position displayed Return air damper position displayed Return air temperature Mixed air temperature Outside air temperature Discharge air temperature System off when satisfied Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 24 Unoccupied High Limit Unoccupied high limit changed to: Supply/Return fan command displayed Supply/Return fan status displayed Heating command displayed Cooling command displayed OSA/Relief damper position displayed Return air damper position displayed Return air temperature Mixed air temperature Outside air temperature Discharge air temperature System off when satisfied Set points returned to original values. Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 25 Unoccupied Occupant Override – ERV 1. Place the system in the unoccupied mode and verify all ERVs are off. 2. Set the override period to a minimum value. 3. Simulate a call for heating or cooling as required, test a minimum of two each for heating and cooling. 4. One at a time, press the override button for each space. 5. Verify the ERV goes into the occupied mode and system is in heating or cooling. 6. Verify unit stops at end of time period. ERV: Pre-Test: Override run time Zone temperature Zone set point Test: Override run time adjusted to Zone temperature set point adjusted to Heat Test or Cool Test Supply/Return fan command displayed Supply/Return fan status displayed Heating command displayed Cooling command displayed OSA/Relief damper position displayed Return air damper position displayed Return air temperature Mixed air temperature Outside air temperature Discharge air temperature System off at end of override Set points returned to original values. Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 26 Occupied Mode Tests 1. Place the system in the occupied mode by changing the schedule. 2. Verify by direct observation that the supply fan starts, the air dampers modulate to normal position (minimum air or higher), heating and cooling is set to control to current set point, relief dampers open and other parameters are normal. 3. Verify BAS displays the correct status for the units. ERV: Space temperature Space temperature set point Supply/Return fan command displayed Supply/Return fan status displayed Heating command displayed Cooling command displayed OSA/Relief damper position displayed Return air damper position displayed Return air temperature Mixed air temperature Outside air temperature Discharge air temperature System off when satisfied Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 27 Zone Control - Cooling 1. Verify outside air is below economizer lockout temperature. 2. Lower the zone set point slightly below the current zone temperature. 3. Verify outside air dampers open for economizer cooling and DX cooling remains off. 4. With an increased call for cooling, verify DX cooling is activated. 5. Mixed Air Low Limit: Simulate a mixed air temperature below the mixed air low limit set point and verify mixed air low limit overrides the economizer control by closing the outside air damper. Release low limit when done. 6. Economizer Lockout1: Simulate an OSA temperature above the return air temperature and verify OSA dampers modulate to minimum position. Release when done. 7. Economizer Lockout2: Simulate an OSA temperature above the Economizer Lockout Set point and verify OSA dampers modulate to minimum position. 8. Raise set point to eliminate a call for cooling. 9. Cooling with economizer lockout: With economizer locked out. Create a demand for cooler air. Verify cooling is activated immediately. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 28 Cooling Control: ERV: Pre-Test: Zone temperature Zone set point Outside air temperature Economizer minimum set point Economizer lockout set point Economizer damper position OAT RAT MAT DAT Mixed air low limit set point Test: Zone set point lowered to Heating command displayed Cooling command displayed OSA/Relief damper position displayed Return air damper position displayed Return air temperature Mixed air temperature Outside air temperature Discharge air temperature after 3 minutes Economizer is first stage of cooling Zone set point lowered to Heating command displayed Cooling command displayed OSA/Relief damper position displayed Return air damper position displayed Return air temperature Mixed air temperature Outside air temperature Discharge air temperature Discharge air temperature after stabilization Mechanical cooling coil is second stage of cooling Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 29 Limits ERV: Mixed Air Low Limit Mixed air low limit set point changed to Outside air dampers close to control to MLL Economizer Lockout Dampers to minimum position on economizer lockout based on return air Dampers to minimum position on economizer lockout based on outside air Cooling control during economizer lockout: Zone set point lowered to Cooling command displayed OSA damper position displayed Supply air temperature after stabilization. RAT MAT Mechanical cooling is first stage of cooling Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 30 Zone Control - Heating While system is still in cooling, simulate a zone temperature below the zone temperature set point. Verify economizer is at minimum. Verify discharge air temperature set point is reset higher in response to heating demand. Verify heating operates to control to set point. Heating Control: ERV: Pre-Test: Economizer minimum set point Zone temperature Zone set point Test: Set point raised to Heating command displayed Cooling command displayed OSA/Relief damper position displayed Return air damper position displayed Return air temperature Mixed air temperature Outside air temperature Discharge air temperature after 3 minutes Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 31 Thermostat Calibration and Point to Point Test. 1. At each thermostat location, press override push button (or raise/lower setpoint). 2. Verify that BAS indicates correct zone in override. 3. Measure room air temperature and record actual and BAS indicated temperatures. Unit No.Override Room Temp BAS Temp Unit No.Override Room Temp BAS Temp Set points returned to original values. Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: CxA: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 08 00 March 18, 2020 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Project #16-0996 23 08 00- 32 ERV Hard Wire Shutdowns: 1. Mixed Air Low Temperature: Trip freeze stat and verify fan shuts down and dampers close. AHU: Shutdown on freeze Reset OK Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: CxA: Comments: END OF SECTION 23 08 00 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 1 SECTION 23 09 00 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the Modifications thereto and Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section includes new and extension of field assembled instrumentation and temperature controls for air conditioning, heating, and ventilation systems. B. Contractor shall furnish, as minimum, all controls required to provide Sequence of Operation and control diagrams on drawings. C. See other Division 23 Sections and Equipment Schedules for controls integral to HVAC equipment. Note that VRF systems will be provided with proprietary controls that will be integrated into the JACE Tridium FMCS through a BACNet interface. D. Qualified Installer: Puget Sound Controls (253.250.1600), Holaday -Parks (206.248.9700), or CCI (206.328.1730). No others will be accepted. E. The WEB based interface will be a DDC web interface Tridium Jace-N4 level WEB controller. Contractor must use a library of templates to create a consistent graphical interface with graphics for air handling units, fans, pumps, boilers, valves, dampers, actuators, etc. F. The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) Contractor shall furnish and install a fully integrated building automation system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control as herein specified. The system shall include all required computer software and hardware controllers, sensors, transmission equipment, local panels, conduit, wire, installation, engineering, database and setup, supervision, commissioning, acceptance test, training, warranty service and at the owner’s option, extended warranty service. G. The system shall use LonTalk® as its native protocol. System components shall be certified by LonMark® display the LonMark® logo. Third party system components shall communicate through BACNet protocol. H. The FMCS shall be capable of total integration of the facility infrastructure systems with user access to all system data either locally over a secure Intranet within the building or by remote access by a standard Web Browser (MS-Explorer or Mozilla Firefox) over the Internet. I. The FMCS shall communicate to third party systems such as VRF system, air handling systems, energy metering systems, other energy management systems, access control systems, fire-life safety systems and other building management related devices with open, interoperable communication capabilities via the Tridium Jace front-end. J. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed specially for this project. Communication wiring shall be Lon standard cabling, no exceptions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 2 K. The controls contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the entire controls system as a single source and shall certify that he has on staff under his direct employ on a day to day basis, factory trained technical personnel, qualified to engineer, program, debug, and service all portions of the DDC control system, including central system Operators terminal, global controllers, terminal unit controllers, and all other portions of the DDC control system. L. Provide one PDF or six hard copies of control submittals per Section 23 00 00, including control system shop drawings in AutoCAD format. 1. Submit the manufacturer’s installation & startup manual as a part of the initial equipment submittal. 2. Submit the manufacturer’s operating and maintenance manual as a part of the initial equipment submittal. M. For each sequence of operation included in the plans and specification, the Submittal shall contain the following: 1. A narrative description of the sequences of operation as understood by the controls contractor. A copy of the sequences of operation from the construction documents is not acceptable. N. Assist the air and water balance contractor by operating system as required for balance report. 1.3 BASIC SYSTEM FEATURES A. Zone by zone DDC control of space temperature, usage scheduling, optimum starting, equipment failure reporting, and override timers for o ff-hours usage. A zone is the area served by one HVAC terminal unit (heat pump, ventilator, fan coil, etc.). B. Complete energy management software, including self adjusting optimum start, demand limiting, global control strategies and logging routines. All energy management programming shall be resident in field hardware and not dependent on the Operators Terminal for operation. Operators terminal software is to be used for access to field based energy management control programs only. C. Priority password security systems to prevent unauthorized use. Each user shall have an individual password. Each user shall be assigned which control functions they have access to. D. The complete system including, but not limited to terminal unit controllers, Global controllers and Operator terminals shall Auto-restart, without operator intervention, on resumption of power after a power failure. Database stored in Global Controller memory shall be battery backed up for a minimum of 30 days. Unitary controllers shall utili ze EEPROM for all variable data storage. Batteries on unitary controller shall not be allowed. E. Modular system design of proven reliability and each field panel capable of independent control. F. All software and/or hardware interface equipment for connection to remote monitoring station from field hardware or to Operator’s Terminal. G. Equipment runtime totalization of fans, heaters, boilers, etc., capable of alarm generation and alarm dial out to remote sites. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 3 H. Field control devices such as terminal unit controllers shall have optically isolated communication lines. Controllers not optically isolated and utilizing a ground referenced communication technique are specifically prohibited. I. Communication wiring for field control devices shall not be dependent on dais y chaining of communication wiring. Communication wire may be run in star patterns, daisy chained or combination of either, allowing units to be added to a communication line easily in the future. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of date of Supplier’s Proposal, and any subsections thereof as applicable, shall govern design and selection of equipment and material supplied: 1. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment; and 2. NEC National Electrical Code. B. City, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase. C. Except as otherwise indicated, vendor shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for necessary approvals by the governing authorities. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Drawings 1. Within four weeks after award of contract, the Supplier shall submit drawings for review. 2. For each sequence of operation included in the plans and specifications, the Submittal shall contain the following: a. A narrative description of the sequences of operation as understood by the controls contractor. A copy of the sequences of operation from the construction documents is not acceptable. 3. Drawings shall be standard sizes (24 inches x 36 inches) or (11 inches x 17 inches). 4. Provide one PDF of submittal drawings. 5. Provide laptop presentation to owner's personnel and mechanical engineers of all graphics and program features as part of submittal package. B. Submit the manufacturer's installation & startup manual as a part of the initial equipment submittal. C. Submit the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual as a part of the initial equipment submittal. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, w orkmanship, labor, and associated travel, and expenses for a period of one year from completion of system demonstration. This warranty shall become effective the date the owner accepts or receives beneficial use of the system. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 4 B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the Vendor. The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours. C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS A. Front End: TRIDIUM N4 Platform with “O” OPEN license and expanded memory. No Exceptions. 2.2 FMCS A. The Facility Management Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand alone digital controllers. The FMCS shall incorporate LonWorks™ technology using Free Topology Transceivers (FTT-10), and specific conformance to the LONMARK™ Interoperability Association’s v3.0 Physical Layer guidelines in all unitary, terminal and other device controllers. The system shall include: B. Network Area Controllers (NAC’s) for distributed system applications, databases and networking functions. C. Programmable Equipment Controllers (PEC’s) for control of primary mechanical systems and distributed system applications. Controllers shall be fully programmable to create custom control solutions. D. Application Specific Controllers (ASC’s) for control of VAV terminal units, fan coil terminal units, Unit Vent terminal units, Heat Pump units and other terminal equipment. E. Graphical User Interface (GUI) which includes the hardware and software necessary for a user to interface with the control system and devices. KCLS (owners) will provide standard graphical interface templates to be used by all control contractors as KCLS specific templates may differ from the Tridium basic library. 2.3 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) Tridium Jace-N4 Platform: A. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization 6. Integration of LonWorks controller data 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 5 B. The NAC shall provide multiple, concurrent user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it. C. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users. D. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage,; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. 1. The NAC shall route any alarm condition to any defined user location. 2. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: a. To alarm b. Return to normal c. To fault 3. Provide for the creation of an unlimited number of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc. 4. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. E. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as user defined: 1. Screen message text 2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple receipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on: a. Day of week b. Time of day c. Recipient 3. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) 4. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer on KCLS intranet (internal network) F. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum) 1. Time and date 2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) 3. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.) 4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. 5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement. G. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types of classes of alarms defined by the user. H. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user. I. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 6 J. A separate log for system alerts (controller failers, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user. K. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user. L. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data. 1. Time and Date 2. User ID 3. Change or activity: i.e, Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc. 2.4 PROGRAMMABLE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS (PEC) A. Each Application Specific Controller (ASC) shall operate as a stand-alone LonMark® compliant controller capable of performing its specified control responsib ilities independent of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a minimum 16 -BIT microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, real time digital control processor, unless otherwise specified. C. Controllers shall include all inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. Analog and digital outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 0-10V and 3-point floating control allowing for interface to a variety of industry standard modulating actuators. The ASC inputs and outputs shall consist of industry standards types. Inputs shall be electrically isolated from outputs, communications and power. All inputs shall be provided with an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. 2.5 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE (GUI) A. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. The GUI software shall run on a minimum XP operating system. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft W ord, Excel, and other Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciating on-line FMCS alarms and monitoring information. 1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. 3. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s and links to other graphic screens. 4. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable f or assignment to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported. 5. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner. 6. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slieder, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 7 7. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. 2.6 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS A. System Configuration. Contractor to provide all necessary licenses embedded workplace pro software for each JACE. The end-user (operator) will have the ability to perform the following tasks, with proper password access: 1. Create, delete or modify control strategies. 2. Add/delete objects to the system. 3. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters. 4. Enable or disable control strategies. 5. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer. 6. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state. 7. Modify, adjust set-points, schedules, graphs, trends, alarms. B. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal: 1. Group One a. AHU DDC System graphics. b. AHU status, on-off. c. Outdoor-air temperature d. Heating/Cooling (software) demand indication. e. Time and time schedule. g. Temperature control-point adjustment. h. AHU “failure-to-start” indication i. AHU air supply and return temperature. l. Room temperature indication. m. Room temperature set point. 2. Group Two a. AHU occupied/unoccupied mode. b. Exhaust fan on-off indication. c. Heating-coil control-valve position. d. Cooling stage call. e. High/low space temperature alarms. f. Alarms listed on the drawings. g. Freezestat trip alarm indication. 2.7 EQUIPMENT INTERFACES A. All new equipment must provide BACNet (or Lon) interface or third party communications interface modules so the Tridium Jace can communicate. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 8 2.8 PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE A. System shall include provision for connection to the World Wide Web for remote operation. When system is handed to Owner, Owner's personnel shall be able to access all system graphics screens, adjust setpoints, view alarms, and change schedules from any computer with web access. No software except a standard web browser is acceptable. No additional software (except a browser) shall be required. B. If the system is not fully accessible for all programming functions through the world wide web, Controls Contractor shall install interface software on a PC for user interface . C. If necessary, PC will be furnished by Owner. Controls software shall be installed by Controls Contractor. At Substantial Completion, PC will be complete and operable and Owner’s personnel trained to operate the system. D. Central DDC panel and PC (if necessary) will be located where directed by owner. 2.9 TIME PROGRAM COMMAND (TPC) A. The EMS/Controller System shall provide automatic start-up and/or shutdown of selected remote equipment and automatic adjustment of setpoint data according to user defined schedules stored in the computer. B. Any device which operates on a preset time basis can be assigned to this program. C. TPC shall operate in accordance with a yearly calendar with automatic adjustment for daylight savings time and leap year. D. TPC shall incorporate a holiday scheduling capability which will automatically bring up a predefined holiday schedule of operation. Holidays can be scheduled up to one year in advance. For each of those days specified a holiday, each time or clock zone will follow its unique holiday schedule. 2.10 GRAPHICS A. Setpoints for thermostats, supply air temperature, duct static pressure, etc. shall be alterable from a graphic screen. B. The EMS/Controller System shall include an interactive graphics package which shall include graphics for each air conditioning unit, terminal box, and exhaust fan. C. Text screens and graphics shall continuously update during viewing by operator. Speed shall be “real time.” D. Graphic screens shall display all relevant point information for each piece of equipment, to include but not be limited to supply aire, return air, mixed air, and outside air temperattures, space temperatures, fan on/off, and damper positions. 2.11 WIRING A. Electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the temperature control system as herein specified, shall be provided by the temperature control contractor. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of local and national electrical codes, and with applicable requirements of Electrical Sections. All wiring shall be plenum -rated cable whether installed in air plenum or not. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 9 2.12 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: Nibco or equal by Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Stockham or approved equal. B. Globe Pattern: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, screwed ends with back seating capacity packable under pressure. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 3. Hydronic Systems: a. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F. b. Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel. c. Size for 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. d. Furnish two-way valves with equal percentage characteristics. Furnish three way valves with linear characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against pump shut off head. C. Butterfly Pattern: Iron body, stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 250 degrees F wafer or lug ends, extended neck. 1. Hydronic Systems: a. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F. b. Size for 1 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 2.13 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS A. Manufacturers: Belimo or approved equal. B. Operation: Two-position or proportional as required for application. Reversing type proportional motor, spring-return. C. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 250 Type 2 \ 1 Enclosure. D. Mounting: Direct mount. E. Stroke: 30 seconds end to end full stroke, 15 seconds return to normal for spring return. F. Protection: Electronic stall protection. G. Control Input: 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA DC. H. Power: Nominal 24 \ 120 volt AC. I. Torque: Size for minimum 150 percent of required duty. J. Duty cycle: rated for 65,000 cycles. K. Accessories: 1. Cover mounted transformer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 10 2. Auxiliary potentiometer. 3. Damper linkage. 4. Direct drive feedback potentiometer. 5. Output position feedback. 6. Field selectable rotational, spring return direction, field adjustable zero and span. 7. End switch. 2.14 ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS A. Manufacturers: Belimo or approved equal. B. Operation: Proportional, spring-return. 1. Spring return closed to coil for cooling application. 2. Spring return open to coil for heating application. C. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 250 Type 2 Enclosure. D. Mounting: Direct mount. E. Stroke: 30 seconds end to end full stroke, 15 seconds return to normal for spring return. F. Protection: Electronic stall protection. G. Control Input: 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA DC. H. Power: Nominal 24 \ 120 volt AC. I. Torque: Size for minimum 150 percent of required duty. J. Duty cycle: rated for 65,000 cycles. K. Accessories: 1. Cover mounted transformer. 2. Auxiliary potentiometer. 3. Direct drive feedback potentiometer. 4. Output position feedback. 5. Field selectable rotational, spring return direction, field adjustable zero and span. 2.15 TEMPERATURE SENSORS A. All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory calibrated to within one -half degree F, totally interchangeable. Wall sensors to be housed in enclosure appropriate for application. Duct and well sensors to be electronically identical with housing app ropriate for application. Provide appropriate wells for installation by others. B. Digital Display Zone Temperature Sensor. 1. Sensor shall be digital with LCD temperature display and user function controls along with temperature sensor. Sensor shall function as occupant control unit. It shall allow Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 11 occupant to raise and lower setpoint and activate terminal unit for night overri de use all within limits as programmed by building operator. 2. “Blind” sensors without digital display of room temperature and slider adjustment are not acceptable and will be rejected. 3. Provide Digital display zone sensor for all wall sensors unless indicat ed otherwise on drawings. C. Accuracy ± 0.5F. 2.16 HIGH AND LOW LIMIT THERMOSTATS A. Low limit thermostats or sensors upstream of coils shall employ a 20 foot element. B. High and low limit discharge duct thermostats shall employ rod and tube type element s which extend approximately 10 inches into the duct. C. Accuracy ± 0.5F. 2.17 ENCLOSURES A. All enclosures to be UL listed and all metal construction. All controls and instruments logically assembled at one or more panels. 2.18 CONTROL RELAYS A. Shall be rated for the application, with a minimum of two sets of Form C contacts, enclosed in a dust proof enclosure. Relays shall be rated for a minimum life of one million operations. Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or less, with release time of 10 milliseconds or less, with release time of 10 milliseconds or less. Relays should be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150% of rated coil voltage. 2.19 CONTROL POWER A. Provide transformers to supply power for control equipment operating at less than normal lighting circuit voltage. Do not connect wiring to lighting circuits. 2.20 CO2 SENSOR A. Manufacturer: AirTest or approved equal. B. General: Gold plated non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) optical sensor with automatic baseline correction for self-calibration. Self-calibrating, temperature compensated for full range accuracy without manual calibration. 0-2000 ppm range. Wall mount or duct mount. C. Quality: ISO-9001 manufactured. EMI protection EMC89/336/EEC, +/- 1% measured range accuracy, +3% measured value, T90 response time of less than 2 minutes. D. Output: CO2 concentration in ppm with selectable VDC or mA. LCD display with readout in ppm. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 12 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install controls by mechanics skilled in erection of control systems employed by and under direct supervision of control manufacturer's representative. 2. Mount control equipment and devices as recommended by manufacturers and as shown on drawings; in case of conflicts between manufacturer's ins tructions and the drawings, consult the Project Manager for direction. 3. Fasten all equipment securely to structure. Install equipment and exposed piping and conduit runs parallel to building lines, plumb and level. B. Wiring: 1. Provide line voltage and/or low voltage wiring as required to serve the complete system; conform to code. 2. Provide EMT or rigid conduit for exposed control wiring outside of cabinets or enclosures. Concealed low voltage wiring need not be in conduit, except in walls (see “3”). 3. Provide rigid conduit for control wiring concealed in partition walls, until conduit emerges from wall above ceilings. 4. Run low voltage control wiring separate from line voltage wiring and segregate from other systems to avoid Electromagnetic Interference (EMI). 5. All low voltage control wiring shall be home runs between components without splices. C. Install sleeves through concrete surfaces in minimum one inch sleeves, extended 6 inches above floors and one inch below bottom surface of slabs. D. Install thermostats, humidistat, space temperature sensors, and other exposed control sensors after locations are coordinated with other Work. E. Install freeze protection thermostats using flanges and element holders. F. Install outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements outdoors with sun shield. G. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements. H. Install thermostats in aspirating boxes in public areas and as indicated on Drawings. I. Install control panels adjacent to associated equipmen t on vibration free walls or freestanding supports. Install engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face. J. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in "hand" position. 3.2 THERMOSTATS AND SENSORS A. Mount thermostats and other human interface devices at 48” centerline above finished floor to comply with ADA accessibility per ANSI A117.1. Align thermostats and devises with light switches and other controls. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 13 B. Coordinate wall location of thermostats and other wall mount devices with light switches and controls provided by others. All devices in the same vicinity should be grouped at a common elevation with regular horizontal spacing intervals. C. Mount space CO2 sensors for room monitoring at 48” centerline above finished floor. 3.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. Selected contractor to provide a project manager who shall as a part of his duties shall be responsible for the following activities. 1. Coordination between the Contractor and all other trades, owner, local authorities and the design team. 2. Scheduling of manpower, material delivery, equipment installation and checkout. 3. Maintenance of construction records such as project scheduling and manpower planning and AutoCAD or Visio for project co-ordintation and as-built drawings. 4. Coordination/Single point of contact. B. Field Equipment Test Procedures: DDC control panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end-to-end test. Such that: 1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their operation verified. 2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. 3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value. 4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all interlocked points. 5. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled ouputs. C. As-Built Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, the Contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, provide both PDF and AutoCad files to the owner. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system. 2. An operator’s manual that will include detailed instructions for all operations of the system. 3. An operator’s reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable. 4. A programmer’s manual that will include all information necessary to perform programming functions. 5. Flow charts of the control software programs utilized in the DDC system. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 14 6. Flow charts of the custom software programs utilized in the DDC system as approved. 7. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs. 8. A copy of the warranty. 9. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. 3.4 TRAINING A. Contractor shall provide to the engineer a training class outline prior to any scheduled training. Contractor will provide (2) four hour training sessions. 3.5 COORDINATION A. Furnish all control products to accomplish the specified sequence of operation, except those products specifically furnished under other sections. B. Install all control products and connections, except where already installed by the equipment manufacturer. 3.6 TESTING A. Conduct functional tests on complete systems, or individual portions as approved. B. Start up and test each system, or portion thereof, to determine that each control device functions reliably and as specified to attain operation sequence. C. Conduct operational tests; set controls to operating conditions, record settings and readings of each control device. D. Work in close coordination with testing and balancing Agency to set up control devices, set damper flow rates, and provide control system in perfect operating order. See Section 15990. 3.7 FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start DDCS under provisions of this section. B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. C. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at Control Contractor’s local or main office. At a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service. 3.8 GENERAL A. The following work shall be considered to be under Electrical Work: 1. All power wiring from power source to equipment. 2. Checking current characteristics and rotation of all motors. 3. Furnishing and installing disconnect switches. Note: Disconnect switches may not be mounted directly on mechanical equipment per UMC and NEC. 4. Furnishing and installing all starters. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 09 00 October 20, 2021 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC Project #16-0996 23 09 00 - 15 B. The following work shall be considered to be under Division 23: 1. All temperature, interlock, and equipment control wiring, conduit, and appurtenances, high and low voltage. 2. All control wiring, line or low voltage, including but not limited to wiring through the coils of the magnetic starters and relays, and through the contacts of thermostats and other pilot devices, except where noted otherwise. 3.9 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PARTICIPATION IN PROJECT COMMISSIONING A. Provide authorized startup technician to perform functional performance testing as specified in Commissioning sections of the specification. B. Provide building commissioning support as specified. 3.10 The Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) is to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements and Section 23 08 00 – Commissioning of HVAC. The contractor has specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation. Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority. 3.11 The EMCS contractor shall provide the technician responsible for the EMCS installation to attend a Controls Integration Meeting (CIM). The CIM shall be conducted after the EMCS s ubmittal and the Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) control submittal are complete and the CA has reviewed the submittals. The meeting is to be conducted prior to finalizing the functional test procedures and shall be attended by the Commissioning Authority, the EMCS controls contractor, the VRF control supplier and a representative of the Owner’s maintenance group at a minimum. The CIM shall include, but not be limited to, the following topics: 1. Sequence of Operations. 2. Alarm Points List. 3. Trend Points List. 4. Displayed/Adjustable Point List. 5. Graphical Interface. 6. Integration with packaged equipment. 7. Point-to-Point Checkout and Commissioning of Existing Equipment. 8. Method of Conducting Cx Functional Testing. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 23 00 October 20, 2021 REFRIGERANT PIPING Project #16-0996 23 23 00 - 1 SECTION 23 23 00 – REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves or equipme nt. C. Flexible Connectors: Use at spring isolated air handlers and condensers greater than six tons. D. Size piping in accord with equipment manufacturer's refrigerant piping design guidelines based on actual piping installation lengths. Use long line calculations when applicable. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation of refrigerant piping systems. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. 2.2 REFRIGERANT LINE SET A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, annealed, Type ACR 1. Flared ends with brass nuts and protective caps. 2. Pre-insulated, dual tube, liquid and vapor lines with closed-cell elastomeric foam. 3. R-410A, 700 PSI rated. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 23 00 October 20, 2021 REFRIGERANT PIPING Project #16-0996 23 23 00 - 2 2.3 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. 2.4 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Packless Ind, Metraflex, Mason or approved equal. B. Braided Refrigeration Piping Connection 1. Bronze flexible hose and bronze braided outer covering. 2. Copper sweat connections, cleaned de-greased, and bagged. 3. R410a rated, 650 psi working pressure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.2 INSTALLATION PIPING SYSTEMS A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. E. Protection: Where piping, other than cast iron or steel, is installed in a concealed location through holes or notches in framing (i.e. studs, joists, rafters, etc.), less than 1-1/2 from framing edge, provide shield plates. Shield plates shall be 16 gauge steel and cover the piping area within framing plus 2” on each side along framing. F. Use rigid Armacell Armafix pipe clamp assembly at all supports. G. Determine equivalent line length and size piping per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Provide solenoid valve and other required piping accessories for long line installation. H. Refrigerant piping shall not be installed in elevators, public stairways, stair landing or means of egress spaces. I. Install pipe identification. J. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 23 00 October 20, 2021 REFRIGERANT PIPING Project #16-0996 23 23 00 - 3 K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. L. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen during brazing. Keep piping open with nitrogen flow for zero pressure while brazing. M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. N. Insulate piping and equipment. O. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. P. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. Q. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5. 3.3 INSTALLATION-EXTERIOR PIPING A. Provide waterproof pipe entry into build ing with trim and flashing. B. Protect exposed insulated pipe with aluminum jacket. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 500 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 500 psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. C. Repair leaks. D. Retest until no leaks are detected. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 31 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #16-0996 23 31 00 - 1 SECTION 23 31 00 – HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. B. Standards: Comply with most stringent requirements and recommendations of International Mechanical Code or SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association) Duct Construction Standards for fabrication, construction and sealant of duct, fittings, and accessories. C. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Black Carbon Steel: Plain carbon steel which is not galvanized or oiled. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A1008. C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength. D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. E. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Thermaflex G-KM or approved equal. B. Product Description: Black polymer film supported by helical-wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film, UL 181 Class 1 complying with NFPA 90A & 90B. 1. Pressure Rating: 6 inches wg positive and 1 inches wg negative. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 31 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #16-0996 23 31 00 - 2 2. Maximum Velocity: 5000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 250 degrees F. 4. Thermal Resistance: R-4.2 C. Accessories: 1. Hanger Strap: Thermaflex FlexTie – 1-1/2” wide, adjustable, plenum rated. 2. Elbow: Thermaflex FlexFlow Elbow – One piece adjustable design installs over flex duct. 2.3 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS A. Manufacturers: McGill AirFlow, Semco or approved equal. B. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct constructed of galvanized steel. C. Joints: 16” and larger flange with gasket material. D. Elbows: Smooth radius or 5 section, 1.5D. E. Application: Required for all exposed round ductwork; all round ductwork 12” dia. and larger; all round ductwork with static pressure over 1” w.g.. Optional for all round ductwork. F. Construct duct with the following minimum gages: Diameter Gauge 3 inches to 14 inches 26 15 inches to 26 inches 24 G. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages: Diameter Gauge 3 inches to 14 inches 24 15 inches to 26 inches 22 2.4 SINGLE WALL ROUND DUCTS (Snap Lock) A. Not allowed on this project. 2.5 DUCT SEALANT A. Manufacturer: Design Polymerics, United McGill or approved equal. B. Sealant shall be water based and formulated to withstand working temperatures of -25°F to +200°F. All sealants shall exceed 500 hours under ASTM C 732 (artificial weathering) and pass ASTM C 734 (low temperature flexibility after artificial weathering). All sealants shall be of an Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 31 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #16-0996 23 31 00 - 3 elastomeric nature, have a weight per gallon not to exceed 12.5, have solids by weight of 66% ± 2%, pass UL 723 with a flame spread of 5 and smoke developed of 5. 2.6 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support rectangular and round ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures corresponding to the ESP (external static pressure) of the fan system. i.e. Ductwork for a fan with and ESP of 0.75” w.g. should be constructed per SMACNA 1” w.g. pressure standard. B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. C. Indicated dimensions on drawings are net inside. Allow for thickness of duct lining where indicated. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. F. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections. 2.7 CLOTHES DRYER EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Rigid galvanized sheet metal of minimum 26 gauge with smooth interior finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Make field measurements to establish locations of hangers and supports where installation will not damage building construction. B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. C. Where ducts pass through partitions, ceilings or floors. Provide 1" clearance and insulate from structure with insulation material. Provide flanged sheet metal closure. D. Where ducts pass through rated walls or assemblies without fire dampers, provide ¼” to 1” annular space and fill with firestop sealant. Ductwork shall be minimum 26 gauge metal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 31 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #16-0996 23 31 00 - 4 E. Isolate joints between dissimilar metals with fiber gasket. F. Drawings do not attempt to show all offsets in ductwork. Make such offsets as necessary for installation of work without additional cost to Owner. 15 degree maximum angle of offset. G. Exterior Ductwork: 1. Construct one gauge heavier than SMACNA standard for size indicated. 2. Seal all joints and seams with heavy mastic. Duct shall be water tight. 3. Construct top surfaces with slope to prevent standing water on duct. 4. Support ductwork with engineered products for application. 5. Paint ductwork and galvanized supports with corrosion resistant paint. H. Exposed ductwork shall be Appearance Grade. Ductwork located in crawl spaces, shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 1. All round ductwork shall be spiral seam (no snap-lock joints). 2. All joints clean and workmanlike. 3. Ductwork entirely free of dents. 4. Ductwork subject to denting due to space function construct one gauge heavier than SMACNA standard for size indicated. 5. All hangers trimmed of excess metal. 6. Plumb, level, parallel or perpendicular to building structure. 7. Sealed with transparent, paintable sealant to avoid streaking. I. Flexible Duct: 1. Install insulated flexible duct in full extended condition free of sags and kinks. 2. Use minimum length required to make connection. 3. Length shall not exceed 10 feet. 4. Supported on 36" centers with minimum 1-1/2” wide strap. Do not crush. 5. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. J. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 00. K. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 3.3 SEISMIC BRACING A. See 23 05 00. 3.4 DUCT SEALING A. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Ductwork shall be sealed using welds, gaskets, or mastic. Duct tape is not permitted as a sealant on any ducts with the exception of that on fiberglass ducts specifically made for such use. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 31 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #16-0996 23 31 00 - 5 B. For all ductwork seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. For 2” w.g. and higher pressure class ductwork also seal all duct wall penetrations (i.e. screw, fastener, rod or wire). C. Low pressure ductwork (less than 3” w.g.) shall be sealed to a leakage rate not to exceed 6 percent of the system airflow. All deficient ductwork shall be re-sealed until compliant. 3.5 CLOTHES DRYER DUCT INSTALLATION A. Ducts shall terminate outside the building and be equipped with a backdraft damper. No screens shall be used at termination. B. Ducts shall not be constructed with sheet metal screws or other fasteners that enter the airstream. Ductwork shall be metal with smooth interior finish. The male end of duct joints shall extend in the direction of airflow. C. Dryer ducts which penetrate a wall of ceiling membrane shall be fire caulked. D. Dryer ducts shall be supported at minimum 4 foot intervals and secured in place. E. Provide protective shield plates where duct is in concealed locations within framing. Plates shall be 16 gage steel and cover the duct area plus 2”. Shields may be omitted if duct is more than 1-1/2” from nearest edge of structural member. F. Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Install pitot tube openings for testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete with metal can with spring device or screw to prevent air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring. G. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. H. Connect air outlets and inlets to supply ducts with five foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. 3.6 SCHEDULES A. Ductwork Material Schedule: AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Supply, Return, Exhaust, Relief Galvanized Steel Outside Air Intake Galvanized Steel Combustion Air Galvanized Steel Exterior Galvanized Steel (Painted exterior) B. Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule: Install higher pressure class than indicated where corresponding fan system ESP (external static pressure) is higher. AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 31 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Project #16-0996 23 31 00 - 6 Constant Volume Low Pressure Supply Minimum 2 inch wg. Return, Exhaust Minimum 2 inch wg END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 33 00 October 20, 2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 23 33 00 - 1 SECTION 23 33 00 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION A. Verify locations for access panels with Architect. B. Coordinate damper power, control and fire alarm interface with other trades. C. See 23 09 00 for Electric Damper Actuators. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements. B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL BALANCING DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Ruskin, Greenheck or approved equal B. Frames: Galvanized steel, minimum 20 gage. C. Blades: Galvanized steel, minimum 20 gage, attached to minimum 3/8 inch shafts with locking handle quadrant. Provide 2” standoff for insulated ductwork applications. D. Maximum Velocity: 1500 fpm. E. Rectangular: 24” and under on a side Ruskin MD25; over 24” on a side Ruskin MD35 or equal. F. Round: Ruskin MDRS25 or equal. 2.2 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Tamco, Ruskin, Greenheck or approved equal B. Frame: Extruded aluminum (6063T5) channel of minimum 0.080” thickness with mounting flanges on both sides. C. Blades: Extruded aluminum (6063T5) airfoil. Maximum blade size 6 inches wide, 48 inches long, attached to minimum 7/16 inch hex shafts. D. Bearings: Celcon inner bearing fixed to blade pin, rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame. E. Seals: EPDM blade seals and silicone frame seals. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 33 00 October 20, 2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 23 33 00 - 2 F. Damper Leakage: AMCA Pressure Class 1A, maximum leakage rate of 3.0 cfm/ft2 at 1.0 inch w.g. pressure differential. G. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches w.g. H. Rectangular: Tamco 1000, Ruskin CD50 or equal. I. Round: Ruskin CDRS25 or equal up to 12” diameter, for larger sizes use rectangular damper with manufacturer’s square-to-round transitions. J. Options: 1. For dampers with a dimension over 48” provide multiple sections with jack shafts. 2. Provide parallel blade action for two position (open/closed) applications. 3. Provide opposed blade action for modulation or control applications. 2.3 INSULATED CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Tamco, Ruskin, Greenheck or approved equal B. Frame: Insulated extruded aluminum (6063T5) channel of minimum 0.080” thickness with mounting flanges on both sides. C. Blades: Extruded aluminum (6063T5) airfoil internally insulated with expanded polyurethane foam and thermally broken. Maximum blade size 6 inches wide, 48 inches long, attached to minimum 7/16 inch hex shafts. D. Bearings: Celcon inner bearing fixed to blade pin, rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame. E. Seals: EPDM blade seals and silicone frame seals. F. Damper Leakage: AMCA Pressure Class 1A, maximum leakage rate of 3.0 cfm/ft2 at 1.0 inch w.g. pressure differential. G. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches w.g. H. Rectangular Insulated: Tamco 9000, Ruskin CDTI-50 or equal. I. Round: Provide rectangular damper with manufacturer’s square-to-round transitions. J. Options: 1. For dampers with a dimension over 48” provide multiple sections with jack shafts. 2. Provide parallel blade action for two position (open/closed) applications. 3. Provide opposed blade action for modulation or control applications. 2.4 REMOTE OPERATED BALANCING DAMPERS (MANUAL) A. Manufacturers: Young, MAT or approved equal. B. Damper: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 33 00 October 20, 2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 23 33 00 - 3 1. Round butterfly or radial damper with external control hardware, 5020-CC, RT-250. 2. Round butterfly or radial damper with internal control hardware, 5020-CC-2, RT-150. 3. Rectangular opposed blade damper with external control hardware, 830A-CC, RT-200. 4. Rectangular opposed blade damper with internal control hardware, 830A-CC-2, RT-100. C. Remote Damper Operator: 1. External cable control, 3” cover plate, 270-301 2. Internal cable control, 270-275 3. Remote cable wall control, 700 (where indicated). 2.5 REMOTE OPERATED BALANCING DAMPERS (ACTUATED) A. Manufacturers: United Enertech, MAT or approved equal. B. Damper: 1. Round butterfly or radial damper. 2. Rectangular opposed blade damper. C. Actuator: 1. Low voltage actuator. 2. Plenum rated low voltage wiring. 3. Hand held controller/power source with damper position indicator. D. Accessories: 1. Ceiling cover plate 2. Furnish (1) one hand held controller to owner. 2.6 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS (INLINE) A. Manufacturers: Ruskin FSD60/FSD60LP, FSDR60, equal by Greenheck, or approved equal. B. Application: Provide FSD60LP (low pressure) model for dampers 14” in height and smaller. All others provide standard FSD60. C. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, and UL 555S. D. Fire Resistance: 1-1/2 hours or 3 hours depending on rating of wall. E. Leakage Rating: Class I, maximum of 8 cfm at 4 inches wg differential pressure. F. Damper Temperature Rating: 350 degrees F. G. Frame: 16 gage, galvanized steel. H. Blades: 1. Style: Airfoil-shaped, single piece, double skin. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 33 00 October 20, 2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 23 33 00 - 4 2. Action: Opposed. 3. Orientation: Horizontal. 4. Material: Minimum 16 gage equivalent thickness, galvanized steel. 5. Width: Maximum 7 inches. I. Bearings: Stainless steel or bronze. J. Seals: Silicone blade edge seals and flexible stainless steel jamb seals. K. Linkage: Concealed in frame. L. Provide with duct transition connection. M. Release Device: Close in controlled manner and allow damper to be reset. N. Actuator: Belimo, electric 120 volt, 60 hertz, two-position, fail close. O. Resetable Link Release Temperature: 165 degrees F. P. Factory installed sleeve and mounting angles. Furnish silicone caulk factory applied to sleeve at damper frame to comply with leakage rating requirements. 2.7 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS (FRONT ACCESS) A. Manufacturers: Ruskin FSD60FA, equal by Greenheck or approved equal. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, and UL 555S. C. Fire Resistance: 1-1/2 hours. D. Leakage Rating: Class I, maximum of 8 cfm at 4 inches wg differential pressure. E. Damper Temperature Rating: 350 degrees F. F. Frame: 20 gage, galvanized steel. G. Blades: 1. Style: Airfoil-shaped, single piece, double skin. 2. Action: Opposed. 3. Orientation: Horizontal. 4. Material: Minimum 14 gage equivalent thickness, galvanized steel. 5. Width: Maximum 6 inches. H. Bearings: Stainless steel. I. Seals: Silicone blade edge seals and flexible steel jamb seals. J. Linkage: Concealed in frame. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 33 00 October 20, 2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 23 33 00 - 5 K. Damper shall be constructed so that actuators and all accessories are accessible from the grille side. Actuators and accessories shall be housed within an integral cabinet on the side of the damper frame and shall not be installed in the air stream in front of the damper. Provide sleeve with duct transition connection and grille mounting flange. L. Release Device: Close in controlled manner and allow damper to be reset. M. Actuator: Belimo, electric 120 volt, 60 hertz, two-position, fail close. N. Resetable Link Release Temperature: 165 degrees F. O. Factory installed sleeve and mounting angles. Furnish silicone caulk factory applied to sleeve at damper frame to comply with leakage rating requirements. 2.8 DYNAMIC FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin or approved equal. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, NFPA 101 and UL 555. C. Fire Resistance: 1-1/2 hours or 3 hours depending on rating of wall. D. Dynamic Closure Rating: Dampers classified for dynamic closure to 2000 fpm and 4 inches wg static pressure. E. Construction: 1. Integral Sleeve Frame: Minimum 20 gage roll formed galvanized steel. Blades: a. Style: Curtain type. b. Action: Spring or gravity closure upon fusible link release. c. Material: Minimum 24 gage roll formed, galvanized steel. 2. Closure Springs: Type 301 stainless steel, constant force type, if required. F. Fusible Link Release Temperature: 165 degrees F. G. Provide with duct transition connection. 2.9 DRYER BOX A. Manufacturers: Guy Gray, In-O-Vate Technologies or approved equal. B. 22 gauge aluminized steel manufactured wall recessed dryer vent hose receptacle with opening for 4” dia. duct. UL Classified for a one hour wall. Installation per manufacturer’s instructions. 2.10 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Co nstruction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 33 00 October 20, 2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 23 33 00 - 6 B. Fabrication: Rigid and close fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, furnish minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less than 12 inches square, secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Furnish two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. 4. Larger Sizes: Furnish additional hinge. 5. Access panels with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Duro-Dyne or approved equal B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. C. Double fold “Grip-Loc” metal-to-fabric connection. D. Indoor Connector: “Metal-Fab”, 24 ga, 3”metal - 3” fabric - 3” metal. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant Neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric conforming to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd, 500 lbs tensile strength. E. Exterior Connector: “Metal-Fab”, 24 ga, 3”metal - 3” fabric - 3” metal. 1. Fabric: Ul listed fire-retardant Hypalon coated woven galas fiber fabric conforming to NFPA 90A, minimum density 24 oz per sq yd, 250 lbs tensile strength. 2. Cover connection with GSM shroud. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation. B. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 3.2 INSTALLATION. A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class. B. See Section 23 34 00, paragraph 1.4 for damper installation. C. Provide motorized in lieu of gravity back-draft dampers per Energy Code. D. Provide control dampers where not furnished with packaged equipment. E. Provide insulated control dampers where: 1. The damper is installed behind a louver. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 33 00 October 20, 2021 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Project #16-0996 23 33 00 - 7 2. The damper is installed in a roof penthouse or gravity ventilator. 3. The damper is unducted and open to a conditioned space. F. Provide shroud (matching duct material) over flexible duct connections when installed outside. G. Install remote operated dampers for balancing where damper is located in an inaccessible location. H. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations and as indicated on Drawings: 1. Before and after each fire damper, smoke damper and combination fire and smoke damper. 2. Where access is required for a valve or damper. 3. Install at locations for cleaning kitchen exhaust ductwork in accordance with NFPA 96. I. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated on Drawings. Review locations prior to fabrication. J. Install temporary duct test holes as required for testing and balancing purposes. Cut or drill in ducts. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps. K. Install fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and smoke dampers at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. 1. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A. 2. Install dampers square and free from racking with blades running horizontally. 3. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening. 4. Handle damper using sleeve or frame. Do not lift damper using blades, actuator, or jack shaft. 5. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 34 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC FANS Project #16-0996 23 34 00 - 1 SECTION 23 34 00 – HVAC FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204. 1.2 DRIVES AND BELTS A. For pressurization or life safety applications provide 1.5 times the required number of sheaves and belts for that duty with a minimum of two sheaves and belts. 1.3 DAMPERS A. A gravity backdraft or motorized control damper is required on every exhaust fan. B. Fans which are noted to operate continuously or have a capacity of 300 cfm or less shall have a gravity backdraft damper unless noted otherwise. All other fans shall have a motorized control damper. C. See 23 33 00 for motorized control dampers. D. Provide insulated control dampers where scheduled or where required by 23 33 00. 1.4 FAN EFFICIENCY A. Single fan or multiple fans in parallel with combined motor nameplate over 5hp shall have a Fan Efficiency Grade (FEG) of 67 or higher and shall be selected to operate within 15% of the maximum total efficiency of the fan. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL INLINE FANS A. Manufacturers: Greenheck, Cook or approved equal. B. Construction: Square galvanized steel with duct collars, two removable access panels. Backward inclined aluminum wheel and inlet, statically and dynamically balanced. C. Direct Drive: 1. Motor: Electronic Commutation DC brushless motor with internal solid state AC/DC converter circuitry and heavy duty ball bearings. Speed controllable down to 20% of full speed. Minimum 85% efficient at all speeds. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 34 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC FANS Project #16-0996 23 34 00 - 2 a. Motor mounted potentiometer speed control dial. 2. Accessories: a. UL-705 rated. b. Motorized Control damper. c. Speed Control. d. Neoprene isolators 2.2 EQUIPMENT RAIL SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Greenheck GESR or approved equal. B. Prefabricated insulated galvanized steel equipment support. 6 inch width. Provide with same coating as fan, otherwise Polyester Urethane. Select height based on roofing and insulation requirements. Select length based on equipment supported. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ROOF CURBS A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as instructed by manufacturer. B. Provide sound attenuation material in curb where so indicated on drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Secure roof fans with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb. B. Suspended Fans: Install flexible connections between inlet and outlet of fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. C. Install safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. D. Install gravity backdraft or motorized control dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated on Drawings. E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. 3.3 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean inside of fan cabinet. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 34 00 October 20, 2021 HVAC FANS Project #16-0996 23 34 00 - 3 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not operate fans for until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 37 00 October 20, 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Project #16-0996 23 37 00 - 1 SECTION 23 37 00 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Diffuser, register, and grille performance shall be tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE 70. B. Louver performance shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA 500. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal. B. Type: Square, stamped, multi-core, adjustable pattern diffuser. C. Frame: Surface mount with flat frame or T-bar lay-in. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel white finish. 2.2 LOW-FLOW RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: Price SPD or approved equal. B. Type: Square plaque, induction nozzles. C. Frame: Surface mount with flat frame or T-bar lay-in. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel white finish. 2.3 SUPPLY REGISTERS A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal. B. Type: Contoured and individually adjustable blades, 3/4" blade spacing, two-way deflection. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. D. Fabrication: Steel with factory white enamel finish. 2.4 EXHAUST/ RETURN GRILLES A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal. B. Type: Fixed blades, 1/2 inch blade spacing, with blades set at 35 degrees. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting, welded corners. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 37 00 October 20, 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Project #16-0996 23 37 00 - 2 D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, with factory white enamel finish. 2.5 EGGCRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal. B. Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch aluminum core. C. Fabrication: Aluminum with factory white enamel finish. D. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting or channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings. 2.6 LOUVERS A. Manufacturers: Greenheck ESD-403, Ruskin, Wonder Metal or approved equal. B. Product Description: Stationary, drainable blade. AMCA certified. C. Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frame. Minimum initial point of water penetration of 900 fpm. D. Fabrication: 12 gage thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory 2-coat 70% Kynar finish, color to be selected. E. Mounting: Furnish with flanges, mullions, and hardware for installation. F. Bird Screen: Aluminum 3/4" x 0.051” flattened expanded metal. 2.7 LOUVERS - SIGHTPROOF A. Manufacturers: Greenheck SED-501, Ruskin or approved equal. B. Product Description: Stationary, drainable chevron blade, sightproof. AMCA certified. C. Type: 5 inch deep with chevron blades, heavy channel frame. Minimum initial point of water penetration of 1100 fpm. D. Fabrication: 12 gage thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory 2-coat 70% Kynar finish, color to be selected. E. Mounting: Furnish with flanges, mullions, and hardware for installation. F. Screen: Aluminum 3/4" x 0.051” flattened expanded metal. 2.8 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, of minimum 18 gage aluminum. Provide termination insect screen. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 37 00 October 20, 2021 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Project #16-0996 23 37 00 - 3 2.9 CAPS A. Wall Cap (round connection): Aluminum construction, aluminum finish, built in birdscreen with damper. Greenheck WC or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify inlet and outlet locations with Architectural Plans. B. Verify ceiling/wall type before ordering. C. Verify diffuser air patterns are as indicated before starting air balance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection. B. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, whether or not dampers are furnished as part of diffuser, grille, and register assembly. C. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 72 00 October 20, 2021 ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS Project #16-0996 23 72 00 - 1 SECTION 23 72 00 – ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of all building penetrations required for installation of each unit and associated hydronic, gas and electrical systems. B. Contractor shall coordinate with roofing contractor to ensure curb unit is properly flashed. 1.2 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. One set of fan and energy wheel belts, as applicable. 1.3 ELECTRICAL A. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): All HVAC and refrigeration equipment with multi- motor or combination electrical loads shall comply with NEC 110.10 & 440.4 and must include a SCCR greater than the Available Interrupting Current (AIC) of the electrical circuit serving the equipment. See electrical drawings for required AIC kA rating. Equipment SCCR may be presented in writing from the manufacturer or shown on the unit nameplate. Refrigeration or air-conditioning equipment over 60 Amps MOCP must list the SCCR on the unit nameplate. If the AIC rating is unavailable or cannot be determined provide equipment with a minimum SCCR of 10kA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC COILS A. Manufacturers: Indeeco, Neptronic, Greenheck or approved equal. B. Assembly: UL listed and labeled, with terminal control box and hinged cover, splice box, coil, casing, and controls. C. Coil: Exposed helical coil of nickel-chrome resistance wire with refractory ceramic support bushings and stainless steel terminals. D. Casing: Channel frame of galvanized steel with brackets, stiffening ribs and gussets welded to frame. Flange duct connection unless noted otherwise. E. Controls: Automatic reset thermal cut-out, built-in magnetic disconnecting contactors (3- poles), control circuit transformer and fuse, secondar y replaceable thermal cut-out, air flow proving device, fused disconnect. F. Accessories: 1. Insulated terminal box 2. SCR control 3. Door interlock switch Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 72 00 October 20, 2021 ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS Project #16-0996 23 72 00 - 2 4. Fan Relay 2.2 PACKAGE ROOFTOP ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT A. Manufacturers: Greenheck ERV or approved equal B. General: Unit shall be fully assembled at the factory and consist of an insulated metal cabinet, Energy wheel, motorized insulated low-leak dampers, sensors, frost control, filter assembly for intake air and exhaust air, supply air blower assembly, exhaust air blower and an electrical microprocessor control center. All specified components and internal accessories factory installed and tested and prepared for single-point high voltage connection. C. Cabinet: Formed double wall insulated metal cabinet. Outside casing: 18-gauge, galvanized steel, factory pre-painted with polyester urethane paint (permatector). Internal assemblies: 18-gauge, galvanized steel except for motor supports which shall be minimum14 gauge galvanized steel. Inner wall of double wall construction shall be minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel. 1. Cabinet Insulation: 1” Fiberglass insulation. Full coverage of entire cabinet exterior to include walls, roof and floor of unit. Insulation shall be of semi-rigid type and installed between inner and outer shells of all cabinet exterior components. 2. Access panels / doors: Unit shall be equipped with insulated, hinged doors. Doors shall be fabricated of 18-gauge galvanized steel. D. Energy wheel: Energy wheel shall be of the total enthalpy, rotary air -to-air type and shall be an element of a removable energy wheel cassette. The cassette shall consist of a galvanized steel framework, an energy wheel as specified and a motor and drive assembly. The cassette shall incorporate a pre-tensioned urethane drive belt with a five year warranty. The wheel media shall be a polymer film matrix in a stainless steel framework and be comprised of individual segments that are removable for servicing. Non-segmented energy wheels are not acceptable. Silica gel desiccant shall be permanently bonded to the polymer film. The energy wheel is to have a five year warranty. E. Supply Air and Exhaust Air Blowers: Belt drive motor and blower shall be assembled onto a 14-gauge galvanized steel platform and must have neoprene vibration isolation devices. 1. Shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower. 2. Centrifugal blower housing: Formed and reinforced steel panels to make curved scroll housing with shaped cutoff. 3. Forward curved blower (fan) wheels: Galvanized or aluminum construction with inlet flange and shallow blades curved forward in direction of airflow. Mechanically attached to shaft with set screws. F. Motors: Blower motors greater than ¾ horsepower shall be “NEMA Premium™” efficiency. Motors shall be heavy-duty, permanently lubricated type to match the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower and pulleys shall be fully machin ed cast-type, keyed and fully secured to the fan wheel and motor shafts. Electric motors of ten horsepower or less shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 72 00 October 20, 2021 ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS Project #16-0996 23 72 00 - 3 G. Wheel Frost Control: Modulating Wheel – control system shall include an energy wheel VFD, outdoor air thermostat and pressure sensor on the wheel assembly to initiate frost control sequence. H. Motorized dampers: Exhaust Air and Intake Air AMCA Class 1A motorized dampers of insulated low leakage type shall be factory installed. I. Filter Section: MERV 13 pleated filters shall be provided in the intake air stream and MERV 8 filters in the exhaust air stream. J. Sensors which are part of various optional operational modes or device controllers and are to be factory supplied and installed. K. Control panel: Unit shall have an electrical control center where all high and low voltage connections are made. Control center shall be constructed to permit single-point high voltage power supply connection. 1. Factory controller shall have an LCD screen with text readouts of status and built-in keypad. 2. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD): Unit shall have factory installed variable frequency drives for modulation of the blower motors The VFDs shall be factory -programmed for unit-specific requirements and shall not require additional field programming to operate. 3. Remote Interface: Contractor shall provide and install a BACNet Interface that functions as a remote indicator of owner-selected operating parameters and also permits remote inputting of new operating parameters. The unit will communicate through a BACNet bus to the central JACE Tridium FMCS. 4. Sensors: a. Dirty Filter Sensors b. Temperature Sensors- OA, SA, RA, EA c. Rotation Sensor d. CO2 Sensor L. Curb Assembly: Spring isolation curb as described on the drawings. M. Outdoor airflow monitoring station: Provide digital readout of outdoor air delivery CFM through BACNet interface to central JACE Tridium facility management and control system (FMCS). N. Accessories: 1. Seismic vibration isolation curb 2. Smoke detectors PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as instructed by manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 72 00 October 20, 2021 ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS Project #16-0996 23 72 00 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish roof curbs for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Secure unit with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb. B. Install flexible connections between unit and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. C. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of one day to start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance. 3.5 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of fan cabinet. B. Install clean filters. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not operate fans for until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 74 00 October 20, 2021 OUTDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS Project #16-0996 23 74 00 - 1 SECTION 23 74 00 – OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 ELECTRICAL A. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): All HVAC and refrigeration equipment with multi-motor or combination electrical loads shall comply with NEC 440.4(B) and must include a SCCR greater than the Available Interrupting Current (AIC) of the electrical circuit serving the equipment. See electrical drawings for AIC kA rating. For equipment 60 Amps or less MOCP the SCCR may be presented in writing from the manufacturer or shown on the unit nameplate. Equipment over 60 Amps MOCP must list the SCCR on the unit nameplate. If AIC rating is unavailable or cannot be determined provide a minimum SCCR of 10kA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: Trane, Carrier, York, or approved equal. B. Product Description: Self-contained, packaged, High Efficiency, factory assembled and wired, consisting of cabinet, supply fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser, heat pump heating section, air filters, mixed air casing, microprocessor controls, R- 410A refrigerant charge and accessories. ARI tested, UL listed. Provide with Mason RSC spring isolation curb. C. Configuration: Convertible Downflow or Horizontal air delivery. D. Roof Mounting Curb: Galvanized steel, channel frame with gaskets, nailer strips. Full perimeter type with integral vibration isolation springs for mounting under entire unit, shipped knocked down for field assembly. Mason or approved equal. E. Cabinet: Heavy gauge, galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, tested for 1000 hours ASTM B117 salt spray test, removable or hinged access panels, 1/2 inch foil-faced insulation with sealed edges. F. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive, adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, high efficiency motor. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. G. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Double slope drain pan with piping connection. Factory leak tested to 200 psi. H. Compressor: Direct drive, hermetic, scroll with centrifugal oil pump, suction gas cooled, internal overload protection. I. Refrigeration circuit: Thermal expansion valve, filter-drier, suction, discharge, and liquid line service valves with gauge ports. Dehydrate and factory charge with oil and refrigerant. J. Condenser: 1. Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Factory leak tested to 200 psi. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 74 00 October 20, 2021 OUTDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS Project #16-0996 23 74 00 - 2 2. Condenser Fan: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. K. Air Filters: 1 inch pleated, MERV 8 prefilter and 2” MERV 13 final filter. L. Accessories: 1. BACNet interface by factory, provided with unit. 2. Powered convenience outlet, 115 volt, 15 amp, GFCI type. 3. Through the base electrical and gas connections 4. Thermal expansion valve 5. Hot gas bypass 6. Hinged access doors 7. Stainless steel heat exchanger 8. 2 inch pleated filters PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings. B. Verify piping rough-in is at correct location. C. Verify electrical rough-in is at correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish roof curbs for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with ARI 430. B. Roof Curb: 1. Assemble roof curb. 2. Install roof curb level. 3. Coordinate curb installation and flashing. 4. Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. 5. Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb. C. Install flexible connections between unit and inlet and discharge ductwork. Install metal bands of connectors parallel with minimum 1 inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. D. Install assembled units with vibration isolators. Install isolated fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 74 00 October 20, 2021 OUTDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS Project #16-0996 23 74 00 - 3 E. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to splash block on roof. F. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance. G. Insulate coil headers located outside airflow as specified for piping. H. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. I. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. J. Install control wiring between unit and field installed accessories. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of one day to leak test, refrigerant pressure test, evacuate, dehydrate, charge, start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance. 3.5 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. B. Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at Substantial Completion. C. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. D. Touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. B. Protect finished surfaces of cabinets with protective covers during remainder of construction. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 26 October 20, 2021 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS & HEAT PUMPS Project #16-0996 23 81 26- 1 SECTION 23 81 26 – SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS & HEAT PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Capacity rating in accordance with ARI. B. Sound rating is accordance with ARI 270. C. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. 1.2 ELECTRICAL A. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): All HVAC and refrigeration equipment with multi- motor or combination electrical loads shall comply with NEC 110.10 & 440.4 and must include a SCCR greater than the Available Interrupting Current (AIC) of the electrical circuit serving the equipment. See electrical drawings for required AIC kA rating. Equipment SCCR may be presented in writing from the manufacturer or shown on the unit nameplate. Refrigeration or air-conditioning equipment over 60 Amps MOCP must list the SCCR on the unit nameplate. If the AIC rating is unavailable or cannot be determined provide equipment with a minimum SCCR of 10kA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING & HEAT PUMP UNITS A. Manufacturers: Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. General: Indoor/Outdoor unit combination shall be manufacturer paired. ETL labeled, AHRI 240 rated. R-410a Refrigerant. Cooling operation from 14F to 115F. Heating operation from -4F to 75F. 5 year Manufacturer parts and defect warranty, 7 year compressor warranty. C. Indoor unit: Factory assembled, wired and run tested ductless evaporator unit with white finish. 1. Fan: Two speed, direct drive fan with permanently lubricated bearings, statically and dynamically balanced. Adjustable guide vane and motorized air sweep louver. 2. Filter: Removable washable. 3. Coil: Smooth plate aluminum fins on copper tubing with inner grooves, silver alloy brazed, pressure tested, condensate pan and drain. 4. Control: Microprocessor controlled self-diagnostic, run time delay, auto restart, test run switch, automatic cooling, display set point and room temperature, 24/7 programmability. D. Outdoor unit: Horizontal discharge condensing unit constructed of galvanized steel with powder coat baked enamel finish. 1. Fan: Direct drive, permanently lubricated bearings, mounted for quiet operation, fan guard. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 26 October 20, 2021 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS & HEAT PUMPS Project #16-0996 23 81 26- 2 2. Coil: Corrugated aluminum fins on copper tubing with protective metal guard and metering orifice. 3. Compressor: Rotary with crankcase heater, accumulator, internal thermal overload, high pressure safety switch. E. Accessories: 1. Low ambient operation to 0 F. 2. Fan: Two speed, direct drive fan with permanently lubricated bearings, statically and dynamically balanced. Adjustable guide vane and motorized air sweep louver. 3. Filter: Removable washable. 4. Coil: Smooth plate aluminum fins on copper tubing with inner grooves, silver alloy brazed, pressure tested, condensate pan and drain. 5. Control: Microprocessor controlled self-diagnostic, run time delay, auto restart, test run switch, automatic cooling, display set 6. Fan: Direct drive, permanently lubricated bearings, mounted for quiet operation, fan guard. 7. Coil: Corrugated aluminum fins on copper tubing with protective metal guard and metering orifice. 8. Compressor: Rotary with crankcase heater, accumulator, internal thermal overload, high pressure safety switch. 9. Low ambient operation to 0 F. 10. Pre-charged refrigerant tubing. 11. Compressor restart time delay. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete pad or roof support rails for condensing unit. Provide inserts for mounting. B. Coordinate size and location of sleeves or block-outs needs for refrigerant piping. C. Determine refrigerant pipe routing to efficiently minimum run length and avoid interference. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. B. Install refrigerant piping from condensing unit to indoor unit (s). Install refrigerant specialties furnished with unit. C. Insulate both liquid and vapor refrigerant piping on all runs. D. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant. E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 26 October 20, 2021 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS & HEAT PUMPS Project #16-0996 23 81 26- 3 F. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories. 3.3 INSTALLATION – FAN COIL UNIT A. Install condensate piping with trap and determine route from drain pan to nearest waste with 1/4" slope. Provide condensate pump where drain is not available or slope cannot be made. B. Install fan coil units on vibration isolators. C. Connect ducted fan coil units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. 3.4 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT A. Install condensing units at grade on concrete foundations with anchors. B. Install condensing unit at roof on fabricated rails or curb with cap. Secure unit to support and seal. C. Install condensing units on neoprene vibration isolators. 3.5 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet if necessary. B. Install new filters in units at Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 1 SECTION 23 81 43 – VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Capacity rating in accordance with ARI. B. Sound rating is accordance with ARI 270. C. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. 1.2 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Include maintenance items as shown in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including filter replacements, fan belt replacement, and controls checkout and adjustments. B. Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions for this maintenance period. 1.3 ELECTRICAL A. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): All HVAC and refrigeration equipment with multi- motor or combination electrical loads shall comply with NEC 110.10 & 440.4 and must include a SCCR greater than the Available Interrupting Current (AIC) of the electrical circuit serving the equipment. See electrical drawings for required AIC kA rating. Equipment SCCR may be presented in writing from the manufacturer or shown on the unit nameplate. Refrigeration or air-conditioning equipment over 60 Amps MOCP must list the SCCR on the unit nameplate. If the AIC rating is unavailable or cannot be determined provide equipment with a minimum SCCR of 10kA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW ZONING SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. General: Variable capacity, split heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system with Variable Refrigerant Flow Zoning (VRFZ) and simultaneous heating/cooling. The system consists of an outdoor unit, BC (Branch Circuit) Controller, multiple indoor fan coil units, interconnecting refrigerant piping and product specific DDC (Direct Digital Controls). All components factory assembled, internally piped and wired, tested and rea dy for field assembly. C. Quality Assurance: 1. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. 2. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 2 3. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). 4. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing unit. 5. Warranty: a. The units shall be covered by the manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of one (1) year. b. Systems designed by a certified CITY MULTI Diamond Designer, installed by a certified CITY MULTI Diamond Dealer, and verified with a completed commissioning report submitted to Mitsubishi Electric Service Department, shall be covered by an extended manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of five (5) years. c. In addition the compressor shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of six (6) years. 2.2 OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNIT (6 TONS AND LARGER): A. Manufacturers: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. General: Units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the control system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation, be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. 1. Sound rating no higher than 60 dB(A). 2. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the BC (Branch Circuit) Controller shall be insulated. 3. Accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls. 4. High pressure safety switch, over-current protection and DC bus protection. 5. Capable of operating in heating down to -4F ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. 6. High efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained. C. Unit Cabinet: The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with powder coated baked enamel. D. Fan: Direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan with inherent protection, permanently lubricated bearings, mounted for quiet operation, raised guard and vertical discharge airflow. E. Refrigerant: R410A refrigerant is required. F. Coil: Nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing with an integral metal guard. 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for the last stage. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 3 G. Compressor: High performance, inverter driven, modulating capacity scroll compressor with a factory mounted crankcase heater, an inverter to modulate capacity variable down to 16%, internal thermal overload, mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. H. Electrical: The unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors with the control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the outdoor unit being 12VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. 2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT (BC) CONTROLLER: A. Manufacturers: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. General: These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the M -NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The BC Controller shall be completely factory assembled, pip ed and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors . C. BC Unit Cabinet: Fabricated of galvanized steel with a liquid-gas separator, multiple refrigeration control valves and two tube-in-tube heat exchangers. D. Refrigerant valves: Each circuit shall have one (54,000 Btu/h or smaller indoor unit section) two-position liquid line valve and a two-position suction line valve. When connecting a 54,000 Btu/h or larger indoor unit section, two branch circuits shall be joi ned together at the branch controller to deliver an appropriate amount of refrigerant. The two refrigerant valves shall operate simultaneously. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant flow. E. Service shut-off ball valves with Schrader port shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. F. An integral condensate pan and drain shall be provided. G. Accessories: 1. Provide with BlueDiamond MaxiBlue condensation pump complete with reservoir and accessories. Provide power from unit. 2.4 TPKFY INDOOR UNIT (wall-mounted) A. Manufacturers: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. General: Wall mounted indoor unit section with a slim silhouette and a modulating linear expansion device. C. Indoor Unit: Factory assembled, wired and run tested with all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board, fan motor, self- diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. D. Unit Cabinet: White finish, same for all model sizes. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for refrigerant piping and two (2) directions for draining. Separate back plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 4 E. Fan: An assembly with one or two line-flow fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. Statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. Multi-speed fan with two speeds selected by the room controller. Manual adjustable guide vane with the ability to change the airflow from side to side (left to ri ght). Motorized air sweep louver with automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution. F. Filter: Factory installed MERV 4. G. Coil: Nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing, inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange, phos-copper or silver alloy brazed joints, pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. Both refrigerant lines to the PKFY indoor units shall be insulated. H. Controls: Unit controls to be provided with unit as part of VFRZ system to perform functions necessary to operate the system. The unit shall be able to control external backup heat. I. Accessories: 1. Provide with BlueDiamond condensation pump complete with reservoir and accessories. Provide model MicroBlue for units up to 15 MBH and MaxiBlue for units 18 MBH and larger. Provide power from fan coil unit. 2.5 TPLFY INDOOR UNIT (4-way Cassette) A. Manufacturers: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. General: A cassette style indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille and a modulating linear expansion device. C. Indoor Unit: Factory assembled, wired and run tested with all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board, fan motor, self- diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment fro m the factory. D. Unit Cabinet: Ceiling-recessed cassette with provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow. Grille vane angles shall be individually adjustable from the controller to customize the airflow pattern for the conditioned space. E. Fan: An assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. Statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. Four (4) fan speeds, two of which may be selected by the room controller. Adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow. Auto air swing vanes shall be capable of automatically swinging up and down for uniform air distribution. F. Filter: Factory installed MERV 4. G. Coil: Nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing, inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange, phos-copper or silver alloy brazed joints, pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. Both refrigerant lines to the PLFY indoor units shall be insulated. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 5 H. Controls: Unit controls to be provided with unit as part of VFRZ system to perform functions necessary to operate the system. I. Accessories: 1. Factory installed condensate lift pump. 2.6 TPEFY-MA INDOOR UNIT (Ceiling-Concealed Ducted) A. Manufacturers: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. General: A ceiling concealed ducted indoor fan coil design that mounts above the ceiling with a 2-position, field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply and a modulating linear expansion device. C. Indoor Unit: Factory assembled, wired and run tested with all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board, fan motor, self- diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. D. Unit Cabinet: Ceiling concealed, ducted with provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. Unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system. E. Fan: An assembly with one or two Sirocco fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. Statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. Three (3) fan speeds, plus Auto-Fan function. F. Filter: MERV 8 (minimum) installed in field rack or mixing box. G. Coil: Nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing, inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange, phos-copper or silver alloy brazed joints, pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil. Both refrigerant lines to the PEFY indoor units shall be insulated. H. Controls: Unit controls to be provided with unit as part of VFRZ system to perform functions necessary to operate the system. The unit shall be able to control external backup heat. I. Accessories: 1. Factory installed condensate lift pump. 2.7 TPEFY-MH Indoor Unit (High Static Option, ceiling-concealed ducted) A. Manufacturers: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. General: A high-performance ceiling concealed ducted indoor fan coil that mounts above the ceiling with a 2-position, a field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply, and a modulating linear expansion device. C. Indoor Unit: Factory assembled, wired and run tested with all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board, fan motor, self- diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 6 unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. D. Unit Cabinet: Low profile, ceiling concealed, ducted with provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. Unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system. E. Fan: An assembly with one or two Sirocco fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. Statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. T wo (2) fan speeds, which are selectable on the room controller. F. Filter: MERV 8 (minimum) installed in field rack or mixing box. G. Coil: Nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing, inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange, phos-copper or silver alloy brazed joints, pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil. Both refrigerant lines to the PEFY indoor units shall be insulated. H. Controls: Unit controls to be provided with unit as part of VFRZ system to per form functions necessary to operate the system. The unit shall be able to control external backup heat. I. Accessories: 1. Provide with BlueDiamond MaxiBlue condensation pump complete with reservoir and accessories. Provide power from fan coil unit. 2.8 FILTER BOX A. Manufacturer: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. Manufactured and constructed specifically to match fan coil and fasten directly to return inlet of unit. Box shall be twenty gauge galvanized sheet metal construction. C. Filter rack shall be angled and shall accept 1” or 2” filters. Access door shall be hinged and fastened with knurled nobs such that tools are not required to open. Rack and door shall have foam gasket. 2.9 REFRIGERANT PIPING SERVICE VALVE A. Manufacturer: Diamondback or approved equal. B. Full port, forged brass ball valve with Schrader valve, flare connections, Teflon seals and gaskets. 700 psig rated, R-410A compatible, fully factory assembled and pressure tested. C. Provide with insulation cover of polyethylene foam with PVC cover and tape. 2.10 CONTROLS AND CONTROLLERS A. Manufacturers: Trane-Mitsubishi or approved equal. B. TE200 Central panel with display. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 7 C. BACNet interface that communicates seamlessly with JACE Tridium N4 central facility management and control system (FMCS). D. Remote controllers shall operate indoor units only where thermostats are shown on plans. Otherwise temperature control is done remotely and centrally through the BACnet interface and/or the TE200 central Trane-Mitsubishi panel. E. The wiring for the remote controllers shall be simple, non-polar, two-wire connections. All remote controllers shall be wall-mounted with an LCD display and contain a microprocessor that constantly monitors operation to maintain smooth indoor unit operation. Set temperature shall be adjusted in increments of 1°F or 2°F, depending on the systems and controllers. In the event of an abnormality, the remote controller shall display a four -digit error code and the indoor unit address. F. PAR-33MAA-J: Deluxe MA Remote Controller 1. Backlit display 2. Capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). 3. Displays: Room temperature, relative humidity, operation status, setpoint. 4. Control the following operations: On/Off, Operation Mode (cool, heat, auto, dry, and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, setback, hold and airflow direction setting. 5. Timer settings of on/off/temperature up to 8 times in a day in 5-minute increments with an Auto Off timer and able to limit the set temperature range. 6. Room temperature shall be sensed at the Controller. 2.11 CONDENSATE PUMPS A. Provided with equipment (see above). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate size and location of roof support rails for condensing unit. Provide inserts for mounting. B. Coordinate size and location of sleeves or block-outs needs for refrigerant piping. C. Determine refrigerant pipe routing to efficiently minimum run length and avoid interference. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. B. Install refrigerant piping from condensing unit to indoor unit (s). Install refrigerant specialties furnished with unit. C. Insulate both liquid and vapor refrigerant piping on all runs. D. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 8 E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. F. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories. 3.3 INSTALLATION – FAN COIL UNIT A. Install condensate piping with trap and determine route from drain pan to nearest waste with 1/4" slope. Provide condensate pump where drain is not available or slope cannot be made. B. Install fan coil units on vibration isolators. C. Connect ducted fan coil units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. 3.4 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT A. Install condensing unit at roof on manufactured or fabricated rails or curb with cap. Provide restrained spring isolators, secure unit to support and seal. B. Install condensing units on neoprene vibration isolators. 3.5 INSTALLATION - CONDENSATE PUMPS A. See Section 230500. 3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Furnish initial start-up and commissioning. 3.7 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet if necessary. B. Install new filters in units at Substantial Completion. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance. 3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 3.10 The Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system is to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements and Sections 23 08 00 – Commissioning of HVAC. The contractor has specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing development, testing and documentation. Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority Meeting (CIM). The CIM shall be conducted after the Energy Management and Controls System (EMCS) submittal and the VRF control submittal are complete and the CA has reviewed the submittals. The meeting is to be conducted prior to finalizing the functional test procedures and prior to installation and start-up. The CIM shall be attended by the Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 23 81 43 October 20, 2021 VRF MULTI-UNIT HEAT PUMP Project #16-0996 23 81 43- 9 Commissioning Authority, the EMCS controls contractor, the VRF control supplier and a representative of the Owner’s maintenance group at a minimum. The CIM shall include, but not be limited to, the following topics: 1. Sequence of Operations 2. Alarm Points List 3. Trend Points List 4. Displayed/adjustable Point List 5. Graphical Interface 6. Integration with Packaged equipment 7. Point-to Point Checkout and Commissioning of Existing Equipment 8. Method of Conducting Cx Functional Testing 3.11 The CRF supplier shall provide a manufacturer certified technician to perform start-up of the VRFC system and related controls per the manufacturer’s recommenda tions and documentation. 3.12 The VRF supplier shall provide a manufacturer certified technician to support functional testing of the VRF system in conjunction with the functional testing of the Energy and Management and Control System (EMCS). The functional testing shall occur after all start-up activities are complete and start-up documents have been submitted and approved by the Commissioning Authority. The VRF supplier shall demonstrate that the required control interface functions with the EMCS are operational and the VRF parameters are configured per the sequence of operations. 3.13 The VRF supplier shall provide a manufacturer certified technician to support re-testing of any systems that did not pass functional performance testing criteria per the sequence o f operations and commissioning requirements END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 1 SECTION 26 00 00 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and Division 01 - General Requirements for all work in Divisions 26, 27 and 28. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Design Intent: The project includes Electrical, Fire Alarm and Low Voltage systems for the Family First Community Center project in Renton, Washington. This is a community center including gymnasium, fitness, meeting room, office spaces and medical/dental clinic tenant. 1. See Architectural plans and specifications for additional information. B. All Fire Alarm and Low Voltage Systems are Design-Build; Contract Documents (drawings and specifications) are meant to provide information (scope, performance requir ements, preliminary quantities, and locations, etc) for Bidding by Design-Build Contractors only. 1. All final quantities and locations of equipment and devices shall be coordinated with the Fire Marshal/ Local AHJ (as applicable), Architect and Owner prior to the start of construction. 2. The Design-Build Contractors shall design, permit, provide and install complete and fully operational and coordinated Fire Alarm and Low Voltage systems that meet all requirements of the Owner, Fire Marshal/ local AHJ and as per the Project Contract Documents. 3. Low Voltage Systems: a. See Specification Section 27 00 00 for a complete list of the Low Voltage Systems to be included in the project. b. In addition to administrative requirements of this specification section, see all Division 27 and 28 specification sections and the contract documents for system performance requirements for bidding by the Low Voltage Design-Build Contractor. 4. Fire Alarm Systems (Fire Alarm): a. Fire Alarm Systems shall be Design-Build. b. In addition to administrative requirements of this specification section, See Specification Sections 28 46 00 and the Contract Drawings for system performance requirements for bidding by the Fire Alarm Design-Build Contractor. C. Sustainability Goals: The Project is pursuing LEED Certification. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the Architect and General Contractor to ensure compliance with the Prerequisites and intended Credits for the project. See Division 01 Specification and subsequent Division 26, 27 and 28 Specifications for additional information and requirements. D. The Contractors shall provide all permitting, labor, materials, equipment and devices, supports, etc necessary for satisfactory installation of fire alarm and low voltage work ready to operate in strict accordance with Code requirements and these specifications and drawings. E. Related Sections: All Division 01, 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections included in the Contract Documents. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 2 F. Commissioning Activities and Submittals: The Project shall be commissioned per Energy Code and LEED requirements. The Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor, Architect and Commissioning Agent and provide support for the complete commissioning process as required. See Divisions 01, 26, 27 and 28 for additional information. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. All work shall meet or exceed the requirements of the current versions of all applicable Federal, State, and Local Codes and Standards including but not limited to: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) with State and Local Amendments / Washington Cities Electrical Code. 2. Washington State Energy Code with State and Local Amendments. 3. International Fire Code (IFC) with State and Local Amendments. 4. International Building Code (IBC) with State and Local Amendments. 5. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State and Local Amendments. 6. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State and Local Amendments. 7. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 8. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) Standards and Recommended Practices. 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and Recommended Practices. 10. Applicable Standards of the following organizations (see subsequent Division 26, 27 and 28 sections for additional information): a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). c. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) d. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) e. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) f. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) standards. 11. Utility Service Provider Requirements. 12. LEED, Version 4 1.4 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. Comply with Project Requirements to achieve LEED v4 Silver Certification. B. Comply with Construction Management Plan. Refer to Division 01. C. LEED-Compliant Products: Inside the building envelope, use materials that contain acceptable or lower levels of VOC per referenced standards in Rating System Requirements and no added urea-formaldehyde. Cleaning products used during construction and close-out procedures shall meet Green Seal standards GS-34, GS-37, and SG-40, or the California Code of Regulations, Title 17 Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products. D. Refer to Division 01 for a complete list of LEED Prerequisites and Credits anticipated for the project. The Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor and Architect to provide documentation and support for all applicable Prerequisites and Credits including but not limited to: 1. SS 6 – Light Pollution Reduction. 2. EA 3 – Advanced Energy Metering. 3. EQ 6 – Interior Lighting. 4. In 1.4 – Innovation-LED Lighting. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 3 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to International Building Code with local amendments, Fire Marshal, and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. 1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Manufacturers and models of equipment and material indicated in Divisions 26, 27 and 28 Specifications and on drawings are those upon which the electrical design is based and upon which the fire alarm and low voltage systems’ designs are to be based; other manufacturers with products considered equal in general quality may also be listed without specific model designation. Manufacturers not listed shall be submitted for approval prior to submission of Bid by the Contractor, see Division 01. B. Any equipment other than the basis of design is considered a substitution; this includes equipment from any alternate manufacturers listed without specific model designation in the Contract Specifications and / or Drawings. C. Pre-Bid Substitutions will be evaluated based on product manufacturer only. Specific product model, specifications, options and accessories will be evaluated during submittals. Approval of a manufacturer substitution does not constitute approval of the submitted product. D. In selecting substitute equipment, the Contractor is responsible for and shall guarantee equal performance and fit. Cost of redesign and all additional costs incurred to accommodate the substituted equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Approval of proposed substitution does not grant the Contractor approval for deviation from the contract requirements. F. Unless indicated otherwise, “or approved equal” may be assumed for all products in Division s 26, 27 and 28. 1.7 DESIGN DRAWINGS A. All drawings, specifications and calculations prepared by the Fire Alarm Design-Build Contractor shall be stamped by an Engineer currently registered in the State of Washington. B. See Specification Sections 27 00 00 and 28 46 00 for requirements for design drawings for Low Voltage and Fire Alarm Design-Build Contractors. 1.8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES A. As soon as the actual equipment being provided by the project has been selected by the Contractor, the Electrical Contractor shall perform Short Circuit / Fault Current and Arc Flash Studies for the actual Electrical System to be installed. B. These studies shall be prepared for the specific electrical equipment, overcurrent devices, utilization equipment and feeder and circuit lengths and types to be installed for the project. C. Studies shall be prepared and stamped and signed by a professional Electrical Engineer currently registered in Washington State. D. Studies shall be submitted with the Submittals for electrical panelboards, switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, etc. These equipment and devices will not be approved without the required Studies. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 4 E. See Specification Section 26 05 73 for additional information and requirements. 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Provide one electronic copy of product data submittals for all products listed under “Part 2 Products” of Divisions 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections and all additional products noted on drawings or required for completion of sequence of operations . B. Provide the Submittals so as not to delay the construction schedule; allow at least two weeks for review of each submittal and re-submittal. C. Electronic: Submittals shall be complete in one PDF file for each Division with bookmarks for each Specification Section and Principal Category. Multi-file submittals will be returned without review. 1. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. 2. Index Page: List of specification sections and principal categories with contents by Tag or item. 3. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section and principal category corresponding to listing in index. D. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation (Tag or Mark) and/or specification section, as applicable. Indicate selected model and all accessories intended for use. E. Equipment vendor cover page with contact information shall precede submittal by that vendor. F. Submitted product information shall include but not be limited to the following information (as applicable): 1. Product description. 2. Manufacturer and model. 3. Dimensions. 4. Performance Ratings. 5. Construction Materials. 6. Finish. 7. Ratings (i.e. UL, ASTM, NEMA, etc). 8. Electrical characteristics (Voltage, Phase, Wattage, Breakers, etc). 9. Engineering technical data. 10. Sound level data. 11. Vibration isolation. 12. Strength and fastening provisions. 13. Seismic qualification data. 14. Controls and wiring diagrams. 15. Accessories. G. Where a third party structural engineer has been engaged by the Contractor to provide support, anchoring and seismic calculations, the Contractor shall include these calculations and designs in their Submittal Package. H. If requested in subsequent Specification Sections or by the Architect or Engineer, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions on any equipment, procedures, or certifications so requested. I. Do no ordering, fabrication or manufacturing of products until return of approved submittals. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 5 J. The Contractor agrees to pay for the Engineer’s review cost of the Division 26, 27 and 28 Submittals beyond one resubmittal where resubmittals are required due to deficiencies in the Contractor’s Submitted material. K. The Contractor is responsible for providing the Commissioning Authority with copies of the following information for inclusion in the Systems Manual. The Commissioning Authority will compile the final Systems Manual based on the contractor submitted documentation along with additional material provided by the Commissioning Authority. 1. As-built documents. 2. Description of systems, including capabilities and limitations. 3. Operating procedures for all normal, abnormal, and emergency modes of operation. 4. Sequence of operation as actually implemented, with control system data including all set points, calibration data, etc. 5. Location of all control sensors and test ports. 6. Seasonal start-up and shutdown procedures. 7. Control schematics and computer graphics. 8. Complete terminal interface procedures and capabilities for DDC sytems. 9. A list of recommended operation recordkeeping procedures including sample forms, trend logs, or others, and a rationale for each. 10. Maintenance procedures. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS 1. For Electrical Gear (switchboards, panelboards, etc). 2. For Lighting Control Systems. 3. Slab plans marked up with all penetrations required for electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems. Sizes of penetrations shall be indicated on the plans and penetration locations shall be dimensioned from major building lines. The Contractor shall submit these slab plans to the Architect for review. 4. As requested in subsequent Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections. 5. For all special or custom-built items or equipment. 6. In all cases where deviation from the Contract Drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, interference or substitution of equipment, or when requested by the Engineer for purposes of clarification of the Contractor’s intent. a. By submission of revised design shop drawings, the Contractor acknowledges that coordination has been done with all other trades to ensure that all equipment fits and remains accessible with all Code required clearances and that no conflicts exist. B. The Architect’s and Engineer’s review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for deviations from the Contract drawings or specifications, unless he has, in writing, called the attention of the Architect to such deviations at the time of the submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors or omission in such shop drawings. 1.11 LEED RELATED DOCUMENTATION A. Provide commissioning documentation per EA Prerequisite 1 and as the Commissioning Authority (CxA) requests. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 6 B. Comply with IAQ Management Plan by the general contractor. C. Submit the LEED VOC Form, for any VOC-containing material to be used inside the building envelope, including materials for patching, touch-up and cleaning D. Construction Waste Management: Retain and submit all trip and tip tickets for all construction debris and waste removed from site, indicating material content, tonnage, date hauled and facility to where materials were hauled. This submittal is to the general contractor only. 1.12 COMMISSIONING A. See Division 01 and Sections 26 08 00 and 27 08 00 for additional roles and responsibilities of commissioning. B. Provide all necessary commissioning assistance, equipment and documentation as required by the Commissioning Plan. C. The duty and responsibility for electrical and low voltage commissioning work shall be assigned to a specific individual. Inform the General Contractor and Commissioning Agent of the contact information for the person so assigned. D. Perform corrective actions needed to resolve deficiencies identified during commissioning. Record action taken on commissioning deficiency log. 1.13 PERMITS A. See Specification Section 28 46 00 for Fire Alarm Systems Permit requirements. B. In addition to the requirements in other Specification Sections, the Electrical Contractor shall make all required submissions to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for Permits and approval. The Contractor shall pay all fees related to said submissions and shall submit all comments received from the AHJ to the Architect and Engineer. C. The Contractor shall not commence work until a permit (or “get started” permit where allowed by the AHJ) is obtained. The Contractor is solely responsible for ensuring that the permit application and any revisions are submitted in a timely manner so as not to impact the project schedule. D. The Contractor shall retain the services of a third party structural engineer to provide support, anchoring and seismic calculations for all applicable equipment where required by the AHJ. 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractors shall perform all work per current versions of all applicable Codes and Standards with state and local amendments – see “Codes and Standards” paragraph above. B. All equipment and devices shall be UL-Listed and Labeled and shall be acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the use and location for which they are intended. C. Provide all like items (receptacles, circuit breakers, electrical gear, etc) from one manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 7 1.15 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in Divisions 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections with a minimum of three years’ experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work included in Divisions 26, 27 and 28 on projects of similar type and scale with a minimum of three years’ experience. 1.16 SCHEDULING A. Coordinate and provide assistance in final adjustment and testing of life safety systems with the General Contractor and Fire Authority. 1.17 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. The Contractor shall keep all equipment, devices, conduit, etc in a dry, secured, protected area. The location shall be coordinated with the Architect and General Contractor prior to the start of Construction. See Division 01 for additional delivery, storage and handling requirements. C. Where original packaging is insufficient, provide additional protection. Maintain protection in place until installation. D. Inspect all products and materials for damage prior to installation. E. Protect conduit from all entry of foreign materials by providing temporary end caps or closures on conduit and fittings. F. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. G. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting equipment. 1.18 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply fire stopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of fire stopping materials. B. Coordinate with General Contractor to have ventilation provided in areas to receive solvent cured materials. C. Do not install underground conduit when bedding is wet or frozen. D. Do not install equipment pads when ground is frozen or muddy. 1.19 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to ordering gear. B. Verify by field measurements that equipment sizes and configurations are compatible with wall construction and layout. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 8 C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining and documenting exact locations of existing systems. 1.20 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work. The Contractor shall include in their Bid the costs for all work and / or materials required to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents based on the actual existing conditions. Failure to visit the Site and verify actual existing conditions does not relieve the Contractor of these requirements; no change orders will be paid due to lack of verificatio n of existing conditions whether they are specifically noted in the Contract Documents or not. B. The Contractor shall verify the locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near the Project site. Determine such locations in conjunction with all publ ic and private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. D. Where the word ‘verify’ is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the existing conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified conditio ns without additional cost to the Owner. E. Electrical and Low Voltage Systems drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate all possible site conditions. The contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions and connections on site and coordinate between trades to preclude interferences. The contractor shall provide adjustments as necessary to fit actual conditions. F. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Owner will be considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any device or equipment roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied centerlines or as required by good practice shall be repositioned at no cost to the Owner. G. In the event of a conflict with other trades of work, the following priority from highest to lowest shall be followed: Structural, lighting, HVAC, plumbing/piping and sprinklers. Starting with the lowest priority, the Electrical, HVAC, plumbing, and sprinkler contractors shall provide whatever materials, offsets, labor etc. is required to resolve the conflict. H. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit the equipment furnished. Costs for modifications due to equipment substitution will be borne by the contractor. I. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect will determine which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no additional cost. J. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents the greater quantity, the better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in writing. K. Coordinate trenching, excavating, bedding, backfilling of buried systems with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 9 L. Coordinate wall openings, rough-in locations, concrete housekeeping pads, and conduit rough- in locations to accommodate Work of Divisions 26, 27 and 28. M. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Architectural plans and Project structure when locating equipment and devices and routing conduit and cabling. N. The Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor and provide slab plans marked up with all penetrations required for electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems. Sizes of penetrations shall be indicated on the plans and penetration locations shall be dimensioned from major building lines. The Contractor shall submit these slab plans to the Architect for review. O. The Contractor shall coordinate conduit and cabling routing and equipment and device locations with all other trades to ensure all Code required clearances are maintained and equipment and devices remain accessible after the work of all trades is complete. P. The Contractor shall consult the approved shop drawings of all other trades and crafts to ensure coordination with final locations of cabinetry, counters, appliances, equipment, structural members, etc. Conflicts are to be resolved with the Architect and General Contractor prior to rough-in. The Contractor shall not be paid for relocation work (including cutting, patching, and finishing) required due to a lack of coordination prior to installation. Q. See the Architectural drawings for the exact locations of electrical and low voltage devices. The Contractor shall make minor changes (less than 6-feet in any direction) in the location of conduit, boxes, devices, etc from the locations shown in the drawings without extra charge to the Owner where required by coordination or if directed by the Architect or Owner. R. The Electrical Design-Build Contractor shall coordinate with the mechanical and plumbing contractors to ensure that the electrical services and disconnects/starters/etc for all HVAC and plumbing equipment are appropriately sized and that all HVAC and plumbing loads are included in the electrical load calculations. S. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Coordinate final available fault currents per the Electrical Systems Studies with the Mechanical Contractor to ensure HVAC and refrigeration equipment have an SCCR rating as needed to meet Code requirements. T. Motor Starters: By mechanical equipment manufacturer where factory mounted controls are provided. Variable frequency drives by Division 23. All other starters are to be provided by Electrical Contractor; coordinate with Mechanical and Plumbing Contractors to ensure compatibility with their equipment. U. Wiring for HVAC Equipment: 1. Power Wiring for HVAC equipment: By Electrical Contractor. 2. Control Wiring for HVAC equipment: Responsibility of Division 23. 3. Owner will not entertain additional cost due to lack of coordination between HVAC Contractor and Electrical Contractor. 1.21 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Completion, submission and approval of the following is required for final project closeout: 1. Walk through the Project with the Owner and Architect to make note of deficiencies. 2. Execution of Owner’s, Architect's and Engineer’s final observation reports (punchlist). 3. Operating and Maintenance Instructions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 10 4. Operating and Maintenance Manual. 5. Equipment and Lens Cleaning. 6. Record Drawings. 7. Testing. 8. Commissioning and Commissioning Report. 9. Warranty. B. See other Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for additional requirements. C. See Division 01 for additional requirements. 1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONAL TRAINING A. General: In addition to requirements of Division 01, following initial operation of Electrical systems and prior to acceptance by the Architect, perform the following services: 1. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period, give written notification of readiness to proceed to the Architect and Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates . 2. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out requirements for operating, servicing and maintaining equipment and systems. Describe general system operation and specific equipment functions. Cover all equipment calibration, lighting controls setpoint and system adjustment, and safeties and alarms. 3. Furnish qualifications of Contractor's personnel in charge of the instruction; foreman position is minimum acceptable. Where equipment startup is performed by supplier’s or manufacturer’s personnel, those personnel should also provide training on that equipment. 4. During demonstrations and instructions include and reference information from maintenance manuals and contract drawings. a. Provide documentation of all instruction w hich includes: 1) Date and time of instruction. 2) Name, affiliation and qualifications of the instructor. 3) Name and affiliation of the attendees. 4) Topics, systems, and equipment covered. 5) Length of instruction. 5. Minimum duration of instruction periods: a. Electrical Power Systems 4 hours b. Lighting Control Systems 4 hours c. Energy Metering 2 hours d. Fire Alarm Systems See Section 28 46 00 e. Low Voltage Systems See Section 27 00 00 1.23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Contents: Furnish, in accord with Division 01, one PDF and one bound copy of operating and maintenance manuals to include the following: 1. The Job name and address. 2. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor, sub- contractors and local companies responsible for maintenance of each system or piece of equipment. 3. Manufacturers, suppliers, contractor names, addresses and phone numbers. 4. Written guarantees. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 11 5. Warranty service contractors' names, address and phone numbers (if different from above). 6. Copies of approved brochures and Shop Drawings as applicable for all submittal items. 7. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up and routine and normal operating instructions; and control, shutdown, and emergency instructions. 8. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; and adjusting instructions. 9. Part numbers of all replaceable items. 10. Control diagrams and operation sequence. 11. Record drawings corrected and completed. 12. Completed systems start-up forms and checklists. 13. Final copy of testing reports. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include spare parts lists for all equipment as applicable. 2. Submit installation instructions, adjustment instructions, and spare parts lists for all equipment. 3. Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances. 4. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data. C. Binders: 1. Furnish typewritten or printed index and tabbed dividers between Specification Sections and principal categories. 2. Bind each manual in a hard-backed loose-leaf binder. 3. Imprint on Cover: a. Name of Project. b. Owner. c. Location of project. d. Architect. e. Contractor. f. Year of Completion. 4. Imprint on backing: a. Name of Project. b. Year of completion. D. PDFs: 1. Provide PDF with bookmarks for each Specification Section and Principal Category. a. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. b. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item. c. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing in index. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 12 E. Submittal: 1. Preliminary Copies: Prior to scheduled completion of the project, submit one PDF copy for review by the Architect. 2. Final Copies: After approval of the preliminary copy, submit one PDF and one bound copy to the Owner. 1.24 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the r equirements of Division 01 Specification Section "Contract Closeout." B. Label each drawing as "Record Drawing" with Electrical Contractors’ name and date. C. During construction, maintain an accurate record set of the drawings of the installation on project site at all times; keep this set in a safe location, protected from the environment. D. Submit one digital file with all drawings in PDF format. E. Make all notes and revisions on PDF set in red. F. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01 and in other Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections, indicate installed conditions (locations, sizes, burial depths, arrangements, etc) for: 1. Major raceway systems – Interior and Exterior – dimensioned from prominent building lines. 2. Utility service conduit (power and telecom) and connections, dimensioned from prominent building lines. 3. Conduits provided for future use with intended future use identified, dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Control devices, equipment disconnects, distribution and branch electrical circuitry, and fuse and circuit breakers. 5. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed) shown to scale and dimensioned from prominent building lines. 6. Final schedules for panelboards, lighting controls, etc. 7. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 1.25 TESTING A. Provide completed start-up forms and checklists. B. Perform testing of electrical, lighting control, non-utility metering, fire alarm and other low voltage systems as described in Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections and as required by applicable codes and ordinances. C. Written verification of testing to be signed by Owner's Representative. 1.26 COMMISSIONING A. Provide commissioning in compliance with Energy Code requirements, the commissioning notes in the contract documents and per the Project’s Commissioning Plan. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 13 1.27 WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR’S GUARANTEE A. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and in perfect operating order at time of delivery to Owner. B. The Contractor shall, without cost to the Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from date of final acceptance for all electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems, except when in the opinion of the Architect a failure is due to neglect or carelessness of the Owner. 1. See individual Specification Sections for additional requirements. C. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees which exceed one year. D. The Contractor shall make all necessary lighting and receptacle control adjustments during first year of operation. E. The presence of any inspector or observer at any point during construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work. F. Refer to Division 01, 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for additional Warranty requirements. PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOCUMENTATION A. Additional plan submittals to reviewing authority: If additional drawing submittals are required at any time during construction the Contractor shall submit drawings, review with authority, and pick up subsequent approved drawings. The Engineer will revise and/or prepare drawings for submittal. 3.2 MOCK-UPS A. The Electrical Contractor shall completely mock-up the building (exact areas to be chosen by the Architect and Owner) by marking the intended locations of all equipment and devices (panelboards, luminaires, switches, receptacles, CATV and telecom outlets, thermostats, heaters/ HVAC equipment, etc). B. Before starting installation of equipment and devices, the Electrical Contractor shall walk through all mocked-up areas with the Owner, Architect, and General Contractor to receive approval for all locations. C. The Electrical Contractor shall relocate equipment and devices in the mock-ups per the Owner and Architect’s instructions. D. The Electrical Contractor shall relocate any equipment and devices installed prior to the approval of the mocked-up areas by the Architect and Owner at the Electrical Contractor’s expense. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 14 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall conceal all conduit, cabling and boxes in finished areas unless indicated otherwise or granted specific permission by the Architect. Install all conduit and cabling perpendicular to or parallel with building lines wherever possible. B. In open ceiling areas, all cabling shall be installed in conduit. In front of house (public) areas, conduit shall be painted; color as selected by the Architect. C. Coordinate the locations of luminaires, lighting control devices and outlets with all other trades. 3.4 INSPECTION A. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work (including the electric and telecom utility providers for utility service infrastructure work). B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test ing, the Contractor shall at his own expense uncover said work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work disturbed by him to its original condition including paying other trades to repair work under their scope that was disturbed. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conducts tests of equipment, devices, and systems as required by NFPA, BICSI, local Codes and the local AHJ. 1. Provide a Journeyman Electrician with all tools, instruments, etc required to complete required tests. 2. Coordinate with the Owner, Architect and General Contractor; tests should be performed in the presence of the Owner and Architect unless given specific permission othe rwise in writing. B. Refer to individual Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for additional requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials. B. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment and luminaire lenses. Equipment shall be free of dirt, construction debris, corrosion, etc. C. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to eliminate dirt, debris or other material from entering and collecting inside of conduit and equipment. Any collection of material shall be thoroughly cleaned before owner occupancy. D. Clean exterior of all exposed conduit. E. Materials intended for use inside the building envelope, including those used for patching, painting, touch-up, and cleaning, must contain acceptable levels of VOC’s per project requirements and contain no added urea-formaldehyde. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 15 3.7 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other trades where necessary for installation of electrical work. Perform work only with craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. B. Avoid cutting where possible by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of rough -frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for electrical installations. C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without breaking out around holes. 3.8 SALVAGE A. Remove excess conduit and conductors. Remove scrap and all other excess materials from the site. B. Comply with contractor’s Construction Waste Management Plan. Retain and submit all trip and tip tickets for all construction debris and waste hauling, indicating material content, tonnage, date hauled and facility to where materials were hauled. 3.9 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES A. Refer to individual Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for requirements. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 00 00 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 26 00 00 - 16 B. Selected Division 26 equipment and systems referenced are to be commissioned per Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements and Section 26 08 00, Commissioning of Electrical Systems. The contractor has specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation. Coordinate all commissioning activities with the Commissioning Authority. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 1 SECTION 26 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hangers and Supports. 2. Concrete Bases. 3. Vibration and Seismic Controls. 4. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals. 5. Firestopping. 6. Access Panels. 7. Execution. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. In addition to the requirements in Divisions 01, 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections, see also the following Specifications for additional information and requirements: 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 96 00 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. The Contractor shall retain the services of a third party structural engineer currently licensed in the State of Washington to provide hangers, restraint, support, anchoring and seismic calculations and details for all applicable equipment where required by the AHJ. B. The Contractor shall design supports for equipment, devices and raceways capable of supporting the combined weight of the supported systems and their contents. Anchoring, support and seismic restraint systems shall meet the requirements of applicable Code s with local amendments and the requirements of the Project Structural Engineer and the local AHJ. See the Structural drawings and specifications for requirements. C. Seismic Performance: 1. The Contractor shall provide seismic support as required by IBC 1613 with local amendments, the local AHJ and the project Structural Engineer. 2. Seismic restraint and hangers and supports systems shall meet the seismic performance requirements of the Project’s Structural Engineer and as per the requirements of Code and the local AHJ. See the Structural drawings and specifications for requirements. 3. The supported equipment and/ or devices will remain in place without any separation and will be fully operational after a seismic event of a strength per Structural and Code/ AHJ requirements. D. Field Welding shall comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and D1.2/D1.2M as applicable. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 2 E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. F. LEED-Compliant Products: Inside the building envelope, use materials (including but not limited to adhesives, sealants and solvents) that contain acceptable or lower levels of VOC per referenced standards in Rating System Requirements and no added urea-formaldehyde. Cleaning products used during construction and close-out procedures shall meet Green Seal standards GS-34, GS-37, and SG-40, or the California Code of Regulations, Title 17 Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS A. Provide major equipment components with manufacturer's name, address, catalog number and capacity indicated on a nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place. B. Protect stored material and equipment against weather, corrosion and dirt. Protect installed electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems components and equipment against weather damage, corrosion, dirt and construction dust. Seal equipment and conduit where and when necessary to be kept clean and weathertight. C. Furnish standard and fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers and other accessories. D. Provide vibration isolation on all transformers and motor driven equipment provided by the Electrical Contractor. E. Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and contraction of conduit. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion joints provide and adequately protect system. F. Installed hangers, supports and restraints (as applicable) shall have a flame rating of Class 1 and shall be self-extinguishing per ASTM D635 when tested per ASTM 84 requirements unless the requirements of Code or the local Fire Marshal or AHJ are more stringent. G. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials and components. H. Firestopping Materials: Provide to achieve fire ratings as noted on architect’s drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating. ASTM and UL. 1. Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated assemblies unless otherwise required by applicable codes or otherwise indicated on architectural or structural drawings or specifications. 2. Surface Burning: UL 723 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/50. a. For nonmetallic slotted channel systems and accessories: Comply with ASTM E84. Flame Rating Class 1. Self-extinguishing per ASTM D635. 3. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide product data for each type of product in Part 2 below. Mark on submittals specific equipment and devices intended for installation on product where multip le equipment and/ or devices are shown on a single catalog page. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 3 1. Provide Shop Drawings for specially fabricated seismic restraint and hanger and support systems stamped by an Engineer currently registered in the State of Washington. Include design calculations for hangers and seismic restraints. B. See Specification Section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Conditions” for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Contingent upon meeting requirements of the Project, Code and local AHJ, provide products by one or more of the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 3. ERICO Global Company; part of Pentair. 4. O-Z / Gedney; Emerson Electric Co. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. Unistrut; a part of atkore International. B. Metallic Slotted Support Systems 1. Comply with Metal Framing Manufacturers Association Standard Publication MFMA-4. 2. Channels: a. Channels shall be stainless steel, Type 304 or 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. b. Channel widths shall be as required for the applicable load criteria and per requirements of the structural engineer. 3. Fittings and Accessories shall be stainless steel, Type 304 or 5052-H32 aluminum alloy to match channels’ requirements. 4. Coatings: a. Metallic: For aluminum assembles, zinc plated according to ASTM B633. b. Painted: Manufacturer’s standard painted coating applied per MFMA-4. Protect finishes from damage during shipping. C. Support Devices for Conduit and Cable: 1. Designed for type and size of conduit / cabling being supported. 2. Material: Steel. D. Support Devices for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: 1. Designed to adequately support the intended cabling plus safety factors without damaging the insulation or reducing the amount of insulation in the area where the cable is supported. 2. Body Material: Malleable iron. E. Fabricated Metal Supports: 1. Design for weight and dimensions of supported equipment plus safety factor; coordinate with third-party structural engineer as required. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 4 2. Material: Black, Galvanized Structural Steel per ASTM A36/ A36M. Comply with Section 05 50 00 for steel shapes and plates. F. Components for Mounting, Anchoring and Attachment: 1. Manufacturers: Contingent upon meeting requirements of the Project, Code and local AHJ, provide products by one or more of the following: a. Cooper B-Line, Inc b. Hilti, Inc. c. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. f. Unistrut; a part of atkore International. 2. Provide fasteners listed for use in building material where used and with tension, shear and pullout capacities as required to support intended loads. 3. Coordinate with and receive approval from the Structural Engineer for all locations of Powder-Actuated Fasteners prior to installation. 4. Provided threaded steel hanger rods. 5. Concrete Inserts: a. Continuous channel slotted support system. b. Universal, malleable iron - Type 18, FS WW-H-171. 6. Provide beam clamps and attachments as required. 2.2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS A. Vibration Isolators 1. Where pad-style vibration isolators are used, arrange pads in a single or multiple layers so as to allow for uniform loading over the entire pad area as per the direction of the Architect or Acoustic Consultant. Coordinate dimensions with the equipment to be supported. Pads are to be of a resilient material; exact material to be per the Architect or Acoustic Consultant. 2. Spring isolators shall meet the requirements of the Architect or Acoustic Consultant. Provide seismic or limit-stop restrained spring isolators as required for equipment, local AHJ or the Acoustic Consultant. a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 3. For floor-mounted equipment, provide neoprene bushings intended for use for rigid equipment mountings. Match to type and size of equipment anchor bolts and studs. 4. For wall-mounted equipment, provide neoprene and steel assemblies intended for use for rigid equipment mountings. Match to type and size of anchorage assemblies used. B. Seismic Controls 1. Manufacturers: Contingent upon meeting requirements of the Project, Code and local AHJ, provide products by one or more of the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 5 a. Cooper B-Line, Inc b. Hilti, Inc c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc d. Mason Industries, Inc e. Unistrut; a part of atkore International 2. Match equipment seismic control restraints and restraint systems to the type and size of the anchor bolts and studs used. Coordinate with Structural Engineer and General Contractor. 2.3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Contingent upon meeting requirements of the Project, Code and loca l AHJ, provide products by one or more of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. The Metraflex Company. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Presealed Systems. 6. Proco Products, Inc. B. Round tube sleeves for penetrations through Non-Fire-Rated floors and walls: 0.0239-inch thick (minimum) galvanized steel. C. Rectangular sleeves for penetrations through Non-Fire-Rated floors and walls: 1. Sleeves with a perimeter less than 50 inches and having no side longer than 16 inches: Galvanized steel with minimum thickness of 0.052 inches. 2. All other rectangular sleeves: Galvanized steel with minimum thickness of 0.138 inches. D. Wall Sleeves for penetrations at exterior walls below grade and exterior floors: Cast iron wall pipe with integral waterstop. E. Wall sleeves for penetrations at exterior wall penetrations above grade: ASTM A53/A53M Steel pipe sleeves, zinc coated with mechanical sleeve seals. F. Sleeve seal fittings for conduit penetrations at slab on grade or below grade exterior walls shall be listed and labeled for embedding in concrete slabs or walls in direct contact with earth and shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collars with center gap matching size of conduit to be installed in each penetration. G. Sealing elements in sleeve seal systems used to fill space between sleeve and raceway for conduit penetrations in slabs on grade or below-grade exterior walls shall be interlocking links of EPDM rubber shaped to fit surface of pipe. H. Grout shall be non-shrinking and recommended for interior and exterior applications; Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting per ASTM Standard C1107/C1107M. I. Where permitted by Code, the local AHJ and the Project Architect in Non-Fire-Rated gypsum assemblies silicone sealants may be used to seal penetrations provided they are listed for the intended use and location. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 6 1. Silicone Sealants are to be of pourable (self-leveling) Grade intended for openings in Non-Fire-Rated horizontal assemblies. 2. Silicone Foams shall expand and cure in place when mixed, resulting in a flexible, non - shrinking foam. J. All sealants shall meet the Sustainability requirements of the project. See the General Requirements paragraph of this Specification Section and Division 01 specification for requirements. K. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion unless manufacturer’s instructions or Structural Engineer directs otherwise. Confirm seismic criteria requirements with structural engineer. 1. At exterior wall and floor penetrations allow for 1 inch of space between raceway and the sleeves for installation of mechanical sleeve seals or sleeve seal systems unless manufacturer’s instructions indicate or seismic criteria of project requires otherwise . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING WORK A. Provide access to existing conduit, equipment and other installations remaining active and requiring access. B. Extend existing cabling and conductor and conduit installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Examine areas and equipment for conditions that would affect performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been addressed. B. Degrease and clean surfaces of any matter that would affect the bond of paint, adhesives or firestopping material. C. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond of paint, adhesives or firestopping. D. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. F. For adhesive anchors, clean holes and prepare per manufacturer and Structural Engineer ’s instructions prior to installation. 3.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the locations of embedded anchors and other connection hardware with equipment attachment points (based on actual equipment to be provided for the project). Locate and avoid the locations of concrete reinforcement, formwork, prestressed tendons, and other embedded items prior to drilling holes. B. Coordinate the locations of anchors, supports and seismic control assemblies and hardware with equipment mounting points and locations of concrete reinforcement , prestressed tendons, Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 7 conduit, etc and other embedded items prior to drilling holes. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items. 1. Notify the structural engineer immediately if any embedded items are encountered during drilling. C. Prior to drilling holes allow all concrete and masonry to reach full design strength; coordinate with and receive approval from the Architect and Structural Engineer. 3.4 INSTALLATION – CLEARANCE A. Devices, equipment and control components shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair and replacement. B. Ensure Code-required clearances are provided at all applicable equipment. 3.5 INSTALLATION – INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying conduit 4 inches and larger. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, coordinate with General Contractor, Architect and Structural Engineer to drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted f lush with slab. 3.6 INSTALLATION – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with NFPA 70, NECA 1, NECA 101, NECA 102, NECA 105 and NECA 111 as applicable for installation and application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section, Manufacturer’s written instructions, Structural Engineer or of the AHJ are stricter. B. Install hangers, supports, anchors, etc per Code and manufacturer and Structural Engineer’s instructions. C. Minimum hanger rod size shall be 1/4-inch (6 mm) in diameter. D. Space supports as required by NFPA 70. E. Secure raceways and cables with devices approved for the intended use by an agency acceptable to the AHJ. For conduit 1-1/2-inch (38 mm) and smaller above suspended ceilings, spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for fastening conduit to trapeze supports. F. Size and install support assembly components to meet the present and anticipated future loads with appropriate safety factors. Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent the buckling of hanger rods by seismic forces. Coordinate with structural engineer as required. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 8 G. Size and install trapeze-style support systems where used such that conduit / cabling capacity can be increased by at least 25% in the future. Coordinate with structural engineer as required. H. Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural e lements by the following methods unless otherwise required by Code or Architectural or Structural drawings or specifications. 1. To Wood: Lag screws or Through Bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to Concrete Inserts. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion Anchor Fasteners. 4. To Hollow Masonry: Approved Toggle-type Bolts. 5. To Solid Masonry: Expansion Anchor Fasteners. 6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M with lock washers and nuts / Beam Clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25 or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 / Spring Tension Clamps. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet Metal Screws. 8. To Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount on slotted channel racks attached to substrate per seismic restraint and anchorage requirements and per structural engineer. I. Use: 1. Interior Locations: Zinc-coated steel anchors 2. Exterior Locations: Stainless-steel anchors J. Holes for expansion anchors shall be drilled to avoid the need for reinforcing bars. K. Protect anchors from damage during installation. L. Secure raceways and cabling to trapeze supports in a manner approved by the local AHJ. M. Installation shall allow for the free movement of equipment within its intended normal mode of operation. N. Install fabricated metal supports per requirements of Specification Section 05 50 0 0, “Metal Fabrications.” 3.7 INSTALLATION – CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete bases shall be installed to provide at least 4 inches of base beyond the edges of the equipment supported in both directions unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or unless otherwise required by intended anchoring method. B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete unless otherwise required by Architect, Structural Engineer or equipment to be supported. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base per manufacturer’s written instruct ions or requirements of Structural Engineer. 3.8 INSTALLATION – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS A. Provide hanger rod stiffeners where required by Code, local AHJ or Structural Engineer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 9 B. Install vibration and seismic control assemblies and devices per Code, local AHJ, Manufacturer’s written instructions, structural engineer and acoustic consultant. C. Select and install seismic support assemblies where required to provide adequate strength to carry present and future static and seismic loads within loading limits per the requirements of Code, the local AHJ and the Structural Engineer. D. Install resilient bushing assemblies for wall-mounted equipment. E. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers where the clearance between an anchor and the adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). F. Unless otherwise required by Code, the local AHJ or the Structural Engineer, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. G. Install flexible connections in raceway, cable trays, busways, etc where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections are supported by different structural elements and where terminating to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element than the one supporting them where they approach said equipment. H. Installation shall allow for the free movement of equipment within its intended normal mode of operation. 3.9 INSTALLATION – SLEEVES A. Comply with NFPA 70, NECA 1, NEMA VE2 and the local Building Codes as applicable for installation and application of sleeves and sleeve seals for electrical penetrations except if requirements in this Section, Manufacturer’s written instructions, Structural Engineer or of the AHJ are stricter. B. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals per manufacturer’s recommendations for intended penetrations locations and raceway sizes. 1. Center raceway in sleeve. Install mechanical sleeve seals per manufacturer’s instructions to make watertight seal. 2. At roof penetrations, seal individual penetrations with flexible boot-type flashing units unless directed otherwise by Architect or Envelope Consultant. Coordinate installation of flashing with the installation of the roof. C. Set sleeves in position in and secure to forms as new walls and slabs are constructed. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. 1. Cut sleeves for wall penetrations for mounting flush with both sides of the wall; deburr the sleeves after cutting. 2. Where sleeves are used at floor penetrations, extend the sleeves 2 inches above the finished floor level or as otherwise directed by Architect or Engineer; deburr the sleeves after cutting. D. At interior Non-Fire-Rated walls and floors comply with the requirements of Section 07 92 00, “Joint Sealants.” The space between the sleeve and raceway shall be sealed with joint sealant or compound intended for the specific application, use and location or the joint . The space outside the sleeves is to be sealed with solidly packed mortar or grout such that no voids remain in the sealing material; smooth exposed surfaces. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 00 October 20, 2021 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Project #16-0996 26 05 00 - 10 E. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with insulation and caulk or fireproof airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Protect all sealants while curing. G. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion unless manufacturer’s instructions or Structural Engineer directs otherwise. Confirm seismic criteria requirements with structural engineer. H. At exterior wall and floor penetrations allow for 1 inch of space between raceway and the sleeves for installation of mechanical sleeve seals or sleeve seal systems unless manufacturer’s instructions indicate or seismic criteria of project requires otherwise. 3.10 EXAMINATION AND TESTING A. Examine anchors and support rough-in work prior to the installation of equipment and raceways to verify actual locations and other conditions potentially affecting the completion of the installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. The Contractor shall test at least five of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners as selected by the Architect to 90 percent of the rated proof load of the device. If any of the test group of the installed anchors and fasteners fail the testing, all others of the same type installed on the project shall also be tested to 90 percent of the rated proof load of the device. D. Equipment, devices, anchors, hangers, supports, etc will be considered defective i f they do not pass tests and inspections. E. The Contractor shall provide a test and inspection report summarizing all tests and inspections in this Section, the results or said tests and inspections, what actions were taken to correct any unsatisfactory conditions and devices, and retesting results confirming that any originally deficient installations have been corrected. 3.11 PAINTING A. See Specification Sections 09 91 13 “Exterior Painting” / 09 91 23 “Interior Painting” / 09 96 00 “High Performance Coatings” for requirements. B. For galvanized surfaces, after cleaning and preparing surface, apply a galvanizing -repair paint per ASTM A780. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 19 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Project #16-0996 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Aluminum building wire rated 600 V or less. 3. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less. 4. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM, rated 600V or less. 5. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE PRODUCTS BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: A. Cerro Wire LLC. B. General Cable Corporation. C. Southwire Company. 2.2 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors. D. Conductor Insulation: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 19 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Project #16-0996 26 05 19 - 2 1. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854. 2. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 3. Type UF: Comply with UL 83 and UL 493. 4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.3 ALUMINUM BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn aluminum current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. C. Conductors: Aluminum, complying with ASTM B800 and ASTM B801. D. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854. 2. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 3. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.4 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath. B. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Comply with UL 1569. 3. RoHS compliant. C. Circuits: 1. Single circuit. 2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424. 3. D. Conductors: 1. Feeders and branch circuits smaller than #4 AWG: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors. 2. Feeders #4 AWG and Larger: Aluminum, complying with ASTM B 800 and ASTM B 801. E. Ground Conductor: Bare or insulated. F. Conductor Insulation: 1. For Copper MC Cable: Type THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 19 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Project #16-0996 26 05 19 - 3 2. For Aluminum MC Cable: Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. G. Armor: Aluminum, interlocked. H. Jacket: PVC applied over armor. 2.5 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 2. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die -cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larg- er. E. Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway installed per Code and AHJ requirements. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2 or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in metallic race- way. For exposed feeders that do not leave the Electrical Rooms and that are not subject to physical damage, the Electrical Contractor may also use Metal-clad cable, Type MC as allowed by Code. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 19 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Project #16-0996 26 05 19 - 4 C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2 or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC as allowed by Code. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN- 2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in metallic raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single con- ductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC as allowed by Code. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indi cated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended max- imum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Section 260500. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor and identify as spare conductor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 19 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Project #16-0996 26 05 19 - 5 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestop- ping." 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests: a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram. b. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. c. Inspect for correct identification. d. Inspect cable jacket and condition. B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 26 October 20, 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS: A. Subject to Code requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Burndy, Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. ERICO International Corporation. 3. O-Z Gedney. 4. Siemens Industry, Inc. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. 3. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or otherwise required by Code, pro- vide the following: a. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 26 October 20, 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 26 - 2 b. Bonding Conductor: No. 2, solid conductor. c. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with cop- per ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items con- nected. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. F. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron. G. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. H. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy. I. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. J. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. K. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial. L. Water Pipe Clamps: 1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts. a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy. b. Listed for direct burial. 2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector. 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter. B. Provide utility system ground rods per Utility requirements. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 26 October 20, 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 26 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, per Code requirements. 1. Bury at least 30 inches (750 mm) below grade. C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. E. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with more than one continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal in- spection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. G. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned- copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure - sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout. C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fas- Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 26 October 20, 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 26 - 4 ten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. D. Pad-Mounted Transformers: Provide grounding per Utility Service Provider and Code require- ments. Field verify exact requirements with Utility Service Provider. 3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar ter- minal on busway. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humid- ifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and con- nected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equip- ment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulat- ed equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch - circuit conductors. F. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. 1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade un- less otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as other- wise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections. 3. Provide quantities are per Utility Service provider requirements. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 26 October 20, 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 26 - 5 C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance ex- cept where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: Provide as per the requirements of Code and the local AHJ. E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of asso- ciated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner col- umn and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart. G. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor per Code requirements. 1. If concrete foundation in contact with earth is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation where in contact with earth. 2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. H. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 feet (6.0 m) long. If rein- forcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length. I. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Se- lect connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and me- chanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been en- ergized, test for compliance with requirements. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 26 October 20, 2021 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 26 - 6 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electri- cal connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written in- structions. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground wiring. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at conduit and box entrances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclo- sures, and cabinets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 4. Republic Conduit. 5. Southwire Company 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 7. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 8. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Manee ly Company. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 2 B. Metal Conduit: 1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 3. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 4. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 5. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. C. Metal Fittings: 1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 5. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew. 6. Expansion Fittings: Match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. D. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities hav- ing jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 4. Republic Conduit. 5. Southwire Company 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 7. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 8. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. B. Nonmetallic Conduit: 1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indi- cated. 3. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. 4. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. C. Nonmetallic Fittings: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 3 1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 3. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 4. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 5. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 6. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Listing and Labeling: Metallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as de- fined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica- tion. C. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise re- quired by Code or AHJ, and sized according to NFPA 70. D. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type with tamper resistant screws unless otherwise indicated. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and appli- cation C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, an d having snap-on cov- er, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold -down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for com- plete system. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 4 E. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish. 2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as de- fined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica- tion. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. Hubbell Incorporated. 2. MonoSystems, Ins. 3. Wiremold/ Legrand. C. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufac- turer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. Where noted on drawings, provid- ed barried raceways for line- and low- voltage wiring. 2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 5. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 6. Mono-Systems, Inc. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 8. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 10. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as re- cessed box. G. Gangable boxes are allowed. H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise required by Code/ AHJ. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 5 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. I. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of hot-dip galvanized-steel diamond plate or fiberglass unless otherwise required by Utility. 1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray or Green as directed by Architect. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated or required by Code or local AHJ. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC", “TELECOM” 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC or Type EPC-80-PVC as indicated on the drawings or as required by the Utility Service Provider. a. All utility infrastructure is to meet all requirements of the Utility Service Providers (Power and Telecom as applicable). 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC where subject to physical damage, LFNC otherwise as allowed by Code. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 6 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless oth- erwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use setscrew steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit . Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum race- ways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Outside of the MEP equipment rooms, install surface raceways only where indicated on Draw- ings unless given specific authorization prior to installation by the Architect. H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C) 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260000 for hangers and supports. B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Com- ply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and nu mber of floors. C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment. D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 7 H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for con- trol wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. K. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached. L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main rein- forcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion j oints at right angles with expansion fit- tings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all direc- tions unless additional cover is required by Code or the local AHJ. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor. M. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet or Damp Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's writ- ten instructions. O. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. Q. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install lock- nuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. R. Do not use metallic conduit system as grounding path. Grounding conductors to be provided in all conduit; see Specification Section 260526. S. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 8 T. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside race- ways in use. U. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not ex- ceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. V. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. W. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 3. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. 4. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain dif- ferent pressure set points. 5. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. X. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. Y. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RNC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m). 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and con- traction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expan- sion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected ac- cording to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 9 Z. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. AA. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to bottom of box unless otherwise indicated. BB. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. CC. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. DD. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. EE. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by span ning two framing mem- bers or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. FF. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. All utility infrastructure is to meet all requirements of the Utility Service Providers (Power and Telecom as applicable). B. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nomi- nal diameter. C. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving.". D. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of con- duit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as tempera- ture changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal com- paction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving.” E. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at build- ing entrances through floor. 1. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase cou- pling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling. 2. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits pen- etrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bush- ings on terminations at equipment. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 33 October 20, 2021 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 33 - 10 F. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260500. 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with require- ments in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufactur- er. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 53 October 20, 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 53 - 1 SECTION 26 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels. 3. Bands and tubes. 4. Tapes and stencils. 5. Tags. 6. Signs. 7. Cable ties. 8. Paint for identification. 9. Fasteners for labels and signs. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study, coordination study, and short circuit / fault current study. See Specification Section 260573. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Comply with NFPA 70E and Specification Section 260573 requirements for arc-flash warning labels. F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 53 October 20, 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 53 - 2 2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and circuit(s). B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed be- low for ungrounded feeder and branch circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authori- ties having jurisdiction permit. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Color for Neutral: White or gray. 4. Color for Equipment Grounds: Bare copper, Green or Green with a yellow stripe. C. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES.” 2. Arc flash warning labels per the requirements of Code, the local AHJ and the Building Standards. 3. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR XX INCHES." Where XX is the Code re- quired clearance for the specific piece of electrical equipment. E. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Black letters on a white field. 2.3 LABELS A. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action. B. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted or Write-on, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 2. Marker for Labels: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manu- facturer. 3. Marker for Labels: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 53 October 20, 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 53 - 3 C. Self-Adhesive Labels: Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location. 1. Minimum Nominal Size: a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches (37 by 150 mm) for raceway and conductors. b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) for equipment. c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 BANDS AND TUBES A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action. 2.5 TAPES A. Underground-Line Warning Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when ex- posed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 4. Color and Printing: a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5. b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE" c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE" as applicable. 5. Size, material and installation to meet the requirements of the utility providers. 2.6 SIGNS A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Engraved legend. 2. Thickness: a. For signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. c. Engraved legend with white letters on a black background. d. Self-adhesive. e. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2.7 CABLE TIES A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 53 October 20, 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 53 - 4 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black. C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F (23 Deg C) according to ASTM D638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application re- quirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interi- or). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with re- quirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent desig- nations throughout Project. B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. D. Coordinate the installation of identification devices with all other trades: 1. Coordinate schedule of installation with the completion of covering and/ or painting of sur- faces where identification devices are to be located. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 53 October 20, 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 53 - 5 2. Ensure that identification devices are visible after the work of all other trades is complete; coordinate with locations of access panels, doors, etc. E. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. F. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. G. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items. H. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely en- circle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway. I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. J. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for view- ing from the floor. K. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the follow- ing systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as fol- lows: 1. “POWER.” 2. “TELECOM.” L. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibil- ity. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropri- ate to the location and substrate. M. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. N. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. O. Self-Adhesive Labels: 1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high let- ters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. P. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 53 October 20, 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 53 - 6 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high let- ters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. Q. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. R. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high let- ters on minimum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches (50 mm) high. S. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below: 1. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without inter- ference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices. B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation. C. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil. Sten- cil legend "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH-VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high, black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals D. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Feeder and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels or vinyl tape applied in bands. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. E. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junc- tion and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "701 SYSTEM POWER." 2. "POWER." F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes use vinyl wraparound labels to identify the phase. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 53 October 20, 2021 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 05 53 - 7 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes provide markings per utility service providers’ re- quirements. H. Conductors and/ or Conduits to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and/ or conduit ends and list source/ location of opposite conduit end. I. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communi- cation, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable. J. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors. K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self - adhesive labels. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. L. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels. M. Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels. N. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Self-Adhesive label or laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panel- board manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self - adhesive, engraved laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Enclosed switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Enclosed controllers. h. Variable-speed controllers. i. Contactors. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 73 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES Project #16-0996 26 05 73 - 1 SECTION 26 05 73 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes computer-based, fault-current/ short-circuit and arc flash studies to determine the minimum interrupting capacity of circuit protective devices, the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment, and overcurrent protective devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA. B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used there- in. C. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies. D. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. E. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then re- moves the affected portion of the circuit from the system. F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. G. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. H. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submit- tals shall be in digital form. a. Short-circuit and Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 73 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES Project #16-0996 26 05 73 - 2 b. Short-circuit and Arc-flash study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1) Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and as- sociated characteristics is satisfactory. 2) Revised one-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of short-circuit and arc-flash study. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. For overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 2. The following are from the Short-Circuit and Arc-flash Study Report: a. Final one-line diagram. b. Final Short-Circuit and Arc-flash Study Report. c. Power system data. d. List of all protective device settings. e. Time-current coordination curves. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Studies shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis. B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. C. Manual calculations are unacceptable. 1. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: Computer program shall be designed to perform short-circuit studies or have a function, component, or add-on module designed to perform short-circuit studies. 2. Computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engi- neer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification. D. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervi- sion and control of this professional engineer. E. Fault-Current / Short-Circuit, Arc-flash Study Certification: Fault-Current / Short-Circuit and Arc- flash Study Report shall be signed and sealed by an Electrical Engineer currently registered in the State of Washington. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 73 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES Project #16-0996 26 05 73 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551. 1. Analytical features of power systems analysis software program shall have capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399. B. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time -current- characteristic curves as part of its output. 2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT/ FAULT-CURRENT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS A. Executive summary of study findings. B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results. C. One-line diagram of modeled power system, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations and ratings. 6. Derating factors and environmental conditions. 7. Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study. D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements or revisions in a written document, separate from one-line diagram. E. Protective Device Evaluation: 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to available short-circuit cur- rents. Verify that equipment withstand ratings exceed available short-circuit current at equipment installation locations. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated short-circuit duties. 3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication fac- tors listed in standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; veri- fy adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: 1. One-line diagram of system being studied. 2. Power sources available. 3. Manufacturer, model, and interrupting rating of protective devices. 4. Conductors. 5. Transformer data. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 73 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES Project #16-0996 26 05 73 - 4 G. Short-Circuit Study Output Reports: 1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance. 2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the fol- lowing for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents: 1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7. 3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the fol- lowing for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis. 2.3 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT A. Executive summary of study findings. B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results. C. One-line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings, including derating factors and en- vironmental conditions. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, panelboard designations, and ratings. a. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article. b. Arc-Flash Study Output Reports: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 73 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES Project #16-0996 26 05 73 - 5 1) Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each equipment location included in the report: a) Voltage. b) Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c) Fault-point X/R ratio. d) No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e) Equivalent impedance. f) Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical basis. g) Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis. D. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations: 1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Restricted approach boundary. 6. Limited approach boundary. 7. Working distance. 8. Incident energy. 9. Hazard risk category. 10. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction. E. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout. 2.4 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for self- adhesive equipment labels. Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) self-adhesive equipment label for each work location included in the analysis. B. Label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc -flash hazard analysis: 1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Protection boundaries. a. Arc-flash boundary. b. Restricted approach boundary. c. Limited approach boundary. 4. Arc flash PPE category. 5. Required minimum arc rating of PPE in Cal/cm squared. 6. Available incident energy. 7. Working distance. 8. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date. C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 73 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES Project #16-0996 26 05 73 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribu- tion system requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the study. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to Ar- chitect's attention. 2. For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under pro- visions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. 3. For relocated equipment and that which is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified techni- cians and engineers. Qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be as defined by NFPA 70E. B. Gather and tabulate the required input data to support the short-circuit and arc-flash study. Comply with requirements in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for recording circuit protective device characteristics. Record data on a Record Document copy of one -line diagram. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be ac- quired in the field. Data include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent protec- tive device studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submitta ls, input and output data, and recommended device settings. 2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus (three phase and line to ground). 5. Full-load current of all loads. 6. Voltage level at each bus. 7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, imped- ance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 8. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 10. Conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 11. Derating factors. 3.3 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND ARC-FLASH STUDY A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399. B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551. C. Base study on device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer. D. Extent of electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 73 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES Project #16-0996 26 05 73 - 7 E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to system overcurrent protective devices as fol- lows: 1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electri- cal distribution system for Project. Study all cases of sy stem-switching configurations and alter- nate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. G. Include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchro- nous generators and apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. Also account for the fault-current dc decrement to address asymmetrical requirements of interrupting equip- ment. H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and a single line-to-ground fault at each equipment indicated on one-line diagram. 1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study. I. Include in the report identification of any protective device applied outside its capacity. J. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Device shall not operate in response to the following: a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusu- al loading or emergency conditions. 2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents. 3.4 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study. 1. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault -current size. a. Maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions. b. Calculate arc-flash energy at 85 percent of maximum short-circuit current accord- ing to IEEE 1584 recommendations. c. Calculate arc-flash energy at 38 percent of maximum short-circuit current accord- ing to NFPA 70E recommendations. d. Calculate arc-flash energy with the utility contribution at a minimum and assume no motor contribution. 2. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts. 3. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations. 4. Calculate the limited, restricted, and prohibited approach boundaries for each location. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 05 73 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STUDIES Project #16-0996 26 05 73 - 8 5. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be dec re- mented as follows: a. Fault contribution from induction motors shall not be considered beyond three to five cycles. b. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators shall be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (for example, contribu- tions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles). 6. Arc-flash energy shall generally be reported for the maximum of line or load side of a cir- cuit breaker. However, arc-flash computation shall be performed and reported for both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows: a. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. b. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location. 7. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit study. 3.6 LABELING A. Apply arc-flash label on the front cover of each section of the equipment for each equipment in- cluded in the study. Base arc-flash label data on highest values calculated at each location. B. Each piece of equipment listed below shall have an arc-flash label applied to it: 1. Low-voltage switchboard. 2. Panelboard and safety switches. C. Note on record Drawings the location of equipment where the personnel could be exposed to arc-flash hazard during their work. 1. Indicate arc-flash energy. 2. Indicate protection level required. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the following: 1. Potential arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the sig- nificance of arc-flash warning labels. 2. The fundamentals of operating the power system in normal and emergency modes. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. System specific commissioning procedures B . Related Sections: 1. The following sections specify commissioning activities for this project: a. 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements 2. All sections related to the following commissioned systems may contain start-up, testing and/or commissioning related activities: a. Lighting Control b. Power Monitoring Systems 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A . Work includes the completion and documentation of formal commissioning procedures by the Contractor on selected equipment and systems as listed under 1.1 B. Commissioning is defined as the process of verifying and documenting that the installation and performance of selected building systems meet the specified design criteria and therefore satisfies the design intent and the Owner’s operational needs. The Contractor shall be responsible for participation in the commissioning process as outlined herein, and in subsequent sectional references and attachments throughout the project documents. Commissioning procedures shall be designed and conducted under the direction of the Commissioning Authority (CxA) and coordinated by the Contractor Commissioning Coordinator (CCC). B . This section contains the system specific commissioning requirements for the systems referenced herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THE SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED ARE SPECIFIED IN SECTION 01 91 13, PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION OF THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS FOR THE SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED IS SPECIFIED SECTION 01 91 13, PART 3 – EXECUTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 2 SCHEDULE A – Start-up Plan , Contractor Checklists and Document Tracking A Startup Plan shall be developed as outlined in Section 01 91 13. The Startup Plan shall include manufacturer’s startup procedures and Contractor Checklists (CCL) as provided by the CxA. Sample CCLs are included in this Schedule. The Contractor responsible for delivery of the equipment and appurtenances associated with the systems listed in Table – A shall be responsible for completion of the CCL for each individual piece of equipment in the system group. The CCLs included within this Schedule are sample versions and are representative of what will be included in the final Commissioning Plan. The Contractor is responsible to demonstrate the proper operation of all installed systems and the final CCLs shall contain the requirements to document these demonstrations. In no case shall the checklists require performance criteria more stringent than specified by the Project Documents. The CCC is responsible for collecting the completed CCLs and start-up documents and maintaining the Startup Plan during installation and startup activities. The CCC shall review the material for completeness, then sign off on the CCLs as an indication that documents are complete. Once all CCLs and start-up documents are received, they shall be turned over to the CxA. The following Table - A identifies the CCLs and related documents that will be included in the final Startup Plan. Listed as subcategories below each system are the documents that will be required to be submitted as part of the system startup activities. This documentation includes installation, startup, static tests, certifications and other miscellaneous checklists. This table shall be used as a document tracking mechanism by the CxA, CCC and Contractor for the process of submittal, review and approval of installation and startup documents and CCLs. The table shall be included in the Startup Plan, which is a subset of the Commissioning Plan. Table-A Key: A. System description for each system commissioned. A Contractor Checklist is included for each commissioned system. The subcategories include required documentation to be submitted with the CCL. B. Contractor responsible for installation, startup, testing and submittal of documents for commissioned system. To be filled in after contract award. C. Date the proposed documents are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor. NOTE: These documents shall include, but are not limited to, procedures and forms to include such activities as: manufacturer’s installation and start-up, pressure testing, TAB, cleaning, flushing and disinfection. The CCL is provided by the CxA. D. Indicates that CxA has received and approved proposed installation and start-up documentation. E. Date the completed documents are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor. F. Indicates that CxA has received and approved completed documentation. G. Notes on status of forms, irregularities and rework needed Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 3 Table - A: System Summary and Documentation Tracking A B C D E F G System Description Documents Required Responsible Contractor Proposed Document Received O K Completed Document Received O K Notes Occupancy Sensors Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Daylight Dimming/Switching Control Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Lighting Control System Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Point to Point Verification CxA Provided Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Power Monitoring System Manufacturer Start-up Documentation Zero/Span calibration check CxA Provided Contractor Checklist CxA Provided Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 4 Sample Contractor Checklist Contractor Checklist Occupancy Sensor Control For each space with an occupancy sensor: 1. Indicate the Specified Type (ST), Specified Delay (SD) and Programmed Delay (PD). 2. Field Verify Type (FVT) as installed in space. 3. Field Verify Range (FVR) and sensitivity settings are appropriate for space configuration. 4. Field Measured Delay (FMD): Leave space and measure and record the ACTUAL delay time to off and confirm as programmed. 5. Field Verify Switch (FVS) operation if applicable. Space ST OS/VS SD Min. PD Min. FVT OS/VS FVR OK FMD Min. FVS OK RC Initial CxA Initial Note ST = Specified Type (OS or VS) SD = Specified Delay (min) PD = Programmed Delay (min) FVT = Field Verified Type, FVR = Field Verified Range/Sensitivity is appropriate for space, FMD = Field Measured Delay FVS = Field Verified Switch operation if applicable Sign-Off: Team Member Name Date Responsible Contractor (RC): Commissioning Authority (CxA): Notes: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 5 Daylight Dimming/Switching Sensor Calibration and Set-Up Space Specified FC Configured FC Sensitivity Adjusted? Comment Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 6 Lighting Control Panel Pont-to-Point Verification PCG = Polarity, Continuity and Grounding verified Panel Relay Zone Description PCG Sched. Set On/Off Verified Comment Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 7 Sample Contractor Checklist Power Monitoring System Unit No:Contractor: Location: Serves: Manufacturer:Model: Check RC CxA Note Equipment Area is cleaned and clear of construction debris. Unit is clean and has no visible physical damage. Equipment labels are installed per project documents. Unit is accessible for service. Mounting is appropriate. Meter readout is visible and per project documents. Electrical Supply power is installed and disconnect is accessible. Disconnect is labeled. Supply power is sourced per project documents (e-power). Current transformers oriented correctly and located per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Voltage taps located per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Wires labeled per project documents. Start-Up Manufacturer’s installation and start-up procedures complete. Meter calibration complete and documented. Communication protocols set up and interface verified working correctly (ModBus, BacNet, LonWorks, IP address, etc.) Communication with Building Automation System and/or data acquisition and display system confirmed Start-up documentation submitted to CxA. Readiness System is ready for functional performance testing Representative photograph provided Sign-Off: Team Member Name Date Responsible Contractor (RC): Commissioning Authority (CxA): Notes: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 8 SCHEDULE B – Functional Performance Tests Functional Performance Tests 1 The draft versions of the Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets contained in this Schedule define the individual systems to be tested and Contractor responsibilities based on the specific method of commissioning. These draft Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets represent information available at the time of commissioning specification development. The final versions may be somewhat different and will be included within the Commissioning Plan as presented at the initial commissioning coordination meeting. 2 The methods of functional performance test and verification are listed in Table 1 of this Schedule. The Contractor will be responsible for supporting the testing activity as indicated. This may include developing the test plan and functional performance test forms for approval by the Commissioning Authority, performing testing to be witnessed by the CxA or providing support during functional performance testing conducted by the CxA or their sub-Authority. 3 Contract documents state that the Contractor is responsible to demonstrate that all systems comply with contract requirements and meet the project design intent. The scope of testing outlined in the following Functional Performance Test and Verification Outline sheets in this Schedule represent the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. If systems fail the initial tests additional testing may be required. 4 The following Test Summary Table identifies the functional tests that will be conducted on this project. This table will be used as a document tracking mechanism for the process of submittal and review of contractor provided testing documentation. 5 The contractor is responsible for submitting proposed functional test documentation to the Commissioning Authority for review and approval at least one month prior to these activities. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Commissioning Authority in advance of the scheduled activity, testing or startup date. A minimum of 5 working days advance notification is required. If the CxA is not notified in advance of a scheduled start-up or testing activity, the start-up or testing shall be rescheduled and repeated to the satisfaction of the CxA. 6 The “Responsible Contractor” column of the table will be completed during the Initial Commissioning Coordination Meeting by assigning an individual Contractor responsible for the activities associated with each system based on what contractor provided that system. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 9 Table – B: Functional Test Summary Table A B C D E F G System Description Responsible Contractor Proposed Test Forms Received O K Testing Complete O K Notes Occupancy Sensors Daylight Dimming/Switching Lighting Control System Power Monitoring System Summary Table Key: A. System description for each system commissioned. B. Contractor responsible for providing testing. To be filled in after contract award. C. Date the proposed test forms are received by the CxA from the responsible Contractor (if applicable). D. Indicates that CxA has received and approved the proposed test forms. E. Date(s) testing was performed by contractor. F. Indicates that Commissioning Authority has witnessed and approved the testing and received all completed test forms. G. Notes on status of forms, irregularities and rework needed. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 10 Table 1 – Functional Test and Verification Methods The following applies regardless of test method. The contractor shall support the CxA during testing or verification, including but not limited to: scheduling and sequencing and adequate time for testing, on-site support during testing, testing instruments and equipment, setting up trend logs, providing access to equipment (including lifts), providing access to control systems both on-site and remotely. The CxA shall do one or a combination of the following to verify contractor testing: 1. The CxA shall witness all or portions of the tests during contractor testing. 2. The CxA shall re-conduct the functional tests on all or portions of the systems using the same test plan and data sheets. 3. The contractor shall be required to duplicate some of the testing by demonstrating a percentage of the system as selected and witnessed by the CxA. If during the verification process inconsistencies are found that demonstrate that the functional testing conducted by the contractor was not properly executed, the CxA shall suspend verification and the contractor shall be required to correct the problems and re-conduct the entire functional test and verification for the system(s) in question. Excessive test failures shall be subject to the back-charging provisions in Section 01 91 13. Test Method A – Contractor Written and Conducted with CxA Oversight The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the contractor responsible for the system and submitted to the CxA for approval. These can be the system manufacturer’s stock test forms if appropriate. The CxA shall assist contractor in development of test forms if requested to do so. The contractor shall conduct the tests on 100% of the equipment per the plan, document results and submit completed test forms to the CxA for review and approval. Test Method B – CxA Written and Conducted, Contractor Supports The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the CxA. The CxA shall conduct the tests per the plan, document results and notify contractor of any issues found. Test Method C – CxA Written, Contractor Conducts The test plan and test data sheets are developed by the CxA. The CxA shall turn over the test plan and test data sheets to the contractor. The contractor shall conduct the tests on 100% of the equipment per the plan, document results and submit completed test forms to the CxA for review and approval. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 11 Lighting Control System (Controller w/Relay Panel) Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule-B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Will Sample or Witness C.3 CxA Contractor 100%N/A Functional Tests: 1) Lighting Controls – Demonstrate and document the following: a) All features and functions of control panel b) On/Off control c) Battery operated emergency lighting on power failure d) Dimming control e) Manual overrides f) Scheduling programming g) Exterior photo eye or astrological clock function h) Light zoning and channel verification Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 12 Daylight Dimming/Switching Sensors Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule-B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Will Sample or Witness C.3 CxA Contractor 100%N/A Functional Tests: 1) Daylight Dimming – Demonstrate and document the following: a) Operation of all features and functions b) Sensitivity range c) Light level control verification d) On, Off and By-Pass Functions Occupancy Sensors Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule-B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Will Sample or Witness C.3 CxA Contractor 100%N/A Functional Tests: 1) Occupancy Sensors – Demonstrate and document the following: a) Operation of all features and functions b) Sensitivity range c) Time delay setting d) On, Off and By-Pass Functions Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 13 Power Monitoring System Functional Test and Verification Outline The testing outlined below represents the minimum expected level of testing to be performed during commissioning. The contractor shall be required to conduct and document any tests as necessary to prove all systems comply with the design intent. Table 1 in Schedule-B details the various methods of accomplishing functional testing. Testing: Test Method Plan & Data Sheets By: Conducted By: Demonstration Percentage CxA Will Sample or Witness C.3 CxA Contractor 100%N/A Functional Tests: 1) Demonstrate and document the following: a) Two point calibration at zero and at a known consumption equal to at least a third of the system maximum load. This can be accomplished by applying a known load or by measuring the actual load (volts & amps) at the panel being metered. b) Communication with Building Automation System and/or data acquisition and display system. c) All features and functions of the meter. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 14 PART 4 - SAMPLE FUNCTIONAL TEST DOCUMENTS 4.1 Sample functional test procedures and data forms are provided in this section to demonstrate the rigor of the process, test procedures and documentation that will be required from the contractor. These forms and procedures will be amended, augmented and updated in the final commissioning plan based on the final project documents, addendums and submittal information. This sample section does not contain all functional test procedures and data forms that are required to be executed by the contractor. Schedule - B of part 3 provides a full list of the functional tests that will be required to be executed by the contractor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 15 Sample Draft Functional Performance Test Lighting System Control - Time of Day Functions Procedures: 1. Place the system in the scheduled-on mode. 2. Verify all zones and associated luminaries are on. 3. Place the system into the unscheduled-on mode. 4. Verify all zones and associated luminaries are off. 5. Schedule each zone off then on individually for short period, one after the other. 6. Verify each zone turns off in sequence. 7. Schedule all zones and associated luminaries off into the scheduled-off mode. 8. Program zone over-ride timer for 5 minutes. 9. Select a zone station in each zone and place that zone into the over-ride mode and verify associated zone and luminaries turn on. 10. Allow over-ride timer to time out and verify each zone turns off. Data Sheet Zone:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Zone is in the scheduled-on mode – All ON Zone is in the scheduled-off mode – All OFF Zone sequences with schedule Systems with Override: Zone is in the scheduled-off mode - OFF Over-ride zone - ON Zone OFF after over-ride time out Test Pass/Fail Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Testing Contractor: CxA Witness/Verification: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 16 Lighting System Control - Time of Day Functions with Photo Cell Procedures: 1. Place the system in the scheduled-on mode with photo cell exposed to light. 2. Verify all zones and associated luminaries are off 3. Simulate dark conditions by blacking out photo cell. 4. Verify all zones and associated luminaries turn on. 5. Place the system in the scheduled-off mode with photo cell blacked out 6. Verify all zones and associated luminaries remain off. 7. Remove blackout from photo cell 8. Verify each zone and associated luminaries remain off. Zone:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Zone is in the scheduled-on mode lit photo cell – All OFF Photo cell is blacked out – All ON Zone is in the scheduled-off mode photo cell dark – All OFF Photo cell blackout removed – All OFF Test Pass/Fail Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Testing Contractor: CxA Witness/Verification: Comments: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 08 00 October 20, 2021 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Project #16-0996 26 08 00 - 17 Sample Functional Performance Test Occupancy Sensor Control 1. Verify and record occupancy delay time. 2. Verify wall switches (if applicable) are on. 3. Wait till rooms are unoccupied and lights are off. 4. Enter room and verify lights are activated. 5. Leave the room and measure time delay until lights go out. Room: Occupancy delay time setting (minutes) Lights off when unoccupied, record time Lights come on when room is entered Lights off after time delay, record time Calculated actual delay time Delay time acceptable Tests are complete and performance is acceptable. Sign-Off: Team Member Print Name/Co.Initial Date Installing Contractor: GC Cx Coordinator: END OF SECTION 26 08 00 Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 09 23 October 20, 2021 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 09 23 - 1 SECTION 26 09 23 – LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 2. Daylight Harvesting Dimming Controls 3. Digital timer light switches. 4. Lighting contactors. 5. Emergency shunt relays. 6. Lighting Control Panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-switch oc- cupancy sensors, and manual light switches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show installation details for the following: a. Occupancy sensors. b. Vacancy sensors. c. Photo sensors. d. Emergency shunt relays. e. Lighting Control Panels. 2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Include plans showing proposed locations of all parts and pieces of the submitted lighting control system devices, a bill of materials, and wiring diagrams for all lighting control de- vices. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 09 23 October 20, 2021 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 09 23 - 2 B. Include final approved lighting control shop drawings with any revisions made during construc- tion noted. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting c ontrol devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of lighting control software. b. Faulty operation of lighting control devices. c. Damage from transient voltage surges. 2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fo llow- ing or pre-approved equal: 1. Acuity Lighting. 2. Eaton Lighting. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 4. Wattstopper. 5. Douglas Lighting Controls. B. General Requirements for Sensors: 1. See lighting plans for mountings and types (low voltage, line voltage). 2. Dual technology. 3. Hardwired connection. 4. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Dual-Technology Type: Detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s). 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180- degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 1000 square feet (110 square me- ters) when mounted 48 inches (1200 mm) above finished floor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 09 23 October 20, 2021 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 09 23 - 3 2.2 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing or pre-approved equal: 1. Acuity Lighting. 2. Eaton Lighting. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 4. Wattstopper. 5. Douglas Lighting Controls. B. General Requirements for Sensors: 1. See lighting plans for mountings. 2. Description: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed. Lights shall dim to off if adequate daylight is present in the space. 3. Hardwired connection. 4. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 5. Light-Level Sensor Set-Point Adjustment Range: 20 to 60 fc (120 to 640 lux). 2.3 TIMER LIGHT SWITCH A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing or pre-approved equal: 1. Acuity Lighting. 2. Eaton Lighting. 3. Intermatic. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 5. Wattstopper B. Description: Combination timer and conventional switch lighting control unit. Switchbox- mounted with selectable time interval in 10 minute increments. 1. Rated 960 W at 120-V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120-V ac or 10 amps at 277-V ac for LED, and 1/4 horsepower at 120-V ac. 2. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 3. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage. 4. Color: Per Architect 5. Faceplate: Color matched to switch. 2.4 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by on e of the follow- ing or pre-approved equal: 1. Acuity Lighting. 2. Eaton Lighting. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 4. Wattstopper 5. Douglas Lighting Controls. B. Description: Complying with UL 924. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 09 23 October 20, 2021 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 09 23 - 4 2.5 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing or pre-approved equal: 1. Acuity Lighting. 2. Eaton Lighting. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 4. Wattstopper 5. Douglas Lighting Controls. B. Complying with UL 924 as required. C. Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices. D. Comply with UL 916. E. Surge Protective Device: Factory installed as an integral part of control components or field- mounted surge suppressors complying with UL 1449, SPD Type 2. F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. G. Performance Requirements: 1. Seismic Performance: Lighting control panels shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according the requirements of Code, the local AHJ and the Structural Engineer. 2. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event. H. Description: Standalone lighting control panel using relays to control lighting and appliances. 1. A single enclosure with incoming lighting branch circuits, control circuits, switching relays, and on-board timing and control unit. 2. A vertical barrier separating branch circuits from control wiring. I. Control Unit: Contain the power supply and electronic control for operating and monitoring indi- vidual relays. J. Timing Unit: 1. 365-day calendar, astronomical clock, and automatic adjustments for dayligh t savings and leap year. 2. Clock configurable for 12-hour (A.M./P.M.) or 24-hour format. 3. Schedule periods settable to the minute. 4. Be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. 5. Day-of-week, day-of-month, day-of-year with one-time or repeating capability. 6. Includes an automatic holiday “shut-ff” feature which turns off all controlled loads for at least 24-hours and then resumes normally scheduled operations. 7. Have program back-up capabilities which prevent the loss of program and time settings for at least 10 hours if power is interrupted. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 09 23 October 20, 2021 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 09 23 - 5 K. Nonvolatile memory shall retain all setup configurations. After a power failure, the controller shall automatically reboot and return to normal system operation, including accurate time of day and date. L. Power Supply: NFPA 70, Class 2, sized for connected equipment, plus 20 percent spare ca- pacity. Powered from a dedicated branch circuit of the panelboard that supplies power to the line side of the relays, sized to provide control power for the local panel-mounted relays, bus system, low-voltage inputs, field-installed occupancy sensors, and photo sensors. M. MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES 1. Match color and style specified in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices.” 2. Wall Plates: Single and multigang plates as specified in Section 262726 "Wiring Devic- es." 3. See lighting plans for additional information and requirements. N. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." O. See lighting plans for additional information and requirements. 2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No.18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Con- ductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be in- stalled. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 09 23 October 20, 2021 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 09 23 - 6 3.2 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that pene- trates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detec- tors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies. C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas indi- cated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure - borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. 3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junc- tion, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.5 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install panels and accessories according to NECA 407. C. Mount panel cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. D. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 09 23 October 20, 2021 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 09 23 - 7 B. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." C. Lighting Control Panel Schedule: Create a directory to indicate loads served by each relay; in- corporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a PC or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are unacceptable. D. Lighting Control Panel Nameplates: Label each panel with a nameplate complying with re- quirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems.” E. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Lighting control panel and lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Confirm correct communications wiring and program the lighting control system accord- ing to approved configuration schedules, time-of-day schedules, and input override as- signments. 3.9 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Comple- tion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit ac tual occupied con- ditions. Provide up to one visit to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this pur- pose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations. 2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's opera- tions. 3.10 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include soft- ware support for two years. B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and pro- gram software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Com- Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 09 23 October 20, 2021 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 09 23 - 8 pletion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for us- ing software. 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 1 SECTION 26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 3. Accessory components and features. 4. Identification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each switchboard, overcurrent protective device, surge protection de- vice, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component. 1. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective de- vices. 5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical in- sulation and isolation. 6. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company. 7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcur- rent protective devices and auxiliary components. 9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 10. Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus. 11. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 2 C. Delegated Design Submittal: 1. For short circuit/ fault current calculations and arc -flash hazard analysis. 2. For arc-flash labels. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 4. Certification: Indicate that equipment meets Project seismic requirements. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emer- gency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Da- ta," include the following: a. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. c. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent pro- tective device. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in deliv- ery path. B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and [install temporary electric heating (250 W per section)] [connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service] to prevent condensation. C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400. D. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of ship- ment. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place. B. Environmental Limitations: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 3 1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the con- struction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m). 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construc- tion that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboard enclo- sures, buswork, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and factory installed inter- connection wiring that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions deter- mined according to Code and the local AHJ requirements and as per the Structural Engineer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. Shake-table testing shall comply with ICC- ES AC156. 2. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.2 RATINGS A. The switchboard assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short- circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current of 65,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage (as indicated on the drawings). Contractor to con- firm available fault current with utility provid er based on final utility service design. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 4 2.3 SWITCHBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. ABB EPIS (formerly General Electric). 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and ac- cessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switch- boards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA PB 2. F. Comply with NFPA 70. G. Comply with UL 891. H. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards: 1. Main Devices: Panel mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned. I. Nominal System Voltage: See electrical single-line diagram. J. Main-Bus Continuous: See electrical single-line diagram. K. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. Shake-table testing shall comply with ICC- ES AC156. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." L. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1. M. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. N. Service Entrance Rating: Switchboards intended for use as service entrance equipment shall contain from one to six service disconnecting means with overcurrent protection, a neutral bus with disconnecting link, a grounding electrode conductor terminal, and a main bonding jumper. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 5 O. Utility Metering Compartment: Meet all requirements of the local power utility company. Bus work shall include provisions for mounting utility company current transformers as required by the utility company. Provide service entrance label and provide necessary applicable service entrance features per NEC and local code requirements. P. Customer Metering 1. Where indicated on the drawings, provide a separate customer metering compartment with a front facing hinged door and include the following: 2. Current transformers for each meter. Current transformers shall be wired to shorting -type terminal blocks 3. Microprocessor-Based Metering System 4. Web-Enabled Communications a. Provide a separate compartment with a front facing hinged door as a central point of connection for all internally located communicating devices to an external Ether- net network and allow monitoring of the power infrastructure with real-time, web- enabled data. b. The compartment shall have a lockable, hinged door with a functional through -the- door RJ45 network access port. Power for the components in the compartment shall be supplied by a pre-wired, bus-connected control transformer in the com- partment that is fused and has a disconnecting means. c. The included communications components shall be a Power Xpert Ethernet Switch or Power Xpert Gateway (basis of design), or whichever is specified in Section 262713. d. The communication system network shall be Eaton type PowerXpert Architecture (basis of design). 5. Refer to specification section 26 27 13 for additional metering requirements. Q. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard. R. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compart- ments. S. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide phase bus arrangement A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom, and left to right when viewed from the front of the switchboard. 2. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum al- loy with tin-plated aluminum circuit-breaker line connections. 3. Tin-plated aluminum feeder circuit-breaker line connections. 4. Ground Bus: Minimum-size required by UL 891, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent con- ductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground con- ductors. 5. Main-Phase Buses and Equipment-Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. 6. Disconnect Links: a. Isolate neutral bus from incoming neutral conductors. b. Bond neutral bus to equipment-ground bus for switchboards utilized as service equipment or separately derived systems. 7. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 6 T. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment. 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip set- ting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long and short time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared t response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. 6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 7. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault pro- tection (30-mA trip). 8. MCCB Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. 2.5 INSTRUMENTATION A. Instrument Transformers: NEMA EI 21.1, and the following: 1. Current Transformers: Provide utility metering infrastructure and devices per power utility requirements. 2.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400 AND NEMA PB 2.1. 1. Lift or move switchboards with manufacturer-supplied lifting straps following manufactur- er's instructions. 2. Use rollers, slings, or other manufacturer-approved methods if lifting straps are not fur- nished. 3. Protect from moisture, dust, dirt, and debris during storage and installation. 4. Install temporary heating during storage per manufacturer's instructions. B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation toler- ances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work or that affect the performance of the equipment. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400 AND NEMA PB 2.1. B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thick- ness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install conduits entering underneath the switchboard, entering under the vertical section where the conductors will terminate. Install with couplings flush with the concrete base. Extend 2 inches (50-mm) above concrete base after switchboard is anchored in place. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, in- structions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards. 6. Anchor switchboard to building structure at the top of the switchboard if required or rec- ommended by the manufacturer. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, straps and brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components. D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260500. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections. F. Install overcurrent protective devices, surge protection devices, and instrumentation. 1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 8 G. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Section 262500 "Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties. B. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings, and spe- cialties. C. Bond conduits entering underneath the switchboard to the equipment ground bus with a bond- ing conductor sized per NFPA 70. D. Support and secure conductors within the switchboard according to NFPA 70. E. Extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Sys- tems." C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each me- ter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with re- quirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site where possible, and retest to demonstrate compli- ance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and mal- functioning controls and equipment. C. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards in- cluded and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 13 October 20, 2021 SWITCHBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 13 - 9 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recom- mended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges per project requirements. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchbo ards, overcur- rent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 1 SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load Centers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection. C. HID: High-intensity discharge. D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. E. SPD: Surge protective device. F. VPR: Voltage protection rating. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard. 1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and components indicated. 2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electri- cal characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes, equipment features, and ratings. 3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks. 4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard. 8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent pro- tective devices and auxiliary components. 9. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 2 10. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations. C. Delegated Design Submittal: 1. For short circuit/ fault current study and arc -flash hazard analysis. 2. For arc-flash labels 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Opera- tion and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devic- es. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective cov- ering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation if required. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 3 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in ma- terials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Panelboard Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. ABB EPIS (formerly General Electric). 2. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panel- boards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. G. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Height: 84 inches (2.13 m) maximum. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware. 4. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. H. Incoming Mains: 1. Location: Per Contractor. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 4 2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main breaker. I. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. a. Plating shall run entire length of bus. b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length. 2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devic- es shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors. 3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance applica- tions. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in gutter. 5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard. 6. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. J. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. K. NRTL Label: Where indicated on the single-line diagram as service entrance rated, equipment shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent prote ctive devices. L. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Series rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit cur- rent available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity. 1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short- circuit ratings as required by the Contractor’s Short Circuit Study or 10,000 A rms sym- metrical, whichever is greater. 2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as required by the Contractor’s Short Circuit Study or 14,000 A rms symmetrical, whichever is greater. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions deter- mined according to local AHJ requirements and the Project Structural Engineer. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will remain operational." 2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 5 B. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as indicated on drawings. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device re- quires mechanical release for removal. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device re- quires mechanical release for removal. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. B. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as indicated on drawings. C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. D. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with tum- bler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and bus shall remain concealed. 2.5 LOAD CENTERS A. Load Centers: Comply with UL 67. B. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as indicated on drawings. C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. D. Doors: Concealed hinges secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. E. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses. 2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 6 a. RMS sensing. b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip. c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays. d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data. e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and magnitude of fault that caused the trip. f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer. g. Field-Adjustable Settings: 1) Instantaneous trip. 2) Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3) Long and short time adjustments. 4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single- pole configuration. 8. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted. 9. MCCB Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status. c. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor mate- rials. d. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting circuits. e. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. f. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing with a single handle or factory assem- bled to operate as a single unit. g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door. B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating. C. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with transparent plastic protective cover. 1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguis h it from all other circuits. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 7 2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70. B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407 C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation. D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation toler- ances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407. D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard. 2. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices as required by the local AHJ and Project Structural Engineer. E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and tem- porary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. F. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements as required by the local AHJ and Project Structural Engineer. G. Mount such that the top-most circuit breaker is not higher than 79-inches above finished floor as required by Code. H. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 8 I. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports1 1/4 inch (32 mm) in depth. Ori- ent steel slotted supports vertically. J. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. 2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions. K. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate groun ds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars. L. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designa- tions. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install direc- tory inside panelboard door. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air cir- cuit breakers stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6 Circuit Breakers. Do not perform op- tional tests. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compli- ance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recom- mended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain tempera- ture according to manufacturer's written instructions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 24 16 October 20, 2021 PANELBOARDS Project #16-0996 26 24 16 - 9 END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 13 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICITY METERING Project #16-0996 26 27 13 - 1 SECTION 26 27 13 – ELECTRICITY METERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes work to accommodate utility company revenue meters . 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For metering infrastructure components. B. Shop Drawings: For electricity-metering equipment. 1. Include elevation views of front panels of control and indicating devices and control sta- tions. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Wire Termination Diagrams and Schedules: Include diagrams for power, signal, and con- trol wiring. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color -codes to facilitate installa- tion, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 4. Include series-combination rating data for modular meter centers with main disconnect device. 5. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communica- tion paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Application and operating software documentation. 2. Device address list. 3. Hard copies of manufacturer's operating specifications, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on a USB storage device of hard-copy Submittal. 4. Meter data sheet for each meter, listing nameplate data and serial number, accuracy cer- tification, and test results. 5. Meter installation and billing software startup report. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 13 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICITY METERING Project #16-0996 26 27 13 - 2 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arrang- ing to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Owner and Architect shall be notified and issued written permission no fewer than twenty working days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metering equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Damage from transient voltage surges. 2. Warranty Period: Cost to repair or replace any parts for two years from date of Substan- tial Completion. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with utility companies and utility -furnished compo- nents. 1. Comply with requirements of utility providing electrical power services. 2. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 916. 2.2 UTILITY METERING INFRASTRUCTURE A. Install metering accessories required by the utility company, complying with its requirements. B. Utility-Furnished Meters: Connect data transmission facility of meteri ng equipment installed by the Utility: C. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company. D. Meter Sockets: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 13 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICITY METERING Project #16-0996 26 27 13 - 3 1. Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company. 2. Meter Sockets: Steady-state and short-circuit current ratings shall meet indicated circuit ratings. E. Arc-Flash Warning Labels: 1. Labels: Comply with requirements for "Arc-Flash Warning Labels" in Section 260573 and Code and AHJ requirements. Apply a 3-1/2-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis 2.3 MICROPROCESSOR-BASED METERING EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers 1. Eaton Products 2. Alternate manufacturers will be considered if comparable product specifications are sub- mitted for pre-approval to engineer 14 days prior to bid day. B. Where shown on drawings provide a UL listed microprocessor Multi-Point Metering System. (Basis of design is Eaton type PX Multipoint meter). System shall consist of current sensors, meter base and meter modules as described below: 1. System shall be capable of monitoring 60 single-phase two-wire ac loads,30 single-phase three-wire as loads, or 20 three-phase four-wire ac loads or any combination thereof by use of current sensors. 2. Primary Multi-point Meter to have digital display capable of providing system information, programing set-up, module information, and the following main meter menu screens: a. System Meter Screen providing: 1) Current per phase and average for A, B, and C 2) Volts: L-L and L-N 3) Power, Power Factor and Frequency 4) Power per phase 5) Demand 6) Peak Demand and Timestamp 7) Energy b. Sub Meter Screen providing: 1) Configuration 2) Power, Power Factor and Frequency 3) Demand 4) Peak Demand and Timestamp 5) Energy c. Events Screen providing: latest 20 events with date and timesta mps. 3. All connections to the metering system shall be through removable plugs. 4. The device shall be capable of accepting input from current sensors be connecting with factory installed plug connectors. 5. The device shall automatically sense the rating of the current sensor. 6. The meter system shall be available to accept service type rating from 120-600 Vac volt- age rating. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 13 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICITY METERING Project #16-0996 26 27 13 - 4 7. The device shall calculate power and energy consumption in accordance with ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) metering specification and stored in non-volatile memory. 8. The device shall store the following per phase and system total for each metering point: a. Voltage, Current, and Frequency (system total only) b. Real Power in Watts, Reactive power in Var, Apparent energy in VA, and power factor c. Real Energy in Watt hours including forward & reverse, Reactive energy in Var hours in Q1-Q4, Apparent Energy in VA hours in Q1/Q4, Q2/Q3. 9. The MPM shall store energy profile information for each metering point in non-volatile memory. The demand profile time period shall be adjustable from 1, 5, 15, 30 and 60 minutes for fixed method and 1, 5, and 15 minutes for sliding method. The MPM shall have the ability to sync with external input to the on board demand input. The MPM shall be able to save a minimum of 1 year of load profile data for all 60 meter points on a 15 minutes basis 10. The device shall be suitable for mounting within a panelboard or switchboard and may al- so be mounted in a separate enclosure. 11. The metering devices and system shall be UL and cUL listed. 12. Current sensors shall be provided with a toroidal winding over solid core. Sensors shall be suitable for use with circuits rated 125A through 400A. Current Sensors shall have 600V rated cable insulation and shall be UL listed with the metering system. 13. Communication and Connectivity: a. The system shall have two Modbus RTU ports. Devices shall communicate at their maximum baud rate regardless of the number of devices on the network. b. The system shall be provided with multiple communications ports and protocols in- cluding the following capability: 1) RS-485 remote display port 2) RS-485 Modbus RTU 3) USB Local Configuration Port 4) HTML web pages 5) File Transfer Protocol (ftp) 6) RJ-45 10/100Base-T Ethernet Network port 7) Modbus TCP 8) BACnet/IP 9) SMTP for email support 10) SNMP MIB support 11) Ethernet TCP/IP 12) NTP support. 14. The Web server shall provide the user with remote WEB access to all the metered and trend information with the optional Energy Portal Module. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1. B. Install utility meter sockets, modular meter centers, raceways and equipment according to utility company's written instructions. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend ground- ing connections as required by utility company. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 13 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICITY METERING Project #16-0996 26 27 13 - 5 C. Install arc-flash labels as required by NFPA 70. D. Wiring Method: 1. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 2. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm). E. Install Microprocessor-based meters per manufacturers specifications. Confirm load metering scheme with engineer and owner prior to meter order and install. 1. Coordinate with Mechanical Controls Contractor for cabling connections and program- ming of energy use dashboard within building DDC controls. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Elec- trical Systems." 1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self-adhesive labels, with text as required by NFPA 70. 2. Equipment Identification Labels: Self-adhesive labels with clear protective overlay. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Equipment and Software Setup: a. Set meter date and time clock. b. Test, calibrate, and connect pulse metering system. 2. Connect a load of known kilowatt rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by me- tered feeder. 3. Turn off circuits supplied by metered feeder and secure them in off condition. 4. Run test load continuously for eight hours minimum, or longer, to obtain a measurable meter indication. Use test-load placement and setting that ensures continuous, safe op- eration. 5. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity used, based on test-load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply voltage at test-load connection. Record test results. C. Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 13 October 20, 2021 ELECTRICITY METERING Project #16-0996 26 27 13 - 6 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to use, adjust, operate, and maintain the electronic metering system. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 26 October 20, 2021 WIRING DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 16 – WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 3. Tamper-resistant standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 15 A. 4. Tamper-resistant GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 15 A. 5. Twist-locking receptacles. 6. Pendant cord-connector devices. 7. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 8. Decorator-style devices, 20 A. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing- label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, for the following Sections provide products from one of the following: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices: Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Incorporated. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. B. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. RoHS compliant. E. Comply with NEMA WD 1. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 26 October 20, 2021 WIRING DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 27 26 - 2 F. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted un- der the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section. G. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment: 1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. H. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to 702 (Optional Standby) Power System: Red unless other- wise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing I. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, as selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or re- quired by NFPA 70 or device listing. J. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 15 AND 20 A A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. B. Tamper-Resistant Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A 1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Recepta- cles" Article. C. Hospital-Grade Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel- plated, brass mounting strap. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd and FS W-C-596. 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article. D. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A 1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 26 October 20, 2021 WIRING DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 27 26 - 3 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" Article. 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 15 AND 20 A A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Type: Feed through as allowed by Code and project requirements. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. B. Tamper-Resistant Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A 1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is in- serted in the receptacle. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Type: Feed through as allowed by Code and project requirements. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Recepta- cles" Article. C. GFCI, Hospital-Grade Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is in- serted in the receptacle. Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding sys- tem. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Type: Non-feed through. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article. D. Tamper- and Weather-Resistant, GFCI Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A 1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is in- serted in the receptacle. Square face. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Type: Non-feed through. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and UL 943 Class A. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Recepta- cles" and "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" articles. 2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, See Power Plans for Configuration. B. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, for the following Secti ons provide products from one of the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 26 October 20, 2021 WIRING DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 27 26 - 4 1. Cooper Wiring Devices: Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Incorporated. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. B. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. C. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A 1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. D. Lighted Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A 1. Description: Handle illuminated when switch is off. 2. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. 2.6 DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES, 15 A A. Decorator, Tamper-Resistant, Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A 1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Recepta- cles" Article. B. Decorator, Tamper-Resistant, GFCI- Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A 1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is in- serted in the receptacle. Square face. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Type: Feed through as allowed by Code and project requirements. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Recepta- cles" Article. C. Decorator Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A 1. Comply with UL 20. D. Decorator Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A 1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indi- cated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 26 October 20, 2021 WIRING DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 27 26 - 5 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against out- side of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and ca- bles. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall . 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Arti- cle 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were in- stalled before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold de- vice-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount out- let boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi- gang wall plates. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 27 26 October 20, 2021 WIRING DEVICES Project #16-0996 26 27 26 - 6 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. All receptacles requiring GFCI-protection per Code and AHJ requirements shall be GFCI-type (i.e. upstream GFCI receptacles shall not be used to provide GFCI protection for downstream non-GFCI devices). 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests for Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. 7. Test straight-blade convenience outlets in patient-care areas for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g). B. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 28 13 October 20, 2021 FUSES AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Project #16-0996 26 28 13 - 1 SECTION 26 28 13 – FUSES AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Cartridge Fuses. 3. Nonfusible switches. 4. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 5. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component in- dicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufactur- ers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent pro- tective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 28 13 October 20, 2021 FUSES AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Project #16-0996 26 28 13 - 2 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," in- clude the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following condi- tions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceed- ing 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m). 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to Code. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective de- vices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 28 13 October 20, 2021 FUSES AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Project #16-0996 26 28 13 - 3 B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 2.3 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. ABB. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. F. Accessories: Provide accessories as required for specific installation/usage . 2.4 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. B. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. 2.5 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. ABB. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 28 13 October 20, 2021 FUSES AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Project #16-0996 26 28 13 - 4 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and in- terlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and in- terlocked with cover in closed position. D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and in- terlocked with cover in closed position. E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and in- terlocked with cover in closed position. F. Accessories: Provide accessories as required for specific installation/usage. 2.6 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- ing: 1. ABB. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable volt- age systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. Any series rated combination used shall be marked on the end-use equipment along with the statement "Caution - Series Rated System. _____ Amps Available. Identical Replace- ment Component Required." D. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position. E. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. F. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level over- loads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. G. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field- adjustable trip setting. H. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 28 13 October 20, 2021 FUSES AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Project #16-0996 26 28 13 - 5 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I-squared t response. I. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. J. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse com- partment door. K. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). L. Ground-Fault Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protec- tion (30-mA trip). M. Features and Accessories: Provide features/accessories as required for specific installa- tion/usage. Including but not limited to: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent light- ing loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay set- tings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero- sequence current transformer/sensor. 5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. 6. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 2.7 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to com- ply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compli- ance with installation tolerances and other cond itions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 28 13 October 20, 2021 FUSES AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Project #16-0996 26 28 13 - 6 1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than fifteen working days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written p ermission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearanc- es for equipment access doors and panels. B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warn- ing signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections for Switches: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean. d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Verify correct phase barrier installation. h. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 28 13 October 20, 2021 FUSES AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Project #16-0996 26 28 13 - 7 C. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean. e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. f. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compli- ance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recom- mended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. C. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to recommended settings provided by the coordination study (see Specification Section 26 05 73). Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division of equipment manufacturer under the "Startup and Ac- ceptance Testing" contract portion. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 1 SECTION 26 51 19 – INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior and exterior luminaires, exit signs, and emergency lighting inverters. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. H. Uninterruptible: As used in the Section Text, an on-line, double-conversion (rectifier/inverter) unit, with no interruption of power to the load on interruption and restoratio n of the "normal" source. I. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. J. VRLA: Valve-regulated lead acid. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 2 4. Include emergency lighting inverters, including batteries and chargers. a. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, ship- ping and operating weights, shipping splits, and furnished options, specialties, and accessories 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 6. For each pole, accessory: a. Include data on construction details, profiles, EPA, cable entrances, materials, di- mensions, weight, rated design load, and ultimate strength of individual compo- nents. b. Include finishes for lighting poles and luminaire-supporting devices. c. Anchor bolts. d. Manufactured pole foundations. 7. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES "Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides" for each luminaire type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's labora- tory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accredita- tion Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining lumi- naires shall be certified by manufacturer. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Shop Drawings: For each type and rating of emergency lighting inverter unit: 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, ventilation requirements, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include system one-line diagram, internal and interconnecting wiring; and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Include elevation, details, and legends of control and indication displays. 5. Include -circuit current (withstand) rating of unit. D. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems and emergency lighting inverters to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 3 1. Provide a list of all luminaires and lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufac- turers' codes. 2. Copies of all Manufacturers’ Warranties. 3. For Emergency Lighting Inverters: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing central battery equipment. b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming mi- croprocessor control modules. c. Manufacturer's written instructions for selecting and setting field-adjustable con- trols and status and alarm points 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. B. Source Limitations: For poles, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of pole from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physi- cal properties. C. Date of Battery Manufacture: Batteries used in emergency lighting inverters shall have been manufactured no more than one month prior to delivery to the job site. Upon delivery of the emergency lighting inverters, the Contractor shall check the date on all batteries to confirm this is the case. All batteries older than one month shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. D. All materials of the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, high grade, free from all defects and shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory testing. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver emergency lighting inverter equipment in fully enclosed vehicles. Store equipment in spaces having environments controlled within manufacturers' written instructions for ambient temperature and humidity conditions for non-operating equipment. B. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering be- fore shipping. C. Store poles on decay-resistant skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. D. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps. E. Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole surface more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed be- low finished grade. F. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for central bat- tery equipment, including clearances between central battery equipment and adjacent surfaces and other items. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 4 1.9 WARRANTY A. LUMINAIRES 1. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 2. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Corrosion Resistance: Five years from date of Substantial Comple- tion. 4. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion B. EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS 1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace central battery equipment that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Special warranty, ap- plying to batteries only, applies to materials only, on a prorated basis, for period speci- fied. 2. Warranty Period: Include the following warranty periods, from date of Substantial Com- pletion: a. UPS Module (excluding Batteries): Two year(s) from date of Substantial Comple- tion. Contractor shall provide factory start-up. b. Standard VRLA Batteries: The battery manufacturer’s standard warranty shall be passed through to the end user. 1) Sealed Lead Calcium VRLA, 10-year life expectancy – one-year full re- placement warranty plus an additional nine years pro-rata. 2) Batteries used in emergency lighting inverters shall have been manufac- tured no more than one month prior to delivery to the job site. Upon delivery of the emergency lighting inverters, the Contractor shall check the date on all batteries to confirm this is the case. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: 1. Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to the requirements of the local AHJ and the Project Structural Engineer. 2. Foundation and pole shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined ac- cording to ASCE/SEI 7, the requirements of the local AHJ and the Project Structural En- gineer. 3. Seismic Performance: Emergency lighting inverter equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. Emergency lighting inverter equipment shall be tested and certified by an NRTL as meeting ICC-ES AC 156 test pro- cedure requirements. 4. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event. B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting require- ments. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 5 2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. c. CCT and CRI. C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4. D. See Luminaire Schedule in Contract Drawing Set for Luminaire Requirements for each Lumi- naire Type, Basis of Design manufacturers, Approved Alternate Manufacturers, etc. 2.3 POLE REQUIREMENTS A. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and se- curely fastened to pole top. B. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with require- ments in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size indicated, and accessible through handhole. C. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, size and type as determined by manufacturer. Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Compatible with poles and standards as well as to substrates to which poles and standards are fastened and shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrica- tion unless otherwise indicated. D. Handhole: Oval shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches (65 by 130 mm), with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws 2.4 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Steel: 1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel. 2. ASTM A568/A568M for sheet steel. C. Stainless Steel: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 6 1. Manufacturer's standard grade. 2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/240M. D. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M. E. Aluminum: ASTM B209. 2.5 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT A. Comply with requirements in Section 260500 for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetal- lic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. C. Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm) or as required by Structural Engineer and local AHJ, whichever is larger. D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTER UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliances with project requirements, provide equipment by one of the following: 1. Dual Lite; Hubbell Lighting, Inc. 2. Myers Power Products. 3. Power Sentry; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 4. Sure-Lites; Cooper Lighting. B. General Requirements: 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica- tion. 2. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label central battery equipment to comply with UL 924. 3. Comply with the IBC, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. 4. Comply with NEMA PE 1. 5. See project drawings for Input and Output voltage requirements. 6. The output load capacity of the UPS shall be rated in kVA at unity power factor. The UPS shall be able to supply the rated kW from 0.5 lagging to 0.5 leading. See project draw- ings for kVA ratings for units. 7. The UPS shall be provided with sealed, valve regulated, lead acid batteries. 8. The battery system shall be sized to provide the necessary reserve time to feed the in- verter in cased of a mains failure. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 7 9. The battery charger shall recharge the sully discharged batteries within a 24-hour period. The charger shall be temperature compensating. C. Performance Requirements for UPS-Type Emergency Lighting Inverter Equipment: 1. Continuously provide uninterrupted ac power to connected emergency electrical lighting system. 2. Automatic Operation: a. Normal Conditions: The UPS Inverter is a line interactive standby system and the commercial AC power continuously supplies the critical load. The input converter (bi-directional transformer) derives power from the commercial AC power source and supplies to the inverter while simultaneously providing floating charge to the batteries. b. DC Filter: The charger shall have an output filter to minimize AC ripple voltage into the battery. c. Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 2% RMS. d. Upon failure of the commercial AC power the inverter instantaneously with a max- imum of a 2-millisecond break, switches its power supply from the input converter to the battery system. There shall be no loss of power to the critical load upon the failure or restoration of the utility source. e. Upon restoration of commercial AC power after a power outage, the input convert- er shall automatically restart and start charging the batteries. The critical loads are powered by the commercial AC power again. f. If any element in the inverter string fails and power is available at normal supply terminals of system, static transfer switch transfers the load to normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption of supply. g. If a fault occurs in system supplied by the inverter output, and current flows in ex- cess of the overload rating of the inverter, static transfer switch operates to bypass fault current to normal ac supply circuit for fault clearing. h. The charger is equipped with a DC over-voltage protection circuit so that if the DC voltage rises above the pre-set limit, the charger shuts down automatically and ini- tiates an alarm condition. i. When fault has cleared, static transfer switch returns the load to inverter output. j. If battery is disconnected, inverter continues to supply power to the load with n o degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of output bus. k. Automatic Re-Start: Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage and after a full UPS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the UPS will au- tomatically restart, performing the normal UPS start up. 3. Unit Operating Requirements: a. Unit is to be 98% efficient. b. Unit shall be provided with NFPA 101 self testing and data logging. c. AC Input to UPS: 1) Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of central battery equipment input voltage rating. 2) Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of central battery equipment frequency rating. 3) Inrush current: 1.25 times nominal input current, 10 times 1 line cycle for in- candescent loads 4) Current Limit: 125% of nominal input current 5) Current Distortion: 10% THD maximum from 50% to full load Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 8 6) Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per standards set in UL 924. d. AC Output, UPS Inverter: 1) Static Voltage Stability: Load current changes +/- 2%, battery discharge +/- 12.5% 2) Dynamic Voltage Stability: +/- 2% (25% step load), +/- 3% (50% step load) 3) Dynamic recovery time to within 1% of nominal: 3 cycles (0-100% load step) 4) Output Harmonic Distortion: < 3% (with linear load) 5) Frequency: 60 Hz (+/- .05Hz during emergency mode) 6) Load Power Factor Range: 0.5 lagging to 0.5 leading 7) Output Power Rating: kVA = kW 8) Overload Capability a) to 100% continuous rating b) to 115% for 10 minutes c) to 150% for 16 line cycles 9) Efficiency: 98% e. Operating Temperatures: Not less than 32 deg F (0 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (30 deg C); UL rating 68 deg F to 86 deg F (20 deg C to 30 deg C). f. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating (Other Than Batteries): Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 158 deg F ((70 deg C).) g. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating (Batteries): Not less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). h. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). i. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet (1005 m). j. Maximum Acoustical Noise: 45 dBA @ 1 meter from surface of the UPS during Normal Mode. k. Maintenance Bypass Switch: Internally mounted in the system and permits maintenance personnel to easily bypass the protected equipment directly to the AC utility power. The make before break switch isolates the system to perform routine maintenance or servicing. 4. Monitoring and Control a. The UPS system provides operation monitoring and control, audible alarms, and diagnostics. The front-mounted control panel includes a 4-line by 20-character vacuum fluorescent display and a keypad for user interface. The display will be menu driven. The system will have a continuous scrolling display of the following: Date & time, System Status (AC Status, Battery Status, Charger Status) and any system faults. Monitoring and control are microprocessor-based for accuracy and reliability. To ensure only authorized personnel can operate the unit, the system is multi-level password protected for all control functions and parameter changes. 5. Metering Functions: Display UPS equipment metering parameters including, but not lim- ited to, the following: a. Utility input voltage b. System output voltage c. Battery voltage d. Battery current Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 9 e. System output current f. System output VA g. Inverter wattage h. System temperature i. Date & time j. System Days 6. Audible Alarm: An audible alarm will activate with any of the following conditions. The unit will automatically store the 75 most recent events: a. High battery charger voltage b. Charger Fault c. High AC input voltage d. Low AC input voltage e. Near low battery voltage f. Low battery voltage g. Load reduction fault h. High Ambient temperature i. Inverter fault j. Output fault k. Output overload l. Output Overload shutdown. 7. Testing: The system shall incorporate a manual test function and two automatic test modes. The system will perform a programmable, self-diagnostic monthly test for 5 minutes, which is preset, for the 15th of every month and the user can program the event day and time. The yearly self-diagnostic test is for 90 minutes and the user can program the day and time the event is to take place. The microprocessor automatically records the last 75 test events in its own separate test result log. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, surfaces, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, structural support and other conditions affecting per- formance of the Work. 1. For Emergency Lighting Inverters, Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for envi- ronmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment will be installed, before installation begins. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connec- tions before luminaire installation. C. Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 10 3.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTER INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of central battery eq uipment with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Install emergency lighting inverter equipment and accessories according to NECA 411, Code and manufacturer’s instructions. C. Wall-Mounted emergency lighting inverter equipment: Install central battery equipment on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches (2000 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For units not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Sys- tems." D. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and tem- porary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. F. Comply with NECA 1. G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceway in accessible ceilings and walls where possible. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.” H. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distri- bution spools. I. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated. J. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Sys- tems." K. Identify emergency lighting inverter equipment, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems.” 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warn- ing signs. 2. Label central battery equipment with engraved nameplates. 3. Label each separate cabinet, for multicabinet units. 3.4 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Supports: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 11 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 per- cent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. D. Flush-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumfer- ence of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. E. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Attached to structural members in walls or as per Manufacturer’s Instructions and Struc- tural Engineer’s requirements. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. F. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. G. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections. 3.5 POLE AND BOLLARD FOUNDATIONS A. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Struc- tural steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Pre-Cast Foundations: Factory fabricated, with structural steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Con- crete." C. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole-base flange and strength required to sup- port pole, luminaire, and accessories. 1. Baseplate: Stamped with manufacturer's name, date of production, and cable entry. D. Direct-Buried Foundations: Install to depth required by Structural Engineer. Add backfill as re- quired by Structural Engineer, tamping each layer before adding the next. To ensure a plumb installation, continuously check pole orientation with plumb bob while tamping. E. Anchor Bolts: Install plumb using manufacturer-supplied template, uniformly spaced. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 12 3.6 POLE INSTALLATION A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on pole. B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and un- derground features unless otherwise indicated on drawing or required by the Utilities, Code or the AHJ. 1. Fire Hydrants and Water Piping: 60 inches (1520 mm) 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communications, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet (3 m) 3. Trees: 15 feet (5 m) from tree trunk C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level according to pole manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. 2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space. 3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2 -inch (13-mm) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole E. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete-Paved Areas: Install poles with a minimum 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of the adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel. Insert material to a level 1 inch (25 mm) below top of concrete slab. F. Raise and set pole using web fabric slings (not cha in or cable) at locations indicated by manu- facturer. 3.7 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum using insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electri- cal Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe- wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50-percent overlap. 3.8 GROUNDING A. Ground Metal Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding sys- tem. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 13 B. Ground Nonmetallic Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Sec- tion 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundation. 3.9 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identi- fication specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.10 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTER START-UP AND TESTING A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled central battery equipment, by a qualified testing agency, according to UL 924. Affix standards organization's label. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: The Contractor shall engage an authorized Manufa cturer’s Field Service Representative to start-up and test all emergency lighting inverters. 1. The authorized Manufacturer’s Field Service Representative shall complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and sh all provide site testing of all emergency lighting inverters. 2. Site testing shall consist of a complete test of the UPS and accessories by the UPS man- ufacturer in accordance with manufacturer’s standards. 3. Test and inspect central battery equipment according to UL 924. 4. Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installations. Test and adjust components and equipment. 5. Test continuity of each circuit. 6. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and mal- functioning controls and equipment. 7. Set the automatic system test parameters. C. Emergency Lighting Inverters equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 3.11 LUMINAIRE FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electri- cal circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. 3. Inspect poles for nicks, mars, dents, scratches, and other damage. B. Luminaires will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.12 PROTECTIONS A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 26 51 19 October 20, 2021 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING Project #16-0996 26 51 19 - 14 B. Replace central battery equipment whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.13 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain emergency lighting inverter equipment, and to use and repro- gram microprocessor-based control, monitoring, and display functions. 3.14 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied condi- tions. Make up to one visit to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness. 1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace luminaires that are defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 1 SECTION 27 00 00 – LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and Division 01 - General Requirements for all work in Division 26. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Design Intent: The project includes Electrical, Fire Alarm and Low Voltage systems for the Family First Community Center project in Renton, Washington. 1. See Architectural plans and specifications for additional information. B. All Fire Alarm and Low Voltage Systems are Design-Build; Contract Documents (drawings and specifications) are meant to provide information (scope, performance requirements, preliminary quantities and locations, etc) for Bidding by Design-Build Contractors only. 1. All final quantities and locations of equipment and devices shall be coordinated with the Fire Marshal/ Local AHJ (as applicable), Architect and Owner prior to the start of construction. 2. The Design-Build Contractors shall design, provide and install complete and fully operational and coordinated Fire Alarm and Low Voltage systems that meet all requirements of the Owner, Fire Marshal/ local AHJ and as per the Project Contract Documents. 3. Fire Alarm and Low Voltage Systems: The Following Systems are to be included in the Project: a. Telecommunications systems. b. CATV system. c. WIFI systems. d. CCTV system e. Access Control / Security System. f. Fire Alarm System. 4. Fire Alarm Systems: a. Fire Alarm Systems shall be Design-Build. See Specification Sections 28 46 00 and the Contract Drawings for system performance requirements for bidding by the Fire Alarm Design-Build Contractor. 5. See Specification Section 26 00 00 for additional information and requirements. C. The Contractors shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and devices, supports, etc necessary for satisfactory installation of fire alarm and low voltage work ready to operate in strict accordance with Code requirements and these s pecifications and drawings. D. Related Sections: All Division 01, 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections included in the Contract Documents. E. Commissioning Activities and Submittals: The Project shall be commissione d per Energy Code requirements. The Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor, Architect and Commissioning Agent and provide support for the complete commissioning process as required. See Divisions 01, 26, 27 and 28 for additional information. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 2 1.3 SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS A. All cabling, switches, equipment, devices, supports, etc (wall-mounted racks, patch panels, patch cables, terminations, etc) required for complete and fully operational systems are to be provided by the Low Voltage Contractor. B. TELECOM AND CATV SERVICES: 1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to confirm the desired telecom utilities for the project. For bidding purposes, assume three providers for the building (CenturyLink, Xfinity/Comcast and City of Renton Fiber Optic). 2. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s desired telecom providers to bring service to the building. 3. The Electrical Contractor shall also coordinate with any existing providers at the site to relocate and/ or remove all existing conduit and cabling in conflict with the scope of the project. 4. See Site Plan for preliminary conduit requirements and service points. Contractor to confirm final requirements and service points with utility service providers. C. TELECOM AND CATV SYSTEMS 1. The Contractor shall design, provide and install a complete and fully operational Telecom and CATV systems for the project. Coordinate exact requirements, locations and device types with the Owner. 2. The telecom equipment, devices and cabling shall meet TIA performance criteria fo r Category 6. All cabling shall be terminated with Category 6 RJ45 jacks. 3. Telecom utilities shall enter the building to the main electrical room. 4. Phone lines shall be provided for the fire alarm system as required by the Fire Marshal. 5. The Design-Build Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to confirm telecom system requirements prior to the start of design. 6. The CATV system shall consist of cable television service and a coaxial cable distribution system. a. Headend equipment shall consist of receiving equipment and associated signal distribution amplification and equalization. b. Distribution of cable television service signals, which includes coordinating with Owner's selected service provider for installation of cable to the service point ready for connection into the distribution system. Obtain signal levels and noise and distortion characteristics from service provider as the point of departure for system layout and final equipment selection. c. Cable distribution system consisting of coaxial cables, user interfaces, signal taps and splitters, RF amplifiers, signal equalizers, power supplies, and required hardware, complying with CEA-310-E and CEA-2032 and resulting in performance parameters specified in this Section. System shall be capable of distributing television channels according to CEA-542-B. 7. See preliminary systems plans for preliminary device locations and quantities. Contractor to confirm exact systems’ requirements with Owner and AHJ. 8. In addition to devices noted on the Bid Set drawings, the Design-Build Contractor shall also provide: a. Dedicated phone lines for the access control and fire alarm as required by code, local AHJ, and Fire Marshal. b. Any other devices required by Code, AHJ, and Fire Marshal. D. WIRELESS NETWORKS 1. The contractor shall provide wireless access points and all other equipment required to provide secured wireless networks throughout the building. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 3 E. BUILDING ENTRY / INTERCOM SYSTEM 1. The contractor shall design, provide and install a complete and fully operational building entry / intercom system for the project. 2. The Building Entry / Intercom System shall be an AIPHONE # LEM-1DL Series or equal as approved by the owner or tenants. 3. The Building Entry / Intercom System shall have the following functionality: a. The system is intended to provide for two-way communication between the main entry and the Reception Desk or Staff Coral area. b. The Reception Desk and Staff Coral area stations shal l be capable of remotely unlocking the front door for entry. c. The main entry door station is to have TTY capabilities as required by ADA. 4. The Contractor shall present an overview of the Intercom System and provide product information to Owner for review and comment prior to design. Contractor shall present design to Owner at least one month prior to required purchasing date (to maintain construction schedule) of equipment for final approval of system components and functionality. F. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 1. The contractor shall design, provide and install a complete and fully operational Key FOB reader-based access control system for the project. 2. The system basis of design is to be: a. Honeywell: PW-Series Modular Access Control System. b. Altronix: ACMCB Series Access Power controllers c. HID: multiclass SE fob readers and keypads 3. The system shall interconnect with the front entry/intercom system to allow the reception desk and staff coral stations to unlock the front door. 4. See preliminary systems plans for preliminary device locations and quantities . 5. The system shall support all locations indicated in the Contract Documents plus an additional 25% future capacity. G. CCTV SYSTEM 1. The contractor shall design, provide and install a complete and fully operational CCTV system for the project. Coordinate exact requirements, locations and device types with owner and tenants. 2. CCTV system basis of design to be: Avigilon H5A Camera Series, Avigilon Control Center 7 Software and Avigilon HD network video recorder (NVR’s) 3. See the Bid Set drawing set for additional information and requirements. Provide system capable of supporting cameras shown plus an additional 25% capacity in the future. 4. System is to use high-resolution color cameras with 7fps recording capabilities and NVR equipment. The Contractor is to provide and install all equipment, devices, supports, software, cameras, etc and coordinate final camera quantities with the Owner. 5. Monitors and live feeds shall be provided at the Reception Desk. Monitors to be low resolution, but the recordings are to be set at high resolution. 6. Verify video storage capacity with owner and tenants. H. SECURITY SYSTEM 1. The contractor shall design, provide and install a complete and fully operational security system for the project. Coordinate exact requirements, locations and device types with owner and tenants. 2. System Basis of Design to be: Bosch Intrusion Alarm System 3. System to include main security panel, activation keypad & siren, door contacts, motion detectors, glass break detector, etc. as needed to meet owner requirements. 4. See preliminary systems plans for preliminary device locations and quantities. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 4 5. The system shall support all locations indicated in the Contract Documents plus an additional 25% future capacity. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. All work shall meet or exceed the requirements of the current versions of all applicable Federal, State, and Local Codes and Standards including but not limited to: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) with Local Amendments. 2. Washington State Energy Code with Local Amendments. 3. International Fire Code (IFC) with Local Amendments. 4. International Building Code (IBC) with Local Amendments. 5. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with Local Amendments. 6. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with Local Amendments. 7. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 8. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) Standards and Recommended Practices. 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and Recommended Practices. 10. Applicable Standards of the following organizations (see subsequent Division 26, 27 and 28 sections for additional information): a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). c. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) d. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) e. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) f. U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) g. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) standards. 11. Utility Service Provider Requirements. 12. LEED, Version 4 1.5 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. Comply with Project Requirements to achieve LEED v4 Silver Certification. B. Comply with Construction Management Plan. Refer to Division 01. C. LEED-Compliant Products: Inside the building envelope, use materials that contain acceptable or lower levels of VOC per referenced standards in Rating System Requirements and no added urea-formaldehyde. Cleaning products used during construction and close-out procedures shall meet Green Seal standards GS-34, GS-37, and SG-40, or the California Code of Regulations, Title 17 Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to International Building Code with local amendments, Fire Marshal, and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. 1.7 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Manufacturers and models of equipment and material indicated in Divisions 27 and 28 Specifications and on drawings are those upon which the fire alarm and low voltage systems designs are to be based; other manufacturers with products considered equal in general quality may also be listed without specific model designation. Manuf acturers not listed shall be submitted for approval prior to submission of Bid by the Contractor, see Division 01. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 5 B. Any equipment other than the basis of design is considered a substitution; this includes equipment from any alternate manufacturers listed without specific model designation in the Contract Specifications and / or Drawings. C. Pre-Bid Substitutions will be evaluated based on product manufacturer only. Specific product model, specifications, options and accessories will be evaluated during submi ttals. Approval of a manufacturer substitution does not constitute approval of the submitted product. D. In selecting substitute equipment, the Contractor is responsible for and shall guarantee equal performance and fit. Cost of redesign and all additional costs incurred to accommodate the substituted equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Approval of proposed substitution does not grant the Contractor approval for deviation from the contract requirements. F. Unless indicated otherwise, “or approved equal” may be assumed for all products in Divisions 26, 27 and 28. 1.8 DESIGN DRAWINGS A. All drawings, specifications and calculations prepared by the Fire Alarm Design -Build Contractor shall be stamped by an Engineer currently registered in the State of Washington. B. The Design-Build Contractor shall submit drawings and diagrams for review and for job coordination : 1. Permit / Construction Drawings for review. These drawings shall be submitted at two milestones as selected by the Architect in electronic PDF format. a. The Contractors’ drawings shall match the layout of the Architectural drawings. b. Fire Alarm systems shall be provided in a separate set of drawings by the Fire Alarm Contractor. c. The Drawing Sets shall include at a minimum: 1) Symbols, Legend and drawing list sheets. 2) Equipment Schedules. 3) Low Voltage Systems (Telecom, CATV, CCTV, access control, etc) floor plan drawings. 4) Low Voltage Systems riser diagrams. 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Provide one electronic copy of product data submittals for all products listed under “Part 2 Products” of Divisions 27 and 28 Specification Sections and all additional products noted on drawings or required for completion of sequence of operations . B. Provide the Submittals so as not to delay the construction schedule; allow at least two weeks for review of each submittal and re-submittal. C. Electronic: Submittals shall be complete in one PDF file for each Division with bookmarks for each Specification Section and Principal Category. Multi-file submittals will be returned without review. 1. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. 2. Index Page: List of specification sections and principal categories with contents by Tag or item. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 6 3. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section and principal category corresponding to listing in index. D. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation (Tag) and/or specification section, as applicable. Indicate selected model and all accessories intended for use. E. Equipment vendor cover page with contact information shall precede submittal by that vendor. F. Submitted product information shall include (as applicable) but not be limited to the following information: 1. Product description. 2. Manufacturer and model. 3. Dimensions. 4. Performance Ratings. 5. Construction Materials. 6. Ratings (i.e. UL, ASTM, NEMA, etc). 7. Electrical characteristics (Voltage, Phase, Wattage, Breakers, etc). 8. Engineering technical data. 9. Sound level data. 10. Vibration Isolation. 11. Controls and wiring diagrams. 12. Accessories. G. If requested in subsequent Specification Sections or by Architect or Engineer, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions on any equipment, procedures, or certifications so requested. H. Do no ordering, fabrication or manufacturing of products until return of approved submittals. I. The Contractor agrees to pay for the Engineer’s review cost of the Division 27 and 28 Submittals beyond one resubmittal where resubmittals are required due to deficiencies in the Contractor’s Submitted material. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit drawings and/or diagrams for review and for job coordination: 1. Slab plans marked up with all penetrations required for electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems. Sizes of penetrations shall be indicated on the plans and penetration locations shall be dimensioned from major building lines. The Contractor shall submit these slab plans to the Architect for review. 2. For all special or custom-built items or equipment. 3. In all cases where deviation from the Contract Drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, interference or substitution of equipment, or when requested by the Engineer for purposes of clarification of the Contractor’s intent. a. By submission of revised design shop drawings, the Contractor acknowledges that coordination has been done with all other trades to ensure that all equipment fits and remains accessible with all Code required clearances and that no conflicts exist. B. The Architect’s review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for deviations from the Contract drawings or specifications, unless he has, in writing, called the attention of the Architect to such deviations at the time of the submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors or omission in such shop drawings. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 7 1.11 COMMISSIONING A. Provide all necessary commissioning assistance, equipment and documentation as required by the Commissioning Plan. B. The duty and responsibility for electrical and low voltage commissioning work shall be assigned to a specific individual. Inform the General Contractor and Commissioning Agent of the contact information for the person so assigned. C. Perform corrective actions needed to resolve deficiencies identified during commissioning. Record action taken on commissioning deficiency log. 1.12 PERMITS A. See Specification Section 28 46 00 for Fire Alarm Systems Permit requirements. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractors shall perform all work per current versions of all applicable Codes and Standards with state and local amendments – see “Codes and Standards” paragraph above. B. All equipment and devices shall be UL-Listed and Labeled and shall be acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the use and location for which they are intended. C. Provide all like items (telecom outlets, patch panels, faceplates, etc) from one manufacturer. 1.14 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in Division s 27 and 28 Specification Sections with a minimum of three years’ experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work included in Divisions 27 and 28 on projects of similar type and scale with a minimum of three years’ experience. 1.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. The Contractor shall keep all equipment, devices, conduit, etc in a dry, secured, protected area. The location shall be coordinated with the Architect and General Contractor prior to the start of Construction. See Division 01 for additional delivery, storage and handling requirements. C. Where original packaging is insufficient, provide additional protection. Maintain protection in place until installation. D. Inspect all products and materials for damage prior to installation. E. Protect conduit from all entry of foreign materials by providing temporary end caps or closures on conduit and fittings. F. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 8 G. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting equipment. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply fire stopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of fire stopping materials. B. Coordinate with General Contractor to have ventilation provided in areas to receive solvent cured materials. C. Do not install underground conduit when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.17 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to ordering racks and other equipment. B. Verify by field measurements that equipment and rack sizes and configurations are compatible with wall construction and layout. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining and documenting exact locations of existing systems. 1.18 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work. The Contractor shall include in their Bid the costs for all work and / or materials required to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents based on the actual existing conditions. Failure to visit the Site and verify actual existing conditions does not relieve the Contractor of these requirements; no change orders will be paid due to lack of verification of existing conditions whether they are specifically noted in the Contract Documents or not. B. The Contractor shall verify the locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near the Project site. Determine such locations in conjunction with all public and private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. D. Where the word ‘verify’ is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the existing conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified conditions without additional cost to the Owner. E. Electrical and Low Voltage Systems drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate all possible site conditions. The contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions and connections on site and coordinate between trades to preclude interferences. The contractor shall provide adjustments as necessary to fit actual conditions. F. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 9 Owner will be considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any device or equipment roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied centerlines or as required by good practice shall be repositioned at no cost to the Owner. G. In the event of a conflict with other trades of work, the following priority from highest to lowest shall be followed: Structural, lighting, HVAC, plumbing/piping and sprinklers. Starting with the lowest priority, the Electrical, HVAC, plumbing, and sprinkler contractors shall provide whatever materials, offsets, labor etc. is required to resolve the conflict. H. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit the equipment furnished. Costs for modifications due to equipment substitution will be borne by the contractor. I. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect will determine which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no additional cost. J. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents the greater quantity, the better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in writing. K. Coordinate trenching, excavating, bedding, backfilling of buried systems with requirements of this specification. L. Coordinate wall openings, rough-in locations, concrete housekeeping pads, and conduit rough-in locations to accommodate Work of Divisions 26, 27 and 28. M. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Architectural plans and Project structure when locating equipment and devices and routing conduit and cabling. N. The Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor and provide slab plans mark ed up with all penetrations required for electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems. Sizes of penetrations shall be indicated on the plans and penetration locations shall be dimensioned from major building lines. The Contractor shall submit these slab plans to the Architect for review. O. The Contractor shall coordinate conduit and cabling routing and equipment and device locations with all other trades to ensure all Code required clearances are maintained and equipment and devices remain accessible after the work of all trades is complete. P. The Contractor shall consult the approved shop drawings of all other trades and crafts to ensure coordination with final locations of cabinetry, counters, appliances, equipment, structural members, etc. Conflicts are to be resolved with the Architect and General Contractor prior to rough-in. The Contractor shall not be paid for relocation work (including cutting, patching, and finishing) required due to a lack of coordination prior to installation. Q. See the Architectural drawings for the exact locations of low voltage devices. The Contractor shall make minor changes (less then 6-feet in any direction) in the location of conduit, boxes, devices, etc from the locations shown in the drawings without extra charge to the Owner where required by coordination or if directed by the Architect or Owner. R. Prior to the start of Construction, coordinate locations and connection requirements for all line voltage power connections with the Electrical Contractor and Engineer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 10 1.19 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Completion, submission and approval of the following is required for final project closeout: 1. Walk through the Project with the Owner and Architect to make note of deficiencies. 2. Execution of Owner’s, Architect's and Engineer’s final observation reports (punchlist). 3. Operating and Maintenance Instructions. 4. Operating and Maintenance Manual. 5. Equipment Cleaning. 6. Record Drawings. 7. Testing. 8. Commissioning and Commissioning Report. 9. Warranty. B. See other Divisions 01, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for additional requirements. 1.20 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONAL TRAINING A. General: In addition to requirements of Division 01, following initial operation of Electrical systems and prior to acceptance by the Architect, perform the following service s: 1. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period, give written notification of readiness to proceed to the Architect and Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates . 2. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out requirements for operating, servicing and maintaining equipment and systems. Describe general system operation and specific equipment functions. Cover all equipment and device calibration; systems set up, adjustments and programming; and safeties and alarms. 3. Furnish qualifications of Contractor's personnel in charge of the instruction; foreman position is minimum acceptable. Where equipment startup is performed by supplier’s or manufacturer’s personnel, those personnel should also provide training on t hat equipment. 4. During demonstrations and instructions include and reference information from maintenance manuals and contract drawings. a. Provide documentation of all instruction which includes: 1) Date and time of instruction. 2) Name, affiliation and qualifications of the instructor. 3) Name and affiliation of the attendees. 4) Topics, systems, and equipment covered. 5) Length of instruction. 5. Minimum duration of instruction periods: a. Telecom and CATV Systems 1 hours b. Access Control System 3 hours c. Fire Alarm Systems See Section 28 46 00 1.21 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Contents: Furnish, in accord with Division 01, one PDF and one bound copy of operating and maintenance manuals to include the following: 1. The Job name and address. 2. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor, sub- contractors and local companies responsible for maintenance of each system or piece of equipment. 3. Manufacturers, suppliers, contractor names, addresses and phone numbers. 4. Written guarantees. 5. Warranty service contractors' names, address and phone numbers (if different from above). Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 11 6. Copies of approved brochures and Shop Drawings as applicable for all submittal items. 7. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up and routine and normal operating instructions; and control, shutdown, and emergency instructions. 8. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; and adjusting instructions. 9. Part numbers of all replaceable items. 10. Operation sequences. 11. Record drawings corrected and completed. 12. Completed equipment start-up forms and checklists. 13. Final copy of testing reports. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include spare parts lists for all equipment as applicable. 2. Submit installation instructions, adjustment instructions, and spare parts lists for all equipment. 3. Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances. 4. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data. C. Binders: 1. Furnish typewritten or printed index and tabbed dividers between principal categories. 2. Bind each manual in a hard-backed loose-leaf binder. 3. Imprint on Cover: a. Name of Project. b. Owner. c. Location of project. d. Architect. e. Contractor. f. Year of Completion. 4. Imprint on backing: a. Name of Project. b. Year of completion. D. PDFs: 1. Provide PDF with bookmarks for each Specification Section and / or Principal Category. a. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. b. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item. c. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing in index. E. Submittal: 1. Preliminary Copies: Prior to scheduled completion of the project, submit one PDF copy for review by the Architect. 2. Final Copies: After approval of the preliminary copy, submit one PDF and one bound copy to the Owner. 1.22 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the r equirements of Division 01 Specification Section "Contract Closeout." B. Label each drawing as "Record Drawing" with Low Voltage Contractors’ name and date. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 12 C. During construction, maintain an accurate record set of the drawings of the installation on project site at all times; keep this set in a safe location, protected from the environment. D. Submit one digital file with all drawings in PDF format. E. Make all notes and revisions on PDF set in red. F. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01 and in other Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections, indicate installed conditions (locations, sizes, burial depths, arrangements, etc) for: 1. Major raceway systems – Interior and Exterior – dimensions from prominent building lines. 2. Utility service conduit (power and telecom) and connections, dimensions from prominent building lines. 3. Locations of all conduits provided for future use with intended future use identified. 4. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed) shown to scale and dimensioned from prominent building lines. 5. Outlet termination numbering for all telecom, CATV, CCTV outlets to match what is actually installed. 6. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 1.23 TESTING A. Provide completed start-up forms and checklists. B. Perform testing of lighting control, non-utility metering, fire alarm and other low voltage systems as described in Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections and as required by applicable codes and ordinances. C. Written verification of testing to be signed by Owner's Representative . 1.24 COMMISSIONING REPORT A. Submit three (3) copies of the preliminary commissioning report as required by the Washington State, as outlined on drawing commissioning notes and specifications. This report is an execution and fulfillment of the commissioning plan. This report shall be completed before the final electrical permit inspection. At a minimum this report shall include: 1. Testing reports for systems required to be commissioned. 2. Complete system startup checklists. 3. Functional test reports. 4. Sequence of Operation test reports. 5. O&M Materials. 6. Record Drawings. 7. Owner training documentation. 8. Notes of any discrepancies observed during testing and any corrective actions taken or date when corrective action will be taken. 9. Notes of any tests which could not be performed due to weather conditions or other conflicts (identify specific conflict that prevented testing from occurring). B. After receiving review comments from the preliminary commissi oning plan make corrections indicated and submit three (3) copies of the final commissioning report. At a minimum this report shall include the information from the preliminary commissioning report and the following: Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 13 1. Corrective measures taken in response to preliminary report or field observation report. 1.25 WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR’S GUARANTEE A. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and in perfect operating order at time of delivery to Owner. B. The Contractor shall, without cost to the Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from date of final acceptance for all electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems, except when in the opinion of the Architect a failure is due to neglect or carelessness of the Owner. 1. See individual Specification Sections for additional requirements. C. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees which exceed one year. D. The Contractor shall make all necessary control adjustments during first year of operation. E. The presence of any inspector or observer at any point during construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work. F. Refer to Division 01, 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for additional Warranty requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2.2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2.4 RACEWAY AND BOXES A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2.6 TELECOM/ CATV EQUIPMENT: A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equipment, devices and cabling by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Belden, Inc. 2. Cooper B-Line. 3. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 4. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 5. Motorola, Inc.; Connected Home Solutions. 6. Ortronics, Inc. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 14 7. Tyco Electronic Corporation. B. The telecom equipment, devices and cabling shall meet TIA performance criteria for Category 6. All cabling shall be terminated with Category 6 RJ45 jacks. 2.7 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM: A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equipment, devices and cabling by one of the following manufacturers or a pre-approved equal: 1. Genetec. 2. Kantech. 3. Lenel. 4. AMAG. 5. S2. 6. Bosch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOCUMENTATION A. Additional plan submittals to reviewing authority: If additional drawing submittals are required at any time during construction the Contractor shall submit drawings, review with authority, and pick up subsequent approved drawings. The Contractor will revise and/or prepare drawings for submittal. 3.2 MOCK-UPS A. The Contractor shall completely mock-up the building (exact areas to be chosen by the Architect and Owner) by marking the intended locations of all equipment and devices (CATV and telecom outlets, access control devices, etc). B. Before starting installation of equipment and devices, the Electrical Contractor shall walk through all mocked-up areas with the Owner, Architect, and General Contractor to receive approval for all locations. C. The Electrical Contractor shall relocate equipment and devices in the mock-ups per the Owner and Architect’s instructions. D. The Electrical Contractor shall relocate any equipment and devices installed prior to the approval of the mocked-up areas by the Architect and Owner at the Electrical Contractor’s expense. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall conceal all conduit, cabling and boxes in finished areas unless indicated otherwise or granted specific permission by the Architect. Install all conduit and cabling perpendicular or parallel with building lines wherever possible. B. In open ceiling areas, all cabling shall be installed in conduit. Conduit shall be painted; color as selected by the Architect. C. Coordinate the locations of equipment and outlets with all other trades. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 15 3.4 INSPECTION A. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work (including the electric and telecom utility providers for utility service infrastructure work). B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and testing, the Contractor shall at his own expense uncover said work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work disturbed by him to its original condition including paying other trades to repair work under their scope that was disturbed. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conducts tests of equipment, devices, and systems as required by NFPA, BICSI, local Codes and the local AHJ. 1. Provide a Service Technician with all tools, instruments, etc required to complete required tests. 2. Coordinate with the Owner, Architect and General Contractor; tests should be performed in the presence of the Owner and Architect unless given specific permission otherwise. B. Refer to individual Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for additional requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials. B. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment. Equipment shall be free of dirt, construction debris, corrosion, etc. C. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to eliminate dirt, debris or other material from entering and collecting inside of conduit and equipment. Any collection of material shall be thoroughly cleaned before owner occupancy. D. Clean exterior of all exposed conduit. E. Materials intended for use inside the building envelope, including those used for patching, painting, touch-up, and cleaning, must contain acceptable levels of VOC’s and contain no added urea-formaldehyde. 3.7 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other trades where necessary for installation of low voltage systems work. Perform work only with craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. B. Avoid cutting where possible by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of rough-frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for low voltage systems installations. C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without breaking out around holes. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 27 00 00 October 20, 2021 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 27 00 00 - 16 3.8 SALVAGE A. Remove excess conduit and conductors. Remove scrap and all other excess materials from the site. B. Comply with contractor’s Construction Waste Management Plan. Retain and submit all trip and tip tickets for all construction debris and waste hauling, indicating material content, tonnage, date hauled and facility to where materials were hauled. 3.9 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES A. Refer to individual Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for requirements. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 1 SECTION 28 46 00 – FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and Division 01 - General Requirements for all work in Divisions 26, 27 and 28. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Design Intent: The project includes Electrical, Fire Alarm and Low Voltage systems for the Family First Community Center project in Renton, Washington. 1. See Architectural plans and specifications for additional information. B. All Fire Alarm and Low Voltage Systems are Design-Build; Contract Documents (drawings and specifications) are meant to provide information (scope, performance requirements, preliminary quantities and locations, etc) for Bidding by Design-Build Contractors only. 1. All final quantities and locations of equipment and devices shall be coordinated with the Fire Marshal/ Local AHJ (as applicable), Architect and Owner prior to the start of construction. 2. The Design-Build Contractors shall design, provide and install complete and fully operational and coordinated Fire Alarm and Low Voltage systems that meet all requirements of the Owner, Fire Marshal/ local AHJ and as per the Project Contract Documents. 3. Fire Alarm and Low Voltage Systems: The Following Systems are to be included in the Project: a. Telecommunications systems. b. CATV system. c. WIFI systems. d. CCTV system e. Access Control / Security System. f. Fire Alarm System. 4. Fire Alarm Systems : a. Fire Alarm Systems shall be Design-Build. See Specification Sections 28 46 00 and the Contract Drawings for system performance requirements for bidding by the Fire Alarm Design-Build Contractor. 5. See Specification Section 26 00 00 for additional information and requirements. C. The Contractors shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and devices, supports, etc necessary for satisfactory installation of fire alarm and low voltage work ready to operate in strict accordance with Code requirements and these specifications and drawings. D. Related Sections: All Division 01, 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections included in the Contract Documents. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 2 E. Commissioning Activities and Submittals: The Project shall be commissioned per Energy Code requirements. The Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor, Architect and Commissioning Agent and provide support for the complete commissioning process as required. See Divisions 01, 26, 27 and 28 for additional information. 1.3 SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS A. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1. A complete and fully operational Addressable Fire Alarm system meeting all Code and Fire Marshal requirements shall be designed, provided and installed for the project by the Design-Build Contractor. 2. System smoke detectors/ carbon monoxide alarms and low frequency fire alarms are to be provided per the requirements of Code and the Fire Marshal. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. All work shall meet or exceed the requirements of the current versions of all applicable Federal, State, and Local Codes and Standards including but not limited to: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) with State and Local Amendments. 2. Washington State Energy Code with State and Local Amendments. 3. International Fire Code (IFC) with State and Local Amendments. 4. International Building Code (IBC) with State and Local Amendments. 5. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State and Local Amendments. 6. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State and Local Amendments. 7. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 8. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) Standards and Recommended Practices. 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and Recommended Practices. 10. Applicable Standards of the following organizations (see subsequent Division 26, 27 and 28 sections for additional information): a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). c. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) d. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) e. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) f. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) standards. 11. Utility Service Provider Requirements. 12. LEED, Version 4 1.5 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. Comply with Project Requirements to achieve LEED v4 Silver Certification. B. Comply with Construction Management Plan. Refer to Division 01. C. LEED-Compliant Products: Inside the building envelope, use materials that contain acceptable or lower levels of VOC per referenced standards in Rating System Requirements and no added urea-formaldehyde. Cleaning products used during construction and close-out procedures shall meet Green Seal standards GS-34, GS-37, and SG-40, or the California Code of Regulations, Title 17 Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 3 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to International Building Code with local amendments, Fire Marshal, and UL for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. 1.7 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Manufacturers and models of equipment and material indicated in Divisions 27 and 28 Specifications and on drawings are those upon which the fire alarm and low voltage systems designs are to be based; other manufacturers with products considered equal in general quality may also be listed without specific model designation. Manufacturers not listed shall be submitted for approval prior to submission of Bid by the Contractor, see Division 01. B. Any equipment other than the basis of design is considered a substitution; this includes equipment from any alternate manufacturers listed without specific model desig nation in the Contract Specifications and / or Drawings. C. Pre-Bid Substitutions will be evaluated based on product manufacturer only. Specific product model, specifications, options and accessories will be evaluated during submittals. Approval of a manufacturer substitution does not constitute approval of the submitted product. D. In selecting substitute equipment, the Contractor is responsible for and shall guarantee equal performance and fit. Cost of redesign and all additional costs incurred to accommodate the substituted equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Approval of proposed substitution does not grant the Contractor approval for deviation from the contract requirements. F. Unless indicated otherwise, “or approved equal” may be assumed for all products in Divisions 26, 27 and 28. 1.8 DESIGN DRAWINGS A. All drawings, specifications and calculations prepared by the Fire Alarm Design-Build Contractor shall be stamped by an Engineer currently registered in the State of Washington. B. The Design-Build Contractors shall submit drawings and diagrams for review and for job coordination: 1. Permit / Construction Drawings for review. These drawings shall be submitted at two milestones as selected by the Architect in electronic PDF format. a. The Contractors’ drawings shall match the layout of the Architectural drawings. b. Fire Alarm systems shall be provided in a separate set of drawings by the Fire Alarm Contractor. c. The Fire Alarm Systems Drawing Sets shall include at a minimum: 1) Symbols, Legend and drawing list sheets. 2) Floor Plans showing device locations per Code and Fire Marshal requirements. 3) Wiring diagrams. 4) All calculations required for approval by the Fire Marshal and local AHJ. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 4 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Provide one electronic copy of product data submittals for all products listed under “Part 2 Products” this specification and all additional products noted on drawings or required for completion of sequence of operations. B. Provide the Submittals so as not to delay the construction schedule; allow at least two weeks for review of each submittal and re-submittal. C. Electronic: Submittals shall be complete in one PDF file with bookmarks for each Specification Section. Multi-file submittals will be returned without review. 1. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. 2. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item. 3. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing in index. D. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation (Tag) and/or specification section, as applicable. Indicate selected model and all accessories intended for use. E. Equipment vendor cover page with contact information shall precede submittal by that vendor. F. Submitted product information shall include (as applicable) but not be limited to the following information: 1. Product description. 2. Manufacturer and model. 3. Dimensions. 4. Performance Ratings. 5. Construction Materials. 6. Ratings (i.e. UL, ASTM, NEMA, etc). 7. Engineering technical data. 8. Electrical characteristics (Voltage, Phase, Wattage, Breakers, etc). 9. Controls and wiring diagrams. 10. Accessories. G. If requested in subsequent Specification Sections or by Architect or Engineer, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions on any equipment, procedures, or certifications so requested. H. Do no ordering, fabrication or manufacturing of products until return of approved submittals. I. The Contractor agrees to pay for the Engineer’s review cost of the Fire Alarm Systems Submittals beyond one resubmittal where resubmittals are required due to deficiencies in the Contractor’s Submitted material. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall prepare Shop Drawings stamped and signed by a Certified Designer. Drawings shall be developed in accordance with Code and the State and Local Fire Marshals. Submit PDF copies of these drawings for approval prior to beginning work. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 5 B. Submit shop drawings to Architect, Local Fire Marshal, and all other approving authorities. Drawings shall be approved by all agencies prior to fabrication or installation. Drawings submitted for Architect's approval shall have been stamped approved by the Fire Department. C. The Contractor shall draw the design team’s attention to any areas in which they contemplate deviations from the conceptual information shown on the contract documents (e.g., due to site conditions). D. These drawings and diagrams shall show the manufacturer’s name and catalog number of each piece of equipment used. Also included shall be: 1. Symbols and legend sheet. 2. Schedules sheets. 3. Floor Plans showing device locations per Code and Fire Marshal requirements. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. All calculations required for approval by the Fire Marshal and local AHJ. E. The Contractor shall also coordinate with the General Contractor and provide s lab plans marked up with all penetrations required for fire alarm and area of refuge systems. Sizes of penetrations shall be indicated on the plans and penetration locations shall be dimensioned from major building lines. The Contractor shall submit these slab plans to the Architect for review. F. The Architect’s and Engineer’s review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for deviations from the Contract drawings or specifications, unless he has, in writing, called the attention of the Architect to such deviations at the time of the submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors or omission in such shop drawings. 1.11 COMMISSIONING A. See Division 01 for roles and responsibilities of commissioning. B. Provide all necessary commissioning assistance, equipment and documentation as required by the Commissioning Plan. C. The duty and responsibility for electrical and low voltage commissioning work shall be assigned to a specific individual. Inform the General Contractor and Commissioning Agent of the contact information for the person so assigned. D. Perform corrective actions needed to resolve deficiencies identified during commissioning. Record action taken on commissioning deficiency log. 1.12 PERMITS A. In addition to the distribution requirements specified in other Specification Sections, the Fire Alarm Design-Build Contractor shall make all required submissions to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for Permits and approval. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall pay all fees related to said submissions. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall revise their design and resubmit as needed to obtain AHJ approval. All additional and / or revisions to the Fire Alarm Contractor’s designs required to obtain AHJ approval shall be carried out by the Fire Alarm Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner – this includes the fees associated with any resubmissions. The Fire Alarm contractor shall submit all comments received from the AHJ to the Architect and Engineer. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 6 B. The Contractor shall not commence work until a permit (or “get started” permit where allowed by the AHJ) is obtained. Contractor is solely responsible for ensuring that the permit application and any revisions are submitted in a timely manner so as not to impact project schedule. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all work per current versions of all applicable Code and Standards with state and local amendments – see “Codes and Standards” paragraph above. B. All equipment and devices shall be UL-Listed and Labeled and shall be acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the use and location for which they are intended. C. Provide all system components from one manufacturer unless Architect provides written permission to do otherwise. 1.14 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in Specification Sections 28 46 00 and 28 46 21 with a minimum of five years’ experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work on projects of similar type and scale with a minimum of three years’ experience. 1.15 SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with and provide assistance in final adjustment and testing of life safety systems with the General Contractor and Fire Authority. 1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. The Contractor shall keep all equipment, devices, conduit, etc in a dry, protected area. The location shall be coordinated with the Architect and General Contractor prior to the start of Construction. See Division 01 for additional delivery, storage and handling requirements. C. Where original packaging is insufficient, provide additional protection. Maintain protection in place until installation. D. Inspect all products and materials for damage prior to installation. E. Protect conduit from all entry of foreign materials by providing temporary end caps or closures on conduit and fittings. F. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. G. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 7 1.17 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply fire stopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of fire stopping materials. B. Coordinate with General Contractor to have ventilation provided in areas to receive solvent cured materials. C. Do not install underground conduit when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.18 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to ordering gear. B. Verify by field measurements that equipment sizes and configurations are compatible with wall construction and layout. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locat ing, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining and documenting exact locations of existing systems. 1.19 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work. The Contractor shall include in their Bid the costs for all work and / or materials required to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents based on the actual existing conditions. Failure to visit the Site and verify actual existing conditions does not relieve the Contractor of these requirements; no change orders will be paid due to lack of verification of existing conditions whether they are specifically noted in the Contract Documents or not. B. The Contractor shall verify the locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near the Project site. Determine such locations in conjunction with all public and private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. D. Where the word ‘verify’ is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the existing conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified conditions without additional cost to the Owner. E. Electrical and Low Voltage Systems drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate all possible site conditions. The contractor shall verify all measure ments, dimensions and connections on site and coordinate between trades to preclude interferences. The contractor shall provide adjustments as necessary to fit actual conditions. F. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the necessary dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the Owner will be considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on the drawings. Any device or equipment roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied centerlines or as required by good practice shall be repositioned at no cost to the Owner. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 8 G. In the event of a conflict with other trades of work, the following priority from highest to lowest shall be followed: Structural, lighting, HVAC, plumbing/piping and sprinklers. Starting with the lowest priority, the Electrical, HVAC, plumbing, and sprinkler contractors shall provide whatever materials, offsets, labor etc. is required to resolve the conflict. H. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit the equipment furnished. Costs for modifications due to equipment substitution will be borne by the contractor. I. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect will determine which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no additional cost. J. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents the greater quantity, the better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the Contractor otherwise in writing. K. Coordinate trenching, excavating, bedding, backfilling of buried systems with requirements of this specification. L. Coordinate wall openings, rough-in locations, and conduit rough-in locations to accommodate Work of Specification Sections 28 46 00 and 28 46 21. M. Coordinate all equipment with building control work. N. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Architectural plans and Project structure when locating equipment and devices and routing conduit and cabling. O. The Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor and provide slab plans marked up with all penetrations required for electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems. Sizes of penetrations shall be indicated on the plans and penetration locations shall be dimensioned from major building lines. The Contractor shall submit these slab plans to the Architect for review. P. The Contractor shall coordinate conduit and cabling routing and equipment and device locations with all other trades to ensure all Code required clearances are maintained and equipment and devices remain accessible after the work of all trades is complete. Q. The Contractor shall consult the approved shop drawings of all other trades and crafts to ensure coordination with final locations of cabinetry, counters, appliances, equipment, structural members, etc. Conflicts are to be resolved with the Architect and General Contractor prior to rough-in. The Contractor shall not be paid for relocation work (including cutting, patching, and finishing) required due to a lack of coordination prior to installation. R. Prior to the start of Construction, coordinate locations and connection requirements for all line voltage power connections with the Electrical Contractor and Engineer. 1.20 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Completion, submission and approval of the following is required for final project closeout: 1. Walk through the Project with the Owner and Architect to make note of deficiencies. 2. Execution of Owner’s, Architect's and Engineer’s final observation reports (punchlist). 3. Operating and Maintenance Instructions. 4. Operating and Maintenance Manual. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 9 5. Equipment Cleaning. 6. Record Drawings and set of plans stamped approved by Fire Marshal. 7. Testing. 8. Commissioning. 9. Warranty. B. See Division 01 for additional requirements for the fire alarm system. C. See other Divisions 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for complete project requirements . 1.21 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONAL TRAINING A. General: In addition to requirements of Division 01, following initial operation of Electrical systems and prior to acceptance by the Architect, perform the following services: 1. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period, give written notification of readiness to proceed to the Architect and Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates. 2. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out requirements for operating, servicing and maintaining equipment and systems. Describe general system operation and specific equipment functions. Cove r all equipment calibration, lighting controls setpoint adjustment, safeties and alarms. 3. Furnish qualifications of Contractor's personnel in charge of the instruction; foreman position is minimum acceptable. Where system startup is performed by supplier’s or manufacturer’s personnel, those personnel should also provide training on that equipment. 4. During demonstrations and instructions include and reference information from maintenance manuals and contract drawings. a. Provide documentation of all instruction which includes: 1) Date and time of instruction. 2) Name, affiliation and qualifications of the instructor. 3) Name and affiliation of the attendees. 4) Topics, systems, and equipment covered. 5) Length of instruction. 5. Minimum duration of instruction periods: a. Fire Alarm Systems 3 hours 1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Contents: Furnish, in accord with Division 1, one PDF and one bound copy of operating and maintenance manuals to include the following: 1. The Job name and address. 2. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor, sub- contractors and local companies responsible for maintenance of each system or piece of equipment. 3. Manufacturers, suppliers, contractor names, addresses and phone numbers. 4. Written guarantees. 5. Warranty service contractors' names, address and phone numbers (if different from above). 6. Copies of approved brochures and Shop Drawings as applicable for all submittal items. 7. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up and routine and normal operating instructions; and control, shutdown, and emergency instructions. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 10 8. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; and adjusting instructions. 9. Part numbers of all replaceable items. 10. Operation sequences. 11. Record drawings corrected and completed. 12. Completed equipment start-up forms and checklists. 13. Final copy of testing reports. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include spare parts lists for all equipment as applicable. 2. Submit installation instructions, adjustment instructions, and spare parts lists for all equipment. 3. Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances. 4. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data. C. Binders: 1. Furnish typewritten or printed index and tabbed dividers between Specification Sections and principal categories. 2. Bind each manual in a hard-backed loose-leaf binder. 3. Imprint on Cover: a. Name of Project. b. Owner. c. Location of project. d. Architect. e. Contractor. f. Year of Completion. 4. Imprint on backing: a. Name of Project. b. Year of completion. D. PDFs: 1. Provide PDF with bookmarks for each Specification Section and Principal Category. a. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company. b. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item. c. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing in index. E. Submittal: 1. Preliminary Copies: Prior to scheduled completion of the project, submit one PDF copy for review by the Architect. 2. Final Copies: After approval of the preliminary copy, submit one PDF and one bound copy to the Owner. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 11 1.23 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 Specification Section "Contract Closeout." B. Label each drawing as "Record Drawing" with Electrical Contractors’ name and date. C. During construction, maintain an accurate record set of the drawings of the installation on project site at all times; keep this set in a safe location, protected from the environment. D. Submit one digital file with all drawings in PDF format. E. Make all notes and revisions on PDF set in red. F. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01 and in other Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections, indicate installed conditions (locations, sizes, burial depths, arrangements, etc) for: 1. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed) shown to scale and dimensioned from prominent building lines. 2. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 1.24 TESTING A. Perform testing of fire alarm systems as described in this Specification and as required by applicable codes and ordinances. B. Written verification of testing to be signed by Owner's Representative . C. Perform testing of fire alarm and area of refuge / two-way call systems as required by applicable codes and ordinances. 1.25 COMMISSIONING REPORT A. Submit three (3) copies of the preliminary commissioning report as required by the Washington State \ Seattle Energy Code, as outlined on drawing commissioning notes and specifications. This report is an execution and fulfillment of the commissioning plan. This report shall be completed before the final electrical permit inspection. At a minimum this report shall include: 1. Testing reports for systems required to be commissioned. 2. Complete system startup checklists. 3. Functional test reports. 4. Sequence of Operation test reports. 5. O&M Materials. 6. Record Drawings. 7. Owner training documentation. 8. Notes of any discrepancies observed during testing and any corrective actions taken or date when corrective action will be taken. 9. Notes of any tests which could not be performed due to conflicts (identify specific conflict that prevented testing from occurring). B. After receiving review comments from the preliminary commissioning plan make corrections indicated and submit three (3) copies of the final commissioning report. At a minimum this Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 12 report shall include the information from the preliminary commissioning report and the following: 1. Corrective measures taken in response to preliminary report or field observation report. 1.26 WARRANTY AND CONTRACTOR’S GUARANTEE A. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and in perfect operating order at time of delivery to Owner. B. The Contractor shall, without cost to the Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from date of final acceptance for all electrical, fire alarm and low voltage systems, except when in the opinion of the Architect a failure is due to neglect or carelessness of the Owner. 1. See individual Specification Sections for additional requirements. C. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees which exceed one year. D. The Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments during first year of operation. E. The presence of any inspector or observer at any point during construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work. F. Refer to Division 01, 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections for additional Warranty requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or an approved equal: 1. FACP and Equipment: a. Mircom Technologies. b. Notifier; a Honeywell Company. c. Potter Signal. d. Siemens. e. Silent Knight; a GE-Honeywell Company. 2. Wire and Cable: a. Comtran Corporation. b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 3. Audible and Visual Signals: a. Amseco; a division of Kobishi America, Inc. b. Gentex Corporation. c. Mircom Technologies. d. Potter Signal. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 13 e. Siemens. f. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company. 2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2.4 RACEWAY AND BOXES A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. See Specification Section 26 00 01. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOCUMENTATION A. Additional plan submittals to reviewing authority: If additional drawing submittals are required at any time during construction the Contractor shall submit drawings, review with authority, and pick up subsequent approved drawings. The Fire Alarm Contractor will revise and/or prepare drawings for submittal. 3.2 MOCK-UPS A. The Contractor shall completely mock-up one of the offices and common areas (exact areas to be chosen by the Architect and Owner) by marking the intended locations of all fire alarm systems equipment and devices. B. Before starting installation of equipment and devices, the Contractor shall walk through all mocked-up areas with the Owner, Architect, and General Contractor to receive approval for all locations. C. The Contractor shall relocate equipment and devices in the mock-ups per the Owner and Architect’s instructions. D. The Contractor shall relocate any equipment and devices installed prior to the approval of the mocked-up areas by the Architect and Owner at the Electrical Contractor’s expense. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Examine areas and equipment for conditions that would affect performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been addressed. B. Degrease and clean surfaces of any matter that would affect the bond of paint, adhesives or firestopping material. C. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond of paint, adhesives or firestopping. D. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. E. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. F. For adhesive anchors, clean holes and prepare per manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 14 3.4 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall conceal all conduit, cabling and boxes in finished areas unless indicated otherwise or granted specific permission by the Architect. Install all conduit and cabling perpendicular to or parallel with building lines wherever possible. B. In open ceiling areas, all cabling shall be installed in conduit. In front of house (public) areas, conduit shall be painted; color as selected by the Architect. C. Coordinate the locations of equipment and devices with all other trades. D. FIRE ALARM DEVICES: 1. Coordinate all locations with Architect and all other trades. 2. No fire alarm devices are to be located above any cove heaters. Any fire alarm devices so located shall be moved at the Contractor’s expense. 3. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing: a. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed the rating of the device. b. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and recommendations in NFPA 72. 4. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return- air opening. 5. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound. 6. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. 7. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. 8. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices (where required): Install adjacent to each alarm horn and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. 9. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public area near device they monitor. 10. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. E. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WIRING 1. Install wiring according to the following: a. NECA 1. b. TIA/EIA 568-A. c. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Insta ll conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. d. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. e. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 15 differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm- indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. F. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1. See Specification Section 26 00 01. G. VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 1. See Specification Section 26 00 01. H. GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS 1. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to the FACP. I. RACEWAY AND BOXES 1. See Specification Section 26 00 01. J. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1. See Specification Section 26 00 01. 2. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP. K. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM." 3.5 INSPECTION A. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work. B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, the Contractor shall at his own expense uncover work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work disturbed by him to its original condition including paying other trades repair work under their scope that was disturbed. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Initial Inspection: The Contractor shall inspect all equipment, devices, conductors, hangers, supports, cable, etc prior to installation to verify that they are: identified properly on the reel identification label, that it is of the proper gauge, that it contains the proper number of pairs, that there is no damage to the equipment/ devices, etc. Note any buckling of the jacket, which would indicate possible problems. Damaged cable, equipment, devices, etc or any component failing to meet specifications shall not be used in the installation. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72. Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests sha ll be conducted under the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm Systems program at Level III. 3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests. 4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced. Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 28 46 00 October 20, 2021 FIRE ALARM GENERAL CONDITIONS Project #16-0996 28 46 00 - 16 5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials. B. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment. Equipment shall be free of dirt, construction debris, corrosion, etc. C. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to eliminate dirt, debris or other material from entering and collecting inside of conduit and equipment. Any collection of material shall be thoroughly cleaned before owner occupancy. D. Clean exterior of all exposed conduit. E. Use ESDS Compliant Products: Materials intended for use inside the building envelope, including those used for patching, painting, touch-up, and cleaning, must contain acceptable levels of VOC’s and contain no added urea-formaldehyde. 3.8 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other trades where necessary for installation of fire alarm systems work. Perform work only with craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. B. Avoid cutting where possible by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of rough-frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for fire alarm systems installations . C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without breaking out around holes. 3.9 SALVAGE A. Remove excess conduit and conductors. Remove scrap and all other excess materials from the site. B. Comply with contractor’s Construction Waste Management Plan. Retain and submit all trip and tip tickets for all construction debris and waste hauling, indicating material content, tonnage, date hauled and facility to where materials were hauled. 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 10 00 October 20, 2021 SITE CLEARING SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish services and equipment as required for maintaining temporary erosion/sedimentation control and site clearing for subsequent construction operations. 2. Establish clearing limits and vegetation to remain. 3. Protection of existing trees to remain. 4. Installation and maintenance of temporary erosion control facilities through project completion. 5. Measures to keep streets clean 6. Maintaining, monitoring, and supplementing silt control, storm water runoff control measures and additional BMP’s as required by the City of Renton and the NPDES permit. 7. Clearing site of trees, shrubs, root masses, and other vegetation. 8. Removal of pavements and other improvements. 9. Removal and disposal of materials from site according to regulatory requirements. 10. Protect from harm any trees, vegetation, existing structures, utilities, pavements, sidewalks, curbs, or other objects selected to remain. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to Division 01 and the following: 1. Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. WSDOT-APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridges, and Municipal Construction, 2020 Edition (Standard Specifications) 2. Standard Plans WSDOT/APWA Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 10 00 October 20, 2021 SITE CLEARING SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2 3. Soils Report Geotechnical Engineering Report, Family First Community Center, Prepared by The Riley Group, Inc. Dated June 8, 2018. 4. NPDES National Pollution Elimination Discharge System Construction Storm Water General Permit 1.4 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. The Contractor will be responsible for furnishing, setting and marking all line location stakes. A qualified construction surveyor must be assigned to the Contractor's crew for this work and shall be on site at all times when work requiring control is being performed, together with all necessary equipment, supplies and instruments related thereto. B. The Contractor is responsible for preserving all benchmarks and stakes and is required to replace any stakes or benchmarks that are displaced or missing. C. The Contractor is responsible for review of all utility purveyor and City records relative to the existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all utilities at Contractor's own expense. The Contractor is to notify the Owner's Representative immediately if underground utilities not shown on record documents are encountered. 1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Protection of Existing Improvements 1. Provide, erect, and maintain barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements. 2. Restore any existing improvements damaged by this work to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. B. Objectionable Noises: Conform with local governing requirements regarding Noise Control. C. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes: 1. Ensure minimum interference with roads, streets and adjacent facilities. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets, fire lanes, sidewalks, or passageways without permission from the City of Renton. 3. If required by the City of Renton, provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY FENCING A. Temporary chain link fencing: minimum 6’ height, line posts at 8’ o.c. maximum. 2” chain link mesh fence Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 10 00 October 20, 2021 SITE CLEARING SITE CLEARING 311000 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify limits of clearing, grubbing, and site improvement removal with Owner prior to commencing work. B. Obtain required permits and permission from local governing authorities prior to commencing work. C. Prior to beginning site removals and clearing, meet with Owner’s Representative and review all proposed utility layouts on site. Indicate all existing trees, shrubs and landscaping as well as site improvements that will be affected by construction. D. Coordinate all work with Puget Sound Energy prior to construction. 3.2 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES’S (B.M.P.’s) A. Refer to the erosion control requirements (BMP’s) on the drawings and in this Section. All City of Renton erosion control requirements shall strictly be adhered to. The Contractor is required to prevent erosion from any portions of the site and/or adjacent property for the duration of the construction. B. Dust Control: 1. No visible airborne dust due to Contractor’s activities will be allowed. Immediately sprinkle for dust control when dust is generated. Contractor will be held liable for subsequent damages caused by dust generated during his activities. C. Water Control: 1. Control all surface and sub-surface water in order to prevent damage to the project site and adjacent properties. Provide all means necessary to immediately resolve surface water drainage problems generated on the construction site. Provide proper grading to prevent standing water. 2. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and operate all necessary machinery, appliances, and equipment to keep excavations free from water during construction. The Contractor shall dewater and dispose of the water so as to not cause damage to public/private property or to cause a nuisance/menace to the public. The Contractor shall at all times have sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary emergencies, including power outages. The Contractor shall have available, at all times, competent workers for the operation of the pumping equipment. 3. The control of ground water shall be such that softening of the base of the excavation or formation of quick conditions or boils during excavation shall be prevented. Dewatering systems shall be designed and operated by the Contractor so as to prevent removal of natural soils and to eliminate turbidity (i.e. suspended solids) of the discharge water. 4. During excavation, construction of structures, installation of pipelines and sewers, and the placing/setting of concrete shall be kept free of water. The Contractor shall control surface run-off so as to prevent collection of water in the excavation. The dewatering system shall be installed and operated so that the ground water level Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 10 00 October 20, 2021 SITE CLEARING SITE CLEARING 311000 - 4 outside the excavation is not reduced to the extent where it would damage adjacent structures or property. D. Pollution Control: Comply with all applicable pollution control laws, regulations, and ordinances. 1. Discharge construction runoff to the Strom Drainage system as permitted through the City of Renton. Any water discharging to the storm drainage system shall conform to the Turbidity and pH Requirements as outlined in the NPDES permit requirements. E. Protection of Existing On-site Objects: 1. The Contractor shall do the additional measures noted in the contract documents to protect the existing trees adjacent to utility installations. The Contractor shall hand dig or use air excavation (or other approved methods) for excavation within the tree protection zone. The Contractor shall notify the Owner appointed arborist 24 hours prior to work within the tree protection zone. All work within the tree protection zone shall be under the direction of the Owner appointed arborist. 2. Use all means necessary to protect existing elements of the site not designated to be removed. Protect adjacent property and the public from damage or injury. 3. Notify Owners of underground facilities at least two full business days prior to commencing any excavation. The Contractor shall provide a schedule of the excavation to all Owners of the underground facilities as required by Section 2(12) of Chapter 144 Washington State Laws of 1984. 4. All existing water, gas, irrigation, lighting, power, telephone, sewer, storm, or other surface/sub-surface structure shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall not be disturbed (except as shown on the documents or as approved by the Owner), disconnected, or damaged during work. The Contractor, in the performance of the work, shall be responsible for all expenses arising from damaged utilities or structures. 5. Maintain all roads, storm drains, sewer and water lines, except where closures are specifically required by the work and approved by the local governing authority. 6. Protect all trees designated to remain on the property. Any tree which is not designated for removal and which is destroyed, damaged, or disfigured by the Contractor (in the opinion of the Owner/Owner’s Representative), shall be removed and replaced by a tree of like size and quality at the Contractor’s expense. Protect all designated shrubs, plantings, and ground cover. F. No on-site blasting shall be permitted. 3.3 CLEARING & GRUBBING A. Prior to site clearing and demolition, contact utility location service and have all underground utilities on the site and adjacent right of ways clearly marked. Locate, flag and protect existing underground utilities to remain. B. Approximate locations of existing utilities have been obtained from available records and are shown for convenience. The contractor shall be responsible for verification of the locations shown and for discovery of possible additional utilities not shown so as to avoid damage or disturbance. The underground utility location service shall be contacted for Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 10 00 October 20, 2021 SITE CLEARING SITE CLEARING 311000 - 5 field location prior to any construction. The Owner shall be contacted if a utility conflict exists. C. Completely remove all roots, vegetation and all other organic debris within the clearing limits as required for new construction and as indicated. Remove all stumps completely from felled trees unless otherwise noted on the plans. Perform removal operations in a manner to protect property. D. Save and protect trees indicated on plans to remain. Protect all off-site trees along adjacent roadways and on surrounding properties. E. Dispose of clearing debris off site in a legal manner. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. Petroleum contaminated water and/or soils encountered during earthwork activities shall be disposed of in accordance with the Remedial Action Plan previously referenced. B. Waste: Remove all waste from site. The Contractor shall arrangements for the disposal of waste materials and shall protect the Owner/Owner’s Representative from any and all damages arising therefrom. No on-site waste burning will be permitted. C. The refuse resulting from the clearing and grubbing operations shall be hauled to a waste facility secured by the Contractor. D. Disposal shall be in such a manner as to meet all requirements of City, State, County, and Municipal Regulations regarding health, safety, and public welfare. E. In no case shall any cleared/grubbed material be left on the project site, shoved onto abutting properties, or buried in fills, embankments, or trenches on the project. F. Remove all debris from the site. Leave the project area in a neat and orderly condition to meet the approval of the Owner/Owner’s Representative. G. All hauling and disposal of debris shall be at the Contractor’s expense. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Locate existing utilities. 2. Accomplish indicated and required stripping, excavation, filling, compaction, and rough grading as required for construction of structures, general site grading, utility construction, sidewalk, and roadway construction and the construction of miscellaneous improvements. 3. Provide Dewatering 4. Remove and dispose of materials from the site, which are either not approved for use or are in excess of that required. 5. Import any additional required materials. 6. Coordinate earthwork operations with the other work of the project. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to Division 01 and the following: Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing Section 32 12 00 Asphalt Paving Section 32 13 00 Concrete Paving Section 33 10 00 Water Utilities Section 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewage Utilities Section 33 40 00 Storm Drainage System 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. Standard Plans Standard Plans for Municipal Public Works Construction, 2020 Edition (Standard Plans). Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 2 2. Soils Report Geotechnical Engineering Report, Family First Community Center, Prepared by The Riley Group, Inc. Dated June 8, 2018. 3. AASHTO T176 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by use of the Sand Equivalent Test. 4. ASTM C136-06 Test Methods for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates. 5. ASTM D 2487-11 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. 6. ASTM D698 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-Kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305-mm) Drop. 7. ASTM D1557 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb (4.54-Kg) Rammer and 18-inch (457-mm) Drop. 8. ASTM D6938-10 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill a cut, trench, or other excavation placed at a specified degree of compaction. B. Pipe Bedding: Soil layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. C. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations, or as indicated on project documents. D. Over-excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or below excavation elevations as indicated in project documentation and as identified by the Geotechnical Engineer. E. Unauthorized over-excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without approval of the Geotechnical Engineer. F. Fill: Soil materials placed at a specified degree of compaction used to obtain an indicated grade or elevation. G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. 1. Footings: The elevation of the bottom of the footing or the bottom of excavation, whichever is lower, as shown on the Civil, Architectural and Structural Plans and as defined in the Contract Documents. 2. Buildings: The elevation at the bottom of the capillary break or the bottom of excavation, whichever is lower, as shown on the Civil, Architectural and Structural Plans and as defined in the Contract Documents. 3. Walkways and Paving: The elevation at the bottom of the paving section 4. Utility Trenches: The elevation of the bottom of the pipe bedding Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 3 5. Landscaped Areas: The elevation below the stripping depth or the soil planting section, whichever is lower. H. Unsuitable Soils: Existing, in-situ soil or other material that can be identified by the Geotechnical Engineer as having insufficient strength characteristics or stability to support the intended loads. Unsuitable soil also includes imported or on-site soil containing organics, construction debris, or other deleterious material. I. Wet Weather Earthwork: Earthwork performed between dates of October 1 and April 30 or during wet weather regardless of the time of year. J. Structural Fill: Soil placed as fill and compacted to the specified maximum dry density per the project documents and as defined by ASTM D 1557. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Expose, excavate, and place existing site material only in dry weather. B. Existing Conditions: Existing soil is moisture sensitive and moisture content is above the optimum moisture content for compacting to specified maximum dry densities. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Section 01 30 00. B. Samples: Submit minimum 50-pound sample for each material 4 business days prior to placing material. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals 1. Test Reports: Sieve analysis for each material. 2. Certificates: WSDOT pit certification for each pit. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construction Monitoring and Testing: 1. The Owner will secure and pay for the services of a Geotechnical engineer to classify existing soil materials, to recommend and to classify proposed borrow materials when necessary, to verify compliance of materials with specified requirements, and to perform required field and laboratory testing. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all required testing and shall furnish copies of test reports to the Architect. 3. The Geotechnical Engineer will take samples and perform moisture content, gradation, compaction, and density tests during placement of backfill materials to check compliance with these specifications. 4. The Contractor shall remove surface material at locations designated by the Architect and provide such assistance as necessary for sampling and testing. 5. Tests will be made by the Geotechnical Engineer for the following items: a. Moisture content Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 4 b. Gradation c. Density in-place - ASTM D6938-10, or equivalent. d. Moisture-density relationships - ASTM D698 & ASTM 1557 e. Any re-testing that is required because the initial test showed that the work did not comply with these Contract Documents shall be provided and paid for at the Contractor's sole expense. 6. The Contractor shall make arrangements for the Geotechnical Engineer to be on site to observe the following activities: a. Preconstruction meeting b. Temporary excavation cut slopes c. Placement and compaction of structural fill and common fill. d. Installation of bedding material and utility trench backfill. e. Placement subgrades for building foundations and slabs. f. Placement of pavement subgrades. 1.8 BASE BID: A. Contractor shall include in the base bid the cost of achieving the final grades shown on the Contract Documents beginning with the existing conditions as represented in the site survey included in the Contract Documents. The project Geotechnical Report shall be used as a reference. All excavation to suitable bearing soil, removal of unsuitable materials and debris, stockpiling and protection, import, placement, and compaction required to achieve the final grades, as shown in the contract documents, shall be included in the base bid. B. It is the Bidder’s responsibility to perform their own earthwork calculations to determine quantities of available material. 1. If additional Structural Fill material is required to meet the grading elevations provided in the plans and details, it shall meet the requirements of Imported Structural Fill material and shall be included in the base bid of the project at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If excessive material (either Structural Fill or Common Fill) is on site, then exporting of unused material shall be included in the base bid of the project at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.9 UNIT PRICES: A. Unit Price 1 – Over-excavation of Un-Anticipated Unsuitable Soil: The unit price shall be applied to un-anticipated unsuitable soils (as determined by the Owner’s appointed Geotechnical Engineer) encountered below the anticipated sub grade elevation. Un– anticipated unsuitable soil shall be that material below the sub-grade elevation that does not meet bearing capacity requirements as defined in the field by the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for measuring the quantity of un- anticipated unsuitable soil that is removed. The Contractor shall measure in place bank yards by field measurement that shall be observed, verified, and Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 5 documented by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to backfilling with Structural Fill. The Contractor shall note that measurement by truck tickets will not be accepted. 2. The Contractor will be compensated at their bid unit price for excavation and haul off of un-anticipated soils only as verified and documented by the Geotechnical Engineer in the field. No compensation will be made to the Contractor for unverified and undocumented quantities. 3. If the Contractor’s sequencing of the Work requires stockpiling and double handling of materials, this shall be accomplished within the base bid amount at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Unit Price 2 - Native Structural Fill to Replace Soil Exported as Part of Unit Price 1: A unit price shall be provided for placement and compaction of native structural fill material for use in replacing un-anticipated unsuitable materials and/or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. The Contractor will be compensated at their bid unit price only used in replacing un-anticipated unsuitable materials as approved, verified and documented by the Geotechnical Engineer in the field. Only placement and compaction of native structural fill material required by field determined deviations in the actual depth to competent bearing soils from that shown in the Contract Documents shall be compensated using the unit price. 2. All Structural Fill required to achieve final grades and completed structures as defined in the Contract Documents, shall be included in the base bid and shall not be compensated using unit prices. C. Unauthorized Excavation and Placement of Structural Fill: The Contractor shall be responsible for all un-authorized excavation. Unit prices shall not be applied to un- authorized excavation or fill. The Owner is not responsible for un-authorized excavation, nor the import or placement of Structural Fill required to replace any unauthorized excavation, unless approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. D. Sub-Grade: For the purpose of the Contractor Bid, the sub-grade elevations are defined in Paragraph 1.4.G. E. Soil integrity will be influenced by the weather conditions and the Contractor's handling and protection of the material as it is removed and placed. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to protect soils from the elements. Material that is deemed unsuitable due to lack of protection will not be applied to the unit price. The Contractor will be responsible for removing such material and replacing with acceptable material at no additional cost to the owner. F. The Contractor shall not apply the Unit Prices noted above to material that was not defined as unsuitable material by the Geotechnical Engineer. 1.10 SITE CONDITIONS A. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide, erect and maintain barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing vegetation and improvements not indicated for removal. Restore any site improvements, including but not limited to landscaping, pavement, walks, structures, fences and planters, damaged by this work to their original condition, as acceptable to Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 6 Owner. Restore to original grades and conditions, areas adjacent to site disturbed or damaged as a result of site preparation and demolition work. B. Traffic: 1. Do not interfere with or close public ways without permission of governing authorities. Do not interfere with adjacent private facilities. C. Site Utilities: 1. Advise utility companies of excavation activities before starting excavations. Locate and identify underground utilities passing through work area before starting work. 2. Coordinate all utility shutoffs with City of Renton and Renton Fire Department (SFD). Coordinate work with Division 01 requirements. 3. Coordinate utility locating, shutoffs and meter readings with utility companies. Verify that all appropriate services have been disconnected. (Contractor shall pay for all fees and costs associated with utility locating, disconnects, capping, line and meter removals). 4. Do not shut off or cap utilities without advance notice and written approval from the Owner. 5. If underground utilities are encountered in locations other than indicated, immediately advise utility Owners before proceeding. Amend project record documents to show actual locations. 6. Protect existing utilities indicated to remain. 7. All earthwork, including trenching and backfill of the irrigation system, gas, mechanical, & electrical utilities is the responsibility of the General Contractor. D. Objectionable Noises: Conform with local governing requirements regarding noise control. See Division 01 Section for additional information on allowable noise limits. E. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes in accordance with local rules and regulations: See Division 1 Section for additional requirements. 1. Ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, alleys, sidewalks, and adjacent facilities. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets, fire lanes, or sidewalks, without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 3. If required by governing authorities, provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVAL OF FILL MATERIALS A. Approval of Fill Material: All material which is proposed to be used as fill shall be graded and tested for moisture content and compatibility. Gradation and test results shall be submitted for review and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement of fill. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed material at least 72 hours before the material is to be approved for use on-site. The existing site Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 7 material is sensitive to moisture & will be difficult to re-use in wet weather as indicated in the Geotechnical Engineering Report. (Refer to Geotechnical Engineering Report). The Contractor has the option to use on site material for common fill, however use of on-site material must meet specifications and is subject to the approval of the Geotechnical engineer. If on-site material is not suitable for common fill, the Contractor shall import an acceptable common fill conforming to these specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.2 STRUCTURAL FILL A. Structural Fill: 1. All fill placed under footings, trenches, slab-on-grade floor, roadways, sidewalks, walkways, and all other paved areas shall be “structural fill” as defined herein, unless specified otherwise for particular applications. 2. Structural fill shall be imported clean granular fill conforming to the requirements of COS Section 9-03.14(1), Gravel Borrow, which has been accepted by the Geotechnical Engineer for use as structural fill, except that No. 4 sieve shall be limited to 75% maximum and No. 200 sieve shall be limited to 5% maximum. 2.3 COMMON FILL A. Fill placed at locations, other than those requiring structural fill, where the purpose is to raise site grades, shall be “common fill” as defined: 1. Granular material, either naturally occurring or processed. It shall be essentially free from various types of wood waste or other extraneous or objectionable materials. It shall have such characteristics of size and shape that it will compact readily. The maximum particle size shall not exceed 3 inches 2. Imported Common Fill shall meet the following gradation requirements U.S. Standard Sieve Size % Passing by Dry Weight 1/4 inch square 25 No. 200 10 3. Imported material consisting of granular soils essentially cleaned of organic and other deleterious material and of such particle size and gradation that specified compaction can be readily attained. The moisture content of common fill material at placement and compaction shall be within a range of one percent above to two percent below optimum moisture content. 4. Common fill shall be tested and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to use. 2.4 CRUSHED SURFACING A. Crushed Surfacing Top Course: shall be manufactured from ledge rock, talus or gravel and shall be 5/8" minus for top course. Crushed surfacing top course shall conform to the gradations of Section 9-03.9(3) of the Standard Specification. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 8 B. Crushed Surfacing Base Course: shall be manufactured from ledge rock, talus or gravel and shall be 1 1/4" minus for base course. Crushed surfacing base course shall conform to the gradations of Section 9-03.9(3) of the Standard Specification with the following revisions: the material passing the No. 200 sieve shall be 5.0% (maximum), and it shall have at least two mechanically fractured surfaces. 2.5 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE BEDDING A. Pipe Bedding for Water, Sewer, and Storm shall be as follows: 1. Water Pipe: Specification 33 10 00 Water Distribution System 2. Sewer Pipe: Specification 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewer System 3. Storm Pipe: Specification 33 40 00 Storm Drainage System B. 2.6 GRAVEL FOR TRENCH BACKFILL A. Gravel for trench backfill shall be Gravel Borrow in accordance with Section 9- 03.14(1) of the Standard Specifications. Imported material consisting of granular soils essentially cleaned of organic and other deleterious material and of such particle size and gradation that specified compaction can be readily attained. The moisture content of gravel trench backfill material at placement and compaction shall be within a range of one percent above to two percent below optimum moisture content. B. On site soils may not be used as gravel trench backfill below pavements. The Contractor shall assume that all gravel trench backfill below paved areas are to be imported Structural Fill. C. Imported gravel trench backfill material shall be tested and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to use. 2.7 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS A. Gravel Backfill for Drains shall be per Section 9-03.12(4) of the Standard Specifications. 2.8 CAPILARY BREAK A. Capillary Break Material shall be 1. Pea Gravel 2. Gravel Backfill for Drains 2.9 TRACER TAPE 1. Utility pipe tracer tape shall be detectable below ground surface, color coded, with utility name printed on tape. Conductive warning tape required over sewer, drainage, water and irrigation pipe. Tape shall be manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed plastic tape, aluminum backed, intended for direct-burial service. Tape shall be not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 9 Tape Schedule Piping Color Wording Irrigation Water Blue Caution Irrigation Water Storm Sewer Green Caution Storm Sewer Sanitary Sewer Green Caution Sanitary Sewer Natural Gas Yellow Caution Natural Gas 2.10 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. Fabric for wrapping exterior drains shall be Mirafi 140N, Supac 4NP or approved equal. B. Fabric for unstable soil subgrades protection as directed by Geotechnical Engineer shall be Mirafi 500x or approved equal. 2.11 QUARRY SPALLS A. Quarry spalls shall be imported material conforming to Section 9-13.1(5) of the Standard Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for application and pickup of the Right of Way Use Permits. 3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove any trash or debris from site, including below ground portions. B. Remove all vegetable matter from within the limits indicated on the drawings. 1. Fill holes thus created with approved, compacted soil. 3.3 STRIPPING A. Strip topsoil, roots, organic debris, and unsuitable material from areas to be developed. 1. Minimum stripping depth shall be 12-inches. Final stripping depth shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Haul and dispose of materials off-site in a legal manner. 3. Shape surface of site to grades and contours as noted. 4. Remove debris, rocks over 6-inch in size, vegetation, and other organic matter from material to be re-used. 5. Control grading around building areas and building excavations at all times to prevent flow of water into excavated areas and ponding adjacent to building. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 10 3.4 SUBGRADE A. For paving and other site improvements, shape subgrades to lines, grades, and cross sections indicated. Any soft soils encountered shall be re-compacted or excavated and replaced with compacted structural fill, whichever is necessary to reach the required compaction. Excavate rock encountered to a depth of 6" below finish subgrade elevations. Bring low areas up to required elevations with approved fill materials. 3.5 SITE GRADING A. General: 1. Required contours and elevations are indicated and noted on Drawings; should indicated figures conflict with actual conditions, notify Owner and obtain direction before proceeding with grading of area in conflict. B. Grading: 1. To the extent applicable shape surface of site to grades and contours as noted. 2. Control grading around building areas at all times to prevent flow of water into excavated areas and ponding adjacent to buildings. 3. At paving and other site improvements, shape subgrades to line, grades, and cross sections indicated. After design grade is reached, Proof roll subgrade to identify soft areas in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer. Any soft soils encountered shall be excavated and replaced with structural fill to reach the required compaction. 3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Catch basins, manholes and similar structures: Excavate to furnish a minimum of 12 inches between sides of excavation and outer surfaces of structure. Take care to excavate to exact depths required; fill excavation with compacted gravel for trench backfill. B. Trench Excavation for Utilities, Mechanical, Electrical, Water, Irrigation, Storm Drains and Sanitary Sewers: 1. Contractor shall hand dig or use air excavation (air spade) only for excavation within tree protection areas, as noted on the plans, under direction of a licensed arborist. 2. Trenching shall include all excavation of every description and of whatever materials encountered to the depth indicated on the Drawings or in the Project Manual and shall be in accordance with the Sections 2-09.3(1) and inclusive of Specifications 331000 “Water Distribution”, 333000 “Sanitary Sewer Systems”, and 334000, “Storm Drainage Systems”. C. Bedding and Backfill for Storm Drains: 1. Bedding of storm drains shall be in accordance with Section 7-17.3(1)B of the Standard Specifications. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 11 2. Backfilling of storm drains shall be in accordance with the plans and Section 7- 17.3(3) of the Standard Specifications, except paragraph 3 of 7-17.3(3)A shall not apply. 3. Compaction of backfill shall be in accordance with the plans and Section 7- 17.3(3)B of the Standard Specifications with the following exceptions: In-place density will be determined by ASTM D6938-10 - Test for Density of Soil in- place by the nuclear method. 3.7 COMPACTION A. General 1. All areas that are to receive compacted fill shall be field reviewed by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to the placement of new fill. 2. Soil surfaces shall be compacted to a minimum relative compaction as listed in this Section. Relative compaction is defined as the ratio of the in-place soil dry density to the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D1557 test method. 3. Place fill in controlled layers the thickness of which is compatible with the type of compaction equipment used. The loose thickness of each fill layer shall not exceed maximum thickness as defined by the on-site soils engineer. Compact each layer to a minimum relative compaction as listed in this Section. Determine the field density of compacted soils by the ASTM D6938-10 and D3017 test method or equivalent. 4. Fill soils shall consist of excavated on-site soils free of organic and deleterious material or imported soils approved by the Geotechnical Engineer as required per the wearing course. All imported fill shall be granular and shall meet the gradation requirements stated herein. The Geotechnical Engineer shall evaluate and/or test proposed imported material for its conformance with specifications prior to delivery to the site. The Contractor shall notify the Geotechnical Engineer 72 hours prior to importing fill to the site. 5. The Geotechnical Engineer shall observe the placement of compacted fill and conduct in-place field density tests on the compacted fill to check for adequate moisture content and the required relative compaction. Where less than the required relative compaction is indicated, remove and replace the substandard soil or apply additional compactive effort and moisture-condition the soil as necessary until the relative compaction as specified in this Section is attained. Provide level testing pads for the conducting of field density test by the Geotechnical Engineer. 6. Compaction Requirements: Compact all fill and backfill to prevent subsequent settlement. Water settling or jetting is not permitted as a means of compaction. Furnish heavy rollers or compactors except as follows: 7. Use pneumatic hand tampers for trenches and areas not accessible to heavy equipment. 8. Required compaction: Compact fill and backfill to the following minimum relative compaction (percentage of maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557): Locations Required Minimum Relative Compaction Moisture Content Range Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 12 Under slabs on grade 95%+2 -2 Under walks and paving 95%+2 -2 Bedding for utility lines 95%+2 -2 Against walls 90%+2 -2 Against footings and foundations 90%-2 Planting and landscape areas 90%+3 -2 Other 90%+3 -2 3.8 FINISH GRADING A. General: Remove all concrete, rocks, rubble and debris larger than 2 inches from surface. Finish grades flush with adjacent surfaces unless indicated otherwise. Finish grades adjacent to sidewalks shall be 1 inch below elevation of sidewalk unless noted otherwise. Execute any fine grading as may be necessary or incidental to all subsequent work. B. Grading Tolerance: Finish grades shall match contours and elevations shown within 1/10 foot, except ADA paths, which shall be with ¼” and conform to ADA Requirements. C. Acceptance of Finish Grading: Finish grades will be inspected and subject to acceptance by the Owner. Correct work not approved at no additional cost or time. D. Protection of Finished Surfaces: Allow no heavy objects to be moved over finish grade surfaces. At no cost to Owner, repair any ruts or holes in finished surfaces, and any obstruction to positive drainage. Repair areas showing settlement. 3.9 DISPOSAL OF EARTH MATERIALS A. Remove all excavated material that is not acceptable for use as fill on site. Legally dispose of excess material off site, at Contractor’s expense. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Geotechnical Engineer will approve fill materials, observe placement of compacted fill, and conduct in-place field density tests on compacted fill, checking moisture content and relative compaction. Where less than required relative compaction is indicated, Contractor shall remove and replace substandard soil, or further compact and moisture-condition soil until specified relative compaction is attained. Furnish level testing pads for conducting field density test by Geotechnical Engineer. B. Adjustments: 1. Repair ruts and holes in finished graded surfaces. 2. Correct slopes and obstructions to positive drainage. 3. Repair areas showing settlement. 4. Make corrections and adjustments to finish grading, as directed by Architect. C. Protection: Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 20 00 October 20, 2021 EARTH MOVING EARTH MOVING 312000 - 13 1. Do not permit heavy objects to be moved over finish grades surfaces. 2. Protect from run-off and other conditions which may alter finish grades. 3. Private and Public Utilities: Protect from damage. 4. Paved Areas Intended to Remain: Protect from damage. 5. Contractor is responsible for the protection of all prepared subgrades. Repair of damage subgrades shall be at Contractors expense. 3.11 CLEANING A. Dispose of waste, surplus, and unsuitable materials according to laws, regulations, and ordinances off site at a site obtained by Contractor. B. Wet Weather Work: If earthwork is to be performed or fill is to be placed in wet weather or under wet conditions when control of soil moisture content is not possible, the following recommendations should be followed. 1. Earthwork should be performed in small areas to minimize exposure to wet weather. Excavation or the removal of unsuitable soils should be followed promptly by the placement and compaction of clean structural fill. The size and type of construction equipment used may have to be limited to prevent soil disturbance. Under some circumstances, it may be necessary to excavate soils with a backhoe to minimize subgrade disturbance caused by equipment traffic. 2. The ground surface within the construction area should be graded to promote runoff of surface water and to prevent the ponding of water. 3. Material used as structural fill should consist of clean granular soil containing less than 5 percent fines. The fines should be non-plastic. 4. The ground surface within the construction area should be sealed by a smooth drum vibratory roller, or equivalent, and under no circumstances should be left uncompacted and exposed to moisture. Soils which become too wet for compaction should be removed and replaced with clean granular materials. 5. Excavation and placement of fill should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer to verify that all unsuitable materials are removed and suitable compaction and site drainage is achieved; and bales of straw and/or geotextile silt fences should be strategically located to control erosion. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 25 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes the work to minimize erosion and to construct facilities for treating stormwater runoff, dewatering pump discharge and seepage at all areas of the project site including Contractor work and staging areas. B. The Contractor is responsible for implementing Best Management Practices (BMP’s) in accordance with the City of Renton requirements. The information provided on the contract plans should be considered a minimum for the anticipated construction and conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for adding additional BMP’s as conditions change at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate installation and inspections of the BMP’s with the City of Renton Clear and Grade Inspector. Additional BMP’s shall be stockpiled on site as requested by the Site Inspector. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing 2. Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. WSDOT-APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridges, and Municipal Construction, 2020 Edition (Standard Specifications) 2. Standard Plans WSDOT/APWA Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction 3. Soils Report Geotechnical Engineering Report, Family First Community Center, Prepared by The Riley Group, Inc. Dated June 8, 2018. 4. NPDES National Pollution Elimination Discharge System Construction Storm Water General Permit 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Submittals: Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 25 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 2 1. Product catalog cuts for silt fence, and siltsac inserts. 2. Aggregate Materials: Coarse aggregate for gravel construction entrance. 3. Hydroseed: Certificate data sheets for seed, fertilizers, and compost which indicate source of supply, variety, and/or composition. B. A draft Construction Surface Water Pollution Prevention Plan (CSWPPP) has been submitted to the City of Renton as part of the Permit. The CSWPPP will be provided to the Contractor and will be the Contractor’s responsibility to update, change, and maintain as necessary to respond to conditions and regulatory requirements. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Work shall comply with City of Renton standards. The Contractor shall coordinate with the City of Renton Clearing and Grading Inspector. B. NPDES: Contractor shall conform to all requirements in the NPDES Construction Stormwater General Permit 1.6 NPDES CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER GENERAL PERMIT A. The City of Renton (COR) has secured the project’s NPDES Construction Stormwater General Permit (herein referred to as the NPDES Permit) from the Department of Ecology. COR will provide a copy of the NPDES Permit to the Contractor upon receipt. B. The City of Renton is currently listed as the Operator/Permittee for the NPDES Permit. Prior to commencing earth moving activities, COR will transfer the permit to the Contractor after the contract has been awarded. COR and the Contractor shall complete the “Transfer of Coverage” application to change the Operator/Permittee (Section I of the application) and the Contractor shall complete the On-Site Contact Person (Section III of the application). The Contractor shall take on all responsibilities associated with the NPDES Permit including taking ownership of the SWPPP, monitoring and reporting requirements for stormwater discharge for turbidity and pH, and all other aspects of the NPDES Permit, for the duration of the Contract. This scope of work is considered part of the base contract. C. Contractor shall conform to all requirements in the NPDES Construction Stormwater General Permit including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Prepare and maintain the SWPPP. The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining and updating the SWPPP. A draft copy of the SWPPP has been submitted to the City of Renton and is included for reference. The Contractor shall take full ownership of this document as necessary to address the means and methods as well as to address site specific conditions that come up as part of the Contractor’s inspections. 2. Have a Certified Erosion Control Lead on site and available at all times. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate number of certified personnel to execute the work. 3. Provide and install required source control measures, Best Management Practices, storm water treatment measures, and maintain compliance with stormwater discharge requirements as specified in the NPDES Permit and summarized below in Part III of this document. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 25 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 3 4. Complete the Construction Stormwater Site Inspection Form (located in Appendix D of the SWPPP) and submit it to the City of Renton Inspector throughout the construction duration as required by the NPDES permit. 5. Complete Table 6 – BMP Selection Schedule (Element 12: “Manage the Project”) on a monthly basis. 6. File a notice of termination application to complete the NPDES permit once the site is stabilized according to DOE standards. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Conform to regulatory requirements, including but not limited to the Clean Water Act of 1972, and Washington Administrative Code 173, and RCW 90.48. Conform to APWA Supplement Section 1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control. B. Schedule, sequence, coordinate, and oversee all temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures in accordance with City of Renton Standards. 1.8 SCHEDULE A. Sediment control facilities shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition until such time that clearing and/or construction is completed including periods when construction activities are reduced or shut down. 1. The implementation, maintenance, replacement and additions to erosion/ sedimentation control systems shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for erosion and sediment control on the construction site. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain erosion control through the duration of the project. B. Maintain erosion control after substantial completion per this section. C. Provide continuous monitoring as required by the NPDES permit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Quarry Spalls: Per Section 9-13.6, WSDOT Standard Specifications. B. Filter Fabric 1. Nonwoven Filter Fabric: Spun-bonded, nonwoven fabric composed of polypropylene filaments. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and shall be resistant to alkalis and acids found in soils. Use as drainage geotextile for separation of native materials from filtering material, Mirafi 140N or equivalent. 2. Woven Filter Fabric: Woven polypropylene, monofilament yarn used for silt fences. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and shall be resistant to alkalis and acids found in soils. The base plastic shall contain stabilizers and inhibitors to make the fabric resistant to ultraviolet radiation. Mirafi 700X or equivalent. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 25 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 4 C. Filter Bag Inserts shall be in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-33.2(1), Table 5, Class B D. Polyethylene (PE) Sheeting: In accordance with COS Standard Specifications Section 9-14.5(4). 2.2 STRAW A. Straw: Air dried condition free of noxious weeds, weed seeds and materials detrimental to plant life. Be seasoned before baling or loading and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Shall be in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-14.5(3). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The maintenance, replacement and upgrading of these facilities is the responsibility of the Contractor until all construction is approved. B. The TESC facilities shown on the plans are the minimum requirements for anticipated site conditions. During the construction period, the erosion control facilities installed may require maintenance, relocation or upgrading (e.g. additional sumps, relocation of ditches and silt fences, etc.) as shown on the plans or as needed. Contractor shall pay for all costs associated with the construction, maintenance, upgrading and removal of the erosion control system throughout project duration. C. Adequate temporary and permanent control of surface water runoff and subsurface seepage will be required in order to allow site access, excavation, and construction of underground utilities to proceed. Site preparation and initial construction activities should be planned to minimize disturbance to the existing ground surface particularly during extended wet weather periods. During wet site conditions, equipment traffic should not be allowed on exposed subgrade areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting disturbed or prepared surfaces by some form of weather cover if left exposed for more than 2 days. Contractor shall also protect disturbed or prepared surfaces from surface ponding, stormwater runoff, and construction traffic. The Contractor will be solely responsible for any repairs required to these surfaces. D. Access Streets and Roadways: Provide wheel cleaning stations to clean wheels and undercarriage of trucks before leaving site, as necessary to prevent dirt from being carried onto public streets. If streets are fouled, clean immediately in conformance with City of Seattle and all governing requirements and regulations. E. During construction the runoff of stormwater flows shall be controlled and treated to minimize water quality impacts. The Contractor shall plan and execute the work in a manner which protects the project, and downstream waterways. Runoff from undisturbed areas shall be diverted from areas of construction activity by utilizing drainage ways as much as possible. Where this is not possible, and as practicable, diversion dikes and swales shall be constructed so runoff from undisturbed areas will not be contaminated by construction activity. Cleared and excavated materials shall not be deposited or stored in or alongside drainage ways where the materials can be eroded by storm runoff. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 25 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 5 F. The Contractor shall remove temporary erosion control measures upon establishment of permanent erosion control and restoration of disturbed areas. Contractor shall remove all accumulated sediment from the drainage system immediately prior to final acceptance. All drainage structures and conveyance systems shall be thoroughly cleaned at the completion of construction, prior to final acceptance. G. The Contractor shall flush and thoroughly clean the existing and new storm water conveyance systems prior to substantial completion. Remove all accumulated sediment from catch basins, manholes, pipes, and outfalls. 3.2 EXAMINATION: A. Verify locations of existing catch basins and related storm drainage features that may be impacted by construction activities. B. PREPARATION: 1. Locate existing utilities, avoid damage or disturbance. For aid in utility location call "Dial Dig 1-800-424-5555," 48 hours (two working days) prior to beginning construction. Provide and pay for additional marking as required. 3.3 SILT FENCES A. Silt fences shall be installed per the drawings and parallel to existing contours. 3.4 PLACING PLASTIC COVERING A. Plastic covering shall be installed on erodible stockpiles and embankment slopes as shown in the plans or as designated by the Owner. B. Overlap joints minimum 28 inches. Overlap in direction of drainage and prevent water from draining onto material being protected. Secure in place to prevent movement and damage. Provide sandbags at 2.5 feet spacing and tie the sand bags together with rope on slopes greater than 3:1. Minimize driving stakes through plastic. 3.5 STRAW BALE CHECK DAMS: A. Construct such that drainage flows through bales. Bevel bale edges or fill gaps to insure drainage passes through straw filter. Larger flows may flow over top on occasion. Key bales into ground to prevent drainage under bales. Raise elevations of ends of check dams to prevent drainage around ends. Provide splash pad on downstream side to prevent scouring from high flows or overtopping. 3.6 CATCH BASIN INLET PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall install filter on all catch basins that receive construction runoff as indicated on the drawings and as directed by the City Inspector. Catch basin sediment filters shall be cleaned when 12-inches of sediment accumulation is evident. B. When cleaning Catch basin sediment filters do not allow sediment to fall into catch basin. Remove catch basin filter in such a manner as to not allow any sediment to enter the catch basin. Dispose of sediment in a proper manner. Clean catch basin filter prior to re-installation. Replace catch basin filters if signs of deterioration are evident (tears, rips, puncture holes etc.). C. Catch basin filters shall be maintained throughout the project. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 25 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 6 3.7 STRAW MULCH A. Straw mulch shall be applied 2 to 3 inches thick at the rate of 4,000 lb/acre or 2 to 3 bales per 1,000 square feet. Straw shall be crimped to avoid windblow. 3.8 TURBIDITY MONITORING A. The contractor shall be responsible for meeting turbidity and pH requirements as stated within the Turbidity Monitoring Report and the NPDES Permit. Additional TESC measures may be required to achieve discharge requirements. The contractor shall be responsible for providing additional measures as work progresses to meet turbidity requirements. B. The proposed project will implement a turbidity monitoring program in compliance with the State Surface Water Quality Standards (WAC 173.201 A). The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the monitoring plan with the City of Renton Construction Inspector. Monitoring will be accomplished by testing and comparing upstream flows to on-site construction runoff flows at the point of discharge. A third party shall perform the turbidity measuring using an approved turbidity meter. The person performing the testing and monitoring shall be familiar with the turbidity meter and all applicable laws and regulations associated with the turbidity monitoring program. C. Two weeks prior to the beginning of construction, background levels will be established by testing upstream tributary area twice per week for two weeks. The stormwater sampling location for establishing the background level will be the catch basin that is also the discharge point for the construction stormwater runoff from the site (see TESC Plans). The background turbidity levels will be established as the baseline of the pre-construction turbidity measurements. D. Turbidity monitoring and reporting will be required daily during construction in the rainy season (October 1st through April 30th) and weekly between May 1 and September 30. Turbidity reports may not be necessary during extended periods of low flow or no flow conditions; the contractor shall coordinate this arrangement with the City of Renton Inspector. Due to the anticipated low flow or no flow conditions during the drier summer months, storm water flow may cease, causing an interruption in the turbidity monitoring and reporting. The contractor shall make available the monitoring reports to the City of Renton Inspector. E. The benchmark for turbidity discharging from construction sites is defined as: 1. Not to exceed 25 NTU. F. The monitor shall post the turbidity monitoring results on the attached Turbidity Testing Form. The form shall be posted in the job trailer and distributed to the Owner and the City of Renton Inspector. The Turbidity testing results shall be posted immediately after the test is performed. G. If during the construction season the monitoring reports indicate that the threshold level of turbidity is exceeded, the monitor must report the condition to the Clearing and Grading Inspector immediately, or as soon as practical. The contractor shall maintain a stockpile of materials to implement additional BMP measures as required during construction to bring the project into compliance when the threshold level of turbidity has been exceeded. Upon termination of services of the third party monitor, a final report must be submitted to the Clearing and Grading Inspector. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 25 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 7 3.9 PH MONITORING A. The proposed project shall implement a pH monitoring program in compliance with the State Surface Water Quality Standards (WAC 173.201 A). The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the monitoring plan with the City of Renton Construction Inspector. The Contractor’s Certified Erosion Control Lead shall measure the pH. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting pH requirements as stated within the NPDES Permit. Additional ESC measures may be required to achieve discharge requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional measures as work progresses to meet pH requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Runoff from soil treated with cement will have altered pH levels. Contractor shall take precautions to minimize runoff from areas of cement treated soils. Should runoff occur, adequate treatment of pH levels with methods such as CO2 sparging is required. C. pH monitoring shall be conducted with a calibrated pH meter, pH test kit, or wide range pH indicator paper. D. pH monitoring shall begin when soil cement treatment first occurs and when concrete is first poured and exposed to precipitation and continue weekly throughout and after the concrete pour and curing period, until stormwater pH is in the range of 6.5 to 8.5 Standard Units (su). During this time a representative sample must be obtained to conduct a pH analysis at least once per week. E. pH shall be monitored in the sediment pond or other locations that receive stormwater runoff from the area of significant concrete work before the stormwater discharges to surface waters. F. The benchmark value for pH is 8.5 (su). Anytime sampling indicates that pH is 8.5 or greater, the Permittee must either: 1. Prevent the high pH water (8.5 or above) from entering storm sewer systems or surface waters; or 2. If necessary, adjust or neutralize the high pH water until it is in the range of pH 6.5 to 8.5 (su) using an appropriate treatment BMP such as carbon dioxide (CO2) sparging or dry ice. The Contractor must obtain written approval from Ecology before using any form of chemical treatment other than CO2 sparging or dry ice. G. The monitor shall post the monitoring results in the job trailer and distribute to the Owner and the County Inspector and submit online to DOE. The results shall be posted immediately after the test is performed. Upon termination of services of the third-party monitor, a final report must be submitted to the County Inspector. H. If, during the construction season, the monitoring reports indicate that the threshold range of pH is exceeded, the monitor must report the condition to the County Inspector immediately, or as soon as practical. The Contractor shall maintain a stockpile of materials to implement additional BMP measures as required during construction to bring the project into compliance at no additional cost to the owner. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 31 25 00 October 20, 2021 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 312500 - 8 3.10 ADJUSTMENTS AND REVISIONS A. Adjust or move swales, berms, pipes, culverts, bales, and silt fences as necessary during construction to direct site runoff to temporary ponds, silt filters, and grass swales. 3.11 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE A. Protection: 1. Prevent silt-laden water from leaving site or from entering off-site storm sewer systems. 2. All slopes, cut, or fill areas where Work has stopped for more than 30 days shall be stabilized by polyethylene sheeting or other method to prevent erosion and sediment transport. 3. Keep all off-site parking areas and streets clean from construction activities. Paved surfaces shall be kept clean by the use of mechanical sweeping equipment, hand shovels and brooms or other accepted methods suitable of removing dirt, rock, silt and sand. No street washing will be allowed. B. Supplementary measures: 1. Provide additional silt control and temporary erosion control measures as required to protect soils and prevent silt laden runoff from leaving project site at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.12 MAINTENANCE: A. Monitor and maintain silt control measures. Remove accumulations of sediment when more than 50 percent of silt storage capacity is filled. Maintain all temporary erosion control facilities until need for each facility has been superseded by other stabilization methods or until Architect authorizes removal. B. Inspect and repair temporary erosion control facilities. Inspect entire system to ensure proper operation a minimum of once per week, during and after storms, and prior to weekends and holidays. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 12 16 October 20, 2021 ASPHALT PAVING ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1. New asphalt concrete paving, including crushed rock courses. 2. Asphalt Overlay B. Related Sections: Coordinate related requirements specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: Section 31 10 00 – Site Preparation Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving 1.2 REFERENCE A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. WSDOT Standard Specifications: Washington State Department of Transportation 2020 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. 2. Design Manual: Transportation Department, City of Renton, Current Edition. 3. Soils Report Geotechnical Engineering Report, Family First Community Center, Prepared by The Riley Group, Inc. Dated June 8, 2018. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. This work shall consist of two or more courses of plant mixed asphalt concrete placed on a prepared foundation or base in accordance with these specifications and in close conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross-sections shown in the plans. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. B. Submit Certificates: Furnish certification that all materials comply with specification requirements; include laboratory test reports verifying compliance. Mixing plant to be member of Asphalt Paving Association of Washington (APAW) and approved by Architect. 1.5 LAYOUT AND DIMENSION A. Layout and Dimensions shall be in conformance with Section 31 10 00 “Site Preparation”. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 12 16 October 20, 2021 ASPHALT PAVING ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 2 1.6 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Where paving interferes with the completion of the Work, cut out and dispose of at Contractor's expense. Upon completion of the Work, patch all such damaged pavement to match adjacent existing paving. B. Environmental Requirements shall be In accordance with referenced standard specifications and the following: 1. Do no paving in rain or when subgrade or base is wet or frozen. 2. Do not apply tack coats when temperature is below 50 degrees F. or when base is wet. 3. Apply asphalt concrete paving only when temperature is above 40 degrees and when base is dry. C. Protection & Controls: 1. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades, including crown and cross slopes, for each course of paving until completion and acceptance of the Work. 2. Traffic Control: Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic lanes during paving operations as required for other construction activities and for access to the existing building and facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the new paving against vehicular traffic prior to and for a minimum of 48 hours following any required seal coat operation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Note that work correction is to include aggregate separation, soft spots, and excess porosity. B. Repair cracks; repair unsatisfactory elevation irregularities immediately upon notification; replace any paving not draining properly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Comply with Quality Control Section provisions. Specifications, and Manufacturer's data. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern. 1. Conform to APAW - Section II, "Specifications for Asphalt Paving" of above referenced manual. Provide bases, type and thickness of asphalt concrete as required by these specifications and plans for site paving. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Base Materials: See Specification 31 20 00 for Base Course materials. B. Tack Coat: CSS-1 in accordance with Standard Specification, Paragraph 9-02.1(6). Apply to all vertical surfaces to which "HMA" abuts. C. Asphalt concrete shall be Class ½” HMA composed of asphalt and aggregate which, with or without the addition of mineral filler and blending sand as may be required, shall be mixed Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 12 16 October 20, 2021 ASPHALT PAVING ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 3 in the proportions specified to provide a homogenous, stable and workable mixture. HMA Shall be 1/2-inch HMA in accordance with Section 9-03.8 of the Standard Specifications D. Asphalt Binder shall be viscosity grade AR-4000, PG 58-22 per Section 9-02.1(4) of the Standard Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes Contractor's acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1. Construction shall conform to the details, dimensions and grades specified. Maximum variations in finished grade of paving shall be +/- 1/8" in 10 feet. B. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this Section. 1. Protect work of other trades. Take special care in work adjacent to buildings. 2. Should any defacement or damage occur, repair or replace as directed. 3. Provide barricades and warning devices as required and in accordance with the current Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 3.2 ASPHALT PAVING INSTALLATION A. General: Remove all existing fill, debris, vegetation, and other perishable materials from areas to be paved. Proof-roll subgrade and address soft yielding areas per Engineers recommendation. Bring areas requiring fills to rough grade elevations. Install wood headers and benders to true lines as indicated and securely staked to prevent movement or displacement during paving operations. Remove upon completion. B. Base Course: Place in accordance with Section 4-04 of the Standard Specifications and to the thickness shown on the plan or to match existing depth, whichever is greater. Materials shall be graded and compacted in 4-inch maximum layers to at least 98 percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D. C. Tack Coat: All contact surfaces, curbs and cold pavement joints shall be painted with asphalt emulsion before the surfacing is laid. All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be fully compressed by the spreading machine and be free from surface irregularities. D. Asphalt Concrete Paving: Provide HMA as indicated on the plans, consisting of mineral aggregate, uniformly mixed with bituminous material in a central plant. Provide all labor, equipment and materials required to complete the work. All asphalt concrete pavement work shall conform to Section 5-04.3 of the Standard Specifications. E. Place asphalt in accordance with Section 5-04 of the Standard Specifications. Spread, finish and compact in accordance with Sections 5-04.3(9) and 5-04.3(10). Minimum lift thickness shall be 1 ½ inches. F. Construct joints in accordance with Section 5-04.3(12) of the Standard Specifications. Provide surface smoothness in accordance with Section 5-04.3(13). Accomplish paving in accordance with the weather limitations outlined in Section 5-04.3(1) of the Standard Specifications. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 12 16 October 20, 2021 ASPHALT PAVING ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 4 G. Sample and test asphalt concrete in accordance with Sections 5-04.3(10)B and 5- 04.3(10)E of the Standard Specifications. H. The completed surface of the wearing course shall not vary more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet from the rate of slope shown in project plans. Depressions exceeding 1/4" shall be corrected. 3.3 ASPHALT PAVEMENT PATCHING A. Patching Bituminous Pavement: Replace the existing pavement with ½” HMA asphalt concrete pavement and compacted aggregate base course to either match the existing thickness as the existing HMA and base the asphalt paving section as shown on the plans, whichever is greater. 3.4 CLEANING A. After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphaltic materials. B. Do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic paving until it has cooled and hardened, and in no case sooner than six (6) hours after placing. C. Provide barricades and warning devices to prevent traffic on asphalt paving and to alert pedestrians to the surface condition. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 13 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE PAVING CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Provide concrete curb and gutters, vertical curb, and extruded curb as shown on the project drawings. 2. Provide concrete sidewalks, walkways, stairs, including curb ramps and slabs as shown on the project drawings and as required to provide complete and uniform pedestrian access. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving 1.3 REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. City of Renton Pre-Approved Plans, Current Edition. 2. Standard Plans WSDOT/APWA Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. 3. WSDOT: 2020 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction 4. Soils Report Geotechnical Engineering Report, Family First Community Center, Prepared by The Riley Group, Inc. Dated June 8, 2018. 1.4 LAYOUT AND DIMENSION A. Layout and Dimensions shall be in conformance with Section 31 10 00 “Site Preparation”. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during the execution of this portion of the work who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types of concrete specified and who shall direct all work performed under this section. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 13 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE PAVING CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 2 B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the current City of Renton Standards. Comply with all requirements of APWA manual, latest edition. C. Concrete Testing: Comply with testing requirements of Section 03 01 00. D. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect curb, walk and slab materials before, during and after installation. Protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. E. Replacements: In the event of damage, repair or replace walks and slabs to the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost to the owner. 1.6 PROJECT SITE A. Existing Conditions: Where paving interferes with the completion of the Work cut out and dispose of at Contractor's expense. Upon completion of the Work, patch all such damaged pavement to match adjacent existing paving. B. Environmental Conditions: Do no work when base or earth sub-grade is wet or contains an excess amount of moisture. C. Protection & Controls: 1. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades, including crown and cross slopes, for each course of paving until completion and acceptance of the Work. 2. Traffic Control: Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic lanes during paving operations as required for other construction activities and for access to the existing building and facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the new paving against vehicular traffic. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Form Materials: 1. Provide wood edge forms, Douglas Fir and Larch, number two grade minimum, seasoned, SAS, straight and true. 2. Special edge forms for radii shall be approved in advance by the Architect. B. On-site Concrete: shall be 3000 P.S.I., air-entrained, minimum 5-3/4 edge sacks per yard. Slump to be 4” maximum. Maximum aggregate size: ¾’’. C. Concrete for Driveway Aprons: shall be 4000 P.S.I., air-entrained, minimum 5-3/4 edge sacks per yard. Slump to be 4” maximum. Maximum aggregate size: ¾’’. Compressive strength shall be 3000 P.S.I. within three days. D. Joints: Refer to Landscape Architectural plans. E. Base Materials: See Specification 31 20 00 for Base Course materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 13 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE PAVING CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 3 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes Contractor's acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Prior to all work of this Section, inspect work of other trades to verify that such work is complete to a point where curb and walk installation may properly commence. B. Verify that curbs and walks may be placed in accordance with the original design. C. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade for pouring of concrete. Provide minor excavation and hand preparation required for placement of base course. Remove all organic materials, fill all voids, compact soft spots and other soils disturbed by excavation to 95% maximum soil density. Moisture condition soil per Specification 312000, “Earth Moving”. 3.4 LAYOUT A. Form for all required walks and slabs to shapes, sizes, lines and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Layouts to be in accordance with all lines and elevations established by survey data. 3.5 JOINTS A. Expansion Joints: Place expansion joints as shown on drawings and coordinate with curb expansion joints shown on the Drawings. Align joints with building columns and concrete seat walls. B. Score Joints: Place score lines as shown on the Drawings. Equally space between expansion joints. 3.6 FINISHES A. Float and Trowel: Provide “broom finish” by lightly combing with a medium stiff broom. Provide “exposed aggregate” finish where shown on plans. 3.7 FINISH TOLERANCES A. Finish all walks and slabs to plus or minus 0.05 feet at any point from line and grade shown on the Drawings. B. Slope walks to drain as shown on the Drawings. Walks less than 8’-0” wide shall be sloped at ¼” per foot in the width direction of the walk or as shown on drawings. Slope all walks to drain away from the building. C. ADA paths shall conform to ADA regulations. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 13 13 October 20, 2021 CONCRETE PAVING CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 4 3.8 CURING A. Apply curing compound in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 17 23 October 20, 2021 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PRICING SET 32 17 23 - 1 PART - 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work includes but is not limited to following: 1. Furnish and install pavement markings upon asphalt parking surfaces. 2. Furnish and install site parking signs as indicated. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to following: 1. Section 321200 - Asphalt Paving. 2. Section 321300 - Concrete Curbs 1.3 REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Policies apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. King County Design and Construction Standards, 2016 Edition 2. WSDOT-APWA 2020 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, (Herein: Standard Specifications) 3. Manual On Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) Current Edition. 4. Federal Specification TT-P-115, Traffic Paint. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 013300. B. Submit product data for all materials specified. 1.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Store materials proposed for use on the project site in sealed and labeled containers or segregate at source of supply, sufficiently in advance of needs. Clearly identify materials by designated name, specification number, batch number, intended use and quantity formulation number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity involved. At the Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 17 23 October 20, 2021 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PRICING SET 32 17 23 - 2 discretion of the Owner’s Representative, material may be approved for use based on the following data furnished by the Contractor. 1. A test report showing that the proposed batch meets all specified requirements 1.6 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROLS A. Place suitable warning signs for alerting approaching traffic. Place traffic cones or markers along newly painted lines to control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces. B. Contractor shall review all proposed temporary and permanent striping and channelization with the owner prior to installation. PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TRAFFIC PAINT A. Paint shall be lead free, Low VOC Solvent Based or Waterborne paint per Section 9-34.2 of the Standard Specifications. B. Paint shall be delivered and stored in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formulation, or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's name, formulation number and directions, all of which shall be printed legibly at time of use. The paint shall be homogeneous, easily stirred to a smooth consistency, and shall show no hard settlement or other objectionable characteristics. C. Color shall conform to Section 9-34.2(2) of the Standard Specifications. 2.2 SITE SIGNS A. Fire Lane Signs shall read “NO PARKING – FIRE LANE”. 1. Signs shall be located at the entrance to each fire lane and at 150-foot intervals along the route. 2. Signs shall measure 12” x 18” and have red letters on a white background. B. Site Signs shall be 80-millimeter anodized aluminum with engineer grade reflective sheeting and graffiti film. C. Sign mounting hardware and fasteners shall be stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized. D. Signposts shall be a minimum 2” diameter Schedule 40 galvanized pipe with top caps, or approved equal. PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 17 23 October 20, 2021 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PRICING SET 32 17 23 - 3 A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes your acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1. Pavement markings shall conform to Section 8-22 of the Standard Specifications. 2. All permanent signs shall conform to Section 8-21 of the Standard Specifications. 3.2 PREPARATION A. All surfaces shall be dry, free of any loose debris, and within the proper temperature range prior to striping. When required by the pavement marking manufacturer’s installation instructions, pavement markings that will adversely affect the bond of new pavement marking material to the roadway surface shall be removed from pavement surfaces in accordance with Section 8-22.3(6) of the Standard Specifications. B. Apply materials to new HMA that is sufficiently cured according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Typically, Type D material applied to new HMA pavement requires a pavement cure period of 21 days. This cure period may be reduced if the manufacturer performs a successful bond test and approves the reduction of the pavement cure period. C. For new Portland cement concrete surfaces, remove curing compounds and laitance by an approved mechanical means. Air blast the pavement with a high-pressure system to remove extraneous or loose material. Apply materials to concrete that has reached a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi and that is sufficiently cured according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Typically, Type D material applied to Portland cement concrete pavement requires a pavement cure period of 28 days. This cure period may be reduced if the manufacturer performs a successful bond test and approves the reduction of the pavement cure period. D. After the pavement surface is clean and dry, apply primer as recommended by the manufacturer to the area receiving the pavement markings. Apply the primer in a continuous, solid film according to the recommendations of the primer manufacturer and the pavement markings manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Paint Application shall be per Section 8.22.3(3)E of the Standard Specifications. B. Application thickness shall be per Section 8.22.3(3)F of the Standard Specifications. C. Provide guidelines and templates as necessary to control paint application. Take special precautions in marking letters and symbols. Sharply outline edges of marking. The maximum drying time requirement of the paint specifications shall be strictly enforced, to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic. Discontinue painting operations if there is a deficiency in drying of the marking, until cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected. D. Parking Area: 1. Parking stall striping shall be 4 inches wide painted white unless otherwise noted on the plans. 2. Handicapped Parking Stall Symbol shall be in accordance with Figure 3B-22 of the MUTCD. The boarder and ADA symbol shall be white with a blue background. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 32 17 23 October 20, 2021 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PRICING SET 32 17 23 - 4 3.4 SIGN INSTALLATION A. Install signs at locations as shown on plans and in accordance with Section 8-21.3(2) of the Standard Specifications and MUTCD. 3.5 CLEANING A. Leave premises clean and free of residue of work of this Section. END OF SECTION 32 17 23 Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 30 00 October 20, 2021 SITE IMPROVEMENTS Project #16-0996 32 30 00-1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide and install site furnishings and other site improvements as specified and shown on the drawings. B. Provide District with complete facilities ready to use for regulation activities. C. All work to conform to recommendations and guidelines of all applicable manufacturers, installers and associations, et al. 1.3 COLORS A. As noted, or to be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s complete line. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cut sheets for all specified items and detailed shop drawings for all items requiring fabrication. B. Submit installation procedure to Architect for approval prior to installation. C. Submit source and representative photos of 2 specified boulder sizes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BENCH A. MMCITE Portiqoa Park Bench (PQA151T) with jatoba hardwood seat and backrest, and aluminum sides. Surface mount on concrete paving per manufacturer’s recommendations. Quantity of benches as shown on plans. 2.2 LITTER RECEPTACLE A. MMCITE Prax Litter Receptacle (PRX315T) with steel body, zinc coated liner, waste bag holder, and door made of jatoba wood lamellas. Surface mount on concrete paving per manufacturer’s recommendations. Quantity of litter receptacles as shown on plans. 2.3 BIKE LOCKER A. Sportworks stainless steel single bike locker. Surface mount on concrete paving per manufacturer’s recommendations. Quantity of bike lockers as shown on plans. 2.4 BIKE RACK A. Sportworks “Tofino No Scratch” bike rack. Stainless steel, bead blast satin finish with soft pad. Surface mount on concrete paving. Quantity of racks as shown on plans. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 30 00 October 20, 2021 SITE IMPROVEMENTS Project #16-0996 32 30 00-2 B. Install per manufacturer’s instructions with tamper proof hardware secure to pavement. Stake or mark location for approval by landscape architect prior to installation. 2.5 DECORATIVE BOLLARD A. Stainless Steel Bollards, fixed, as available from Reliance Foundry (888) 735-5680. Model# R-8460, 316 Stainless Steel Bollard. Embedment mount into concrete per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2.6 PICNIC TABLE A. MMCITE Tably Rectangular Table (TBL111T) with jatoba hardwood top and steel structure. Surface mount on permeable concrete pavers per manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Provide two MMCITE Portiqoa Park Benches (PQA111T) with jatoba hardwood seat without backrest, and aluminum sides. Surface mount on permeable concrete pavers per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2.7 RAISED PLANTER A. Galvanized round end stock tank 24” W x 24” x 60” L as available from Behlen Country Farm and Ranch. Drill holes in bottom of tank for drainage. Provide 4” depth gravel in bottom. Fill remainder of planter with vegetable garden mix per landscape specification. Quantity of planters as shown on plans. 2.8 PERMEABLE CONCRETE PAVERS A. Eco-Priora permeable concrete pavers by Mutual Materials (888) 688-8250, color: charcoal, provide 8”x8” and 4”x8” units, pattern as detailed, install per manufacturer’s recommendations. Submit sample. 2.9 CRUSHED STONE JOINT FILLER, BEDDING, AND SUBBASE COURSE FOR PERMEABLE CONCRETE PAVERS A. Crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion <40 per ASTM C 131, minimum CBR of 80% per ASTM D 1883. B. Do not use rounded river gravel. C. All stone materials shall be washed with less than 1% passing the No. 200 sieve. D. Joint/opening filler, bedding: conforming to ASTM D 448 gradation as shown in Table 1 below: Table 1 Grading Requirements for ASTM No. 8 Bedding and Joint/Opening Filler Sieve Size Percent Passing 12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 100 9.5 mm (3/8 in.) 85 to 100 4.75 mm (No. 4) 10 to 30 2.36 mm (No. 8) 0 to 10 1.16 mm (No. 16) 0 to 5 E. Aggregate subbase shall be clean, crushed gravel, or crushed rock type 22 or 24. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 30 00 October 20, 2021 SITE IMPROVEMENTS Project #16-0996 32 30 00-3 2.10 STEEL EDGING A. 6” deep x 3/16” thick commercial steel edging by Col-Met (800) 829-8225. Item # 1007-6, black powder coat finish. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Refer to applicable details and plans for layout and installation. B. Install rigid, plumb and true to lines and levels shown. Stake out all elements called for in this section for approval by Architect. All work of highest quality. C. Unless otherwise indicated, install all products specified by name/manufacturer as per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Refer to Section 32 90 00, Planting. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing and installing automatic irrigation system including complete point of connection to water line, trenching, import bedding and backfill, and furnishing and installing all equipment and items noted on drawings and specified herein, and balancing and testing of system. 2. Work includes connections to existing irrigation system and any repairs necessary to existing irrigation disturbed or damaged during construction. Note: Prior to bidding the work of this Section, Contractors shall visit the site to generally familiarize themselves with existing conditions, soils, slope, access, and other apparent site conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Ordinances: All local, municipal and State laws, rules, and regulation governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with the above-mentioned rules, regulations or requirements, and where a conflict may occur, the rules regulations, or requirements of the governing code shall be adhered to. However, when these specifications and/or drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship or construction of a better quality, higher standard or larger size, these specifications and/or drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules, regulations, or codes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Products and Materials: Immediately after award of contract, provide descriptive literature/information as to all operating characteristics, including operating pressures, pressure losses, materials used in product, test certificates, special features, etc., for those products not specified by manufacturer or those submitted for approval as equal. Only the Landscape Architect can accept an item as "equal". Approval must be in writing. B. Trench Backfill: Submit 1/2-gallon bag of bedding sand for approval by Landscape Architect. 1.5 PERMITS AND FEES A. Obtain all permits and pay required fees to any governmental agency having jurisdiction over the work. Arrange inspections during construction if required by local agencies and ordinances. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-2 1.6 APPROVAL A. Whenever the terms "approve" "approval" or "approved" are used in the Specification, they mean approval of Landscape Architect in writing. 1.7 RECORD IRRIGATION DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish record drawings of the complete irrigation system in accordance with the General and Special Conditions. The Landscape Architect shall provide two sets of full- size prints showing all irrigation work required under this contact. One set of prints is always to be on site during the construction so that Contractor can make a daily record of all work installed. B. Actual location of hidden items including valves, stub cuts, manual drains shut-off valves shall be shown on the prints by dimensions from easily identified permanent features such as buildings curbs fences walks or property lines. Drawings shall show approved manufacturer's name and catalog number. The drawings shall be to scale, and all indications shall be neat. These prints will be observed by the Landscape Architect throughout the course of work. After testing and approval of mainlines and laterals for cover-up all information noted on the job site prints shall be transferred to the final drawings with all indications recorded in a neat orderly way by Contractor. The record drawings shall be turned over to the Landscape Architect for review at or before the Provisional Acceptance (punch list) of the Project. C. Operations Manual: One manual, bound in a hardback cover, shall be submitted to the architect for approval at the time of mainline testing. It shall include as a minimum the following information for all items used on the system: 1. List of authorized distributors and service representatives for each piece of irrigation equipment, including names, addresses, and phone numbers. 2. Guarantee/warranty certificates. 3. Instruction manuals. 4. Parts lists for each item with exploded views of each item showing part numbers. 5. Complete trouble-shooting guide to common irrigation problems. 6. DCVA Test Certification. Contractor shall arrange and pay for test by a Washington State certified backflow assembly tester. 7. Winterization and spring start-up procedures. D. At the time of final inspection of the completed installation, the Contractor shall have completed revisions to the Landscape Architect's satisfaction of the "as-built" drawings and operations manual (indicating all changes) ready to turn over to the District for recording purposes; this shall be accomplished prior to final payment. Provide 3 copies to District. 1.8 JOB CONDITIONS A. Water Source: Refer to Drawings, connect to stub out as shown on civil plans. B. Power Source: 120 V.A.C. power for controller, as provided in electrical drawings. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-3 C. Mechanical/Electrical: 1. Provide (1) 4” diameter schedule 40 conduit and (1) 1" conduit for control and antenna wiring from new controller location to outside planting area and roof as shown on drawings. D. Sleeving: Sleeve under all paved areas, with PVC schedule 40 sleeves, size as shown on plans. E. Other Trades: Coordinate all work with that of other trades. F. Available Water Pressure: Verify available water pressure at point of connection prior to beginning work. 1.9 PROTECTION A. Protect work, adjacent property, public, and be responsible for any damage or injury arising from this contract. B. Confine work to areas designated. Do not disturb natural vegetation outside of project limit lines. Protect all trees within project limits not designated to be removed. Repair or replace vegetation damaged by Contractor's operations to satisfaction of District at Contractor's expense. C. Be cognizant of all utility lines and underground obstruction. Be familiar with all utility, irrigation, mechanical, and electrical plans, so that digging/drilling operations do not damage lines. Replace or repair at Contractor's expense any existing buildings, equipment, underground utilities, walks, stairs, and/or forms damaged because of Contractor's operations in a manner satisfactory to the District before final payment is made. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee the satisfactory operation of equipment, materials and workmanship, including restoration of the area for a period of one year from the date of its acceptance. Repair or replace any defect in equipment or workmanship occurring within that year at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials: All materials to be incorporated in this system shall be new and without flaws or defects and of quality and performance as specified and meeting the requirements of the system. All pipe damaged or rejected because of defects shall be removed from the site at the time of rejections. B. Substitutions: No substitutions of smaller pipe sizes will be permitted but substitutions of larger sizes of same type at no extra cost with approval are acceptable. C. Whenever any material is specified by name or number, such specifications shall be used for facilitating a description of the materials and establishing quality and shall be deemed and construed to be followed by the words "or approved equal." No substitutions will be permitted which have not been submitted for prior written approval of the Landscape Architect. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-4 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings: 1. PVC Pipe and Fittings: PVC compound Type 1, Grade 1, or Type 1, Grade 2, conforming to ASTM D 1784 specifications and approved and certified by the National Sanitation Foundation, all fittings Schedule 40 unless otherwise noted. Each length of PVC pipe is to be marked with an identifying extrusion "run" number and the manufacturer's name or trade name, the pipe size and schedule or class. 2. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: PVC 1120 and 1220 material and shall have 200 psi minimum pressure rating unless otherwise indicated, with SDR 21 walls which conform to ASTM D 2241. PVC pipe with walls heavier than SDR 21 shall be installed when noted. 3. PVC Threaded Pipe PVC 1120 or PVC 1220 materials, Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM D 1785. 4. Plastic Pipe Fittings: Conform to ASTM D 2466, Type 1, Grades 1 or 2. Pipe may be belled on one end with the dimensions of the tapered bell conforming to ASTM D 2672. Molded fittings manufactured of the same materials as the pipe, suitable for solvent weld, unless otherwise specified. Slip fitting socket taper shall be so sized that a dry, unsoftened pipe end can be inserted no more than halfway into the socket. Plastic saddle and flange fittings not permitted. 5. Solvent Weld Compound: Two-step application, with primer and solvent compounds. 2.3 PIPE BEDDING & BACKFILL A. Pipe bedding and backfill of irrigation trenches to subgrade elevation shall be with imported sand (maximum particle size 1/4”). 2.4 IRRIGATION HEADS A. As shown on drawings. 2.5 VALVES A. Quick Coupler Valves: Brass, one-or two-piece with spring-loaded locking rubber cover. As shown on drawings. B. Manual Drain Valves: Brass, 3/4" size, commercial quality, non-rising stem type, as shown on drawings. C. Zone Valves: Electric remote-control valve as shown on drawings. D. Master Valve: Normally closed electric control valve as shown on drawings. 2.6 VALVE BOXES AND PROTECTIVE SLEEVES A. General: Enclose all valves and quick couplers in valve boxes, at depth of pipe. Provide extensions to finish grade as required. B. Valve Boxes: As shown on drawings. Carson #1419-12, green, with flush, bolt down cover. Provide captive bolt and LOC-KIT, typical. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-5 2.7 PROTECTIVE SLEEVE WITH LOCKING CAPS A. 2"-diameter Class 160 PVC, length as required. Caps, Rainbird #63100. All drain valves and manual control valves to be enclosed in protective sleeves/locking caps. 2.8 VALVE KEYS AND VALVE BOX COVER KEYS A. Provide two complete sets of all keys required for opening or operation of valves, valve box covers, and protective sleeve cap covers. 2.9 CONTROLLER A. As indicated on plans. Irrigation contractor shall number each wire with zone number, common and spare indications. B. Determine and coordinate the responsibilities of each trade prior to installation. Install conduit for wires per code and as noted on drawings. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Control Wire: Insulated single-strand copper, minimum AWG No. 14, 600 V UL-approved as Type UF. Copper conductor meet or exceed ASTM B-3. Red, white, orange, and black colors must be available. Sufficient quantities must be supplied to meet splice and extra-wire requirements listed under control wire installation. Control wire size must meet or exceed Rainbird and Toro irrigation control wire specifications including length of run/size ratio. Provide tracer tape attached to control wire at 10'-0" o.c. B. Splice: Make watertight electrical wire splices with either 3-M, Scott's Lock Seal tack 3576- 78 or Pen-Tite PVC socket and sealing plug or Rainbird PT-100 series. C. Electrical Tape: Black plastic, 3/4" wide, minimum of 0.007" thick, and all-weather type. D. Duct Tape: All-weather cloth tape. E. Trace Wire: Bare #10 solid copper. F. Flow Sensor Cable: PE-89, 6 pair wire, and shielded as listed on drawings. 2.11 DRAIN ROCK A. Unfractured rock; 100" passing 1-1/2" square sieve and 0% passing 3/4" square sieve. 2.12 RAIN SHUT OFF DEVICE A. As specified on the Drawings. 2.13 WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL A. As listed on Drawings. 2.14 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Provide all equipment called for by the drawings, and incidental to the installation. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Discrepancies: Upon initiation of work or at earliest time discovered, report to the Architect any deviations between the irrigation drawings and the site. Failure to do so prior to the installing of equipment, and resulting in replacing, and/or relocating, or additional equipment, shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Installation of piping prior to establishment of correct subgrade elevations is strongly discouraged. Contractor must attain specified bury depths. C. Available Pressure Verification: Prior to the start of any work, verify the assumed static pressure at point of connection. Notify Architect in writing of pressure available for approval to proceed. D. Plant Materials: Locate irrigation lines to avoid proposed plant material locations and any existing trees. Minor field adjustments may be made by the Architect to shrubs to avoid equipment. If conflict occurs with tree pit, relocate irrigation line at no additional cost. 3.2 PERFORMANCE A. Stake the sprinkler irrigation system head locations following the schematic design shown on the plans for approval before the construction begins. Alterations and changes in the layout may be expected in order to conform to the ground conditions and to obtain full and adequate coverage of water. It is understood that corrective measures may become necessary but no changes or alteration in the system as planned shall be made without the prior authorization of the Landscape Architect. B. Where connections to existing stub-outs are required make necessary adjustments in layout to connect should stubs not be located exactly as shown. Adjust layout as necessary to install around existing work. Where piping is shown to be under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted area, intention is to install piping in planted areas. Do not install directly over another line in same trench. C. Water service connections shall conform to the requirements set forth by the supplying agency, and all codes and ordinance. D. Trenching: Trenches shall be excavated for all pipe to provide a minimum depth of cover below finish grade as follows: 1. Mainlines - 18” 2. Laterals - 12” E. Excavate no wider at any point than is necessary to lay the pipe or installation equipment. Excavate with vertical sides and provide bracing and shoring as required. F. Excavate to depth required in any material encountered with no extra compensation. Materials unsuitable for bedding of pipe to be removed to depth 4" below trench as directed by Landscape Architect. Suitable bedding material shall be import sand as specified. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-7 G. Exercise care when excavating trenches near existing trees. Where roots are 2" and greater in diameter, except in the direct path of the pipe, hand-excavate and tunnel. When large roots are exposed, wrap with heavy burlap for protection and to prevent excessive drying. Trenches dug by machines shall have the sides hand-trimmed, making a clean cut of the roots. All roots 1/2" and greater in diameter that are cut and trimmed shall be treated with an approved tree wound dressing. Trenches having exposed tree roots shall be backfilled within 24 hours unless adequately protected by moist burlap or canvas. H. The top 6" of topsoil, when such exists, shall be kept separate from subsoil and shall be replaced as the top layer when backfill is made. I. Piping: 1. Drain Valves: Installed at Point of Connection only. Each drain to have 3 cu. ft. drain rock sump. Install valves as per detail. Locate sumps outside of paved areas, use off- sets if necessary. System will be winterized by compressed-air blowout throughout quick coupler. 2. Pipe Placement: Plastic pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide tracer wire attached to pipe 5’ o.c./mainlines only. 3. Sleeves: Where sleeves are required, extend sleeve 12” beyond edge of pavement. J. Jointing: 1. General: All threaded joints (PVC or galv.) shall be sealed with Teflon tape or Rectorseal "Heavy Duty" #100 virgin Teflon thread sealing paste only (no substitutes). 2. Care shall be taken to not over-tighten fittings. 3. Keep interior of pipes clean and free from dirt, debris, excess solvent, pipe cuttings or burrs, and ream to full diameter. When pipe laying is not in progress, close ends of pipe. K. PVC Pipe: Use two-step solvent weld process only, apply as per manufacturer's recommendations. L. No water shall be permitted in pipe until a period of at least 10 hours has elapsed for solvent weld-setting and curing. M. The joints shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system. N. Only factory-threaded schedule 80 PVC pipe may be connected to a threaded fitting without an adapter. O. No male PVC adapters permitted. Use only female PVC adapters with galvanized steel pipe nipples (3" min. length). Street ells permitted only for triple swing joints, and only "Marlex" Schedule 40 high-density polyethylene (no substitutes). P. Installation: 1. General: See details for general installation requirements. Provide sufficient clearance for materials requiring maintenance. Install all materials as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Sprinkler Head/Quick Coupler: Risers for all sprinkler heads and quick-coupler valves shall be standard triple-swing joining type as detailed; made with Schedule 80 PVC threaded fittings. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-8 3. Minimum riser size shall be the iron pipe size of the sprinkler head or quick coupler. 4. All sprinkler heads and quick coupling valves shall be set perpendicular and flush to finished grades. Heads in lawn areas must be slightly depressed to avoid mower damage. Provide sod at field rotor heads. Adjust field grades at heads as needed to avoid high spots at sod transition. 5. Spray pattern shall not overthrow onto structures, glass, parking lots, walkways, or public right-of-ways. 6. Locate heads to avoid possible damage by cars. 7. Heads must be within 6” of edge of paving or curbs. 8. Heads must be 12” from face of building. 9. After Fine grading/mulching adjust all head heights as necessary. Q. Valves: Enclose all valves (including automatic control valves and PRV's) in valve boxes except manual or drain valves which are to be enclosed in protective sleeves with locking caps. Valve box extension may be required. Install as per detail and locate precisely by dimensions to two fixes objects on as-built drawings. R. Valve bonnet packings and bolts shall be checked and tightened before backfilling. S. Control Wiring Installation: Wiring between automatic controller and automatic control valves shall conform with national Electrical Code, latest edition, and shall have a common neutral, white; and separate control conductor for each valve. T. Splices will be permitted only at junction boxes, valve boxes, or at control equipment. A minimum of 2 ft. or excess conductor shall be left at all splices, terminal, and control valves to facilitate inspection and future splicing. Encapsulate all splices with approved sealants. Run a bare copper trace wire from the controller along all mainlines to the furthest zones. Tape wire to bottom of main at 5' maximum intervals. Provide 24” loop of excess control wire at each valve box. Provide 4 spare wires looped through entire system – labeled at each J-box and valve box. U. Clean-Up: Keep the premises free from rubbish and debris at all times and arrange material so as not to interfere with other operations on the job site. Remove all unused material, rubbish, and debris from the site. 3.3 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A. General: To be valid, the pressure tests must be performed under the direction of the Landscape Architect. The Contractor must give 48 hours’ notice to the Landscape Architect when inspection is required. The location, inspection and testing provisions for these specifications will be strictly adhered to. B. If, for any reason, any part of the sprinkler system is backfilled before location, testing, or inspection, it must be completely uncovered and exposed until approved for backfilling by Architect. C. The Architect reserves the right to direct the removal and replacement of any items which, in his opinion, do not present an orderly, reasonably neat, or workmanlike appearance, provided such items can be properly installed in such orderly way by the usual methods in such work. Such removal and replacement shall be done, when directed in writing, at the Contractor's expense without additional cost to the District. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-9 D. Preliminary Inspection/Pressure Testing: Prior to request for preliminary inspection of arrival of Architect, accomplish the following: 1. All pipe and valves (including drain valves and quick couplers) and all other equipment except sprinkler heads in place. 2. Cap all risers except first riser from valve on each lateral (one uncapped riser per lateral), typical. 3. Purge all air from main lines. E. Test of Mains and Valves: With all valves in place and closed, test at 150 psi minimum for 30 minutes without introduction of additional service or pumping pressure. Testing shall be done with one pressure gauge installed on the line where directed by Architect. Lines which show loss of pressure exceeding 5 psi at the end of specified test periods shall be rejected. The Contractor shall correct installations rejects, and retesting will be performed as specified herein. F. Test of Laterals: Purge all air from laterals and cap all risers. Open valves and bring system to line pressure. Lateral lines will be inspected visually. Lines which evidence visible leakage shall be rejected. G. Backfill: After placement of tubing, connection to rigid PVC supply and exhaust headers, initial system flushing, installation of the line flushing valve testing, inspection and approval, backfilling can begin with specified backfill. Backfill when PVC pipe is not in an expanded condition due to heat or pressure. Cooling the pipe can be accomplished by operating the system a short time or by backfilling in the early part of the morning. H. Compaction: 1. Trenches shall be thoroughly water settled. No sluicing will be permitted. Trenches above structure are to be hand tamped only. 2. Trenches or tunnels under paved areas shall be backfilled and tamped with a mechanical tamper in successive 6" lifts. I. Backfill for all trenches, regardless of the type of pipe covered, shall be compacted to minimum 95% density under pavements, 85% under planted areas. J. Rejected Systems: Rejected systems or portions of systems requiring repair and retesting in the manner specified. K. Final Inspection/Operations and Coverage Check: Prior to request for final inspection or arrival of Architect accomplish the following: L. Complete all work, including balancing, adjusting the system (pressure reducing valves, flow adjustment keys, nozzles, etc.) to provide optimum coverage without fogging. Backfill all except valve boxes. M. Coverage Check: Operate each zone of the system for the Architect's inspection. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 328000 Bid Set SECTION 32 80 00 October 20, 2021 IRRIGATION Project #16-0996 32 80 00-10 3.4 SYSTEMS OPERATION ORIENTATION A. At time of and as part of the final inspection, conduct a training and orientation session for the District covering the operation, adjustment and maintenance of the irrigation system. The "as-built" plans and operations manual shall be reviewed and all features explained. The Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing two weeks prior to the training and orientation session. The date and time of the session shall be subject to approval of the Architect. END OF SECTION Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work includes all materials, equipment and labor necessary for: decompaction, placing topsoil, finish grading, planting of trees, shrubs and ground covers, seeding, protection, extended maintenance, guarantee and replacement; and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Note: Prior to bidding the work of this Section, Contractors shall visit the site to generally familiarize themselves with existing conditions, soils, slope, access, and other apparent site conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Plant Material: All plant material quality, size and condition as determined by the current edition of American Association of Nurserymen Standard. Plant names shall conform to latest edition of "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by American Joint Committee of Horticulture Nomenclature. B. Fertilizer: Conform to Washington State Department of Agriculture Laws and Federal Specification O-F-241D pertaining to commercial fertilizers. C. Soil: Conform to USDA soil textural class. D. Seed: Conform to Washington State Department of Agriculture Rules for Seed Certification. E. Compost: Compost to be certified in accordance with the U.S. Compost Council Seat of Testing Assurance (STA) program. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Plant Materials: All plant material shall be ordered immediately following the award of contract. Contractor responsible for assuring that plants of specified sizes and quantities will, in fact, be as specified at the time of planting. Provide District with copies of purchase orders for all plants delivered to the site. 1. Within 30 days after award of contract, submit documentation that all plant material and seed has been ordered. B. Import Topsoil: Submit one-half gallon sample of import topsoil mix for approval by Landscape Architect. C. Compost: Submit source and one-half gallon sample of compost amendment for approval by Landscape Architect. D. Wood Chip Mulch: Submit source and one-half sample of bark mulch for approval by Landscape Architect. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-2 1.5 SOIL TEST REQUIREMENTS A. Soil testing to be performed on all topsoil mixes and their components not more than 90 days prior to installation. Provide a second test and soil sample at delivery of material to the site. B. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish complete soil analysis on the final mix of full topsoil components and provide a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating the following: 1. pH. 2. C:N Ratio. 3. Percentage of organic matter by weight LOI (loss on ignition), ASTM D 2974 Method D. 4. Gradation of sand, silt and clay content per USDA soil texture classification. 5. Cation exchange capacity. 6. Maximum exchangeable sodium. 7. Maximum electrical conductivity. 8. Sodium absorption ratio. 9. Deleterious material. 10. Mineral and plan-nutrient content of the soil. C. Soil Nutrient Analysis: 1. Soil Nutrient Analysis to include levels of the following nutrients: Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium, Calcium, Magnesium, Sulfur, Boron, Chlorine, Cobalt, Copper, Iron, Manganese, Molybdenum, and Zinc. 2. Based upon test results, provide recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments. State recommendations in weight per 100 sq. ft., or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients, and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. 3. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective actions. 4. Analysis of heavy metals and other toxics per WAC 173-340. 5. State suitability of tested soil for plant growth. D. Compost Analysis: tests to be performed not more than 3 months prior to installation. Provide test results for the following: 1. Organic content by percent of dry weight LOI (loss on ignition), ASTM D 2974 Method D. 2. Moisture content. 3. C:N Ratio. 4. pH. 5. Soluble Salt Concentration. 6. Ammonium nitrogen. 7. Nitrate Nitrogen. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-3 8. Particle size Sieve analysis per USDA soil texture classification. 9. Stability – Carbon Dioxide Evolution Rate. 10. Maturity. 11. Seed Emergence and Seedling Vigor. 12. Bulk density. 13. Nutrient content of N-P-K. 14. Provide verification of manufactured compost satisfying definition of “composted materials” per WAC 173-350 Section 220 and is not derived from Type 4 feedstocks. 15. Provide verification of manufactured compost meeting the US Composting Council’s “Seal of Testing Assurance” (STA) program. 16. Analysis of heavy metals and other toxics per WAC 173-340 MTCA. 17. Provide documentation that all stock piled compost remains covered during processing. 18. Provide documentation that compost has been aged minimum of 6 months. E. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. The testing laboratory shall be an approved laboratory through the North American Proficiency Testing Performance Assessment Program (NAPT-PAP) and shall be affiliated with one of the following: 1. National Society of Consulting Soil Scientists (NSCSS). 2. Soil Science Society of America (SSSA). 1.6 PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Protect work, adjacent property, public, and be responsible for any damage or injury arising from this contract due to actions or neglect. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Upon commencing work, the General Contractor shall examine the site and protect all trees, shrubs and other areas designated to remain in a manner substantial enough to resist the forces of construction equipment that will be on site. B. Confine work to areas designated. Do not disturb existing vegetation outside of project limit lines. Protect all trees within project limits not designated to be removed. Repair or replace vegetation damaged as a result of Contractor's operation to satisfaction of District at Contractor's expense. 1. Contractor shall install temporary fencing at locations shown on plans for trees to remain prior to grading. C. Contractor shall be cognizant of all utility lines and underground obstructions and shall familiarize themselves with all utility, irrigation, mechanical, and electrical plans so that digging/drilling operations do not damage lines. Repair or replacement by original installer shall be made at Contractor's expense for all existing buildings, equipment, underground utilities, irrigation equipment, paving, surfacing, stairs, and/or forms damaged because of Contractor's operations in a manner satisfactory to the District before final payment is made. D. Protect plants, roots, balls and tips at all times from injury in handling, from sun or drying winds from beginning of digging operations, during transportation and on site until final planting. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-4 E. Provide all necessary safeguards, as approved and/or required by the Landscape Architect, for the protection of all planted areas until provisional inspection/acceptance is accomplished, or for such time as it requires to assure vigorous establishment of the plant material. 1.8 QUALITY CONTROL AND REVIEW A. Notification: The Contractor shall give 48 hours’ notice to the Landscape Architect when an inspection is desired. B. Inspections: 1. Field Subgrades: Subgrade shall be reviewed by Landscape Architect and approved by the District’s representative prior to topsoil placement and finish grading. 2. Rough Grades: Landscape Architect will review subgrades prior to placement of topsoil. 3. Rototilling: Landscape Architect will review Contractor’s tilling and soil incorporation methods prior to establishment of finish grades. 4. Finish Grades: Landscape Architect will review finish grade prior to any planting or seeding. 5. Plant Material: Landscape Architect will review all plant material at the site prior to installation. Remove unsatisfactory material from site immediately. 6. Plant Locations: Landscape Architect will review and adjust plant locations prior to installation. 1.9 PROVISIONAL REVIEW (Punch List) A. Upon substantial completion, the Contractor shall request a provisional inspection. No partial approvals will be given. 1.10 FINAL REVIEW/ACCEPTANCE A. The Contractor shall request a final inspection upon satisfactory completion of all punch list items and any other work required under this contract. Substantial completion of each phase of work shall establish the guarantee and maintenance period of that phase of work. Acceptance shall be defined as the completion and approval of all landscape punch list items. 1.11 GUARANTEE REPLACEMENT A. Plant Material: Guarantee in a healthy, thriving condition all trees and shrubs for one year from date of final acceptance; all ground cover until active, vigorous growth is evident. During the guarantee period, all dead diseased, dying, broken or disappeared plant materials from any cause except those noted below shall be replaced immediately by the Contractor at no additional expense to the District. Use specified plants and plant as specified; guarantee until active, healthy growth is evident. The Landscape Architect shall determine if a tree or shrub is dead based on the following; A tree shall be considered dying or dead when the main leader has died back, or a minimum of 25 percent of the crown has died or been damaged. A shrub or groundcover shall be considered dying or dead when a minimum of 25 percent of the plant has died or been damaged. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-5 B. Seeded Areas: Guarantee a relatively uniform, acceptable stand of grass with no bare spots whatsoever in all lawn areas at time of provisional review (punch list). Reseed with the seed and in the manner originally specified any seeded area which fails to vigorously establish a uniform stand for any reason whatsoever. Fill to finish grade with approved topsoil and seed as specified all seeded areas which evidence settlement or erosion. Repeat all such reseeding until final acceptance at Contractor's expense. C. Contractor's Responsibility: During guarantee period, Contractor shall not be responsible for replacing plants destroyed or damaged by vandalism or accidents caused by vehicles other than the Contractor's, or Acts of God, or severe cold as substantiated by 25-year low temperature records (exceeding 25-year low), provided that Contractor has exercised due care to protect work. Should replacement fall due during non-planting season, contractor may request District's permission to defer planting until proper season. If permission is granted, immediately remove and dispose of dead plants, including all roots. Holes shall be backfilled properly with planting mix and finish graded until proper planting season occur. Plants used for replacement shall be of same kind and size originally planted and they shall be planted as originally specified. D. Watering: In non-irrigated areas, provide temporary irrigation and water as required to germinate seed and create a healthy vigorous stand of turf. Water all areas to final acceptance. Contractor’s temporary irrigation measures must be enough to water all areas once daily. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL A. “Vegetable Garden Mix” compost, sand and sandy loam soil mix, as available from Cedar Grove. www.cedar-grove.com. Provide at raised garden beds to top of raised planter. B. Import Constructed Topsoil consisting of a well-blended mix of 40% sandy loam topsoil, 40% sand, and 20% compost, free of weeds, sticks, clay clumps or any other material over 2” in diameter. Maximum 20% passing the #200 sleeve. Test and amend per soil test requirements. C. Certified Test Lab Reports: The certified test lab reports required in this section shall be submitted by the Contractor as early as possible to avoid potential delays in the contract due to sample rejections. D. Compost shall meet the following physical and chemical criteria: 1. The material shall be visually free of manufactured inerts such as glass, metal and plastic and shall be less than 1.0-percent by weight as determined by U.S. Composting Council TMECC 03.08-A “Classification of Inerts by Sieve Size,” and visually free of identifiable grass or leaf fragments. 2. The material shall be visually free of manufactured inerts such as glass, metal and plastic. 3. No fresh sawdust or other fresh wood by-products shall be added to extend the volume after the composting process. 4. Compost shall be prepared by the controlled decomposition of organic materials. Acceptable feedstocks include, but are not limited to, yard debris, wood waste, land- clearing debris, brush, branches, manure, food residuals, and forest by-products. Type 4 feedstocks are not acceptable. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-6 5. The product shall have a uniform, dark, soil-like appearance and an earthy loam-like odor. No ammonia or putrid smells shall be present. 6. Compost for the approved rates listed above must meet the definition for “composted materials” in WAC Chapter 173-350 Section 220 or manufactured topsoil. 7. Compost must meet the standards of the US Composting Council’s “Seal of Testing Assurance” (STA) program. 8. No Class B biosolids shall be included. 9. Compost shall comply with all applicable public health standards and be obtained from a compost facility that holds a solid-waste handling permit from the health department with jurisdiction. 10. Compost must include a minimum of 65-percent by volume “Type 1 Feedstocks” in WAC 173-350. The manufacturer shall provide a list of feedstock sources by percentage in the final compost product. a. Yard waste shall be from a permitted composting facility such as Cedar Grove or approved equal. b. Material derived from aerobic decomposition of recycled plant waste fully composted for a minimum of 6 months between 131 F and 165 F; materials shall have a moisture content such that no visible free water or dust is produced when added after the composting process has begun. Product Parameters Specification Range Sieve Analysis 100% passing through a 3” sieve, 70-100% passing through a 3/4” sieve, 40-60% passing through a 1/4” sieve 6” Max. Particle size Organic Matter 40-60% of dry weight (LOI) pH 5.5-7.5pH Units Tested in accordance with U.S. Composting Council TMECC 04.11-A, “1:5 Slurry pH.” C:N Ratio 12:1-35:1 Carbon to nitrogen ratio Tested in accordance with U.S. Composting Council TMECC 04.01, “Total Carbon” and 04.02-D “Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen” Soluble Salt Concentration < 4 dS/m (mmhos/cm) Tested in accordance with U.S. Composting TMECC 04.10 “Electrical Conductivity.” Moisture Content 40-60% wet weight basis Ammonium nitrogen <500 ppm Nitrate nitrogen Report amount ppm Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-7 Stability < 8 Mg CO2-C per g OM per day Tested in accordance with U.S. Composting Council TMECC 05.08-B “Carbon Dioxide Evolution Rate.” Maturity Minimum 80% relative to positive control Tested in accordance with U.S. composting Council TMECC 05.05-A, “Germination and Root Elongation.” (Seedling Vigor and Emergence) Select Pathogen Salmonella < 3 MPN per 4 grams of total solids Per WAC 173-350-220 Table B E. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured sand, free of toxic materials. 1. Coarse sand is comprised of the following: Item Size in mm Percentage Fine Gravel 2.0-3.4 mm 0-10% Very Coarse Sand1.0-2.0 mm Coarse Sand 0.5-1.0 mm 50-60% Medium Sand 0.25-0.50 mm Fine Sand 0.15-0.25 mm 10-20% Very Fine Sand 0.05-0.15 mm 0-5% Silt 0.002-0.05 mm 0-5% Clay Less than 0.002 mm 0-3% Total Fines Very fine sand + silt + clay 0-10% 2.2 PLANTS A. Quantities, species and varieties, size and condition as shown on planting plan and plant list. Plants to be Washington Grade No. 1 and fresh, well foliaged, in prime condition when in leaf, exhibiting normal habit of growth, having all buds intact and free of disease, injury, insects, insect eggs, larva, indication of strawberry root weevil, all seeds and weed roots. B. All plants shall be from stock which has been acclimated to conditions prevailing at the project and which has been consistently cultivated and grown in these conditions. No cold storage plants; all grafted trees to be grafted at ground level. C. Balled and burlapped (B&B) stock to have a natural ball sufficient to insure survival and healthy growth; bare root (BR) materials to have sufficient root system to insure survival and healthy growth. D. Substitutions are strongly discouraged. No substitutions shall be made without the written approval of the Landscape Architect. Requests for substitutions must be made at the time that documentation of ordered plant material is provided. The substitution request must be accompanied by written proof from at least five sources (major suppliers of the plant) that any plant is not available. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-8 E. Plants must be installed no more than 30 days after delivery to site. Provide adequate water by temporary means to keep plants in top condition. Store plants in protected location away from hot sun and strong, drying wind. 2.3 LAWN SEED MIX A. Minimum three Cultivars (1/3 of each) as approved. Seed at minimum rate of 8 lbs/1000 sf., or greater if recommended by supplier. Proportions Percent Percent by Weight Purity Germination Regenerating Perennial Rye (RPR) 85% 98% 90% Kentucky Bluegrass 15% 98% 90% B. Hydromulch: Silva-fiber or approved at minimum rate of 2000 lbs/acre. C. Tackifier: Use on all sloped areas steeper than 5:1 at manufacturer’s suggested rate. 2.4 FERTILIZERS AND SOIL AMENDMENTS A. General: Approved brands conforming to applicable State fertilizer laws. Uniform in composition, dry, free-flowing, delivered to the site in original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. All fertilizers must be EPA approved. Fertilizer needs to be based on results of soil test B. Trees, Shrubs and Ground Cover: 1. Formula 4.2.2 "Transplanter" as manufactured by Pacific Agro Co., with Hercules Nitroform and W.R. Grace's "Magamp" and trace elements. Apply at rate of: a. Trees: 8 oz. b. Shrubs: 4 oz. c. Ground Cover: 2 oz. C. Agriform Tablets: Planting tablets, 21-gram size, as manufactured by Agriform International Chemicals, Inc., 20-10-5 analysis. Apply at the rate of: 1. Trees: 4 tablets 2. Shrubs: 2 tablets 3. Ground Cover: 1 tablet D. Seeded Lawn Areas: 1. Installation Fertilizer (Fertilizer ‘A’): a. Total available Nitrogen: 16% by weight (of which 50% is derived from controlled release sources including Nutralene.) b. Total available phosphorous: 16% by weight. c. Total available potassium: 16% by weight. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-9 E. Maintenance Fertilizer: 1. Initial Fertilizer (Fertilizer ‘B’): a. Total available Nitrogen: 21% by weight (of which 50% is derived from controlled release sources.) b. Total available Phosphorous: 12% by weight. c. Total available Potassium: 12% by weight. 2. Follow-up Fertilizer (Fertilizer ‘C’): a. Nitrogen: 19% by weight. b. Phosphorous: 4% by weight. c. Potassium: 16% by weight. F. Dolomitic Limestone at minimum rate of 50 lbs. per 1,000 square foot. Gypsum to counteract salinity as recommended in report. G. Other amendments as recommended in report; adjust the basic quantities of the following micronutrients as recommended in the report: iron, manganese, molybdenum, copper, zinc and boron. H. See also Fertilizer Requirements under Section 3.8 Maintenance. 2.5 STAKES AND GUYS A. Material as per standard detail. 2.6 WOOD CHIP MULCH: 3” depth A. “Arborist Chips”, chipped woody material approximately 1 to 3 inches in maximum dimension (not sawdust or coarse hog fuel). Mulch shall not contain appreciable quantities of weeds, garbage, plastic, metal, soil and dimensional lumber or construction/demolition debris. 2.7 SELECTIVE HERBICIDE A. Treat all planting beds with a selective pre-emergent herbicide and remove all foreign weeds prior to acceptance. 2.8 GREEN ROOF GROWING MEDIA A. Per green roof manufacturer’s specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clear and grub any areas shown beyond civil clearing limits as needed to install landscape work. B. Clearing limits and subgrade shall be reviewed by Landscape Architect and approved by the District’s representative prior to topsoil placement and finish grading. Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-10 3.2 DECOMPACTION/OVEREXCAVATION A. Wherever landscape is proposed over compacted areas that were previously paved, buildings, construction traffic areas, Contractor staging areas or areas otherwise detrimental to plant establishment, the Contractor shall completely remove all remnants of paving, crushed rock, quarry spalls, contaminants or other non-native material as directed by the Landscape Architect. Loosen the soil in these areas to a minimum depth of 12” below subgrade using mechanical means. 3.3 SUBGRADE A. Subgrades shall be below finish grade as indicated below to accept required depth of soil and mulch. Prior to placing topsoil, remove all rocks and sticks over 2" diameter. Take care not to damage existing tree and shrub roots. 1. The following amounts of topsoil and mulch shall be applied: a. Lawn / Seeded areas - 8" import topsoil. b. Planting beds - 8" import topsoil, 3” mulch. B. Fine grade all planting areas as necessary to complete all planting operations. Establish finish grades in accordance with elevations shown in the drawings, ensuring that no pockets or surface irregularities create obstructions to positive drainage. Ensure positive drainage away from building. Obtain approval of finish grades prior to all seeding or planting. 3.4 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT (GENERAL) A. Place 4” of specified import topsoil uniformly over entire planting and seeded areas, and thoroughly roto-till to a depth of 6” to incorporate subsoil with topsoil, paying special attention to thoroughly mix and loosen soil in areas compacted by construction. Contractor to request review by Landscape Architect of tilling and soil incorporation methods prior to placement of second lift of topsoil. B. Place remaining 4” import topsoil over entire rototilled area after review by Landscape Architect. C. Rake, float, drag, roll and perform all necessary operations to remove surface irregularities and to provide a firm, smooth surface with positive surface drainage. Remove all rocks, sticks and other debris 2" and larger in planting areas and in lawn areas. Box drag and hand rake all seeded areas. D. Finish grade after installation of topsoil and mulch shall be 1/2" below adjacent paved surfaces unless otherwise specified or detailed. 3.5 WOOD CHIP MULCH A. Place 3” depth of wood chip mulch in all new planting beds and around existing trees throughout areas shown on plan to remain. Avoid burying trunks of trees. Feather mulch into surrounding new and existing landscape areas. 3.6 INVASIVE REMOVAL Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-11 A. Remove all invasive plant species throughout entire site. Species include but are not limited to English Ivy, Himalayan Blackberry, English Holly, and Cherry Laurel. B. Remove ivy from ground and tree trunks. Avoid damaging trees or existing native understory to remain. C. Remove or kill entire plant and root structure of all invasive trees and shrubs. D. Continue removal throughout extended maintenance period. 3.7 PERFORMANCE A. Planting and Plant Relocation Time: Plant trees, shrubs, groundcover and lawn during periods which are normal for such work, as determined by season, weather conditions, and accepted practice. At the option and on the full responsibility of the subcontractor, planting operations may be conducted under unseasonable conditions without additional compensation. B. Plant Locations: After placement of topsoil, stake tree locations and position shrubs above ground as per drawings for approval of Landscape Architect. Make field adjustments to avoid obstructions to planting. Landscape Architect reserves the right to field adjust plant locations prior to planting. C. Planting Trees: Excavate tree pits 6" deeper and twice the diameter of the root ball. Excavated soil shall be removed from the site. Thoroughly scarify bottom of pits by shovel cutting to a depth of 12". Sides of pits shall also be shovel cut to help root penetration. Establish a firm mound to position the top of the root ball flush with finish grade of mulch layer. D. Place tree in upright position in center of pit, release root covering or spread roots. If wire cages are present, remove completely and dispose from site. Roots of trees shall be so placed as to have a natural spread and distribution and planting mix shall be carefully, thoroughly packed and puddled around them. Take care not to injure root system while backfilling and compacting. After water settles, fill again with planting mix and water compact to a grade of not more than 1/2" higher than the original ball. In seeded areas, finish grade smooth with surrounding area. Provide 3' diameter, 3” depth mulched circle around all trees in seeded areas. 1. Fertilize trees at the soils test recommended rate applied uniformly around circumference of root spread under a cover of 2" of planting mix. Apply Agriform tablets and soil polymers per manufacturer’s recommendations. Stake and guy trees immediately after planting as detailed. All supports and trees shall stand vertical. E. Planting Shrubs and Ground Covers: After topsoil placement and approval of finish grade, excavate planting pockets at locations shown on drawings and as directed to a diameter of twice the root spread and to a depth that will ensure a 3-inch cushion of compacted planting mix below the root ball. Dispose of excavated soil on site as directed. 1. Set plants upright in center of hole flush with finish grade, release root covering or spread roots. The roots of the plant shall be placed as to have a natural spread and distribution. Backfill with planting mix and provide slight depression as watering saucer. Care shall be taken not to injure the root system while backfilling and compacting the planting mix. 2. Fertilize at the specified rate applied uniformly around the circumference of the roof spread under a cover of 2" of planting mix. Apply Agriform tablets and soil polymers per Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-12 manufacturer’s recommendations. Plant ground cover plants at spacing indicated in straight, evenly spaced rows. F. Pit plant trees and shrubs in areas outside of clearing limits as shown on plans. Avoid disturbance to existing native vegetation to remain. Mulch all exposed soil to minimum 3” depth. G. Seed Bed Preparations: Apply Installation Fertilizer ‘A’ and dolomite limestone at the soils test recommended rate. Add other fertilizers as recommended in soils report. Rake to incorporate. Finish surfaces by raking smooth and even; lightly compact with roller. Level out surface undulations and irregularities to tolerances specified in Section 02200 and compact again as necessary. H. Lawn Seeding: After approval of finish grade, seed at the rate specified. Seed all areas using hydro-seeder and hydro-mulch at rate specified under Hydro-mulch Section. I. Timing: Seed only from March 15 to October 15, or as approved by District’s representative. All seeding must be complete prior to project substantial completion date. J. Protection: Protect against harm from wind, storm water and trespassing. Treat and reseed damaged portions as required. Reseed as many times as necessary to achieve Guaranteed Replacement. Post signage indicating new seeding as necessary to prevent trespassing. Provide temporary orange construction fencing around seeded areas, until grass has become fully established as determined by the Landscape Architect. K. Initial Maintenance Fertilization (Fertilization ‘B’): Apply fertilizer at the rate of 2-1/2 lbs. per 1,000 square feet after the first mowing. Apply once each week through the third mowing, minimum three applications. L. Follow-up Maintenance Fertilization (Fertilizer ‘C’): Apply fertilizer at the rate of 8 lbs. per 1,000 square feet on week after the last application of Fertilizer ‘B’. M. Reseeding: In areas which were seeded after October 15th, reseed and re-fertilize all areas where coverage is weak or sparse, as directed in the spring of the following year, and repair any settlement and/or erosion channels. N. Ongoing Maintenance: Contractor shall continue to maintain turf areas and weed the entire site until 60 days from substantial completion. See additional requirements under Section 3.8 Maintenance. O. Mulching: Immediately after completion of all planting, mulch all new planted areas to a minimum compacted depth of 3". Refer to site details for proper relationship of finished grade to adjacent paved areas, 1/2" below curbs/walks unless indicated otherwise. Mulch around existing trees and any areas of exposed soil outside of clearing limits. P. Pruning, Repair and Weeding: Upon completion of the work under this contract, all existing and new trees and shrubs shall be pruned as directed by Landscape Architect to control size, remove dead or damaged branching or to correct overall form. 1. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. On all cuts over 3/4" in diameter and bruises or scars on the bark, the injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed. Wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water, and the treated area shall be coated with approved tree wound compound Weisman Design Group FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 32 90 00 October 20, 2021 PLANTING Project #16-0996 32 90 00-13 3.8 MAINTENANCE A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to continuously and vigorously maintain all the landscaped areas of this contract from time of installation until 60 days after substantial completion of last phase of the entire project. Contractor to continue to maintain completed phases of work by continually weeding and watering on a weekly basis. Apply fertilizer at start of spring, summer and fall seasons throughout project duration. Apply additional mulch by topping off where necessary to ensure all areas have 3” bark mulch at end of maintenance period. Sweep pavement clean and remove dead plants as directed by the Landscape Architect, who shall record plants removed. All plants shall be watered by thorough sprinkling as needed to keep the ground moist, the plants healthy, and to prevent wilting, including watering in areas not fully covered by an automatic irrigation system. Care shall be exercised to prevent soil erosion. B. Provide temporary irrigation as needed to all areas not covered by permanent irrigation system. Temporary irrigation provisions shall be enough to water all areas at least once daily. Watering methods shall be designed to minimize overspray on to paved surfaces or established landscape areas. Design of temporary irrigation shall be subject to approval by Landscape Architect. C. Seeded Areas: Maintain by watering, weekly mowing (remove all clippings) continuous weeding, reseeding, fertilizing, herbicide treatment, rolling and top dressing, and other necessary operations to establish and maintain an even, dark green, deep rooted, thick and vigorous stand of grass. Temporarily water any areas that are not irrigated, until establishment. 1. Replace any seeded areas which fail to show vigorous growth. Fill and seed all areas which settle, as specified. At the end of the maintenance period and prior to acceptance, the seeded areas shall be a flourishing, dense, vigorous, uniform, deeply rooted thick stand of specified grass with no bare spots and no weeds whatsoever. 2. There shall be no foot or vehicle traffic on the seeded area whatsoever. Install a temporary 6’ height chain link fence around all lawn areas until fully established. Maintain barriers around seeded areas until established, then remove from site. Ensure safety to public throughout duration of use. 3. Trees: Maintain in a vigorous, thriving condition by watering, pruning, cultivating, fertilizing, spraying, and other necessary operations. Spraying shall be done only as required and as approved by the Landscape Architect. Plants will not be accepted until active growth is evident. All tree supports, guys, tree wrap, etc., shall be kept intact and adjusted as required and effect in maintaining firm support throughout the guarantee period. 4. Clean-up: A general clean-up shall be made immediately after and as part of all work done in the area. The clean-up shall include the entire area under this contract. Adjacent areas shall be cleaned to the extent that the work done under the contract may scatter litter. Such clean-up shall include pick-up and removal from the contract area of all clippings, trimmings, leaves, and all other litter and debris originating from any source whatsoever. Remove flag labels from all plant material. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 10 00 October 20, 2021 WATER DISTRUBUTION SYSTEM WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 334100 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing and installing waterlines, gate valves, fittings, thrust blocking and new services. 2. Connections to existing water services. 3. Temporary connections. B. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 31 20 00Earth Moving 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. Engineering Standards: SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Engineering Standards (SCWSD), current edition – The Contractor shall have a copy of the Engineering Standards on site whenever Utility work is being performed. The Contractor shall be familiar with these standards. 2. WSDOT-APWA: Standard Specification for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, 2020, as modified by the SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Engineering Standards, here after referred at the “Standard Specification” 3. Current edition of the International Fire Code, and NFPA 13 and 24. 4. Soils Report Geotechnical Engineering Report, Family First Community Center, Prepared by The Riley Group, Inc. Dated June 8, 2018. 1.3 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. Layout and Dimensions shall be in conformance with Section 31 10 00 “Site Preparation”. B. The Contractor is responsible for review of all City and Owner's records relative to the existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all active utilities at Contractor's own expense. C. The Contractor is to notify the Owner’s Representative immediately if underground utilities not shown on the Site Survey are encountered. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 10 00 October 20, 2021 WATER DISTRUBUTION SYSTEM WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 334100 - 2 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A. One complete set of drawings will be provided as record drawings which shall be separate, clean, prints reserved for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed. The contractor shall coordinate the record drawing requirements with the Utility Inspector. B. These drawings shall also serve as work progress report sheets and the Contractor shall make any notations, neat and legible, thereon daily as work proceeds. These drawings shall be available for inspection at all times and shall be kept at the job. C. All buried piping and indicated future connections, exterior of any building, shall be located both by depth and by accurate measurement from a permanently established landmark. All notations on record drawings of buried piping shall be made before any backfilling is started. D. At completion of the work, these record drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, dated, and returned to Soos Creek Water and Sewer District. E. In addition, a survey of the newly installed water mains shall be prepared by a licensed surveyor in the State of Washington and submitted to the owner. Survey shall include location of bends, tees, valves, meters, hydrants; pipe length, size, and material. F. Draw a 15-foot easement around the installed and surveyed water main (7.5-ft. on both sides of the water main, as shown on the Drawings). Write a legal description of this easement and submit to SCWSD. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All Contractors installing, inspecting, servicing or maintain fire protection systems shall be licensed by the State Director of Fire Protection Services in accordance with Chapter 18.106 RCW. Contractor must be a Level "U" or Level III licensed contractor to install any portion of the fire sprinkler underground piping. B. Contractor is responsible for coordinating water main and fire system work on site with SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District. C. Standard Compliance: In addition to complying with all codes and regulation, comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in the following documents. When a conflict arises between the following standards, the more stringent provision shall apply. Delete references to measure and payment. D. Manufacturer's and Installer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture or installation of water projects consisting of similar scope and materials. E. General: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 10 00 October 20, 2021 WATER DISTRUBUTION SYSTEM WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 334100 - 3 B. Piping: Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage. Store with minimum of handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. C. Metal Items: Check upon arrival and identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials. D. Handling: Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such a manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Take special care not to injure fittings. Carry pipe to trench; do not drag it. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. B. Fittings: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. C. Restrained Joints: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. D. Domestic service pipe: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. E. Gate Valves: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. F. Valve Boxes: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. G. Domestic Service Connections: Service connections shall be per WSDOT/APWA Section 9-30.6. H. Fire Protection Connections: shall be in accordance with NFPA-13 and NFPA-20. Fire Department Connection (FDC) shall be per SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District and Fire Department. Coordinate with building sprinkler connections shown on mechanical drawings and as constructed by the building sprinkler installer. I. The PIV shall be listed for fire protection service and rated for a minimum of 200 psi. The PIV shall be painted with two coats of Rustoleum Regal Red over one coat of primer. J. The riser portion of the FDC shall be galvanized steel pipe, flange by threads, tape wrapped for the underground portion. K. Fire Hydrants: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. L. Tracer Wire: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. M. Pipe Bedding and Backfill for Water Mains: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 10 00 October 20, 2021 WATER DISTRUBUTION SYSTEM WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 334100 - 4 1. Note: All trench backfill below paving areas shall be imported structural fill. N. Concrete for Thrust Blocks: Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Execution shall conform to the SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Construction Provisions 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site and Drawings: Carefully examine the site and compare the drawings with existing conditions. By the act of submitting bids, the Contractor shall be deemed to have made such examination and to have accepted such conditions, and to have made allowance therefore in preparing their figure. B. Verification of Existing Elevations: Verify all connection elevations prior to laying pipe. C. Verification of Dimensions: Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions, sizes, etc. and shall assume full responsibility for the fitting in of his equipment and to the structure. Where apparatus and equipment have been taken from typical equipment of the class indicated, the Contractor shall carefully check the drawings to see that the equipment he contemplates installing will fit into the spaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General pipe installation shall be in accordance with the SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Construction Provisions. B. Join pipe sections in such a manner as not to damage the lining or coating. Any damage to the lining or coating shall be repaired by the Contractor and at the Contractor's expense. C. Coordinate with work of Division 15 for domestic and fire service pipe into the building. D. Fire protection piping: Shall be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and NFPA-20. All piping shall be installed straight, true and plumb. Fittings at joints shall be restrained joint in accordance with SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District and NFPA 13 with thrust blocking. 1. Two forms of restraint are required for all joints and changes of direction. 2. Properly installed thrust blocks can function as the first form of restraint, with the second being a restraining joint type fitting (refer to Fire Hydrants for restraint materials). E. Connections to existing mains shall be in accordance with the SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Construction Provisions. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 10 00 October 20, 2021 WATER DISTRUBUTION SYSTEM WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 334100 - 5 F. Service connections: Shall be in accordance with the SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Construction Provisions. G. Thrust Blocking: shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and the SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District. 3.4 ABANDONING EXISTING WATER MAIN A. Abandon existing water main in place: Shall be per SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Engineering Standards. 3.5 TESTING AND DISINFECTION A. Pressure test pipe in accordance with SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Engineering Standards. B. Disinfection shall conform with SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Engineering Standards. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 30 00 October 20, 2021 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 334100 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to following: 1. Furnishing and installing sanitary sewer piping, cleanouts, and manholes. 2. Furnishing and installing sanitary side sewer piping. 3. Coordination and connections to building plumbing. 4. Connections to existing sanitary sewer systems. B. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 33 10 00 – Site Clearing 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earth moving 3. Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage System 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. Engineering Standards: SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Engineering Standards (SCWSD), current edition – The Contractor shall have a copy of the Engineering Standards on site whenever Utility work is being performed. The Contractor shall be familiar with these standards. 2. WSDOT-APWA: Standard Specification for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edition, as modified by the City of Renton Engineering Standards, here after referred at the “Standard Specification” 1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS A. One complete set of drawings will be provided as record drawings which shall be separate, clean, prints reserved for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed. The contractor shall coordinate the record drawing requirements with the Utility Inspector in accordance with the Developer Extension Agreement. B. These drawings shall also serve as work progress report sheets and the Contractor shall make any notations, neat and legible, thereon daily as work proceeds. These drawings shall be available for inspection at all times and shall be kept at the job. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 30 00 October 20, 2021 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 334100 - 2 C. All buried piping and indicated future connections, exterior of any building, shall be located both by depth and by accurate measurement from a permanently established landmark. All notations on record drawings of buried piping shall be made before any backfilling is started. D. At completion of the work, these record drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, dated, and returned to the Architect. E. In addition, a survey of the newly installed sewer system shall be prepared by a licensed surveyor in the State of Washington and submitted to the owner. Survey shall include location of cleanouts, manholes, pipe length, size, slope, and material. 1.4 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. Layout and Dimensions shall be in conformance with Section 31 10 00 “Site Preparation”. B. The Contractor is responsible for review of all records relative to the existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all active utilities at the Contractor's own expense. C. The Contractor is to notify the Architect immediately of underground utilities encountered, which are not shown on the drawings or Owner's survey or record drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 30 00. Submit Manufacturer's Literature on proposed material prior to the start of any work, submit three copies of product information correlated to specified requirements. B. No installation of the material concerned shall be made until written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. Approval of materials and equipment shall in no way obviate compliance with the plans and specifications. C. Preconstruction Requirements: 1. Submit a copy of the Utility Contractor’s current City of Renton Business and Occupation license and a copy of the current Washington State Contractors Labor and Industries License. 2. Provide Construction Cost Estimate to owner for sewer installation costs. 3. Apply for a side sewer permit through the City of Renton. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Compliance: In addition to complying with all codes and regulation, comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in the following documents. When a conflict arises between the following standards, the more stringent provision shall apply. Delete references to measure and payment. B. Manufacturer's and Installer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture or installation of sewer projects consisting of similar scope and materials. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 30 00 October 20, 2021 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 334100 - 3 C. General: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: 1. Piping: Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage. Store with minimum of handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Store plastic piping and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. 2. Cement: Store cement immediately upon receipt at site of work. Store bagged cement in a suitable waterproof structure made as air-tight as practicable, and with floors elevated above ground a sufficient distance to prevent absorption of moisture. Stack bags close together to reduce circulation of air, but do not stack against outside walls; arrange storage to permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. 3. Metal Items: Check upon arrival and identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials B. Handling: Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such a manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Take special care not to injure fittings. Carry pipe to trench; do not drag it. Do not leave rubber gaskets and plastic piping that are not to be installed immediately in the sunlight, but store under cover out of direct sunlight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC pipe shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. 2.2 CONDUCTIVE WARNING TAPE A. Conductive warning tape required over all sewer, drainage, water, and irrigation pipe. Tape shall be manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed plastic tape, aluminum backed, intended for direct-burial service. Tape shall be not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Tape Schedule: Piping Color Wording Sanitary Sewer Green Caution Sanitary Sewer 2.3 FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND JOINTS A. Fittings shall be the same material as the pipe and shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 30 00 October 20, 2021 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 334100 - 4 2.4 CLEAN-OUTS A. Cleanouts shall conform to SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. 2.5 STRUCTURES A. Structures: shall conform to SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. B. Manhole Ring & Cover: shall conform to SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. 2.6 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Backfill material Shall be per SCWSD Materials Notes, as shown in the Engineering Plans. 1. Note: All trench backfill below paving areas shall be imported structural fill. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK A. Verify location from the records of SCWSD and other utility purveyors. B. Before installation Contractor shall make proper provisions for site sanitary sewer lines and to avoid interference with installation of other work and/or other Contractors. Any changes caused by Contractor's neglect to coordinate work shall be made by Contractor at Contractor's expense. C. Sanitary drawings and specifications shall be compared with drawings and specifications of other trades and any discrepancies between them reported to the Architect prior to installation of work. 3.2 EXECUTION A. Installation of all sewer pipes and structures, and connections to existing systems shall conform to the SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Construction Provisions. B. Flush and test pipe in accordance with SOOS Creek Water and Sewer District Construction Provisions. END OF SECTION Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 40 00 October 20, 2021 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 334100 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing and installing storm sewer piping and fittings of the type and sizes designated in the plans and specifications. 2. Temporary connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earth moving 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site. The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1. WSDOT-APWA: Standard Specification for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, 2020, here after referred at the “Standard Specification” 2. Soils Report Geotechnical Engineering Report, Family First Community Center, Prepared by The Riley Group, Inc. Dated June 8, 2018. 3. StormTech Construction Guide 1.4 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. Layout and Dimensions shall be in conformance with Section 31 10 00 “Site Preparation”. B. The Contractor is responsible for review of all City of Renton records relative to the existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all active utilities at the Contractor's own expense. C. The Contractor is to notify the Owner’s Representative immediately of underground utilities encountered, which are not shown on the drawings or Owner's survey or record drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 40 00 October 20, 2021 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 334100 - 2 A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 30 00. Submit Manufacturer's Literature on proposed material prior to the start of any work; submit three copies of product information correlated to specified requirements. B. No installation of the material concerned shall be made until written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. Approval of materials and equipment shall in no way obviate compliance with the plans and specifications. 1.6 Record Drawings: A. One complete set of drawings will be provided as record drawings which shall be separate, clean, prints reserved for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed. The contractor shall coordinate the record drawing requirements with the Utility Inspector in accordance with the Developer Extension Agreement. B. These drawings shall also serve as work progress report sheets and the Contractor shall make any notations, neat and legible, thereon daily as work proceeds. These drawings shall be available for inspection at all times and shall be kept at the job. C. All buried piping and indicated future connections, exterior of any building, shall be located both by depth and by accurate measurement from a permanently established landmark. All notations on record drawings of buried piping shall be made before any backfilling is started. D. At completion of the work, these record drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, dated, and returned to the Architect. E. In addition, a survey of the newly installed on and off site storm system shall be prepared by a licensed surveyor in the State of Washington and submitted to the owner. Specifically, all structures sizes (SDCO, type 1, type 2-48”, etc.) rim elevations, pipe inverts, pipe sizes, and pipe slopes shall be noted on surveyed drawing. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Compliance: In addition to complying with all codes and regulation, comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in the following documents. When a conflict arises between the following standards, the more stringent provision shall apply. Delete references to measure and payment. B. Manufacturer's and Installer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture or installation of sewer projects consisting of similar scope and materials. C. General: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: 1. Piping: Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage. Store with minimum of handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 40 00 October 20, 2021 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 334100 - 3 Store plastic piping and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. 2. Cement: Store cement immediately upon receipt at site of work. Store bagged cement in a suitable waterproof structure made as air-tight as practicable, and with floors elevated above ground a sufficient distance to prevent absorption of moisture. Stack bags close together to reduce circulation of air, but do not stack against outside walls; arrange storage to permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. 3. Metal Items: Check upon arrival and identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials. B. Handling: Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such a manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Take special care not to injure fittings. Carry pipe to trench; do not drag it. Do not leave rubber gaskets and plastic piping that are not to be installed immediately in the sunlight, but store under cover out of direct sunlight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MATERIAL A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 9-05.1(5) of the Standard Specifications. B. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPEP), Couplings, and Fittings shall conform to Sections 9-05.1(6) and (7) of the Standard Specifications. Pipe shall be triple-walled. C. Footing Drain Pipe: Footing drain pipe material shall be PolyVinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe, SDR 35, with laser cut slotted perforations. D. Ductile Iron (DI) Pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 Class 52 with push-on joints. Ductile iron pipe shall be cement mortar lined conforming to AWWA C104. E. Connections to catch basins or manholes shall be by a GPK manhole adapter. 2.2 CONDUCTIVE WARNING TAPE A. Conductive warning tape required over all sewer, drainage, water and irrigation pipe. Tape shall be manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed plastic tape, aluminum backed, intended for direct-burial service. Tape shall be not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Tape Schedule: Piping Color Wording Storm Sewer Green Caution Storm Sewer 2.3 FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND JOINTS A. Fittings shall be the same material as the pipe. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 40 00 October 20, 2021 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 334100 - 4 B. Connections to catch basins or manholes shall be by an AC or GPK manhole adaptor. C. Tees on existing pipe shall be connected by core drilling and flexible connections. D. Pipe to pipe connections shall be made with a flexible gasketed coupling, adapter or coupling-adapter to make a watertight joint. Couplings shall be those manufactured by Romac, Caulder, or Fernco. 2.4 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Pipe Bedding and Backfill material: All other utilities shall be imported sand and gravel material conforming with the requirements of Standard Specification Section 9-03-12(3), “Gravel and Sand Backfill for Pipe Bedding”. 2.5 STORM DRAINAGE CLEANOUTS A. Storm drainage cleanout shall be per Contract Documents. 2.6 MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS AND INLETS A. Type 1 catch basins shall be constructed of pre-cast units by Associated Sand and Gravel or approved equal in accordance with the King County Standard Plan 9-050. Metal frame and grate shall conform to King County Standard Plan 9-140. All grates shall have locking bolts. B. Type 2- 48” and 54” catch basins shall be constructed of pre-cast units by Associated Sand and Gravel or approved equal in accordance with King County Standard Plan 9- 080. Metal ring and cover shall conform to King County Standard Plan 9-170. All lids shall have locking bolts and shall be marked “DRAIN.” PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK A. Before installation Contractor shall make proper provisions for site storm lines to avoid interference with installation of other work and/or other Contractors. Any changes caused by Contractor's neglect to coordinate work shall be made by Contractor at Contractor's expense. B. Site storm drain drawings and specifications shall be compared with drawings and specifications of other trades and any discrepancies between the documents reported to the Architect prior to installation of work. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site and Drawings 1. Carefully examine the site and compare the drawings with existing conditions. By the act of submitting bids, the Contractor shall be deemed to have made such examination and to have accepted such conditions, and to have made allowance therefore in preparing his figure. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 40 00 October 20, 2021 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 334100 - 5 B. Verification of Existing Elevations 1. Verify all connection elevations prior to laying pipe. C. Verification of Dimensions 1. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions, sizes, etc. and shall assume full responsibility for the fitting-in of his equipment and to the structure. 2. Where apparatus and equipment have been taken from typical equipment of the class indicated, the Contractor shall carefully check the drawings to see that the equipment he contemplates installing will fit into the spaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Drainage Structures: Construct catch basins, culverts, manholes, and other drainage structures at locations, and to the design and dimensions indicated. Set covers and grates flush with finished surface in paved and concrete areas or 3 inches above finished grade in landscaped areas. Exposed concrete work shall have a smooth troweled finish with rounded corners and edges finished plumb and true. Provide grates, frames, and covers for catch basins as detailed and indicated. B. Tracer Tape: During backfilling of storm drain systems, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at six to eight inches below finished grade or per manufactures recommendation. C. Excavation, Bedding, and Backfill: 1. Trenching: The length of trench excavation in advance of pipe laying shall be kept to a minimum and in no case shall exceed 200 feet unless specifically authorized by the Engineer. 2. Excess excavated trench material shall be removed and disposed of off-site (per section 312000 and the conditions of all local ordinances and regulations for dumping/filling), or if deemed suitable by the Engineer, shall be placed adjacent to the trench in piles so that the toe of the slope is at least two feet from the edge of the trench. Free access shall be maintained to all fire hydrants, water valves, and meters. 3. Where trench excavation equals or exceeds a depth of 4 feet, the contractor shall provide, construct, maintain and remove, as required, safety systems that meet the requirements of the Washington Industrial safety and Heal Act, RCW 49.17, including WAC 296-155. 4. Excavation for structures: shall be in accordance with Section 7-05.3 of the Standard Specification. 5. Bedding: Bedding shall be installed in accordance with Standard Specification Section 7-04.3(1) and the Contract Documents. Bedding shall provide uniform support along the entire pipe barrel, without load concentration at joint collars or bells. No blocking of any kind shall be used to adjust the pipe to grade except when used with embedment concrete. Bell holes shall be dug as required to ensure uniform support along the pipe barrel. Bedding disturbed by pipe movement or by removal of shoring or movement of a trench shield or box shall be reconsolidated prior to backfill. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 40 00 October 20, 2021 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 334100 - 6 6. Laying Pipe: Shall be in accordance with Section 7-04.3(2) of the Standard Specification. The contractor shall comply with manufacturer's recommended tolerance for eccentricity. 7. Line and Grade: Variance from established line and grade shall not be greater than one thirty-second (1/32) of an inch per inch of pipe diameter and not to exceed one-half (1/2) inch, provided that such variation does not result in a level or reverse sloping invert; provided also, that variation in the invert elevation between adjoining ends of pipe, Soos Creek Water and Sewer District joining surface and pipe interior surface, does not exceed one sixty-fourth (1/64) per inch of pipe diameter, or one-half (1/2) inch maximum. 8. Connections: Connections to manholes shall be made in accordance with the drawings. Pipe branches, stubs or other open ends which are not to be immediately connected shall be capped or plugged. 9. Backfill: Shall be in accordance with Section 7-04.3(3); material shall be per Section 31 20 00. Backfill shall be placed in successive layers with the first layer not to exceed 2 feet above the pipe, and the following layers not exceeding 12 inches in loose thickness, with each layer compacted to the required density. Trenches shall be backfilled as soon after the pipe laying as possible. Backfill trenches in the vicinity of catch basins, manholes, or other appurtenances will not be permitted until the masonry has become thoroughly hardened. Backfill above the pipe zone will be accomplished in such a manner that the pipe will not be shifted out of position nor damaged by impact or overloading. D. Miscellaneous: 1. Removal of Water: The contractor shall at all times provide and maintain ample means and devices to remove and dispose of all water entering the trench excavation during the process of laying the pipe. 2. Preparation of Pipe: All pipe and fittings shall be carefully inspected before being laid and cracked, broken or defective pipe shall not be used in the work. E. Restoration: At minimum, road paved areas shall be restored to existing thickness using like materials. Disturbed roadside-shoulders shall be restored with 6 inches of crushed surfacing top course. Disturbed cut and fill slopes shall be fertilized and re-seed. F. Re-vegetation: It shall be the Contractors responsibility to restore all disturbed areas to their original state. Rough grade compact earth, fine grade, place topsoil, fertilize and seed disturbed areas and perform all other necessary operations in accordance with specification section 31 20 00 (earth moving) and 329100. 3.4 STORMTECH CHAMBER SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. The StormTech Chamber System shall be installed per the “StormTech Construction Guide, MC-3500/MC4500”, which is summarized below: 1. Excavate chamber bed and prepare subgrade per plans. 2. Place non-woven geotextile over prepared soils and up excavation walls. 3. Place clean, crushed, angular foundation stone. Install underdrains. Compact to achieve a flat surface. 4. Install manifolds and lay out woven scour geotextile at Isolator Row at each inlet end cap. Place a continuous piece (no seams) along entire length of Isolator Row Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 40 00 October 20, 2021 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 334100 - 7 in two layers. Ensure the fabric lays flat and extends the entire width of the chamber feet. 5. Align the first chamber and end cap of each row with inlet pipes. Contractor may choose to postpone stone placement around end chambers and leave ends of rows open for easy inspection of chambers during the backfill process. 6. Continue installing chambers by overlapping chamber end corrugations. Ensure that the chamber placement does not exceed the reach of the construction equipment used to place the stone. Maintain minimum 9” spacing between MC- 4500 rows. 7. Insert inlet and outlet manifolds a minimum 12” into chamber end caps. 8. Initial embedment shall be placed along the centerline of the chamber evenly, anchoring the lower portion of the chamber. 9. No equipment shall be operated on the bed at this stage of the installation. Excavators must be located off the bed. Dump trucks shall not dump stone directly on to the bed. Dozers or loaders are not allowed on the bed at this time. 10. Backfill chambers evenly. Stone column height shall differ no more than 12” between adjacent chamber rows or between chamber rows and perimeter. 11. Perimeter stone must be brought up evenly with chamber rows. Perimeter must be fully backfilled, with stone extending horizontally to the excavation wall. 12. Continue evenly backfilling between rows and around the perimeter until embedment stone is a minimum of 12” of cover over the chambers. Perimeter stone must extend horizontally to the excavation wall for both straight and sloped sidewalls. Acceptable backfill methods include: a. Using a conveyor belt staged on the perimeter of the chamber system. b. Backfill with an excavator inside the bed reaching along the rows. c. Backfill with an excavator around the perimeter of the rows. 13. Only after chambers have been backfilled to the top of chamber and covered with a minimum 12” of stone on top of the chambers are skid loaders and small LGP dozers allowed to drive over the chamber area and backfill in accordance with ground pressure limits in Table 2, “Maximum Allowable Construction Vehicle Loads”, as shown in the StormTech Construction Guide. Equipment must push material parallel to rows only, never perpendicular to rows. StormTech recommends the Contractor inspect chamber rows before placing any backfill. Any chambers damaged by construction equipment shall be removed and replaced and the Contractor’s expense. 14. Install non-woven geotextile over stone. Geotextile must overlap 24” where edges meet. Compact at 24” of fill; roller shall travel with the rows. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanliness of Site: During progress of work, keep premises reasonably free of debris and waste materials. B. Removal of Debris: Upon completion and before final acceptance of work, remove all debris, rubbish, left-over materials, tools, and equipment from site. Coughlin Porter Lundeen FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Documents SECTION 33 40 00 October 20, 2021 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 334100 - 8 C. Prior to acceptance of work, each line and structure shall be cleaned to ensure that the entire system is clean and free of obstructions of any nature and provide written certification attesting thereto. Mechanically remove all sediment displaced from lines from the system, and do not flush downstream. 3.6 TESTING A. Storm Sewers: All new lines shall be subjected to testing after installation and cleaning. Testing shall be as follows: 1. Test in conformance with Section 7-04.3(1)B of the Standard Specifications. All new lines shall be subjected to testing after installation. Tests shall be exfiltration test or air pressure test. Conduct tests in the presence of the Owner’s representative or Engineer. B. All deficiencies of the inspections shall be corrected by the contractor. END OF SECTION Baylis Architects Family First Community Center Bit Set APPENDIX A October 20, 2021 CONSTRUCTION MITIGATION Appendix A - 1 APPENDIX A Construction Mitigation August 30, 2019 Family First Community Center PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION MITIGATION DESCRIPTION Proposed Construction Dates May 2020 – July 2021 Haul Routes A construction plan indicating haul routes and hours, construction hours, and a traffic control plan will be submitted to the Development Services Division for approval. Haul Hours Haul hours shall be restricted to the hours between eight-thirty (8:30) a.m. and three-thirty (3:30) p.m., Monday through Friday unless otherwise approved in advance by the Development Services Division. Permitted Work Hours in or Near Residential Areas Construction activities for the project shall be restricted to the following hours: b. Construction activities shall be restricted to the hours between seven o’clock (7:00) a.m. and eight o’clock (8:00) p.m., Monday through Friday. Work on Saturdays shall be restricted to the hours between nine o’clock (9:00) a.m. and eight o’clock (8:00) p.m. No work shall be permitted on Sundays. Emergency Extensions to Permitted Work Hours The Development Services Division Director is authorized to grant an extension of working time during an emergency. An emergency shall include but is not limited to natural and manmade disasters. Temporary Erosion Control Temporary erosion control must be installed and maintained for the duration of the project. This work will comply with the Surface Water Design Manual and must be approved by the Renton Development Services Division. (Ord. 5526, 2-1-2010) Hydroseeding Required: a. Within thirty (30) days of completion of grading work, the applicant shall hydroseed or plant an appropriate ground cover over any portion of the site that is graded or cleared of vegetation and where no further construction work will occur within ninety (90) days. b. Alternative measures to hydroseeding such as mulch, sodding, or plastic covering as specified in the Surface Water Design Manual may be proposed between the dates of October 1st and April 30th of each year. Plastic covering may be used for soil protection for soils that will be utilized as structural or fill materials only; provided, that soils that are to be reused for other purposes shall be covered for no more than fourteen (14) days. Family First Community Center August 30, 2019 Page 2 of 2 c. The Development Services Division’s approval of this work is required prior to final inspection and approval of the permit. (Ord. 5526, 2-1-2010; Ord. 5828, 12-12-2016) Construction Debris Construction debris, such as concrete, lumber, etc., will be removed and not buried on site. Preliminary Traffic Control Plan A traffic control plan will be submitted for review and approval by City of Renton after the General Contractor is selected. CONSTRUCTION MITIGATION PLAN Parking Availability Construction of the Project shall not reduce the number of parking stalls or otherwise materially impact school parking facilities on the Adjacent School Property during the regular School Year (ending June 17, 2020 and commencing again on September 2, 2020) Fire Lane - Hydrant If access to the Fire Lane serving the adjacent school is rendered functionally unusable or the Hydrant is inaccessible, then Contractor will (a) provide the School with alternative access sufficient to meet the needs of the School and as required by law, and (b) obtain approval from the Fire Marshal of the Renton Fire Authority regarding any closure of the Fire Lane and any temporary or permanent replacement facilities Contractor Parking – Personal Vehicles Contractor will ensure that during the 20/21 School Year (September 2, 2020 through June 23, 2021), all personnel related to construction of the Project shall park either within the limits of construction or off-site. No construction vehicles shall park in any school parking or drive areas. Driveway, Parking and School Access Contractor will ensure any construction-related work has minimal, if any, impact on School pick-up and drop-off activities at the beginning and end of each school day (Monday-Friday 8:05 – 8:35 AM and 2:45 - 3:15 PM), by ensuring, among other things, that no driveways leading into school parking areas and no sidewalks are blocked by construction-related vehicles or materials, (b) no construction-related vehicles or materials are located or stored within the lots, and (c) construction-related activity in no way impacts the ability of School buses to enter and exit the school property. Dust / Odor / Fume Control Utilize misting water sprays or other measures sufficient to reduce airborne dusting of the adjacent school and/or residential properties. Employ appropriate measures to limit fumes and odors from reaching adjacent facilities and properties. Fencing and Visual Screening Install temporary fencing sufficient to limit public access and to properly secure the project site. Employ visual screening along the north fence line. Prohibitions All tobacco, smoking and firearms are strictly prohibited anywhere on the project site and property or adjacent school property. Violators will be subject to immediate removal. Baylis Architects Family First Community Center Bid Set APPENDIX B October 20, 2021 HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT Appendix B - 1 APPENDIX B Interior HVAC Noise Control Report FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 16022 116TH AVENUE RENTON, WA 98058 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT Submitted to: Meredith Everist Baylis Architects 10801 Main Street, #110 Bellevue, WA 98004 Submitted by: A3 Acoustics, LLP 241 S Lander St., Suite 200 Seattle, WA 98134 September 13, 2019 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER TABLE OF CONTENTS INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Executive Summary ......................................................................................................................................1 2. Design Criteria ...............................................................................................................................................2 2.1. ASHRAE HVAC Noise Guidelines...............................................................................................................2 3. General Recommendations ..........................................................................................................................3 3.1. Air Terminal Devices ...................................................................................................................................3 3.2. Building Service Penetrations .....................................................................................................................3 4. Equipment Specific Recommendations ......................................................................................................4 4.1. AC-1 ............................................................................................................................................................4 4.2. ERV-1..........................................................................................................................................................5 4.3. ERV-2..........................................................................................................................................................7 4.4. VRF Split System Heat Pumps ...................................................................................................................9 4.4.1. Indoor Units .............................................................................................................................................9 4.4.2. Outdoor Condensing Units .................................................................................................................... 10 4.5. Pumps & Boilers ........................................................................................................................................ 11 5. Summary ...................................................................................................................................................... 12 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 1 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 1. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY This report summarizes the acoustic review of the mechanical systems for the Family First Community Center, a medical office and activity center development planned for construction at 16022 116th Avenue, Renton, WA. All recommendations are based on our review of the mechanical drawings dated August 1, 2019. Noise emissions from proposed mechanical equipment is predicted to building interiors and to exterior property lines. Noise control recommendations are made based on industry-standard design criteria. FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 2 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 2. DESIGN CRITERIA 2.1. ASHRAE HVAC Noise Guidelines The adopted criteria for mechanical system noise within interior spaces is the Noise Criteria (NC) rating, which is a rating of background noise based on a comparison of the octave band sound pressure level spectrum of a sound with standardized octave-band sound pressure level curves. Each NC curve is defined by its sound pressure level for eight octave-band center frequencies. The NC rating is a single number that represents the recommended octave-band limits of an acceptable background noise level. Recommended background noise levels for the project are based on the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) and company experience on past projects. The background noise design goals shown in Table 1 include an allowance of 5 points/decibels for post-installation performance. Table 1: Family First Community Center - Design Criteria Type of Space NC dBA Private offices 25 - 30 35 - 40 Corridors & Lobbies 35 - 40 40 - 45 Classrooms 30 - 35 35 - 40 Public restrooms 40 - 45 45 - 50 Gym, Fitness Room 40 - 45 45 - 50 Medical Patient Rooms 25 - 30 30 - 35 Medical Procedure Rooms 30 - 35 35 - 40 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 3 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 3. GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS The following noise and vibration control measures are recommended for the mechanical systems to meet the design criteria in the areas listed in Table 1. 3.1. Air Terminal Devices When selecting diffusers, registers, or grilles, select an operating point 5-10 NC points lower than the recommended background noise levels given in Table 1 to ensure regenerated noise at the diffuser will not exceed background noise levels. 3.2. Building Service Penetrations Where ductwork and piping penetrate walls between adjacent noise sensitive spaces, leave a ¼” to ½” gap between the pipe or duct, and seal gap resiliently per the drawing below. Figure 1: Building service penetration recommendation detail FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 4 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 4. EQUIPMENT SPECIFIC RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1. AC-1 Trane Voyager YDH 240 (8,000 CFM) AC-1 is located in the south mechanical well roof above A129 and serves the gymnasium. Sound power levels are provided by the manufacturer as follows: AC-1: Sound power levels by octave band (dB re 10-12 watts) CONDITION Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 LwA (dBA) DISCHARGE 89 85 80 83 76 73 73 68 83 OUTDOOR 102 89 93 94 92 87 83 75 96 Noise levels are excessive in the 63-Hz octave band and would require costly noise mitigation. We recommend re-selecting the unit. Re- select not to exceed the following sound power levels: AC-1 Re-selection: Sound power levels by octave band (dB re 10-12 watts) CONDITION Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 LwA DISCHARGE 89 88 85 85 80 80 80 80 - OUTDOOR 92 90 92 90 90 88 85 85 - Further recommendations will be provided upon receipt of re-selection. FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 5 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 4.2. ERV-1 RenewAire HE3XINH (1,540 CFM) ERV-1 is located above the Fitness Room, A129. Sound power levels are provided by the manufacturer as follows: ERV-1: Sound power levels by octave band (dB re 10-12 watts) CONDITION Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 LwA (dBA) OUTLET 83 86 81 80 82 78 77 74 86 Based on this information, we recommend the following to meet acoustic performance goals: Radiated Noise 1. Wrap unit in 1 lb/psf lagging material, such as SoundSeal B-10/QFA-3 Exhaust Noise 2. Acceptable as shown. OSA Intake Noise 3. Acceptable as shown. Supply Noise 4. Install silencer immediately downstream of supply air outlet having the following minimum insertion loss values (Price RH36/UA meets the criteria): ERV-1 Supply Silencer: Insertion Loss by Octave Band Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 1 7 - - - - - - 5. Additionally, include the following downstream of supply air outlet before each diffuser: a. 15’ of internally lined ductwork b. (2) 50/50 splits or equivalent branch configuration c. 5’ of flex duct Return Noise 6. Assuming a minimum of 10’ of 1” lined duct and 1 50/50 split, the following minimum insertion loss required is estimated. A basis- of-design silencer that meets these requirements is provided in the same table: ERV-1 Return Silencer: Insertion Loss by Octave Band Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 2 14 10 - - - - - 7. Additionally, include the following downstream of supply air outlet before each diffuser: a. 15’ of internally lined ductwork b. (2) 50/50 splits or equivalent branch configuration FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 6 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 Structure-Borne Noise 8. Install unit on spring hangers with 1” static deflection. 9. Provide flexible duct connections and flexible electrical conduit for power connections. FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 7 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 4.3. ERV-2 RenewAire HE3XINH (2,720 CFM) ERV-2 is located above the Women’s Restroom/Lockers, A125/A126. Sound power levels are provided by the manufacturer as follows: ERV-2: Sound power levels by octave band (dB re 10-12 watts) CONDITION Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 LwA (dBA) OUTLET 87 95 92 85 77 70 66 65 87 Based on this information, we recommend the following to meet acoustic performance goals: Radiated Noise 1. The ceiling of A125/A126 should consist of two layers of GWB. Exhaust Noise 2. Line 5’ of ductwork downstream of exhaust outlet with 1” thick internal acoustic lining. OSA Intake Noise 3. Acceptable as shown. Supply Noise 4. Install silencer immediately downstream of supply air outlet having the following minimum insertion loss values (Price RLX36/8G meets the criteria): ERV-2 Supply Silencer: Insertion Loss by Octave Band Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 1 14 11 - - - - - 5. Additionally, include the following downstream of supply air outlet before each diffuser: a. 15’ of internally lined ductwork b. (2) 50/50 splits or equivalent branch configuration c. 5’ of flex duct Return Noise 6. Install silencer immediately downstream of return air inlet having the following minimum insertion loss values (Price RLX60/UF meets the criteria): ERV-2 Return Silencer: Insertion Loss by Octave Band Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 5 20 10 - - - - - FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 8 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 7. Additionally, include the following downstream of return air inlet: d. 15’ of internally lined ductwork e. (2) 50/50 splits or equivalent branch configuration Structure-Borne Noise 8. Install unit on spring hangers with 1” static deflection. 9. Provide flexible duct connections and flexible electrical conduit for power connections. FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 9 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 4.4. VRF Split System Heat Pumps 4.4.1. Indoor Units The following equipment serves spaces throughout the building. Operational sound pressure levels are provided by the manufacturer as follows: HP-XXX: Operational sound pressure levels @ 1 meter (dB re 20 µPa) Mark Mitsubishi Model Location SPL (dBA) Low – Med – High HP-101 PEFY-P24NMAU-E3 A105 Meeting Room 30 – 34 – 39 HP-102 PEFY-P18NMAU-E3 A110 Maker Space 1 28 – 32 – 35 HP-103 A110 Maker Space 2 HP-104 PLFY-P08NFMU-E HP102 Check-in 26 – 30 – 33 HP-105 PLFY-P12NFMU-E HP101 Waiting Room 26 – 30 – 34 HP-106 PLFY-P15NFMU-E HP118 Group Ed 28 – 33 – 39 HP-107 PEFY-P36NMAU-E3 HP Corridor 32 – 37 – 41 HP-108 PEFY-P12NMAU-E3 HP105 Counselling 28 – 30 – 34 HP-109 PKFY-P12NHMU-E2 HP107 Dental Equip 34 – 38 – 42 HP-110 PLFY-P12NFMU-E HP108 Dental Exam 26 – 30 – 34 HP-111 PMFY-P12NBMU-ER5 HP109 Medical Pod 32 – 34 – 37 HP-112 PEFY-P12NMAU-E3 HP123 Exam Room 5 28 – 30 – 34 HP-113 PEFY-P30NMAU-E3 A131 Fitness Room 30 – 34 – 39 HP-114 A129 Dance Class HP-201 PMFY-P12NBMU-ER5 A103 Check-in 32 – 34 – 37 HP-202 PEFY-P18NMAU-E3 A109 Sponsor 28 – 32 - 35 HP-203 PKFY-P18NHMU-E2 A114 Lunch Room 36 – 41 – 45 HP-204 A116 Teen Room HP-205 PKFY-P15NHMU-E2 A117 Youth Room 34 – 39 – 43 HP-206 PKFY-P12NHMU-E2 A119 Baby-Toddler Room 34 – 38 – 42 HP-207 PEFY-P96NMHSU-E A125 Women's Restroom 39 – 42 – 46 Based on this information, we recommend the following to meet acoustic performance goals: Structure-Borne Noise 1. Ceiling cassettes: install units on neoprene bushings. 2. Ducted units: install units on double-deflection neoprene hangers with 0.3” static deflection. 3. Ducted units: provide flexible duct connections between the unit and all associated ductwork. FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 10 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 4.4.2. Outdoor Condensing Units The outdoor condensing units are located in the south mechanical well over A127/A128. Operational sound pressure levels are provided by the manufacturer as follows: CU-1, CU-2: Operational sound pressure levels @ 1 meter (dB re 20 µPa) Mark Mitsubishi Model Location SPL (dBA) CU-1 PURY-P240T(Y)SNU-A(-BS) Dance Class Roof 63 CU-2 PURY-P192T(Y)SNU-A(-BS) 62 Based on this information, we recommend the following to meet acoustic performance goals: Structure-Borne Noise 1. Install on restrained spring isolators with 2” static deflection. 2. Provide flex connectors for pipe connections, and isolate pip ing on Caddy foam blocks. FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 11 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 4.5. Pumps & Boilers The following vibration isolation is recommended for pumps and boilers to ensure unwanted noise and vibration is not transmitted into the structure: 1. Boilers – install on neoprene mounts having 0.3” static deflection; all piping attached to unit shall utilize a flexible connector to limit vibration transfer. 2. Pumps less than 5 hp – install on neoprene mounts having 0.3” static deflection. 3. Pumps between 5 and 25 hp – install using restrained spring isolators having 2.0” static deflection on structural steel base; all piping attached to unit shall utilize a flexible connector to limit vibration transfer. 4. Pumps greater than 25 hp – install using restrained spring isolators having 2.0” static deflection on a concrete inertia base; all piping attached to unit shall utilize a flexible connector to limit vibration transfer. FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER PAGE 12 INTERIOR HVAC NOISE CONTROL REPORT 13 SEPTEMBER 2019 5. SUMMARY This report has provided information and recommendations to control noise and vibration from the mechanical systems proposed for the Family First Community Center in Renton, WA. These recommendations encompass noise transferred to the interior of the building, as well as environmental noise transmission to the adjacent properties. If there should be any questions or changes, please bring them to our attention as soon as possible. Sincerely, A3 Acoustics, LLP Stephen Johnson Mohamed Ait Allaoua Acoustical Staff Engineer Partner & Acoustical Consultant A3 Acoustics, LLP 241 South Lander St, Suite 200 Seattle, WA 98134 206.792.7796 – O mohamed@a3acoustics.com stephen@a3acoustics.com Baylis Architects Family First Community Center Bid Set APPENDIX C October 20, 2021 HEALTHPOINT CUTSHEETS Appendix B - 1 APPENDIX C Healthpoint Cutsheets Pre-Installation Guide A-dec 411 Dental Chair and Related Systems 86.0375.00 Rev A This document contains technical specifications for installing the A-dec 411 chair and related systems. Contents Structural Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Utility Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Shipping Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Documentation References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Views and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Utility Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 A-dec 411 Chair Plan View with Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 A-dec 332/333 Radius-Style Delivery System Plan View with Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 A-dec 551 Assistant’s Instrumentation Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 A-dec 461 Cuspidor with Support Center Plan View with Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 A-dec 572, 572L, and 372 Dental Light Plan View with Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 A-dec 482 Monitor Mount with Dental Light Plan View with Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 A-dec 382 Radius-Style Monitor Mount Plan View with Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 A-dec 411 Chair with 333 Radius®-Style System, 551 Assistant’s, 461 Cuspidor, and 482 Monitor Mount A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 2 86.0375.00 Rev A Structural Requirements Dental Patient Chair Interface Requirement The dental chair requires a solid, level mounting surface that meets these minimum specifications: • Weight of 1000 lb (4448 N) for the chair, dental light, delivery system, and patient. • Capability to anchor the chair to the floor, with a minimum pullout load of 100 lb (445 N) for one anchor-bolt. Utility Requirements Air • 1/2" (13 mm) nominal pipe compression fitting protruding 2" (51 mm) from the finished floor or wall, supplied by the contractor. • Right angle manual shut-off valve supplied by the dental dealer and installed by the contractor. • Air pressure and flow of 80-100 psi (550-860 KPa), 2.5 scfm. (71 sl/min) during normal use; 7.5 scfm (210 sl/min) peak intermittent flow. • Air plumbing to be flushed clean before the final connection to the dental equipment. Water • 1/2" (13 mm) nominal pipe compression fitting protruding 2" (51 mm) from the finished floor or wall, supplied by the contractor. • Right angle manual shut-off valve supplied by the dental dealer and installed by the contractor. •Water pressure and flow of 60 ± 20 psi (410 ± 140 KPa), 1.5 gpm (5.7 L/min), not to exceed 104°F (40°C). • Water plumbing to be flushed clean before the final connection to the dental equipment. Electrical • 1/2" (13 mm) conduit and box with a hospital- grade duplex receptacle supplied by the contractor. • Wire box to conform to local codes. •Top of duplex should not be higher than 4.25" (108 mm) above the finished floor to fit within the floor box. • Voltage: 120 volts, 3 wire. • 110-120 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 15 Amp mains breaker min. • The 10 Amp rating breaks down as follows for 120 VAC @ 60 Hz: ○3.5 Amps for the chair pump motor to move the chair base up. ○1.0 Amps for the chair back motor to move the chair back up or down. ○2.5 Amps for the 300-watt power supply (located in the utility area) to power the chair- mounted dental light and other ancillaries. ○3 Amps of additional current for mains voltage ancillary products, such as video monitors. NOTE Job site construction should be com- pleted before the dental equipment installa- tion (including finished floors, ceiling, plumbing, lighting, paint, etc.). CAUTION Local regulation may require licensed plumbers and electricians to install the utilities. All plumbing and utilities must conform to prevailing local codes. CAUTION The manner and method for accessing the utilities within the wall is the responsibility of the design team working on the project (dental dealer, architectural services, and contractors). Utilities must be accessible without the use of tools. NOTE The delivery system comes with a self- contained water bottle. Municipal water is only required if the equipment configuration includes a cuspidor or if the facility has special requirements. NOTE The A-dec 411 chair is rated at 10 Amps max. A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 86.0375.00 Rev A 3 Central Vacuum • Plumbing up to the floor box utility center and its termination point is to be specified by the central vacuum supplier (terminates in the utility center). • Wet systems: ○Plumbing to terminate with 5/8" (16 mm) O.D. tube protruding 1" perpendicular to the floor. ○10 ± 2 in Hg, 9 scfm minimum. Gravity Drain •1-1/2" (38 mm) nominal pipe protruding 1" (25 mm) from finished floor. Trap to be placed in line, conforming to local codes, contractor-supplied. • Floor mount only. Not recommended for wall mount utilities. Shipping Weights Documentation References NOTE Gravity drains are needed only on systems with a cuspidor. Product/Box Est. Shipping Weight A-dec 411 Chair 410 lb (186 kg) A-dec 332/333 Delivery System 88 lb (40 kg) A-dec 461 Cuspidor with Support Center 66 lb (30 kg) A-dec 551 Assistant’s Instrumentation (assistant’s arm only) 20 lb (9.1 kg) A-dec 572/572L Dental Light 47 lb (21 kg) A-dec 372 Dental Light 47 lb (21 kg) A-dec 482 Radius-Style Monitor Mount (mount hardware only; without monitor) 10 lb (4.5 kg) Back Mount and Support Link (required with 551 module) 15 lb (6.8 kg) Document Title p/n Installation Guides A-dec 411 Dental Chair with Radius-Style Delivery System and Dental Light 86.0378.00 A-dec 461 Support Center 86.0387.00 A-dec 551 Assistant’s Instrumentation 86.0388.00 A-dec 482 Monitor Mount 86.0410.00 A-dec 382 Monitor Mount 86.0413.00 A-dec 572L Dental Light on an A-dec 411 or A-dec 511 Dental Chair 86.0333.00 Instructions for Use A-dec 411 Dental Chair 86.0374.00 A-dec 461 Cuspidor with Support Center 86.0375.00 A-dec 551 Assistant’s Instrumentation 86.0603.00 A-dec Self-Contained Water System 86.0609.00 A-dec Monitor Mounts 86.0309.00 Service Information A-dec Dental Chairs Service Guide 86.0380.00 A-dec Dental Chairs Service Reference 86.0381.00 A-dec Delivery Systems Service Guide 86.0382.00 A-dec Delivery Systems Service Reference 86.0383.00 A-dec Dental Lights and Monitor Mounts Service Guide 86.0326.00 A-dec Dental Lights and Monitor Mounts Service Reference 86.0328.00 Templates A-dec 411 Chair Template 86.0386.00 A-dec 411 Related Modules Template 86.0385.00 A-dec 411 Chair Mini Template 86.0386.01 A-dec Floor Boxes 85.0472.00 NOTE Use only full-scale templates for locating the plumbing and electrical. NOTE The floor box mounting hole placements appear on the floor box base that is being installed. A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 4 86.0375.00 Rev A Views and Dimensions Utility Placement Figure 1. Plumbing Elevations Figure 2. Floor Box Utility Connections NOTE The dimensional drawings in this section are not to scale and are for reference only. For complete accuracy, use the appropriate full-sized templates. CAUTION Due to specific plumbing elevation restrictions, the height and placement of utilities in the floor box can affect the ability to use the floor box cover. Failure to provide adequate space will prevent installation and removal of the cover (see Figure 1). Please reference the appropriate full-size template which includes all of the necessary space constraints. 16 7/8" [429mm] 4 1/8" [105mm] 7" [179mm] 9 1/2" [243mm] ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL WATER/ AIR VACCUUM/DRAIN 1 7/8" [49mm] 2 7/8" [73mm] 2 7/8" [73mm] 1 1/4" [33mm] VACCUUM DRAIN AIR A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 86.0375.00 Rev A 5 A-dec 411 Chair Plan View with Elevation 26" (660 mm) 25" (635 mm) 21.5" (546 mm) Space Between Arms Forward Chair Travel (from base down to base up) Width of Backrest Width of Baseplate 63" (1600 mm) 11.5" (292 mm) 9" - 17.25" (229 - 438 mm) Range of Headrest 9" - 18" (229 - 457 mm) for Lever Release Headrest 58.5" (1486 mm) 31.5" (800 mm) 34" (864 mm) 9" (229 mm) 4.25" (108 mm) 13.75" (349 mm) 70.5" (1791 mm) 34" (864 mm) 140° To seat pocket Forward Headrest Movement Range of Headrest 12.5" (318 mm) Distance when chair fully down 24" (610 mm) Chair travels 11.5" from fully down to fully up A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 6 86.0375.00 Rev A A-dec 332/333 Radius-Style Delivery System Plan View with Elevation (shown with 333 system) 32-34" (813-864 mm) 14.5" (368 mm) 19.5" (495 mm) 29" radius (737 mm) 13" radius (330 mm) 49.5" (1258 mm) 30" (762 mm) Full Base Down to Full Base Up (forward chair travel = 11.5" [292 mm]) 9" - 17.25" (229 - 438 mm) Range of Headrest 9" - 18" (229 - 457 mm) for Lever Release Headrest A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 86.0375.00 Rev A 7 A-dec 551 Assistant’s Instrumentation Plan View 10" radius (254 mm) 10" radius (254 mm) 6.75" (171 mm) 13.5" (343 mm) 6"(152 mm)36" radius (914 mm) Long Arm Short Arm 10" radius (254 mm)10" radius (254 mm) 22.75" radius (578 mm) 6" (152 mm) Long Arm Short Arm A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 8 86.0375.00 Rev A A-dec 461 Cuspidor with Support Center Plan View with Elevation 14.5" (368 mm) 18.5" (470 mm) Cuspidor Only Full Support Center 45°45°Space needed to switch Support Cen te r for either Left or Right Dentistry18.25" (464 mm) 28.5" (724 mm) Cuspidor Only Full Support Center 14.5" (368 mm) 14.5" (368 mm) 21.5" (546 mm) 30" (762 mm) 5.5" (140 mm) A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 86.0375.00 Rev A 9 A-dec 572, 572L, and 372 Dental Light Plan View with Elevation (shown with A-dec 572L LED Dental Light) 20" (508 mm) 63.75" (1619 mm) 29" (737 mm) 27" (686 mm) A-dec 572 Light A-dec 372 Light 29" radius (737 mm) 11.5" (292 mm) Full Base Down to Full Base Up 9" - 17.25" (229 - 438 mm) 49.5" (1258 mm) 26" (660 mm) Range of Headrest 9" - 18" (229 - 457 mm) for Lever Release Headrest A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 10 86.0375.00 Rev A A-dec 482 Monitor Mount with Dental Light Plan View with Elevation 11.5" (292 mm) Full Base Down to Full Base Up 9" - 17.25" (229 - 438 mm) 18.5" radius (470 mm) 22" (559 mm) 63.75" (1619 mm) 29" (737 mm) 49.5" (1258 mm) 26" (660 mm) 27" (686 mm) 30" radius (762 mm) Range of Headrest 9" - 18" (229 - 457 mm) for Lever Release Headrest A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide 86.0375.00 Rev A 11 A-dec 382 Radius-Style Monitor Mount Plan View with Elevation 11.5" (292 mm) Full Base Down to Full Base Up 9" - 17.25" (229 - 438 mm) 49.5" (1258 mm) 26" (660 mm) 44.75" (1137 mm) 9" (229 mm) 30" rad 762 mm Range of Headrest 9" - 18" (229 - 457 mm) for Lever Release Headrest A-dec 411 Chair and Related Systems Pre-Installation Guide A-dec Headquarters 2601 Crestview Drive Newberg, OR 97132 USA Tel:1.800.547.1883 Within USA/Canada Tel:1.503.538.7478 Outside USA/Canada Fax:1.503.538.0276 www.a-dec.com / www.a-dec.biz 86.0375.00 Rev A Copyright 2013 A-dec Inc. All rights reserved. A-dec Inc. makes no warranty of any kind with regard to the content in this document including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Regulatory Information Regulatory information is provided with A-dec equipment as mandated by agency requirements. This information is delivered in the equipment’s Instructions for Use or the separate Regulatory Information and Specifications document. If you need this information, please go to the Document Library at www.a-dec.com. VACUUMWATERDRAINAIR2-1/4" (57 mm)2-1/4" (57 mm)3/4"(19 mm)3"(76 mm)5-1/4"(133 mm)7"(178 mm)9-3/4"(248 mm)1-1/2" Nominal Pipe ForGravity Drain (whenrequired)5/8" O.D. Tubing ForCentral Vacuum OnlyTarget Area for the 300Watt Multipurpose PowerSupplyOptional2" Data Conduit(locate as needed)ELECTRICALHospital-Grade Quad Electrical BoxSupplied by Contractor(check amperage requirements)2601 CRESTVIEW DRIVE * POST OFFICE BOX 111 * NEWBERG, OREGON 97132 U.S.A. * TELEPHONE (503) 538-7478NOTE: Drawing for operatory layout purposes only. Not to scale.85.0472.02 Rev D2015-04CHECK WITH LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES ABOUT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS PRODUCTCascade Contour Floor Boxpg. 1 of 7 DRAINWATERVACUUMAIR3/4"(19 mm)ELECTRICAL5/8" O.D. Tubing ForCentral Vacuum Only2-1/4" (57 mm)2-1/4" (57 mm)3"(76 mm)5-1/4"(133 mm)7"(178 mm)9-3/4"(248 mm)Optional2" Data Conduit(locate as needed)1-1/2" Nominal PipeFor Gravity Drain(when required)Hospital-Grade Quad Electrical BoxSupplied by Contractor(check amperage requirements)2601 CRESTVIEW DRIVE * POST OFFICE BOX 111 * NEWBERG, OREGON 97132 U.S.A. * TELEPHONE (503) 538-7478CHECK WITH LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES ABOUT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS PRODUCTCascade Large Stainless Steel Floor BoxNOTE: Drawing for operatory layout purposes only. Not to scale.85.0472.02 Rev D2015-04pg. 2 of 7 DRAINWATERAIRVACUUMELECTRICAL2-3/4" (70 mm)2-3/4" (70 mm)7-3/4"(197 mm)4-3/4"(121 mm)7"(178 mm)9-1/4"(235 mm)10"(254 mm)5/8" O.D. Tubing ForCentral Vacuum Only1-1/2" Nominal Pipe ForGravity Drain (whenrequired)Optional2" Data Conduit(locate as needed)Hospital-Grade QuadElectrical Box Supplied byContractor(check amperagerequirements)2601 CRESTVIEW DRIVE * POST OFFICE BOX 111 * NEWBERG, OREGON 97132 U.S.A. * TELEPHONE (503) 538-7478CHECK WITH LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES ABOUT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS PRODUCTCascade Medium Stainless Steel Floor BoxNOTE: Drawing for operatory layout purposes only. Not to scale.85.0472.02 Rev D2015-04pg. 3 of 7 AIRDRAINWATERVACUUMELECTRICAL5/8" O.D. Tubing ForCentral Vacuum Only1-1/2" Nominal Pipe ForGravity Drain (whenrequired)2-7/8" (73 mm)2-7/8" (73 mm)16-7/8" (429 mm)5-1/4"(134 mm)7"(179 mm)2-1/8" (55 mm)2-1/4" (57 mm)16-5/8" (422 mm)8-3/4" (223 mm)Optional2" DATA CONDUIT(locate as needed)A-dec 511 Floor BoxCHECK WITH LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES ABOUT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS PRODUCT2601 CRESTVIEW DRIVE * POST OFFICE BOX 111 * NEWBERG, OREGON 97132 U.S.A. * TELEPHONE (503) 538-7478NOTE: Drawing for operatory layout purposes only. Not to scale.85.0472.02 Rev D2015-04pg. 4 of 7 WATERVACUUMDRAIN1-1/2" Nominal PipeFor Gravity Drain(when required)5/8" O.D. Tubing ForCentral Vacuum Only16-7/8" (429 mm)16-5/8" (422 mm)2-7/8" (73 mm)1-7/8" (48 mm)4"(102 mm)7"(178 mm)9" (229 mm)1-1/4" (33 mm)2-1/4" (57 mm)363 Support CenterUmbilical Entrance1-7/8" (48 mm)(for right side mount363 Support Center)OPTIONALELECTRICAL4"(102 mm)363 Support CenterUmbilical EntranceOptional2" DATA CONDUIT(locate as needed)AIRELECTRICALCHECK WITH LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES ABOUT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS PRODUCT2601 CRESTVIEW DRIVE * POST OFFICE BOX 111 * NEWBERG, OREGON 97132 U.S.A. * TELEPHONE (503) 538-7478NOTE: Drawing for operatory layout purposes only. Not to scale.85.0472.02 Rev D2015-04pg. 5 of 7A-dec 411 Floor Box311 (Version B) Floor Box 10-1/2" (264 mm)13" (327 mm)DRAINWATERVACUUMELECTRICAL3" (76 mm)2-1/4" (57 mm)8" (203 mm)Optional2" DATA CONDUIT(Locate as Needed)1-1/2" Nominal PipeFor Gravity Drain(when required)5/8" O.D. Tubing ForCentral Vacuum Only15-3/4" (398 mm)16-1/4" (416 mm)Hospital-Grade Quad Electrical BoxSupplied by Contractor(Check Amperage Requirements)AIRA-dec 311 (Version A) Contoured Floor BoxCHECK WITH LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES ABOUT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS PRODUCT2601 CRESTVIEW DRIVE * POST OFFICE BOX 111 * NEWBERG, OREGON 97132 U.S.A. * TELEPHONE (503) 538-7478If floor box is mountedup against thePower Supply Cover,make sure NOTHING extendsinto the shaded area .NOTE: Drawing for operatory layout purposes only. Not to scale.85.0472.02 Rev D2015-04pg. 6 of 73"[76 mm]4.5"[114 mm] DRAINWATERAIR2-1/4" (57 mm)2-1/4" (57 mm)3-1/4" (83 mm)3" (76 mm)1-1/2" (39 mm)ELECTRICAL6" (153 mm)5/8" O.D. Tubing ForCentral Vacuum OnlyVACUUMOptional2" DATA CONDUIT(locate as needed)1-1/2" Nominal Pipe ForGravity Drain (whenrequired)Hospital-Grade Quad Electrical BoxSupplied by Contractor(check amperage requirements)A-dec 311 (Version A) Integrated Floor BoxCHECK WITH LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES ABOUT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS PRODUCT2601 CRESTVIEW DRIVE * POST OFFICE BOX 111 * NEWBERG, OREGON 97132 U.S.A. * TELEPHONE (503) 538-7478NOTE: Drawing for operatory layout purposes only. Not to scale.85.0472.02 Rev D2015-04pg. 7 of 7 L110W G4 Instrument Washer HYDRIM ® G4 AUTOMATED INSTRUMENT WASHING the first step in the sterilization process Efficient The time saved by automated washing compared to manual cleaning is approximately 1 hour of labor for every nine procedural set-ups1. HYDRIM® G4 cycle times are as fast as 44 minutes from start to dry. HYDRIM® ensures that every set of instruments receives the same validated cleaning process. G4 Technology There is nothing like SciCan’s G4 Technology. The large touch screen gives in-depth cycle information and allows users to view current operations. From the networking portal, users can access cycle history and validation information. If there is ever a cycle fault, the G4 software will send an email to the office and the service technician, allowing remote troubleshooting. Safe Avoid the many steps involved with manual washing or using ultrasonic cleaners. Steps such as pre-soaking, scrubbing and drying instruments before sterilization increase the exposure to blood and body fluids and the risk of sharps injuries. Automated instrument washing reduces physical handling of contaminated instruments. Using the HYDRIM® G4 instrument washer is the safer and more effective option, decreasing the risk of exposure and injuries. HYDRIM® G4 saves time and money—making it a worthy investment for today’s standard of care. Capacity HYDRIM ® L110W G4 has a 10 full-size cassette capacity allowing offices to turn over 2500 instruments in a 10 hour day. WIFI ENABLED 1 Tholen, Mark, 10 Ideas to Increase Production and Decrease Expenses in Sterilization. (www.dentaleconomics.com/articles/print/volume-99/issue-10/ features/increase-production-and-decrease-expenses-in-sterilization.html) SD-533 US EN R1 HYDRIM is a registered trademark and “Your Infection Control Specialist” is a trademark of SciCan Ltd. VistaCool and VistaPure are trademarks of Vista Research Group.Recommended Accessories Part Number Description 01-109963S 5-Cassette Rack, Full Size 01-109964S 5-Cassette Rack, Half Size 01-109965S 4 XL Cassette Rack, Full Size 01-109967S Hygiene Basket 01-107240 STATIM 2000 Basket 01-107241 STATIM 5000 Basket 01-108232 Long Basket CS-HIPL HIP Cleaning Solution L110w HYDR IM L110W G4 Specifications Unit Size Dimensions (W x H x D):598 x 850 x 600 mm / 23.54” x 33.5” x 23.75” Depth with Door Open:1200 mm / 47” Weight:80 kg / 176 lb Cycle Times* Rinse and Hold 17 min Regular Wash + Dry 25 min + 10 min Heavy Duty Wash + Dry 34 min + 10 min Water Consumption Per Cycle Rinse and Hold 16 L / 4.23 Gal Regular Wash 24 L / 6.34 Gal Heavy Duty Wash 32 L / 8.45 Gal Electrical Connection North America 208-240 V, 15 A, 60 Hz Running Noise < 78 dB (Wash) Water and Drain Connections Hot and Cold Water Tap Connection 3/4” Garden Hose, Male Recommended Hot Water Temperature 60º C / 140º F Cold Water Temperature < 30º C / 86º F Inlet Water Pressure 1-10 bar / 14.5-145 psi Drain 2 cm / 3/4” *Actual cycle times will vary with incoming water temperature and pressure. VistaPure™ Water Filtration Provides two grades of high-quality water for autoclaves, dental bottles, ultrasonic cleaners and the rinse cycle of instrument washers. V3000 HYDR IM VistaPure™ Connection Protect expensive instruments and equipment by using the VistaPure system’s hyperfiltered water for the final-rinse cycle of the HYDRIM for a spot-free finish. V3010 www.scicanusa.com HYDRIM C61W G4 also available VistaPure™ Water Filtration shown above. Manufactured by: SciCan Ltd. 1440 Don Mills Rd., Toronto, ON, Canada, M3B 3P9 Tel: 416-445-1600 Toll free: 1-800-667-7733 customerservice@scican.com Distributed by: SciCan Inc. 701 Technology Dr., Canonsburg, PA 15317, USA Tel: 724-820-1600 Toll Free: 1-800-572-1211 uscustomerservice@scican.com VistaPure™, VistaCool™ and DrainHub™ are manufactured by: Vista Research Group PO Box 321, Ashland, Ohio 44805-0321 USA Tel: (419) 285-3927 VistaResearchGroup.com ProMax Digital SpeciﬁcationsDigitalsensorCCDTechnologyCCDpixelsize33micronsImagepixelsize(selectable)66 microns,99 microns,132 micronsCCDsensoractivesensorareaPan:9 x 136 mmCeph:9 x 270 mmGrayscalerange12to16-bit dynamic range131,072 grayscaleImageresolutionPan:9 lp /mmCeph:5.7 lp /mmMagnificationPanconstant1.2Cephdigital1.13HighspeedcephReducescantime by 50%Scan time Pan:2.5 -16 secCeph:10 -17 secTomo:3 -12 secDigitalimagefieldPan:14 x 30 cm (5.5 x 12”)Ceph:24 x 18 cm (9 x 7”)Ceph:24 x 29 cm (9 x 11.4”)Ceph:27 x 18 cm (10.6 x 7”)Ceph:27 x 29 cm (10.6 x 11.4”)Ceph:18 x 24 cm (7 x 9”)Ceph:18 x 27 cm (7 x 10.6”)Ceph:29 x 24 cm (11.4 x 9”)Ceph:29 x 27 cm (11.4 x 10.6”) ProMax Film SpeciﬁcationsFilmsizePan15x30cmPan12.5 x 30 cmCeph18x24cmCeph8x10inCeph24x30cmCassettetypeFlatScantimePan2.7 -16 secCeph0.2 -5 secTomo3-12 secMagnificationPanconstant1.2Cephfilm1.08 -1.13 19 PLANMECA ProMax 20PLANMECA ProMax General ProMax SpeciﬁcationsGeneratorConstantpotential,microprocessor controlled,operating frequency 80kHzX-ray tube D-052SBFocalspotsize0.5 x 0.5 mm (IEC 336)Total filtration 2.5 mm Al equivalentAnodevoltagePan50-84 kVCeph60-84 kVTomo50-80 kVAnodecurrentPan1-16 mA DCCeph1-16 mA DCTomo0.5 -15 mA DCSIDPan480mm(19 in.)Ceph 163 -170 cm(64 -67 in.)Primary collimator Automatic 4-bladeFocalTrough9-way adjustmentSegmentation5vertical;3 horizontalLinevoltageregulation100-240 VAC 50 /60 Hz,±10 %(automatic)Line current 8 -15 AmpsExteriorcolorRAL9016(white)Weight ProMax pan only -113 kg (248 lbs.)ProMax pan /ceph -128 kg (282 lbs.) 42.5”108 cm 37”94cm21 PLANMECA ProMax 22PLANMECA ProMax PLANMECAProMax PLANMECAProMaxw/Cephalostat Width 113 cm(44.5 in.)198 cm(78 in.) Depth 126 cm(49.5 in.)76 cm(30 in) Height*154 -243 cm(60.5 -95.75 in.)130 -220 cm(51.25 -86.5 in.) Width 150 cm(59 in.)216 cm(85 in.) Depth 163 cm(64 in.)163 cm(64 in.) Height*244 cm(96 in.)244 cm(96 in.) Weight 113 kg(248 lbs)128 kg(282 lbs)PhysicalSpaceRequirementsMinimumOperationalSpaceRequirements*ThemaximumheightoftheunitcanbeadjustedforofficeswithlimitedceilingclearanceDimensions and space requirements STATIM 2000/5000 G4 Operator’s Manual 95-113364 Rev. 1.0 Copyright 2012 SciCan Ltd. All rights reserved.STATIM 2000/5000 G4 CASSETTE AUTOCLAVE ™ • Operator’s Manual Page 2 Page 3Page 2 Page 3 Table of Contents 1. Introduction .......................................................... 3 2. Important Information ..........................................4 2.1 Disclaimers 2.2 STATIM 2000 G4 - Unit Overview 2.3 STATIM 5000 G4 - Unit Overview 2.4 Touchscreen Overview 2.5 Setup Menu Overview 3. Setting Up your STATIM ...................................... 10 3.1 Positioning and Powering your Unit 3.2 Leveling your Unit 3.3 Connecting the Waste Bottle 3.4 Filling the Water Reservoir 3.5 Priming the Pump 3.6 Shipping the Unit 3.7 Setting the Time 3.8 Setting the Date 3.9 Setting the Language 3.10 Assigning Unit Identifier Number 3.11 Creating a User ID and PIN 3.12 Setting Up Process Enforced Usage 3.13 Changing the Touchscreen Display Themes 3.14 Adjusting the Screensaver Delay 3.15 Adjusting the Screen Contrast 3.16 Turning the Button Sound ON or OFF 3.17 Adjusting the Button Beep Volume 3.18 Connecting to a Network 4. Using Cassettes and Preparing Instruments .... 18 4.1 Using the STATIM 2000 G4 Cassette 4.2 Using the STATIM 5000 G4 Cassette 4.3 Using Drying Plates with the STATIM 5000 G4 4.4 Preparing and Loading Instruments 4.5 Using Biological and Chemical Indicators 4.6 Instrument Weight Guide 5. Using your STATIM ............................................. 24 5.1 Preparing Unit for Use 5.2 STATIM 2000 G4 — Selecting a Cycle 5.3 STATIM 5000 G4 — Selecting a Cycle 5.4 STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4 — Running a Cycle 5.5 STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4 — Stopping a Cycle 6. Storing and Retrieving Cycle Information.......... 33 6.1 Retrieving Cycle Information Using the Touchscreen 6.2 Retrieving Cycle Information Using the USB Data Backup 6.3 Cycle Printout Overview 7. Printer Cycle Information ................................... 35 7.1 Connecting to a Printer 7.2 Adjusting your Printer Settings 7.3 External Printers and Specifications 8. Maintaining your STATIM ................................... 36 8.1 Cleaning the Cassette 8.2 Cleaning the Water Reservoir Filter 8.3 Cleaning the Reservoir 8.4 Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces 8.5 Changing the Bacteria Retentive Filter and the Air Filter 8.6 Replacing the Cassette Seal 8.7 Maintaining Fluid Levels 8.8 Reading Water Quality 8.9 Preventative Maintenance Schedules 9. Troubleshooting your STATIM ........................... 41 10. Ordering Spare Parts .......................................... 44 11. Warranty .............................................................. 45 12. Specifications ..................................................... 46 12.1 STATIM 2000 G4 12.2 STATIM 5000 G4 STATIM Cassette Autoclave and STATIM are registered trademarks and Your Infection Control Specialist, DriTecR and DriTecC logos are trade- marks of SciCan Ltd. All other trademarks referred to in this manual are the property of their respective owners. For all service and repair inquiries: In Canada 1-800-870-7777 United States: 1-800-572-1211 Email: techservice.ca@scican.com SciCan GmbH Wangener Straße 78 88299 Leutkirch Germany Tel.: +49 (0)7561 98343 - 0 Fax: +49 (0)7561 98343 - 699 SciCan Inc. 701 Technology Drive Canonsburg, PA 15317 USA Phone: +1 724 820 1600 Fax: +1 724 820 1479 Toll free: 1-800-572-1211 SciCan Medtech Alpenstrasse 166300 Zug SWITZERLAND Phone: +41 (0) 41 727 7027 Fax: +41 (0) 41 727 702 Manufactured by: SciCan Ltd. 1440 Don Mills Road, Toronto ON M3B 3P9 CANADA Phone: (416) 445-1600 Fax: (416) 445-2727 Toll free: 1-800-667-7733 Page 2 Page 3Page 2 Page 3 1 Introduction Congratulations on your selection of the STATIM Cassette Autoclave®. We are confident that you have purchased the finest equipment of its type. The STATIM® is a compact, counter-top unit that features a number of sterilizing cycles designed to meet your needs and suitability for steam sterilization. The details of installing, operating and servicing your STATIM are all contained within this operator’s manual. To ensure years of safe, trouble-free service please read these instructions before operating this unit and keep them for future reference. Operational, maintenance and replacement instructions should be followed for the product to perform as designed. Contents of this manual are subject to change without notice to reflect changes and improvements to the STATIM product. The STATIM is suitable for the sterilization of dental and medical instruments designed to withstand steam sterilization. The STATIM is not designed to sterilize liquids, cloth loads, biomedical waste or materials not compatible with steam sterilization. The processing of such loads may result in incomplete sterilization and / or damage to the autoclave. For more information about instrument suitability for steam sterilization, consult the manufacturers’ reprocessing instructions. STAT IM 2000 G4 STAT IM 5000 G4 Page 4 Page 5 2 Important Information 2.1 Disclaimers Use only steam-process distilled water in your STATIM. Deionized, demineralized, or specially filtered water should not be used. Never use tap water. Do not permit any person other than certified personnel to supply parts for, service or maintain your STATIM. SciCan shall not be liable for incidental, special or consequential damages caused by any maintenance or services performed on the STATIM by a third party, or for the use of equipment or parts manufactured by a third party, including lost profits, any commercial loss, economic loss, or loss arising from personal injury. Never remove the cover of the unit and never insert objects through holes or openings in the cabinetry. Doing so may damage the unit and / or pose a hazard to the operator. All elements of this book are common to both STATIM 2000 G4 and STATIM 5000 G4 except when noted. IMPORTANT: Follow local guidelines governing verification of the sterilization procedure. Drying Performance The STATIM 2000 G4 and 5000 G4 have been designed to provide a complete sterilization solution for your unwrapped and wrapped instrument needs: rapid sterilization balanced with rapid drying, by using the SciCan Dri-Tec Drying Technology. To dry instruments, the STATIM 2000 G4 uses a combination of forced filtered air and convection heat. The convection heat is derived from utilizing the remaining heat in the system after the sterilization phase has been completed. The heat is then captured and released into the cassette to rapidly dry a properly loaded cassette. The STATIM 5000 G4 also uses forced filtered air and heat generated by the sterilization phase to dry the instruments. The heat generated by the sterilization phase is absorbed by the drying plates and then transferred directly to the load. This then results in an accelerated, rapid drying of a properly loaded STATIM cassette. Please refer to this operator’s manual for instructions on the proper arrangement of instruments in the cassette and the use of Drying plates (STATIM 5000 G4). By carefully following these directions on how to properly load the cassette chamber, rapid drying of the load will be achieved. Page 4 Page 5 2 Important Information 2.2 STATIM 2000 G4 — Unit Overview The following symbols may appear on the unit: When you receive your STATIM 2000 G4, the items listed below will be included. If any of the items are missing, contact your dealer immediately. Cassette Tray and Lid Instrument Rack Waste Bottle Bottle Lid Fitting Tube Mounting Hardware Operator’s Manual Exhaust Tube USB Memory Stick Power Cord Caution: Hot Surface and/or Hot Steam Caution: Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect supply before servicing Caution: Refer to user manual for details Steam distilled water only (do not use tap water) The following symbols appear in the margins of this book. A potential hazard to the operator. A situation which may lead to a mechanical failure. Important information. 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 LCD Touchscreen Reservoir cap / water filter USB port Power switch Power cable port Leveler feet Ethernet port Exhaust tube port Compressor Cassette Biological filter RS232 port STATim G4 2000/5000 CASSeTTe A u T O C L A v e ™ • Operators Manual STATIMG4 2000/5000 Operator’s Manual 95-108430 Rev 8.0. Copyright 2011 SciCan Ltd . All rights reserved.START BUTTON UNWRAPPED CYCLE AIR DRY ONLY CYCLE STOP BUTTON WRAPPED CYCLE RUBBER / PLASTIC CYCLE 1 10 12 11 9 86 5 43 2 77 Page 6 Page 7 2 Important Information 2.3 STATIM 5000 G4 — Unit Overview The following symbols appear on the unit: When you receive your STATIM 5000 G4, the items listed below will be included. If any of the items are missing, contact your dealer immediately. Cassette Tray and Lid Unwrapped Instrument Rack Waste Bottle Bottle Lid Fitting Tube Mounting Hardware Rack with Drying Plates Power Cord Operator’s Manual Exhaust Tube USB Memory Stick The following symbols appear in the margins of this book. A potential hazard to the operator. A situation which may lead to a mechanical failure. Important information. 1 11 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 LCD Touchscreen Reservoir cap / water filter USB port Power switch Power cable port Leveler feet Exhaust tube port Biological filter Cassette RS232 port Ethernet port Air filter STATim G4 2000/5000 CASSeTTe A u T O C L A v e ™ • Operators Manual STATIMG4 2000/5000 Operator’s Manual 95-108430 Rev 8.0. Copyright 2011 SciCan Ltd . All rights reserved.Caution: Hot Surface and/or Hot Steam Caution: Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect supply before servicing Caution: Refer to user manual for details Steam distilled water only (do not use tap water) START BUTTON UNWRAPPED CYCLE HEAVY DUTY UNWRAPPED CYCLE STOP BUTTON WRAPPED CYCLE RUBBER / PLASTIC CYCLE 1 11 101286 5 4 2 7 9 3 Page 6 Page 7 2.4 Touchscreen Overview mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss SELECT A CYCLE Wrapped cycles Unwrapped cycles Rubber / Plastic cycles Air Dry Only (2000) or Heavy Duty Unwrapped (5000) Start button Settings and unit information Cassette properly inserted Water level and quality status Network connectivity on/off (turns green when active) Display Stop button USB storage device connected/not connected (turns green when active) Page 8 Page 9 2.5 Setup Menu Overview mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss SELECT A CYCLE Time 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CL 0 EN --:-- 24H 14:02 Date --/--/-- DD/MM/YY 01/01/2011 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CL 0 EN On Default Off DST On/Off 12 Default 24 12h/24h Setup MM/DD/YYYY Default DD/MM/YYYY Date Format French Default English Language Unit No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CL 0 EN 000 xx.x uS xx.x ppm WATER LEVEL Serial Printer Default No Printer Printer type 1200 Default 9600 Baud rate Setup Time Date DST On/Off Setup Time Date DST On/Off Setup Time Date DST On/Off Setup Time 12/24 Date Format Recent Printouts Setup Time 12/24 Date Format Recent Printouts Setup Time 12/24 Date Format Recent Printouts Setup Unit No Water Quality Language Setup Unit No Water Quality Language Setup Unit No Water Quality Language Setup Printer Type Baud Rate Serial Number Setup Printer Type Baud Rate Serial Number Setup Printer Type Baud Rate Serial Number CR Default - End of line CR/LF Setup Printer user ° char Process Enforced End of Line CR/LF Page 8 Page 9 2.5 Setup Menu Overview Printer user ° char 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CL 0 EN 000 Setup Printer user ° char Process Enforced End of Line CR/LF ON Default OFF Process Enforced Setup Printer user ° char Process Enforced End of Line CR/LF PIN Setup 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CL 0 EN 0000 User x PIN Updated New PIN xxxx OK Statim Silver Default Statim NG Themes Upgrade Theme Upgrade OFF Default ON Automatic IP (DHCP) DHCP LINK: OFF Bind: dhcp IP: 0.0.0.0 Renew IP Renew IP Upgrade Theme Upgrade PLEASE WAIT Looking for Theme … Setup PIN Setup Themes Screensaver User Themes Change Theme Upgrade Theme Setup Themes Screensaver User 3 min Default 2 min Screensaver Setup Themes Screensaver User xx Default 100 LCD Contrast Setup Network Setup Button Beep LCD Contrast Network Settings Automatic IP (DHCP) Renew IP Setup Network Setup Button Beep LCD Contrast OFF Default ON Button Beep Setup Network Setup Button Beep LCD Contrast 80 Default 100 Beep Volume Setup Level Beep Volume Setup Level Beep Volume Page 10 Page 11 3 Setting up your STATIM 3.1 Positioning and Powering your Unit. Positioning your Unit There are several factors that may affect the performance of your STATIM. Please review these factors, and select a suitable location in which to install the unit. • Temperature and Humidity Avoid installing your STATIM in direct sunlight or close to a heat source (e.g. vents or radiators). The recommended operating temperatures are 15-25˚C (59˚F to 77˚F) with humidity of 25-70%. • Spacing The vents and openings on the STATIM should remain uncovered and unobstructed. Leave a minimum of 50 mm/2˝ between the top, sides and back of the unit and any wall or partition. For more detailed information on clearances, see Specifications. • Venting The STATIM should be operated in a clean, dust free environment. • Work Surface Your STATIM should be placed on a flat, level, water-resistant surface. Never install and operate the unit on a sloped surface. • Electromagnetic Environment Your STATIM has been tested and meets applicable standards for electromagnetic emissions. While the unit does not emit any radiation, it may itself be affected by other equipment which does. We recommend that your unit be kept away from potential sources of interference. • Electrical Requirements To power your unit, use properly grounded and fused power sources with the same voltage rating as indicated on the label at the back of your STATIM. Avoid multiple outlet receptacles. If using a surge suppressor power bar, connect only one STATIM to it. Powering your Unit To power your STATIM, connect the power cord to the A.C. inlet receptacle at the back of the unit. Ensure the power switch is in the OFF position and connect the unit to your power source. Page 10 Page 11 3 Setting up your STATIM 3.2 Levelling your Unit When placing your unit on a counter top, ensure it is stable and that all four feet are securely in contact with the counter surface. This will prevent the unit from moving freely. Next, use the level indicator bubble function in the settings menu to adjust the three leveler feet so that the unit drains properly. To access the level indicator bubble from the main screen, follow these steps: 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. Adjust the leveler feet to move the bubble. Position the bubble in the bottom right quadrant of the target. This will ensure that the unit drains properly. Press STOP to exit and return to the cycle select menu. When the unit is properly leveled, the bubble level will change from red to green. Level Page 12 Page 13 3 Setting up your STATIM 3.3 Connecting the Waste Bottle The waste bottle is used to collect the wastewater after it has been converted to steam and then drained from the cassette. To connect the waste bottle to the STATIM, follow these steps (see Figure 4): 1. Insert the exhaust tube into the fitting on the back of the unit and pull gently to confirm a tight fit. 2. Cut the tube to length and slide the waste bottle fitting into place. 3. Place the free end of the tube into the hole in the lid of the waste bottle and hand- tighten the fitting. Do not coil the exhaust tube. 4. Unscrew the lid and copper condenser coil assembly from the waste bottle. The lid and coil should come out together. 5. Fill the waste bottle with water to the MIN line and replace the lid and copper condenser assembly. Empty the waste bottle often to avoid unpleasant odors and discoloration of the contents. (A low-level disinfectant, prepared according to the manufacturer’s instructions, may be added to the waste bottle to remedy this situation). As a minimum, empty the waste bottle each time you refill the reservoir. 6. Place the waste bottle near the unit. Store the bottle below the unit. The tube can be routed through a hole, (8 mm/0.3˝ in diameter) in the counter-top and secured with the provided nylon clamps. 1 5 4 3 2 4 3 3 2 2 5 5 1 1 Figure 4 Page 12 Page 13 3 Setting up your STATIM 3.4 Filling the Water Reservoir When filling the reservoir, ensure you only use steam processed distilled water containing less than 5 ppm total dissolved solids (having conductivity of less than 10 µS / cm). The impurities and additives in other water sources will cause an error reading on the LCD. To fill the reservoir, follow these steps (see Figure 5): 1. Remove the reservoir cap . 2. Pour steam-process distilled water into the reservoir until almost full (a maximum of 4L/1 U.S. gal). Use a funnel to avoid spillage. 3. Replace and secure the cap. 3.5 Priming the Pump To prime the STATIM pump, follow these steps (see Figure 6): 1. Move the unit to the edge of the work surface. The front leveler feet should be approximately 12 mm/0.5˝ from the edge. 2. Lift the front left corner of the unit upward and remove the drain tube from the clip located on the underside of the unit. 3. Pull the drain tube outward so the free end can be positioned over a water container. 4. Fill the reservoir with steam-process distilled water. 5. Remove the plug from the end of the drain tube and allow water to drain from the tube into a container for 30 seconds. When the water flows in a steady stream, replace the stopper. 6. Lift the front left corner of the unit upward and reinsert the tube into the clip on the underside of the unit. Push the excess length of tubing back into the space provided. Make sure the plug in the drain tube is secured. After installation, and before sterilizing any instruments, run two Wrapped cycles. For further instructions, see Section Preparing the Unit for Use. 3.6 Shipping the Unit Before you move the unit, you will need to drain the reservoir. To do so, follow these steps: 1. Place a water container below the unit. 2. Using the drain tube (see Section Priming the Pump, Figure 6) empty the contents of the reservoir into the water container. 3. Remove any remaining water from the reservoir with a non-linting, absorbent towel. 4. Screw-in the three leveler feet found underneath the unit. 5. Repack the unit in the original packing materials and include all accessories originally included with the unit. 6. Specify heated and insured shipping. 1 1 Figure 5 Figure 6 3 3 2 2 Page 14 Page 15 3 Setting up your STATIM 3.7 Setting the Time 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. From the TIME screen, use the keypad to set the time. Press to save and to return to the Setup menu. 4. To change your unit to display 12-hour time format (24-hour time format is the default setting), go to the Setup menu and use to scroll to TIME 12/24, select it and toggle to 12. Press to save and return to the Setup menu. 5. To activate daylight savings time (DST), which is recommended if you have connected your unit to a network, go to the Set up menu and use to scroll to DST ON/OFF and select. Use to toggle DST ON or OFF and press the to save and return to the Setup menu. 3.8 Setting the Date 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. From the DATE screen, use the keypad to set the date. Press to save and to return to the Setup menu. 4. To change your format in which the date appears, return to the Setup menu and use to scroll to DATE FORMAT. Select it, and follow the prompts to have the date displayed in the desired format. Press to save and return to the Setup menu. 3.9 Setting the Language The messages displayed by your STATIM can be presented in a number of different languages. To change the current language, follow these steps: 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. From the Language screen, press to scroll through the list of languages. When you have found the desired language, press to save your selection and return to the Setup menu. Time Date EN EN Language Page 14 Page 15 3 Setting up your STATIM 3.10 Assigning Unit Identifier Number 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. Using the keypad, select a maximum of 3 digits to be used as the unit’s identifier number. Press to save and to return to the Setup menu. 3.11 Creating a User ID and PIN 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. From the SETUP PIN screen, you can assign up to four PINs. Select one of the User icons to assign a PIN. 4. Using the keypad, assign a PIN of up to four digits and press to save and to move to the confirmation screen. 5. If all of the information presented in the confirmation screen is correct, press OK to be returned to the PIN USER screen. To make a correction, select the PIN User you want to change and repeat the process described above. 3.12 Setting Up Process Enforced Usage When process enforced usage is activated, users are required to enter a PIN both at the beginning and at the end of a cycle. For Process Enforced usage to function, User IDs and PINs must first be assigned. To set up User ID and PINs, refer to Section Creating a User ID and PIN. To activate Process Enforced usage, follow these steps: 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. Use to toggle Process Enforced function ON or OFF. Press to save your selection and return to the Setup menu. NOTE: Any user can stop a cycle and remove the cassette even with Process Enforced usage ON. However, the cycle data will record that an unauthorized user has stopped the cycle and/or removed the cassette. Unit No EN EN User Setup PIN PIN Setup 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CL 0 EN 0000 User x PIN Updated New PIN xxxx OK Process Enforced Page 16 Page 17 3 Setting up your STATIM 3.13 Changing the Touchscreen Display Themes Your STATIM G4 touchscreen themes (i.e. the colours of the icons and background) can be changed to one of the preset options or you can upload additional themes, as they become available from SciCan, using the USB port. To change themes follow these steps: 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. From here, you can either select for a menu of preloaded themes or to access a new theme that can be loaded using the USB port. 4. In the screen, use to scroll through your available options. As you scroll, each theme will display on the touchscreen. Press to select your theme and return to the Setup menu. 5. To upgrade a theme available from SciCan, download the theme onto your computer’s desktop and save the files onto a portable USB storage device. Insert the device into your STATIM’s USB port and, from the UPGRADE THEME screen, press . 5.1. The unit will load the files directly from the USB storage device. Do not remove the USB storage device while files are loading (this could take as long as 10 minutes). When it is complete, the screen will display the ‘Done’ message. This new theme will now be accessible from your THEMES menu. 5.2. Press to select this theme and return to the Setup screen. 3.14 Adjusting the Screensaver Delay To change the length of time before your inactive touchscreen activates the screensaver, follow these steps: 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. Use to scroll through you time options. When you have found the amount of time you require, press it. Press to save and return to the Setup menu. 3.15 Adjusting the Screen Contrast The STATIM G4 touchscreens are calibrated for the lighting condition of most sterilization centres. Should you need to adjust the contrast for your office, follow these steps: 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. Use to scroll through your contrast options. When you have found the contrast you require, press it. Press to save and return to the Setup menu. Themes Screensaver Change Theme Upgrade Change Theme Upgrade Theme LCD Contrast Page 16 Page 17 3 Setting up your STATIM 3.16 Turning the Button Sound ON or OFF The STATIM G4 is preset to beep when a button is pressed. If you would like to turn the button sound off, follow these steps: NOTE: Turning OFF the button sound does NOT turn off other alarms and cycle notification beeps. 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. Use to scroll through your ON or OFF options and select it by pressing it. Press to save and move back to the Setup menu. 3.17 Adjusting the Button Beep Volume If you would like to adjust the beep volume, follow these steps: 1. 2. Scroll to and select. 3. Use to scroll through the volume settings. Select the one you want by pressing it. Press to save and move back to the Setup menu. 3.18 Connecting to a Network The STATIM G4 has a 10/100Base-T Ethernet port located at the back of the unit. To connect your STATIM to a network consult the separate manual titled STATIM 2000/5000 G4 — Setting Up and Using Your Web Portal. Beep ON/OFF Beep Volume Page 18 Page 19 4 Using Cassettes and Preparing Instruments 4.1 Using the STATIM 2000 G4 Cassette When removing the cassette after a cycle, exercise caution as the metal areas will be hot and the cassette may contain hot steam. • Opening the Cassette: 1. Hold the cassette handle with your thumbs facing inward on the cassette latch. 2. Push downward on the cassette latch. 3. Raise the cassette lid upwards and disengage the hinge. 4. Rest the lid on its outer surface. • Closing the Cassette: 1. Align the hinge tab on the cassette lid with the hinge slot on the rear of the bottom tray. 2. As you begin to close the lid, the hinge tab and slot will engage. • Inserting the Cassette into the STATIM 2000 G4: 1. Place the end of the cassette into the unit. 2. Gently push inward until you hear a “click” sound and check the LCD icon for change from to . Never force the cassette into the STATIM as the interior components could be damaged. NOTE: The main menu screen will display if the cassette is not properly inserted in the unit. • Removing the Cassette: 1. Grasp the handle with two hands and pull away from the unit. 2. Pull the cassette clear of the unit and set down on a firm surface. • Disengaging the Cassette: When not in use, the cassette should be disengaged. To disengage the cassette, grasp the handle and pull the cassette out until there is a 15 mm to 20 mm (½ to ¾”) gap between the front of the STATIM 2000 G4 and the cassette handle. Figure 7 cassette latch Page 18 Page 19 4 Using Cassettes and Preparing Instruments 4.2 Using the STATIM 5000 G4 Cassette When removing the cassette after a cycle, exercise caution as the metal areas will be hot and the cassette may contain hot steam. • Opening the Cassette: 1. Push the carry handle into the open position. 2. Put your hands on either side of the cassette handle . 3. Insert your forefingers in the slots and place your thumbs on the thumb pads. 4. Press down with your thumbs and pull up with your forefingers until the lid opens. 5. Raise the cassette lid and disengage from the tray. Rest the lid on its outer surface. • Closing the Cassette: 1. Align the hinge tab on the lid with the hinge slot on the tray. 2. As you begin to close the lid, the hinge tab and slot will engage. 3. Place the carry handle into the closed position. • Inserting the Cassette into the STATIM 5000 G4: 1. Hold the cassette handle in one hand and the carry handle in the other as shown in Figure 8. 2. Place the end of the cassette into the unit and drop the carry handle into its closed position. 3. Gently push inward until you hear a “click” sound and check the LCD icon for change from to . Never force the cassette into the STATIM as the interior components could be damaged. NOTE: The main menu screen will display if the cassette is not properly inserted in the unit. n1 Figure 8 1 1 2 2 2 2 Page 20 Page 21 4 Using Cassettes and Preparing Instruments • Removing the Cassette: 1. Grasp the cassette handle with one hand and pull out from the unit. 2. As the cassette emerges from the unit, grasp the carry handle with your free hand and lift it upwards. 3. Pull the cassette clear from the unit and set down on a firm surface. • Disengaging the cassette When not in use, the cassette should be disengaged. To disengage the cassette, grasp the handle and pull the cassette out until there is a 15 mm to 20 mm (1 / 2 to 3 / 4”) gap between the front of the STATIM 5000 G4 and the cassette handle. 4.3 Using Drying Plates with the STATIM 5000 G4 The STATIM 5000 G4 cassette comes with two racks, one with drying plates affixed and another without. To ensure optimal drying of instruments within autoclave bags use the rack with drying plates. 4.4 Preparing and Loading Instruments Before loading any instruments into the STATIM, consult the manufacturer’s reprocessing instructions. • Clean Instruments Clean and rinse all instruments before loading them into the cassette. Disinfectant residues and solid debris may inhibit sterilization and damage the instruments, the cassette, and the STATIM. Lubricated instruments must be wiped thoroughly and any excess lubricant should be removed before loading. • Unwrapped Instruments Arrange unwrapped instruments on the rack in the tray so that they do not touch one another. This ensures that steam reaches all surfaces and will promote drying. Instruments must not be stacked or piled in the cassettes, as this will impede the sterilization process. Page 20 Page 21 4 Using Cassettes and Preparing Instruments • Wrapped Instruments (single wraps) Place the instruments into single layer autoclave bags according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Orient the instrument rack in the cassette to ensure that wrapped instruments rest approximately 6 mm / 0.25” above the cassette base. Place the wrapped instruments on the rack and arrange them to avoid overlap. Ensure that all wrapped loads are dry before handling and /or storage to maintain sterility. The use of cloth wraps in the STATIM is not recommended. SciCan recommends the use of paper / paper and plastic / paper autoclave pouches. Pouches that have been cleared by the FDA for use with the respective cycle time and temperature of the STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4 Cassette Autoclaves must be used. The use of cloth wraps in the STATIM is not recommended. Loosely pack instruments in the bags to allow steam penetration to all instrument surfaces. For STATIM 2000 G4: For STATIM 5000 G4: The rack with drying plates will hold 10 autoclave bags. Care must be taken to ensure that the combined weight of the loaded bags does not exceed 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs). • Rubber and Plastic Instruments The following materials can be sterilized in the STATIM: Nylon, polycarbonate (Lexan™), polypropylene, PTFE (Teflon™), acetal (Delrin™), polysulfone (Udel™), polyetherimide (Ultem™), silicone rubber, and polyester. When loading rubber and plastic instruments in the tray, leave a space between the instruments and the cassette walls. This ensures that steam reaches all surfaces, and will promote drying. Page 22 Page 23 4 Using Cassettes and Preparing Instruments The following materials CANNOT be sterilized in the STATIM: Polyethylene, ABS, styrene, cellulosics, PVC, Acrylic (Plexiglas™), PPO (Noryl™), latex, neoprene, and similar materials. Use of these materials may lead to instrument or equipment damage. If you are unsure of your instrument’s material or construction, do not load into your STATIM until you have checked with the instrument manufacturer. • All Instruments The STATIM is NOT intended for sterilizing textiles, liquids or biomedical waste. Instruments will remain sterile after a successful cycle until the cassette is disengaged from the unit. Unwrapped instruments, once exposed to ambient or external conditions, cannot be maintained in a sterile state. If sterile storage is desired, wrap the instruments to be sterilized in autoclave bags, according to the instrument manufacturer’s instructions, and then allow the wrapped cycle to run until the air-dry phase is complete. Best Practice: Allow instruments (wrapped or unwrapped) to dry completely prior to handling. Wrapped or pouched instruments must not touch each other to promote drying and enable effective sterilization. SciCan recommends the final user carefully choose the most appropriate sterilization cycle according to the recommendations of their leading infection control authorities and local regulatory guidelines / recommendations. • Routine Monitoring Chemical process indicators suitable for steam sterilizers should be included in or on each package or load being sterilized. In addition, the weekly use of biological indicators, which allow you to ascertain whether the instruments have been exposed to sterilization condition, is recommended. Chemical and biological indicators that have been cleared by the FDA for use with the respective cycle time and temperature of the STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4 Cassette Autoclaves must be used. 4.5 Using Biological and Chemical Indicators For detailed instructions on how to handle, use and dispose of both the biological and chemical indicators, please consult the product literature accompanying the indicators or contact the manufacturer directly. To use the indicators with the STATIM, follow these steps: 1. Place the appropriate biological indicator in the STATIM chamber. 2. Process the load in the sterilizer according to your usual practice. 3. Ensure that the message “Cycle Complete” is displayed on the LCD after the cycle is finished. 4. Recover the biological and / or chemical indicator and process further according to the literature that accompanied the indicator. At the first indication of a potential sterilization failure: 1. Do not process any more instruments until favourable test results have been returned. 2. Ensure the correct indicator type was chosen. 3. Ensure the cassette was not overloaded. Consult the earlier portion of this section for proper loading instructions. 4. If the results do not change, do not process any more instruments within the STATIM and contact your SciCan dealer for further assistance. Page 22 Page 23 4 Using Cassettes and Preparing Instruments It is recommended that the tests be conducted so that the incubation period occurs during a period of planned downtime such as the last cycle before a weekend. 4.6 Instrument Weight Guide NOTE: The above weights are to be used as reference only. For exact weights of your instruments, consult the manufacturer’s specifications. Instrument Typical Instrument Weight Scissors 30 g / 0.96 oz Dental scalers 20 g / 0.64 oz Forceps 15 g / 0.48 oz Dental handpiece 40 to 60 g / 1.29 to 1.92 oz Wrapped instrument rack 260 g / 8.35 oz Unwrapped instrument rack 225 g / 7.23 oz Suction cannula 10 g / 0.32 oz Plastic mouth mirror 8 g / 0.25 oz Impression tray 15 to 45 g / 0.48 to 1.45 oz Plastic x-ray positioning ring 20 g / 0.64 oz Page 24 Page 25 5 Using your STATIM Before using your STATIM for the first time, make sure the reservoir is full and the pump is properly primed. Refer to Sections Filling the Reservoir and Priming the Pump for detailed instructions. 5.1 Preparing Unit for Use Once the unit is installed and before any instruments are sterilized, run two Wrapped Cycles (see Section STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4 - Running a Cycle. Remove the cassette once it has cooled. Clean the top (lid) and bottom (tray) sections using a soft cloth to wipe the inside surfaces and then rinse thoroughly with tap water. 5.2 STATIM 2000 G4 — Selecting a Cycle The STATIM 2000 G4 has three sterilization cycles, each designed to sterilize a specific type of instrument. The instruments will remain sterile after a successful cycle until the cassette is removed from the autoclave. At the end of each sterilization cycle, microbiologically filtered air-drying will commence for 60 minutes by default. Air-drying can be interrupted at any time. Unwrapped instruments, once exposed to ambient or external conditions, cannot be maintained in a sterile state. If sterile storage is desired, wrap the instruments to be sterilized in autoclave bags according to the instrument manufacturer’s instructions, and allow the wrapped cycle to run until the air- dry phase is complete. The types of instruments, sterilization requirements, and a graph depicting each cycle are described over the next few pages. Consult the Instrument Weight Guide for information on how to make up an appropriate load for the masses specified for individual cycles. 5.2.1. Unwrapped Cycle (STATIM 2000 G4) The Unwrapped Cycle is a general purpose sterilization cycle used to sterilize up to 1.0 kg (2.2 lbs) of solid metal instruments such as pliers, burrs, scalers and forceps. Dental handpieces may be sterilized in this cycle. To select the Unwrapped Cycle, press the Unwrapped Cycle button, then press the START button. The sterilization temperature in the cassette is 134 ˚C (273 ˚F) and the holding time is 3.5 minutes. See Section STATIM 2000 G4 — Cassette, and Section Preparing and Loading Instruments before running this cycle. A B C D E F A Warming up B Conditioning C Pressurizing D Sterilizing E Venting F Air Drying 3.5 MIN.* Page 24 Page 25 5 Using your STATIM 5.2.2. Wrapped Cycle (STATIM 2000 G4) The Wrapped Cycle is used to sterilize up to 1.0 kg (2.2 lbs) of solid and hollow metal instruments which have been sealed in paper / paper, or paper / plastic autoclave bags. Dental handpieces may be sterilized in this cycle. To select the Wrapped Cycle, press the Wrapped Cycle button, then press the START button. The sterilization temperature in the cassette is 134˚C (273˚F) and the holding time is 10 minutes. See Section STATIM 2000 G4— Cassette, and Section Preparing and Loading Instruments before running this cycle. If wrapped instruments are intended for storage, the wraps must be dry when the cassette is removed from the unit and opened. 5.2.3. Rubber and Plastics Cycle (STATIM 2000 G4) The Rubber and Plastics Cycle is used to sterilize up to 0.4 kg (0.9 lbs) of solid unwrapped instruments constructed of metal or the materials listed in Section Preparing and Loading Instruments. To select the Rubber and Plastics Cycle, press the Rubber and Plastics Cycle button, then press the START button. The sterilization temperature in the cassette is 121˚C (250˚F) and the holding time is 15 minutes. A B C D E F A Warming up B Conditioning C Pressurizing D Sterilizing E Venting F Air Drying 10 MIN. A B C D E F A Warming up B Conditioning C Pressurizing D Sterilizing E Venting F Air Drying Page 26 Page 27 5 Using your STATIM 5.2.4. Air Dry Only Cycle (STATIM 2000 G4) This is not a sterilization cycle. The load is considered sterile after the successful completion of the sterilization phase of the cycle. The Air Dry phase starts automatically after each sterilizing cycle and runs for 60 minutes. Air drying may be interrupted by pressing the STOP button anytime after the sterilization phase of the cycle is complete. To ensure that the contents of the cassette are dry, the cycle should run for the full 60 minutes. Dryness is important for unwrapped instruments for corrosion prevention. For wrapped instruments, a dry wrap is required to maintain sterility. If the STOP button is pressed during the air drying stage of the sterilization cycle, and the cassette has not been removed from the autoclave, the Air Dry Only cycle may be used to promote further drying. If the cassette has been removed from the autoclave, it may NOT be reinserted for the Air Dry Only cycle. If the cassette contains wrapped instruments and the wraps are not dry when the cassette is opened, the instruments must be handled in an aseptic manner for immediate use or resterilized. To start, press the Air Dry Only cycle button, then press the START button. User will be prompted to confirm cycle selection. When started independently this cycle will run for 1 hour. NOTE: Sterilized instruments should only be handled once they are dry. Drying times can vary depending on the weight of load. If best practices are exercised (refer to Sections ‘Preparing and Loading Instruments’ and ‘Maintenance’) and the load is less than the maximum capacity, instruments may be dry in less than 60 minutes. Page 26 Page 27 5 Using your STATIM Before using your STATIM for the first time, make sure the reservoir is full and the pump is properly primed. Refer to Sections Filling the Reservoir and Priming the Pump for detailed instructions. 5.3 STATIM 5000 G4 — Selecting a Cycle The STATIM 5000 G4 has four sterilization cycles, each designed to sterilize a specific type of instrument. It is important not to overload the chamber as this can inhibit steam access to all instrument surfaces. The instruments will remain sterile after a successful cycle until the cassette is removed from the autoclave housing. At the end of each sterilization cycle, microbiologically filtered air-drying will commence for 60 minutes by default. Air-drying can be interrupted at any time. Once unwrapped instruments are exposed to ambient or external conditions, they cannot be maintained in a sterile state. If sterile storage is desired, wrap the instruments to be sterilized in autoclave bags according to the instrument manufacturer’s instructions, and allow the wrapped cycle to run until the air- dry phase is complete. The types of instruments, sterilization requirements, and graphs depicting each cycle are described on the next few pages. Consult the Instrument Weight Table in Section 4.6 for information on how to make up an appropriate load for the masses specified for individual cycles. 5.3.1. Unwrapped Cycle (STATIM 5000 G4) The Unwrapped Cycle is used to sterilize light loads (less than 0.5 kg or 1.1 lbs) of solid metal instruments such as pliers, burrs, scalers, and forceps. To select the Unwrapped Cycle, press the Unwrapped Cycle button, then press the START button. The sterilization temperature in the cassette is 132˚ C (270˚ F) and the holding time is 3.5 minutes. See Section STATIM 5000 G4 — Cassette and Section Preparing and Loading Instruments before running this cycle. A B C D E F A Warming up B Conditioning C Pressurizing D Sterilizing E Venting F Air Drying 3.5 MIN.* Page 28 Page 29 5 Using your STATIM 5.3.2. Wrapped Cycle (STATIM 5000 G4) The Wrapped Cycle is used to sterilize up to 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs) of solid and hollow metal instruments which have been sealed in paper / paper, or paper / plastic autoclave bags. Dental hand pieces may be sterilized in this cycle. To select the Wrapped Cycle, press the Wrapped Cycle button, then press the START button. To select the Wrapped Cycle, press the Wrapped Cycle button, then press the START button. The sterilization temperature in the cassette is 132˚ C (270˚ F) and the holding time is 6 minutes. See Section STATIM 5000 G4— Cassette and Section Preparing and Loading Instruments before running this cycle. If wrapped instruments are intended for storage, the wraps must be dry when the cassette is removed from the unit and opened. 5.3.3. Rubber and Plastics Cycle (STATIM 5000 G4) The Rubber and Plastics Cycle is used to sterilize up to 0.4 kg (0.9 lbs) of solid or hollow unwrapped instruments constructed of metal or the materials listed in Section 4.4 Preparing and Loading Instruments. To select the Rubber and Plastics Cycle, press the Rubber and Plastics Cycle button, then press the START button. The sterilization temperature in the cassette is 121 ˚C (250 ˚C) and for the holding time is 35 minutes. A B C D E F A Warming up B Conditioning C Pressurizing D Sterilizing E Venting F Air Drying A B C D E F A Warming up B Conditioning C Pressurizing D Sterilizing E Venting F Air Drying Page 28 Page 29 5 Using your STATIM 5.3.4. Heavy Duty Unwrapped Cycle (STATIM 5000 G4) The Heavy Duty Cycle is used to sterilize larger loads of unwrapped metal instruments weighing up to 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs). Dental hand pieces can be sterilized in this cycle. Using the STATIM 5000 Extended Cassette (order no. 01-104104) will allow for the sterilization of rigid endoscopes in this cycle. To select the Heavy Duty Unwrapped Cycle, press the Heavy Duty Unwrapped Cycle button, then press the START button. The sterilization temperature in the cassette is 132˚ C (270˚ F) and the holding time is 6 minutes. A B C D E F A Warming up B Conditioning C Presurizing D Sterilizing E Venting F Air Drying Page 30 Page 31 5 Using your STATIM 5.4 STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4— Running a Cycle To operate each cycle, follow these steps. 1. Turn the power switch at the back of the unit to ON. At start up, the unit will display the main menu. 2. Press the appropriate cycle button on the touchscreen. The display will show the cycle name and parameters. 3. Press the START icon. NOTE: If Process Enforced usage is enabled, a PIN screen will appear after you have pressed START. Enter your PIN to start the cycle. mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss SELECT A CYCLE Page 30 Page 31 5 Using your STATIM 5.4 STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4— Running a Cycle When the cycle starts, the cycle parameters are displayed at the top of the screen. Below it is the current phase. The unit’s cycle counter is displayed at right. A graph charts the progress of the cycle while current cycle information is displayed at right. As the cycle is running, various sounds will be heard. This is the normal functioning of the unit. Example of sterilization cycle phases in STATIM 5000 G4: Page 32 Page 33 5 Using your STATIM 5.4 STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4— Running a Cycle As the cycle is running, an intermittent buzzing sound will be apparent as he pump injects water into the steam generator. A random clicking sound will also be heard as the exhaust valve opens and closes. Once the sterilization cycle is complete, a reminder tone will sound as the cycle moves into the Air Drying phase. The buzzing noise during the air drying stage is the compressor operating. The air drying phase of the cycle may be interrupted at any time by pressing the STOP button. The display will be similar to: To ensure that wrapped instruments are dry, allow the cycle to run to completion. If the cassette contains wrapped instruments and the wraps are not dry when the cassette is open, the instruments must be handled in an aseptic manner for immediate use or resterilized. When the automatic 60-minute drying stage is finished the display reads:: By default, if the sterilization cycle is successful, the reminder tone sounds for 30 seconds or until the STOP button is pressed, or the cassette is removed from the unit. Be careful. The metal parts will be hot, and the cassette will contain hot steam. After the cassette is removed from the unit, it should be opened to hasten drying of unwrapped instruments. Page 32 Page 33 5 Using your STATIM If a message is displayed which gives a CYCLE FAULT code or a NOT STERILE message, the cassette contents are not sterile. See Section Troubleshooting for more information. 5.5 STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4— Stopping a Cycle To stop a cycle press the STOP button. If the STOP button is pushed, the cassette is removed, or the unit detects a problem while operating, the cycle will stop. Once a cycle has been stopped, the STOP button must be pressed before another cycle can be started. The display reads any of the following messages: If the display shows the message, CYCLE FAULT or NOT STERILE, the cassette contents are not sterile! See Section Troubleshooting for more information. If the cassette contains wrapped instruments and the wraps are not dry when the cassette is open, the instruments must be handled in an aseptic manner for immediate use and should not be stored. or Page 34 Page 35 6 Storing and Retrieving Cycle Information The STATIM G4 has an internal Data Logger capable of storing all cycle data on every cycle, whether successful or incomplete, for the lifetime of the unit. You can access this information through the touchscreen, through the web portal, using a USB storage device or by attaching a printer. 6.1 Retrieving Cycle Information Using the Touchscreen 1. From the main menu, press the USB icon. 2. The unit will record the last five successful cycles and the last five incomplete cycles. If you select a cycle from the list, it will display cycle information in a format similar to how it would be printed. 3. Use the arrow keys to scroll through and read. NOTE: Regardless of whether you have a USB storage device attached to the unit or not, you can always see the last five successful cycles and the last five incomplete cycles. Use the STATIM G4 web portal to access all the cycle information stored on your STATIM from your computer. To connect your STATIM to a network consult the separate manual titled STATIM 2000/5000 G4 – Setting Up and Using Your Web Portal. 6.2 Retrieving Cycle Information Using the USB Data Back Up The USB storage device can be used to transfer cycle information stored in the unit to a computer. Best practice suggests this should be done once a week. To transfer data using the USB port, follow these steps: 1. Plug the USB storage device into the USB port. 2. The STATIM keeps track of what data has already been transferred to the USB storage device and will automatically load only new data. 3. When the activity light on the provided USB storage device stops blinking or the USB icon on the LCD turns from a flashing green to a solid grey, remove the USB storage device and transfer the information to your computer. NOTE: If you select the USB storage device icon from the main menu, you will only be able to view the last five complete cycles and the last five incomplete cycles. To view all the cycles stored on the USB storage device, you must use your computer. mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss SELECT A CYCLE Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx OK Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx OK Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx OK Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx OK Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx OK Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx (CFxx) Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx (CFxx) Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx (CFxx) Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx (CFxx) Yyyy/mm/dd xxxxx (CFxx) Page 34 Page 35 6 Storing and Retrieving Cycle Information 6.3 Cycle Printout Overview Model: STATIM 2000 software: S201R604 STATIM 2000 S201R604 Unit Identifier: autoclave has been set up as number 000 UNIT #:000 Water Quality: conductivity measurements WATER QUALITY 1.3 µS / 13 ppm Cycle Counter: the number of cycles having been run on the unit = 2 CYCLE NUMBER 000002 Time / Date: 10:47 am 25th October 2007 10:47 10/25/2007 Cycle Name: UNWRAPPED UNWRAPPED Cycle Name cont’d - parameters: 135°C / 3.5 min.135°C FOR 3.5 MIN. Cycle Clock: starting at 0:00 CYCLE START 0:00 Warm up complete: start of the conditioning phase is 1:19 (see cycle graph - ‘A’ phase complete, start of ‘B’ phase) CONDITIONING 1:19 Start Time of Pressurization: 1:27 (start of ‘C’ phase)PRESSURIZING 1:27 Start Time of Sterilization: 2:27 (start of ‘D’ phase)STERILIZING 2:27 Temp. / Press. & Time at start of sterilization (‘D’ phase)136.4ºC 220KPA 2:27 Temp. / Press. & Time printed at 30 second intervals during sterilization. (“D” phase) 136.0ºC 219KPA 135.9ºC 222KPA 136.1ºC 222KPA 136.5ºC 225KPA 136.4ºC 225KPA 136.1ºC 221KPA 2:57 3:27 3:57 4:27 4:57 5:27 Temp. / Press. & Time of end of sterilization phase (end of ‘D’ phase)136.1ºC 221KPA 5:57 Time Venting started: 5:57 (start of ‘E’ phase)VENTING 5:57 Time Air Drying started: 6:42 (start of ‘F’ phase)AIR DRYING 6:42 Cycle completion time: 22:42 CYCLE COMPLETE 22:42 Page 36 Page 37 7 Printing Cycle Information The STATIM G4 is equipped with an RS232 serial port to allow you to connect it to an external printer. (For a list of recommended printers, see the table below.) 7.1 Connecting to a Printer To connect the printer, follow these steps: 1. Connect the external printer to the STATIM G4’s RS232 port using the serial printer cable supplied with your printer. 2. Power on the printer. 3. On the STATIM G4, select . 4. Scroll to and select. 5. Use to toggle to the Serial Printer option and select. Press to save and move back to the Setup menu. 7.2 Adjusting your Print Settings The STATIM G4 allows for several printer adjustments. You can access these settings from the user setup menu (see instructions above). Use the table below or your printer’s operator manual to make the correct adjustments to your printer’s , and . 7.3 External Printers and Specifications Printer Type Baud Rate End of Line CR/LF Printer User Char Suggested External Printers by SciCan End of Line CR/LF Serial Port Bitrate Printer user ° char Epson TM-U220D (C31C515603)CR/LF 9600 248 [0xF8] Citizen IDP-3110-40 RF 120B CR 9600 N / A Star Micro SP212FD42-120 CR 9600 210 [0xd2] Star Micro SP216FD41-120 CR/LF 9600 210 [0xd2] Star Micro SP512MD42-R CR/LF 9600 210 [0xd2] Page 36 Page 37 8 Maintaining your STATIM 8.1 Cleaning the Cassette Keeping the STATIM cassette clean is good clinical practice and assists in the function of the unit. SciCan recommends that the interior surface be cleaned at least once a week. Use dishwashing soap or a mild detergent that does not contain chlorine. Scrub the inside of the cassette with a cleaning pad designed for use with Teflon™ coated surfaces. After scouring, rinse thoroughly with water to remove all traces of the detergent. Cleaning the inside of your cassette is very important if you regularly sterilize lubricated instruments. 8.2 Cleaning the Water Reservoir Filter The water reservoir filter should be cleaned at least once a week or when required. The filter can easily be removed and cleaned by placing the filter upside down under running water to wash away the particles until clean, and then placed back into the reservoir opening. If a replacement water reservoir filter is required, order part number 01-109300S. 8.3 Cleaning the Reservoir Check the reservoir for dirt or particles. The reservoir may be cleaned by draining followed by cleaning and rinsing with steam process distilled water ONLY. Use of chemicals or cleaning agents is not recommended and could cause the unit damage. 8.4 Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces Use a soft cloth moistened with soap and water to clean all exterior surfaces. Do not use harsh cleaning chemicals or disinfectants. Page 38 Page 39 8 Maintaining your STATIM 8.5 Changing the Bacteria Retentive Filter and the Air Filter The filters should be replaced every six months or after 500 cycles to maintain an adequate supply of clean air during the air drying cycle. To change the bacteria retentive air filter on the STATIM 2000 G4 and 5000 G4, follow these steps: 1. Power the STATIM OFF. 2. Disconnect tube A from the bacteria retentive filter and remove the filter from the filter bracket . As you remove the filter from the bracket, note the orientation of the arrow mark on the filter. 3. When the filter is free of the bracket, carefully disconnect tube B from the filter. 4. Before installing the replacement bacteria retentive filter (SciCan order no. 01-102119S) check that the arrow mark on the filter matches the direction of the arrow on the bracket. Push the left hand filter fitting into tube B . 5. Gently press the replacement filter into the filter bracket . The arrow mark of the filter should be facing out and pointing to the left. 6. Re-connect tube A to the right hand filter fitting. To change the air filter on the STATIM 2000 G4, follow these steps: 1. Turn the power switch at the back of the unit OFF. 2. Remove and discard the old foam air filter . 3. Install the new filter (SciCan part no. 01-100207S). 4. Secure the filter plate to the back of the compressor using the screw retained during the disassembly procedure. To change the air filter on the STATIM 5000 G4, follow these steps: 1. Unscrew the cylindrical air filter in a counter-clockwise direction. 2. Discard the old filter. 3. Screw the new filter (SciCan part no. 01-101652S), finger tight only, into place. Figure 115000 G4 1 1 1 8 84 4 4 2 2 2 3 3 3 Figure 10 2000 G4 5 7 6 1 4 2 3 5 7 7 6 Page 38 Page 39 8 Maintaining your STATIM 8.6 Replacing the Cassette Seal To ensure optimum performance of your STATIM cassette autoclave, change the cassette seal every 500 cycles or every six months, whichever comes first. Replacement seals are available from SciCan (order number 01-100028S for STATIM 2000 G4 and 01-101649S for STATIM 5000 G4). To change the cassette seal, follow these steps: Place the cassette lid and the new seal on a clean work surface. Examine the position of the old seal in the cassette lid and arrange the new seal in the same orientation, next to the lid. Remove the old seal and discard. Clean any residue out of the seal channel and flush out the channel with distilled water. Lubricate the new seal with the liquid seal lubricant provided. Insert the rounded edge of the seal under the round lip of the lid. Align the holes in the new seal with the holes in the lid. NOTE: At every corner and at the holes in the lid, two square nibs should be visible. The nibs should fit flush with the lid’s outer surface. Ensure the seal is completely inserted. Feel around the periphery to ensure the seal is securely in place. NOTE: During a cycle, steam may appear between the lid and the tray. If this persists, remove the cassette and check that the seal is correctly installed. Be careful. The metal parts will be hot, and the cassette may contain hot steam. Figure 13 Page 40 Page 41 8 Maintaining your STATIM 8.7 Maintaining Fluid Levels 1. The water reservoir level is continually monitored by your STATIM. If the reservoir is low, a red X will appear on the water icon of the cycle select screen. Press the icon to go to the next screen to confirm that it is a water level issue and not a water quality issue. 2. If the reservoir is low, a will appear next to WATER LEVEL. 3. To fill the reservoir, use only steam-processed distilled water containing less than 5 ppm total dissolved solids (having conductivity of less than 10 μS / cm). Remove the cap from the top of the unit and fill the reservoir. We recommend using a funnel to minimize spills. Each time you refill the reservoir, empty the waste bottle and refill with water to the MIN line. Empty the waste bottle often to avoid unpleasant odors and discoloration of the contents. (A low-level chlorine-free disinfectant, prepared according to the manufacturer’s instructions, may be added to the waste bottle to remedy this situation). 8.8 Reading Water Quality 1. The water quality is continually monitored by your STATIM to ensure that only steam-process distilled water is being used. If the water quality is beyond the tolerances specified above, a red X will appear on the water icon of the cycle select screen. Press the icon to go to the next screen to confirm that it is a water quality issue and not a water level issue. 2. If the water quality not suitable, will appear next to micro S. and parts per million values. 3. Using the drain tube (see Section Priming the Pump, Figure 6) empty the contents of the reservoir into the water container and replace with steam-process distilled water containing less than 5 ppm total dissolved solids (having conductivity of less than 10 μS / cm). Page 40 Page 41 8 Maintaining your STATIM 8.9 Preventative Maintenance Schedules To ensure trouble-free performance, both the operator and the dealer must follow a preventative maintenance schedule. NOTE: Please refer to your National, Regional, State or Safety laws for any additional reoccurring user testing that may be required. The schedules below describe the necessary actions. Operator DailyWater Reservoir • Replace water as needed. • For opthalmic use, drain after each working day, leave empty, and refill at the start of the next workday. Waste Bottle • Empty the waste bottle every time you refill the reservoir. • Fill with tap water up to MIN line marking. You may also add some chlorine-free disinfectant.WeeklyCassette • Wash the interior of the cassette with dishwashing soap or a mild detergent that does not contain chlorine. • Scrub the inside with a cleaning pad designed for use with Teflon™-coated surfaces.. Biological and / or Air Filter • Check the filter for dirt and moisture. Replace if dirty. Call for service if wet. Water Filter • Check the water reservoir filter every week and clean if necessary. Replace only if necessary.Every 6 monthsCassette Seal • Replace every 500 cycles or six months (whichever comes first), or whenever necessary Biological and / or Air Filter • Replace every 500 cycles or six months (whichever comes first). Technician Once a yearCassette • Check the tray, lid and seal for damage. Replace if necessary. Biological Filter • Inspect the biological filter for moisture. Solenoid Valve • Inspect the valve and clean if dirty. Replace the plunger if defective. Pump • Clean the filters, replace if dirty. Check Valve • Remove the exhaust tube from the back of the unit during the air drying phase. Check for air coming from the fitting. • Remove the air compressor tube from the check valve inlet while running a cycle. Make sure no steam is leaking from the valve. Replace if there are any leaks. Water Reservoir • Check the reservoir for dirt. Clean and rinse with steam process distilled water if necessary. Calibration • Calibrate the unit. Page 42 Page 43 9 Troubleshooting your STATIM Problem Solution Unit does not power ON.Check that the unit is plugged into a properly grounded outlet and that the power cord is firmly seated at the rear of the machine. Try another circuit. Power unit OFF for 10 seconds and then power ON again. Check the condition of the line circuit breaker or fuse. There is water under the machine.Check that water was not spilled when refilling the reservoir. Make sure the plug in the exhaust tube is secured. Remove and reinsert the cassette. Attempt another cycle. Be careful. The metal parts will be hot, and the cassette will contain hot steam. The cassette is leaking. If water drips from the underside of the unit during operation, check the cassette seal for misalignment or damage and replace the seal if required. Be careful. The metal parts will be hot, and the cassette will contain hot steam. Attempt another cycle. If it still leaks attempt another cycle using a different cassette if possible. If the leak persists, turn the unit OFF, remove and unload the cassette, unplug the unit, and call your dealer. Instruments do not dry.Best drying occurs when the cycle continues to completion. Allow the cycle to finish. Make sure the instruments are loaded correctly in the cassette. Refer to Section Using Cassettes and Preparing Instruments. Check the unit leveling. Check air/biological filters and replace if dirty. Examine the exhaust tube (tube to the waste bottle) for kinks. If kinked, straighten the tube. If the tube cannot be straightened, remove it from the push-in fitting attached to the STATIM. Depress the collar on the fitting and with the other hand pull firmly on the tube. Once the tube is free of the fitting, cut the damaged section of tubing away using a sharp instrument. Be sure that you leave enough tube to reach the unit when you re-attach the tube to the exhaust fitting. If the tube is too short to remove a section, contact your SciCan dealer for a replacement. Make sure the compressor is working. To check, remove the exhaust tube from the waste bottle. Start the Air Drying Only Cycle, and place the free end into a glass of water. If there is not a strong, steady flow of bubbles, the compressor is not functioning properly. Contact your SciCan dealer. Page 42 Page 43 9 Troubleshooting your STATIM Problem Solution Cycle interrupted — NOT STERILE, Cycle aborted — NOT STERILE and CYCLE FAULT messages. Wait a few minutes and attempt another cycle before proceeding to the next solution. Remove the cassette. Be careful. The metal parts will be hot and the cassette will contain hot steam. Inspect the cassette to ensure that the holes in the back of the seal are perfectly aligned, and that the flexible lip of the seal is completely free. Check the exhaust tube for kinks or obstructions. If kinked, straighten the tube. If the tube cannot be straightened, remove it from the push-in fitting attached to the STATIM. Depress the collar on the fitting and, with the other hand pull firmly on the tube. Once the tube is free of the fitting, cut the damaged section of tubing away using a sharp instrument. Be sure that you leave enough tube to reach the unit when you re-attach the tube to the exhaust fitting. If the tube is too short to remove a section, contact your SciCan dealer for a replacement. Check that the STATIM has not inadvertently been exposed to any electrical interference. Refer to Section Positioning and Powering your Unit. Try running another cycle. If the problem persists, record the cycle fault message number and contact your dealer. Excessive steam issuing from the front of the machine. Remove and reinsert the cassette. Attempt another cycle. Remove and check the cassette seal for misalignment or damage. Replace the seal if required. Be careful as the metal parts will be hot and the cassette will contain hot steam. If the leak persists, turn the unit OFF, remove and unload the cassette and contact your SciCan dealer. Machine will not start and touchscreen shows: Press on the icon to confirm whether it is a water level problem or a water quality problem. If it is a water quality problem, you have likely used water which is not steam-process distilled or is improperly distilled. Empty the reservoir and refill with steam-process distilled water containing less than 5 ppm total dissolved solids (having conductivity of less than 10 µS / cm). If you have the water conductivity meter, check the quality of the water before refilling the reservoir. To empty the reservoir, see Section Shipping the Unit. If the level of the water in the reservoir is low, refill the reservoir. Refer to the steps described in Section Filling the Reservoir. The printer does not work.Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely with the connector on the back of the STATIM. Make sure that the printer is powered ON. Power unit OFF for 10 seconds and then power ON again. Page 44 Page 45 9 Troubleshooting your STATIM Problem Solution Time and date are incorrect.The time and date have not been set. See Section Setting up your STATIM, for time and date instructions. Touchscreen is blank/white.Power was interrupted during a firmware upgrade. Power off the unit and power it on again. It can take up to 6 minutes before the main menu screen appears. Touchscreen is blank/ dark.Check power source. USB storage device does not contain the last print out. Re-insert the USB storage device and wait for the data to copy over again. If problem persists, back up all the information you have on the USB device and reformat it. NOTE: You can always access all your unit’s cycle information through the unit’s web portal. Touchscreen shows:An X over the connectivity icon means the unit is not connected to a network. If it is supposed to be connected to a network and the X is visible, it is because the unit is unable to acquire an IP address. To resolve the issue, try some of the following: • Check that the router is functioning properly • Check the LAN cable (try a new cable if possible) • Make sure your router assigns IP addresses automatically. Renew the IP address by following these steps: 1. Scroll through the setup menu to NETWORK SETUP and select. 2. Select RENEW IP. Unit is not sending emails.Check email settings by using the TEST button on the unit’s web portal. From the SETUP web page, select the TOOLS tab. Click on TEST to check your router, unit, and Internet connections. If all settings appear to be OK. Go to the unit’s touchscreen and renew the IP address by following these steps: 1. Scroll through the setup menu to NETWORK SETUP and select. 2. Select RENEW IP. Not receiving emails from the unit Check your spam filter. Be certain the unit has been identified as an accepted email source. Page 44 Page 45 10 Ordering Spare Parts STATIM G4 SPARES 01-100028S Cassette Seal (2000) 01-112409S Cassette Lid (2000 G4) 01-112410S Cassette Handle - Lid (2000 G4) 01-103945S Rack-tray Unwrapped Instr. Kit (2000) 01-101649S Cassette Seal (5000) 01-112386S Cassette Lid (5000 G4) 01-112387S Cassette Handles Tray / Lid (5000 G4) 01-112388S Cassette Handle - Lid (5000 G4) 01-112511S Cassette Lid (5000 Ext G4) 01-112512S Cassette Handles Tray / Lid (5000 Ext G4) 01-112513S Cassette Handle - Lid (5000 Ext G4) XXXX Reservoir Cap 01-101787S Reservoir Cap and Filter 01-100812S Condenser Bottle 01-100724S Condenser Bottle w/o Condenser 01-100735S Waste Water Bottle Fitting 01-100204S Exhaust Tube 01-100207S Compressor Filter (2000) 01-101652S Air Compressor Filter (5000) 01-102119S Filter Biological 01-109300S Water Reservoir Filter Kit 01-104343S Plug - Drain Tubing 01-100780S Bumper 01-101647S Power Cord North America STATIM G4 ACCESSORIES 01-112406S Cassette Complete (2000 G4) 01-112408S Cassette Tray (2000 G4) 01-112407S Cassette Tray with Mesh Rack (2000 G4) 01-106653 Mesh Rack - STATIM 2000 01-112384S Cassette Complete (5000 G4) 01-112385S Cassette Tray (5000 G4) 01-112509S Cassette Complete (5000 Ext G4) 01-112510S Cassette Tray (5000 Ext G4) 01-101709S Mesh Rack (5000) 01-106325 Container Endoscope Complete (STATIM 5000) 01-103935 Drying Plates (Qty 5) STATIM 5000 01-103923 Condenser Additional Bottle Page 46 Page 47 11 Warranty Limited Warranty For a period of one year, SciCan guarantees that the STATIM 2000 / 5000 G4, when manufactured by SciCan in new and unused condition, will not fail during normal service due to defects in material and workmanship that are not due to apparent abuse, misuse, or accident. The one year warranty will cover the performance of all components of the unit except consumables such as the cassette seal, the compressor filter and the microbiological filter, provided that the product is being used and maintained according to the description in the user’s manual. In the event of failure due to such defects during this period of time, the exclusive remedies shall be repair or replacement, at SciCan’s option and without charge, of any defected part(s) (except gasket), provided SciCan is notified in writing within thirty (30) days of the date of such a failure and further provided that the defective part(s) are returned to SciCan prepaid. This warranty shall be considered to be validated, if the product is accompanied by the original purchase invoice from the authorized SciCan dealer, and such invoice identifies the item by serial number and clearly states the date of purchase. No other validation is acceptable. After one year, all SciCan’s warranties and other duties with respect to the quality of the product shall be conclusively presumed to have been satisfied, all liability therefore shall terminate, and no action or breach of any such warranty or duty may thereafter be commenced against SciCan. Any express warranty not provided hereon and any implied warranty or representation as to performance, and any remedy for breach of contract which, but for this provision, might arise by implication, operation of law, custom of trade or course of dealing, including any implied warranty of merchantability or of fitness for particular purpose with respect to all and any products manufactured by SciCan is excluded and disclaimed by SciCan. If you would like to learn more about SciCan products and features, visit our website at www.scican.com. Page 46 Page 47 12 Specifications 12.1 STATIM 2000 G4 Machine Dimensions: Length: 495 mm (19.5”) Width: 415 mm (16.3”) Height: 150 mm (5.9”) Cassette Size (External): Length: 410 mm (16”) (includes handles) Width: 195 mm (7.7”) Height: 40 mm (1.6”) Cassette Size (Internal): Length: 280 mm (11”) Width: 180 mm (7.1”) Height: 35 mm (1.4”) Sterilization Chamber Volume: 1.8 L (61 fl. oz.) U.S. Reservoir Volume: 4.0 L (140 fl. oz.) U.S. Weight (Without water): 21 kg (46 lbs) Clearance required: Top: 50 mm (1.9”) Sides: 50 mm (1.9”) Back: 50 mm (1.9”) Front: 480 mm (18.9”) Maximum Steam Temperature: 138˚C (280˚F) Maximum Operating Pressure: 341kP abs (49.5 psia) Electrical Rating* (+/- 10%): 100 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 11A 110 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 11A 220 - 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 6 A *see serial number label for requirements specific to your unit. Ethernet Port: 10/100 Base-T USB Port: USB 2.0 Protection Class: I Protection: covered (indoor use only) Ambient Operating Temperature and Humidity: 15˚C to 25˚C (59˚F to 77˚F) and 25% to 70% Max. Altitude: Up to 2000 meters (6600 ft) Installation Category: 1 Page 48 Page PB 12 Specifications 12.2 STATIM 5000 G4 Machine Dimensions: Length: 600 mm (23.6”) Width: 410 mm (16.1”) Height: 190 mm (7.5”) Cassette Size (External): Length: 495 mm (19.5”) (includes handles) Width: 195 mm (7.7”) Height: 80 mm (3.2”) Extended Cassette Size (External): Length: 565 mm (22.2”) Width: 195 mm (7.7”) Height: 80 mm (3.2”) Casette Size (Internal): Length: 380 mm (15”) Width: 180 mm (7.1”) Height: 75 mm (3”) Extended Section (L x W x H): 110mm (4.3”) x 130 mm (5.1”) x 16 mm (0.6”) Sterilization Chamber Volume: 5.1 L (170 fl. oz.) U.S. Reservoir Volume: 4.0 L (140 fl. oz.) U.S. Weight (Without water): 33 kg (73 lbs) Clearance required: Top: 50 mm (1.9”) Sides: 50 mm (1.9”) Back: 50 mm (1.9”) Front: 570 mm (22.4”) Maximum Steam Temperature: 138˚C (280˚F) Maximum Operating Pressure: 341kP abs (49.5 psia) Electrical Rating* (+/- 10%): 100 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 11A 110 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 11A 220 - 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 6 A *see serial number label for requirements specific to your unit. Ethernet Port: 10/100 Base-T USB Port: USB 2.0 Protection Class: I Protection: covered (indoor use only) Ambient Operating Temperature and Humidity: 15˚C to 25˚C (59˚F to 77˚F) and 25% to 70% Max. Altitude: Up to 2000 meters (6600 ft) Installation Category: 1 Baylis Architects Family First Community Center Bid Set APPENDIX D October 20, 2021 EXHIBITS A & B Appendix D - 1 APPENDIX D AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBITS A & B Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 1 DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids 00 11 14 Synopsis of Bidding Information 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 42 10 Bid Submittal Checklist 00 52 00 Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (Sample) 00 52 00 Standard Form of Agreement - A101-2017 (7-26-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 72 00 General Conditions AIA Document A201 – 2017 00 80 00 Forms Form A - Bid Form Form B – Proposal Bid Bond Form C – List of Subcontractors, Part One (Submissions of HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical Subcontractors) Form D – List of Subcontractors, Part Two (Submission of Structural Steel and Rebar Subcontractors) Form E - Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation Form F – Qualifications of Project Key Personnel Form G – Contract Bond Form DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 01 11 50 Delegated Design and Deferred Submittals 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures 01 21 00 Allowances 01 23 00 Alternates 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 35 15 LEED Certification Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 43 39 Mockups 01 45 54 Building Envelope Air Barrier Testing 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 21 Indoor Air Quality Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 60 01 Substitution Request Form 01 73 00 Execution 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS NOT USED DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 13 Concrete Floor and Architectural CIP Finishing 03 35 36 Polished Concrete Finishing 03 54 00 Cast Underlayment AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT A Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 2 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 05 13 Shop - Applied Coatings for Metal 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 18 00 Glued-Laminated Construction 06 20 20 Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 13 00 Sheet Waterproofing 07 14 00 Fluid Applied Waterproofing 07 19 00 Water Repellents 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 26 16 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier 07 27 27 Self-Adhered Sheet Air and Water Barriers 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 07 54 16 Ethylene Interpolymer (KEE) Roofing 07 54 19 Polyvinyl-Chloride Roofing 07 55 63 Vegetated Roof Covering 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 90 05 Joint Sealers 07 92 13 Exterior Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 15 73 Interior Sliding Doors 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 08 52 01 Fiberglass-Framed Storefronts, Entries and Windows 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 83 00 Mirrors 08 91 00 Louvers DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 05 10 Flooring Moisture Measurement and Mitigation 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 31 00 Tiling 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 64 00 Wood Flooring 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 83 11 Acoustical Components AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT A Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 3 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 96 53 Elastomeric Coating DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 10 26 00 Wall and Corner Protection 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 00 Lockers 10 80 13 Miscellaneous Specialties DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 01 14 Fall Arrest & Fall Restraint System 11 31 00 Appliances 11 66 23 Gymnasium Equipment 11 70 00 Healthcare Equipment DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 20 00 Window Treatments 12 36 00 Countertops DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 Fire Suppression General Conditions 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 16 Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing General Conditions 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing 22 11 00 Facility Water Distribution 22 11 16 PEX Domestic Water Piping 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage 22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage 22 23 00 Natural Gas Systems 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 60 00 Medical Gas Equipment 22 69 00 Medical Gas Piping System Certification AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT A Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 4 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 HVAC General Conditions 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 72 00 Energy Recovery Units 23 74 00 Outdoor Air Handling Units 23 81 26 Split-System Air Conditioners & Heat Pumps 23 81 43 Air-Cooled Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pumps DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Electrical General Conditions 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Electrical Systems Studies 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 24 13 Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 13 Electricity Metering 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses and Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 51 19 Interior and Exterior Lighting DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 Low Voltage General Conditions DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 46 00 Fire Alarm General Conditions DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 20 00 Earth Moving 31 25 00 Temporary Erosion Control AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT A Baylis Architects FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER Bid Set SECTION 00 00 10 October 20, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 10 - 5 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 32 30 00 Site Improvements 32 80 00 Irrigation 32 90 00 Planting DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 10 00 Water Distribution System 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewer System 33 40 00 Storm Drainage System APPENDICES APPENDIX A Construction Mitigation APPENDIX B Interior HVAC Noise Control Report APPENDIX C Healthpoint Cutsheets APPENDIX D Exhibit A and Exhibit B APPENDIX E Geotechnical Report APPENDIX F School District Requirements APPENDIX G RSD Student Calendar 2021-2022 END OF SECTION AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT A FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER DRAWING SHEET INDEX BID SET October 20, 2021 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DATA SHEETS A001 COVER SHEET A002 CODE SUMMARY A003 OCCUPANCY AND EXITING DIAGRAM SURVEY SV 1OF3 TOPOGRAPHIC & BOUNDARY SURVEY SV 2OF3 TOPOGRAPHIC & BOUNDARY SURVEY SV 3OF3 TOPOGRAPHIC & BOUNDARY SURVEY CIVIL C000 COVER SHEET C100 DEMOLITION & TESC PLAN C110 CITY OF RENTON DEMOLITION AND TESC DETAILS C111 DEMOLITION & TESC DETAIL C200 GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN C210 GRADING & DRAINAGE DETAILS C211 GRADING & DRAINAGE DETAILS C212 CITYOF RENTON PAVING DETAILS C213 CITY OF RENTON GRADING & DRAINAGE DETAILS C220 SITE SECTION C230 RAMP GRADING DETAILS C240 DRAINAGE PROFILES C250 STORMTECH CHAMBER PLAN C251 SC-3500 STORMTECH CHAMBER PLAN C300 PAVING, CHANNELIZATION, HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN C310 PAVING DETAILS C311 CITY OF RENTON PAVING DETAILS C312 CITY OF RENTON PAVING DETAILS C400 UTILITY PLANSC C410 UTILITY DETAILS C501 WATER MAIN NOTES AND VICINITY MAP C502 WATER MAIN PLAN C503 CONSTRUCTION PROVISIONS C504 WATER MATERIALS AND SURFACE RESTORATION C505 WATER DETAILS C506 WATER DETAILS AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT B C601 SEWER VICINITY PLAN AND NOTES C602 SEWER PLAN AND PROFILE C603 CONSTRUCTION PROVISIONS C604 MATERIALS AND SURFACE RESTORATION C605 SEWER DETAILS STRUCTURAL S001 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES S002 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES S003 PLAN NOTES AND LEGENDS S101 FOUNDATION PLAN S102 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S301 TYPICAL CONCRETE DETAILS S302 CONCRETE DETAILS S601 TYPICAL WOOD FRAME DETAILS S602 WOOD FRAME DETAILS S603 WOOD FRAMING DETAILS S605 SHEARWALL SCHEDULE AND DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL A010a ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS GENERAL AND COMMON AREAS A100.a OVERALL SITE PLAN A100.b SITE PLAN A101 FLOOR PLAN A102 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN A103 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN A104 ROOF PLAN A105 RCP A106 FURNITURE, FIXTURE & EQUIPMENT PLAN A201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A301 BUILDING SECTIONS A351 WALL SECTIONS A352 WALL SECTIONS A501 ASSEMBLIES A502 DOOR SCHEDULE A503 WINDOW SCHEDULE A504 GALLERY GLAZING ELEVATIONS A601 CONCRETE AND SITE DETAILS A602 EXTERIOR DETAILS A603 DOOR & WINDOW DETAILS A604 ROOF DETAILS A605 INTERIOR DETAILS A606 SUNSHADE PLAN & DETAILS AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT B HEALTHPOINT HP 100 ENLARGED PLAN - FINISH HP 200 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS HP 201 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS HP 202 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS HP 203 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS HP 300 INTERIOR DETAILS HP 301 INTERIOR DETAILS BUILDING ENVELOPE BE000 GENERAL NOTES BE010 AIR BARRIER DIAGRAMS BE020 WATERPROOFING ASSEMBLIES BE030 WATERPROOFING EXTENTS BE100 BELOW GRADE DETAILS BE200 WALL DETAILS BE201 WALL DETAILS BE300 FLANGED WINDOW INSTALLATION BE301 NON-FLANGED WINDOW INSTALLATION BE302 FLANGED WINDOW DETAILS BE303 NON-FLANGED WINDOW DETAILS BE304 DOOR & LOUVER DETAILS BE500 ROOF DETAILS BE501 ROOF DETAILS BE502 ROOF DETAILS LANDSCAPE L100 SITE PLAN L200 LANDSCAPE PLAN L201 LANDSCAPE ROOF PLAN, SCHEDULE & DETAILS L202 TREE RETENTION PLAN L203 TREE RETENTION WORKSHEET & DETAILS L300 IRRIGATION PLAN L301 IRRIGATION LEGEND & DETAILS L302 IRRIGATION ROOF PLAN & DETAILS L303 RECORD PLANS OF EXISTING IRRIGATION SYSTEM L400 LANDSCAPE DETAILS L401 LANDSCAPE DETAILS INTERIOR AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT B I-1.0 FLOOR PLAN I-1.1 FLOOR FINISH PLAN I-1.2 INTERIOR RCP PLAN I-3.0 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-3.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-3.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-3.3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-3.4 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-3.5 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-3.6 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-3.7 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-3.8 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1-3.9 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS I-4.0 CASEWORK I-5.0 SECTIONS I-5.1 SECTIONS I-6.0 DETAILS I-6.1 DETAILS I-7.0 FINISH LEGEND ELECTRICAL E001 COVER SHEET E002 GENERAL NOTES E010 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM E020 SCHEDULE E050 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E051 SITE LIGHTING E101 FLOOR PLAN - POWER PLAN E102 MECHANICAL POWER PLAN E103 ROOF PLAN - POWER PLAN E110 ENLARGED POWER PLANS & DETAILS E121 LOW VOLTAGE DEVICE PLAN E200 SCHEDULES - LIGHTING FIXTURE E201 FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING PLAN E202 LIGHTING CONTROL DETAILS E300 ELECTRICAL DETAILS MECHANICAL M001 COVER SHEET M002 SCHEDULES M101 HVAC FLOOR PLAN M102 HVAC ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN (HEALTHPOINT) M103 HVAC ROOF PLAN AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT B M301 DETAILS M302 DETAILS M303 DETAILS M304 DETAILS M401 SECTIONS M402 SECTIONS PLUMBING P001 COVER SHEET P002 SCHEDULES P100 PLUBING FOUNDATION PLAN P101 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN P102 PLUMBING ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN (HEALTHPOINT) P103 ROOF PLAN P301 DETAILS P302 DETAILS P303 DETAILS P401 SECTIONS AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017 EXHIBIT B Baylis Architects Family First Community Center Bid Set APPENDIX E October 20, 2021 Geotechnical Report Appendix E - 1 APPENDIX E GEOTECHNICAL REPORT Corporate Office 17522 Bothell Way Northeast Bothell, Washington 98011 Phone 425.415.0551 ♦ Fax 425.415.0311 www.riley-group.com GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PREPARED BY: THE RILEY GROUP, INC. 17522 BOTHELL WAY NORTHEAST BOTHELL, WASHINGTON 98011 PREPARED FOR: MS. KELLY BEYMER ADMINISTRATOR OF COMMUNITY SERVICE DEPARTMENT CITY OF RENTON 1055 SOUTH GRADY WAY RENTON, WASHINGTON 98057 RGI PROJECT NO. 2018-130 FAMILY FIRST COMMUNITY CENTER 16022 116TH AVENUE SOUTHEAST RENTON, WASHINGTON 98058 JUNE 8, 2018 Geotechnical Engineering Report June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................... 1 2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................... 1 3.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING ........................................................................... 1 4.0 SITE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................ 2 4.1 SURFACE .................................................................................................................................................. 2 4.2 GEOLOGY ................................................................................................................................................. 2 4.3 SOILS ....................................................................................................................................................... 2 4.4 GROUNDWATER ........................................................................................................................................ 2 4.5 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 3 4.6 COAL MINE HAZARD .................................................................................................................................. 3 5.0 DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ......................................................................................... 4 5.1 GEOTECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................................................................. 4 5.2 EARTHWORK ............................................................................................................................................. 4 5.2.1 Erosion and Sediment Control ..................................................................................................... 4 5.2.2 Stripping ....................................................................................................................................... 5 5.2.3 Excavations................................................................................................................................... 5 5.2.4 Site Preparation ........................................................................................................................... 6 5.2.5 Structural Fill ................................................................................................................................ 6 5.2.6 Cut and Fill Slopes ........................................................................................................................ 8 5.2.7 Wet Weather Construction Considerations ................................................................................. 8 5.3 FOUNDATIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 9 5.4 RETAINING WALLS ................................................................................................................................... 10 5.5 SLAB-ON-GRADE CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................... 10 5.6 DRAINAGE .............................................................................................................................................. 10 5.6.1 Surface ....................................................................................................................................... 10 5.6.2 Subsurface .................................................................................................................................. 11 5.6.3 Infiltration .................................................................................................................................. 11 5.7 UTILITIES ................................................................................................................................................ 11 5.8 PAVEMENTS ............................................................................................................................................ 11 5.9 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................................................... 12 6.0 ADDITIONAL SERVICES .................................................................................................................. 12 7.0 LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 12 LIST OF APPENDICES Figure 1 ..................................................................................................................... Site Vicinity Map Figure 2 ............................................................................................... Geotechnical Exploration Plan Figure 3 ............................................................................................... Retaining Wall Drainage Detail Figure 4 ....................................................................................................Typical Footing Drain Detail Appendix A .......................................................................... Field Exploration and Laboratory Testing Geotechnical Engineering Report June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 Executive Summary This Executive Summary should be used in conjunction with the entire GER for design and/or construction purposes. It should be recognized that specific details were not included or fully developed in this section, and this GER must be read in its entirety for a comprehensive understanding of the items contained herein. Section 7.0 should be read for an understanding of limitations. RGI’s geotechnical scope of work included the advancement of seven test borings to a maximum depth of 16.5 feet below ground surface (bgs). Based on the information obtained from our subsurface exploration, the site is suitable for development of the proposed project. The following geotechnical considerations were identified. Soil Conditions: The site is underlain by up to 11 feet of fill comprised of loose to medium dense silty sand with varying amounts of gravel over medium dense to very dense silty sand with varying amounts of gravel, and localized silty sand, sandy gravel, and sand with some silt and gravel. Groundwater: Groundwater seepage was encountered at 15 feet bgs in two of the test borings during our subsurface exploration. Foundations: The proposed buildings can be supported on spread footing foundation bearing on competent native soil or structural fill. Slab-on-grade: Slab-on-grade floors can be supported on dense to medium dense native soil or new structural fill. Pavements: The following pavement sections are recommended for new driveway areas:  For flexible pavements: 2 inches of HMA over 6 inches of Crushed Rock Base (CRB) over compacted subgrade.  For concrete driveways: 5 inches of concrete over 4 inches of CRB over compacted subgrade Construction Considerations: RGI recommends that the major earthwork be performed in dry season from May to September. Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 1.0 Introduction This Geotechnical Engineering Report (GER) presents the results of the geotechnical engineering services provided for the Family First Community Center in Renton, Washington. The purpose of this GER is to assess subsurface conditions and provide geotechnical recommendations for building a one-story community center building. Our scope of services included field explorations, laboratory testing, engineering analyses, and preparation of this GER. The recommendations in the following sections of this GER are based upon our current understanding of the proposed site development as outlined below. RGI should review the proposed site grading and utility plans once they are developed in order to confirm the recommendations provided in this report are appropriate for the development as proposed. In addition, RGI requests to review the final site grading plans and specifications when available to verify that our project understanding is correct and that our recommendations have been properly interpreted and incorporated into the project design and construction. 2.0 Project Description The site is located 16022 116th Avenue Southeast in Renton, Washington. The approximate location of the site is shown on Figure 1. The site includes a rectangular shaped parcel of land about 14.9 aces in size. The northern portion of the site is occupied by a school building and facilities. The proposed development will be located at the southwest corner of the property. The proposed Family First Community Center building will be a one-story building about 30,000 square feet in size with a slab on grade floor. Our understanding of the project is based on the Master Site Plan prepared by Baylis Architecture dated February 26, 2018. RGI expects the proposed building will be a one-story, light-weight structure with a maximum column load of less than 100 kips. Slab-on-grade floor loading of 150 pounds per square foot (psf) are expected. RGI anticipates that grading with fill up to approximately 10 feet will be needed in the existing stormwater pond area to reach the design grade. 3.0 Field Exploration and Laboratory Testing On May 23, 2018, RGI performed subsurface exploration using a tracked drill rig. A total of seven test borings were advanced in the proposed development area. The approximate exploration locations are shown on Figure 2. Field logs of each exploration were prepared by the geologist who completed the borings. These logs included visual classifications of the materials encountered during excavation Geotechnical Engineering Report 2 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 as well as our interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. The boring logs included in Appendix A represent an interpretation of the field logs and include modifications based on laboratory observation and analysis of the samples. 4.0 Site Conditions 4.1 SURFACE The entire site includes a rectangular shaped parcel of land about 14.9 aces in size. The proposed development area is located in the southwest portion of the site and is approximately 3.35 acres in size. The project area is bound to the north and east by the existing school building and facilities, to the south by residential properties, and to the west by 116th Avenue Southeast. The western portion of the proposed development area is a paved parking lot. An existing storm water pond approximately 10 feet deep is located along the southern property line. To the north of the pond, there is 5-foot hump area that appears to have been created by the excavated soil from the pond excavation. 4.2 GEOLOGY Review of the Geologic Map of King County, Washington by Derek B. Booth, etc (2002) indicates that the site soil is mapped as till (Map Unit Qvt) which is compact diamict containing subrounded to well-rounded clasts, glacially transported and deposited. Generally forms undulating layers a few meters to a few tens of meters thick. The native soil below the fill encountered during field exploration appears to match the description. 4.3 SOILS The site is underlain by up to 11 feet of fill comprised of loose to medium dense silty sand with varying amounts of gravel over medium dense to very dense silty sand with varying amounts of gravel, and localized silty sand, sandy gravel, and sand with some silt and gravel. More detailed descriptions of the subsurface conditions encountered are presented in the test borings included in Appendix A. 4.4 GROUNDWATER Groundwater seepage was encountered at 15 feet bgs in two of the test borings during our subsurface exploration. It should be recognized that fluctuations of the groundwater table will occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, runoff, and other factors not evident at the time the explorations were performed. In addition, perched water can develop within seams and layers contained in fill soils or higher permeability soils overlying less permeable soils following periods of heavy or prolonged precipitation. Therefore, Geotechnical Engineering Report 3 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 groundwater levels during construction or at other times in the future may be higher or lower than the levels indicated on the logs. Groundwater level fluctuations should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for the project. 4.5 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS Based on the 2012/2015 International Building Code (IBC), RGI recommends the follow seismic parameters in Table 1 be used for design. Table 1 IBC Seismic Parameters 2012/2015 IBC Parameter Value Site Soil Class1 D2 Site Latitude 47.45859 N Site Longitude 122.18416 W Maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration parameters (g) Ss = 1.399, S1 = 0.522 Spectral response acceleration parameters adjusted for site class (g) Sms = 1.399, Sm1 = 0.783 Design spectral response acceleration parameters (g) Sds = 0.933, Sd1 = 0.522 1 Note: In general accordance with the USGS 2012/2015 International Building Code. IBC Site Class is based on the average characteristics of the upper 100 feet of the subsurface profile. 2 Note: The 2012/2015 International Building Code requires a site soil profile determination extending to a depth of 100 feet for seismic site classification. The current scope of our services does not include the required 100 foot soil profile determination. Hand auger borings extended to a maximum depth of 16.5 feet, and this seismic site class definition considers that similar soil continues below the maximum depth of the subsurface exploration. Liquefaction is a phenomenon where there is a reduction or complete loss of soil strength due to an increase in water pressure induced by vibrations from a seismic event. Liquefaction mainly affects geologically recent deposits of fine-grained sands that are below the groundwater table. Soils of this nature derive their strength from intergranular friction. The generated water pressure or pore pressure essentially separates the soil grains and eliminates this intergranular friction, thus reducing or eliminating the soil’s strength. RGI reviewed the results of the field and laboratory testing and assessed the potential for liquefaction of the site’s soil during an earthquake in the area. The site is underlain by till which is considered not liquefiable. 4.6 COAL MINE HAZARD RGI has reviewed the City of Renton Coal Mine Hazards map dated November 12, 2014. The project site is not mapped as a coal mine hazard area. Geotechnical Engineering Report 4 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 5.0 Discussion and Recommendations 5.1 GEOTECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS Based on our study, the site is suitable for the proposed construction from a geotechnical standpoint. RGI recommends that proposed buildings be supported on spread footings bearing on medium dense native soil or structural fill. The slab-on-grade can be similarly supported on medium dense native soil or structural fill. Detailed recommendations regarding the above issues and other geotechnical design considerations are provided in the following sections. These recommendations should be incorporated into the final design drawings and construction specifications. 5.2 EARTHWORK RGI expects that site grading will consist of cut in the high area of the site and fill in the pond area to achieve building and pavement grades and excavation for utilities including storm, water, sanitary sewer, and other utilities. 5.2.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Potential sources or causes of erosion and sedimentation depend on construction methods, slope length and gradient, amount of soil exposed and/or disturbed, soil type, construction sequencing and weather. The impacts on erosion-prone areas can be reduced by implementing an erosion and sedimentation control plan. The plan should be designed in accordance with applicable city and/or county standards. RGI recommends the following erosion control Best Management Practices (BMPs):  Scheduling site preparation and grading for the drier summer and early fall months and undertaking activities that expose soil during periods of little or no rainfall  Establishing a quarry spall construction entrance  Installing siltation control fencing or anchored straw or coir wattles on the downhill side of work areas  Covering soil stockpiles with anchored plastic sheeting  Revegetating or mulching exposed soils with a minimum 3-inch thickness of straw if surfaces will be left undisturbed for more than one day during wet weather or one week in dry weather  Directing runoff away from exposed soils and slopes  Minimizing the length and steepness of slopes with exposed soils and cover excavation surfaces with anchored plastic sheeting (Graded and disturbed slopes should be tracked in place with the equipment running perpendicular to the slope contours so that the track marks provide a texture to help resist erosion and Geotechnical Engineering Report 5 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 channeling. Some sloughing and raveling of slopes with exposed or disturbed soil should be expected.)  Decreasing runoff velocities with check dams, straw bales or coir wattles  Confining sediment to the project site  Inspecting and maintaining erosion and sediment control measures frequently (The contractor should be aware that inspection and maintenance of erosion control BMPs is critical toward their satisfactory performance. Repair and/or replacement of dysfunctional erosion control elements should be anticipated.) Permanent erosion protection should be provided by reestablishing vegetation using hydroseeding and/or landscape planting. Until the permanent erosion protection is established, site monitoring should be performed by qualified personnel to evaluate the effectiveness of the erosion control measures. Provisions for modifications to the erosion control system based on monitoring observations should be included in the erosion and sedimentation control plan. 5.2.2 STRIPPING Stripping efforts should include removal of vegetation, organic materials, and deleterious debris from areas slated for building, pavement, and utility construction. Topsoil and rootmass is generally less than 12 inches across the site. Deeper areas of stripping may be required in heavily vegetated areas of the site. The existing pond should be dry before filling and the wet soil and vegetation should be removed before filling. 5.2.3 EXCAVATIONS All temporary cut slopes associated with the site and utility excavations should be adequately inclined to prevent sloughing and collapse. The shallow native soil is classified as Group C soil and native dense soil is classified Group A. Accordingly, for excavations more than 4 feet but less than 20 feet in depth, the temporary side slopes should be laid back with a minimum slope inclination of 1.5H:1V (Horizontal:Vertical) in the upper 5 feet and 3/4H:1V in dense native soil. If there is insufficient room to complete the excavations in this manner, or excavations greater than 20 feet in depth are planned, using temporary shoring to support the excavations should be considered. For open cuts at the site, RGI recommends:  No traffic, construction equipment, stockpiles or building supplies are allowed at the top of cut slopes within a distance of at least 5 feet from the top of the cut  Exposed soil along the slope is protected from surface erosion using waterproof tarps and/or plastic sheeting  Construction activities are scheduled so that the length of time the temporary cut is left open is minimized Geotechnical Engineering Report 6 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130  Surface water is diverted away from the excavation  The general condition of slopes should be observed periodically by a geotechnical engineer to confirm adequate stability and erosion control measures In all cases, however, appropriate inclinations will depend on the actual soil and groundwater conditions encountered during earthwork. Ultimately, the site contractor must be responsible for maintaining safe excavation slopes that comply with applicable OSHA or WISHA guidelines. 5.2.4 SITE PREPARATION After stripping, grubbing, and prior to placement of structural fill, RGI recommends proofrolling building and pavement subgrades and areas to receive structural fill. These areas should be proofrolled under the observation of RGI and compacted to a firm and unyielding condition in order to achieve a minimum compaction level of 95 percent of the modified proctor maximum dry density as determined by the American Society of Testing and Materials D1557-09 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (ASTM D1557). Proofrolling and adequate subgrade compaction can only be achieved when the soils are within approximately ± 2 percent moisture content of the optimum moisture content. Soils that appear firm after stripping and grubbing may be proofrolled with a heavy compactor, loaded double-axle dump truck, or other heavy equipment under the observation of an RGI representative. This observer will assess the subgrade conditions prior to filling. The need for or advisability of proofrolling due to soil moisture conditions should be determined at the time of construction. Subgrade soils that become disturbed due to elevated moisture conditions should be overexcavated to reveal firm, non-yielding, non-organic soils and backfilled with compacted structural fill. In order to maximize utilization of site soils as structural fill, RGI recommends that the earthwork portion of this project be completed during extended periods of warm and dry weather if possible. If earthwork is completed during the wet season (typically November through May) it will be necessary to take extra precautionary measures to protect subgrade soils. Wet season earthwork will require additional mitigative measures beyond that which would be expected during the drier summer and fall months. 5.2.5 STRUCTURAL FILL RGI recommends fill below the foundation and floor slab, behind retaining walls, and below pavement and hardscape surfaces be placed in accordance with the following recommendations for structural fill. The suitability of excavated site soils and import soils for compacted structural fill use will depend on the gradation and moisture content of the soil when it is placed. As the Geotechnical Engineering Report 7 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 amount of fines (that portion passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve) increases, soil becomes increasingly sensitive to small changes in moisture content and adequate compaction becomes more difficult or impossible to achieve. Soils containing more than about 5 percent fines cannot be consistently compacted to a dense, non-yielding condition when the moisture content is more than 2 percent above or below optimum. Optimum moisture content is the moisture that results in the greatest compacted dry density with a specified compactive effort. Non-organic site soils are only considered suitable for structural fill provided that their moisture content is within about 2 percent of the optimum moisture level as determined by ASTM D1557. Excavated site soils may not be suitable for re-use as structural fill depending on the moisture content and weather conditions at the time of construction. If soils are stockpiled for future reuse and wet weather is anticipated, the stockpile should be protected with plastic sheeting that is securely anchored. Even during dry weather, moisture conditioning (such as, windrowing and drying) of site soils to be reused as structural fill may be required. Even during the summer, delays in grading can occur due to excessively high moisture conditions of the soils or due to precipitation. If wet weather occurs, the upper wetted portion of the site soils may need to be scarified and allowed to dry prior to further earthwork, or may need to be wasted from the site. The native soil contains a large percentage of fines and is moisture sensitive, it may necessary to import structural fill if the construction occurs in wet season. Import structural fill should meet the gradation requirements listed in Table 2 for wet weather conditions. For dry season earthwork, the percent passing the No. 200 may be increased to 10 percent maximum or materials meeting the 2012 Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, Section 9-03.14(1) may be used. Table 2 Structural Fill Gradation U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing 4 inches 100 No. 4 sieve 75 percent No. 200 sieve 5 percent * *Based on minus 3/4 inch fraction. Prior to use, an RGI representative should observe and test all materials imported to the site for use as structural fill. Structural fill materials should be placed in uniform loose layers not exceeding 12 inches and compacted as specified in Table 3. The soil’s maximum density and optimum moisture should be determined by ASTM D1557. Geotechnical Engineering Report 8 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 Table 3 Structural Fill Compaction ASTM D1557 Location Material Type Minimum Compaction Percentage Moisture Content Range Foundations On-site granular or approved imported fill soils: 95 +2 -2 Retaining Wall Backfill On-site granular or approved imported fill soils: 92 +2 -2 Slab-on-grade On-site granular or approved imported fill soils: 95 +2 -2 General Fill (non- structural areas) On-site soils or approved imported fill soils: 90 +3 -2 Pavement – Subgrade and Base Course On-site granular or approved imported fill soils: 95 +2 -2 Placement and compaction of structural fill should be observed by RGI. A representative number of in-place density tests should be performed as the fill is being placed to confirm that the recommended level of compaction is achieved. 5.2.6 CUT AND FILL SLOPES All permanent cut and fill slopes should be graded with a finished inclination no greater than 2H:1V. Upon completion of construction, the slope face should be trackwalked, compacted and vegetated, or provided with other physical means to guard against erosion. All fill placed for slope construction should meet the structural fill requirements as described in Section 5.2.5. Final grades at the top of the slopes must promote surface drainage away from the slope crest. Water must not be allowed to flow in an uncontrolled fashion over the slope face. If it is necessary to direct surface runoff towards the slope, it should be controlled at the top of the slope, piped in a closed conduit installed on the slope face, and taken to an appropriate point of discharge beyond the toe of the slope. 5.2.7 WET WEATHER CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS RGI recommends that preparation for site grading and construction include procedures intended to drain ponded water, control surface water runoff, and to collect shallow subsurface seepage zones in excavations where encountered. It will not be possible to successfully compact the subgrade or utilize on-site soils as structural fill if accumulated water is not drained prior to grading or if drainage is not controlled during construction. Attempting to grade the site without adequate drainage control measures will reduce the amount of on-site soil effectively available for use, increase the amount of select import fill materials required, and ultimately increase the cost of the earthwork phases of the Geotechnical Engineering Report 9 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 project. Free water should not be allowed to pond on the subgrade soils. RGI anticipates that the use of berms and shallow drainage ditches, with sumps and pumps in utility trenches, will be required for surface water control during wet weather and/or wet site conditions. 5.3 FOUNDATIONS Following site preparation and grading, the proposed building foundations may be supported on conventional spread footings bearing on medium dense native soil or structural fill. The existing fill may be suitable for support of foundations and should be evaluated during construction. Where loose soils or other unsuitable soils are encountered in the proposed building footprint, they should be overexcavated and backfilled with structural fill. Perimeter foundations exposed to weather should be at a minimum depth of 18 inches below final exterior grades. Interior foundations can be constructed at any convenient depth below the floor slab. Finished grade is defined as the lowest adjacent grade within 5 feet of the foundation for perimeter (or exterior) footings and finished floor level for interior footings. Table 4 Foundation Design Design Parameter Value Allowable Bearing Capacity 2,500 psf1 Friction Coefficient 0.25 Passive pressure (equivalent fluid pressure) 250 pcf2 Minimum foundation dimensions Columns: 24 inches Walls: 16 inches 1 psf = pounds per square foot 2 pcf = pounds per cubic foot The allowable foundation bearing pressures apply to dead loads plus design live load conditions. For short-term loads, such as wind and seismic, a 1/3 increase in this allowable capacity may be used. At perimeter locations, RGI recommends not including the upper 12 inches of soil in the computation of passive pressures because it can be affected by weather or disturbed by future grading activity. The passive pressure value assumes the foundation will be constructed neat against competent soil or backfilled with structural fill as described in Section 5.2.5. The recommended base friction and passive resistance value includes a safety factor of about 1.5. With spread-footing foundations designed in accordance with the recommendations in this section, maximum total and differential post-construction settlements of 1 inch and 1/2 inch, respectively, should be expected. Geotechnical Engineering Report 10 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 5.4 RETAINING WALLS RGI recommends cast-in-place concrete walls be used for basement wall (if needed). The magnitude of earth pressure development on retaining walls will partly depend on the quality of the wall backfill. RGI recommends placing and compacting wall backfill as structural fill. Wall drainage will be needed behind the wall face. A typical retaining wall drainage detail is shown on Figure 3. With wall backfill placed and compacted as recommended, and drainage properly installed, RGI recommends using the values in the following table for design. Table 5 Retaining Wall Design Design Parameter Value Allowable Bearing Capacity 2,500 psf Active Earth Pressure (unrestrained walls) 35 pcf At-rest Earth Pressure (restrained walls) 50 pcf For seismic design, an additional uniform load of 7 times the wall height (H) for unrestrained walls and 14H for restrained walls should be applied to the wall surface. Friction at the base of foundations and passive earth pressure will provide resistance to these lateral loads. Values for these parameters are provided in Section 5.3. 5.5 SLAB-ON-GRADE CONSTRUCTION Once site preparation has been completed as described in Section 5.2, suitable support for slab-on-grade construction should be provided. Immediately below the floor slab, RGI recommends placing a 4-inch-thick capillary break layer of clean, free-draining pea gravel, washed rock, or crushed rock that has less than 5 percent passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve. This material will reduce the potential for upward capillary movement of water through the underlying soil and subsequent wetting of the floor slab. Where moisture by vapor transmission is undesirable, an 8- to 10-millimeter-thick plastic membrane should be placed on a 4-inch-thick layer of clean gravel or rock. For the anticipated floor slab loading, we estimate post-construction floor settlements of ¼- to ½- inch. 5.6 DRAINAGE 5.6.1 SURFACE Final exterior grades should promote free and positive drainage away from the building area. Water must not be allowed to pond or collect adjacent to foundations or within the immediate building area. For non-pavement locations, RGI recommends providing a Geotechnical Engineering Report 11 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 minimum drainage gradient of 3 percent for a minimum distance of 10 feet from the building perimeter. In paved locations, a minimum gradient of 1 percent should be provided unless provisions are included for collection and disposal of surface water adjacent to the structure. 5.6.2 SUBSURFACE RGI recommends installing perimeter foundation drain as shown on Figure 4. The retaining wall drains, perimeter foundation drain, and roof downspouts should be tightlined separately to an approved discharge facility. Subsurface drains must be laid with a gradient sufficient to promote positive flow to a controlled point of approved discharge. 5.6.3 INFILTRATION Based on the soil encountered, the native soil is not suitable for infiltration. 5.7 UTILITIES Utility pipes should be bedded and backfilled in accordance with American Public Works Association (APWA) specifications. For site utilities located within the right-of-ways, bedding and backfill should be completed in accordance with City of Renton specifications. At a minimum, trench backfill should be placed and compacted as structural fill, as described in Section 5.2.5. Where utilities occur below unimproved areas, the degree of compaction can be reduced to a minimum of 90 percent of the soil’s maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. If the native soil becomes unsuitable for use as structural fill, imported structural fill will be necessary for trench backfill as recommended in Section 5.2.5. 5.8 PAVEMENTS RGI recommends that the driveway to the new garage be stripped and repaved. Pavement subgrades should be prepared as described in Section 5.2 of this GER and as discussed below. Regardless of the relative compaction achieved, the subgrade must be firm and relatively unyielding before paving. This condition should be verified by proofrolling with heavy construction equipment or hand probe by inspector. With the pavement subgrade prepared as described above, RGI recommends the following pavement section with flexible asphalt concrete surfacing.  For private asphalt driveways or parking: 2 inches of hot mix asphalt over 6 inches of crushed rock base (CRB) over compacted subgrade; The asphalt paving materials used should conform to the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) specifications for Hot Mix Asphalt Class 1/2 inch and CRB surfacing. Geotechnical Engineering Report 12 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 If concrete driveway is preferred, the following section can be used.  For concrete driveways: 5 inches of concrete over 4 inches of CRB over compacted subgrade Long-term pavement performance will depend on surface drainage. A poorly-drained pavement section will be subject to premature failure as a result of surface water infiltrating into the subgrade soils and reducing their supporting capability. For optimum pavement performance, surface drainage gradients of no less than 2 percent are recommended. Also, some degree of longitudinal and transverse cracking of the pavement surface should be expected over time. Regular maintenance should be planned to seal cracks when they occur. 5.9 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS An important construction consideration is the weather and its impact on construction scheduling. Although it is not impossible, winter construction will be more difficult and will increase construction costs. RGI highly recommends that the major earthwork be performed in dry season from May to September. 6.0 Additional Services RGI is available to provide further geotechnical consultation throughout the design phase of the project. RGI should review the grading and utilities plans in order to verify that earthwork and foundation recommendations in this report are appropriate and provide supplemental recommendations as necessary. RGI should be contracted to provide geotechnical engineering and construction monitoring services during. The integrity of the earthwork and construction depends on proper site preparation and procedures. In addition, engineering decisions may arise in the field in the event that variations in subsurface conditions become apparent. Construction monitoring services are not part of this scope of work. RGI can provide an estimate for these services once the construction plans and schedule have been developed. 7.0 Limitations This GER is the property of RGI, City of Renton and her designated agents. Within the limits of the scope and budget, this GER was prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices in the area at the time this report was issued. This GER is intended for specific application to the Family First Community Center at 16022 116th Avenue Southeast in Renton, Washington, and for the exclusive use of the City of Renton and its authorized representatives. No other warranty, expressed or Geotechnical Engineering Report 13 June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 implied, is made. Site safety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological (for example, mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials, or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, we can provide a proposal for these services. The analyses and recommendations presented in this GER are based upon review of the previous explorations on the site by Geotechnical Investigations Group. Variations in soil conditions can occur, the nature and extent of which may not become evident until construction. If variations appear evident, RGI should be requested to reevaluate the recommendations in this GER prior to proceeding with construction. It is client’s responsibility to see that all parties to the project, including the designers, contractors, subcontractors, are made aware of this GER in its entirety. The use of information contained in this GER for bidding purposes should be done at the contractor’s option and risk. USGS, 2014, Renton, Washington 7.5-Minute Quadrangle Approximate Scale: 1"=1000' 0 500 1000 2000 N Site Vicinity Map Figure 1 06/2018 Corporate Office 17522 Bothell Way Northeast Bothell, Washington 98011 Phone: 425.415.0551 Fax: 425.415.0311 Family First Community Center RGI Project Number 2018-130 Date Drawn: Address: 16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington 98058 SITE B-1B-2B-3B-4B-5B-6B-706/2018Corporate Office17522 Bothell Way NortheastBothell, Washington 98011Phone: 425.415.0551Fax: 425.415.0311Family First Community CenterRGI Project Number2018-130Date Drawn:Address: 16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington 98058Geotechnical Exploration PlanFigure 2Approximate Scale: 1"=120'060120240N= Boring by RGI, 5/23/18= Site boundary Incliniations) 12" Over the Pipe 3" Below the Pipe Perforated Pipe 4" Diameter PVC Compacted Structural Backfill (Native or Import) 12" min. Filter Fabric Material 12" Minimum Wide Free-Draining Gravel Slope to Drain (See Report for Appropriate Excavated Slope 06/2018 Corporate Office 17522 Bothell Way Northeast Bothell, Washington 98011 Phone: 425.415.0551 Fax: 425.415.0311 Family First Community Center RGI Project Number 2018-130 Date Drawn: Address: 16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington 98058 Retaining Wall Drainage Detail Figure 3 Not to Scale 3/4" Washed Rock or Pea Gravel 4" Perforated Pipe Building Slab Structural Backfill Compacted Filter Fabric 06/2018 Corporate Office 17522 Bothell Way Northeast Bothell, Washington 98011 Phone: 425.415.0551 Fax: 425.415.0311 Family First Community Center RGI Project Number 2018-130 Date Drawn: Address: 16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington 98058 Typical Footing Drain Detail Figure 4 Not to Scale Geotechnical Engineering Report June 8, 2018 Family First Community Center, Renton, Washington RGI Project No. 2018-130 APPENDIX A FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING On May 23, 2018, RGI performed field explorations using a tracked drill rig. RGI explored subsurface soil conditions at the site by observing the drilling of 7 test borings to a maximum depth of 16.5 feet below existing grade. The boring locations are shown on Figure 2. The boring locations were approximately determined by measurements from existing site features and topography. A geologist from our office conducted the field exploration and classified the soil conditions encountered, maintained a log of each test exploration, obtained representative soil samples, and observed pertinent site features. All soil samples were visually classified in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). Representative soil samples obtained from the explorations were placed in closed containers and taken to our laboratory for further examination and testing. As a part of the laboratory testing program, the soil samples were classified in our in-house laboratory based on visual observation, texture, plasticity, and the limited laboratory testing described below. Moisture Content Determinations Moisture content determinations were performed in accordance with ASTM D2216-10 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass (ASTM D2216) on representative samples obtained from the exploration in order to aid in identification and correlation of soil types. The moisture content of typical samples were measured and is reported on the test pit logs. Grain Size Analysis A grain size analysis indicates the range in diameter of soil particles included in a particular sample. Grain size analyses was determined using D6913-04(2009) Standard Test Methods for Particle-Size Distribution (Gradation) of Soils Using Sieve Analysis (ASTM D6913) on four of the samples. Project Name:Family First Community Center Project Number:2018-130 Client:City of Renton Boring No.:B-1 Date(s) Drilled:5/23/2018 Drilling Method(s):Hollow Stem Auger Drill Rig Type:Track Rig Groundwater Level:Seepage at 15' Borehole Backfill:Bentonite Chips Logged By:ELW Drill Bit Size/Type:8" auger Drilling Contractor:Bortec Sampling Method(s):SPT Location:16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington Surface Conditions:Asphalt Total Depth of Borehole:16.5 feet bgs Approximate Surface Elevation:N/A Hammer Data :140 lb, 30" drop, rope and cathead USCS SymbolAsphalt Fill SM GP SM Moisture (%)12 17 20 11 17 13Recovery (%)Graphic LogRQD (%)MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 6" asphalt over crushed rock base Gray silty SAND with some gravel, medium dense, moist (Fill) Little recovery Becomes brown to gray, moist to wet, trace organics Brown silty SAND with some gravel, medium dense, wet 22% fines Brown sandy GRAVEL, very dense, saturated Tan silty SAND, very dense, moist Boring terminated at 16' 6"Depth (feet)0 5 10 15 Sample TypeSampling Resistance, blows/ft21 14 13 74Elevation (feet)Sheet 1 of 1 The Riley Group, Inc. 17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011 Project Name:Family First Community Center Project Number:2018-130 Client:City of Renton Boring No.:B-2 Date(s) Drilled:5/23/2018 Drilling Method(s):Hollow Stem Auger Drill Rig Type:Track Rig Groundwater Level:Not Encountered Borehole Backfill:Bentonite Chips Logged By:ELW Drill Bit Size/Type:8" auger Drilling Contractor:Bortec Sampling Method(s):SPT Location:16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington Surface Conditions:Grass Total Depth of Borehole:16.33 feet bgs Approximate Surface Elevation:N/A Hammer Data :140 lb, 30" drop, rope and cathead USCS SymbolTPSL Fill SM Moisture (%)10 12 16 11Recovery (%)Graphic LogRQD (%)MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Topsoil Light to dark brown silty SAND with some gravel, medium dense, moist (Fill) 23% fines Becomes gray to brown, very dense, contains organics Gray to brown silty SAND with some gravel, very dense, moist Boring terminated at 16' 5"Depth (feet)0 5 10 15 Sample TypeSampling Resistance, blows/ft21 21 71 90/11"Elevation (feet)Sheet 1 of 1 The Riley Group, Inc. 17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011 Project Name:Family First Community Center Project Number:2018-130 Client:City of Renton Boring No.:B-3 Date(s) Drilled:5/23/2018 Drilling Method(s):Hollow Stem Auger Drill Rig Type:Track Rig Groundwater Level:Seepage at 15' Borehole Backfill:Bentonite Chips Logged By:ELW Drill Bit Size/Type:8" auger Drilling Contractor:Bortec Sampling Method(s):SPT Location:16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington Surface Conditions:Grass Total Depth of Borehole:15.75 feet bgs Approximate Surface Elevation:N/A Hammer Data :140 lb, 30" drop, rope and cathead USCS SymbolTPSL Fill SM SP-SM Moisture (%)11 13 11 17Recovery (%)Graphic LogRQD (%)MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Topsoil Gray silty SAND with some gravel, medium dense, wet (Fill) Gray silty SAND with some gravel, very dense, moist to wet (Glacial Till) Becomes moist Brown SAND with some silt and gravel, very dense, water bearing Boring terminated at 15' 9"Depth (feet)0 5 10 15 Sample TypeSampling Resistance, blows/ft12 50/5" 50/6" 50/3"Elevation (feet)Sheet 1 of 1 The Riley Group, Inc. 17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011 Project Name:Family First Community Center Project Number:2018-130 Client:City of Renton Boring No.:B-4 Date(s) Drilled:5/23/2018 Drilling Method(s):Hollow Stem Auger Drill Rig Type:Track Rig Groundwater Level:Not Encountered Borehole Backfill:Bentonite Chips Logged By:ELW Drill Bit Size/Type:8" auger Drilling Contractor:Bortec Sampling Method(s):SPT Location:16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington Surface Conditions:Grass Total Depth of Borehole:15.5 feet bgs Approximate Surface Elevation:N/A Hammer Data :140 lb, 30" drop, rope and cathead USCS SymbolTPSL Fill SM Moisture (%)12 9 9 10Recovery (%)Graphic LogRQD (%)MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Topsoil Brown silty SAND, medium dense, moist Becomes dense Gray silty SAND with some gravel, dense, moist (Glacial Till) Becomes tan, very dense Boring terminated at 15' 6"Depth (feet)0 5 10 15 Sample TypeSampling Resistance, blows/ft38 43 50/4" 50/6"Elevation (feet)Sheet 1 of 1 The Riley Group, Inc. 17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011 Project Name:Family First Community Center Project Number:2018-130 Client:City of Renton Boring No.:B-5 Date(s) Drilled:5/23/2018 Drilling Method(s):Hollow Stem Auger Drill Rig Type:Track Rig Groundwater Level:Not Encountered Borehole Backfill:Bentonite Chips Logged By:ELW Drill Bit Size/Type:8" auger Drilling Contractor:Bortec Sampling Method(s):SPT Location:16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington Surface Conditions:Grass Total Depth of Borehole:15.42 feet bgs Approximate Surface Elevation:N/A Hammer Data :140 lb, 30" drop, rope and cathead USCS SymbolTPSL SM Moisture (%)12 9 14 7Recovery (%)Graphic LogRQD (%)MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Topsoil Gray silty SAND with trace gravel, medium dense, moist to wet (Glacial Till) 31% fines Becomes very dense Becomes moist Boring terminated at 15' 5"Depth (feet)0 5 10 15 Sample TypeSampling Resistance, blows/ft25 61 50/6" 50/5"Elevation (feet)Sheet 1 of 1 The Riley Group, Inc. 17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011 Project Name:Family First Community Center Project Number:2018-130 Client:City of Renton Boring No.:B-6 Date(s) Drilled:5/23/2018 Drilling Method(s):Hollow Stem Auger Drill Rig Type:Track Rig Groundwater Level:Not Encountered Borehole Backfill:Bentonite Chips Logged By:ELW Drill Bit Size/Type:8" auger Drilling Contractor:Bortec Sampling Method(s):SPT Location:16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington Surface Conditions:Grass Total Depth of Borehole:16.5 feet bgs Approximate Surface Elevation:N/A Hammer Data :140 lb, 30" drop, rope and cathead USCS SymbolTPSL SM SM SP-SM Moisture (%)12 14 9 9Recovery (%)Graphic LogRQD (%)MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Topsoil Tan silty SAND with some gravel, medium dense, moist Becomes medium dense to dense, little recovery Becomes medium dense, mottled Gray silty SAND with some gravel, very dense, moist Brown SAND with some silt and gravel, very dense, moist to wet Boring terminated at 16.5'Depth (feet)0 5 10 15 Sample TypeSampling Resistance, blows/ft30 17 67 73Elevation (feet)Sheet 1 of 1 The Riley Group, Inc. 17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011 Project Name:Family First Community Center Project Number:2018-130 Client:City of Renton Boring No.:B-7 Date(s) Drilled:5/23/2018 Drilling Method(s):Hollow Stem Auger Drill Rig Type:Track Rig Groundwater Level:Not Encountered Borehole Backfill:Bentonite Chips Logged By:ELW Drill Bit Size/Type:8" auger Drilling Contractor:Bortec Sampling Method(s):SPT Location:16022 116th Avenue Southeast, Renton, Washington Surface Conditions:Grass Total Depth of Borehole:16.5 feet bgs Approximate Surface Elevation:N/A Hammer Data :140 lb, 30" drop, rope and cathead USCS SymbolTPSL Fill SM SM Moisture (%)16 16 22 14Recovery (%)Graphic LogRQD (%)MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Topsoil Brown silty SAND with some gravel, loose moist to wet (Fill) Becomes medium dense, contains organics 33% fines Brown to gray silty SAND with trace gravel, medium dense, moist to wet Gray silty SAND with some gravel, medium dense, wet Boring terminated at 16.5'Depth (feet)0 5 10 15 Sample TypeSampling Resistance, blows/ft7 24 12 22Elevation (feet)Sheet 1 of 1 The Riley Group, Inc. 17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011 Project Name:Family First Community Center Project Number:2018-130 Client:City of Renton Key to Log of Boring USCS SymbolMoisture (%)Recovery (%)Graphic LogRQD (%)MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONDepth (feet)Sample TypeSampling Resistance, blows/ftElevation (feet)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS 1 Elevation (feet): Elevation (MSL, feet). 2 Depth (feet): Depth in feet below the ground surface. 3 Sample Type: Type of soil sample collected at the depth interval shown. 4 Sampling Resistance, blows/ft: Number of blows to advance driven sampler one foot (or distance shown) beyond seating interval using the hammer identified on the boring log. 5 RQD (%): Rock Quality Designation is a relative index of the rock mass quality calculated by comparing the cumulative length of intact pieces of core exceeding 100 mm in length to the cored interval length. 6 Recovery (%): Core Recovery Percentage is determined based on a ratio of the length of core sample recovered compared to the cored interval length. 7 USCS Symbol: USCS symbol of the subsurface material. 8 Graphic Log: Graphic depiction of the subsurface material encountered. 9 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION: Description of material encountered. May include consistency, moisture, color, and other descriptive text. 10 Moisture (%): Moisture, expressed as a water content. FIELD AND LABORATORY TEST ABBREVIATIONS CHEM: Chemical tests to assess corrosivity COMP: Compaction test CONS: One-dimensional consolidation test LL: Liquid Limit, percent PI: Plasticity Index, percent SA: Sieve analysis (percent passing No. 200 Sieve) UC: Unconfined compressive strength test, Qu, in ksf WA: Wash sieve (percent passing No. 200 Sieve) MATERIAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS Asphaltic Concrete (AC) AF Poorly graded GRAVEL (GP) Silty SAND (SM) Poorly graded SAND with Silt (SP-SM) Topsoil TYPICAL SAMPLER GRAPHIC SYMBOLS Auger sampler Bulk Sample 3-inch-OD California w/ brass rings CME Sampler Grab Sample 2.5-inch-OD Modified California w/ brass liners Pitcher Sample 2-inch-OD unlined split spoon (SPT) Shelby Tube (Thin-walled, fixed head) OTHER GRAPHIC SYMBOLS Water level (at time of drilling, ATD) Water level (after waiting) Minor change in material properties within a stratum Inferred/gradational contact between strata ?Queried contact between strata GENERAL NOTES 1: Soil classifications are based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Descriptions and stratum lines are interpretive, and actual lithologic changes may be gradual. Field descriptions may have been modified to reflect results of lab tests. 2: Descriptions on these logs apply only at the specific boring locations and at the time the borings were advanced. They are not warranted to be representative of subsurface conditions at other locations or times. Sheet 1 of 1 The Riley Group, Inc. 17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011 THE RILEY GROUP, INC. 17522 Bothell Way NE Bothell, WA 98011 PHONE: (425) 415-0551 FAX: (425) 415-0311 GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS ASTM D421, D422, D1140, D2487, D6913 PROJECT TITLE Family First Community Center SAMPLE ID/TYPE B-1 PROJECT NO.2018-130 SAMPLE DEPTH 11 Feet TECH/TEST DATE LC 5/28/2018 DATE RECEIVED 5/28/2018 WATER CONTENT (Delivered Moisture) Total Weight Of Sample Used For Sieve Corrected For Hygroscopic Moisture Wt Wet Soil & Tare (gm) (w1)385.8 Weight Of Sample (gm)349.2 Wt Dry Soil & Tare (gm) (w2)349.2 Tare Weight (gm) 15.8 Weight of Tare (gm) (w3)15.8 (W6) Total Dry Weight (gm) 333.4 Weight of Water (gm) (w4=w1-w2) 36.6 SIEVE ANALYSIS Weight of Dry Soil (gm) (w5=w2-w3) 333.4 Cumulative Moisture Content (%) (w4/w5)*100 11 Wt Ret (Wt-Tare) (%Retained)% PASS +Tare {(wt ret/w6)*100}(100-%ret) % COBBLES 0.0 12.0"15.8 0.00 0.00 100.00 cobbles % C GRAVEL 7.4 3.0"15.8 0.00 0.00 100.00 coarse gravel % F GRAVEL 10.9 2.5" coarse gravel % C SAND 6.0 2.0" coarse gravel % M SAND 17.0 1.5"15.8 0.00 0.00 100.00 coarse gravel % F SAND 36.8 1.0" coarse gravel % FINES 21.8 0.75"40.6 24.80 7.44 92.56 fine gravel % TOTAL 100.0 0.50" fine gravel 0.375"57.4 41.60 12.48 87.52 fine gravel D10 (mm)#4 77.1 61.30 18.39 81.61 coarse sand D30 (mm)#10 97.2 81.40 24.42 75.58 medium sand D60 (mm)#20 medium sand Cu #40 153.9 138.10 41.42 58.58 fine sand Cc #60 fine sand #100 245.5 229.70 68.90 31.10 fine sand #200 276.6 260.80 78.22 21.78 fines PAN 349.2 333.40 100.00 0.00 silt/clay 322 306.2 91.841632 8.15836833 DESCRIPTION Silty SAND with some gravel USCS SM Prepared For: City of Renton Reviewed By: ELW 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0.0010.010.11101001000 % P A S S I N G Grain size in millimeters 12"3" 2" 1" .75" .375" #4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200 THE RILEY GROUP, INC. 17522 Bothell Way NE Bothell, WA 98011 PHONE: (425) 415-0551 FAX: (425) 415-0311 GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS ASTM D421, D422, D1140, D2487, D6913 PROJECT TITLE Family First Community Center SAMPLE ID/TYPE B-2 PROJECT NO.2018-130 SAMPLE DEPTH 2.5 Feet TECH/TEST DATE LC 5/28/2018 DATE RECEIVED 5/28/2018 WATER CONTENT (Delivered Moisture) Total Weight Of Sample Used For Sieve Corrected For Hygroscopic Moisture Wt Wet Soil & Tare (gm) (w1)278.1 Weight Of Sample (gm)255.1 Wt Dry Soil & Tare (gm) (w2)255.1 Tare Weight (gm) 15.5 Weight of Tare (gm) (w3)15.5 (W6) Total Dry Weight (gm) 239.6 Weight of Water (gm) (w4=w1-w2) 23.0 SIEVE ANALYSIS Weight of Dry Soil (gm) (w5=w2-w3) 239.6 Cumulative Moisture Content (%) (w4/w5)*100 10 Wt Ret (Wt-Tare) (%Retained)% PASS +Tare {(wt ret/w6)*100}(100-%ret) % COBBLES 0.0 12.0"15.5 0.00 0.00 100.00 cobbles % C GRAVEL 15.9 3.0"15.5 0.00 0.00 100.00 coarse gravel % F GRAVEL 7.6 2.5" coarse gravel % C SAND 8.6 2.0" coarse gravel % M SAND 18.0 1.5"15.5 0.00 0.00 100.00 coarse gravel % F SAND 27.2 1.0" coarse gravel % FINES 22.6 0.75"53.6 38.10 15.90 84.10 fine gravel % TOTAL 100.0 0.50" fine gravel 0.375"57.3 41.80 17.45 82.55 fine gravel D10 (mm)#4 71.9 56.40 23.54 76.46 coarse sand D30 (mm)#10 92.5 77.00 32.14 67.86 medium sand D60 (mm)#20 medium sand Cu #40 135.7 120.20 50.17 49.83 fine sand Cc #60 fine sand #100 182.5 167.00 69.70 30.30 fine sand #200 200.9 185.40 77.38 22.62 fines PAN 255.1 239.60 100.00 0.00 silt/clay 322 306.5 127.92154 -27.921536 DESCRIPTION Silty SAND with some gravel USCS SM Prepared For: City of Renton Reviewed By: ELW 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0.0010.010.11101001000 % P A S S I N G Grain size in millimeters 12"3" 2" 1" .75" .375" #4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200 THE RILEY GROUP, INC. 17522 Bothell Way NE Bothell, WA 98011 PHONE: (425) 415-0551 FAX: (425) 415-0311 GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS ASTM D421, D422, D1140, D2487, D6913 PROJECT TITLE Family First Community Center SAMPLE ID/TYPE B-5 PROJECT NO.2018-130 SAMPLE DEPTH 2.5 Feet TECH/TEST DATE LC 5/28/2018 DATE RECEIVED 5/28/2018 WATER CONTENT (Delivered Moisture) Total Weight Of Sample Used For Sieve Corrected For Hygroscopic Moisture Wt Wet Soil & Tare (gm) (w1)380.6 Weight Of Sample (gm)340.3 Wt Dry Soil & Tare (gm) (w2)340.3 Tare Weight (gm) 15.8 Weight of Tare (gm) (w3)15.8 (W6) Total Dry Weight (gm) 324.5 Weight of Water (gm) (w4=w1-w2) 40.3 SIEVE ANALYSIS Weight of Dry Soil (gm) (w5=w2-w3) 324.5 Cumulative Moisture Content (%) (w4/w5)*100 12 Wt Ret (Wt-Tare) (%Retained)% PASS +Tare {(wt ret/w6)*100}(100-%ret) % COBBLES 0.0 12.0"15.8 0.00 0.00 100.00 cobbles % C GRAVEL 0.0 3.0"15.8 0.00 0.00 100.00 coarse gravel % F GRAVEL 8.8 2.5" coarse gravel % C SAND 5.2 2.0" coarse gravel % M SAND 17.0 1.5"15.8 0.00 0.00 100.00 coarse gravel % F SAND 37.9 1.0" coarse gravel % FINES 31.2 0.75"15.8 0.00 0.00 100.00 fine gravel % TOTAL 100.0 0.50" fine gravel 0.375"22.3 6.50 2.00 98.00 fine gravel D10 (mm)#4 44.3 28.50 8.78 91.22 coarse sand D30 (mm)#10 61.2 45.40 13.99 86.01 medium sand D60 (mm)#20 medium sand Cu #40 116.3 100.50 30.97 69.03 fine sand Cc #60 fine sand #100 205.4 189.60 58.43 41.57 fine sand #200 239.2 223.40 68.84 31.16 fines PAN 340.3 324.50 100.00 0.00 silt/clay 322 306.2 94.360555 5.6394453 DESCRIPTION Silty SAND with trace gravel USCS SM Prepared For: City of Renton Reviewed By: ELW 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0.0010.010.11101001000 % P A S S I N G Grain size in millimeters 12"3" 2" 1" .75" .375" #4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200 THE RILEY GROUP, INC. 17522 Bothell Way NE Bothell, WA 98011 PHONE: (425) 415-0551 FAX: (425) 415-0311 GRAIN SIZE ANALYSIS ASTM D421, D422, D1140, D2487, D6913 PROJECT TITLE Family First Community Center SAMPLE ID/TYPE B-7 PROJECT NO.2018-130 SAMPLE DEPTH 5 Feet TECH/TEST DATE LC 5/28/2018 DATE RECEIVED 5/28/2018 WATER CONTENT (Delivered Moisture) Total Weight Of Sample Used For Sieve Corrected For Hygroscopic Moisture Wt Wet Soil & Tare (gm) (w1)712.1 Weight Of Sample (gm)618.1 Wt Dry Soil & Tare (gm) (w2)618.1 Tare Weight (gm) 15.7 Weight of Tare (gm) (w3)15.7 (W6) Total Dry Weight (gm) 602.4 Weight of Water (gm) (w4=w1-w2) 94.0 SIEVE ANALYSIS Weight of Dry Soil (gm) (w5=w2-w3) 602.4 Cumulative Moisture Content (%) (w4/w5)*100 16 Wt Ret (Wt-Tare) (%Retained)% PASS +Tare {(wt ret/w6)*100}(100-%ret) % COBBLES 0.0 12.0"15.7 0.00 0.00 100.00 cobbles % C GRAVEL 4.6 3.0"15.7 0.00 0.00 100.00 coarse gravel % F GRAVEL 19.5 2.5" coarse gravel % C SAND 9.1 2.0" coarse gravel % M SAND 13.6 1.5"15.7 0.00 0.00 100.00 coarse gravel % F SAND 20.6 1.0" coarse gravel % FINES 32.6 0.75"43.4 27.70 4.60 95.40 fine gravel % TOTAL 100.0 0.50" fine gravel 0.375"120.9 105.20 17.46 82.54 fine gravel D10 (mm)#4 161.1 145.40 24.14 75.86 coarse sand D30 (mm)#10 216.1 200.40 33.27 66.73 medium sand D60 (mm)#20 medium sand Cu #40 297.8 282.10 46.83 53.17 fine sand Cc #60 fine sand #100 387.2 371.50 61.67 38.33 fine sand #200 421.9 406.20 67.43 32.57 fines PAN 618.1 602.40 100.00 0.00 silt/clay 322 306.3 50.846614 49.1533865 DESCRIPTION Silty SAND with some gravel USCS SM Prepared For: City of Renton Reviewed By: ELW 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0.0010.010.11101001000 % P A S S I N G Grain size in millimeters 12"3" 2" 1" .75" .375" #4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200 Baylis Architects Family First Community Center Bid Set APPENDIX F October 20, 2021 SCHOOL DISTRICT REQUIREMENTS Appendix F - 1 APPENDIX F SCHOOL DISTRICT REQUIREMENTS SCHOOL DISTRICT REQUIREMENTS CONSTRUCTION MITIGATION PLAN Parking Availability Construction of the Project shall not reduce the number of parking stalls or otherwise materially impact school parking facilities on the Adjacent School Property during the regular School Year (ending June 17, 2020 and commencing again on September 2, 2020) Fire Lane - Hydrant If access to the Fire Lane serving the adjacent school is rendered functionally unusable or the Hydrant is inaccessible, then Contractor will (a) provide the School with alternative access sufficient to meet the needs of the School and as required by law, and (b) obtain approval from the Fire Marshal of the Renton Fire Authority regarding any closure of the Fire Lane and any temporary or permanent replacement facilities Contractor Parking – Personal Vehicles Contractor will ensure that during the 20/21 School Year (September 2, 2020 through June 23, 2021), all personnel related to construction of the Project shall park either within the limits of construction or off-site. No construction vehicles shall park in any school parking or drive areas. Driveway, Parking and School Access Contractor will ensure any construction-related work has minimal, if any, impact on School pick-up and drop-off activities at the beginning and end of each school day (Monday-Friday 8:05 – 8:35 AM and 2:45 - 3:15 PM), by ensuring, among other things, that no driveways leading into school parking areas and no sidewalks are blocked by construction-related vehicles or materials, (b) no construction-related vehicles or materials are located or stored within the lots, and (c) construction-related activity in no way impacts the ability of School buses to enter and exit the school property. Dust / Odor / Fume Control Utilize misting water sprays or other measures sufficient to reduce airborne dusting of the adjacent school and/or residential properties. Employ appropriate measures to limit fumes and odors from reaching adjacent facilities and properties. Fencing and Visual Screening Install temporary fencing sufficient to limit public access and to properly secure the project site. Employ visual screening along the north fence line. Prohibitions All tobacco, smoking and firearms are strictly prohibited anywhere on the project site and property or adjacent school property. Violators will be subject to immediate removal. Baylis Architects Family First Community Center Bid Set APPENDIX G October 20, 2021 RSD Student Calendar for 2021-2022 Appendix G - 1 APPENDIX G RSD Student Calendar for 2021-2022 Holiday, No School Professional Teacher Day, No School 90-Minute Late Start Emergency closure makeup day, if needed Parent/Teacher Conf. (early release Elem & MS only) First & Last day of school RENTON SCHOOLS STUDENT CALENDAR 2021-2022 August '21 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 September '21 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 October '21 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Sept. 1 First Day of School, Grades 1 - 12 Sept. 6 No School - Labor Day Sept. 7 First Day of School - Kindergarten Oct. 8 No School - Professional Teacher Day Oct. 14 Parent/Teacher Conf. - High Schools November '21 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 December '21 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 January '22 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Nov. 5 No School - Professional Teacher Day Nov. 11 No School - Veterans Day Nov. 18-24 Parent/Teacher Conf. - Elem early release Nov. 22 & 23 Parent/Teacher Conf. - MS early release Nov. 24 Early release - All Schools Nov. 25 & 26 No School - Thanksgiving Dec. 3 No School - Professional Teacher Day Dec. 20-31 No School - Winter Break Jan. 3 Students return from break Jan. 17 No School - MLK Jr. Day Jan. 27 Parent/Teacher Conf. - High Schools February '22 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 March '22 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 April '22 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Feb. 18 - 22 No School - Mid-Winter Break Mar. 21 No School - Professional Teacher Day Apr. 4 - 8 No School - Spring Break May '22 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 June '22 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 July '22 Su M Tu W Th F Sa 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 May 30 No School - Memorial Day June 17 Last Day of School/Early Release June 20 Juneteenth Holiday (no school) June 21-24 Emegency Closure Makeup Grading Periods Nov. 4 Elementary - End of 1st Trimester Dec. 2 MS & HS - End of 1st Trimester Mar. 18 All schools - End of 2nd Trimester June 20 All schools - End of 3rd Trimester Created 02/19/2020 - Rev. 08/11/2021